initial commit of ebook 21810HEADmain

279 files changed, 26070 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/21810-8.txt b/21810-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65c47f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7982 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the
+Island, by Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the Island
+
+
+Author: Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+
+Release Date: June 11, 2007  [eBook #21810]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES
+OF THE ISLAND***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Joe Longo and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+      file which includes the original illustrations.
+      See 21810-h.htm or 21810-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810/21810-h/21810-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810/21810-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating the remarkable
+experiences of two boys and a man, who are cast upon an island in the
+South Seas with absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the
+exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning clothing, tools
+and weapons and not only do they train nature's forces to work for them
+but they subdue and finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The
+books contain two thousand items of interest that every boy ought to
+know.
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Castaways
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+               Exploring the Island
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Mysteries of the Caverns
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Tribesmen
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+              The Capture and Pursuit
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Conquest of the Savages
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+          Adventures on Strange Islands
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+             Treasures of the Islands
+
+        _Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations.
+             60 cents per vol., postpaid._
+
+                    PUBLISHED BY
+             THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+          147 FOURTH AVENUE    NEW YORK
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS
+
+[Illustration: "_The scout from the rear now came in with a leap_"
+[See p. 27]]
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+Illustrated
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+The New York Book Company
+New York
+Copyright, 1915, by
+The New York Book Company
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+CHAPTER
+
+I. THE PECULIAR SIGNALS                         Page 15
+
+     The doleful sound. The Alma Perdita. "Cry of the Lost
+     Soul." John, Uraso and Muro listening to the signals of
+     the enemies. The night watch. Stalking. The answering
+     cry. The Konotos. Sacrificial feasts. The dark of the
+     moon. Its significance. The language of birds and
+     animals. Their meaning. Discovery of cannibals. The
+     telltale bone. Evidence of more than one tribe. Strange
+     customs. Sacrifices of ancient times. Mexican rites.
+     Superstitions. Previous history of the boys. Varney,
+     Uraso and Muro. The Professor. The wreck and adventures.
+     John's search for records, and inscriptions. Mysterious
+     happenings. Waiting for morning. The plan outlined. The
+     days of the sacrifices. Determine to prevent the killing
+     of captives. Discovery of the natives in vicinity.
+     Investigating the hills.
+
+II. THE SAVAGES ON THE HILL                     Page 26
+
+     John's instructions. John and Muro scouting. The natives
+     intercepting Uraso. Preparing to resist the attack. The
+     signaling instrument. A shot. A hurried report from the
+     scout. Sending a messenger to Muro. The puzzled natives.
+     Muro attacked. Marching east. Muro in danger. Making a
+     demonstration. The weird drums. The ambush. The approach
+     of the natives. The attempt to be friendly. The Chief's
+     refusal. The appearance of Uraso. Uraso's ruse. The
+     savages confounded. Muro surrounded. His escape. The
+     savages retreating. Muro's story. Muro's efforts to make
+     friends of the natives. Driving them from the woods. The
+     sea of the east. The runner to the landing. The peculiar
+     drums. The Marimba. The mountain deer.
+
+III. CAPTURE OF THE VILLAGE                     Page 38
+
+     The trying time at night. No selfishness in education.
+     The evening talks. Astronomy and early humanity. Savage
+     rites determined and carried out by the signs of the
+     stars. The Zodiac. Its origin. The universal
+     superstitions. A common origin. The continents. The
+     theory of a mid-Atlantean continent. The theory of the
+     joined continents. Language as a criterion of the unity
+     of the races. The pyramids. The tales of the Egyptian
+     priests. The deep sea soundings by the ship _Challenger_.
+     The beating of the weird drums in the night. Evidence of
+     the natives' belief in witch doctors. The plan of advance
+     outlined by John. The boys, accompanied by John and
+     portion of the force advancing. Nearing the village.
+     Hearing the shouting and the drums. Causes of the
+     demonstrations. A captive. At the edge of the village. A
+     curious proceeding. A huge Chief. The witch doctors.
+     Their fantastic garb. The Chief's defiance. Demands
+     return of the captured Chief. Asks John to surrender.
+     Commands the Korinos to destroy captive. They bring
+     forward Tarra, their own messenger. The warning. The
+     shot.
+
+IV. RESCUING A WHITE CAPTIVE                    Page 53
+
+     Tarra freed. When captured. The fallen witch doctor. The
+     surprise. The warning from Uraso. Exorcising the bad
+     spirits. The influence of noise on savage minds. The gun
+     silencers. The savages insist on aiding their fallen
+     witch doctor. The shot with the silencer. The awe
+     produced. John the white Korino. The terror among the
+     natives. The Chief retreats. Entering the village. The
+     Chief and people flee. The reserves come up. The sick and
+     wounded in the village. A prison stockade. Rescuing
+     prisoners. Their terrible plight. A white captive. The
+     stockade burned. Learning about the tribes on the island.
+     The messenger to the Chief. The latter's message. John's
+     bold march to see the Chief. Astounded at John's bravery.
+     John's peace pact with the Chief. The return to the
+     village. The Chief assured of the friendship of John and
+     his people. Learning about the other tribe. One sun to
+     the north. The Chief told why the white Chief was so
+     powerful. Wisdom. John's practical example to the Chief.
+
+V. RETURN OF THE NATIVES                        Page 66
+
+     Trinkets. Adornments for the natives. Gifts. The day
+     appointed for the sacrifices. John and party invited by
+     the Chief. John sends for the gifts. The _Pioneer_ at the
+     landing. Sails to the native village. The Korinos called
+     before the Chief. He demands that they produce the
+     captives for sacrifice. The Korinos learn of the
+     destruction of the stockade, and the release of the
+     captives. The Chief condemns the Korinos to take their
+     places. John secures delay. At the beach. The natives
+     gathering clams for the feast. The Korinos and their
+     caves. A sail. The boys spread the news. The signal. The
+     natives wonder at the sight of the vessel. The _Pioneer_.
+     The feast that night. Spitting meat. The natives'
+     customs. Vegetables. The drink. Arialad. The value of the
+     root. Ginseng.
+
+VI. THE SAVAGE CEREMONIALS                      Page 78
+
+     The day for the ceremonies. The native cloth weaving.
+     Dyeing. Black and red. The grotesque figures. The spears.
+     The colored streamers. The covered points. The flag idea.
+     A brilliant scheme by the boys. The band for the
+     ceremonies. A procession. The ship's band. The leader.
+     The enthusiasm in the village. The dancing natives.
+     Arranging the order of the procession. The tall man and
+     huge spear. The Korinos. The band and the flag at the
+     procession. The leader. The magnolia trees. The march to
+     the forest. The great tree on the hill. The ceremony.
+     Striking the tree. The flower at the top. How it was
+     brought down. The rite of the flower. Incineration. The
+     powder. The dance. Return of the procession.
+
+VII. SIGNIFICANCE OF NATIVE RITES               Page 88
+
+     Fasting before the feast. Great success of the ceremony.
+     The significance of the flower rites. Ancient origin of
+     rites. Explaining customs which followed the practice of
+     scalping. Head hunters. The hair token. The flower before
+     the fruit. The Druids. The ceremonia of the mistletoe.
+     The antidote. The oak as a sacred tree. The great feast
+     after the ceremony. Table implements. The Korinos. Where
+     they were imprisoned. Prepared for the sacrifice. Their
+     attempted escape. Gluttony. Habits of savages in this
+     respect. The siesta. The boys discover the escape of the
+     Korinos. The Marmozets. The tall native with the knotted
+     club. His remarkable garb. The Chief's crown. The
+     club-bearer reports the escape of the Korinos. The
+     Chief's anger. Arrests the guards. Condemns them to
+     suffer instead of the Korinos. The procession to the
+     place of sacrifice. The sacrificial altar.
+
+VIII. HYPNOTISM ON SAVAGES                      Page 100
+
+     John's suggestion to the Chief. Asks that he be made the
+     executioner. Uraso's address to the culprits. Their
+     terror. Mysticism. Hypnotic influences. Mesmerism.
+     Constant repetitions. Mystic numbers. The spell on all
+     the natives. The effect of the mesmeric influence on the
+     Chief. The rigid subjects. John the peerless Korino. The
+     threats against the witch doctors. Bringing the victims
+     to life. Amazement of the people. The Chief's address to
+     his people. The return to the village. The feast. The
+     mystic third. The dance at the end of the festival. To
+     settle the fate of the Korinos. The recovery of the
+     faculties of the white captive. His story. The identity
+     of the skeleton found on Venture Island. Identified with
+     Walter. The story which was doubted by John. The rescued
+     natives. The Maloses. Ta Babeda. The tribe to the north.
+     Distributing the gifts. The delight of the Chief. Telling
+     him about the wonders of Wonder Island. The invitation to
+     the Chief.
+
+IX. THE REMARKABLE CAVE EXPLORATIONS            Page 113
+
+     The Umbolos, to the north. The supposed cannibals.
+     Determine to visit them. Preparing for the expedition.
+     Chief Ta Babeda cautions John against the cannibal Chief
+     Rumisses. John requests permission to take the Korinos
+     with him. He consents provided John will enter the cave
+     and take them. The trip to the cave. The Chief
+     accompanies John to the cave. Superstitions about the
+     caves. Why no one but the Korinos dare enter the caves.
+     The hill near the ocean. The cove near the entrance of
+     the cave. The flashlights. Lighting the caverns.
+     Evidences of habitations. The escape of the Korinos.
+     Following the trail. The outlet to the south. Tracked to
+     the north. Uraso and Muro follow the fugitives. Their
+     flight to the cannibal tribe. John and the boys return to
+     explore the cave. A new series of caverns. A succession
+     of four chambers. A large round chamber at the end of the
+     lead. A mound in the center of the chamber. Removing the
+     material in the mound. Discovery of the copper box.
+     Peculiar character of the box.
+
+X. THE TRIBE TO THE NORTH                       Page 125
+
+     The copper box taken to the ship. News from Uraso and
+     Muro. Explaining mesmerism and hypnotism. Concentration.
+     The effect on susceptible minds. The Korinos safe with
+     the cannibal tribe. John advises Stut to sail, north for
+     twenty miles, and await their coming. The march. The
+     cinnamon tree. Cinnamon suet. Minerals. Sulphates. Copper
+     ores. Omens. All peoples believe in signs and omens. The
+     shelter for the night. How signals were made. Sighting
+     the cannibal village. Earthenware cooking utensils. Meet
+     the first natives. The dreaded Chief. A curious figure.
+     The hunchback. A smile on his face. The American
+     greeting. The surprise. A white man. Finding the Korinos.
+     The welcome to his village. The Chief told about their
+     ship. On the island fifty years. Telling John about the
+     strange things which have floated ashore from wrecked
+     ships. The Korinos assured of safety.
+
+XI. THE HUNCHBACK CHIEF                         Page 138
+
+     The Chief's house. The relics from the sea. The hunchback
+     Chief's story. His trip as a whaler. Ill treatment. Runs
+     away. Ships to China. His rudimentary education.
+     Shipwrecked on the return from China. Rescued by native
+     cannibals. Regard him with veneration. Misinterprets
+     their motives. In desperation. Asserts himself. Becomes
+     Chief of the tribe. Stops cannibal practices. His great
+     influence over the people. The _Pioneer_ arrives. Ephraim
+     Wilmar, the hunchback. His surprise at the many changes
+     during fifty years. His amazement at the telephone, the
+     cable lines, the phonograph.
+
+XII. THE CHIEF'S FAMILY                         Page 148
+
+     Ephraim's wife. The family. The gifts to Ephraim's
+     family. Delight at the cooking utensils. John tells
+     Ephraim about the treasures on the islands. Hidden
+     treasures. Learning the secrets of early humanity.
+     Archeology. The trip to the cave. The long journey. The
+     cave which had the entrances sealed by Ephraim. The
+     peculiar kinds of masonry. Entering the cave. Dogs with
+     the party. Mysterious death of the dogs. The alarm of the
+     natives. Carbonic gas. Its nature, and how tested.
+     Methods for removing it. The Humphrey Davy lamp. The
+     principle on which it is made. Designed to indicate the
+     presence of deadly gases. Explosive mixtures. How a
+     primitive safety lamp was made. Reëntering the cave. A
+     large chamber. The cross-shaped cave. A parchment. The
+     object of John's search.
+
+XIII. THE CHART AND THE CAVES                   Page 164
+
+     The map accompanying the parchment. One of the Treasure
+     caves. Remarkable carvings, and hieroglyphics. The
+     quarrel of the buccaneers. The story of the Spaniard who
+     wrote the chart. The expeditions searching for the
+     treasure. Death of all who participated. Great
+     archeological wealth. No material treasures found. How
+     Ephraim's story affected the boys. John explains why the
+     cannibals feared him. Due to their superstitions.
+     Demented people regarded by some as saints. Genius and
+     insanity. Further explorations of the island. The
+     proposed trip to Wonder Island. Ephraim invited. He and
+     his family accept. Telling Ephraim about Hutoton. The
+     curious tales that were told them about the convict
+     colony. The wonderful character of the people at Hutoton.
+     The _Pioneer_ sails. The first time on the deck of a
+     vessel for fifty-two years. Ephraim and the library. His
+     conversation with the head of the convict colony. The
+     identity of the paralyzed man not established.
+
+XIV. RESCUE ISLAND                              Page 175
+
+     The visitors at Hutoton received with rejoicing. John
+     invites the leader to accompany them to Wonder Island.
+     Retlaw, the captive, rescued, brought ashore. Caramo
+     thought he recognized him. Sailing of the _Pioneer_ for
+     Wonder Island. Calling at the Malolo village. Ta Babeda
+     agrees to accompany them to Wonder Island. Naming the
+     island Rescue. The latitude and longitude noted.
+     Introducing Ta Babeda to the cannibal Chief Ephraim. He
+     explains how the Korinos misrepresented him and his
+     people. The new world to Babeda when he stepped on board
+     the _Pioneer_. The trip to Wonder Island. The mysteries
+     on board the ship to the Chief. His inquisitive nature.
+     How he characterized electricity. Ephraim's concern for
+     his children. Approaching Enterprise River. The steamship
+     _Wonder_ in sight. The greeting. Going up the river. The
+     excitement in Unity. The crowded dock. Sutoto and his
+     bride. The flag on the _Wonder_. The curiosity of
+     Beralsea at the sight of the Banners.
+
+XV. THE RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND                 Page 187
+
+     Sutoto and the great wide world. Their trip to
+     Valparaiso. Cinda, and the latest fashions. Blakely, the
+     man of business. The boys tell him of the wonderful
+     islands. His eagerness. He tells them of the great
+     enterprises, and of the prospective new ship. The growth
+     of Unity. The tribesmen coming in. Introducing Blakely to
+     the Chiefs. They marvel at his energy. The Professor.
+     John tells him about the copper box. The new hotel. The
+     wonderful work in Unity. Agricultural pursuits. What they
+     shipped to the north. The plans for surveying the
+     islands. How the lands were apportioned. Building homes
+     on the island. Energy of the natives. Emigration pouring
+     in. Farm implements. Coffee tree planting. Raising cocoa.
+     The schools. The Korinos as teachers. Explaining the
+     trade problems to the Chief. Ephraim's desire to have his
+     children remain and attend school. The Chief also permits
+     his children to remain. Information that the paralyzed
+     man is getting well. What paralysis is. The triangle. The
+     visit of the boys to Sutoto's home. The new automobile.
+     The surprise for the boys.
+
+XVI. THE SAVAGES AT UNITY                       Page 199
+
+     Their new machines. Blakely's treat for the boys. The
+     Professor's car. John in his runabout. The automobile
+     procession. The Chief and the automobile. The cottage for
+     the Chief's family. The boys and the Professor review
+     their work. The great pleasure in their enterprises.
+     George and Harry selected to manage affairs on Venture
+     and Rescue Islands. The copper box. The skull in the
+     package. The Professor announces the return of the reason
+     of the paralytic. The word "triangle" announced by the
+     paralytic. The remarkable coincidence. Opening the copper
+     box. The triangle on the Walter letter. The skull within
+     the copper box. The cryptic signs in the box. The
+     counterpart of the skull they had found. The identical
+     inscription. The agitation of the paralytic at the sight.
+     He mentions the name of Walter. Retlaw enters and starts
+     at the sight of the skulls. Tries to escape on seeing the
+     paralytic. The latter announces his name as Clifford.
+     Harry rightly judges that _Retlaw_ is _Walter_ reversed.
+     Ephraim recognizes Clifford. Walter arrested.
+
+XVII. UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES                  Page 214
+
+     Speculations concerning Walter. Sutoto informed. The
+     mystery of their missing boat. Clifford's story. The
+     paper with the markings on the skull identified by Ta
+     Babeda. The secret in possession of Walter. The boys'
+     suggestion as to proper names for the natives. Surnames,
+     and how originated. The method adopted by the Romans. The
+     Greek names. English surnames. Clifford's condition
+     improving. Trying to identify the skeleton found on
+     Venture Island. Clifford recognizes Ephraim. Walter's
+     letter. The three islands. The triangle. The three
+     southern stars. The southern cross. The three crosses.
+     Thirty leagues. The charts of the islands.
+
+XVIII. THE STORY OF THE LETTERED SKULL          Page 224
+
+     Clifford awakes. The escape of Walter and his recapture.
+     Clifford continues his story. His effort to find the
+     treasure island. His meeting with Walter. Capture by the
+     savages. The _Juan Ferde_. Blakely and Clifford. His
+     knowledge of the skull. The finding of the boys' boat.
+     Sailing down the river. Loss of the boat. Finding his
+     companions. Sailing to Venture Island. His illness.
+     Meeting with Walter on Rescue Island. His belief that
+     Walter had hidden the chart. Walter brought in. Clifford
+     apologizes to Walter. The Sign of the Plus and V. The
+     chambers in the cave. What the inscriptions meant.
+     Surprise when Walter learns of the finding of the copper
+     box. Explains the meaning of the charts. Why there were
+     three skulls. The mysterious letter. The remarkable
+     happenings explained.
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+  The scout from the rear now came in with a leap        Frontispiece
+                                                                 PAGE
+  'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to touch him'  59
+  'It is copper,' said John                                       138
+  The old man pointed to the rocky wall                           154
+
+  Fig.  1. The Marimba.                                            36
+  Fig.  2. The Atlantean Plateau.                                  42
+  Fig.  3. The Severed Hemispheres.                                45
+  Fig.  4. Silencer: Convolute Blades.                             54
+  Fig.  5. Spitting the Roast.                                     75
+  Fig.  6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla.                            76
+  Fig.  7. The Mistletoe.                                          90
+  Fig.  8. The Jacchus.                                            95
+  Fig.  9. The Cave on Rescue Island.                             119
+  Fig. 10. Cinnamon.                                              129
+  Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk.                                       146
+  Fig. 12. Types of Masonry.                                      154
+  Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps.                                 159
+  Fig. 14. How John made the Lamp.                                160
+
+
+
+
+TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+THE PECULIAR SIGNALS
+
+
+"Do you remember, Harry, after discovering the treasure and the
+skeletons of the pirates in the cave near the Cataract, that we heard
+the doleful sound of some bird while going down the hill?"
+
+"Yes; that cry was something like it. Do you recall the name of the
+bird, George?"
+
+"It was the Alma Perdita."
+
+"I remember, now; it means the 'Cry of the Lost Soul.'"
+
+"Yes; but I don't think that came from a bird. It is more like an animal
+of some kind. Don't you hear a sound that seems to be answering it?"
+
+"It does seem so; I think John would know what animal it is; but it is
+too late to speak to him about it to-night, George."
+
+As Harry ceased speaking, the boys heard a noise, and George arose
+holding up his hand as a warning. "I think I see something, so we ought
+to call John."
+
+The boys quietly moved forward, and noted two figures moving about a
+short distance beyond. The boys crawled over to the place where John was
+sleeping, and found that the place he occupied, as well as that of
+Uraso's vacant.
+
+"That must be John and Uraso over there," remarked Harry in a whisper.
+
+They were confirmed in this on approaching the moving figures, and saw
+that both were armed, and also that they were watching another moving
+figure beyond.
+
+"Is that a bird or an animal?" asked George.
+
+"An animal," replied John, in an undertone.
+
+"That was my opinion from the first," remarked George, who turned to
+Harry with a sort of 'I told you so,' expression.
+
+"But it is a two-legged animal," responded John.
+
+"How long have you been up?" asked Harry.
+
+"More than an hour," said Uraso. "Muro is now coming back, and we shall
+know something more definite."
+
+"Then that is Muro?" asked George, in surprise.
+
+"Yes; he has been stalking the ones making that noise, and was the one
+who called our attention to it."
+
+Muro disappeared, and the peculiar cries were repeated, then, most
+startlingly, a sound, similar in character, appeared to come from a
+point very close to where they were now crouching.
+
+John turned to Uraso in astonishment. The latter did not seem at all
+perturbed, but after the second cry Uraso imitated the sound, and John
+smiled.
+
+"Muro has the exact tone now," said John.
+
+"Yes," replied Uraso, "and the cry I gave was an answer, which Uraso
+understands."
+
+In a few minutes Muro appeared, but he was not smiling. His face was
+grave, as he said: "We have come upon the terrible Konotos. I feared
+that when I heard the first cry several hours ago."
+
+"Have you been near them?" asked John.
+
+"Near enough to know that there are quite a number, and what is more,
+they are now engaged in their regular feast, and if they have any
+captives, this is the time that they will be sacrificed," said Muro.
+
+"Why do you think this is the time for that?" asked Harry.
+
+"Because it was now nearing the _dark of the moon_, as you call it, and
+that time is chosen because the Great Spirit, out of anger, is hiding
+the light."
+
+The boys now understood that this was a rite practiced by some of the
+tribes on Wonder Island, during that season of the Moon's phase.
+
+"Did you talk with them in that strange language?" asked Harry.
+
+"No; but I tried to find out the key to the language they used."
+
+"Is that their regular language?"
+
+"Oh, no! That is simply the special language which they use on certain
+occasions," answered Muro.
+
+"The savages here, as everywhere, have a sort of code language, or a
+species of wireless telegraphy, used by them only when in the presence
+of enemies," commented John.
+
+"Harry and I thought it might be the Alma Perdita, that we heard at the
+cave near Cataract."
+
+"No; but it shows the ingenuity of the savages, when I explain that
+their most favored method is to assume the cry of some bird or animal,
+and in so doing make it difficult for the enemy to distinguish the
+assumed from the real."
+
+"But on Wonder Island we had several methods of talking to each other,"
+remarked Uraso. "For instance, we would perfectly imitate the cries of a
+number of birds, and also of certain animals, and of the wood insects.
+Thus, a nightingale would mean _watchfulness_; the chirrup of a cricket
+would be the signal that the enemy was not dangerous, or that there were
+not many of them; the cry of the Lost Soul bird would indicate that
+there was great danger, and so on with the birds and animals that make
+noises."
+
+"But I have discovered another thing," remarked Muro.
+
+"And what is that?" said John.
+
+"The natives here are cannibals."
+
+"That merely confirms my knowledge of the matter," said John.
+
+The boys looked at John in amazement. How did John know there were
+cannibals on the island?
+
+"When did you learn that?" asked Harry.
+
+"Yesterday," was his reply.
+
+"What did you find that makes you believe that?"
+
+"I discovered a bone which was once part of a human body."
+
+"But how would that be any indication that the people here are
+cannibals?"
+
+"When you see a bone that has on it the unmistakable markings of human
+teeth, it is pretty safe to infer that the animal which scratched the
+bone was a cannibal."
+
+From the report of Muro it was evident that there was a large number of
+people on the island, and, if Muro's observations were correct, they now
+had some captives, or, at least, were preparing to celebrate a feast in
+which human beings were to be the victims.
+
+"That satisfies me of one thing," said Harry.
+
+"And what is that?" asked John.
+
+"Why, that there must be other tribes on the island," he answered.
+
+"Why do you infer that?"
+
+"Well, where would they get the victims?"
+
+"From their own people," answered John.
+
+"What! eat their own people?" asked George.
+
+"That is not at all strange. Many people are known to sacrifice their
+own, and among the most degraded, they are known to kill and eat their
+own."
+
+"That is the first time I have heard of such a thing."
+
+"Don't you remember that the Bible tells about Abraham about to offer up
+his own son as a sacrifice?"
+
+"Yes; but not to eat him."
+
+"Of course not; but it is not an uncommon thing for tribes in Africa to
+sell their own children for this purpose. One of the greatest
+sacrificial rites of the ancient Mexicans, was to offer up the most
+handsome youth each year, as a propitiation to the gods."
+
+"So they do not always depend on their enemies to furnish the feast?"
+
+"By no means. Many of the tribes have a superstition that if they eat a
+brave enemy it will impart to them his spirit of valor, and the fact
+that they are to have sacrifices here does not mean that there are
+various tribes on the island; but that is something we shall have to
+investigate. It is my opinion that we shall find other tribes, but that,
+I am inclined to think, depends upon the size of the island."
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The preceding volume, "Adventures Among Strange Islands," states the
+conditions under which the two boys, Harry and George, found themselves
+on a strange island, in the southern Pacific. Accompanying them were
+John L. Varney, and about sixty natives from Wonder Island, together
+with the two Chiefs Uraso and Muro.
+
+Nearly three years previously the boys, George Mayfield and Harry
+Crandall, who were members of the crew of a school-ship, the
+_Investigator_ sailed from New York, and while on board, met a
+professor, who, when the ship was blown up at sea, became their
+companion in the life boat in which they sought refuge. Together they
+finally were stranded upon an unknown island, less than a hundred miles
+from the island which was the scene of the adventures with which we are
+now concerned.
+
+On this island they discovered five or six savage tribes, from some of
+which they rescued seven of their former boy companions. Here also they
+met Mr. Varney, who had escaped from the savages. The Professor
+succeeded in reconciling all the warring tribes, and the natives were
+now engaged in agriculture, and in various other pursuits, and the boys
+had the great pleasure and satisfaction of being able to build their own
+vessel and return home. The trip to the Wonderful island, with which
+this volume deals, was for a double purpose, as will presently be
+shown.
+
+John, as Mr. Varney was familiarly known to them, was not only a well
+educated man, but a great adventurer, and had traveled all over the
+world in pursuit of scientific knowledge. He was particularly interested
+in the history of the men who first went to the western world, and
+scattered civilization to the benighted countries.
+
+Like many men of his character, he did not consider the question of
+money. He tried to acquire knowledge and information for the love of the
+quest, and in order to be of service to his fellow man, so it was purely
+by accident that he became a member of a crew that sailed for the
+southern seas at the same time that the boys left New York on their
+trip.
+
+While his companions undertook the mission solely for the sake of the
+money which might be acquired, John engaged thinking it might offer the
+means of laying bare many of the early legends and vague historical
+accounts with which that region of the South Seas abounds, and he knew
+that if any records were in existence, they could be preserved only in
+such secure places as caverns, which the Spanish buccaneers invariably
+selected as the safest places to conceal their treasures.
+
+While the boys, together with the Professor and John, had found a vast
+amount of treasure, as stated in the first six volumes containing the
+history of Wonder Island, they found not a single scrap of historical
+value, excepting a few traces, which have been referred to, and certain
+inscriptions which all pointed to the same depositary, somewhere in the
+South Seas.
+
+The last inscription was found by John, shortly before they left Wonder
+Island, and which, though its full meaning was wrapt in mystery,
+pointed, as did the others, to another island than the one on which it
+was found. What made the matter still more interesting, was the
+knowledge that some one, by the name of Walters, either had prepared the
+inscription, or had some knowledge of what it meant.
+
+This man was not known to any of the party, and what made it the more
+remarkable was the information, lately obtained, that while Walters,
+apparently, knew one of the companions who accompanied John on his
+wrecked vessel, that man did not know Walters, at least not by that
+name.
+
+These circumstances, together with numerous other incidents, which the
+boys could not understand, or unravel, made such an impression on them,
+that they were determined to devote their energies to ferret out the
+inexplicable things, and the earnestness of John was a great incentive
+in the undertaking.
+
+Up to this time the boys did not know the real motive in the mind of
+John. To them this quest on his part was to find out where the Treasure
+islands were for the material value that might be obtained.
+
+His long silence about the real design had been purposely concealed by
+him, as he felt that merely to delve into the hidden recesses of the
+islands would not be understood by them in its real sense, because as
+boys they could not appreciate that real knowledge always must be
+disassociated from the idea of material or commercial gain.
+
+It was with a great deal of anxiety that the boys waited for the morning
+sun. They had but a comparatively small force to deal with the
+situation. True, they were equipped with fire-arms, and they knew that
+the _Pioneer_, their vessel, would return within a week, still, within
+that time the large number of natives might be able to surround them,
+and unless they could get some word to the ship, and by that means
+enable their friends to send reinforcements, they would be starved out.
+
+As soon as the camp was astir there was a consultation. John had fully
+matured a plan in his mind, but it was always a pleasure, as it had been
+with the Professor, to present any complications to the boys, so that
+they could take a hand in the developments which might follow.
+
+"Harry and I have been considering the matter," said George. "We think
+it would be well to leave this place, and go back to the landing and
+wait for the _Pioneer_. We will then be ready, with reinforcements to
+meet them with more than an even chance."
+
+"But," remarked John; "are you willing to go back, and permit the devils
+here to destroy the captives they may have, or, to prevent them from
+sacrificing their own people?"
+
+The boys had not thought of this. "I know the feast days, during which
+these events will take place, will occur within the next four days,"
+added Muro.
+
+"If that is so," said Harry, "I am willing to do my share in keeping
+them from it. What do you suggest?"
+
+"We must try to get into communication with them, and if we fail then I
+am in favor of taking some stringent measures to divert them from their
+purpose," answered John.
+
+"Then you may be assured we are with you to the end," said George.
+
+"After talking with Uraso and Muro, we have agreed on a plan that may be
+successful, and it will at any rate, for the time, prevent them from
+carrying out their festival scheme." As John said this Muro appeared,
+and stated that he had discovered the arrival of at least a hundred
+natives on the hill beyond the second ravine, and that he saw smoke on
+the third hill beyond that, and was of the opinion that the village must
+not be far away.
+
+This intelligence added interest to the situation. As nearly as could be
+estimated they were at least fifteen miles from the landing place
+selected when the _Pioneer_ sailed.
+
+"Unless I am very much mistaken the ridge on which we now are is the
+backbone of the island, and I also believe that it is narrow and we
+should be able to find the sea much nearer by going east from this
+place," remarked John.
+
+"But if we do that it will be necessary for some one to go to the place
+selected for the landing of the _Pioneer_, and tell them of our plans,
+and what we have learned," said Harry.
+
+"That is what I have in mind. But before doing that we must investigate
+this portion of the island more carefully. My plan is as follows: Along
+this ridge, further to the east, is a sheltered spot, or a place where
+the rocks form a sort of cove, and which can be easily defended. If the
+natives have not reached that quarter it will make an ideal retreat for
+us, and where we can defend ourselves for an indefinite time."
+
+"But why should we take up time to find a place like that if you intend
+to take steps toward meeting the natives?"
+
+"It will be used to fall back upon."
+
+"Oh, then you intend to take measures against them at once?"
+
+"Not for the first day, at least. As soon as we are established there we
+will investigate the region to the east, and if we find the shore line
+closer on the eastern shore, we can then send a runner with a message to
+the landing place, giving them the information."
+
+The boys now understood. It was evident that it would have been bad
+policy to retreat in face of the enemy, if such he should prove to be.
+Something must be done to divert the natives for the time being. This
+would give them time to communicate with their vessel.
+
+"There is one thing that must be remembered. The savages know of our
+presence here. They are now on the alert, and we are being watched with
+the greatest vigilance. If they think there is an opportunity for fresh
+victims it will stimulate them to the greatest exertions."
+
+"I agree with you in that view," said Uraso, as John finished speaking.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+THE SAVAGES ON THE HILL
+
+
+After a hurried breakfast the party marched along the southern crest of
+the hill, keeping as much out of view of the watchers on the northern
+side as possible. The course adopted was one well calculated to deceive
+the natives, for while the main bulk of the party silently left the
+camping place, a half dozen of their companions were left behind, and
+they were particular to remain exposed at intervals, so that the
+departure of the main party would not be discovered.
+
+To those left behind, John said: "Remain here until you hear firing. In
+that event you will know that we have met them, and that fact will be
+sufficient notice that your duty here is at an end. Uraso has begged the
+privilege of being with you, and you know that is an assurance of your
+safety in any event."
+
+The place suggested by John was not over two miles distant. Muro went
+ahead with one of the most reliable men of his tribe, and at intervals
+this runner was sent back with the information that the course was
+clear.
+
+Everything pointed to the success of the scheme, until they were within
+sight of the place, when the runner came back hurriedly with the
+information that Muro had seen the first of the natives, and he felt
+certain that they were at the place selected for their fort.
+
+The party halted. The runner returned, and John sent back a messenger to
+Uraso, advising him to come forward at once. Within fifteen minutes the
+messenger returned with the startling information that the natives were
+between them and Uraso.
+
+This was, indeed, surprising. Either they were experts at stalking
+enemies, or they had been fortunate enough to bring up a force in such a
+position as to make Uraso's escape a most hazardous one.
+
+"We must make the best of the situation," said John. "Let us prepare to
+receive them, if they are determined to attack us."
+
+"But what shall we do about Uraso?" asked Harry, in some consternation.
+
+"I think Uraso knows how to take care of the situation. He is shrewd
+enough to outwit them, and if there is any danger from that quarter, he
+will let us know."
+
+"But how can he let us know if his messenger cannot get through?"
+
+John smiled, as he looked at George, and responded: "You have evidently
+forgotten that Uraso has the best signaling instrument in the world, the
+gun."
+
+"Certainly; I had forgotten that. But what shall we do if--" His voice
+was cut short by a shot from the direction of Uraso's position.
+
+"There it is," said Harry. "Two more shots!"
+
+The scout from the rear now came in on a leap. "They are coming this
+way," he hurriedly informed John.
+
+"Who are coming?" asked John.
+
+"The natives."
+
+"Lie down!" he commanded. "No one must fire until I give the command.
+Oto, go to Muro at once, and tell him to come back immediately."
+
+In the distance to the west could be seen little squads of natives
+coming directly toward them. In the different groups were fully fifteen
+men, all armed with spears and bows and arrows.
+
+"Uraso is driving them this way; I am sure of that," remarked John, as
+he watched their maneuvers.
+
+"What makes you think so?" asked George.
+
+"They are simply retreating, thinking, in all probability that they have
+met our entire band. They do not know we are here."
+
+"Brave Uraso! I hope he will not get into danger," said George. "There
+they are now; see them on the ridge to--"
+
+A shot from the direction of Muro now awoke them to action. The moment
+that sound reached the oncoming savages, they halted, and huddled
+together, evidently in confusion at the meaning of the new alarm.
+
+"Ah! they are puzzled!" Then, after a pause, he continued: "I hope Muro
+is not in trouble! I do not understand why his messenger has not
+returned."
+
+Within ten minutes of the report of the gun which has just been referred
+to, the messenger sent by John, came in and stated that it was
+impossible for him to reach Muro, as the hill directly to the east was
+alive with warriors.
+
+It was now Muro's turn to get the sympathy of the boys, and both of them
+turned to John, who still seemed unperturbed.
+
+"We will march directly to the east," he announced. "Every man must hold
+his gun ready for instant firing. Move forward quietly, as you have been
+doing. We must go to the assistance of Muro. Uraso will take care of the
+rear."
+
+They glided along the crest, directly behind John, and as they passed
+over the hill, it was evident that the natives were out in force.
+
+"I wonder whether they have captured Muro?" asked Harry.
+
+"No; he is all right. You may depend on it that he will not be taken
+without a warning shot is given."
+
+"But we heard a shot."
+
+"True; but that was the messenger."
+
+From the manner in which the natives in their front were scurrying to
+and fro, it was apparent to John's practiced mind, they had no idea of
+the approach of John and his party. It was plain that they knew of Muro,
+or, at least of some one beyond the second hill, where John inferred
+Muro must have gone, because all their energies appeared to be directed
+toward that point.
+
+"I am afraid they are after Muro, but I am sure if he finds himself in
+danger he will fire a shot to warn us. In such a situation we must
+attract their attention. I will detail the first squad to accompany me.
+All those remaining will conceal themselves, and under no circumstances
+show yourselves, or let your presence be known, unless you are attacked.
+We will go to the point beyond the two large trees, and make the
+demonstration there, thus drawing them away from Muro."
+
+John with the six men designated hurried over the intervening ground,
+just as two shots, undoubtedly from Muro, broke the quiet, and placed
+the watchers on the alert. In less than ten minutes the boys heard a
+volley to the right, and almost instantly the opposite slope was alive
+with natives running to and fro in all directions, and the most peculiar
+cries were heard, while in the distance there was a singular rhythmic
+sound as though drums were being beaten, in regular time.
+
+It sounded very weird and fascinating. The drums, if such they were, had
+different keys, and their companions did not appear to be able to give
+any information about them.
+
+While thus waiting for John to appear, the watchers were surprised to
+see the force which was between Uraso and themselves, rushing alongside
+the hill, and directly toward their place of concealment. Here was a
+problem, not contemplated by John, and the boys consulted the men with
+them.
+
+Harry said: "I will do what has always been our custom, that is first
+show ourselves, and indicate that we do not wish to be enemies, and try
+to gain their confidence."
+
+"I think some of the men should try to talk to them. It is possible that
+they may be acquainted with their language. You remember the one we
+captured could understand what Muro said," suggested George.
+
+It should be stated that after they landed on the island, four days
+previously, they had made a short excursion into the interior, where
+they were attacked by a tribe, of which one of the men was captured,
+after being wounded, and then taken by the Professor on board the
+_Pioneer_, and carried to Wonder Island.
+
+The savages came forward apparently without knowing of the existence of
+our party, and when within two hundred feet Harry, and Tarra, one of the
+most intelligent of the islanders, stepped forward, and waved their
+hands.
+
+The natives stopped in astonishment. Tarra spoke to them, but they were
+mute. Then Tarra turned to Harry, and rubbed his nose, and made a sign
+of friendship. After some hesitation the leader, who was, from all
+appearance a chief, answered, that they demanded the delivery to them of
+the wounded man. After this was interpreted Harry assured him that the
+man would be restored safe and sound, as soon as he was cured.
+
+At this information the Chief told Tarra that he lied, and that he had
+been taken for the purpose of being sacrificed. He was assured that such
+was not the case, as they did not believe in sacrificing human beings.
+
+The Chief then demanded that they leave the island at once, or they
+would kill all of them. Tarra laughed at this announcement, and his
+demeanor was such as to astound the natives. "You do not know what you
+say," said Tarra. "The white people who are with us have fire guns,
+which kill when they speak," and he held up one of them, and the boys
+were amused to see how quickly they began to waver and look about for
+shelter.
+
+"We have not come here to injure you," said Tarra. "We want to be
+friends."
+
+This appeal did not affect the Chief, but seeing his men disappear he
+silently withdrew to the north. They had scarcely gone before Uraso and
+his men appeared in the tall grass beyond, and were most heartily
+welcomed by the boys.
+
+Uraso laughed as he related their experience. He said that the band came
+up, after John and the party left, and in order to make as big a showing
+as possible he and his companions hid in the grass, being separated from
+each other twenty feet or more, thus making a line over a hundred feet
+in length.
+
+The savages did not know that the entire line was occupied only by seven
+men. To all appearances the waving of the grass at the different points
+along the line, indicated to them the presence of a large force. As a
+result they started for the east, instead of going to the south, as
+Uraso had calculated they would do, and which indeed they would have
+done had they not heard the peculiar savage-made signals of the party
+which was hunting Muro.
+
+The movement of the band in that direction drove them directly toward
+the watchers who had been left behind by John, and for them to meet a
+second party, immediately after they left Uraso, must have been a most
+astonishing thing to them.
+
+But the savages were still more confounded, when, after leaving the
+boys, they learned from the signals that a third party (the one with
+John), was still further to the east.
+
+The first evidence the boys had, that the last party had reached the
+main band of savages, was the recurrence of the same peculiar sounds
+that were heard during the night.
+
+"They are telling them that we are all over the island. They are worried
+about the situation," said Uraso. "John purposely took the men forward
+in order to create the impression that our people might be found
+everywhere."
+
+"Did you hear the shots that Muro fired?" asked George.
+
+"Yes; they were on all sides of him, undoubtedly, but I am satisfied he
+is all right now."
+
+"What makes you think so?"
+
+"For the reason that the natives are retreating, and dare not attack
+him. The last signs were those indicating danger. They were entirely
+different from those sent out last night."
+
+The peculiar drum beats ceased. Only occasionally could the plaintive
+signal cry be heard, and after waiting for more than half hour, the boys
+were delighted to see John and Muro appear on the distant hill,
+accompanied by the men who were detailed with him.
+
+Muro's story was an interesting one. He went directly east for a
+distance of nearly two miles, passing between two different parties, who
+were, of course, unaware of his presence. He sent the messenger back
+when he met the first natives, and when this messenger was on his way
+back he found the savages before him, and they made a rush which he
+stopped by the shot which John and the boys heard.
+
+After he had passed the second lot of natives he ascended the second
+hill, and beheld, far in the east, the open sea. This, he knew, was a
+matter of prime importance to them, as he felt assured it could not be
+more than five miles distant.
+
+While investigating the shore line, in order to select some particular
+marking point, by means of which they might be able to direct the
+_Pioneer_, he was surrounded by the natives. Not that they knew he was
+at that particular place, but, as he was now near the rocky headland
+which he was seeking, it occurred to him that they might be going on the
+same mission, and before he could extricate himself a small band
+intercepted him.
+
+He told them that they were friends and not enemies, and tried to win
+them over by promises of reward. For some reason or other they declined
+to treat with him, and he then had to resort to the rifle to impress
+them with the invisible power which he possessed.
+
+This was done by the two shots which the boys heard. They were of course
+awed by the explosion, and by the effect of the shots, and since it did
+not seem to bring about the desired results, he coolly marched away, and
+told them that they dared not follow him.
+
+His bravery undoubtedly proved his salvation, for they were too much
+astounded to move at his audacity. He did not go far, because he knew
+that his safety lay in keeping himself concealed, since he felt assured
+that it would not be long before John would resort to some device to
+attract their attention.
+
+His calculations were justified, for within a quarter of an hour he
+heard the volley which John ordered, and in an in creditable short space
+of time the woods were cleared of the watching natives, who,
+undoubtedly, were on the alert to capture him.
+
+"The boys went with me to the foot of the hill," said John. "I knew Muro
+would fire three shots if he were in danger. When we were half way up
+the hill, we saw the natives stealthily moving around the hill, as
+though trying to encircle the position among the rocks. It was enough to
+indicate to me that Muro was the one they were stalking.
+
+"We did not shoot at the natives, but intended it merely as a warning.
+It was sufficient, for they made for cover at once, and within ten
+minutes we heard Muro's signal, and found him safe."
+
+"But isn't that fine about the sea?" said Harry with enthusiasm.
+
+"Yes; and that means we must now send a message to the landing place.
+Muro, did you see enough of the shore line to enable you to describe
+it?" asked John.
+
+"I was not near enough to tell exactly, but I believe it is directly
+east of our landing place, but, of course, on the opposite side of the
+island," was his response.
+
+"That will be near enough. Our work is on this side of the island. As
+soon as we have quieted down a little you will hear some news," said
+John as he glanced at the boys significantly.
+
+The runner was directed to proceed to the landing place, and to remain
+there during the night. He was then to return the first thing in the
+morning, and would find the party camped at the rocky height beyond.
+
+Without waiting for further explanations, and details of experiences,
+they started for the place where they might find some shelter from the
+numerous foes, and at which place they might be able to formulate a plan
+to get into communication with the natives.
+
+It was late in the afternoon when they gained the rocky heights, and saw
+the wild nature of the surroundings.
+
+"How did you know this place was here?" asked Harry.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 1. The Marimba._]
+
+"I was here day before yesterday, and it was from this place we started
+when we heard your first guns in the battle you had with the natives,"
+was John's answer.
+
+"But how does it happen that you did not see the ocean?"
+
+"Well, are you able to see the ocean anywhere from this point?" he was
+asked.
+
+The question was a natural one, for when Muro came over the last hill to
+the south the sea was visible, but the rocky point was to the north, and
+thus out of range.
+
+"Did you hear the singular drum-like sounds this afternoon?"
+
+"They were drums," answered John, "and most peculiar ones, too. I have
+not seen the ones used by the natives here, but they have the same
+resonant sounds made by certain African tribes, and also by some South
+American savages."
+
+"What is it like?" was Harry's next question.
+
+"They are made of flat pieces of wood, very thin, laid over open-topped
+gourds. The gourds are, of course, dried, and the dryer they are, the
+more resonant the sound."
+
+"Why, that is something like the Xylophone."
+
+"Exactly so. That instrument is of savage origin. Instead of gourds some
+tribes use calabashes, which grow to enormous size, and they are highly
+prized owing to the quality of the sound they produce when used in this
+way."
+
+"But the ones we heard had different tones."
+
+"They use wooden strips of different lengths, exactly like the
+Xylophone. They are called Marimbas, balafongs and sansas, by the
+various tribes."
+
+While George, Harry and Uraso, were scouting to the north they
+unexpectedly came around the corner of a hill, from which they could see
+a beautiful valley running to the north, and directly opposite, on a
+little plateau, was a type of mountain deer, standing like a sentinel
+near the precipitous edge, while below were dozens feeding.
+
+The boys dared not shoot at them, but they remembered the place, and
+made up their minds that as soon as they had made friends of the natives
+they would have a hunt in this section.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+CAPTURE OF THE VILLAGE
+
+
+The most trying time for all adventurers and explorers, is after night
+has set in. During the daytime there is always plenty to take up one's
+attention and energies, but as the sun goes down the world seems to
+contract into a very small space, and when enemies are near the burden
+of waiting is a doubly trying one.
+
+The boys had spent many such nights. Whenever John or the Professor were
+about these hours were always enjoyed, because like all healthy boys,
+they were ever on the alert to ask questions which happened to be
+suggested by the experiences of the day.
+
+Now, it is a singular thing, that there is no selfishness in education.
+True education is charitable. Those who crave it with the most
+eagerness, are always the foremost in wishing to impart it to others.
+The honest learner does not resent the listening ear of his fellow
+pupils.
+
+Uraso and Muro, the two chiefs, who were the first to conceive the
+advantages of education at the hands of John and the Professor, were
+always on the alert at the evening meetings, whenever their duties
+permitted it, and hundreds of the natives of Wonder Island craved the
+privilege of hearing the conversations which took place on all sorts of
+topics.
+
+In Unity, the capital of Wonder Island, schools had been established
+and were flourishing, and all the children were pupils, so that within
+another generation there would be a tremendous change for the better
+among those people.
+
+There was nothing more enjoyable to the boys than to see the intense
+interest manifested by the common natives, when night came on, and they
+expected one of the treats which they knew would be in store for them.
+
+On these occasions George and Harry were usually the questioners, but
+many times they saw that some of the men seemed to desire additional
+information, and by degrees the boys encouraged them to put the
+questions, and to seek inquiries.
+
+This had a very stimulating effect. John was delighted at the spirit
+thus developed, and he gave it a still broader range by refusing
+sometimes to answer the questions, and thus inviting answers from the
+men themselves.
+
+Thus discussion developed. It taught them to begin to think for
+themselves. If men know that the ready answer is always at hand, it
+prevents the mind from expanding. The evenings, therefore, were seasons
+of enjoyment, alike to the men as well as to the boys.
+
+After they had reached the cove in the rocks, and all the dispositions
+had been made for the night, John warned the men that while the natives
+were no doubt, in consternation, the utmost care must be observed to
+prevent any surprises.
+
+The moon had not yet arisen, but there was a beautiful clear sky. The
+great Southern Cross hung in the heavens like a giant lantern. On one
+side, and on line with each other, shone the two brightest stars in the
+heavens, the first being the Dog Star Sirius, and the next in order,
+Canopus, the one white, and the other a yellowish white.
+
+Then, on the other side of the Great Cross, sparkled Antares, the
+brilliant red star, of the first magnitude, while Spica, another star
+made up a most remarkable combination of heavenly orbs.
+
+George had always been impressed with the appearance and the arrangement
+of the stars, and he was struck by the intense interest which all
+savages manifested in astronomy.
+
+"Your observations are correct," said John, when the discussion began.
+"Almost all of the savage rites, their feasts and religious ceremonials,
+have something to do with the appearances and the movements of the
+heavenly bodies."
+
+"I suppose the grouping of the stars, when they named these groups of
+the planets after animals, and the like, was done by the ancients, and
+really meant something in a religious way," ventured Harry.
+
+"It is difficult really to determine the origin of what is called the
+Zodiac. From the evidence attainable it was known to the Babylonians,
+over 2300 years before the Christian era. They divided the heavens into
+twelve parts, each cluster of stars representing some fanciful animal or
+being, such as the Lion, or the Bear, or the Dragon."
+
+"Isn't it funny that the tribes here, as well as some on Wonder Island
+have an idea that the dark moon is caused by the Great Spirit trying to
+hide it in anger?" asked George.
+
+"It is singular when it is considered that the same superstition is
+found in many, many tribes, on different continents, and it induces the
+belief that this idea had one common origin, and that the people all
+sprang from one source, or, that the different peoples worked out the
+ideas independently of each other."
+
+This statement caused considerable discussion, the natives being of the
+opinion that the idea was worked out by the different peoples and could
+not have been spread broadcast by one set of people.
+
+"Why do you think it could not have come from one race?" asked George,
+as Uraso urged.
+
+"Because," he answered, "how did the people in olden times cross the big
+ocean? Even now, people like my own, dare not venture on the sea, for
+any distance from shore."
+
+"But," said John, "the surface of the earth was not originally like it
+is now. In many places over the earth, new lands have appeared,--that
+is, they come up out of the sea, and other lands have disappeared. We
+have records of islands, and parts of continents, hundreds of times
+larger than Wonder Island, which have disappeared in a single day. One
+of those, near Japan, sank, and engulfed over 200,000 people."
+
+"You surprise me," said Muro.
+
+"Furthermore, there is pretty conclusive evidence that the continents of
+Europe and America, were once joined, or that there was an immense
+continent, called Atlantis between the eastern and western hemispheres."
+
+"I read something on that subject some time ago, in which the writer
+denied that such a thing was possible," said Harry.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau._]
+
+"I am aware of that, but there are some things which are difficult to
+explain, unless the two hemispheres were once united, or, at any rate,
+were close enough together to permit travel from one part to the other."
+
+"What evidence is there on that point?"
+
+"Well, in the first place, the root of the languages in Central America,
+and in Mexico, are the same as in the corresponding latitude in Europe
+and Africa. Then the Pyramids of Mexico are built on the same plan, and
+located, astronomically, the same as those in Egypt."
+
+"But could not the ancients have crossed the seas, and in that way given
+the same knowledge to both sections?"
+
+"There is absolutely no evidence that the ancients had vessels capable
+of traversing 2000 miles of ocean."
+
+"But the book I read said that the Western Hemisphere merely broke away
+from the main body of the land, and that is why the people here knew all
+that those in Europe had learned."
+
+"That is very plausible, and for the purpose of giving you a fair
+understanding of the matter, I make a sketch, showing (Fig. 2), the
+Atlantean theory, in which the western shores of Europe and Africa, and
+the eastern shores of North and South America are outlined, and between
+them, in dotted lines, is Atlantis, the only part of that vast continent
+now being visible being the Azore Islands, at the northern extremity."
+
+"But what evidence is there that such a continent existed? Is it only a
+theory?"
+
+"It is supported by some evidence, much of which, like the account
+which the Egyptian priests gave to Solon, would take too long to state;
+but some years ago, while Darwin was engaged in making the deep sea
+soundings in the ship _Challenger_, it was found that the bed of the
+Atlantic showed a raised plateau, where the legendary Atlantis was
+claimed to be."
+
+"But might it not be possible that the other theory could be correct,
+also,--that is, that North America merely broke away, and in breaking
+away, left Atlantis as an island?"
+
+"I do not see how it can be reconciled. In the first sketch (Fig. 2),
+note the shape of the continent of Atlantis. Now, in the next sketch
+(Fig. 3), I have brought the two continents close up to each other. The
+outlines appear similar, and it would be difficult to make them fit
+together, if Atlantis should be placed there, or left in that space,
+after the breaking apart."
+
+The discussion was closed for the night and arrangements made for sleep
+and sentry duty.
+
+Frequently during the night the beating of the singular drums was heard.
+After the entertainment of the evening both Muro and Uraso undertook
+some scouting on their own account. The boys were awake early, and then
+learned of their expeditions.
+
+Three miles north of the rocky point the main village was located. They
+had crept forward cautiously until close enough to learn that there must
+be fully five hundred inhabitants. But what was more surprising still,
+was the evidence they obtained that the tribes believed in the Hoodoos
+and the witch doctors.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres._]
+
+The boys were jubilant at the information, and John was full of smiles
+as he imparted the information. The difficulty was to get into
+communication with the natives, as their efforts of the preceding day
+did not offer much encouragement in that direction.
+
+The fact that the people on the island observed peculiar rites was
+evidence to John that they must be steeped in the superstitions that are
+a necessary part of the craft of the witch doctors, and to the boys, as
+well as to Uraso and Muro, the opportunity for John to match his
+intelligence with the crafty Krishnos, was awaited with interest.
+
+It was shown on Wonder Island, that while the people had the most
+implicit confidence in their medicine men, they were the first to cause
+their overthrow when it was shown that they maintained their superiority
+through deceit.
+
+Before nine o'clock the drums began to beat. They were plainly heard, as
+there was a slight breeze from that direction. John selected fifteen of
+the warriors, and accompanied by the boys, and Muro and Uraso, started
+for the village.
+
+"You are to remain here until you get word from us. If you should hear
+heavy firing it will be the signal for you to come on without delay. In
+such a case approach cautiously, and rush them, so as to reach us. We do
+not want to cause the loss of a single life among them, except as a last
+resort to save our own. Otherwise you are not to leave the cove. One
+must be sent to the height beyond, to keep a watch for the _Pioneer_.
+
+"If the vessel is sighted send a runner to the shore, and try to get
+into communication with it, so they may know where we are.
+
+"As soon as Tarra returns, send him forward to us without delay. He
+should be back before noon to-day." John was thus precise to deliver the
+instructions, because he did not know what their reception was likely to
+be at the village.
+
+As stated, his prime object was to prevent the sacrifice of captives, if
+such there should be, or to put off the rites which he knew would take
+place that day and the next.
+
+They marched down the hill, taking all precautions on the way, but they
+met no opposition. Beyond them was a well wooded plain, and at intervals
+they could see, in the distance, detached huts, and in many places
+evidences of crude cultivation of the soil.
+
+The huts were unoccupied, but it was evident from their appearance that
+they had been used up to that very day.
+
+"I cannot understand why no people are living here," remarked George.
+
+"They have gone to the village to attend the sacred rites," responded
+Uraso.
+
+They were now less than a mile from the village, which could be seen in
+the distance through the trees. Something unusual was taking place to
+their left, and more than a mile away. Uraso agreed to go in that
+direction, and gain the slight elevation, which might afford him an
+opportunity to discover the cause of the excitement.
+
+There was considerable shouting, and then the beating of the drums,
+which they had not heard since the early morning. Uraso was gone not to
+exceed a half hour.
+
+"They are having something unusual in that quarter. A number of natives
+have just come in, and a hundred, or more, from the village met the
+visitors. I cannot account for the demonstration," observed one of the
+boys.
+
+"It is quite likely," suggested John, "that some other tribe has come in
+to attend the ceremonies."
+
+"I do not think so, because the visitors belong to the same people who
+live in the village."
+
+John was determined to go on, and they proceeded, reaching the outlying
+portion of the village, just as the visitors, and those from the village
+were entering it from the other angle.
+
+"They have a prisoner there," said Muro. "I am sure that man in the
+first group is being conducted to the village."
+
+"Unquestionably, Muro is correct. It is plain that a party of the
+villagers have captured the man, and the excitement we heard was caused
+by that fact." And John began to speculate on the probability of the
+island containing more than the one tribe.
+
+"That man is a native, I am sure," was Uraso's observation.
+
+"That looks like Tarra," said George, in excitement.
+
+This announcement had an electrical effect on those present. If such
+should prove to be the case, what likelihood was there that he had
+delivered the message at the landing? Was he captured going, or coming.
+
+"It looks to me as though he was captured this morning," observed Harry,
+"because if he had been taken last night, on his way over, they would
+not wait until to-day to bring him in."
+
+This looked like a reasonable supposition; but they must first make sure
+that it was Tarra.
+
+"Forward march!" said John.
+
+But before they had time to go far the whole town seemed to be alive.
+From every part of the village men were running, and forming in the open
+space next the first row of huts.
+
+It was a most curious proceeding that the boys now witnessed. In the
+center of the warriors was a large man, with a curious garb. On each
+side of him were noticed men with dissimilar clothing, but bedecked with
+every sort of device, the peculiarities of which could not be
+distinguished, owing to the distance.
+
+"That large man in the middle, is the Chief, and those about him are the
+witch doctors. The Chief has brought the witch doctors so as to terrify
+and destroy us," and John laughed as he remembered some of the wiles of
+that class on Wonder Island.
+
+To the beating of the drums, the Chief marched forward, his men
+following, and closing in on his sides to afford him protection. John
+motioned Uraso and Muro to step forward, and they advanced twenty feet
+beyond the warriors, and awaited the Chief.
+
+The latter stopped when within hailing distance, and John held up a
+hand. Uraso then addressed the Chief, telling him that they came as
+friends, and not as enemies, and desired to be present at the ceremonies
+about to take place.
+
+He also recited that they came from a neighboring island, where they
+had a wonderful village, where all the people were happy, and they now
+wanted to show, their friendship by offering presents.
+
+The Chief was silent, and then said: "Why did you kill my people?"
+
+"We only defended ourselves. Your warriors were the ones who attacked
+us. We could have killed all of your warriors if we had been enemies."
+
+"You speak lies," answered the Chief. "Why did you take my warrior?"
+
+"Because he was wounded and we are making him well, and will then return
+him to you so he can tell you that what we say is true."
+
+"You are again speaking lies," he retorted. Notwithstanding the manner
+in which Uraso had steeled himself, he was visibly affected by the blunt
+manner in which the savage accused him, but he was judicious enough not
+to appear disturbed.
+
+"Ask him," said John, "what he wants us to do to prove that we are
+friends, and not enemies."
+
+The Chief, at this question, drew himself up proudly, and answered: "You
+are on my dominion, and you have no right to ask any favor from me. You
+must deliver yourself up as prisoners, and we shall then deal with you
+as we see fit."
+
+"In what way will you deal with us? Have we committed a wrong? Do you
+intend to punish us?"
+
+"You had no right to come here. Every one who does so without my
+permission, must die."
+
+"Then you expect us to surrender so you may kill us?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then our Chief tells you that he has a right to come here, and that
+you have no right to prevent it, and that if you try to kill us we will
+have the Great Spirit visit you the same as he visited your warriors the
+other day," said Uraso.
+
+The Chief was astounded at the audacity of the visitors. He could not
+understand the presumption of Uraso, and the defiant attitude of the
+little group behind him.
+
+"Then I command the Korinos to destroy you!" he shouted.
+
+Muro turned to the boys, and smiled as he said: "Do you know what he
+means? He calls them Korinos. On Wonder Island they are Krishnos. That
+seems pretty close to the same thing."
+
+Uraso held up a hand, as he said: "I have a Korino here (pointing to
+John), and he will destroy your Korinos."
+
+The witch doctors then ranged themselves in front of the Chief, and the
+latter said: "They will sacrifice your friend who came to us to-day."
+
+To the astonishment of all, Tarra was led forward, and ordered to kneel
+down. Then a great burly man, clothed in the garb so common to the
+sorceress among savage tribes, followed him with a huge knotted club.
+
+"Tell him that if he raises the club I will order the Korino to die."
+
+This was imparted, but it made no difference to the executioner. He
+stepped forward, and slowly raised the club, but before it had reached
+its highest point, a revolver in the hands of John spoke, and the savage
+dropped the club, and slowly sank to the earth.
+
+It would be impossible to describe the consternation that showed itself
+at this catastrophe.
+
+"Come here, Tarra," cried John.
+
+Tarra leaped to his feet, and with a few bounds was at Uraso's side,
+while Harry jumped forward and cut the thongs that bound his hands.
+
+The Chief was bewildered, no less than those around him. No effort was
+made to prevent Tarra from escaping. The other Korinos did not even go
+forward to the relief of their slain comrade. He lay there motionless.
+
+"I am sorry," said John. "I must have made a miscalculation, but I am
+afraid he is dead."
+
+Then one of the Korinos moved toward the fallen man. "Stop!" cried John.
+"It will be death for any one to touch him now!"
+
+Uraso hurriedly informed the Chief of this new piece of information,
+which, in reality, caused more terror than the shot itself. What species
+of sorcery was this that they dared not even touch the victim who
+disobeyed the white Korino?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+RESCUING A WHITE CAPTIVE
+
+
+"Did you deliver the message at the landing place?" asked George, after
+Tarra was freed.
+
+"No; they captured me late last night. I tried for hours to get through,
+but they were within a mile of the landing," answered Tarra.
+
+"But where have you been all this time?"
+
+"They took me north to another village."
+
+But more interesting things were now happening. The witch doctor who was
+about to go to his fallen companion, hesitated. He turned to the Chief.
+The latter merely stretched out his hand, and with an impatient gesture
+appeared to order him on.
+
+"I warn you!" said Uraso. "It will be death to touch him."
+
+If there is one thing, more than another, that is liable to add terror
+to a low order of human beings, it is noise. It may be said that the
+most intelligent are not entirely devoid of the feeling of fear at
+inexplainable noises.
+
+As an example, take the sensations produced by thunder and lightning,
+one which affects the ear, and the other the eye. During a thunderstorm,
+the feeling of fear becomes acute only when the roar is heard.
+
+In this case we know what it is that produces the reverberations; but
+even under those circumstances many people are seriously affected by it.
+A terrific explosion, of which we do not know the cause, is often the
+source of great terror.
+
+This is particularly true with all savage people. The drums referred to,
+evidence this particular feeling of awe, and the louder and more
+violent, the more intense is it to the untutored mind. It is with this
+idea in their minds that they exercise the bad spirits by driving them
+away by making great noises, a practice true of most savage tribes.
+
+When John returned to Wonder Island from the United States he had taken
+with him several of the well-known Silencers, which, when attached to
+the muzzle of a gun, will so deaden the sound that no explosion is
+heard.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 4. Silencer. Convolute Blades._]
+
+For general use, John knew that the unmuffled gun would be far more
+effective than those equipped with the new invention. Smokeless powder
+was also used in the guns which John and his company carried. The
+absence of smoke thus centers the mind of the native on the sound alone,
+and he sees the effect on the victim.
+
+To the savage the sound and the effect of the shot produce the sensation
+that there is something more than human in the discharge. It is hard for
+them to form an idea of the connection between the report and the
+mission of the bullet. It is some monster which speaks in a loud voice.
+
+But it was more than that to the islanders when they saw the witch
+doctor fall. There was a white Korino who spoke with a voice of thunder.
+They were not aware that he held something in his hand like a weapon,
+and the noise and the result of that noise stunned them.
+
+John also carried a revolver with one of the silencers. When the Korino
+turned to the Chief, and the latter, determined not to be swayed by the
+power of the white man, there was but one thing for him to do. He must
+obey. He knew that if he shrunk from the task it would be a confession
+that his power was gone.
+
+The man approached the prostrate form. "Stop!" again cried Uraso. "The
+white Korino will not again speak, but if he touches the body you will
+die!"
+
+He stood there for a moment, irresolute, and then slowly stooped down,
+and with hesitation at every motion, finally touched the figure. In the
+meantime John had leveled the revolver with the silencer, and as the man
+again rose to an erect position, and glanced at John defiantly, he
+quickly threw up his hands and fell forward across his former companion
+with a shot through his arm, as it was not John's intention to kill him
+if it could by any possibility be avoided.
+
+The white Korino had not spoken, as Uraso predicted, but the results
+were the same. The savages who were lined up on both sides of the Chief,
+began to waver. They were moving to the rear. The Korinos around the
+Chief, finally broke and fled, and when the people saw this evidence of
+fear on the part of their Wise Men, they could not be restrained.
+
+The Chief followed them hurriedly. "Now, quickly, boys, fire two rounds.
+No; not at the natives, but up in the air."
+
+The boys could not understand what John could mean by such an order, but
+they did not have an opportunity to ask the reason for it.
+
+After the volleys John turned to Muro and Uraso, and remarked: "As soon
+as the men come up you and Muro must contrive in some way to find out
+the direction that the Korinos have taken."
+
+They now saw the object of the volleys. It would bring up those of their
+party who had remained at the rocky cove. The watch for the Korinos was
+equally plain. The experience on Wonder Island showed that the witch
+doctors inhabited the caves.
+
+In the excitement they had entirely forgotten this part of their
+enterprise. They thought of the treasure. John had the treasure of the
+records in his mind. The hills all about; the limestone formations of
+the elevations were ample assurance to his mind that some caverns would
+be found; and while they might, eventually, be able to locate the
+entrances, it would be better to find out where they were by watching
+and charting the direction they took on their way to the dark places
+where they hoped to rest in fancied security.
+
+Within fifteen minutes their rear guard came into sight, rushing over
+the hills, all expectant to find an enemy in their front. Great was
+their surprise to see the village beyond, and John and his party
+bending over the two bodies, one of them moving and the other inert.
+Apparently, he and his force were unconcerned, although many savages
+were in the village, and in plain sight.
+
+An examination of the fallen men made John happy, because he feared that
+his aim had been untrue. Both had been severely wounded, and when an
+hour afterwards both men were able to move, thanks to the knowledge and
+care of John, they were carried into the village.
+
+Before this was done, however, John ordered the force to march boldly
+into the village. On the approach of the party the Chief and his
+followers, together with the women and children, hurriedly fled to the
+north.
+
+Among the huts were found a dozen or more sick and injured men and
+women, and a number of old people who were unable to be carried away.
+John went to each, and after carefully examining them, administered
+medicine.
+
+In one place they found two warriors, who had been wounded in the battle
+four days previously. These were given special attention, the villagers
+meanwhile looking on the proceeding with a feeling of awe, and wonder.
+They could not comprehend the care and treatment which was being given
+them.
+
+John's companions were most eager to render aid, and spoke to the
+patients freely, telling them that they were friends, and not enemies.
+During this investigation into every corner of the village, George and
+Harry were the most active. They found many amusing things, but the care
+of the sick and the infirm was the first duty, and they had many
+willing helpers.
+
+While thus engaged they reached a long, low thatched enclosure, so
+entirely different from the huts scattered about. There was no visible
+opening. They walked around the enclosure with more and more curiosity.
+Some of their companions from Wonder Island then drew near.
+
+"We have found it!" cried one of them.
+
+"What is it?" asked Harry.
+
+"This is the place where they keep the captives."
+
+"But how can we get into it?" asked George, then adding, "Get one of the
+hatchets, quickly."
+
+Several men ran back and opened the packages containing their equipment,
+and others followed to see the prisoners. Uraso was one of the first to
+come up, and he was soon followed by John, all in excitement over the
+news. George was the first one to get a hatchet. He soon chopped a way
+through, and Uraso was the first to crawl into the enclosure, followed
+by George.
+
+The latter staggered back, as he saw the scene before him. The enclosure
+was fully fifteen feet high, and occupied a space, probably, twenty feet
+each way. It was constructed of a species of bamboo, exceedingly hard,
+two rows of these paling being driven into the ground close together, so
+that it was impossible to see through the stockade at any point.
+
+Within there was absolutely nothing but the bare ground, and a mass of
+indescribable filth, as may be imagined. Here, lying on the earth, were
+five men, with little or no clothing, covered with dirt and vermin. Two
+of them were in fairly good condition, an evidence that they had not
+long been prisoners.
+
+[Illustration: "_'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to
+touch him'_" [See p. 52]]
+
+The other three were emaciated, and what surprised the boys most was the
+long, matted and tangled beard of one of the three. The moment John saw
+that form he turned to the boys and fairly shrieked: "This is a white
+man. Cut down that fence, so the men can be taken out, and the moment
+they are removed set fire to this place."
+
+The boys could not understand John's vehement expression.
+
+"Shall we burn the village?" asked Harry.
+
+"Oh, no! Burn only this enclosure, and don't let a vestige of it
+remain."
+
+His orders were quickly carried out. Meanwhile, not a quarter of a mile
+away, were the Chief and the owners of the village, who, upon seeing the
+smoke and the flames, appeared to be frantic. No doubt they regarded it
+as a sign that the village was doomed, but they were soon reassured by
+the time the stockade was finally consumed, and the few watchers
+reported to the Chief that nothing but the prison had been destroyed.
+
+"We have destroyed the Bastille," remarked John, "and must now take care
+of the prisoners." They found that it was indeed a white man who had
+been rescued. He was frightfully emaciated, and too weak to talk.
+
+This was also the condition of the two natives. The other two were soon
+restored, after receiving nourishment, and were ready to tell their
+story. They had been taken two weeks previously in a battle with the
+tribe to the north.
+
+Through these men they learned that there were only two tribes on the
+island, and that this was by far the largest, in point of numbers. There
+had been continual war between the two people, and the only thing which
+saved his tribe from extermination was the fact that they lived in the
+mountain regions, and were thus protected.
+
+This information was very welcome to John and the boys. The mountains
+seemed to have a fascination for them,--and then, the caves, how could
+they forget them now?
+
+For three hours the Chief and his people waited in the distance. John
+did not pay any attention to them, apparently. Shortly thereafter two of
+his men came in, dragging one of the former patients.
+
+"We saw him trying to steal away," said one of the men.
+
+"Was he going toward his people?" asked John.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then let him go, by all means, and tell him that we would be glad to
+have the Chief and his people return."
+
+The poor fellow was astonished to learn that he was free. He was as much
+surprised at this as at the care which they had bestowed to cure him. He
+passed through the village, looking about him with furtive glances, but,
+at the command of John, no one paid any attention to him.
+
+When he reached the Chief there was a long consultation, and it was
+evident that a momentous change was taking place. The Chief could be
+seen constantly glancing toward the village, and soon the self-imposed
+messenger returned and approached John.
+
+"The Chief is willing to see you, and will come to you, if you wish it."
+This was imparted to John, and the latter responded:
+
+"I will go with you."
+
+He called the two chiefs Muro and Uraso, and the boys, and told them he
+would go with the messenger to the Chief, alone, and that they should
+have no fear for him.
+
+Accompanied by the messenger, John walked boldly to the Chief, and going
+up, pressed his nose against him, in token of eternal friendship, and
+then motioned him to go back to the village.
+
+The Chief was astounded, first, at the bravery of John in thus coming to
+him, and in then vowing eternal friendship.
+
+There is something very peculiar in the characteristics of savages which
+forbids them from violating a peace pledge, or a treaty of friendship
+when entered into with the rites that they acknowledge. The most formal
+of these rites, is that of rubbing noses together.
+
+How the custom originated, is not known. It is something like the kiss,
+in so far as it is a visible token of either love, friendship, or
+esteem. It is seldom that the savage violates the pledge which is thus
+given. John knew this, and felt assured the great Chief would respect
+it.
+
+When the latter came into the village, the first sight that met his
+eyes, was the demolished stockade. He looked at it for a moment, in
+silence. Then some of the old men came forward, and began to tell him
+the wondrous tales of kindness.
+
+The Chief went to his own home, and when he saw that everything was
+untouched, and that none of the people was harmed, he could not
+understand the actions of the White Chief, and so expressed his
+astonishment to Uraso and Muro. When he was told that the latter were
+Chiefs of two tribes on Wonder Island, he was still more surprised.
+
+"Do you not fight each other?" he asked.
+
+Uraso smiled, as he answered: "Why should we fight? There is no pleasure
+in killing, or in causing suffering. We used to think about those things
+as you do."
+
+"What made you think otherwise?"
+
+"The White Chief told us it was wrong, and we have found that his words
+were true."
+
+"Where is this place where your tribe may be found?"
+
+"It is on the other side of the sea, over there," answered Uraso,
+pointing to the west.
+
+"Will it take long to get there?"
+
+"It takes only one sun, and the White Chief would be so happy to take
+you there and show you the great village, and to see the people and the
+Chiefs who live together in happiness, and to learn from the people
+themselves how they enjoy their homes, and make the many curious things
+that the White Chief has brought over for you."
+
+The Chief looked about him, and finally said: "I want to see the White
+Chief."
+
+John had purposely refrained from going to the Chief's home, but Uraso
+accompanied him at John's request, because he was the more diplomatic,
+and wielded a stronger influence than Muro, owing to his remarkable
+personality.
+
+John was glad of the opportunity, and the boys, as usual, were also
+present. The Chief's eyes followed the two boys, as they entered. He
+smiled at them, as John came up and greeted him.
+
+Uraso told John what they had talked about, and that the Chief was
+interested in his story of Wonder Island.
+
+"Our Great Chief will welcome you to Wonder Island," said John.
+
+The Chief looked at John for a moment, and then his eyes wandered to
+Uraso, as he answered: "Is there still a greater Chief? Is there a man
+more powerful than this Chief?"
+
+Uraso laughed, as did John. "Tell him," said John, "that our Chief is
+powerful, because he is wise."
+
+He did not seem to understand this, and asked for more information.
+Uraso told him that the white man did not regard the strong man as the
+greatest, but that the wisest man was always the Chief.
+
+Here was certainly a new philosophy. "But," he inquired, "then how can
+he rule his people, if he is not strong?"
+
+"The people willingly submit to his will because they know what he says
+is best for them."
+
+"But does not the Chief sometimes tell them lies, and does he not often
+deceive them?"
+
+"Yes; but when they do so then the people choose another Chief in his
+place."
+
+"And after they have killed the first Chief, and have taken another,
+and he lies, do they also kill him?"
+
+"No; they do not kill the Chiefs, but they only put others in their
+places."
+
+"Then they are not wise Chiefs?"
+
+"No; they are wise only when they do what is right."
+
+"Do what is right! What do you mean by that? How can the Chief do
+anything but right?"
+
+"Do you think," asked Uraso, "that the Chief has a right to lie or
+deceive?"
+
+"Yes, he can do that, but not his people. It is wrong for them to do
+so."
+
+"But the white man believes that it is just as wrong for the Chief to
+lie and to deceive, as for the people to do so."
+
+The Chief was silent for a long time, and John purposely permitted him
+to reflect on the new dispensation. While thus musing on the new theory,
+a woman carrying a child appeared at the door. John saw her, and,
+stepping out, took the child from her arms. She permitted it, and when
+the Chief appeared she fell down and explained that the White Chief had
+been very kind to her.
+
+John took some medicine from a small vial, and administered it, the
+Chief meanwhile looking on in astonishment. Here was a great White
+Chief, looking out for the comfort of one of the poorest of his people.
+
+Uraso knew his thoughts. This woman was the poorest and the lowest in
+the tribe, and John, without stopping to make any inquiries as to her
+condition, or position in life, had aided her and her old mother.
+
+Evidently the new doctrine was something so extraordinary, that it was
+worth investigating. Uraso saw the embarrassment in the mind of the
+Chief, and after speaking a few words, withdrew.
+
+As they left the Chief's quarters the boys roamed through the village.
+The stories of the sufferers which John had aided, the scrupulous care
+with which the men guarded the homes of the villagers while they were
+absent, had a most telling effect.
+
+The warriors from Wonder Island mingled with the villagers. It was
+singular that there was not an expression of hatred. They fraternized,
+and related stories of Wonder Island, and the people told them about
+their own island.
+
+The boys met many of their own ages, and to them they showed the
+revolvers, and the marine glasses, and then astounded them by exhibiting
+the watches which they carried.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+RETURN OF THE NATIVES
+
+
+Several of the packages left at the landing place, contained numerous
+trinkets, and articles of personal adornment, such as the natives
+adored. Brightly-colored fabrics, made at the factory on Wonder Island
+were also among the many articles, which had been intended to be used as
+presents.
+
+John was gratified to learn, an hour or two after the Chief returned,
+that the latter had given orders to the villagers to prepare a feast for
+the visitors.
+
+"But where are the Korinos?" asked George.
+
+True, they had disappeared.
+
+"Let us see John about that," responded Harry.
+
+They had some time in finding him, but later on learned that he was
+attending to the wounded, and caring for the late prisoners.
+
+"It would not be wise to speak to the Chief about that now," responded
+John. "The leaven is working well in his mind. Besides, I fear that he
+will wreak vengeance on them, and we must prevent him from killing
+them."
+
+As the boys were leaving John they saw fifty of the warriors leave the
+Chief's home, marching out of the village to the east. Muro entered the
+hut where John was staying, and announced that the Chief wished to see
+him.
+
+John continued with his work, after informing Muro that he would soon
+visit the Chief. The boys later saw John and Muro on their way to the
+"Palace," as Harry called the royal residence, and begged John's
+permission to accompany them.
+
+The Chief received them with special marks of attention, and John
+thanked him for the invitation.
+
+"This is the day which the Wise Men have appointed for the sacrifices,
+and the people are preparing the feast, in accordance with our custom.
+It is my wish that you shall be my guests, and take part in our
+ceremonies," remarked the Chief.
+
+Muro, in behalf of John, thanked him for the invitation, and assured him
+that they would gladly join in the rites. Then, he continued: "I wish to
+inform you that we left at the seashore, on the other side of the
+island, some gifts which I am desirous of presenting to you. If you will
+order some of your men to accompany my guides they will bring them
+back."
+
+The Chief's eyes lighted up with pleasure. Immediately, a detail of men
+were designated, and a half dozen of John's warriors, under the
+leadership of Muro, were requested to proceed to the landing.
+
+The people saw the company depart with the greatest wonder and
+curiosity. Muro was instructed to leave a message at the landing, and
+return with the packages as soon as possible. They reached the landing
+place within two hours, and were rejoiced to see the _Pioneer_ anchored
+not far from the shore.
+
+Stut was recognized at once, but Sutoto had remained at Wonder Island.
+The packages were taken to the _Pioneer_, and Muro informed Stut that
+they would sail around the island and land near the village. The men
+from the village were awe stricken at the sight of the vessel, and it
+was difficult to get their consent to embarking but were soon persuaded,
+when presented with some of the gifts, which Muro knew would be
+acceptable.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+An hour after the last interview in the Chief's home, the boys saw the
+warriors, who had formerly left the Chief's home, marching down the
+street of the village, and guarding the Korinos who had formed part of
+the Chief's escort earlier in the day.
+
+They were quite different now in demeanor, and the boys thought they
+looked crestfallen. They were ushered into the Chief's presence without
+any ceremony.
+
+They stood there like criminals, and felt that their doom was sealed. "I
+have sent for you," he said, "because this is the day you have selected
+for the ceremonies. Where are the prisoners to be sacrificed?"
+
+They were silent. The Chief continued: "You have told us that the Great
+Spirit asks for the sacrifices each year when the sun is leaving us, and
+when the moon is hiding behind the vail. Bring the captives so they may
+be offered up."
+
+Instantly the Korinos brightened up, and muttered a few words. The Chief
+gave an order, and they were marched out of the building. Out of
+curiosity, the boys followed. Their steps were directed to the stockade
+where the prisoners had been confined.
+
+To their dismay they saw only the ashes, and were staggered at the
+sight. They stood there with wondering eyes. The boys could see that
+this was a condition wholly unexpected by them, and it must be said that
+there was pity in the hearts of Harry and George, as the leader gave the
+order for them to return to the "Palace."
+
+As they entered John and the Chief were engaged in an animated
+conversation, and when the latter saw the Korinos, he stood up and asked
+for the victims.
+
+"They are not there!" was the only response.
+
+The Chief, not affecting to believe, told them that they were lying to
+him. They fell to their knees, but were mute.
+
+"But the Great Spirit must not be deceived. Great evil will fall upon us
+if he is not appeased. If you cannot find the victims I will do so."
+
+The Chief's voice was terrible in its anger. Outside of their dark homes
+the Korinos were subject to the Chief's will. Within the caves they knew
+no fear. The boys looked at Uraso and John. A slight smile could be seen
+on Uraso's face, as he returned the gaze of the boys; but John's face
+was immobile, and did not in the least appear to portray any concern.
+
+"It is my order that you shall be the victims, and must be offered up as
+the sacrifices to prevent the anger of the Great Spirit."
+
+This doom was pronounced in a voice so full of anger that its
+significance was instantly divined by the boys, although they could not
+understand all of the words which he uttered.
+
+They were instantly seized and bound, and being now in a helpless
+condition, were carried out of the building, and, with the most brutal
+force conveyed by the guard to a hut not far from the Palace, and
+literally thrust into the small opening which formed the entrance.
+
+"Do you suppose they will kill them?" asked Harry, as he moved to the
+side of Uraso.
+
+"I think the Chief means what he says," and Uraso gave a little smile
+that somewhat assured them.
+
+"No; I don't think John will let the Chief kill them," responded George.
+
+After the removal of the Korinos John asked whether it would be possible
+to defer the ceremonies until the following day, for the reason that he
+desired to distribute the gifts which the men were bringing from the
+landing.
+
+"If the White Chief so desires it shall be done."
+
+John manifested his pleasure at the consent thus obtained.
+
+George and Harry now wandered into every part of the village. For the
+first time they noticed that it was located at the western edge of a
+beautiful grove, thickly wooded, with tall trees.
+
+Through this they walked, and before they emerged were delighted at the
+sight of the great ocean beyond. "I wonder if John knows we are so
+near?"
+
+They ran to the beach, delighted to have an opportunity for a bath, but
+were surprised to see many along the shore with small bags.
+
+"They are searching for something," remarked Harry. "I wonder what it
+can be?"
+
+"Possibly clams. Don't you remember the first week when we lived on
+clams, after we reached Wonder Island? What delightful days we had; and
+how afraid we were of every noise, and used to start up at every new
+sound."
+
+"And wasn't it a joy to make the new things, and see every day bring new
+wonders to us after we moved to the Cataract?"
+
+"I have a love for that old home. We were so happy there. I know I am
+not happier now when we own all the treasures of the caves, than when we
+were building the water wheel, and the little shop, and tending the
+yaks," answered George, as he gazed across the sea, and thought of the
+glorious times and of their wonderful adventures.
+
+When they saw the streams of people coming from the shore they recalled
+that the people were preparing for the feast. It was remarkable that
+clams were an article of food with these people when those on the island
+they had just left, despised all fish and sea food.
+
+They wandered along the beach, fully a mile south of the village, and
+quite out of reach of the people, and were soon in the mild surf. After
+a half hour of this enjoyment they dressed, and ascended a slight
+elevation from which could be seen the character of the land along the
+sea.
+
+To the north and south of their position the land was much higher, the
+northern portion having the appearance of very high hills, if not
+mountains.
+
+"Do you think John was thinking about the caves when the guards brought
+in the Korinos?" remarked George, as they were descending the ridge.
+
+"I thought of it," answered Harry. "But I learned from Muro that he
+knew where they made their homes!"
+
+"Then he must have watched them, as John suggested!"
+
+"No; one of the men told him just before he left."
+
+"What did he say?"
+
+"That they should follow the trail to the north of the grove until they
+reached the sea."
+
+"Then Muro must know that the sea is near?"
+
+"I think he does."
+
+During the descent from the hill the ocean was visible directly to the
+east. Both, at the same instant, caught sight of a sail. They gasped in
+surprise, as they gazed at the unusual spectacle.
+
+"I would like to know who that can be," queried Harry. "Let us tell John
+and then get something so we can signal it."
+
+They rushed down the hill, and ran hurriedly through the streets of the
+village, to the surprise of the inhabitants. First going to the Chief's
+house, without finding him, they went to the improvised hospital where
+the wounded Korinos were being cared for.
+
+There John was found, together with Uraso and the Chief. "We have seen a
+sail," shouted George. "We want something to use as a signal." John
+bounded up, and Uraso rushed out and soon fished out a white cloth, and
+ran down through the grove after the boys.
+
+Three hundred feet to the right was a slight elevation, which the boys
+had noticed, and as it was devoid of trees offered the most available
+place for the signal flag. They scurried around for some pole which
+would answer, and to this the white cloth was quickly attached.
+
+John was the last to reach the signaling point. He was laughing
+immoderately, as he noticed the frantic signaling. "Where are your field
+glasses, George?"
+
+"They are in the village. I forgot about them."
+
+"If you had used them you would not be surprised at the visitor."
+
+The boys stopped signaling for a moment, and then looked at the ship.
+
+"It isn't possible that is the _Pioneer_?"
+
+"Look again, for yourself; don't you know your own work?"
+
+The ship had seen the signal, and now turned. Then they recognized the
+grand little vessel, that was almost a part of themselves, for they had
+worked many months to complete her, and had tried to put good luck and
+best wishes into every plank and spar and sail.
+
+The Chief, too, was coming. The whole village joined to welcome the
+ship, for when Uraso told the Chief that their own ship was coming, he
+could not resist the temptation to witness the arrival.
+
+Was it possible that Muro reached the landing place before the ship
+left? John thought so, but the boys doubted it. Muro left before noon,
+and it was now past five in the evening.
+
+As the vessel neared the shore the people lined up and the boys crowded
+close to the shore. They were the first to recognize Muro, to their
+great delight. He waved his hand to them, and Stut was by his side.
+
+"Good old Stut!" shouted George. "Where is Sutoto?"
+
+"In Wonder Island!" was the response.
+
+They were disappointed at this, but there was too much for them to think
+about, as the anchor was being swung, and as soon as it dropped, a boat
+was lowered from each side, and the men began to descend from the short
+ladder, while the village people watched the proceeding with silent
+wonderment.
+
+Muro was the first to touch the shore, and then came the villagers who
+were on the mission with Muro. They were the heroes to their friends.
+They knew their duty to their Chief, however, and the latter had a most
+animated conversation with them, and particularly so after he had
+noticed the array of trinkets which Muro had bestowed on them.
+
+While this was going on the boats returned and bundles and packages were
+brought out of the ship and deposited in the boats. After they had been
+taken from the boats, John said: "With your permission I will take these
+things to your house."
+
+The Chief assented, and on his orders the men in the village gathered up
+the assortment of gifts and the procession filed along the path to the
+village.
+
+The feast that evening reminded them of the welcome which the Chief
+Beralsea extended to them the second night after their arrival at
+Venture Island. Besides the clams referred to there was an abundance of
+fish, several varieties, besides game and meats, and the only thing
+which they seemed to lack, or which was rather meager in quantity, was
+fruit.
+
+Like all natives of these islands, they were experts at spitting the
+meats. The most delicious was a species of ground hog, that the boys
+frequently caught on Wonder Island. The boys had watched the method of
+roasting these animals.
+
+A strong green tapering stick, about four feet long was selected, and
+the bark was peeled off, so as to give it a smooth surface. The small
+end of this was sharpened, and driven through the animal, from end to
+end, so that it was held firmly on the stick, midway between its ends.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast._]
+
+Two forked posts were then driven into the ground, about three feet
+apart, and the stick laid in the forks. A fire of wood, previously built
+between the posts was permitted to accumulate a quantity of coal, and
+when a hot fire was thus generated, one of the natives would
+continuously rotate the stick, so that the heat affected all sides
+evenly, and the result would be the most tempting roast imaginable. This
+is a practice common with savages all over the world, varying only in
+the details of the preparations.
+
+All the vegetables were roasted, in hot coals. In this respect their
+custom was different from the practice followed in Venture Island, for
+there they knew how to make stews. Here they knew nothing about pottery,
+but like all islanders in the South Seas, the wrecks would, occasionally
+cast cooking utensils, like pots, or pans, ashore, and these
+highly-prized articles were sure to be taken by the Chiefs, or by the
+Krishnos themselves, where they could get them by stealth.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla._]
+
+Unlike the natives of Wonder Island, they had potatoes, the wild variety
+which the boys found the second day after they were cast ashore. The
+Taro root, that vegetable which grows in the greatest abundance in every
+section south of the Equator, to the lower border of the south temperate
+zone, was the chief dish, and was also roasted in like manner.
+
+What surprised them most was a drink that pleased John, who at once
+recognized its origin. They called it Arialad, and George declared it
+was a fine quality of Sarsaparilla.
+
+"You are correct," said John. "Its real botanical name is Arialace. It
+belongs to the same family as spikenard and ginseng. Very few natives
+know of its value. It is both a medicine and a refreshing drink."
+
+"If it grows in abundance here it would be a good thing to gather for
+export," observed Harry.
+
+"A boat load of the roots would be worth a fortune," rejoined John.
+
+There was the utmost good fellowship among all present. In accordance
+with the custom among most of these people the women did not partake of
+the food in the presence of the men. They acted as the servants in
+serving the food, but the men prepared the meal, a sort of well-balanced
+family arrangement, as George observed.
+
+"But who washes the dishes?" asked Harry with a laugh, in which all
+joined.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+THE SAVAGE CEREMONIALS
+
+
+The next day was the one appointed for the ceremonies. The boys were
+expectant, because during all their experiences in the islands, this was
+the first time they had an opportunity to witness one of these
+spectacles.
+
+It was noticed that no preparations were made for a morning meal by the
+natives. All were specially garbed for the occasion, if the colored
+decorations counted for anything in the way of additional clothing.
+
+They were adept in the art of weaving cloth, which was made in small
+sections, and sewn together, similar to the practice in most of these
+primitive countries. They were not altogether devoid of knowledge
+pertaining to dyes, the most frequent being blue, which John soon
+ascertained came from some copper deposits.
+
+The Madder plant was the most common on the island, and this afforded a
+red color, the most lasting of all dyes, and the most generally in use
+throughout the civilized world, until the aniline dyes took its place.
+
+For black they resorted to the common method of using carbon which is
+the stock material in our own country. This was produced by them from
+burnt wood, and not from any of the coal products.
+
+Their faces were painted a hideous red and blue, principally in the
+nature of great zig-zag stripes, and the exposed parts, of the bodies
+were of diverse figures, some of them really artistic. The preparation
+of these personal decorations consumed the greater portion of the night,
+as the boys afterwards learned.
+
+When they emerged from their hut in the morning, and saw the grotesque
+figures all about the village, they could hardly repress a smile; but as
+every one was smiling and happy, they did not have to make any
+pretentions, but smiled and laughed as the men and women circled about,
+because they couldn't help themselves.
+
+The women were not so gaudily attired as the men. Their decorations were
+expended on clothing, as it was not considered good form to decorate
+their bodies.
+
+All the men carried spears, and many of them were wicked-looking
+instruments. What surprised them was the fact that all the spear-points
+were now covered over, or bound up by colored material, forming a sort
+of sphere, to which three colored streamers were attached, one white,
+one red and the other blue.
+
+"My, but they are patriotic!" remarked George, as he saw the design and
+the streamers.
+
+John smiled, as he observed them. "But do you notice that the point of
+the spear is covered?"
+
+"I was about to ask the meaning of that," said Harry.
+
+"This is the day of feasting and of sacrifices. The covered point
+indicates that there is peace; and that no one can commit an injury. I
+imagine the points will be uncovered quickly enough the moment they are
+ready for the sacrifices."
+
+"I am more interested in the fact that they use the American colors. I
+wish we had one of the flags here. That idea has just struck me as being
+the proper thing." And George danced about at the scheme.
+
+Harry was just as much affected now. "Why not consult Uraso and Muro,
+and bring over the big flag from the ship?"
+
+John laughed at the idea. "A brilliant idea. The flag will be a big
+attraction, but I warn you that if you get it I shall have to insist
+that you must head the procession with it."
+
+"Are we going to have a procession?"
+
+"I believe that is the first thing on the list."
+
+"But where is the procession going? Is it the custom to march along the
+principal streets and out along the boulevards?"
+
+This idea was so laughable to Harry and Uraso and Muro, that they had a
+fit of laughter. The two Chiefs were just like boys, and entered in to
+the spirit of the undertaking with a vim that pleased the boys.
+
+They fairly flew to the landing, and manned the boat. "We have come for
+the flag," announced George, as Stut was looking on the excitable boys.
+
+"Why not take both of them?" responded Stut.
+
+"Certainly," answered Harry. "I had forgotten about the other. And while
+we are about it, why not have the band come along?"
+
+This was answered by a shout. One of the new acquirements of the natives
+of Wonder Island, was music, and when the boys returned from the States
+they brought along several fine sets of band instruments, one set of
+which was always on the vessel, and was used for evening concerts.
+
+"Where is Mano?" asked Harry.
+
+Mano was the leader of the ship's band, but he was not to be found.
+
+"John sent for Mano an hour ago, and he is now in the village."
+
+"Then send for him at once. Tell him he must be here as soon as John is
+through with him," said George.
+
+While the flags were being wrapped up one of the small boats came from
+the shore, and Mano stepped out.
+
+Harry ran up and said: "Get the boys and the instruments ready. You must
+play for us to-day during the ceremonies."
+
+Mano smiled as he answered: "John told me about it last night, and I
+went over merely to find out what music I should take."
+
+"So John tried to steal a march on us?" remarked Harry. "How soon will
+you be ready?"
+
+"We are all ready now. I was told at the Chief's house that the
+procession would start in a half hour."
+
+When the flags were brought out it was Mano's time to stare. "I think,"
+he said, "that will surprise John, but the idea is a proper one."
+
+The band comprised nine musicians and the two drummers. The moment they
+landed the band formed four abreast, and directly behind were the two
+boys with the Stars and Stripes. To the tune of "Columbia, the Gem of
+the Ocean," they marched straight to the home of the Chief.
+
+The crashing music, and the magnificent flags brought pandemonium to
+that savage village. Nothing like it had ever been known before. Long
+before the band reached the Palace all the inhabitants of the town had
+rushed down, and at Uraso's and Muro's suggestion the people followed
+behind, and thus made a procession which was the most unique that it was
+possible to describe.
+
+"That scheme will make a success of the ceremonies," remarked George,
+almost too full for utterance. "Why the thing wouldn't be a success
+without the flags and the music."
+
+"I wonder how the thing will fit in when it comes to the sacrifices this
+afternoon? I imagine the Korinos ought to feel like dying when they are
+to have such an unusual funeral procession?" Harry said this with a bit
+of irony, as he turned to George and grinned at the idea.
+
+John knew what was coming, but the Chief didn't. He and John came out
+together, when they heard the music. The boys, behind the band could not
+see the great sights that were taking place in the rear, but John stood
+there beside the big Chief, and was simply convulsed with laughter.
+
+The natives were not walking. They were dancing, and the Chief, at first
+astounded at the music, and at the waving flags, soon joined John in
+laughter as they witnessed this remarkable scene.
+
+Uraso had taken part in numerous celebrations at Unity, and knew what
+disposition to make of the people when they arrived. The band marched
+past, and John raised his hand in the form of a salutation, and the
+Chief noticing this imitated him.
+
+"The old fellow is learning rapidly how to do the correct thing,"
+suggested Harry.
+
+"Yes; John will have him in a swallow-tail coat before night."
+
+The band marched past, and then turned around and came back, and as fast
+as the people came up Uraso and Muro directed them where to stand, so
+that when the band stopped they formed a large semi-circle facing the
+Chief and John.
+
+The boys walked forward so they stood with the flags midway between the
+band and the Chief. The latter motioned for the band to continue. John
+understood, and a new tune was struck up. The Chief was fascinated. When
+that tune was concluded, the Chief wanted another, quite forgetting the
+importance of the ceremonial rites.
+
+While the last tune was being played the boys saw a tall man, with a
+huge spear, and a face most hideously painted. His body had
+characteristic stripes, entirely unlike those of the other people.
+Behind him marched the Korinos, without a sign or mark on them different
+from the costumes worn by them on the preceding day.
+
+As they filed along behind the leader, the boys noticed that the first
+one carried a thong-like rope: the second a knife; the third a sort of
+vessel, and the fourth a pair of short sticks.
+
+The people paid no attention to them, while the band was playing, but
+when it ceased, it was evident that they shrunk back from these dreaded
+men.
+
+John beckoned Uraso and Muro to come forward, and the Chief welcomed
+them. "As chiefs of your tribes you should be here with us. The White
+Chief tells me that in his country the band and the flag always go
+first, and I have asked him to tell us how we should march to the
+forest."
+
+John then told those present how the procession should form. The band
+was marched to the front, and George, who had the small flag, was placed
+directly behind the band. Then the Chief, with Uraso and Muro on either
+side, and directly behind them Harry took position with the large flag.
+
+After the flag the Korinos, without their tall leader, however, were
+placed in line. John then motioned to the people to take their places
+following the Korinos, and the moment the column was thus formed the
+band struck up a lively marching tune, and John accompanied by the tall
+fantastic leader, went ahead of the band.
+
+The leader knew, of course, where the procession must go, and he thus
+wisely made the arrangement for the occasion. The procession wended its
+way directly to the north, along a well-beaten path, and after ascending
+a hill, turned to the left, and entered a sort of grove.
+
+The boys were delighted to notice the magnificent Magnolia trees in full
+bloom, the flowers of which surpassed anything they had ever seen, and
+the perfume was almost overpowering in its intensity.
+
+To the boys this peculiar procession had something mysterious about it.
+Neither John, nor the two Chiefs had any idea of its significance. John
+directed a questioning look toward the articles which the Korinos
+carried.
+
+When the crest of the hill was reached they made one complete circle,
+and the head of the column stopped before the most magnificent magnolia
+tree in the grove. The leader marched along the line and the people soon
+formed themselves into a circle with the tree in the center.
+
+All chatter had stopped. While ascending the hill, and up to this time,
+there was a never ending clatter of voices; but now all were quiet, and
+gazed to the top of the tree. The tall leader, at the nod of the Chief
+came forward and approached the tree, and with the long spear struck it
+three times, and then turned to the Korinos, who had now followed him.
+
+Then, he turned again, and struck the tree three times more, and this
+was repeated the third time. After stepping back he raised the spear,
+and held it over the head of the Korino who carried the rope. The latter
+stepped to the tree and with a dextrous throw sent a coil of rope over
+the first limb and caught the other end of it.
+
+The spear was then laid over the head of the man with the knife, and he
+sprang forward grasping the rope, and when the spear was poised on high,
+he gracefully crept hand over hand up the rope.
+
+The instant the man's hand seized the rope the people fell to the ground
+and covered their faces. The boys did not want to lose this part of the
+ceremony, you may be sure, but they tried to observe the rites.
+
+A side glance was sufficient to assure them that the Chief did not
+kneel, nor did either John, Uraso or Muro; but they were privileged
+characters, so the boys went through the ceremony by peering through
+their fingers, and at the same time trying to find out whether there
+were not others trying to do the same.
+
+The man went up and up, and soon emerged from the last spare branches at
+the top, until his face was near the great white flower which grew on
+the tip.
+
+"I think that is the flower all the people were looking at," said George
+in a whisper.
+
+The man raised the knife, and with one slash severed the stem. Then,
+raising himself up to his full height, so his body could be plainly
+seen, he waved the flower about his head three times, and the leader at
+the base of the tree again struck the trunk three times.
+
+Immediately the people arose and placed their hands before them exactly
+like a bather on a perch about to dive, and with the palms of the hands
+thus placed against each other, the arms were raised to a vertical
+position, and lowered three times.
+
+With hands still in their lowered position, and eyes cast on the ground,
+the Korino in the tree slowly descended, and the one who threw the rope
+quickly detached it from the tree.
+
+The spear was then placed over the head of the man with the sticks. He
+crossed his legs and sat down, and with an exceedingly rapid motion,
+soon caused smoke to arise, and then a tiny flame appeared.
+
+"Why didn't they tell us about it, and we could have let them use some
+of our matches," said George dryly, as Harry made a great show of
+indignation at the irrelevant remark.
+
+A fire was quickly kindled, and the man with the bowl knelt down, after
+fixing two stones on opposite sides of the fire. From a small receptacle
+he took a powder, and dropped it into the bowl, and after holding the
+flower aloft, the man who took it from the tree, dropped it into the
+smoking bowl.
+
+Instantly the people resumed their natural poses, and began to dance.
+The Chief spoke a word to Uraso, and the band struck up a lively tune.
+Then, to the ringing blare of the band, and the shrieks and shouts of
+the people the dance began. It was one continuous whirl, and many of
+them became frenzied.
+
+The Chief himself participated in this part of the ceremony, and swung
+himself around and around in a giddy whirl. During all this time each
+fellow was for himself. They did not have partners as in the civilized
+dances.
+
+The tangoing was an individual effort, and each enjoyed it in his own
+way, but they all kept step to the music, showing the savage
+characteristic of being able to observe rhythmic effects.
+
+The boys caught the spirit of the occasion, and joined in the wild
+swirl. Uraso and Muro were at it, and the sole spectator was John, who
+said that he felt too old to learn the new steps.
+
+When the band stopped the people rested, but there was no disposition to
+break up the merry party, and when the music again struck up the whole
+scene was acted over again. It was noon before the grand ball ceased.
+
+Then, at a sign from the Chief the procession reformed, and went back
+over the trail, the people dancing all the way, and, apparently, without
+exhibiting any signs of weariness, although it must be stated that the
+band was nearing collapse, when the people dispersed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+SIGNIFICANCE OF NATIVE RITES
+
+
+As heretofore stated, there had been no morning meal, and the dancing
+must have been a trying task, under those conditions.
+
+"It would have been much better if we had something to eat before this
+part of the ceremony. I am so hungry I could eat anything," remarked
+George, as they neared the village.
+
+"The natives do not think so. That is part of the ceremony. It must be
+carried out before a meal is taken," answered John, "or it will not have
+the proper effect."
+
+Uraso overheard the remark, and he added: "The Chief said they had never
+known such a scene as took place to-day, and that it was not a part of
+the regular ceremony to have the dancing at that time, but that the
+wonderful music seemed to win every one."
+
+"I heard him say it was the first time in years that he had danced. How
+he enjoyed it," remarked Muro. "I admit that it was the best dance I had
+since the boys got back. That was a big time at Unity when you
+returned."
+
+"I think," said Harry, "that was the queerest performance I ever heard
+of. What a foolish thing to cut a flower from the top of a tree, and go
+through all that ceremony, using Old Fantastic with his flourishing
+spear to conduct the ridiculous rites."
+
+"Do you think it is any more foolish than many things which civilized
+people do?" asked John.
+
+Harry mused a while, and then continued: "Probably not, when I think of
+it, but with us the ceremonies really mean something; at least, it seems
+to me that they are intended to."
+
+"Yes, and that is generally so with the native rites. Sometimes the
+origin is rather obscure, but everything of this character comes from
+something in the past, of which it is symbolic. Spencer, in his work on
+'Evolutions of Ceremonial Forms of Government,' recites a curious
+instance of this, where he shows that the habit of stroking the mustache
+is a survival of scalping."
+
+The boys laughed. "That must be pretty well far-fetched," responded
+George.
+
+"Do you think so?" answered John. "He reasons it in this way. It was,
+formerly the custom, among most savage tribes, to take the hair of
+victims, to be used as personal adornment, or to indicate the valor of
+the warrior. Among some tribes in the Philippines and also in the
+interior of Africa, the custom is to take the head of an enemy."
+
+"Do you mean the Head hunters?"
+
+"Yes; you have probably heard a great deal about them since we acquired
+the Philippines. When men began to get a little higher in the scale of
+civilization, the victor required some token of submission from the
+conquered, so the latter plucked a wisp of hair from his head and
+presented it to indicate defeat. During the seventeenth century it was
+the rule of the Spanish Court that all inferiors, in addressing
+superiors, must stroke the mustache, and this came from the old idea of
+the hair token."
+
+"Do you suppose that the taking of the flower has any particular
+significance?"
+
+"Most assuredly! There must be a flower before there can be fruit. This
+is the beginning of the season or the beginning of the year, to these
+people, and the largest-flower, at the top of the greatest tree is the
+one taken while it is at full bloom, and incinerated."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 7. The Mistletoe._]
+
+"Is that what they did in that bowl-shaped vessel?"
+
+"Yes, and I imagine they will use the ashes in some part of their
+rites."
+
+"Did you ever know of other tribes that do anything like that?"
+
+"Yes; very many; in fact most savage tribes have some sort of rites
+which they scrupulously follow out as a religious duty. Ancient history
+records many such practices in detail. Thus, the Druids, a peculiar
+class, or order of priests, which existed among the Celtic races,
+attributed a sacred or mystic character to plants, and venerated the oak
+tree."
+
+"I have read that they offered up human sacrifices," said Harry.
+
+"Yes; I was coming to that. But do you know that they regarded the
+mistletoe as an antidote for all poisons and a cure for all diseases? At
+certain seasons in the year it would be gathered, and with the greatest
+ceremonies one of the priests would ascend the tree on which it was
+found, and cut it off with a golden knife."
+
+"But is the mistletoe found on the Oak?"
+
+"Yes; but it grows more frequently on the Apple tree. The seeds are
+distributed by birds, and owing to the fact that it is found so
+infrequently on the oak, the Druids considered it peculiarly sacred on
+that account."
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The delicious odor of the roasted food, which met the people on their
+return, was a compensation for the lack of the morning breakfast. The
+Chief had invited John, Uraso, Muro, the two boys, and Stut, to
+accompany him to his home.
+
+There in the open court, if it might so be called, were the viands in
+the greatest profusion. They were surprised to see that at each place
+was a couch, and before every visitor was laid a bountiful supply of
+food. In all their wanderings George and Harry never ate with a greater
+relish than on the present occasion.
+
+The meal the previous day, was not at all comparable to this. It would
+have vied with many a meal set before our civilized gastronomies. The
+table implements, it is true, were not found in profusion, but the
+wooden forks, or prongs were good substitutes for the more refined
+articles, and for plates hollowed bark sections were found serviceable.
+
+The Sarsaparilla drink was the most favored liquid. "I wish we had some
+ice for it," suggested Harry. "It will be a good thing to bring over
+some ice for the Chief. I think he would enjoy it."
+
+"By the way, Harry, did you see what they did with the Korinos?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Shut them up in that dark hole back of the house."
+
+"I wonder if they have given them anything to eat?"
+
+"Oh, no!" said Muro. "They are to be sacrificed this afternoon, and it
+wouldn't do to feed them."
+
+"Poor fellows!" remarked George, as he gazed vacantly before him, lost
+in contemplation.
+
+"Well, they have been found out, and will now be dealt with in
+accordance with their law."
+
+"Was that tall fellow one of them?"
+
+"Yes; he is the principal chief of the Korinos. Do you know they tried
+to escape last night?" exclaimed Uraso.
+
+"Is that so? Where could they go in safety on this island?"
+
+"To their caves, of course," remarked Harry.
+
+"Yes," added Uraso, "the Chief has no authority under ground."
+
+The people gorged; so did the Chief. The meal was a course dinner, at
+least so far as the time it took to get through with all the dishes, and
+the boys smiled as they saw the Chief slowly sink down, and pass off
+into oblivion.
+
+John sat there, gazing on him, and slowly nodding his head at the
+spectacle. He did not evince disgust, and when George spoke to him about
+this peculiar savage trait, he remarked: "Is he any worse than many
+people in our own country, who do the same thing? This is not gluttony
+with the savage; he knows no better. This is one of the great enjoyments
+of life which the savage knows. Teach him something better and he will
+respond."
+
+"When you stop to think of it," replied George, "I really don't see why
+it is such an awful thing to eat until you are stuffed to sleepiness?"
+
+"The real argument against it is on sanitary grounds," suggested John.
+"We regard gluttony as bad because it is a selfish exhibition of taste
+and habits, and in this I quite agree; but among savages the custom of
+regularity in habits is not one of their understood laws. I have known
+North American Indians who could each devour from six to eight pounds of
+beef, and drink two quarts of coffee at one sitting. But those men would
+not eat another meal for three days."
+
+During the meal hour there was a continual round of merriment, and every
+one was enjoying himself to the fullest extent. But now the hum of
+voices ended. The boys were surprised.
+
+"They are taking their noon-day siestas," said John, laughing.
+
+The boys arose and passed out. It was true, indeed. The men, and women
+too, were taking naps everywhere, the grotesque figures lying where they
+had eaten their food.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 8. The Jacchus._]
+
+They made a tour. No one appeared to take any notice of them, as they
+passed through the open places between the huts, because all of the food
+was eaten in the open, and not within the huts. The village looked like
+one immense picnic ground.
+
+As they were returning toward the Chief's house they caught sight of the
+hut in which the Korinos were confined. To their astonishment two of
+them were crawling out the enclosure, and the leader was particularly
+noticeable, peering from the side of the hut.
+
+"Shall we give the alarm?" asked Harry.
+
+"No, no! See John; he will know what to do."
+
+As they passed the hut the guards lay in blissful sleep, and seeing this
+the boys rushed in and excitedly told John of the jail delivery and the
+advisability of giving the alarm.
+
+He held up his hand, in caution, as he smiled at the announcement. "Do
+you want the poor fellows to be sacrificed?"
+
+"By no means."
+
+"Then let them go. Possibly the Chief may find some way to get them
+back."
+
+Two hours later the village took on another aspect. It was now about
+five o'clock in the afternoon, but in the meantime boy-like they had
+investigated every part of the surrounding scenery, being particularly
+interested in the monkeys which were seen in the trees everywhere.
+
+The most amusing to the boys was a small animal that had a "beard all
+around his face," as George expressed it. It was small, hardly exceeding
+a foot in height, a sort of olive-gray color, and a round tail twice the
+length of the body.
+
+"I think I know what you have reference to," suggested John, when
+appealed to. "It is the Jacchus, and is related to the Marmozets and the
+Tamarins. They are very active, like squirrels, and live on nuts, seeds,
+roots and fruit."
+
+The Chief awakened as the boys entered, and within the next half hour
+was ready for the continuance of the festival.
+
+"I should like to know what the next thing is on the programme? This is
+a little inconvenient, not knowing just what is going to take place,"
+was George's observation.
+
+"John will know if any one does, but I suppose he is too busy now with
+his Royal Highness," answered Harry with a laugh.
+
+But the boys were not kept long in suspense. The natives understood, as
+it appeared, for they were soon congregated around the Palace, and now
+for the first time the boys noticed a large, imposing-looking native,
+who carried an immense knotted club. To satisfy the reader's curiosity,
+it may be well to describe him. He wore a loin cloth, made of the skins
+of the small animals which were found all over the island, and, to all
+appearances, at least a half dozen different kinds of pelts were used to
+make up the garment, the ends, or corners of which hung down in points
+to form a fringe.
+
+At his ankles were two huge bands, made of cloth, and plentifully
+decorated with spangles of shells, and rows of nuts, strung on cords,
+like beads. Around his neck and trailing down the back was a collar of
+interwoven leaves, very artistically arranged, if judged from the
+viewpoint of savage decorations.
+
+The head dress was unique, being made up of a band of coarsely-woven
+cloth, literally covered with large fish scales, and a pyramidal
+structure was fastened to this band, and extended up beyond the crown
+for a foot, or more. At its apex was a mass of streamers, which
+fluttered around as the breeze floated by.
+
+The weapon was fully five feet long, the head of the club, for such it
+was, terminated in a gnarled knot, bristling with small points. This
+the boys recognized to be somewhat similar to the wicked thing that was
+carried by the Korino when he sought to slay Tarra.
+
+The Chief was also differently attired. He was literally covered with
+clothing, the different parts being dyed with various colors without any
+regard to harmony, or design. Like all the others he wore no foot
+covering, but had bare feet.
+
+The crown was also a cloth band, but this was surrounded by
+vertically-arranged thorns, huge things that showed their bristling
+points, and wound, or rather braided around them, were garlands of human
+hair, of different hues.
+
+The Royal wand was an immense black staff, fully two inches thick, and
+six feet long, one end of which was pointed, the other end terminating
+within a large calabash. This wand he held with the pointed end upward.
+
+When he appeared at the doorway the people fell down on their faces, and
+after a few words all arose, and the man with the club turned toward the
+hut where the Korinos were confined. Four of the largest warriors
+accompanied him, while the people looked on in expectancy.
+
+"The fun will now begin," whispered Harry, and it surely did. The club
+bearer returned with a troubled look, and addressed the Chief.
+
+The people soon learned of what had taken place, and the commotion was
+evident. They speedily lost all semblance of order, and began to run to
+and fro. The scowl on the face of the Chief was terrible, nor did he in
+the least attempt to conceal his anger.
+
+With a vehemence that caused the crowd to shiver, he gave a command, and
+in a moment three men were brought forward, almost in a state of
+collapse with terror written in their countenances. They were the
+unfortunate guards, as the boys quickly saw.
+
+They were unable to answer the indictment of the Chief, because the
+escape had been as much of a surprise to them as to the Chief. Uraso and
+Muro were quick to recognize the situation, and they informed John of
+the progress of the conversation.
+
+The negligent guards had been condemned to take the places of the
+Korinos, as sacrifices. The rites demanded some victims, and the boys
+now saw that the escape of the Korinos would not avoid the carrying out
+of the bloody rites.
+
+The new, victims-to-be were firmly bound, and placed in the center of
+the crowd, and, strangely enough, it was now noticed that the people
+expressed the same degree of hatred to the poor unfortunates that they
+had manifested toward the Korinos an hour before.
+
+The Chief was now at the head of the procession, which, instead of going
+to the north, passed alongside the slight elevation that led north of
+the grove, and toward the high elevation which the boys had noticed the
+day before.
+
+The march was but a short one, and when the upper level was reached the
+boys were astounded to see that beyond, and next to the hill, on the
+north, was an open space, the floor of which was of solid rock. This
+space covered nearly an acre, and near the center was a flat rocky
+table, fully ten feet in diameter and about four feet high, with a huge
+boulder in the center of the table.
+
+The Chief and the victims marched directly to the stone table, the
+executioner tramping with a measured tread immediately ahead of the
+victims. The people did not go near the rocky shelf, but circled about
+at a respectful distance.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+HYPNOTISM ON SAVAGES
+
+
+All those with the Chief's party, approached the table, upon which the
+executioner mounted the rock, and stood there, as though inviting the
+admiration of the crowd.
+
+John spoke a few words to Uraso, and the latter addressed the Chief as
+follows: "The White Chief says that to offer these men as a sacrifice
+will be against the wishes of the Great Spirit, if they are destroyed by
+the weapon which is now in the hands of the one on the rock."
+
+The Chief quickly turned. "What would the White Chief have me do? I
+cannot free these culprits, because it is the law that they shall die in
+place of those who are appointed to be the victims."
+
+"The White Chief does not ask for their lives, but only that the manner
+of their death shall be changed."
+
+"That shall be done. What is the White Chief's wish?"
+
+"He will be the executioner."
+
+The Chief threw his arms around Uraso's neck, in raptures of joy, and
+turning to the man on the table, ordered him to descend. John quietly
+conferred with Uraso, and the latter mounted the table, and the
+prisoners were led up until they faced him.
+
+Uraso, addressing them, said: "You have been condemned by your Chief to
+die because you have deceived his people and brought sorrow on all. The
+Great White Chief has seen the misery you have caused by allowing the
+Korinos to escape, and you must now take their places as the victims to
+appease the Great Spirit.
+
+"The White Chief has asked to be permitted to offer you up as sacrifices
+to his God, as well, and the White Man's death is a terrible one. When
+you die it will not cause you to go out of the world forgetting all that
+you may suffer, but you will always know and suffer through all time,
+and you will never know a day that is free from misery.
+
+"Your dying will be like a thousand deaths, and your living hours will
+be like fire that always burns and never consumes."
+
+Thus Uraso went on, and as he spoke the poor victims' eyes grew greater
+and greater, and the terror more pronounced. He ceased for a moment and
+John slowly walked to the table, and mounting it, said quietly to Uraso:
+"Tell them that when I raise my hands over my head the ends of their
+living death will begin."
+
+When this was imparted, the agony on their faces was pitiful to see.
+John advanced, and spread out his palms toward them, and quickly drew
+his hands toward him, and this was repeated three times.
+
+It is a curious thing that most savages believe in the mysticism of some
+particular number. In Africa some tribes, if they hear an animal cry
+four times, will brave any danger, as it is a sign that the bird has
+knowledge of safety to his person.
+
+Others watch with great care the repetition of an insect's call, and
+particularly the number of times an unusual noise occurs, and the belief
+is somewhat analogous to the views which white people have about the
+cricket. Milton, Byron, Southey, and Dickens have written stories about
+them, so it is not to be wondered at that the poor benighted savages
+should have some belief about such things.
+
+After the rites at the tree in the forest, it was evident that three was
+the cryptic, or mysterious number, and John used it on this occasion,
+for in all the peculiar signs that he had previously employed, three was
+the number that impressed itself on the minds of the people, and it
+doubtless had its effect on the condemned.
+
+Slowly John moved from side to side, and he now saw the intense
+expression, as their eyes followed his every motion. His motions grew
+less and less rapid; he moved toward them, and then suddenly retreated,
+and through all these evolutions the three men's faces became more and
+more tense, and finally the muscles of their faces relaxed, their eyes
+stared with a blank expression, and the motions of John almost ceased.
+
+The boys looked about them. They, too, had a spell woven about them
+which they could not understand. It was the most remarkable feeling they
+had ever experienced. The multitude did not stir a limb. The Chief was
+rigid, his face colorless, lips parted, and eyes fixed at what he saw
+before him.
+
+Suddenly, John sprang forward, and raised both arms high above his head,
+and instantly the three men fell back and lay rigid, full length on the
+rock. John turned, but while there were forms before him, there was no
+sound. Hundreds of eyes gazed, but they stared mutely.
+
+"I feel awfully funny," said Harry.
+
+"Do you know what John has been doing?" asked George.
+
+"I know; he has hypnotized the men!"
+
+"Yes; and everybody else!"
+
+When John turned, he waved his hand, the audience relaxed its tension,
+and witnessed the death (?) of the three men, an act performed by the
+White Chief without having touched them. The Chief slowly walked
+forward, and Uraso led him to the platform, while John pointed to the
+mute victims.
+
+John motioned to Uraso to raise the first man by lifting his feet while
+he grasped the shoulders, and when the body was lifted up it was
+perfectly rigid. The same exhibition was performed with the two others.
+That they were dead, was apparent to the Chief and the people.
+
+The people surged to and fro. John was a Korino now, in the eyes of the
+people. When the people pressed forward John spoke to Uraso, and he
+turned to the people.
+
+"The White Chief says that there will be no more sacrifices, because the
+Great Spirit wills it otherwise. The Korinos must be brought from the
+caves--"
+
+Uraso could get no further. The people were aroused. Their voices could
+be heard uttering threats against the witch doctors.
+
+John saw that they were determined to wreak vengeance upon them, but he
+counseled them to be wise and obey their Chief, and that the Korinos
+would acknowledge their own error.
+
+The wives and children of the three guards were present, as they were
+compelled to be, and, as may well be imagined, their grief was terrible
+to behold.
+
+Uraso again spoke to the people, and said: "The White Chief intends to
+show that the Great Spirit does not wish sacrifices, and will give back
+the guards to their families."
+
+When he ceased speaking John stooped forward, and waved his hands three
+times, the motion being formed by throwing his hands forward, palms
+downward, and then slowly raising them up, and with an upward and an
+outward swing, bringing them down again.
+
+Then he advanced forward a few feet and held out his arms horizontally,
+with the palms uppermost, and speaking a few words, the arms were
+impressively raised. As he did so the three men slightly turned, and
+then almost simultaneously raised themselves to a sitting posture, and
+glanced about wildly.
+
+The consternation on the part of the natives at this sight was beyond
+all description. They were awe stricken, and dumbfounded. Not the
+slightest sound could be heard, as the men arose to their feet.
+
+The only ones who were joyously affected were the wives of the men who,
+at the words of Uraso, sprang forward and were about to ascend the rock,
+but at the command of John they leaped from the table, and the children
+gathered about them.
+
+The Chief did not utter a word of protest. He remained there utterly
+speechless. When John asked him what was the next thing to be done to
+carry out the rites, he remained standing for some time without
+answering.
+
+When he had gathered together his faculties he turned to the people and
+said: "The Great White Chief has shown his power, and proven to us that
+our Korinos have lied to us. They must be destroyed. Let the people
+return to the village, and proceed with the feast. We shall be guided by
+the White Chief."
+
+This was, indeed, the effect that John wished to produce, but he did not
+also anticipate that the Chief would insist upon the destruction of the
+Korinos.
+
+The feast that afternoon was a repetition on a larger scale, of the
+feast of the day before. Indeed, this was now the third day of feasting.
+
+"I don't know whether I can eat any more for a few days," said Harry, as
+they neared the village, and saw the preparations going on.
+
+George laughed, as he responded: "We shall have to go through with this
+thing, whatever the cost. Have you forgotten that they believe in
+_three_ for everything? Didn't John make three passes to kill them; and
+three more to bring them to life again? We have had two feasts, and must
+now have one more. I don't know what the result will be if I eat half as
+much even, as I did yesterday."
+
+John laughed heartily, as he added: "That is correct, too, about the
+feasts. Notice from this time on that about everything they do will be
+measured by threes."
+
+As the boys afterwards remarked, they never knew how they got through
+the feast that day, but they tried to imitate John in partaking of the
+good things in moderation.
+
+It was late in the night when the natives ceased the dancing, which was
+the signal for the end of the festival, although in many respects it was
+entirely different from the previous ceremonies, as Uraso and Muro
+learned in talking with the natives.
+
+The next day was ushered in with a rainstorm, the first that was
+experienced on the island, and there was no opportunity to make any
+excursions. It had been John's intention to settle the fate of the
+Korinos, as he felt that this was a matter that should have his
+attention before they left on the further explorations of the island.
+
+Since it was impossible to venture out far from the village, John spent
+the most of the day attending to the wounded and the sick, although they
+had not been neglected in the meantime, not even during the ceremonies
+of the past three days.
+
+The first visit was made to the quarters of the white man who was found
+in the stockade when they took possession of the village. It was evident
+from the greeting that he and John had had several conversations
+previous to this visit, but of this the latter did not advise the boys.
+
+When they came into the room he was sitting up, and he greeted John and
+the boys. He could speak, but it was with a weak voice, and the boys
+ranged themselves on one side while John seated himself on the other.
+
+"You told me yesterday," began John, "that when you were shipwrecked you
+were cast ashore on another island. How many companions had you?"
+
+"Three," he answered. "One of them was a large man, with brown hair and
+piercing eyes, who was formerly an officer in the navy, and was at that
+time engaged in an exploring capacity, and on his way to Australia."
+
+"Did he walk with a limp?" asked John.
+
+The old man, as well as the boys, looked at John in surprise. He quickly
+answered: "Yes; did you know him?"
+
+"No," he replied; "but we found him less than a month ago."
+
+The old man leaned forward in his eagerness. "Where is he?" he asked.
+
+"He is dead," answered John, gravely.
+
+"Dead!" he exclaimed. "Dead! and do you know his name?"
+
+"No, but we found his remains, together with the boat to which he had
+been tied, on the shore of an island south of this."
+
+"Then it is true, after all!" he muttered.
+
+"Did you know about it?" asked John, who was the interested one now.
+
+"No, this is sad news to me. His name was Clifford,--Ralph S. Clifford,
+and when he and Walter undertook,--"
+
+The boys were all impatience now, as George cried out: "Walter! did you
+know Walter?"
+
+"Yes; he was my companion for a time. He and I were making explorations
+on the island on which we were wrecked, and when the two undertook to go
+on a search, to ascertain what the island was like, I was too ill to go
+with them. Walter returned, and told me of meeting with a band of
+savages on the western side of the mountain, and of the capture of
+Clifford by the natives."
+
+"Did you know a man by the name of Wright?"
+
+"No, I never heard of any one by that name in this section of the
+globe."
+
+"Do you know what became of Walter?"
+
+"I was about to say, that we went north along the shore, and camped near
+the beach, and there found a boat, rather crudely made, with which we
+proposed sailing around the island. Before we could complete our
+arrangements, Walter disappeared."
+
+"Did he take the boat with him?"
+
+"No; the boat and all his effects were still with me. I was still very
+ill, and I concluded to remain there until my strength returned, but
+four days afterwards, when I was able to move about, I found that the
+boat had disappeared."
+
+The strain of the conversation appeared to affect him, and the three
+visitors stated they would call on him later for further information.
+
+When the boys returned to their huts, with John, the latter was quiet
+and very much reserved. The boys were so much interested in the story of
+the old man, that they could not wait until they were seated before they
+began to question him.
+
+"What do you think of his story?" asked Harry.
+
+John did not answer promptly, as was his habit. Instead, he reflected
+for some time, and at last said slowly: "The story may be true. Clifford
+was, in my opinion, tied to the boat and set adrift, and his death was
+due to that, unquestionably."
+
+"Do you think this man had anything to do with it?" asked George.
+
+"So far, I have no direct reason for thinking so, but there are several
+very curious things about the story."
+
+"What in particular do you have in mind?"
+
+"He said the boat was found on the seashore, and that Walter left
+without taking it with him, but that when he recovered the boat was
+gone."
+
+"Is it an unreasonable story?"
+
+"That is not at all improbable. The tide might have washed it away, but,
+if it was our boat, and it was provided with the peculiar rope and the
+strange oars, that were found in it when it was recovered by you, it
+would be interesting to know whether he or Walter put them there."
+
+"Why is that so interesting to know?"
+
+"Because the rope found in that boat, is the same as the rope we took
+from Clifford's body, which you discovered on Venture Island."
+
+"If we could only find Walter now it would solve that mystery," said
+Harry. "I don't like to think that this man was instrumental in the
+Clifford tragedy."
+
+"Nor do I," responded John. "It is evident there is some connection
+between that boat and the skeleton, and that our boat played a part in
+it." This ended the conversation on this point.
+
+It will be remembered that two of the men rescued from the prison
+stockade, were natives of another tribe, who had been captured some
+weeks before. Upon inquiry John found that they had disappeared the day
+before.
+
+The two others, in a very emaciated condition, were still under John's
+care, and rapidly improving. No attempts had been made to question
+them, and as it was the intention of the boys to commence the trip to
+the north, as soon as John had settled the matter with the Korinos, they
+were anxious to get some information from them concerning their tribe.
+
+Accompanying Uraso, and through him, they first learned that the people
+they were now living with were called Malosos, and that the Chief was
+named Ta Babeda, which meant the _strong man_. He was not so large as
+Beralsea, the Chief of Venture Island, but his muscles were more active,
+thus the boys could see that he rightly acquired the sceptre of chief
+ruler, as did Beralsea, because of the strength he possessed, and there
+was no one on the island to question his king-ship.
+
+While rambling about the boys and Uraso were informed that John wished
+to see them at the Chief's house, and they went over without delay.
+Entering the house, they were surprised to see that the different
+packages containing the presents had been opened, and were about to be
+distributed.
+
+The Chief and his household were first provided for. The articles
+consisted of coats, and different articles of wear for the Chief,
+together with a watch, a revolver, and a camera.
+
+"This will give both of you boys an opportunity to give the Chief some
+lessons in these instruments," said John.
+
+The articles for the women were received with screams of delight that
+pleased the Chief beyond measure. Bits of lace, the like of which had
+never been seen on the island, cotton fabric, beads, articles of
+ornamentation, and finally full-fledged dresses, were only parts of the
+gifts which went to the women and children.
+
+"With your permission," said John, to the Chief, "I will offer gifts to
+your people, and you may state that during the afternoon the articles
+will be arranged in packages so that all will receive presents of like
+value."
+
+The boys, as well as Uraso and Muro, were busy making up the gifts for
+distribution. During the remaining portion of the day they were busily
+engaged in this work, which brought the greatest joy and happiness to
+the natives.
+
+It may well be imagined that Uraso and Muro were not slow in imparting
+the news of Wonder Island to the natives. John had a long conference
+with the Chief on the same subject.
+
+"But how can we get these articles?" he asked, as John told him how they
+made the wonderful things.
+
+"You can make them here," he answered.
+
+"But we cannot make them if we do not have the tools."
+
+"Then you can buy them," responded John.
+
+"But what have we that you want?" he asked, as he eagerly scanned John's
+face.
+
+"Your land is full of things that the people in Wonder Island want, and
+the whole world will buy them of you."
+
+"Will you tell me what they want and how we shall get them ready for
+you?"
+
+"It will give us pleasure to send our people over who can tell you what
+spices, and nuts, and coffee, and other things which you have in
+abundance, can be prepared, and what they are worth, and it will be the
+means of giving the people work, and peace and contentment."
+
+"But if we do not have any more fighting with our enemy there will be no
+need of a strong Chief," he remarked, thinking of his new relation to
+the scheme as outlined.
+
+"There will be a much greater need of a strong man like you, who can
+mete out equal justice to the people," remarked John.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE REMARKABLE CAVE EXPLORATIONS
+
+
+But the time was now at hand, when it became necessary for the exploring
+expedition to the north. The rescued prisoners stated that their people,
+while not so numerous, were very warlike, and by degrees, John learned
+that they were the cannibals of whom they had heard.
+
+The tribe was known as the Umbolos, and the Chief was a frightful man,
+unlike any other in the tribe, or, at any rate, from the description, he
+was not formed like them. He was known as Rumisses, which in their
+tongue meant _thunder_.
+
+It was remarkable that Uraso and Muro understood most of the words of
+the language used by the natives here and also on Venture Island. On
+Wonder Island, there were only two tongues, or dialects, and the people
+on this island, as well as on Venture Island, spoke the dialect
+belonging to the Illyas, Kurabus and the Tuolos, the tribes that were
+the fiercest and the most difficult to subdue.
+
+It was hoped that the escape of the two Umbolos, and the return to their
+people would be sufficient to give them the entree to that part of the
+country, but after the questionings of John on this point, it was very
+doubtful whether this would impress itself on their minds.
+
+The natives had been accustomed for so long a period to regard every
+other people as an enemy, and consequently absolutely removed from any
+possibility of friendship, that it was questionable whether the
+messengers could persuade the Chief to receive them.
+
+Arrangements for the departure were decided upon, and they planned to
+start early in the morning. John visited the Chief, and suggested that
+he should consider it a favor if the Chief would permit him to take the
+Korinos with him.
+
+The Chief opened his eyes in astonishment. "Why do you wish to be
+burdened with men who will live by deceiving?" he inquired.
+
+"But they have lived to the best of their knowledge. They do not know
+any better. They believe what they have been taught, and think it is a
+duty to carry out and practice their rites. They do not wish to deceive
+you."
+
+The Chief pondered for a long time, and then replied: "What will you do
+with them?"
+
+"I want to teach them the white man's ways, and tell them to come back
+and teach your children the things which we believe are right and for
+the good of the people."
+
+The lessons which John imparted were sources of wonder and amazement to
+the ruler, who, five days before, thought he was the only one appointed
+to make and to execute laws.
+
+When he finally gave his consent, he said: "You must take it upon
+yourself to get the Korinos, because they will not come out of their
+caves."
+
+"But how can they find food there? If you prevent them from getting
+food they will be compelled to come out or starve."
+
+"They will starve before they will permit themselves to be taken."
+
+"Then," answered John, "why do you not order your warriors to enter the
+cave and take them by force?"
+
+"But who dares to go in?"
+
+"I dare to go in, but you must order me to do so," answered John.
+
+The Chief jumped up in an instant. "And will you go?" he asked in the
+greatest delight.
+
+"By all means. You must go with me to the cave, and there command me to
+enter and bring them forth."
+
+The Chief's eyes danced with delight, and he could hardly await the hour
+for starting on the mission.
+
+The boys and the two companion chiefs, were in their glory upon hearing
+of the decision to get the Korinos. Before leaving the Chief John
+questioned him very closely on the location of the cave, and whether
+there were not other caves on the island to the north.
+
+"I have heard that there is another one to the north, that was used in
+olden times by the Korinos who lived when my father was Chief. I also
+know that far to the north where the false and treacherous Umbolos live,
+are great caves which no man may enter."
+
+"Do they have Korinos in the Umbolo tribe?"
+
+"No; they do not believe in a Great Spirit."
+
+"Then, if they have no Korinos, why do they not dare to enter the
+caverns?"
+
+"Because they have been told that it is death to go into the dark."
+
+"Do you know why they think so?"
+
+"Because, a long time ago, the only man who ever returned from the dark
+caves, brought out the bones of men who had died there."
+
+"But it did not kill that man who brought them out?"
+
+"Yes; he died. And now no one dares enter those places."
+
+It may be imagined how this intelligence stirred up the boys. It was
+impossible to keep them from talking about it. To John it was like a
+magic wand; it seemed to wave before his eyes and to talk to him. What
+if they had really found the great cave on which John's heart was so
+keenly bent?
+
+But the Korinos must be freed. That afternoon, just before starting, the
+boys were surprised to see the band coming up the street. How they
+laughed, as they scented John's little ruse. It would, indeed, be a
+treat to bring the Korinos out of their dark resorts to some good old
+marching tune.
+
+The band struck up a familiar air, and to its lively tones the
+procession, with the three Chiefs and John at the head, marched across
+the open, and up the hill past the grove, on its way to the cave on the
+eastern slope of the high hill which rose from the shore of the ocean.
+
+There was jest and laughter, the Chief enjoying the treat that would be
+the greatest pleasure of his life, namely, the bringing of the Korinos
+out of the cave.
+
+After ascending the great hill, so that they overlooked the ocean, the
+Chief informed John that the entrance was a third of the way down the
+hill, and the narrow path was followed which led around to the north,
+shutting out the sight of the sea.
+
+After a few hundred feet, the path led to a cleft portion of the rocks,
+where the light of the sun was completely hidden. The walls of the
+rocks, at the entrance of the cleft portion, were fully fifty feet high,
+and were at least twenty feet apart, but as they went on the walls drew
+nearer together and the path ascended a slight incline.
+
+A sharp turn was reached, and they found themselves in a little cove, to
+the left of which was a dark entrance, toward which the Chief nodded, as
+he shrank back.
+
+John motioned to the Chief, and the latter sternly commanded John to
+bring forth the Korinos. John said a few words to Uraso and Muro, and
+also invited the boys to accompany them.
+
+"I suppose you are all armed?" said John.
+
+The boys and the chiefs had come well prepared, so this point was taken
+care of.
+
+"But where are the lights?" asked George.
+
+"I have them," said John, "but we shall not use them now, for reasons
+which will be explained later." Together they entered the cave, the
+darkness of which was appalling. After going in fully a hundred and
+fifty feet, John stopped and said: "It would have been a sign of
+weakness to go in with a light. When we have gone far enough to be free
+from the mouth of the cave, we can use our flash lights. For the present
+we shall move on to ascertain whether the Korinos are provided with
+lights, which will show where they are, and we may thus be guided to
+them."
+
+The distance traveled must have been fully a thousand feet, when John
+again spoke: "I shall now throw the light directly ahead, and you must
+keep your eyes open to detect anything moving."
+
+The light flashed, and was then moved slowly to the left, until it
+reached a cove at the extreme eastern side, where there was an evident
+assemblage of articles, not a hundred feet in advance of them, but there
+was not a sign of living beings within the scope of the light beams.
+
+The company moved over to the spot indicated. A moment's examination
+satisfied them that it was really the abode of the Korinos, but they had
+disappeared.
+
+The debris, the half eaten portions of food, some still warm, were
+sufficient to indicate that they had fled, but where? Uraso, Muro and
+John, all three, flashed their lights, and, after examining the walls
+critically, Muro was the first to find the opening from the chamber in
+which they were standing.
+
+The outlet from the chamber was to the north, and toward it the
+explorers ran hurriedly, and passed along the contracted path, which
+soon turned to the left. After following its many windings, and
+scrambling over the broken and rocky floor, they saw ahead a streak of
+daylight, which gladdened the hearts of the boys.
+
+"Ah! they have gone," exclaimed John, as he emerged, and glanced across
+the ravine, and along the walls which extended up from the shore of a
+little stream below. "They have gone to the north, and have, probably,
+tried to seek safety in the other cave."
+
+"How are we going to get back?" asked George.
+
+"Do you think there will be any trouble in that?" asked John.
+
+"We shall have to go clear over the mountain for that, I'm afraid."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island._]
+
+"We are not far from the entrance," said John, "and if we intend to
+catch up with the Korinos, we must not delay for a moment."
+
+The party made a hurried trip around the hill, and the Chief was
+surprised to learn that there was another entrance, or an outlet to the
+cave on the northern side. None of his warriors was aware of this,
+however.
+
+John was now in a quandary. He was exceedingly anxious to secure the
+Korinos, but at the same time there was some things in the appearance of
+the cave that he wished to investigate. This was confided to Uraso and
+Muro, and the latter suggested that he and Uraso would undertake to
+follow the fleeing men, and return to the village, while John and the
+boys made the desired investigation.
+
+This was readily assented to, and they at once made their way across the
+hill, while John informed the Chief of the action which they had decided
+to take. One of the principal men of the village, in whom the Chief had
+confidence, and who knew the location of the upper caves, accompanied
+Uraso and Muro.
+
+The Chief, and those with him returned to the village, while John
+remained behind under the pretense that he wished to stay at the cave
+entrance until they returned from the pursuit after the Korinos.
+
+The boys first secured the flash lights which the two chiefs had
+brought, and when all had departed the boys and John entered the cave
+and marched directly to the location of their interior home.
+
+Every part of the habitation was well investigated. Almost every kind of
+tool and implement was found here in profusion, but singularly, none of
+them appeared to be used. Several flint lock guns, all rusted, and with
+decayed stocks, were among the articles discovered, but the Korinos had
+not used them.
+
+The inevitable copper vessels, entirely unlike those of modern
+manufacture, were the first things to claim the attention of the boys,
+as they recalled similar articles found in the caves thitherto
+investigated by them.
+
+"This begins to look as though we are to have the same experience we had
+at the cave at the Cataract," said George. "These vessels, no doubt,
+were brought here by the buccaneers, and I'll be surprised if we don't
+find a few more of their belongings somewhere in this place."
+
+After all the recesses in this vicinity had been investigated they
+scanned the side walls to the right, carefully going into the little
+recesses which were found all along the jagged sides.
+
+A hundred feet south of the living part of the cave they came,
+unexpectedly upon a large extension, not noticed before in their pursuit
+of the Korinos. The chamber extended in a southerly direction, and
+narrowed at the extreme opposite end.
+
+"This has the appearance of leading to another outlet, which would take
+us to the southern side of the hill. It would be remarkable, indeed, if
+such should be the case," said John, as he eagerly pressed forward,
+until they had passed four chambers.
+
+The walls were coming closer and closer, until there was now barely room
+for them to pass through, but they went in unhesitatingly, John in the
+lead. The passage was not straight, so that the light did not aid much
+in looking ahead, but suddenly the flash threw a beam ahead, which
+showed that they were at the entrance of a chamber.
+
+John stopped and directed the search light to all parts of the cavern.
+It appeared to be nearly round, with a perfectly smooth floor. It was
+unoccupied, but in the exact center of the chamber was a raised object,
+like a mound.
+
+Throughout the entire cave could be found the calcareous deposit so
+common in caves formed in limestone rocks, and the stalactite hangings
+on the ceilings and walls, and the stalagmites on the floors made the
+scene a weird one.
+
+John glanced upwardly to view the ceiling, above the mound, and said:
+"That does not seem to be a natural formation. Let us examine it first."
+
+With the small pick which John always carried, and by means of which he
+was always careful to examine rocks and geological formations, while on
+these tours, the top parts of the stalagmites were chipped off. This was
+an exceedingly simple matter, since they are generally soft.
+
+After the top layer was removed, the part beneath readily yielded, but
+before they had an opportunity to dig into it very deeply the pick
+struck something which gave forth a metallic sound. John stopped as
+though paralyzed.
+
+The pick was again driven in. Again the plain contact with some hard
+substance. The digging was now feverish, and when the broken parts were
+cleared away, a small metallic box, about twelve inches square across
+the top, and about ten inches deep, was exposed to view.
+
+The dent made by the pick was clearly visible, and the fresh mark showed
+that the metal was red.
+
+"It is copper!" said John.
+
+Every part of the material around the box was removed, and this enabled
+them to remove it from its resting place. John grasped it and securing a
+good hold, finally raised it.
+
+"No, it is not any heavier than I thought it would he," he remarked as
+he lay it down.
+
+"Did you expect to find this?" asked George in amazement.
+
+"No; this is a surprise to me as it is to you."
+
+"Then why did you make that remark?"
+
+"Because I believe that this box contains treasure of untold value. I
+should have been surprised if it weighed very much."
+
+"Could it not have contained treasure if it had been heavy?" asked
+Harry.
+
+John laughed, a peculiar exultant chuckle, as he responded: "Not the
+kind of treasure I have had in contemplation."
+
+The box was turned over and over. There was not the sign of any lid, or
+crack which showed the cover or means of opening it. "We must take this
+out and open it at our leisure," remarked John, "but before doing so it
+would be well to examine the other outlets to this chamber, if it has
+any."
+
+The chamber was found, on measurement, to be thirty feet in diameter,
+and the vaulted ceiling fully thirty feet high, singularly uniform in
+the domed formation, and not rough or jagged like the ceiling of the
+other chamber which they had just left.
+
+The walls were absolutely solid on all sides, the only entrance being by
+way of the narrow little passageway through which they had come. Harry
+picked up the box, and swung it up to his shoulder, and, John leading
+the way, they filed out and passed through the chamber, quickly making
+their way to the opening through which they first entered the cave.
+
+Within an hour they were back in the village, and found Muro there
+awaiting their arrival. "We have found their trail, and they have not
+gone to the upper cave. They are heading straight for the tribe in the
+northern end of the island."
+
+"I am surprised at that," said John. "We must consult the Chief about
+this," and without another word, he hurriedly went over to the Chief,
+who was as much astounded as John could be at the peculiar significance
+of their actions.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+THE TRIBE TO THE NORTH
+
+
+Instead of conveying the copper box to the village it was carried to the
+landing place and taken to the vessel, where it could be examined later,
+when they had more time. It was now of more importance to keep in touch
+with Muro and Uraso, the former of whom had gone to the north as soon as
+he had given the report mentioned in the last chapter.
+
+On the return to the village they discussed the affairs of the previous
+day, which John had abstained from mentioning.
+
+"What is it that really makes the people act that way when they are
+hypnotized!" asked George. "I have heard it said that there isn't any
+truth in mesmerism."
+
+"Mesmerism is the old term used to designate certain phenomena, which,
+originally, was supposed to be a force that emanated from the mesmerist.
+It is now known that hypnotism may be regarded as artificial catalepsy."
+
+"But what is catalepsy?"
+
+"It is an affection produced by hysteria, during which the patient's
+body becomes rigid. It is claimed by some that somnambulism is one phase
+of the hypnotic condition."
+
+"But in what way do your motions act on the one who is being
+hypnotized?"
+
+"The motions have nothing whatever to do with producing the condition.
+That is for effect, merely. Those who are able to bring about a mesmeric
+condition, try to concentrate the mind on some particular thing, and by
+making gentle motions, or passes, this is more forcibly impressed on
+them."
+
+"What was the object of Uraso telling them that the White Man's death
+was a terrible one, and trying to frighten them?"
+
+"Merely to make them concentrate their minds on one thing alone. Terror,
+or great fear, is one of the things which tends to a cataleptic
+condition. Great excitement, and sometimes excessive joy, have been
+known to do the same thing."
+
+"Then the object is merely to bring the mind under the control of the
+operator?"
+
+"Yes; what was originally considered as a power flowing from the
+hypnotist, is nothing more than his mental action or control which
+prevents the subject from exercising his own volition."
+
+A few hours after they returned to the village Uraso and Muro returned,
+with the information that the Korinos were now within the territory of
+the tribe to the north, and they wisely concluded it would not be good
+policy to pursue them further, and their prudence was commended by John.
+
+The natives were supremely happy in displaying their gifts, and the
+Chief, while much annoyed at the escape of the Korinos, was content to
+be relieved of their presence, when, after numerous conversations with
+John, he realized that they were of no use to him and his people.
+
+John announced that he intended to visit the tribe to the north, and
+purposed starting the following day. The Chief advised him to take with
+him all the warriors in the village, because he felt sure they would
+have a hostile reception.
+
+"It seems to me," replied John, "that would be the wrong thing to do. I
+do not wish him to think that my mission is a warlike one, and a large
+force will be in the nature of an invasion of his territory."
+
+"Perhaps you are right; but we have found him a difficult Chief to deal
+with. He is not like a man. He cannot stand up straight, as we do, and
+he kills and eats all who fall into his hands."
+
+This information was regarded by John as one of the imagination, purely,
+so it did not weigh heavily on his mind. What seemed to impress him most
+was the fate of the poor fellows who had voluntarily sought the
+protection of the cannibal Chief.
+
+"I would like to have your opinion as to the course which the Chief will
+take when the Korinos fall into his hands?" asked John.
+
+The Chief mused for a while, and then said: "They have no Korinos and do
+not believe in them, but they may tell the Chief that we tried to offer
+them as sacrifices, and he may use them with his people to stir up
+feelings of revenge against us."
+
+"But," replied John, "the captives you took, and who have escaped may
+tell him of our treatment of them and this may work in our favor."
+
+"I do not think so," he replied. "We have had many instances where they
+have refused to make friends with us, and for that reason we always had
+war."
+
+"But have you not often sacrificed their people when you have taken them
+in your wars?"
+
+"We have always done so."
+
+"Have any of your captives ever returned to them?"
+
+"No."
+
+"And have they always killed and eaten your people when they captured
+them?"
+
+"Yes; and none has ever returned to us. The Korinos would not let us
+keep the captives, but said that the Great Spirit told them they must be
+sacrificed."
+
+The foregoing information was sufficient to convince John of one thing,
+namely, that it was really the spirit of the Korinos which kept up the
+tribal warfare, at least so far as one end of the conflict was
+concerned.
+
+In spite of all the arguments advanced by the Chief, John was determined
+to make the trip with his own people, and thus avoid any feeling on the
+part of the tribe, against their present friend.
+
+In the morning John called Stut, and advised him to wait until the
+following day, when he should pull up anchor and proceed to the north
+for a distance not exceeding twenty miles, and then, seeking a safe
+anchorage, to await news from him.
+
+With forty of his own trusted men, together with Uraso and Muro, they
+set out on the march to the north, cheered by the people of the village,
+who came out to witness their departure. The old man who had been
+rescued, was still too weak to accompany them, so he was taken to the
+vessel, where he could receive the best of care and attention.
+
+In order not to be out of touch with the sea, John decided to follow the
+hills along the eastern side of the island, and this course was selected
+because the people to which they were going, unlike those at the
+southern portion of the island, lived in the mountainous region, as
+heretofore stated, and the probability of meeting them would be much
+better than if they had followed the level plateau.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 10. Cinnamon._]
+
+In the march the boys, as well as John, were ever on the alert to
+discover the possibilities of the island, so far as the natural products
+were concerned.
+
+"Something smells awfully sweet around here," said George, as they were
+tramping along a beautifully-wooded crest.
+
+"I think it must come from the trees that have the beautiful pale blue
+flowers. Wait until I get a branch."
+
+One of the men was quick to carry out Harry's wish. John was immensely
+pleased at the interest which the boys exhibited. "What does it smell
+like?" he inquired.
+
+"Something like cloves and cinnamon, both," answered George.
+
+"Peel off the bark and taste it."
+
+"It is just like cinnamon."
+
+"That is correct. It is the real cinnamon tree. It is the cassia of the
+Bible, one of the spices so frequently referred to in Scripture. The
+bark only is used, but the species which have fruit, are gathered and
+oil expressed from them, which is called _cinnamon suet_."
+
+Advancing, the surface became more rugged. They had to cross numerous
+gullies, and broken portions, and frequently jagged rocks would show
+themselves. Evidently when the island was raised up from the sea the
+rocks were forced through, and the climate in time disintegrated them,
+and formed a soil.
+
+"Do you think we shall find any minerals here?" asked Harry.
+
+"If we are to judge from our experiences on Wonder Island, where there
+is almost exactly the same formation, we may reasonably expect to find
+copper and also iron here."
+
+"While Harry and I were over at the bluff with Uraso, we saw something
+like green drippings, from the walls."
+
+"That is, undoubtedly, copper,--that is the sulphate form, in which it
+is usually found."
+
+"I was amused at Laleo (the native guide), who told Uraso this morning
+that our mission would be successful, and when he was asked why,
+answered, that the first thing they saw was three black birds. How
+superstitious these people are."
+
+"Do you think they are any more so than civilized people?" answered
+John. "It is curious how the number three runs through all their ideas.
+In certain parts of England they have a great many omens, and one of
+them is that if the traveler, starting on a journey, meets three
+magpies, it means success; if two appears, it is a sign of marriage; and
+four unexpected good news."
+
+"I recall that it is considered lucky for sun to shine on a bride,"
+added Harry.
+
+"The other part of that couplet is 'rain on a corpse,'" remarked John.
+
+"I never knew it was lucky for the corpse to be rained on," responded
+Harry, in a questioning tone.
+
+John laughed immoderately, as he answered: "Well, it might not be lucky
+for the corpse. But there are numerous lucky and unlucky signs that no
+one can account for, prevalent in our own country, such as putting on
+stockings wrong side out, and finding a horseshoe."
+
+"Of course, they are both fortunate signs," said George, smiling at the
+thought.
+
+"In Scotland, among those who are the most matter of fact people in the
+world, signs are very common. It is a bad omen with them to stumble over
+a threshold, or to step over green or red, or to sneeze while making up
+a bed."
+
+"After all, we are not so much ahead of the savages, are we?" mused
+George.
+
+During the march that day there was nothing specially worthy of note.
+The animals they met were few and small, and it did not appear that
+there were any which merited mentioning, so the boys gave up the idea of
+meeting any adventure in that line.
+
+Shortly after four in the afternoon they began to seek out some good
+camping place. Laleo informed Uraso that they had now passed into the
+territory claimed by the northern tribe, and the desirability of caution
+was necessary.
+
+A rocky shelter, only a short distance above a running brook below, was
+found suitable, and there the halt was made for the night. Early in the
+morning they were awakened by Muro, with the welcome intelligence that
+the _Pioneer_ was sighted several miles to the north, where she lay at
+anchor.
+
+At the suggestion of John the boys went to the headland, a mile to the
+east, and there hoisted a signal flag, which was observed by the vessel,
+and the return signal given, this being indicated by four circular
+sweeps of the flag.
+
+Waving the flag twice to the right, and twice to the left indicated that
+they were to remain there until further advised.
+
+After a good breakfast the march was resumed, leading further to the
+west to avoid the rugged hills near the sea. Either Uraso or Muro was
+constantly in the lead, always accompanied by one of the men who, in
+case of necessity, might be sent back to furnish John the reports of his
+observations.
+
+Before noon the messenger came in with the welcome information that the
+first of the natives had been noticed, not far to the north. Muro, who
+was in the lead, awaited the arrival of John and the boys.
+
+Together they went forward, the men remaining in the camp. A few men
+could thus move through the brush with less likelihood of observation,
+than a large number, which was the principal reason for this mode of
+procedure.
+
+After another mile of cautious movement, a runner was sent back with the
+order to bring all of them forward. Away in the distance the village was
+sighted, George's field glasses now being brought into play. The huts
+could be seen plainly along the mountain side, and scattered about in
+profusion amid a plentiful supply of trees.
+
+In some respects, viewed from a distance, the scene did not look at all
+primitive, and were it not for the crude character of the houses it
+might have been taken for a typical modern town or village.
+
+Only one hut had been passed, thus far. It was not at all crudely built,
+and while it had been left to decay, it showed that the owner had some
+ideas of comfort, and an eye to convenience, as it was located by the
+side of a spring. On one side of the cottage was a weed-grown garden,
+and some fine specimens of taro as well as wild potatoes were in
+evidence.
+
+Earthenware cooking utensils were discovered, which added to the
+interest of the place, but no other furniture was found to show how the
+people lived. It might have been deserted for a year or more.
+
+Ascending the second small hill, they were startled to find themselves
+face to face with a half dozen of the natives, who were frightfully
+alarmed at the appearance of the visitors, for they set up a shout and
+ran like deer toward the village.
+
+John kept on at the head of his force, and while the commotion in the
+village, not a half mile distant, was plainly visible, he did not halt,
+until he saw a curious crowd surrounding a short individual, who stood
+apart from those around him.
+
+"That is the Chief," said Laleo. "It is said he is a terrible man, and
+unlike all others," thus repeating what the Chief had told John.
+
+As he made no attempt to come forward or indicate what his wishes were,
+John directed the men to follow him, fifty feet in his rear, and he went
+on until within two hundred feet of the motley crowd, the people in the
+meantime making no sign of resistance, nor did they object to the
+advance.
+
+When John stopped, the curious figure, who was designated as the Chief,
+moved forward toward John without a bit of hesitation, and the boys were
+simply dumbfounded at his singular appearance, and at the gait he
+assumed.
+
+A word picture of him would not be amiss. He was a hunchback, with an
+extraordinary lump on his back, the arms much too long for his body, and
+crooked, distorted legs. The head, however, was massive, and covered
+with a heavy beard, which seemed to grow close up to the eyes, giving
+him a fierce appearance, because his head was covered with a thick
+coating of long gray, or sandy hair, that swung around the darker beard,
+as he shambled along.
+
+As he neared John his bright and staring eyes were the first thing
+noticed. When he came across the intervening space, his face was stern,
+and unforbidding, but as he neared John it relaxed, and he began to
+smile.
+
+John stepped forward, and extended his hand. "I am glad to meet you,"
+said John.
+
+The man looked at John for a moment, and then tried to mumble something,
+that the boys could not understand. After a few attempts he fairly
+shrieked out: "How are you?"
+
+This was certainly a startling thing, because the voice and the
+intonation were perfect. John opened his jacket and brought out a
+miniature American flag, which was unrolled, and the moment the strange
+being caught sight of it he seized it and pressing it to his lips,
+kissed it fervently.
+
+"I am an American," he finally struggled to utter. "I am a white man,
+and you are the first white man I have seen for fifty years. You are
+welcome to our home and village."
+
+The boys could not credit their senses. How did this poor specimen of
+the white race become the powerful Chief of a tribe of savage cannibals?
+
+John looked at him for a moment in astonishment, as he asked: "How long
+have you been Chief of the people here?"
+
+"About forty-five years. They are good people too."
+
+"We heard you were cannibals," remarked John.
+
+For a moment he scowled, and then his face brightened up. "Yes; I know
+my neighbors to the south have always believed that to be so, but they
+have heard such tales from their witch doctors, such as we used to have,
+but it is not true."
+
+"You mean the Korinos?"
+
+"Yes, those who left you two days ago, and have come to me for
+protection," and he smiled as he said this.
+
+"I tried to get them, but they eluded us," added John, by way of
+information.
+
+"You must pardon me, but it is still a little difficult for me to form
+sentences. It is so long since I have talked to any one in my native
+tongue. But I am impolite. Bring your people into the village, and let
+us entertain you. I do so want to hear about the great world and what it
+is now like."
+
+The Chief turned to his people and told them that the White Chief was
+from his own tribe, and that he came from a far-away country, on a visit
+to him, and that they must treat the people as his own.
+
+Nothing more was needed to make them welcome. George suggested to John
+that Stut on the _Pioneer_ should be notified, but before they had time
+to carry out the order a number of the villagers came rushing through
+the village and sought out the Chief.
+
+The latter turned to John and said: "My people tell me that there is a
+large ship here."
+
+"It is the vessel we came in," answered John, "and we were about to send
+a messenger to tell them to anchor near the village."
+
+"I am so happy to know this," said the Chief. "I want to see the ship,
+because it is the first time that any one has stopped at our shores.
+Some years ago we found some strange things that floated ashore from a
+wrecked vessel, and I want to show them to you, because I cannot
+understand what some of the things could be used for."
+
+They were led through the principal street of the town. It was clean and
+well kept; the huts were far better than those in the village they had
+left, and the natives were, apparently, happy and contented.
+
+As they marched along George was the first to notice a tall individual,
+who, with several others, were edging away from the visitors.
+
+"There they are!" he cried out. John turned to inquire, when Harry
+commenced laughing, as he added: "Here are the Korinos, John!"
+
+The latter looked in the direction indicated, and laughed when he saw
+their discomfiture. The Chief was hurriedly informed of the situation,
+and he laughed heartily, as he ordered one of his men to bring in the
+fugitives.
+
+They were ushered in, and Uraso told them that they were friends and not
+enemies, and that the White Chief tried to secure them so that their own
+Chief would not harm them. It was a great relief, unquestionably, and
+their actions showed it. John then told them, that he wanted to have a
+talk with them, and that he would assure them of their safety.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+THE HUNCHBACK CHIEF
+
+
+The White Chief's house was built on a plan which was a vast improvement
+over anything found on the two islands. True, it was nothing but an
+assemblage of rooms, which surrounded an open court. The furnishings
+were crude, but it was evident that all the articles were such as had
+been taken from the wreckages on the shore.
+
+Goods not native made, were noticed, and even a photograph, on a tin
+plate, like the old style daguerreotypes, was observed by Harry. Three
+chairs, one with a broken rocker, formed part of the furnishings in the
+court. In one corner was a mass of articles, the case of a ship's
+chronometer, the horn of a phonograph, some tin tubes of different
+lengths, and other odds and ends, which could not be recognized.
+
+"I am anxious to hear your story," said John. "If you have no objection
+we should be glad to have you relate it."
+
+"It will give me pleasure to tell of my experiences, although it may not
+interest you; but before doing so you must partake of food, because I
+know what it means to travel through our country. Besides I have ordered
+it prepared, and it is now ready."
+
+[Illustration: "_'It is copper,' said John_" [See p. 122]]
+
+"These two men I have with me," said John, pointing to Uraso and Muro,
+"are Chiefs of two powerful tribes, who live on a neighboring island,
+and they are real friends I found there when these two boys and I were
+shipwrecked there several years ago."
+
+"I am, indeed, glad to welcome them. I see that they have adopted the
+white man's clothing."
+
+"Yes; and their people who are wonderfully interesting are engaged in
+farming, and manufacturing."
+
+Then John told him briefly the history of their experiences, and how the
+people on Wonder Island were working out their salvation.
+
+John's tale impressed him most forcefully. "You have made good use of
+your talents. Unfortunately, for me, and for the natives here, I was not
+able wholly to bring out the people from their low condition, as you
+will be able to understand more fully when the story is told." He said
+this sorrowfully, and with apparent regret.
+
+After the meal, he continued his narrative: "I was a poor boy, a native
+of the State of Massachusetts, and was bound to a whaler as a helper,
+when less than fifteen years of age. It was a hard life, as you may
+know. I had no education, and I learned the life of misery and sorrow
+when I should have been at school.
+
+"But during that and the second year I became hardened, and my
+unfortunate physical condition made me the butt of my companions, and
+one day, in a fit of resentment, I struck down one of my tormentors,
+while in the harbor of Bedford, after which I escaped and made my way to
+Boston.
+
+"There, the next day, I found employment on an outgoing ship, that was
+in the China service, and two days later, I was gratified to learn that
+it would sail that night. I had a much easier berth, and now I found
+that among those men I was considered better than a mere brute, and I
+became acquainted with a young man who taught me to read.
+
+"This was such a delight to me that I could hardly wait until my daily
+duties were over, before the books were brought out, and by the time we
+put into Shanghai, I could read and write, as well as perform many
+examples in arithmetic.
+
+"I knew nothing of geography, or of any other of the necessary parts of
+education. Our outward trip was unexciting, but on the first return
+trip, we met one of the dangerous monsoons, and the ship was wrecked.
+One of my shipmates was the sole occupant of a spar, and he aided me in
+my attempt to grasp it, and together we floated about the great sea for
+several days, without a thing to eat or to drink, until I lost
+consciousness, and knew no more until I opened my eyes, and saw the
+vilest looking savages standing about me.
+
+"When I saw them they appeared like a horrid dream. I had read in one of
+the books about the terrible visions that men dream of, and when they
+tried to make me eat something, I began to feel that it was a reality.
+
+"But the men were naked, and I saw the bones of human beings about me,
+and everything had the appearance of a feast. I soon saw that they were
+cannibals, and as I had heard of their practices their faces grew more
+and more repulsive to me.
+
+"I recovered slowly, and now began the terror in my mind. Each day I
+expected would be my last. But day after day passed by, and I soon began
+to become reconciled to my fate. An incident soon changed the entire
+aspect of affairs for me. I had been treated with the utmost deference.
+I was furnished with an abundance of food, but I had previously learned
+that it was the custom of those people to fatten their victims, and this
+was not welcome knowledge.
+
+"I became desperate. One day, while they were bringing me the finest
+roasts, I rebelled, and taking a club, scattered the food, swinging the
+club at them and shouting defiance, because human nature began to rebel,
+and I could not stand the suspense any longer.
+
+"To my surprise they scattered, and fell on their faces. Among them was
+the head man, whom I had always regarded as the Chief. Finally he came
+up timidly, and fell on his knees before me. I was so astounded that I
+did not know what to do. I went to the Chief and raised him up, because
+I was in a quandary, and could not understand them.
+
+"This seemed to reassure him, and he told me to follow him. I had been
+here long enough to understand most of their jargon. I was surprised
+when he led me to his own hut, and brought out his daughter, who knelt
+before me. Then I began to understand. I was no longer the expected
+victim, but the prospective son-in-law. This was better than
+anticipating death daily.
+
+"I accepted the situation. The daughter became my wife. It was she who
+welcomed you when we came in. When her father died I became Chief, but
+long before his death, I controlled the people, as I knew so much more,
+and had superior wisdom, judged by their standard, that they obeyed me
+in everything.
+
+"But much as I abhorred, and tried to prevent it, as I did on many
+occasions, they practiced their rites, and had their Korinos, the real
+offenders, who taught them the necessity of sacrifices.
+
+"But when I became Chief, I sternly refused to permit them to kill their
+captives, and cannibalism was practiced only by stealth. I succeeded in
+stamping out the practice only by putting the Korinos to death, and in
+shutting up their caves."
+
+The boys, as well as John were riveted to their seats during this entire
+recital, until he referred to the caves, when they relaxed, and
+indicated their pleasure and anxiety. That meant still further quests in
+that direction.
+
+The Chief noticed their movement, and continued: "I am tiring you, but
+permit me to add only a few things. I have endeavored to better the
+condition of these people, and have succeeded. To the south of us was a
+powerful tribe. My first care was to make ourselves secure against them.
+
+"Like my people they, too, were cannibals. They were ruled over by a
+Chief who was cruel, and whenever any of their people escaped I took
+them in and cared for them, and there are now many of those living with
+us who could not be induced to go back. For more than forty years no one
+has been killed and eaten by my people."
+
+"Your work here is certainly most commendable. There is nothing which
+needs apology. Under the circumstances you have done all that was
+possible, and to the best of your ability. No one can do more," was
+John's timely observation.
+
+"I thank you for the compliment. I owe everything to the few books which
+my comrade taught me to read. When I left the United States my heart was
+bitter toward all mankind. I could not see why I should have been
+treated in such a harsh manner among civilized people, but when I landed
+here and saw how much worse the conditions were, I began to reflect. It
+would have been an easy and a natural thing for me to be brutal to
+others, as they had been to me."
+
+"You have shown a noble spirit, and I shall try to help you in caring
+for your people. Our ship is here, and we have some things for you, as
+soon as they can be unloaded," rejoined John.
+
+During the afternoon communication was established with the _Pioneer_,
+and the natives were willing helpers in bringing up the packages, but it
+was too late to distribute them. Before leaving John said: "You have not
+told us your name."
+
+"I was christened Ephraim Wilmar."
+
+John seized him by the hands, as he said: "And was your father's name
+William?"
+
+"Yes," said Ephraim, as his great eyes grew still bigger. "Did you know
+him?"
+
+"I knew him well; he died about thirty years ago. He was my father's
+friend."
+
+This information established a bond of friendship between the two.
+
+"I have forgotten to take note of time, and I may be out a year or two
+in my reckoning," continued Ephraim, "but according to the best
+information I have this must be the year 1911."
+
+"You are short one year; it is now 1912."
+
+"Then let me see! We sailed from China in January, 1860; and during that
+same month the ship went down. From that time to the present I have no
+idea of what has taken place."
+
+"Then you know nothing of the four years' war between the North and the
+South?"
+
+"No; I remember there was some trouble about the slaves, or something of
+that sort before we left China."
+
+"But there are no more slaves in the United States."
+
+"You surprise me! Then they were freed by the war?"
+
+"Yes; and Cuba is also free, and is now a republic, and the Hawaiian
+Islands belong to the United States, as also do the Philippines."
+
+"That does not seem possible. Why, if I remember correctly Cuba and the
+Philippines belonged to Spain. When did the United States purchase
+them?"
+
+"We had a war with Spain, and we took the Spanish possessions, as well
+as Porto Rico. Manila was captured three days after war was declared."
+
+"Three days after war was declared! How could our fleet, which must have
+been half the way around the world, get the news that war had been
+declared in that time?"
+
+"The commander of our fleet at Hongkong, was notified by telegraph."
+
+"How could that be done without a telegraph line? Over what part of the
+earth are the lines now running?"
+
+"Everywhere; but there are many running under the sea and are called
+_cable lines_."
+
+Ephraim looked at John for a moment, as though he doubted the meaning of
+the words just uttered, and then slowly inquired: "That must be a
+remarkable thing. I do not see how it would be possible to string wires
+under the sea."
+
+"They are encased in water tight coverings, and some of the lines are
+four thousand miles long. But nowadays we do not need wires for
+telegraphing."
+
+The deformed figure arose, and appeared to be agitated, as he said: "Do
+you mean to say that messages can be sent without wires?"
+
+"Stations for that purpose are now in operation all over the world."
+
+"That is as improbable to me as though you should tell me that it would
+be possible to talk over a wire," he answered.
+
+"But we do talk over wires, and it is possible to talk over distances
+hundreds of miles apart, without wires even."
+
+He glanced at those about him, and shook his head. He appeared to
+hesitate about asking any more questions, and after shambling back and
+forth a dozen times, or more, he stopped at the pile of debris, and
+picked up a thick disk-like piece of metal, to one side of which was a
+short broken tube attached.
+
+"I have examined this many, many times. Perhaps you can tell me what it
+is?" and he handed it to John.
+
+"This is the disk of a phonograph."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"An instrument which will reproduce the human voice, or any noise, or
+the sound of music."
+
+"I do not understand what you mean. If I talk to it will it talk back to
+me?"
+
+"No; it is so arranged that one form of the instrument receives the
+sound of your voice, and impresses it on material in the form of a
+cylinder, or a disk, and if this cylinder or disk is put into another
+instrument, this little apparatus, which I hold in my hand will speak
+the same words you uttered."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk._]
+
+"Then electricity must be a wonderful thing, to be able to be used by
+men to talk to each other all over the world, and even to preserve what
+they say."
+
+"But the phonograph is not an electrical apparatus. The disk, here, with
+the little stylus, or pointer on it, vibrates and gives forth the
+sound."
+
+"All this is most marvelous, and I would like to see some of those
+wonderful things," he exclaimed.
+
+"If you will come to the ship we will show you many of the things that
+electricity does, as we have a phonograph there, and we have a search
+light that operates by electricity, and which enables us to see many
+miles," added Harry.
+
+"Yes; I must see your ship, and I am ready to accompany you any time,
+and I want my people to see those things, as well."
+
+"But there are many other things that we now do with electricity. All
+street railways are now operated by it; many boats are run by that
+power; cooking is done by it, and its uses extend into almost everything
+that man touches," remarked John.
+
+"If this one branch of knowledge has improved so wonderfully within a
+space of fifty years, the progress in other directions must be very
+wonderful, indeed," he responded. "But you have told me so much, and I
+hardly know how I can grasp its meaning. I suppose things here in this
+part of the world must appear very crude to you?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE CHIEF'S FAMILY
+
+
+Ephraim's wife was not crude and uncouth, like most of the native women.
+It was evident from the care which she observed in the domestic
+arrangements, that Ephraim had a hand in shaping her course.
+
+The food was served with considerable care, and, in some degree with the
+formality observed in civilized homes. John was a careful observer of
+customs, and he was surprised to note that all the natives patterned
+after the habits established by their Chief.
+
+"I tried," said Ephraim, in answer to John's questions, "to better their
+condition, and to teach them how to prepare and eat their food, and we
+made vessels of pottery, which you will notice are found everywhere.
+They understood the art of weaving, in a very primitive way, which I
+also tried to improve. Only on three occasions did we take any toll from
+the sea, when the wreckage came ashore.
+
+"Of the articles which were thus recovered, I took only a fair share,
+and the others were impartially distributed to the people."
+
+"Did you ever have any trouble with the natives, or did they ever
+dispute your authority?" asked John.
+
+"Only once, many years ago. A man claiming to be the son of the Chief,
+gathered together a number of adherents, but my people rose against
+them, and killed the leaders, which I very much regretted. When I
+remonstrated with them for the severity of their course, they justified
+it by saying that I had been kind to them, and had made them better, and
+it was the very thing that taught me to feel that human beings, although
+savages, understand kind treatment. It made me a convert in my feelings
+against some of the white men who had treated me with such severity."
+
+During the day, after the packages had been removed from the ship the
+articles were taken from the packages and arranged in Ephraim's home.
+Articles of clothing were distributed to the Chief's family, and what
+pleased him more than anything else, were the cooking utensils, all of
+the newest ware, and in great variety, some of which were curiosities to
+him.
+
+He had four children, the eldest a young man about thirty years of age,
+who had a family of three children; the next, a strong, active native,
+about twenty-five; a medium-sized young woman, almost white, of about
+twenty, and the youngest a lad of seventeen, who was quickly attracted
+to the boys.
+
+These, together with their mother, undertook the task of distributing
+the gifts to the people. Articles of adornment were, of course, the most
+enticing to the natives, and John had anticipated this feeling in the
+selection of the gifts.
+
+After the feast of the good things, John broached the subject next to
+his heart, and that was to explore the island, and particularly the
+caves. In referring to the matter he said:
+
+"I recognize that whatever treasure we may find in them belongs to you,
+and you are entitled to them."
+
+"But they are of no use to us," he responded. "I am not wise in the ways
+of the world, but I am sure that great wealth, in the way of gold and
+silver, would not make my people happy. I agree with you that
+employment, and trying to teach people to help and care for each other,
+is much more likely to make them happy, and besides, the treasures which
+you refer to could not be used by them to any advantage."
+
+"You have spoken wisely," answered John, "nevertheless, we have no need
+of the riches which we may find. My search is for a different sort of
+wealth."
+
+"I do not understand what could be of more advantage, or repay you
+better than gold and silver."
+
+"It is believed that many of these places contain the records of people
+who have lived here thousands of years ago. All over the world hidden
+treasures of that kind have been found, some of them which go to show
+that men lived on the earth hundreds of thousands of years."
+
+"You are much wiser than I am, and understand the reason for making such
+a search, but I do not see why that would be of any use to know those
+things."
+
+"A great man once said, 'Know thyself,' and another remarked, that the
+'proper study of mankind is man.' To ascertain the origin of humanity,
+how man lived and acted, what were his motives and desires, his beliefs
+and his aspirations, and to know how he has improved, are interesting
+questions to me."
+
+He mused at this statement for a long time, and then quietly said: "That
+may be so; it may make us greater and better men, and it may be
+gratifying to have that knowledge, but I have now arrived at that time
+of life where things appear differently from the way I used to look at
+them. Every year I begin to think less of myself, and more of those
+about me.
+
+"When my children grew up about me they were the only ones I cared for.
+They were the only things in the world that interested me. When my
+grandchildren came they were new inspirations to me, and my views toward
+others changed, and made me feel better inclined."
+
+"That shows, does it not, that as we grow older, and as the world
+increases in age, everything improves, our minds, the advancements in
+the arts, in the sciences, in inventions, and generally in the
+improvement of the human race? It is a part of the whole education which
+man in his improved condition is trying to instill, and it is human
+knowledge, and the desire to learn everything, that gives a stimulus to
+us."
+
+There was no more welcome intelligence than the news that on the
+following day they would visit the first cave in the northern hills, and
+that Ephraim would accompany them. The people in the village were
+delighted at the news that the ancient caves of the Korinos would be
+opened.
+
+The trip took on the nature of a pleasure expedition. Even the family of
+the Chief were insistent on going along, and the boys quickly became the
+friends of Camma, the youngest son of Ephraim, and insisted that he
+should go back with them to Wonder Island on a visit when they returned.
+
+Ephraim assented to this most heartily. They showed Camma the workings
+of the revolver, and presented him with one of them. Then, when they
+went to the ship, he was presented with a camera, and an outfit for
+developing.
+
+When the boys brought back a small hand sewing machine, and gave it to
+Mene, young Camma's sister, the joy in that family was beyond all
+bounds. Ephraim stood before the little machine, as though paralyzed. It
+acted like a human being, only more perfectly, as its work showed.
+
+But now for the caves. Sufficient food was taken along to make the trip
+a comfortable one. The village in which Ephraim lived was nearly a half
+day's journey from the original site of the town that was occupied by
+the old Chief. He had founded the new site, near the sea, because of the
+exposed condition of the old village, and also on account of the
+unsanitary condition of the surroundings.
+
+The caves were near the old town, and it required nearly five hours to
+make the trip, but it was enjoyable, every step of the way. The three
+boys engaged in hunting, on the way, because the new toy in Camma's
+hands had to be put to use. Ephraim put no restraint on the jolly pranks
+of the boys. John was careful to tell him that Harry and George were not
+wild or reckless, and that Camma would find them healthy comrades.
+
+Shortly after noon, they were told that the first of the caves would be
+found in the hill toward the right, and that the work of opening the
+principal one would not be undertaken until after luncheon.
+
+You may be sure that the boys made a hurried meal, and without waiting
+for the workers to come up, they grasped their weapons, and were soon
+half way up the hill, their guide, an old man, who knew the location of
+the caves, being with them, to show the way.
+
+The old man pointed to the rocky wall, and indicated where the opening
+was. Ephraim had closed it effectually, for they saw the evidence of the
+wall before them, where its comparatively smooth surface showed the
+difference between the natural wall and the rough rocks elsewhere.
+
+"Where is the other cave?" asked George.
+
+"It is on the other side," he answered.
+
+"And is that also closed?"
+
+"Yes; just as you see this."
+
+When the workers came up John directed them how to commence at the top,
+and take out a rock at a time. He smiled as he saw how well the work had
+been done, and Ephraim was gratified at the praise bestowed.
+
+"You certainly made a first class job of ashlar work," remarked John.
+
+"What is that?" asked Ephraim, in surprise.
+
+"It is just this kind of masonry where the courses are irregular, and
+built up from the rock just as it came from the quarry."
+
+"I was not aware that there were different kinds of masonry. I thought
+that masonry was merely the placing together of stones so they would
+bind each other, and that is the way I had them do it."
+
+"Masonry is one of the oldest of the arts. It is really the foundation
+stone of architecture. The work you have done here happens to be of rock
+that has a rather smooth outline, that is, the stone broke off smooth,
+in the upper layers, but the large pieces near the bottom represent what
+is called rubble work."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 12. Types of Masonry._]
+
+"This is very interesting to know," remarked Ephraim.
+
+[Illustration: "_The old man pointed to the rocky wall_" [See p. 152]]
+
+"I might add," continued John, "that when the courses are not regular it
+is called _broken_ ashlar; when stones of less than one foot in breadth
+are used it is called _small_ ashlar; if the wall is backed by
+rubble, or inferior work it is called _bastard_ ashlar. Then every kind
+of surface has a particular name, like the _random-tooled_, where the
+tool marks are shown in all directions; _rusticated_ when only the
+joined edges are trimmed up; _prison-rustic_ when it is pitted with deep
+holes; _herring-bone_ when it is tooled in rows of opposite directions
+to each other; and _nigged_ when finished up with a pointed hammer."
+
+Within an hour the stones were removed and put aside, and then Ephraim
+was treated to another surprise when he was made acquainted with the
+little electric flash lights which John exhibited. With these they
+entered the cave.
+
+All savage tribes have some sort of animals, as pets, and dogs are the
+most frequent. This was the case among these people. The dogs were with
+the party, and, as usual, ahead of the procession. Two of them went
+ahead on a scouting expedition, while John and the boys, with their
+flash lights followed.
+
+After they had gone, probably two hundred feet, there was a slight
+descent apparent in the floor of the cave, and ahead were the two dogs
+stretched out, lifeless.
+
+George ran ahead, as he noticed them, and John shouted out: "Do not
+touch them!"
+
+He stopped, and looked back, and then slowly walked up to the animals.
+John requested the party to halt, and he went forward, and put his foot
+on one of the dogs. "We must go back," he said.
+
+"Are they dead?" asked Harry, as he came forward.
+
+"Why not take them out and see what the trouble is?" inquired Harry.
+
+"No need for that," responded John. "I know what the trouble is."
+
+"Is there any danger in the cave?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+Ephraim and the natives were now alarmed. It will be remembered that the
+universal belief among the natives is, that to go into these caves
+unbidden, means death. True, John had shown the fallacy of this on
+several occasions, but here was positive evidence that death had visited
+the dogs, and this might be the fate of those who attempted to go on.
+
+But the most alarming thing was the fact that John himself was the one
+who said there was danger, and that they must return. He did not venture
+to make an explanation until they were out of the cave.
+
+"There is carbonic acid in the cave, and as it is a deadly poison we
+cannot go in until it is removed."
+
+"That seems singular," responded George. "I went in as far as the dogs,
+and it didn't affect me."
+
+"But you did not reach down to touch the dog."
+
+"I saw you touch the dog, and it didn't seem to affect you."
+
+"I touched it with my feet and not with my hands."
+
+"I cannot see what difference that makes."
+
+"If you had touched the dog with your hands it would have brought your
+face down near the floor of the cave, and the gas is at the bottom of
+the cave only."
+
+"Why should it be there and not all over?"
+
+"Because it is much heavier than the air we breathe, and remains at the
+bottom, just like water. If you recall, this part is lower than the
+corridor through which we came, so that it could not run out. I have
+always observed that in all the other caves the floors within were
+higher than the entrance, and in such cases there is no liability of
+getting poisonous gases."
+
+"But how are we to make the investigation, under the circumstances?"
+
+"We must remove the gas."
+
+"How can that be done?"
+
+"Several ways are open; one would be to tap the floor and drain the gas
+out, which would be difficult to do with our resources. Another plan
+would be to force in a lot of air, so as to render the gas inert, or we
+might put in enough air to make it burn, and consume it."
+
+"Why, will it burn?"
+
+"Most assuredly; all it needs is enough air; but I am afraid this plan
+will not be a very safe one for us. If the floor of the cave is not at
+any place more than four feet below the entrance, we can go about
+safely, but in such case we must move about with the utmost caution, so
+as not to get too much of the gas in the system."
+
+"I am afraid it will be a difficult thing to go in unless we know
+absolutely where the low places are, or unless we survey the bottom of
+the cave," said George, brightening up at the idea.
+
+"What would happen if we threw a light into the bottom where the gas
+is?"
+
+"It would be extinguished instantly," remarked John.
+
+"That gives me an idea," asserted George. "Why not take a lamp, and
+carry it ahead of us, about three feet from the ground, and whenever
+that goes out, it will show there is gas there?"
+
+"That is a good observation; but I am afraid it would be very dangerous
+to do that."
+
+"Dangerous? I thought you said that the carbonic gas would put out the
+light?"
+
+"So it will; but if three parts of air should be added to one part of
+the gas it will make an explosive mixture,--that is, a mixture which
+will burn, as there has been enough oxygen added to support combustion."
+
+"In what way could enough air mix with the gas to make it burn?"
+
+"By stirring it; the movement of the body might make an admixture just
+above the surface of the gas, which would burn, and that might mean a
+catastrophe for us."
+
+"Then we are certainly stopped at this cave."
+
+"Not by any means," rejoined John, and he saw the boys' faces smiling
+again. "We must make a safety lamp."
+
+"Do you mean a lamp that will not explode the gas, although it has
+enough oxygen to 'support combustion,' as you say?"
+
+"Exactly. Have you ever heard of the Humphrey Davy lamp? Well, that was
+invented to meet the very condition found here."
+
+"Tell us about it."
+
+"In 1816 Davy discovered that a flame would not pass through a fine wire
+gauze, while conducting some experiments. It occurred to him that use
+could be made of this discovery by surrounding the flame of a lamp with
+gauze, and the well-known lamp was built on that principle."
+
+"What I am curious to know is, that if it will not burn the gas, will it
+go out if it gets down in the gas?"
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps._]
+
+"Yes; because enough air, or oxygen must go through the mesh to support
+combustion of the flame itself. If it does not get enough it is
+smothered."
+
+"Then why not make a lamp of that kind?"
+
+"But where can we get enough gauze to make a cylinder big enough to go
+around a lamp?"
+
+John laughed at the serious predicament, which expressed itself in the
+faces of the boys. "That is true," he said; "but if we can get a small
+piece of tin, we can punch it full of fine holes, and probably make
+that answer."
+
+"We haven't anything in the way of tin large enough to go around a lamp,
+but here is a round piece, about three inches in diameter."
+
+"That will answer; punch that as full of holes as possible, and be sure
+they are very small."
+
+"What shall we use for a lamp?"
+
+John was already looking around, and soon spied a tree in the distance
+that looked like a small pine, and beneath that he found some cones, a
+dozen of which were picked up.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig 14. How John made the Lamp._
+ _A. Perforated Disk_
+ _B. Frame of Sticks_
+ _C. Cloth Covering_
+ _D. Base Plate._]
+
+"That is a pine tree, isn't it?"
+
+"Yes; these cones will burn for some time."
+
+"But they will not make much of a light."
+
+"No; but we are not after a light, but they will do for testing
+purposes."
+
+The accompanying sketches show how it was made. A plate was used for a
+base, on which the burning cone was placed. A half dozen twigs were
+then provided, and these were bent U-shaped, after being secured
+together at their middle portions, and the lower ends held by a cord,
+and this was then inverted, and a piece of thin cotton goods, of a
+single thickness, only was wound around the little frame, leaving an
+opening at the top, which was covered by the perforated tin disk.
+
+"There, now we have an article which provides for the admission of air,
+through the cotton goods, and the product of combustion can escape
+through the perforated opening at the top."
+
+The boys danced around with joy, when the cone was ignited, and a bale,
+which was simply a string, attached, so it could be carried
+conveniently.
+
+This time they went on, far beyond the place where the poor dogs lay.
+Occasionally John would lower the device, and when it descended too far,
+the knot would begin to smoke, and this was explained by the statement
+that as it went into the carbon gas, less and less air was supplied,
+which caused the flame to die down.
+
+The cave was similar to the others, being white from the lime deposits,
+but in all their wanderings they had never seen anything to compare with
+the beautiful hangings noted in the interior, particularly in the
+chambers, which they passed, one after the other, four of which were
+especially admired.
+
+Ephraim was intensely interested. He never had taken the trouble to
+visit any of these caverns, and was not disposed to take much stock in
+the many tales that had been related about the weird interiors.
+
+"I can now understand," he said, "why the natives possessed such a fear
+of them. I have faced many perilous conditions, during my life here, but
+I confess if I had any faith in the superstitions about these places,
+they would have paralyzed me, now that I have seen their ghostly
+appearance."
+
+They suddenly emerged into a spacious chamber, so large that their
+voices seemed to reverberate. The flash lights were directed to all
+sides and to the immense vaulted and icicle-covered ceiling. John stood
+the lamp on the ground. It was free from the dangerous gas. The floor
+was fairly level, but it was covered with the broken hangings from the
+ceiling.
+
+"I see an outlet, directly opposite the one we came by," exclaimed
+George.
+
+The party hastened across the intervening space. They were traveling
+along the greatest length of the chamber. Midway between the two
+openings were two other side openings, and John stopped and exclaimed:
+"It is true! We have found it!"
+
+The boys had never seen John so agitated before. They pressed around and
+requested an explanation, but he fumbled in his pocket, and soon drew
+forth a carefully wrapped piece of brown paper.
+
+"This is parchment. It contains the sketch of the cave that has been the
+object of my search. I believe we are the only white people who have
+ever been privileged to enter it since the chart was made three
+centuries ago."
+
+Ephraim, as well as the boys, glanced about them. What was there to
+excite him? Other caves had the same sort of formation, the chambers and
+the openings: and while they wondered John drew a compass from his
+pocket, and after holding it for a while, continued:
+
+"This chamber runs north and south as you see. We entered on the south
+side. It had two other outlets, one to the east, the other to the west."
+
+"Then it is the cross-shaped cave!" almost shouted George.
+
+"Yes," answered John, as he fixed his eyes on the boys. "In the year
+1620, a Spanish navigator found a cave, of which this is a description,
+and within it were found the remains of hundreds of people."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE CHART AND THE CAVES
+
+
+John pored over the map, without going any further. Evidently something
+was passing in his mind, for occasionally his eyes left the paper and he
+looked about, as though undecided.
+
+"Do you know any more about what they found?"
+
+"Yes; there are many incomplete portions belonging to the history, but
+it may be summed up by the statement, that they also found an immense
+amount of treasure, much of it in the form of solid gold. The
+adventurers were wild with joy at the discovery, and took steps to
+remove it.
+
+"Before proceeding far they found carvings and inscriptions, the latter
+of which were unintelligible to them, but they were very curious,
+judging from the few sketches which were made. But like many men of
+their class they began to quarrel over the treasure, and fought each
+other to the death."
+
+"That was just like the fellows who lived in the cave at the Cataract,"
+suggested Harry.
+
+"No doubt that was over the treasure, too, there, as well as here. Four
+of the men escaped, only to be chased by savages, and after finally
+reaching their vessel were almost wrecked because they did not have
+enough properly to man the ship.
+
+"After reaching civilization, they engaged a number of men, and
+returned. Some went in, among them two of the original discoverers. They
+did not return for some days, and another party went in, but they did
+not return.
+
+"Only one of the four remained, and when their companions did not
+return, the others took fright and returned to the vessel. Juan Guiterez
+was the name of the sole survivor of the first expedition. The
+adventurers who accompanied him declared that he and his company had
+lured them to the strange isle, in order to destroy them, and on the
+return to the first Spanish port, he was cast into prison, and remained
+a prisoner for nearly twenty years.
+
+"This chart, or what remains of it, or from which this copy was made was
+written by him while in prison, but the singular thing is, that while he
+was explicit in many things, he did not leave a clue as to the location
+of the island. Many of the things on it, as you see, are very faint."
+
+The boys now examined the chart for the first time. Harry started back
+in surprise, as he pointed to the chart, and looked up at John. "Why,
+there are the same marks we found on the skull at Wonder Island!" he
+exclaimed in great excitement.
+
+"Quite true! and do you now wonder why I have been so much interested to
+find the location? Chance has thrown this opportunity our way. It is
+true we might be mistaken, but the description fits."
+
+It would require pages to tell about what they found in the recesses of
+the cavern. Hundreds and hundreds of skeletons were discovered, and the
+most curious tablets and carvings in hieroglyphics were scattered in the
+adjoining chamber.
+
+Peculiarly-formed tools, implements of warfare, also of metal, small
+slabs of uniform size, and with characters on both sides, which might
+have been the historical books of the singular people who lived here
+ages ago, were in profusion not only in the large chamber, but in the
+most unexpected places.
+
+To John it was a vast storehouse of archeological wealth. To the boys it
+was much more. There were still some things that John did not explain,
+and which they wanted to know.
+
+"Do you believe that the different parties went in and never came back
+again?" asked George.
+
+"I have no doubt but the account was true."
+
+"What became of them?"
+
+"They probably met the fate that almost overtook us when we first went
+in," was the answer.
+
+The parchment was correct in the main details, as to the records within
+the cave, but there were no treasure, nor could any trace be found of
+them. They spent several days in the search, but to no avail. The boys
+were not much disappointed, it may be said, but they were gratified to
+know that John had accomplished the one desire of his life, and they
+knew, also, that it would be a source of great joy to the Professor.
+
+It was found that the cave entrance at the opposite side of the hill was
+the northern outlet to the same set of caverns, and Ephraim did not know
+of any others that existed in the northern part, so that they did not
+feel it to be desirable to take up more time in this direction.
+
+They had now found two isles, besides their own loved island, and when
+they assembled that evening in the cabin of the _Pioneer_, they had a
+most earnest conversation as to the results of their latest enterprise.
+
+"We have sought the treasures of the islands, and what have we
+accomplished?" asked George.
+
+"What have we accomplished? I have been thinking that to find the
+natives here, and to be able to help them, is a pretty big thing in
+itself," answered Harry.
+
+"That is true," he responded, "and the same thing might be said, also,
+about the wonderful products of the islands; they are certainly worth
+coming here for. I wonder what Blakely would say if he knew of all there
+is here, and the knack shown by the natives to handle the things?"
+
+"I am in sympathy with your views," said John. "Treasures, like gold and
+silver, are worth seeking for, but when you find that the earth is
+inviting people to till it, and there are people who, through ignorance,
+do not know how the earth can be utilized, it is a great privilege to be
+able to help them, and the recollection of what you have done will be
+the greatest treasure not only to you but to the poor people that have
+been benefited."
+
+"I think Ephraim's story is a wonderful one," said George, "but he could
+not go far. His education was limited, but see what he has done with the
+little he knew."
+
+"It was curious, however, that the cannibals had fear for him. I cannot
+understand that," rejoined Harry.
+
+"Savages are children only. They have the capacities of full grown men,
+but have never had the opportunities. Their superstitions lead them
+into singular forms of reasonings. With them the deformed are objects of
+curiosity, and generally, of reverence. Those mentally deficient are
+regarded as possessing a superior spirit."
+
+"I remember that the Professor told us so on one occasion, but it seems
+to be singular that they should get that view. How do you account for
+it?"
+
+"That is a trait, or, I may say, a belief which is not at, all uncommon
+among civilized people. Throughout Europe many men, who lived years ago,
+are reverenced as Saints, and, who, from the accounts given of them,
+were demented. Why, it is even claimed that there is but one step from
+the abnormally gifted to the insane person."
+
+"Is that really so regarded among learned men?"
+
+"It has been the subject of many remarkable books which have been
+written to show that genius and insanity are closely allied. Take, for
+instance, the case of Blind Tom, an ignorant negro, who, although he
+could not read, nor did he know a single note of music, was able,
+nevertheless, to play the most marvelous music, and repeat, at a single
+hearing, an entire musical score."
+
+"But such talents, as that, I have heard, is only in some particular
+direction. He was not able to do anything else," suggested George.
+
+"Quite true. But it is so with what is called genius. I once knew a
+learned minister, a leading professor in one of the colleges, who was
+absolutely devoid of any other phase of education, except theology. He
+could not master the first rudiments of mathematics, and knew no more of
+astronomy than a ten year old boy, but he was supreme in his particular
+branch of knowledge."
+
+But the great question with John and the boys was the future. Two
+islands had been discovered. Some of the mysteries of the past three
+years had been solved, but others still remained; in fact, those which
+interested them the most, were still shrouded in a veil through which
+there was only the slightest glimpse.
+
+John felt that their first duty would be thoroughly to explore the
+island to the north and west of the village, and thus enable them to
+make a complete report when they returned to Wonder Island, and this
+course was finally decided upon.
+
+The spirit of John had now entered Ephraim. He had fully agreed to
+accompany them in the _Pioneer_, and learn of their great work on that
+island. He said that it was his duty to his children and to the natives
+who had stood by him so nobly, to provide for their future welfare.
+
+He was most active in arousing the people to an understanding of the
+mission of John and the boys. Within a day, all preparations were made
+for the journey through the island, and Ephraim was with them in order
+to learn all that might be necessary, so that when he returned he could
+advise the people.
+
+For more than a week they tramped through the attractive portions of the
+land, and then the day was set for departure.
+
+"I have been thinking of making a trip to your friends in the South,"
+said John, as they were dining at Ephraim's home, the day before the
+date of sailing.
+
+"That would please me more than anything else," replied Ephraim. "It
+occurs to me that is the first step toward peace and prosperity on the
+island."
+
+"Then we shall sail to their village, and from that place go to Venture
+Island, where we had our first adventures, stopping, on the way at
+Hutoton, where they have a criminal colony."
+
+"What is that?" inquired Ephraim. "A criminal colony?"
+
+"Yes," said John. "On the large island to the south, which we discovered
+before we came here we found a singular condition of things. Near the
+southern end of the island we came into contact with a tribe ruled over
+by a Chief, named Beralsea, a powerful man; in fact, there is no law
+there except the will of the Chief."
+
+The boys were now laughing immoderately, and Ephraim was moved to smiles
+at their mirth. "It must have been very amusing, I have no doubt," he
+said.
+
+"We were thinking of the jolly time we had when Sutoto married the
+Chief's daughter," said George.
+
+"We shall tell you all about it on our way there," added Harry.
+
+"I was about to say," continued John, as he also smiled at the
+reminiscence, that his views on theft were most peculiar. He did not
+regard it as a crime if the people stole from each other. But if they
+attempted to steal from him, or tried to deceive him, it was such a
+great crime, that the unfortunates were banished to a place called
+Hutoton, which, as he stated, meant the Place of Death.
+
+"We were informed that it was a terrible place, and when a man was
+sentenced it also meant a like sentence to all of his family, and that
+no one was ever known to return from that horrible prison home."
+
+"I have heard, but only vaguely, that there was such a place, but had no
+idea that it was so near to us. But did you verify the character of the
+place?"
+
+"We went there, and instead of finding a barren and uninviting spot, and
+misery and want, we saw a lovely village, and people so much more
+advanced than those in the village ruled over by the Chief, that we were
+amazed.
+
+"The ruler there treated us handsomely, and had even taken care in the
+most kindly manner, of a white man who had escaped the rigors of the sea
+some years before, and who was demented, or incapable, through
+paralysis, of recognizing those around him."
+
+Ephraim started as John said this. "A white man, did you say? How old
+was he? Where is he now?"
+
+"We sent him to Wonder Island where the Professor has taken care of him,
+no doubt," Harry interjected.
+
+"You appear agitated. Have I recalled anything that might give a clue to
+his identity?" queried John.
+
+"No; it could not be possible! It was merely a passing fancy. Strange,
+how things sometimes will affect you. No, I do not know that I can add
+anything to your knowledge concerning him." The subject was not again
+alluded to during that day.
+
+Ephraim and his family were taken aboard the _Pioneer_. Everything was
+marvelous to them. The cabin with its complete furnishings, the musical
+instruments, the phonograph, the piano player, which acted like a
+wizard, because it gave out the sweet musical tones, as though it were a
+living thing, and then a moving picture screen, which was the last thing
+the boys installed before they left New York, made up a series of
+entertainments for the family that had no end of marvels for them.
+
+"To think of it; for fifty-two years this is the first time I have paced
+the decks of a vessel. It is the happiest day of my life." And Ephraim
+could scarcely keep the tears from coming. Happiness shows itself in
+that way with the strongest, not with the weakest. The strong man can
+stand the miseries and the sufferings much better and with a braver
+front than the weak; but excessive joy will break him down so that he
+manifests it more easily.
+
+John saw his emotion and sympathized with him. Taking him by the arm he
+led him to the cabin forward, and as they entered the cozy library, he
+pointed to the books. This was the end of Ephraim for that day.
+
+Without leaving the room he moved from case to case and scanned shelf
+after shelf, and when John, on one occasion came in, he heard him
+mutter: "Is there another place like this on earth?"
+
+Late that evening the _Pioneer_ took down part of its sail as they
+approached land in the distance.
+
+"We are nearing Hutoton," shouted George.
+
+Stut ordered the whistle to blow, and before the landing was reached the
+shore was lined with the people. They soon recognized the visitors, and
+the boats were prepared before the anchor finally dropped.
+
+The entire crew of the _Pioneer_ went ashore, and Ephraim was curious to
+see the head man, and have a conversation about the manner in which the
+colony was conducted.
+
+The boys could not understand the change of plans. Why did they not stop
+at the southern part of the island, and visit the Malosos, who were
+supposed to be Ephraim's enemies?
+
+It was learned that John and Ephraim, after the vessel started,
+concluded it would be wiser to visit Hutoton first and get all the
+information possible from them concerning the time, condition, and
+circumstances of the casting ashore of the white man found there when
+John and his party made their visit.
+
+In explanation of their action, it may be well, also, to state that they
+still had on board of the _Pioneer_, the white man they had rescued or
+taken from the stockade in the Malosos village, and that there were
+certain things in his tale that seemed improbable to John.
+
+The visit to Hutoton might be able to clear up the mystery, and possibly
+establish the identity of the paralyzed man, and in that event it would,
+not be necessary to go directly to the Malosos village but await their
+return from Venture Island before visiting the village.
+
+While the old man was being taken from the vessel, George went to John
+and inquired: "Did he ever tell you his name?"
+
+"Oh, yes; he says it is Henry D. Retlaw."
+
+All noticed that he stole furtive glances about him as he was being
+conveyed to the village.
+
+"Were you ever here before?" asked John, as they neared the house of the
+magistrate.
+
+He shook his head vigorously, and answered "No!" with a vehemence that
+startled John.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+RESCUE ISLAND
+
+
+Orders had gone out to prepare to receive the visitors in true Hutoton
+style, but, in truth, the people did not need any urging. The
+remembrance of the last visit, when the gifts were so judiciously
+distributed, was sufficient to assure a generous welcome.
+
+It was out of the question to leave that night, and John felt it to be a
+duty to cultivate their acquaintance, and confer with the chief
+magistrate about starting the people at work gathering the native
+products.
+
+John announced that within a month it was proposed to establish regular
+sailings between that port and Wonder Island, which would enable them to
+get supplies and ship their products each week. This intelligence was
+then imparted to the people, who received it with the greatest
+enthusiasm.
+
+"One of the objects of the present visit is to take you with us to
+Wonder Island," said John, addressing the leader, "so that you may learn
+what we are doing, and come back prepared to instruct your people."
+
+When this information was conveyed to him, he cast down his eyes, and
+said sorrowfully: "But I am a convict, like the others, and I have been
+condemned to stay here. If I leave this place I disobey the law of the
+Chief."
+
+John smiled as he replied: "I have provided for all that. You will meet
+your Chief Beralsea in Unity, the Capital of Wonder Island. Hutoton is
+no longer the terrible place that the Chief pictured to us. He told me
+that your assistance was necessary to him and to the people in the
+colony."
+
+This information was received in gratitude, and his consent was thus
+readily obtained.
+
+After a night of feasting, preparations were made for the departure.
+Retlaw was brought to the place where the paralyzed man was discovered,
+and the leader Caramo accompanied them.
+
+The moment Caramo saw him he turned to John and said: "I have seen that
+face before. I am sure he accompanied another man when on one occasion a
+boat load came ashore a long way to the south of us."
+
+"How long ago was that?"
+
+"Not more than three suns ago."
+
+It must be understood that _three_ suns meant with these people, three
+years by our reckoning. When Retlaw was examined he denied that he had
+ever been on the island before, and, of course, there was no way to
+discredit his statements. After all, Caramo might be mistaken in
+identifying him, as they were some distance apart at the time the island
+was supposed to have been visited by Retlaw.
+
+At noon of the following day the _Pioneer_ weighed anchor, and set sail
+for the southern port of the northern island, there to visit Chief Ta
+Babeda, of the Malolos.
+
+While they were skimming the shore south of the village, George said:
+"There is one thing we have neglected. We have had so much to do lately
+that we haven't found time for it, but there is an opportunity now."
+
+"What is that?" asked Harry.
+
+"We have no name for the island to which we are now going. We might
+consult Ephraim. It would be hardly fair to impose any sort of name on
+his country," suggested George, with a good humored laugh.
+
+Ephraim was delighted at the idea. "We must have a name, assuredly, but
+it never occurred to me before. The natives called it Rescudada; at any
+rate that is as near as I can recall the pronunciation of the word."
+
+"Why, that is almost like Rescue."
+
+"Why wouldn't that be a good name?" asked Ephraim. "There has been
+considerable rescue work here, and it is going on all the time."
+
+"That's the name for it!" exclaimed Harry, enthusiastically.
+
+"Suppose we notify General John and Skipper Stut that the Geographical
+Society has just named the island 'Rescue'?"
+
+This important function was attended to and a note made in the log that
+the island discovered in south latitude 41° 37' 10", and west longitude
+138° 2' 56", by the steamship _Pioneer_, was formally named _Rescue_.
+
+Long before the village was reached the great fog horn of the _Pioneer_
+commenced to give the signal. The villagers knew what it meant, and the
+old Chief himself was at the landing place to welcome the visitors.
+
+The boats were manned by the sailors, and the boys, together with John,
+Ephraim, and Caramo, were in the first boat. When Ta Babeda gazed at
+Ephraim, he was astounded. John had not informed him of the name of his
+visitor, but he continued to gaze at him in amazement.
+
+It was evident that the old Chief was impressed with his appearance, so
+unlike anything he had ever before known in the form of a human being.
+When they arrived at the Chief's house, John awaited the proper time
+before making the introductions, and finally said:
+
+"It gives me pleasure to introduce to you, the greatest enemy you have.
+This is Rumisses, the Cannibal Chief of the Umbolos."
+
+The Chief was startled beyond measure. True, he knew that John and his
+party had come into contact with his arch enemy, but this was certainly
+a thrilling way to bring them together.
+
+Ephraim walked forward and seized the Chief by the hand, and then
+pressed his nose against him. This was, of course, symbolic of
+friendship.
+
+The Chief unhesitatingly accepted the token, but he could not remove his
+eyes. Here was the man, so unlike all others, and the impression of
+superiority, undoubtedly, was also in his mind, but Ephraim quickly
+relieved him of his reflections, as he said:
+
+"Because I am so unlike you, is not due to any particular knowledge, or
+favor from the Great Spirit. I am a white man, like the Great Chief
+here, and was unfortunate to be cast among the natives in the north,
+and I have tried for many years to prevent the practicing of the
+sacrifices, and have succeeded."
+
+"But we were told that all the people you captured from us were
+sacrificed."
+
+"It is not true. They are all living with us in perfect happiness and
+contentment."
+
+"Then why is it that we have been so much deceived?"
+
+"Because the Korinos have not told you the truth. They did this because
+they knew no better."
+
+"Yes; the White Chief has told us that they have deceived us, and I
+believe him. But I learn that my Korinos have gone to you for
+protection!"
+
+"Yes; and I have shielded them, and they are now on board of the vessel
+in the harbor."
+
+This information brought back all the native resentment of the old
+Chief. "Then he has brought them back to me!" he exclaimed in great
+earnestness.
+
+"I believe he intends to do so, but it will not be until they go to
+Wonder Island, that marvelous place."
+
+"Then I am content."
+
+John heard the conversation, and soon turned it into another direction,
+when he informed the Chief that the Chief of Venture Island as well as
+the leader of the criminal colony, were to accompany them to Wonder
+Island, and that the company would be incomplete without him and his
+family.
+
+He looked at his visitors for some time, doubting in his mind the
+propriety of such a course, but the entreaties of Ephraim, and the
+urging of Muro and Uraso, were sufficient to decide the question, and
+the only matter that now weighed on his mind was to determine who should
+accompany him in this wonderful voyage.
+
+Ta Babeda had never summoned up sufficient courage, while the ship was
+formerly in port, to board the vessel. His examination of the _Pioneer_
+was made from the shore. Now he would step into a new world.
+
+He little knew what wonders would be exhibited to him. The ship's band
+was the greatest thing he had ever known, and he never tired of its
+music. But when he saw the curious piano, the music box that acted as
+though it had life, and the other evidences of civilized arts, that were
+found in the cabin, he was content to make the best of it.
+
+Like all natives, as we have already stated, he was immoderately fond of
+eating, and the kitchen arrangements, where food was cooked without any
+fuel, interested him beyond everything else. He would sit at the
+entrance of the kitchen for minutes at a time.
+
+The push buttons, the snap switches for the electric lights and for the
+cooking apparatus, were some things which he could not understand. The
+little innocent wires meant nothing to him, nor could the boys, or even
+John, explain the phenomenon to him so he could understand it.
+
+The boys puzzled over this, as he was insistent upon an explanation.
+What finally happened, the very thing the boys tried to avoid in every
+way, came when he touched the two wires, and formed a short circuit
+through his hand.
+
+He emitted one yell, and bounded out through the door, and it was some
+time before he could be induced to make further investigations. His
+expressions were very humorous, particularly when he insisted that the
+wires were mad, and didn't like him, and that they tried to pull his
+arms out of his shoulders.
+
+Harry then took two of the wires and brought them together, and then
+pulled them apart. Each time this was done, a spark would flash. The
+object was to show that two wires were necessary to produce a circuit or
+a current.
+
+Eventually an inspiration seemed to strike him, as he exclaimed: "They
+are married! Yes, I see!"
+
+The boys laughed as they told John of the circumstance, and how utterly
+impossible it was to produce a current until a circuit was established.
+
+John threw himself back and roared at the recital of the story, as told
+by the boys. "I think his description is a pretty good one. Perhaps he
+was thinking of the family circle?" and John continued to laugh as the
+boys tried to grasp the full meaning of his little joke.
+
+But Ta Babeda was an apt pupil. He was far more acute than Beralsea, and
+there scarcely was an hour but he had one of the boys at his side trying
+to fathom some of the mysteries in the new world. This was in the nature
+of a picnic for the boys, who enjoyed his curious questions and his
+equally unexpected comments.
+
+Ephraim, too, was generally present, as well as Camma, his eldest son,
+the latter evincing remarkable knowledge for one who had never known of
+the wizardry that resides in wood and stones and iron.
+
+To Ephraim this opportunity to open the wide world to his children must
+have been a heaven of delight, and he reveled in every hour and even
+regretted that nature demanded sleep. It seemed to be better awake and
+seeing and feeling. Two weeks prior to this he had merely existed; now
+he was a man again, and living.
+
+It was, indeed, a merry party on board of the noble ship. When the
+Chief, and those about him were told that the vessel was the creation of
+George and Harry, it was another occasion to marvel over.
+
+"Your boys can do the same thing, and make other things just as
+wonderful," said John, as they were commending and petting the boys.
+
+"Do you think so!" asked Ta Babeda, in great earnestness, and for the
+first time showing any curiosity or indicating any desire to give his
+children any advantages.
+
+John saw that the leaven was working, as he replied: "That is why I have
+been so anxious to have you and your children visit our city. Your wife
+and daughters will find as many surprising things to interest them as
+the boys will discover."
+
+The run from Rescue to Wonder Island, would occupy, ordinarily, about
+ten hours, of a complete day, and for that reason the start was made
+early in the morning. Unity was about eight miles from the sea, on a
+large stream, and it was desirable to make the run through the river by
+daylight.
+
+But shortly before noon a wind sprang up from the west, and it increased
+in intensity, so that shortly after the noon hour they were compelled to
+make a long tack to the south. This meant a night on board ship, and a
+stormy one at that.
+
+The wide, wide sea, without the sign of any land in sight was, indeed, a
+fascinating thing to the natives, and how they admired the native
+sailors with whom they readily fraternized. They watched every movement,
+the taking down of the sails, the changing of the angles of the great
+sheets, as they turned in their course, the handling of the tiller, and
+all the paraphernalia of sailing, for the _Pioneer_ depended principally
+on her sailing capacity, and not on the small engine with which she was
+equipped.
+
+The boys explained to Camma, that upon their return to the island a much
+larger engine would be installed, so that they need not depend upon the
+sails thereafter, but would be able then to sail directly through the
+wind, instead of being blown back and forth, as was now the case.
+
+The wind did not abate until the morning was breaking, and then there
+was a welcome change in the direction that the storm was taking. Many of
+the natives were ill, and John had the satisfaction of administering the
+new and lately-discovered remedy, namely, Atropine.
+
+Shortly after ten o'clock the eastern end of Wonder Island was sighted.
+The great mountain range was visible, and the identical headland, where
+the skull with the inscription was found, could be discerned through the
+mild haze.
+
+There was immense curiosity on board the ship as it skirted along the
+shore. The Tuolo landing place was sighted, but they continued past it.
+Two hours afterward they could plainly see the dock which had been
+built for the use of Uraso's people, and an hour later Muro was just as
+much interested to point out to Ephraim and Ta Babeda the landing
+station of his tribe.
+
+Immediately after luncheon, George, who was always on the alert, ran
+through the vessel, with his field glass in hand, and announced that the
+_Wonder_, the large steamship, which made trips to Chili, was coming up
+in the distance, and heading, as they were, for the mouth of Enterprise
+River, which flowed past the city.
+
+All were intensely excited at the announcement, and rushed forward to
+get a glimpse of the great ship. As she came up the streamers began to
+fly from every spar and mast, and Harry ran up to Stut, and asked why
+the _Pioneer_ did not have them out.
+
+"But they are ready and will be flown as soon as we get nearer." As he
+said this the first ones were unfurled. Then the _Wonder_ blew three
+long blasts which the _Pioneer_ answered.
+
+"They are going to let us go in first," said John. Such was, indeed, the
+case, for the _Wonder_ slowed down, and the _Pioneer_ entered the mouth
+of the river, for the last eight miles of the eventful cruise.
+
+Two miles from the town both vessels began to blow signals with the fog
+horns, and long before the wharf was reached the people began to flock
+from all sides.
+
+One little incident pleased the boys beyond all measure. On the bridge,
+and furiously waving his arms, and swinging an American flag was Sutoto,
+with his bride by his side.
+
+"So Sutoto has been on a wedding trip to Chili?" remarked Harry.
+
+Such was the case, as they afterwards learned. Both boys were busy
+explaining the sights and the locations of the different buildings to
+Beralsea and Ephraim, and the latter was much affected as he saw the
+flag floating from the tall staff in the principal square of the city.
+
+Beralsea had seen Sutoto wave the flag from the bridge of the _Wonder_,
+and when he saw the same sort of emblem on the staff, he inquired of
+Ephraim the meaning of the curious thing. It was then explained to him
+that it was the magic combination of colors which their great tribe
+believed in, and which was always raised above them wherever they were,
+as a symbol that they were protected by it.
+
+"But how can that protect the people? Is there something in it like the
+unseen lightning, which we have on the ship?"
+
+"Unseen lightning, is a pretty good name, coming from a savage,"
+remarked Harry in an undertone.
+
+"No; not in that way," answered Ephraim, "but whenever people see it,
+wherever they may be, they know that the tribe is great enough to give
+protection to any one who may try to injure any member of our tribe."
+
+"The White Chief has told me that there are many islands and countries,
+and that the world is round, and is peopled by many different tribes. Do
+the people everywhere know that 'flag,' as you call it?"
+
+"Yes; in every part of the world."
+
+"Who are those two men standing there alone?" asked Ta Babeda.
+
+"I do not know," responded Ephraim. "This is the first time I have been
+here. The boys will know."
+
+"That," answered George, "is the Professor,--that is, the man with a
+white beard and hair. The large man by his side is Beralsea, the Chief
+of the tribe on Venture Island."
+
+Ephraim looked at Ta Babeda for a moment, with an amused smile, and then
+remarked: "He is almost as large as you are."
+
+The _Wonder_ was the first to get her cables to the dock, and as she
+swung against the wharf, and the gang plank was fixed in place, the
+first ones to spring ashore were Sutoto and Cinda, the latter of whom
+rushed to her father's outstretched arms, and then to her mother and the
+other members of the family.
+
+The boys did not know how or where to extend the first greetings. There
+was Sutoto and Lolo, and the dear old Professor, who considerately kept
+in the background, but the boys insisted on giving him the first
+greeting.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+THE RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND
+
+
+"That was an awfully sly thing to do, as soon as our backs were turned,"
+said George, as Sutoto and Cinda were finally free from the vigorous
+greetings.
+
+"What is that?" asked Cinda.
+
+"To run away without giving us notice!"
+
+"But we have seen the great wide world, and it is wonderful, and I can
+never tell the people here how grand it is."
+
+And then the boys looked at Cinda, and when they saw the latest fashions
+displayed, the prettiest gown, the neatest slippers, and the stunning
+hat they took off their caps, and made a neat bow in recognition of that
+feminine touch of character which so readily adapts the sex for
+acquiring the latest fashions wherever they may be.
+
+Every one was wild with excitement. "There is Blakely!" shouted Harry.
+"Hurrah! old boy! We have the place for you to visit, as soon as
+possible. The finest island you ever saw, and the people all ready for
+business."
+
+"My hands are full now; we must have another ship. Look at the _Wonder_;
+she is so full of goods that we are more than eight hours behind time.
+But I am arranging for another steamer."
+
+"Too bad that we are finding more islands than you can handle,"
+responded George; "I suppose we shall have to find another manager?"
+
+"Or several assistants," said Blakely.
+
+"What are all these men here for?" asked Harry. "Why the whole island
+must have come to town."
+
+"Well, we have had to send for all the spare men from the different
+tribes. Fifty of the Tuolos just came in this morning, and thirty of the
+Illyas arrived yesterday, with their families. The _Wonder_ must be
+unloaded, and start back again before six this evening. But what did you
+find that looks as good as Venture Island?"
+
+"Rescue Island; a dandy place, and much bigger than Venture Island. And
+what do you think? We found a chief there who is a white man," remarked
+George.
+
+"A white man? Where is he from?"
+
+"Massachusetts; and he is humpbacked, but as bright as can be."
+
+"I saw him, did I not? He was on the _Pioneer_?"
+
+"Yes; there he is with Ta Babeda."
+
+"Ta what?"
+
+"That's the Chief's name who owned the other tribe on Rescue Island.
+Isn't he an immense fellow? But he is a brick; I can tell you. Come over
+and I'll introduce you," and Harry pulled Blakely over while the latter
+resisted, as the men were constantly besieging Blakely for orders.
+
+"Never mind the work now. Get acquainted with the _big_ men first," and
+the Professor laughed as he saw the boys forcibly tug at Blakely and
+haul him over to the group.
+
+"This is one of the big men we have on the island," said Harry to Ta
+Babeda, and the latter looked at Blakely for a moment, and began to
+smile, for while Blakely was chunky he was not at all large, if the
+Chief might be taken as a standard.
+
+He took Ta Babeda's hand, and welcomed him most heartily, and then
+turned to Ephraim, and also extended a greeting.
+
+"This is the man who does all the business," said Harry, "and he is
+going to make you a visit." At this point they were interrupted.
+
+"Shall we store all the pineapples aft," said a man hurriedly.
+
+"No; put them amidship," he answered.
+
+"We have no crates for the vegetables," said another.
+
+"Never mind, put them in the large boxes, and they can be crated on the
+way."
+
+"Some more men have just come; what shall we put them at?" was the
+report of another, and so from one to the other, Blakely was ever ready
+with a prompt answer.
+
+The Chiefs and Ephraim watched and wondered at Blakely and his constant
+readiness to entertain them, meanwhile giving orders to hundreds of the
+workers who were crowding about. It was an object lesson of what
+business meant, and the boys felt proud and happy to see the great
+ability which he displayed.
+
+But what a happy day it was for the Professor. He and John were in close
+conference, after the formal introductions were over. "There is
+something brewing," said George as he nudged Harry, and cast a glance
+toward the place where they stood in earnest conversation.
+
+"I do believe John is telling him about the copper box; and by the way,
+he has never spoken about that since we took it out of the cave. That is
+just what he is doing; see, he is indicating the size of it."
+
+Harry laughed, as he answered: "I am satisfied they will not do anything
+rash, without consulting us," and George laughed at Harry's view of the
+case.
+
+They had been absent from the island a little over a month. During their
+absence the new hotel was completed and was now in running order. This
+became the headquarters for the visitors. While it was only two stories
+in height, it contained nearly a hundred rooms, and the utmost effort
+was made to make all of them comfortable.
+
+The boys had their own rooms, and could not be induced to give them up.
+John and the Professor also maintained their old rooms, which were most
+comfortable, and attached to the Professor's apartments was a large room
+where the people came daily to see him and consult about their many
+wants.
+
+He never failed to see them. It mattered not who called, it was
+unvarying custom to greet all alike. The affection for him in the minds
+of the people grew stronger day by day.
+
+There were now five of the Chiefs on Wonder Island permanent residents
+in Unity. A great change had come over the feelings of the people with
+respect to the ownership of land. When the town was laid out, and the
+people began to flock to the place, attracted by its many advantages,
+it began to look for a time as though the different Chiefs soon would
+find themselves without subjects.
+
+In addition to this the Professor recognized that too many of the people
+were expecting to be put to work in the city, and this would cause
+agriculture to be abandoned, whereas it was obvious that they must
+depend upon the soil for sustenance.
+
+John and the Professor therefore developed a plan which would be the
+means of keeping the people in their own sections, or, at least,
+encourage them to till the ground.
+
+The Chiefs in Wonder Island owned the soil. Their people reserved to
+themselves the right to hunt and to gather the fruits and nuts necessary
+to sustain life. But they had no right whatever, independently of the
+Chiefs.
+
+The first step, therefore, was to gain the consent of these rulers to a
+division of the land, so that all their people might have farms. Uraso
+and Muro were the first to agree to the plan, and it was quickly
+followed by all except the Tuolos and the Illyas.
+
+The Chiefs themselves, under this plan, were to receive one quarter of
+the acreage, and of the residue, one-third was to be turned into what
+was called a state fund, to be used for schools and for administrative
+purposes, while the balance was to be given to the people, who were to
+select their own land.
+
+For the purpose of enabling proper deeds to be made, it was necessary to
+make a survey of the islands, and this had been completed six months
+previously, so that many of the people who now understood that the lands
+selected belonged to them, and could not be taken from them without
+their consent, were only too happy to consent to remain on their own
+land.
+
+But here another problem presented itself. It was desirable that the
+people should build homes on these farms, and Blakely and John evolved
+the plan to provide certain quantities of lumber, at a low price, to be
+paid for from the products of the land. This had a most stimulating
+effect, and applications were coming in from every quarter. As a result
+small saw mills were put up in the territorial limits of each of the
+tribes, so that it was an easy matter for the people to get the lumber
+near home.
+
+But that which taxed the energies of Blakely most, was to provide the
+farming implements and the seed and instruction necessary to start them
+on the way. As it was impossible to provide all the tools and implements
+required for this purpose, Blakely had recourse to the States, and by
+inserting a few advertisements in the agricultural papers throughout our
+country, it was not long before the implements were forthcoming, all of
+which were paid for from the reserve fund which had been provided.
+
+And now another thing of the utmost importance happened. It was noised
+about from Maine to California that there was an immense opportunity to
+make money in the now well-known Wonder Island. Every return trip of the
+_Wonder_ from the nearest South American port, brought Americans, with
+funds to invest in plantations and in setting out coffee trees and
+banana groves.
+
+Many Americans came from the great ranches of South America,
+particularly Brazil, which furnishes full three-fourths of all the
+coffee of commerce. These men went through the islands and began the
+barter for the lands.
+
+At first this was encouraged, but it was soon, discovered that the
+shrewd, and, more frequently than otherwise, the unscrupulous traders
+were cheating the unsophisticated people, so that the Professor had to
+take a firm hand, and declare that no transfers would be made until the
+sales had been investigated.
+
+This made the prices of lands go up by leaps and bounds, and the
+Professor told the people that they should not sell their holdings, as
+it would be much better for them to own and till the farms than to sell
+them and then work for the owners.
+
+All this tended to make the people appreciate that they really owned
+something--that they had wealth and power within their grasp. Then
+began, or rather was carried out more systematically, the founding of
+schools, and by many means the parents themselves were induced to attend
+the schools.
+
+All were taught English. With the large funds that the state had
+obtained in selling a portion of the state lands, the Professor sent for
+teachers from the United States, and these came prepared to take up the
+work all over the island.
+
+The most interested workers were the Korinos, as they were called on
+Rescue Island, and Krishnos on Wonder Island. The Professor's first
+work, after the conquest of the savages, was to educate those people for
+teaching, and in this they were found to be very efficient workers.
+
+The Korinos brought from Rescue were placed under the tuition of the
+Krishnos, and it was surprising to see how happily they regarded their
+lot, and what progress they made after they understood what was
+required.
+
+Although we have not a full account of all the products shipped from
+Wonder Island during the first six months, it might be stated that
+during the last thirty days, the shipments from the port of Unity,
+comprised 60,000 pounds of coffee, eighteen tons of bananas, and six
+hundred quintals of spices, besides over four hundred tons of fibres, of
+which jute formed one-half.
+
+It is estimated that within another year, when many of the large
+plantations should be ready to yield their products, that amount would
+be increased to such an extent that several additional ships would be
+necessary to carry the tonnage.
+
+The foregoing is particularly instanced to show what John could point
+out to the Chiefs who were now their guests, and to impress upon them
+the necessity and value of adopting such a land system as they had
+established.
+
+Ephraim readily understood and approved of the plan, but it was not so
+easy for Ta Babeda, and Beralsea. At the quiet suggestion of John the
+opportunity was made whereby they were constantly thrown into contact
+with the resident chiefs. Within a week they accepted the suggestions
+and a half dozen surveyors were commissioned to go to the islands and
+take up the work of surveying the lands, and making records, which were
+to be put into such form that the Chiefs would understand them.
+
+One day Ephraim, in conversation with John said: "I want my boys to
+remain with you until they receive their education. I see that the
+opportunities for work are unlimited, and I would also like to send over
+a number of young men for the same purpose."
+
+"Your decision pleases us immensely," said John, "and I have been
+wondering why your daughter would not also like to remain for a time, as
+there is much she can learn that will be of great help to you."
+
+Ephraim was silent for a while, while he looked at John, and he finally
+answered: "That means my wife will remain here also. But that has my
+hearty consent. It will be for their good, and for the good of my
+people."
+
+It was not long before Ta Babeda heard of Ephraim's decision, and he
+adapted the same course to the delight of his children. As for Beralsea,
+his favorite daughter was already the wife of the Chief Sutoto, of the
+Berees, and it was certain that she would remain in Unity, so that there
+was no difficulty in getting his consent to sending his children and
+others who would carry on the work of education.
+
+But the boys had not, in the meantime, forgotten their factory. The old
+water wheel was still there. Money could not purchase it, and they would
+not permit its removal. It was the same old crude wheel built nearly
+three years before at the Cataract, at the other end of the island, not
+more than two miles from the rocky shore where the sea gave them up.
+
+After the return there had been so much to see and to learn, about the
+new developments, and the visitors required so much attention that the
+boys quite forgot the copper box, and to inquire about the condition of
+the paralyzed man who was found at Hutoton.
+
+"The Professor has just told me," remarked John, "that the old man is
+improving, and hopes that within another month he will be able to talk."
+
+"Has he any idea of what his name is?"
+
+"Not in the least. He keeps mumbling something about _the triangle_, or
+something of that kind, but that is, of course, unintelligible."
+
+"I understand Retlaw is improving, also?"
+
+"Yes; we have thought of bringing the two men together, as soon as the
+paralytic is so improved that he can talk."
+
+"I have often wondered what kind of a disease paralysis is?" inquired
+Harry.
+
+"Paralysis is not a disease of itself. It is merely a sign of some
+disorder of the nervous system. It may be shown by complete disability
+on one side of the body, or in some particular portion, and only certain
+sets of nerves may be affected."
+
+"But what seems so singular is, that he is not only unable to speak but
+he cannot move about."
+
+"The form of paralysis, which affects the memory, is called _dementia
+paralytica_, and attacks the brain, while some portion of the body also
+may be affected."
+
+"Isn't it curable?"
+
+"There is little hope for a permanent cure. If the attack should come on
+suddenly it is the most dangerous. Where it seems to approach gradually,
+there is more likelihood of being able to check it."
+
+"In what way is there an improvement in the old man?"
+
+"So far as the bodily ailment is concerned he is gaining. When he was
+brought back he was unable to utter a single word, nor could he move
+himself in any way, except with one arm, and that only to a small
+degree. Now he is able to shuffle along, across the room, and sometimes
+tries to say something, which is not distinct. The only thing which thus
+far seems intelligible is the word _triangle_, as I have stated."
+
+"Harry spoke about the copper box this morning. Have you opened it yet?"
+asked George.
+
+"Oh, no! I wouldn't think of doing it unless you were present. The
+Professor and I have had several talks about it, but we have all been so
+busy that the matter has been deferred from time to time. I hope we
+shall be able to get at it to-night."
+
+While thus engaged in conversation the Professor appeared, smiling and
+happy. The boys greeted him affectionately, as was their custom always.
+
+"Do you want to make a visit with me?" he asked.
+
+"Yes; where?" asked George.
+
+"We will go out on B Street first," he answered.
+
+Together they passed the large school house, and crossed the open
+square, and entered the most beautiful of all the streets, the one laid
+out with rows of trees along the curbs, and flower beds along the middle
+portion of the driveway.
+
+"Can you guess where we are going?" asked the Professor.
+
+"No."
+
+"Do you see the newly-painted house to the right?"
+
+"Is that where Sutoto lives?"
+
+"Yes; there is Cinda. Isn't she happy, though?"
+
+They went in and were accorded a happy welcome. Her father, the Chief,
+Beralsea, and her mother, Minda, were there, but Sutoto was absent.
+
+"And where is the bridegroom?" asked the Professor.
+
+"He is in the yard somewhere. I will call him." And she tripped out the
+steps, merry as a lark.
+
+Sutoto came in, and the boys simply shouted at his appearance. He was
+covered with dirt and grease, and made no great effort to conceal the
+fact.
+
+"And what have you been up to?" asked George.
+
+"Come out and I will show you."
+
+In the little "garage," if it might be so termed, was an auto, one which
+Sutoto had purchased and brought back with him on his wedding trip. "I
+was going to send for you," he said, addressing Harry, "because I have
+been having trouble with the carbureter."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+THE SAVAGES AT UNITY
+
+
+The boys were simply wild with delight, and George commenced to laugh
+immoderately, after viewing the brightly-polished machine.
+
+"What is the matter? Anything wrong? Is it upside down?" asked Sutoto.
+
+"No; I was just thinking how funny it seems that one of the wild savages
+of the island should be the first to import an automobile."
+
+Sutoto didn't in the least mind this allusion to his former condition,
+but the boys were the only ones who dared to jest with him in this
+manner. He joined in the laugh, but quickly replied:
+
+"But I am not the only one favored in this way."
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"I know some other people who are indulging in pleasure cars also."
+
+"Who is that?"
+
+"Well, Blakely has one, a fine little car he calls a 'runabout.'"
+
+"He never said anything about it. Then he brought one over for John, and
+another for the Professor, but you must keep quiet; they are not to know
+anything about it."
+
+"Then there are two more machines down there that have queer names on
+them, because the fellows themselves are peculiar, and are awfully
+civilized," said Sutoto, with a faint attempt at a smile.
+
+Harry laid down the wrench and turned to Sutoto. "What are the names?"
+he asked, for the first time interested.
+
+"On one it says 'Mayfield,' and 'Crandall' on the other." And Sutoto
+said this without cracking a smile, or indicating that he really knew
+who the names applied to.
+
+Probably, no one on the island, at least among the natives, really knew
+the boys by any other designation than George and Harry. The surnames
+were of no use. Sutoto was simply "Sutoto," and no more, and so with
+Uraso and Muro.
+
+The Professor and the old Chief heard the hilarity, and were soon out of
+the house, and although the boys and Sutoto tried to push the machine
+behind the garage, they were too late for the Professor's quick eye.
+
+He laughed when he saw the commotion. "It is all right; if I were not so
+old, I would get one myself."
+
+"That's just the time you need it," said Harry. "By the way," he
+continued, "I will bring it around to your place this afternoon."
+
+"Bring what?" asked the Professor.
+
+"Your car; of course." And Sutoto and the boys laughed at the
+Professor's discomfiture.
+
+"I thought there was some job about to be put up on me. I wondered why
+Blakely tried to keep me out of the warehouse yesterday."
+
+But while this merry scene was taking place, five new machines were
+coming along B Street, with Blakely in the first one, and a competent
+chauffeur in each of the others.
+
+"The first is yours, Harry, and the next one, with the red body is
+yours, George," said Blakely. "I thought we should surprise you."
+
+"Why, there is John, too!" exclaimed Sutoto.
+
+"Yes; he is in his car; he was greatly surprised. But the Professor's
+car is a neat one; don't you think so?"
+
+The boys had no ears for any one or for anything. Each was a forty-horse
+power roadster, while the Professor's car had a five-passenger body, was
+handsomely upholstered, and equipped with particularly easy-riding
+springs. John's machine was equally well built, and after the boys had
+made a full examination of their own treasures, they investigated the
+other cars, and marveled at their beauty and appearance of comfort.
+
+The procession of the machines naturally attracted the people who came
+from all directions to witness the wonder wagons which ran by
+themselves. They crowded around, and listened to every comment. The old
+Chief was the one most excited at the strange things.
+
+Neither Sutoto nor Cinda had informed them of the autos, because it was
+intended to have quite a surprise party, and it was afterwards learned
+that Blakely and Sutoto had planned to give all of them a surprise. The
+fact that the Professor and the boys, having gone to Sutoto that
+morning, were absent from their homes, precipitated to disclosure, so
+that John was found and together they went to Sutoto's house.
+
+You may be sure that it did not take the boys long to learn the
+mysteries of the machines, and they were with Sutoto, until he got the
+hang of the motor, and could spin along as fast as any of them.
+
+The old Chief was finally induced to get into the Professor's machine,
+and the latter instructed the driver to proceed slowly. Minda, who was
+with them, was the braver of the two, by far. The speed was about six
+miles an hour, at which the Chief marveled.
+
+Then, gradually, the driver speeded up, until they were making a
+comfortable speed of fifteen miles an hour. As confidence increased the
+pleasure grew stronger, and before they returned on the first trip he
+was as determined as could be to have one for his own use.
+
+Blakely took note of his wish, and said: "I shall see to it that on the
+return trip one of the machines will be shipped to you, but it will be
+two weeks before the _Wonder_ comes in."
+
+From that day on Sutoto had his hands full entertaining the Chief, but
+the boys relieved him of much of this, by taking him from place to
+place, where he saw the work going on in all parts of the beautiful
+country, and witnessed the planting of the groves, the gathering of the
+crops, and the way in which the produce was handled at the wharf.
+
+Sutoto's home was a beautiful structure of five rooms, all nicely
+furnished, the gift of the Professor. The boys enjoyed the visits there.
+Sutoto was always a boy to them, and Cinda a happy bride,--and a woman
+of whom any one might be proud.
+
+When Beralsea, her father, decided that his children must remain and
+attend the schools there, the adjoining cottage was prepared for them,
+and Minda consented to stay, but Beralsea, who had now partaken of the
+commercial instincts, under the tutelage of Blakely, was determined to
+return at once and revolutionize the condition of affairs in Venture
+Island.
+
+That day he and Ta Babeda had a long conversation, and together they
+visited John and Ephraim, and then called in Blakely. The boys were
+present, of course, and it then turned out that they had agreed upon a
+plan to start the agricultural work in the two islands conjointly, and
+the only question which remained was to take care of the management of
+the work.
+
+Both of the Chiefs declared that they did not possess the qualifications
+to direct the work, and Ephraim pleaded age as the reason why it would
+be impossible to undertake the burdens.
+
+"I have an idea," he said, "that the best solution would be to make
+George and Harry the managers for the islands. I have been with the boys
+for some time, and see what they are capable of, and every one would be
+glad to work under them."
+
+The boys were, of course, somewhat confused at the encomium, and the
+Professor came to their rescue. "These are my boys," he said. "I have
+known them ever since they came to the island. They have been with me
+under every condition of service. We have had hours and days of
+pleasure, and of trials, such as few have undergone, and always,
+whatever the circumstances, they have been manly, and never gave up,
+although sometimes things seemed hopeless.
+
+"You have seen how, through their ingenuity, they have built the water
+wheel, the mills and the factories. Fortune has been kind to them; they
+do not need the money that may come to them, as they have found riches
+here, far greater than you know, but they have loved the work, for the
+pleasure it has brought them, and it is for them to decide."
+
+"Harry and I have talked about these things many times," answered
+George. "When we first came to the island, we had nothing. For our own
+preservation we set about to better our condition, began to build the
+things necessary to maintain life, and to protect ourselves.
+
+"What at first was a necessity, later became a pleasure, because we
+could see, day after day, how we built the shop and the machinery out of
+the crude things; it would be hard to leave that work now."
+
+Harry approvingly nodded his head, as he responded: "I consider it a
+pleasure to do anything which would help the people here. George and I
+feel that it would be wrong to leave them, so long as we can be of
+service to them.
+
+"The money we have will not make us happy; that I know, unless we can
+use it to do some good. And it is so with our time, also. I am as
+willing to give that as money, because we have been amply rewarded and
+now our duty is to the people here."
+
+As a result of the conference it was agreed that George and Harry should
+take up the management of the affairs on Venture and Rescue Islands,
+they to decide which should be the particular sphere of each.
+
+The Chiefs were immensely pleased at this arrangement, and the first
+steps were taken to put their plans into execution.
+
+John advised them that they should decide which island each would take,
+and then each should cultivate the acquaintance of the young men that
+the Chiefs should select, so that the administrative functions could be
+instilled into them, and that they might be taught the business
+qualifications necessary.
+
+George laughingly remarked that as the Chief Beralsea had so
+accommodatingly captured him, when they first arrived on the island, he
+thought that their intimate acquaintance, which was so long prior to
+Harry's should decide the matter in his favor, by taking Venture Island.
+
+"That suits me all right. I have one advantage over you on Rescue
+Island; and that is the caves. You haven't even an excuse for a cave."
+
+"But I have Hutoton, that terrible place where the criminals live,"
+retorted George, with a laugh.
+
+"And that reminds me; what about the copper box?"
+
+The boys wended their way to the Professor, and were delighted to find
+John there. "Before we go we want to have the copper box opened,"
+remarked Harry.
+
+"I have just brought it around, in the machine," said John, as he
+noticed the boys peering at it through the window.
+
+"What is that in the package lying on the box?"
+
+"Can't you guess?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Have you forgotten the skull with the inscription on it?"
+
+"Do you mean the skull we found on the headland at the eastern end of
+the island?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Why, what is that for? Do you think it has anything to do with the
+box?"
+
+"Probably not; but I was curious to examine it further in view of the
+similarity of the chart and the inscription."
+
+The boys could not possibly understand what was meant by such a
+reference. While they were talking the Professor entered the room, and
+remarked, "I have just come from the old fellow, and his reason is
+returning under the treatment, and he is also better physically."
+
+"Do you mean the paralytic?"
+
+"Yes; but there is one thing which is singular, and that is the constant
+muttering of the word _triangle_. This morning I could plainly
+distinguish several other words, such as 'of' and 'three,' and 'very
+well,' and parts of other words, showing that in time, if his
+improvement continues, we may get more information."
+
+"I have an idea," hurriedly shouted George as he broke for the door.
+"Wait for me," he said, as he turned around and cast a glance back into
+the room. "I will be back at once," were the last words they heard.
+
+John laughed at George's precipitous flight. "I suppose he has just
+thought of something that bears on the case. In the meantime, and while
+George is away, you, Harry, might get a hammer and a cold chisel. We
+may have to cut the top off."
+
+Harry rushed out and taking John's machine was quickly at the shop,
+where he secured a hammer and several cold chisels capable of cutting
+the copper.
+
+When he returned George was there, and was unfolding the paper scrap
+which they found below the skull. "Probably, this will explain the
+triangle," said George, as he pointed to the V-shaped mark. "The upper
+part of it is very likely worn away, so that we cannot see it."
+
+John smiled at the suggestion as he took the paper and carefully
+examined it. "Your view may be correct," he responded.
+
+"That looks like a suggestion of a line," said Harry, pointing to a
+faint scratch near the upper margin.
+
+The Professor's messenger came in hurriedly, and announced that the
+paralytic had sent for him. "I will return by the time the box is
+opened," said the Professor, as he hurriedly went out of the door.
+
+"Now for the box," said Harry. The slitting chisel was applied, and he
+dextrously cut along the top, under the directions of John.
+
+"Direct the chisel downwardly, to see if there is any seam to be found
+along the side," directed John.
+
+"Yes; here is the place where the top was put on," shouted Harry.
+
+"Why, it has been soldered," said George. "Well, that means business."
+
+It was evident that the soldering was effectively done, because the
+solder had run entirely through the seam, and it was really sweated on.
+The copper used was about an eighth of an inch thick, and the soft and
+ductile character showed that it was pure metal.
+
+"Be very careful as you get around so as not to disturb the contents, by
+the falling of the lid," said John.
+
+It still adhered at various places, and this was carefully cut away by
+one of the thin chisels, and the lid finally raised at one corner,
+sufficiently to disclose a portion of the contents, which appeared to be
+round and white, and resting near the center of the space.
+
+All caught a glimpse of it, and involuntarily started back in surprise.
+It was a skull, the counterpart of the one lying on the table which
+contained the inscription.
+
+"Open it wide," said John in a peculiar voice, and as he did so the
+Professor rushed in and announced that the paralytic had recovered
+speech, and he had ordered him to be brought in.
+
+While the Professor was saying this, John was slowly raising the lid,
+and by a quick motion tore it away, and the Professor was actually taken
+aback at the sight before him. He gazed for a moment, and then muttered:
+"And the same inscription too!"
+
+All looked toward it in amazement, and while puzzling over its meaning,
+the paralytic was helped in by two attendants. He came forward, saw the
+two skulls, and before either could prevent it he collapsed and fell to
+the floor, apparently lifeless.
+
+He was gathered up and placed on a couch, and restoratives applied by
+the Professor. He lay thus in a stupor for more than a half hour, but
+soon returning consciousness began to manifest itself, and when he
+opened his eyes, and glanced about, his lips began to move. Here the
+Professor held up a warning hand, which he seemed to heed, for he
+immediately closed his eyes, and was soon asleep, as his breathing
+became regular, and the pulse began to act normally.
+
+"There must be no more agitation now," said the Professor. "We can take
+the box to the adjoining room." This was done, and John carefully lifted
+the skull from its resting place, bringing with it a mass of other
+material, which looked like brown or discolored parchment.
+
+The skulls were placed side by side. They were singularly alike, the
+inscription of the one found on the headland, was on the left side, and
+the like figures of the one taken from the box were on the right side.
+
+"That is a singular thing," said Harry.
+
+"So it is," answered John, "but it doubtless has a meaning," he
+continued.
+
+Beneath the box, and attached to the wrappings, was a mass of material
+which John eagerly seized, and began to unwrap, while the Professor
+interestedly looked on. There was not the first sign of any treasure in
+the box, and when the several folds of the parchment were unrolled, the
+boys could see the hieroglyphics that the Professor and John so eagerly
+scanned.
+
+"Yes, yes, I knew you would come back," said the man in the adjoining
+room, and John dropped the parchment and followed the Professor into the
+room, where they saw the old man sitting on the couch and staring about
+with an inquiring countenance.
+
+"What is your name?" said the Professor.
+
+He did not answer at first but looked at John and the Professor in
+amazement.
+
+"Why do you ask?" he then muttered, without changing his countenance. "I
+have told you over and over," he continued.
+
+"Do you know where you are?" asked John.
+
+"Certainly. You may ask Walter about that."
+
+"Walter? Do you know Walter?" asked George, almost involuntarily.
+
+He smiled and nodded his head. "He is here. I saw him yesterday. I wish
+he would explain." Then he dropped back on the couch and remained
+motionless.
+
+The effort to arouse him was useless, and the Professor advised
+patience. There was something so peculiar about the whole situation that
+it fascinated the boys. What did this man know about Walter? Possibly,
+through him the great mystery, that commenced with the note in the seat
+of their boat, would be explained.
+
+After they came back to the island, Retlaw rapidly recovered, and was
+frequently found wandering around the town. On several occasions he
+called on the Professor. To the surprise of all he appeared at this
+time, surprised to find John and the boys present, and appeared to be
+terribly startled on seeing the two skulls.
+
+The moment he saw the paralytic, he became agitated, and started for the
+door. John barred the way, and said: "Do you know that man?"
+
+In a hesitating voice, he answered: "Yes; I know him well. Where did you
+find him?" and notwithstanding he saw the quiet figure he drew back with
+an expression of fear and hesitancy.
+
+George slyly drew forth the Walter note, referred to in the previous
+volume, "Adventures on Strange Islands," and handed it to John. The
+latter seized it and said: "Did you ever see this?"
+
+He grasped the paper, and answered: "Where did you get this? Did he have
+it?"
+
+"No," replied the Professor; "we found it in a recess at the end of a
+seat in our boat,--the one we made on this island, three years ago."
+
+"I do not know how it could have gotten there. It was written to
+Clifford,--"
+
+"John B. Clifford?" asked Harry in excitement.
+
+Retlaw turned, when he heard Harry. "Yes," was the hesitating answer.
+
+"Do you know Walter?" asked John.
+
+He did not reply, but glanced at all of them, and while doing so Harry
+came forward, and said: "Isn't your name Walter?"
+
+The man started back and held up his hand: "What makes you think so?" he
+asked in alarm.
+
+"Because _Retlaw_ reversed, spells Walter," answered Harry.
+
+It was time for the Professor to show surprise at the acuteness of
+Harry's conclusions. John took the cue at once. "Why are you trying to
+deceive us?"
+
+He dropped his eyes, and was silent, and then he slowly turned to the
+quiet man.
+
+John noticed the movement. "Who was the man tied to the vessel and
+wrecked on the island to the south of us?"
+
+This question by John produced an added agitation in the deportment of
+the man. He was visibly affected by the question, but there was no
+reply.
+
+"As you do not feel disposed to answer our questions we must detain or
+keep you in custody until Clifford recovers," said John, and motioning
+to the boys, they gathered around him, and called in the attendants and
+ordered the men to take charge of him.
+
+As they were about to pass out the door, Ephraim ascended the steps and
+was about to pass into the open door. He caught sight of the curious
+group, and when his eye alighted on the figure on the couch, he drew
+back for a moment, while his gaze remained fixed.
+
+Then he calmly moved forward, slowly shaking his head from side to side,
+and muttered: "That looks like Clifford, my companion on the ship, and
+the one who aided me to gain a foothold on the spar. How did he come
+here?"
+
+"That is the man we found at Hutoton," said John. "But do you know this
+man?" he asked, pointing to Walter.
+
+Ephraim turned, and scrutinized his face. "No, I have never seen him, to
+my knowledge."
+
+Walter moved back with a sigh of relief, while John and the Professor
+looked at each other with puzzled expressions.
+
+"Then the man we found tied to the boat was not Clifford!" exclaimed
+George.
+
+John looked at Walter, and he saw him grow pale.
+
+"Who was the man," he asked, in a threatening tone, as he approached
+Walter. The latter hesitated. "We are determined to ferret out this
+matter, and it will be to your advantage to tell us the whole story, for
+we shall find it out sooner or later."
+
+"I must have time to think," he answered, as he put his hands to his
+head, and turned to Clifford.
+
+"You may have until to-morrow, but in the meantime, we shall see to it
+that you are kept within our sight," responded John, as he motioned to
+the men to take him away.
+
+As he left the door Harry said: "Why do you suppose he wanted time?"
+
+John looked at Clifford for a moment, and answered: "Evidently, he had
+hopes that Clifford would not survive."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES
+
+
+At the suggestion of the Professor, Clifford was left in quiet, while
+John and the boys deferred their further attempts to explore the
+mysterious occurrences that were looming up.
+
+They canvassed every phase of the situation, in the hope that some
+explanation might be offered. What could have been the relations of
+Walter and Clifford, and who was the man that met his death in the boat
+at Venture Island?
+
+Why had the sight of the copper box and the skulls so agitated Walter?
+The latter, apparently, knew of the missive, which was, evidently,
+written by him, but why did he not give an outright answer concerning it
+when John asked him point blank?
+
+It did not take the boys long to inform Sutoto of the development and
+the mystery concerning the two men. The old Chief, Beralsea, was taken
+over to see Walter, in order to identify him if possible, and then Harry
+suggested that Ta Babeda might know something of his early history, as
+Walter was found a prisoner at his village when John and the boys
+arrived there.
+
+Beralsea had never seen nor heard of him, and Ta Babeda gave the
+following account of his capture: "About three years previously several
+men, of whom Walter was one, arrived at the island, on a small boat,
+something like the one carried by the _Pioneer_, and which was used at
+the landing."
+
+(It should be stated that one of the boats, and probably, the one
+referred to, was the identical lifeboat, No. 3, which the boys had
+fitted up for use on the _Pioneer_.)
+
+"This boat was kept by them at the inlet directly east of the cave where
+the Korinos were lodged. I did not know anything of this for some time,
+but the Korinos learned of the presence of the men, and my warriors were
+set to watch the men. A few days afterwards, another boat, much smaller,
+appeared with two men, but from all appearances they were a different
+party, and after they had a conference, it appeared as though there was
+trouble between the different parties."
+
+"We were about to close in on them, when at the height of their quarrel,
+but they caught sight of us, and joined in resisting the attack against
+us. With the guns they had we were no match for them, so we had to
+retire to the village.
+
+"The next morning we learned that they had gone, and on searching the
+shore found something with marks on, it, that had no meaning to us so it
+was destroyed."
+
+"Was it something like this?" asked Harry, handing him a sketch.
+
+The Chief studied it for a few moments, and answered: "It seems to me it
+was like that. The marks were something like these," and he pointed to
+the crosses.
+
+Harry had made the identical marking which were on the two skulls,
+which, it will be remembered, showed the characters + V, and below these
+three X X X, followed by a star.
+
+"I suspected as much," said John. "They were, quite possibly, on the
+same quest. But where did they get the information?" And he turned to
+the Professor for a possible explanation.
+
+The latter was now thoroughly interested. "Unless Walter chooses to
+tell, the matter may not be solved, unless Clifford recovers, and even
+though he should regain his physical powers, the mind may have relapsed
+into its late condition."
+
+By agreement John and the boys remained at the Professor's home that
+night, awaiting symptoms of the patient's disease, and during the night
+they recounted over and over again the adventures they had undergone,
+and the experiences with the natives.
+
+They conversed about the new enterprise into which they were to embark,
+and the Professor congratulated them on the decision to remain and enter
+the commercial, or business field. "After all," he said, "there is
+nothing which so broadens a man as to have an occupation, and give to
+that business the energies of his mind."
+
+"Of course, there are many things that the natives must learn, but they
+are so willing to work, that it is a pleasure to show them," said Harry.
+"The best men we have had in the shops were the common natives, but
+there is one thing that has always been troublesome, and that is to give
+them different names."
+
+"That is just what I had in mind for some time," added George. "It
+didn't make much difference where there were only a few,--a hundred or
+so, but now, when we have three hundred or more it is rather confusing
+to have a dozen or more _Lolos_, and as many more _Walbes_, and names
+like that."
+
+"It might be a good idea to suggest that each one have a sort of
+surname, so that there will be no difficulty of that kind hereafter,"
+suggested John.
+
+"A family name would be the proper thing," added the Professor.
+
+"For my part, I don't see how people can get along without it," remarked
+George.
+
+"But it has not always been the custom to have surnames, or family
+names," suggested the Professor.
+
+"But the Romans did," exclaimed George.
+
+"Yes, they had three names: the first was the prenomen, which was a
+distinctive mark of the individual; then the nomen, or the name of the
+clan; and third, the cognomen, which was the family name. The first name
+was usually written with a capital letter only, like M. Thus, M. Tullius
+Cicero."
+
+"Well, that is the first time it ever occurred to me that the Romans
+parted their names in the middle," said George, as he smiled at the
+allusion.
+
+"The ancient Greeks, with the exception of a few of the leading families
+in Athens and Sparta, had only a single name. Among the German and
+Celtic nations each individual had only one name, and that was also true
+of the ancient Hebrews; the names Abraham, David, Aaron and the others
+were used singly, and this was also the case in Egypt, Syria and Persia,
+and throughout all of Western Asia."
+
+"But it has never been so in England, has it?" asked Harry.
+
+"During the entire period that England was under the dominion of the
+Saxons, the single name was prevalent. But that was changed later when
+feudalism was established and the different lords began to gather their
+vassals, and to register them."
+
+"But what is the principle on which the names are built?"
+
+"In various ways; at first they distinguished father and son by adding
+the word _son_ to the father's name. If he was of German descent _sohn_
+would be added; if of Danish origin, the word _sen_, so that the son's
+name in either case would be William_son_, or Ander_sohn_, or
+Thorwald_sen_, or a given name with the designation _son_ added."
+
+"But how about the many other names, and those coming after the second
+generation?"
+
+"They had to be named after the locality, like John _Brook_, or David
+_Hill_, or something of that kind, even to an occupation, like the
+_Smiths_, or the _Fishers_, as well as qualifications, such as _Wise_
+and _Good_ were adopted as surnames."
+
+Every hour Clifford's condition was noted, and before morning his pulse
+began to beat with greater regularity, and all felt that it would be
+well to take a nap, to prepare for what they knew must be an
+interesting, if not exciting chapter, to round out their adventures, and
+to lay bare the few mysteries which yet remained to be solved.
+
+Sutoto came to the Professor's house quite early, with news from Blakely
+that Walter had disappeared. He had learned of the imprisonment and
+that Walter was placed in the regular lock-up, where a few recalcitrants
+were confined.
+
+How he escaped was not known. True, not much of a guard was maintained,
+and the natives had no idea that the prisoner was of more than ordinary
+importance.
+
+John was very much disappointed, but he felt that he alone was to blame,
+because in the anxiety for Clifford he had entirely overlooked the
+precaution necessary. He went down to the jail, with the boys, and
+learned from the inmates that when the man was brought in he appeared to
+be unconcerned, and immediately selected his sleeping quarters, and that
+was the last they knew of him.
+
+As the boys were going to their own rooms, a messenger came from the
+Professor that Clifford was awake, and appeared to be rational, and was
+now partaking of food. After breakfast they hurried over to the
+Professor, and found John there smiling.
+
+"I have had a little talk with him."
+
+"What does he say?"
+
+"I have not yet questioned him."
+
+Clifford looked at the boys curiously. "Are you the boys that Mr. Varney
+spoke about?"
+
+"I suppose we are," said Harry.
+
+"His story interested me very much. I learn that you have a regular
+manufacturing town here, and that you built all these things without any
+outside help, before you communicated with the outside world."
+
+"Yes; and we had a glorious time doing it, too, but we owe everything to
+the Professor and John."
+
+"That is really commendable to hear you say so. But you said, Mr.
+Varney, that Walter told you Clifford limped, and it was on account of
+this peculiarity you were led to believe that the dead man on Venture
+Island was Clifford?"
+
+"One of the three men with Walter, was lame."
+
+"Then it must have been one of his party that was murdered?"
+
+"But Walter was explicit to tell us that one of your legs was shorter
+than the other. I early learned that such was not the case, and that is
+what confused me in identifying you. But there is also another thing
+which I could not understand."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"Ephraim Wilmar."
+
+"Stop! stop!" almost shouted Clifford. "You said _Ephraim Wilmar_. Do
+you know him?"
+
+"Know him? He is here on the island."
+
+"When did he come? Where is he?"
+
+"He lives on an island north of the place we found you, and is Chief of
+a tribe there."
+
+"Chief of a tribe!" he exclaimed. "An island to the north,--the
+_triangle_,"--and the boys rose from their seats in the excitement.
+
+"Where is Walter's letter?--Quick," said Harry.
+
+George fumbled in his pockets with eagerness. "Is that the triangle?"
+eagerly questioned Harry.
+
+"Yes, yes; there it is again. The three islands, and the arrow."
+
+"But what does the star mean,--the star that follows, as you see?"
+
+"That,--that is to show the position of the three islands."
+
+"Position of the three islands? What islands? and how does it tell the
+positions?" George was fairly frantic now.
+
+"There must be three islands, and one of them was the one I was on when
+you found me, and one is here, because Mr. Varney told me about this
+one, and then there is another, which you said was to the north
+of,--of--"
+
+"Hutoton," said John.
+
+"Yes; Hutoton. But the positions! Yes; you will understand! One point is
+the Southern Cross, near the South polar Circle, the second point is the
+fixed star Antares, and the third is the fixed star Spica, which,
+together form a perfect triangle, one limb of which passes through a
+cluster of stars called the Compasses."
+
+"But what has that to do with the locations of the three islands?"
+
+"They are situated, with relation to each other, exactly the same as the
+three stars are placed in the heavens."
+
+"What was the object of the three crosses before the star?"
+
+"The three represented thirty."
+
+"Thirty what?"
+
+"Leagues."
+
+"And the arrow?"
+
+"The direction from Spica."
+
+"Why from Spica?"
+
+"Because that star is the one which represents the island on which this
+particular chart happens to be found."
+
+"Do you mean that a similar chart will be found on each island?"
+
+"No; on only two of them."
+
+The boys were astounded at this information. John and the Professor
+remained quiet while the boys thus questioned Clifford.
+
+John interrupted to inquire why there were only two charts.
+
+"The record is found on the third."
+
+"So Wonder and Venture Islands are the only ones which have the
+inscriptions on the skulls?" asked Harry.
+
+Clifford sat up with such a sudden start that the boys were alarmed. He
+leaned forward, and hurriedly asked the following questions: "You say,
+'Inscriptions on the skulls?' How do you know? and why do you say that
+they are on Wonder and Venture Islands?"
+
+"Because we have two of them."
+
+He dropped back on the pillow, and reflected for some time, and then
+slowly said: "But there must be three. One of them is still with the
+records."
+
+"No; we have the one with the records."
+
+A smile illuminated his features, the tension was relaxed, and he
+dropped back, and pressed his hands over his forehead, as he muttered:
+"I am so glad, so glad, so glad," and his voice died down, and he
+remained quiet, as though in sleep.
+
+The questioners sat there in silence, and watched him as he slept. The
+Professor motioned them to withdraw, and they passed into the adjoining
+room.
+
+"It is clear to me now," remarked John. "The knowledge of the record was
+known to others, and I was not aware that any one besides ourselves
+really had figured out the secret," remarked John, as he turned to the
+Professor.
+
+"Well, I came pretty close to it," exclaimed Harry. "I told you that the
+three X's meant thirty leagues."
+
+"So you did," said John. "Prior to the finding of the skull I did not
+know of the full inscription. Its significance did not come to me until
+we reached Venture Island."
+
+"I remember now! I told George that I saw the chart you had made."
+
+John smiled. "It would have deceived you, however."
+
+"Why?" asked Harry.
+
+"Because, if you remember it the third island was to the south of
+Venture, and not to the north as we really found it."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+THE STORY OF THE LETTERED SKULL
+
+
+It was late that afternoon when Clifford awoke, and plainly much,
+refreshed, and improved physically. When he saw the Professor he said:
+"I have not told you all, but I want the boys here for that purpose,
+because I know it will interest them."
+
+When the boys arrived they awaited the coming of John, who informed them
+that Uraso had received word of the capture of Walter, but that he would
+not arrive until noon.
+
+Clifford greeted them effusively, and it was evident that he had
+recovered his spirits, and was well on the road to recovery. After some
+general talk on uninteresting topics, he began his story:
+
+"I was on the vessel with Ephraim when we ran into the monsoon which
+wrecked the vessel. After days of suffering I became unconscious, and
+when the spar finally reached the shore, I was aroused sufficiently to
+save myself, and after wandering around for some time, came up to a
+tribe of natives, who took good care of me.
+
+"I had no means of determining the latitude or longitude, because I was
+then only about twenty years of age, and had shipped on the vessel at
+Shanghai, because I was anxious to return home. I remained with the
+people about three years, and they were called Osagas."
+
+"Why, this town is built in the Osagas' territory," said Harry.
+
+"That may be so, but it is enough for the present to know that it was
+somewhere on this island that I reached the shore, and that about three
+years thereafter I was fortunate enough to catch sight of a sailing
+vessel, and on her I reached San Francisco.
+
+"In course of time I built up a profitable shipping business, and owned
+several vessels engaged in the coast and Alaska trade. Like all shipping
+men on the western coast, I learned of the many accounts, most of them
+fables, concerning the treasures on the islands in the South Seas, but
+they never had any effect on me until about three years ago, I had a
+hand in furnishing the outfit for a vessel which departed on such a
+mission, that sailed some time in December or January, of that year."
+
+"Do you know the name of the vessel?" asked John.
+
+"Yes; the _Juan Ferde_. Why do you ask?"
+
+"I sailed in that vessel with Blakely, one of the owners."
+
+"Blakely? Blakely, did you say? Why he is the man who purchased all the
+provisions from me."
+
+"He is here on the island, and now has charge of all the business
+matters connected with our venture."
+
+"Well, that is remarkable, indeed; but I must proceed. Four months after
+the _Juan Ferde_ sailed, I came into contact with a peculiar character,
+who had been all over the southern part of the universe, and he finally
+interested me sufficiently to look over some peculiar documents which he
+had, bearing on the subject of the lost treasures, and from the
+information which he gave, it occurred to me that the location could not
+be far from the island where I was cast ashore.
+
+"With a good business, and entirely free from all family entanglements,
+I made up my mind that I would accompany him, and finance the
+undertaking. What induced me more than anything else, was the fact that
+the stories he told corresponded so nearly with the information which
+Blakely gave me, although the latter did not go into many details, that
+I looked on the venture in the nature of a lark. Besides I wanted to
+meet my old friends on the island, and possibly induce them to gather
+the products of the island for me.
+
+"We sailed about five months after the _Juan Ferde_ left, and had a
+quick run to the island where it was supposed I had been left years
+before. It seems that at the time I landed there the tribe was at war,
+and we had a terrible time to get away from the people, who, of course,
+did not remember me, even though the tribe was the same, but of this I
+had no absolute knowledge at the time.
+
+"Two months after reaching the island, we sailed to the south, in order
+to explore the second island, noted on the chart, and it was then that
+the returning monsoon, which usually blows in the opposite direction
+from the one of six months before, wrecked the vessel, and the next day
+one of my companions and myself, who were so far as I then knew, the
+only survivors, reached the southern shore of an island, where we saw
+high mountains, so unlike those in the island where I was shipwrecked
+years before."
+
+"While I think of it," remarked John, "how did you know about the second
+island, to which you refer?"
+
+"I learned this from Walter."
+
+"Then did you know anything about the skull on the headland, and the
+note which Walter left?"
+
+"I knew about the skull, but never heard of the note to which you refer.
+The discovery of the skull was an accident, and I attached no importance
+to it at the time. From the southern portion of the island we journeyed
+along the eastern coast, to the north, skirting a large forest on the
+way."
+
+The boys looked at each other, significantly, but he did not notice
+this.
+
+"Then we reached a large river, and to our surprise, found a boat,
+evidently of native manufacture, and with this floated down the stream
+to the sea."
+
+"But where did you get the rope that we found in the boat?" asked
+George, eagerly.
+
+He turned, and answered: "How did you know we put any rope on the boat?"
+
+"Because that was the boat we made, and we found it afterwards, with the
+strange rope and oars."
+
+"Strange oars. I know nothing about them. We used the oars found in the
+boat."
+
+"Did you get the boat near a large falls?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"And on the north side of the river?"
+
+"Yes; but after we reached the sea, it was too rough, and the wind was
+blowing too heavily from the north to make it safe to navigate in that
+direction, so we went south, probably ten miles, and drew ashore. The
+next morning when I awoke the boat and my companion were missing."
+
+"Who was your companion?"
+
+"Walter."
+
+John looked indignant, and expressed his opinion very forcibly, but
+Clifford held up his hand, restrainingly. "Do not be too harsh. I have
+no ill will toward him. I did not know what to do, nor which way to
+turn, but went to the west, and before night, came, unexpectedly, on the
+remains of a fire, which led me to believe that I would find friends in
+the inhabitants.
+
+"I went on and on, and caught up with the band, and was then horrified
+to find that they were having a feast, and sacrificing human beings. I
+saw Walter among the captives, but I could not contrive to let him know
+of my presence, and left the place as hurriedly as I could.
+
+"After a month of struggling I reached the southern part of the island,
+and there, to my joy, found three of my companions on a life boat,
+belonging to a vessel called the _Investigator_, and together we made a
+course southeast, and there found the location of the second skull."
+
+"But you knew nothing of that at the time, did you?"
+
+"I did not know what the marks on the skull were for, but the finding of
+the second one was sufficient to revive in me the hope that, after all,
+the treasure might be found. One of the men, who was the intimate of
+Walter, figured out the course to be taken, and we reached the island to
+the north the second day.
+
+"There, to our surprise, we found Walter, and he charged one of the men
+with me, with trying to secure the treasure, but I finally patched up
+the matter, and we agreed to work in concert. Then, when the next day,
+we found that Walter had lost the chart, we felt that it was a trick on
+his part to deceive us, and we separated. At that time I did not believe
+he told us the truth.
+
+"Two days afterwards we passed a party of natives, who were not aware of
+our presence, and then we saw that Walter, and the man with him, had
+been captured, and later believed that they had been killed. We searched
+the island, to find the cave, but were unsuccessful and thinking that an
+error might have been made, we concluded to sail for the island to the
+south.
+
+"We found a tribe of natives when we landed, and owing to the exposure
+and the trials we had gone through I was taken ill, and grew worse and
+worse, and from that time on to the time I recovered two days ago, I had
+not the slightest idea of what passed."
+
+"When I spoke against Walter a few moments ago," said John, "you said he
+was not to blame. What did you mean by that?"
+
+"During my wanderings, I found parts of the chart, which, I assumed, had
+been lost by John, and, probably, destroyed by the natives. The part I
+recovered was of no value to me, but it entirely changed my opinion of
+Walter."
+
+But Clifford's story left something to be told. It did not explain why
+Walter tried to avoid meeting Clifford; or why he was so startled upon
+seeing the two skulls, or the reason for avoiding the reference to the
+letter to which his name was signed.
+
+The boys were so intensely interested in his story that they did not
+notice the entrance of Blakely, who had brought Walter back, but when
+Clifford saw Blakely there was immediate recognition.
+
+Clifford held out his hand to Walter, as he said: "I did wrong in
+doubting you. I understand from the statement made by Ta Babeda, that
+they found the chart the next day, after we met them, and that, of
+course, clears you."
+
+"But I would like to know," said Harry, "what the other part of the
+inscription on the skulls means?"
+
+"Do you refer to the sign of plus and the V?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"When you went into the cave, where you found the copper box, how many
+chambers did you pass before coming to the large room?"
+
+"I am not sure," he answered, "but I think four."
+
+"Yes; and the case was found in the fifth chamber. The Plus sign
+indicated the cross-shaped cave, did it not?"
+
+"Yes, and there are several other things which interest me," remarked
+George, gazing at John, as he continued: "Why should the inscriptions
+have been marked on the skulls?"
+
+John slowly shook his head, as he looked at Clifford. The latter gazed
+vacantly into space, as though reflecting, and finally said: "I do not
+know."
+
+It will be remembered that when Walter entered the Professor's room,
+where Clifford was lying, he appeared to be startled at the sight of
+the skulls. The copper box which held one of them was in the adjoining
+room.
+
+During the foregoing conversation Walter was mute, nor did he appear
+interested in the question propounded by George.
+
+"It seems most curious to me that the skull taken from the copper box
+has the inscription on the right side, whereas the other one has them on
+the left side," observed Harry.
+
+John and George saw the immediate change in Walter's face while Harry
+was speaking. His agitation was now plain to all, and the perspiration
+began to appear on his forehead.
+
+John leaned forward as he said: "Do you know?"
+
+Walter started at the vehemence of the question, and threw back his
+head, as he answered: "Did you find the copper box?"
+
+"Yes," responded John, with a look of triumph.
+
+Walter's features relaxed, and he seemed to sink down, as he gazed about
+him with a final look of despair.
+
+"Then the quest is ended!" he muttered.
+
+"What do you mean? Explain!" demanded John.
+
+"When I began the search for the treasure of the caves, I was the owner
+of the original document written by Juan Guiterez before he died in the
+Spanish prison. Three attempts had been made to find the island, which
+contained the secret, and that secret was in the copper box which told
+of the places and the locations of the other caves. In each case the
+quest failed, and all perished. The peculiar significance arises from
+the fact that the only directions were given on a human skull by
+Guiterez himself, who declared that two of the skulls would have the
+inscriptions on the left side, while the one with the cryptic signs on
+the right side would be accompanied by the descriptions of the locations
+of all the Caves on the different islands."
+
+"But why should there be three skulls?" asked George, in great
+eagerness.
+
+"There were three attempts, each resulting in death. The skull is
+emblematic of death."
+
+"Will you tell us why you tried to avoid Clifford, and were startled at
+the sight of the skulls?" asked John.
+
+"If, as you say, you have found the copper box, I have no further reason
+to remain silent. I found one of the skulls,--the others I could not
+find, one of which I knew must be in the treasure cave. If I had known
+you found the one in the cave I should not have tried to get away, as I
+hoped, finally, to find the cave. Since coming here I learned that you
+had found the third island; I knew of only two, and supposed that the
+two skulls were from those two, namely, Wonder and Venture Islands."
+
+"But who placed the skulls there?" queried Harry.
+
+"Ah! No one knows that. The Spaniard Guiterez offers no explanation. All
+the so-called _treasure charts_ have been made from the accounts which
+he gave, of the vast amount of gold and silver which is hidden in these
+natural caches. The place where the copper box was deposited is the
+grand mausoleum. Only those who know the secret could ever reach the
+vault. All others would perish."
+
+"The carbonic gas!" exclaimed George.
+
+Walter turned to George, as he said this, but did not comprehend what he
+meant. It was now evident that Walter had tried to conceal his identity,
+and thereby hide the secret which would enable him alone to find the
+vast wealth.
+
+"So the letter which we found concealed in the seat of our boat, was
+written by one of your companions?" asked Harry.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"This clears up the mysterious things which we have tried to fathom for
+over two years," said John. "The meaning of the letters is now clear."
+
+"From the time we landed on the island," rejoined the Professor, "we
+found evidences of white people that we could not follow up, and it is
+now plain that they were in search for the treasure, so we can now
+comprehend what the notes meant."
+
+There is but little more to add to the chapter pertaining to the
+experiences of the boys on the islands. Perhaps, at some time in the
+future, their work on the new islands will be told. What John and the
+boys found in the Copper box, the historical sketches and the locations
+of the treasure islands which were pointed out on the parchments found
+in the compartment below the skull, were amazing revelations of the days
+of piratical adventures, when the southern half of the world was one
+vast carnival of crime, in which gold was the only booty and to obtain
+which the means were always considered to be justified by the end.
+
+Our young friends, during their experiences in southern waters, did
+their part in bringing to the uneducated savages the blessings of
+civilization and the great boon of peace. To themselves they brought a
+store of hard-earned knowledge and a memory of things well done that
+will last them to the end of their days.
+
+THE END
+
+      *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS
+
+By ELBERT FISHER
+
+_12mo, Cloth.     Many Illustrations.     60c. per Volume_
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who
+make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet
+with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their
+adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter
+relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries
+through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of
+boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The
+books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each
+chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the
+author, and four striking halftones.
+
+1. FROM NEW YORK TO THE GOLDEN GATE, takes in many of the principal
+points between New York and California, and contains a highly
+entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a
+little useful information.
+
+2. FROM SAN FRANCISCO TO JAPAN, relates the experiences of the two boys
+at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to Hawaii,
+Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent at sea, and
+a large amount of interesting information appears throughout the text.
+
+3. FROM TOKIO TO BOMBAY. This book covers their interesting experiences
+in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong and
+finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a field
+seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the great
+Hyderabad region of South India.
+
+4. FROM INDIA TO THE WAR ZONE, describes their trip toward the Persian
+Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the supposed site
+of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves with a caravan
+through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing the Holy Land, where
+they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean port of Joppa,
+and their experiences thereafter within the war zone are fully
+described.
+
+
+
+
+THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
+
+BY J. S. ZERBE
+
+CARPENTRY FOR BOYS
+
+
+A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all
+subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of
+tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles
+involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the
+rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty
+illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a
+complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most
+comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS
+
+The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
+principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the
+work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been
+developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using
+technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It
+has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred
+original drawings.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS
+
+This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical
+shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of
+shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work,
+and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every
+subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a
+glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature
+that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully
+illustrated.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_12mo, cloth.     Price 60 cents per volume_
+
+
+
+
+The Ethel Morton Books
+
+By MABELL S. C. SMITH
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+This series strikes a new note in the publication of books for girls.
+Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing experiences of our
+young friends are combined with a fund of information relating their
+accomplishment of things every girl wishes to know.
+
+In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with many of the
+entertaining features of handcraft, elements of cooking, also of
+swimming, boating and similar pastimes. This information is so imparted
+as to hold the interest throughout. Many of the subjects treated are
+illustrated by halftones and line engravings throughout the text.
+
+LIST OF TITLES
+
+  ETHEL MORTON AT CHAUTAUQUA
+  ETHEL MORTON AND THE CHRISTMAS SHIP
+  ETHEL MORTON'S HOLIDAYS
+  ETHEL MORTON AT ROSE HOUSE
+  ETHEL MORTON'S ENTERPRISE
+  ETHEL MORTON AT SWEET BRIER LODGE
+
+_Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid_
+
+
+
+
+The Mountain Boys Series
+
+
+1. PHIL BRADLEY'S MOUNTAIN BOYS
+
+2. PHIL BRADLEY AT THE WHEEL
+
+3. PHIL BRADLEY'S SHOOTING BOX
+
+4. PHIL BRADLEY'S SNOW-SHOE TRAIL
+
+These books describe with interesting detail the experiences of a party
+of boys among the mountain pines.
+
+They teach the young reader how to protect himself against the elements,
+what to do and what to avoid, and above all to become self-reliant and
+manly.
+
+
+_12mo. * * * Cloth._
+
+_40 cents per volume; postpaid_
+
+
+
+
+THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUTS
+
+A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS
+
+By Capt. Alain Douglas, Scout-master
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE CAMPFIRES OF THE WOLF PATROL
+
+Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities
+to use their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer
+Chenoweth, a lad from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his
+familiarity with camp life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should
+read.
+
+WOODCRAFT; OR, HOW A PATROL LEADER MADE GOOD
+
+This tale presents many stirring situations in which the boys are called
+upon to exercise ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with
+healthful excitement.
+
+PATHFINDER; OR, THE MISSING TENDERFOOT
+
+Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the
+credit of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one
+after the other.
+
+FAST NINE; OR, A CHALLENGE FROM FAIRFIELD
+
+They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of
+the final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof,
+form a stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent
+years.
+
+GREAT HIKE; OR, THE PRIDE OF THE KHAKI TROOP
+
+After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest
+undertaking. Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured
+rivalry of the different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing
+situations.
+
+ENDURANCE TEST; OR, HOW CLEAR GRIT WON THE DAY
+
+Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of
+apparent failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and
+surprise their most ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain
+Douglas has written.
+
+UNDER CANVAS; OR, THE HUNT FOR THE CARTARET GHOST
+
+It was hard to disbelieve the evidence of their eyes but the boys by the
+exercise of common-sense solved a mystery which had long puzzled older
+heads.
+
+STORM-BOUND; OR, A VACATION AMONG THE SNOW DRIFTS
+
+The boys start out on the wrong track, but their scout training comes to
+the rescue and their experience proves beneficial to all concerned.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+BOY SCOUT NATURE LORE TO BE FOUND IN THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUT SERIES,
+ALL ILLUSTRATED:--
+
+Wild Animals of the United States--Tracking--Trees and Wild Flowers of
+the United States--Reptiles of the United States--Fishes of the United
+States--Insects of the United States and Birds of the United States.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Cloth Binding     Cover Illustrations in Four Colors     40c. Per Volume_
+
+
+
+
+The Campfire and Trail Series
+
+
+1. IN CAMP ON THE BIG SUNFLOWER.
+
+2. THE RIVALS OF THE TRAIL.
+
+3. THE STRANGE CABIN ON CATAMOUNT ISLAND.
+
+4. LOST IN THE GREAT DISMAL SWAMP.
+
+5. WITH TRAPPER JIM IN THE NORTH WOODS.
+
+6. CAUGHT IN A FOREST FIRE.
+
+7. CHUMS OF THE CAMPFIRE.
+
+8. AFLOAT ON THE FLOOD.
+
+By LAWRENCE J. LESLIE.
+
+A series of wholesome stories for boys told in an interesting way and
+appealing to their love of the open.
+
+_Each, 12mo.     Cloth.     40 cents per volume_
+
+
+
+
+Christy Mathewson's Book
+
+[Illustration: "WON IN THE NINTH"]
+
+_A Ripping Good Baseball Story by One Who Knows the Game_
+
+This book has attained a larger sale than any baseball story ever
+published.
+
+The narrative deals with the students of a large university and their
+baseball team, the members of which have names which enable the reader
+to recognize them as some of the foremost baseball stars of the day
+before their entrance into the major leagues.
+
+One gains a very clear idea of "inside baseball" stripped of wearisome
+technicalities. The book is profusely illustrated throughout and
+contains also a number of plates showing the manner in which Mathewson
+throws his deceptive curves, together with brief description of each.
+
+_Cloth bound 5-1/2 x 7-5/8      Price 60c. per volume_
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+Mrs. Meade's Books for Girls
+
+Primrose Edition
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Printed on fine quality book paper. Separate cover designs in colors.
+
+Daddy's Girl.
+A Girl from America.
+Sue, a Little Heroine.
+The School Queens.
+Wild Kitty.
+A Sweet Girl Graduate.
+A World of Girls.
+Polly--A New-Fashioned Girl.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Each, 12mo.    Cloth.     40 cents per volume_
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Mrs. Meade's girls' books never lose their popularity.
+
+
+
+
+ECONOMICAL COOKING
+
+_Primrose Edition_
+
+_Planned for Two or More Persons_
+
+By
+
+MISS WINIFRED S. GIBBS
+
+Dietitian and Teacher of Cooking of the New York Association for
+Improving the Condition of the Poor
+
+_Printed on Fine Quality Book Paper. Cover Design in Colors_
+
+Many Cook Books have been published, from time to time, to meet various
+requirements, or to elucidate certain theories, but very few have been
+written to meet the needs of the large proportion of our population who
+are acutely affected by the constantly increasing cost of food products.
+Notwithstanding that by its valuable suggestions this book helps to
+reduce the expense of supplying the table, the recipes are so planned
+that the economies effected thereby are not offset by any lessening in
+the attractiveness, variety or palatability of the dishes.
+
+Of equal importance are the sections of this work which deal with food
+values, the treatment of infants and invalids and the proper service of
+various dishes.
+
+The recipes are planned for two persons, but may readily be adapted for
+a larger number. The book is replete with illustrations and tables of
+food compositions--the latter taken from the latest Government
+statistics.
+
+_Cloth Binding Illustrated 40c. per volume, postpaid_
+
+
+
+
+CUT-OUT AND PAINT BOOKS
+
+[Illustration]
+
+An original line of art studies printed in full rich colors on high
+grade paper. This series introduces many novel features of interest, and
+as the subject matters have been selected with unusual care, the books
+make a strong appeal not only to the little ones but even to those of
+riper years.
+
+POST CARDS              _Painting Book_
+
+DOLLS OF ALL NATIONS    _Scissors Book_
+
+OUR ARMY                _Scissors Book_
+
+CHILDREN'S PETS         _Puzzle Book_
+
+
+_Size 8-1/4 x 10-1/4 inches_
+
+PRICE 15C. PER COPY
+
+
+  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE    NEW YORK
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES OF
+THE ISLAND***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 21810-8.txt or 21810-8.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/21810-8.zip b/21810-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1d9449
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-8.zip
diff --git a/21810-h.zip b/21810-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1aa7670
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h.zip
diff --git a/21810-h/21810-h.htm b/21810-h/21810-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12823f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/21810-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,10090 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html>
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" />
+<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the Island, by Roger Thompson Finlay</title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+
+      @media print {
+       .pagenum         {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit;
+                          text-align: right; color: gray; display: none; visibility: hidden; }
+       }
+      @media screen {
+        .pagenum        {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit;
+                         text-align: right; color: gray; display: inline; visibility: visible;}
+        .pagenum a       {text-decoration:none; color:#444;}
+        .pagenum a:hover {color:#F00;}
+       }
+
+       div.frontmatter {max-width: 40em;
+          margin-left: auto;
+          margin-right: auto;
+          page-break-before: always; }
+
+       body > p { text-align: justify; text-indent: .5em;
+                  max-width: 40em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+       p             {margin-top: .33em; font-size: medium; margin-bottom: 0em;}
+       p.noindent    {text-indent: 0em;}
+       p.center      {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;}
+       p.titleblock  {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; line-height: 125%;}
+       p.titleblockl {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: left; line-height: 125%;}
+       p.chapter     {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; line-height: 100%;}
+
+       h2+p, h3+p { text-indent: 0; }
+
+       h1,h2,h3,h4 {
+            text-align: center;
+            clear: both; /* font-weight: normal; */ page-break-after: avoid ! important;}
+       hr {width: 33%;
+           margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;
+           margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;
+           clear: both;}
+       hr.chapter {width: 55%; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 0em; page-break-before: always;}
+       hr.sorta   {width: 45%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;}
+       hr.minor   {width: 30%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;}
+
+       table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+       td.chap {text-align: left; padding-left: 10px;}
+       td.pr {text-align: right; padding-left: 6px; }
+       td.abstract p {letter-spacing: 0.02em; text-align: justify;
+                     margin-left: 14%; margin-right: 0%; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: 0.75em;}
+
+       body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;}
+
+       a {text-decoration: none;}
+
+       .center {text-align: center;}
+       .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
+       .u     {text-decoration: underline;}
+
+       .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+       .figleft {margin: auto; float: left; text-align: left;}
+       .caption {font-size: 80%; font-weight: bold;}
+       .scribedcaption {font-size: 100%; font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;}
+       img {border: none;}
+
+    hr.full { width: 100%;
+              margin-top: 3em;
+              margin-bottom: 0em;
+              margin-left: auto;
+              margin-right: auto;
+              height: 4px;
+              border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */
+              border-style: solid;
+              border-color: #000000;
+              clear: both; }
+    pre      {font-size: 75%;}
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the
+Island, by Roger Thompson Finlay</h1>
+<pre>
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre>
+<p>Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the Island</p>
+<p>Author: Roger Thompson Finlay</p>
+<p>Release Date: June 11, 2007  [eBook #21810]</p>
+<p>Language: English</p>
+<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p>
+<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES OF THE ISLAND***</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<h3>E-text prepared by Joe Longo<br />
+    and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br />
+    (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 659px;">
+<img src="images/cover-spine.jpg" width="659" height="710" alt="Cover" title="Cover" />
+</div>
+<hr class="major" />
+
+<p class="center">
+<span style="font-size: 150%;">THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</span><br /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">By</span> ROGER T. FINLAY</span>
+</p>
+
+<p class="noindent" style="margin-bottom:2em;">A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating
+the remarkable experiences of two boys and a man,
+who are cast upon an island in the South Seas with
+absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the
+exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning
+clothing, tools and weapons and not only do they train
+nature's forces to work for them but they subdue and
+finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The books
+contain two thousand items of interest that every boy
+ought to know.</p>
+
+
+<p class="center">
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+                  The Castaways<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+               Exploring the Island<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+            The Mysteries of the Caverns<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+                  The Tribesmen<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+              The Capture and Pursuit<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+            The Conquest of the Savages<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+          Adventures on Strange Islands<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+             Treasures of the Islands<br />
+<br /><br />
+    <i>Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations.</i><br />
+           <i>60 cents per vol., postpaid.</i><br />
+<br />
+<span style="font-size: 70%;">PUBLISHED BY</span><br />
+<span style="font-size: 115%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span><br />
+<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;      New York</span></span>
+</p>
+<hr class="major" />
+<h2>TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS</h2>
+<hr class="major" />
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 373px; margin-bottom: 5em;">
+<a name="illus-003" id="illus-003"></a>
+<img src="images/illus-003.png" width="373" height="569" alt="The scout from the rear now came in with a leap" title="The scout from the rear now came in with a leap" />
+<span class="caption">"<i>The scout from the rear now came in with a leap</i>"</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_27">See p. 27</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+
+
+<table width="450" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Title page" border="1">
+  <col style="width:80%;" />
+  <tr>
+    <td align="center">
+<br /><br />
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 180%; margin-bottom: .5em; font-variant: small-caps; word-spacing: 0.4em;">The Wonder Island Boys</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 145%; margin-bottom: 1em;">TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 0em;">BY</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0em; font-size: 110%;">ROGER T. FINLAY</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 3em;">ILLUSTRATED</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 119px;">
+<img src="images/illus-nybc.png" width="119" height="116" alt="N Y B Co." title="" />
+<span class="caption">N Y B Co.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 5em; font-size: 85%; margin-bottom: 0em;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0px; font-size: 85%; font-variant: small-caps;  margin-bottom: 2em;">New York</p>
+    </td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<p class="center">
+<span class="smcap" style="font-size: 110%;">Copyright, 1915, by</span>
+<br /><span style="font-size: 110%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span>
+</p>
+
+
+<hr class="sorta" />
+<h3>CONTENTS</h3>
+<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents">
+<col style="width:5%;" />
+<col style="width:80%;" />
+<col style="width:15%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr>
+  <td align="left" style="font-size: small">CHAPTER</td>
+  <td colspan="2" class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">I.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><span class="smcap">The Peculiar Signals</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_15">Page 15</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The doleful sound. The Alma Perdita. "Cry of the Lost
+Soul." John, Uraso and Muro listening to the signals of
+the enemies. The night watch. Stalking. The answering
+cry. The Konotos. Sacrificial feasts. The dark of the
+moon. Its significance. The language of birds and
+animals. Their meaning. Discovery of cannibals. The
+telltale bone. Evidence of more than one tribe. Strange
+customs. Sacrifices of ancient times. Mexican rites.
+Superstitions. Previous history of the boys. Varney,
+Uraso and Muro. The Professor. The wreck and adventures.
+John's search for records, and inscriptions. Mysterious
+happenings. Waiting for morning. The plan outlined. The
+days of the sacrifices. Determine to prevent the killing
+of captives. Discovery of the natives in vicinity.
+Investigating the hills.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">II.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><span class="smcap">The Savages on the Hill</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_26">Page 26</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>John's instructions. John and Muro scouting. The natives
+intercepting Uraso. Preparing to resist the attack.
+The signaling instrument. A shot. A hurried report
+from the scout. Sending a messenger to Muro. The
+puzzled natives. Muro attacked. Marching east. Muro
+in danger. Making a demonstration. The weird drums.
+The ambush. The approach of the natives. The attempt
+to be friendly. The Chief's refusal. The appearance of
+Uraso. Uraso's ruse. The savages confounded. Muro
+surrounded. His escape. The savages retreating.
+Muro's story. Muro's efforts to make friends of the
+natives. Driving them from the woods. The sea of the
+east. The runner to the landing. The peculiar drums.
+The Marimba. The mountain deer.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">III.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><span class="smcap">Capture of the Village</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_38">Page 38</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The trying time at night. No selfishness in education.
+The evening talks. Astronomy and early humanity.
+Savage rites determined and carried out by the signs of
+the stars. The Zodiac. Its origin. The universal superstitions.
+A common origin. The continents. The theory
+of a mid-Atlantean continent. The theory of the joined
+continents. Language as a criterion of the unity of the
+races. The pyramids. The tales of the Egyptian priests.
+The deep sea soundings by the ship <i>Challenger</i>. The beating
+of the weird drums in the night. Evidence of the natives'
+belief in witch doctors. The plan of advance outlined
+by John. The boys, accompanied by John and
+portion of the force advancing. Nearing the village.
+Hearing the shouting and the drums. Causes of the
+demonstrations. A captive. At the edge of the village.
+A curious proceeding. A huge Chief. The witch doctors.
+Their fantastic garb. The Chief's defiance. Demands return
+of the captured Chief. Asks John to surrender.
+Commands the Korinos to destroy captive. They bring
+forward Tarra, their own messenger. The warning.
+The shot.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">IV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><span class="smcap">Rescuing a White Captive</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_53">Page 53</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Tarra freed. When captured. The fallen witch doctor.
+The surprise. The warning from Uraso. Exorcising
+the bad spirits. The influence of noise on savage
+minds. The gun silencers. The savages insist on aiding
+their fallen witch doctor. The shot with the silencer.
+The awe produced. John the white Korino. The terror
+among the natives. The Chief retreats. Entering the
+village. The Chief and people flee. The reserves come
+up. The sick and wounded in the village. A prison
+stockade. Rescuing prisoners. Their terrible plight.
+A white captive. The stockade burned. Learning about
+the tribes on the island. The messenger to the Chief.
+The latter's message. John's bold march to see the
+Chief. Astounded at John's bravery. John's peace pact
+with the Chief. The return to the village. The Chief
+assured of the friendship of John and his people.
+Learning about the other tribe. One sun to the north.
+The Chief told why the white Chief was so powerful.
+Wisdom. John's practical example to the Chief.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">V.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><span class="smcap">Return of the Natives</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_66">Page 66</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Trinkets. Adornments for the natives. Gifts. The day
+appointed for the sacrifices. John and party invited by
+the Chief. John sends for the gifts. The <i>Pioneer</i> at the
+landing. Sails to the native village. The Korinos called
+before the Chief. He demands that they produce the captives
+for sacrifice. The Korinos learn of the destruction
+of the stockade, and the release of the captives. The
+Chief condemns the Korinos to take their places. John
+secures delay. At the beach. The natives gathering
+clams for the feast. The Korinos and their caves. A
+sail. The boys spread the news. The signal. The natives
+wonder at the sight of the vessel. The <i>Pioneer</i>.
+The feast that night. Spitting meat. The natives' customs.
+Vegetables. The drink. Arialad. The value of
+the root. Ginseng.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><span class="smcap">The Savage Ceremonials</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_78">Page 78</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The day for the ceremonies. The native cloth weaving.
+Dyeing. Black and red. The grotesque figures. The
+spears. The colored streamers. The covered points.
+The flag idea. A brilliant scheme by the boys. The
+band for the ceremonies. A procession. The ship's band.
+The leader. The enthusiasm in the village. The dancing
+natives. Arranging the order of the procession.
+The tall man and huge spear. The Korinos. The band
+and the flag at the procession. The leader. The magnolia
+trees. The march to the forest. The great tree
+on the hill. The ceremony. Striking the tree. The
+flower at the top. How it was brought down. The rite
+of the flower. Incineration. The powder. The dance.
+Return of the procession.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><span class="smcap">Significance of Native Rites</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_88">Page 88</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Fasting before the feast. Great success of the ceremony.
+The significance of the flower rites. Ancient origin of
+rites. Explaining customs which followed the practice
+of scalping. Head hunters. The hair token. The
+flower before the fruit. The Druids. The ceremonia of
+the mistletoe. The antidote. The oak as a sacred tree.
+The great feast after the ceremony. Table implements.
+The Korinos. Where they were imprisoned. Prepared
+for the sacrifice. Their attempted escape. Gluttony.
+Habits of savages in this respect. The siesta. The boys
+discover the escape of the Korinos. The Marmozets.
+The tall native with the knotted club. His remarkable
+garb. The Chief's crown. The club-bearer reports the
+escape of the Korinos. The Chief's anger. Arrests the
+guards. Condemns them to suffer instead of the Korinos.
+The procession to the place of sacrifice. The sacrificial
+altar.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><span class="smcap">Hypnotism on Savages</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_100">Page 100</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>John's suggestion to the Chief. Asks that he be made
+the executioner. Uraso's address to the culprits. Their
+terror. Mysticism. Hypnotic influences. Mesmerism.
+Constant repetitions. Mystic numbers. The spell on all
+the natives. The effect of the mesmeric influence on the
+Chief. The rigid subjects. John the peerless Korino.
+The threats against the witch doctors. Bringing the
+victims to life. Amazement of the people. The Chief's
+address to his people. The return to the village.
+The feast. The mystic third. The dance at the end of
+the festival. To settle the fate of the Korinos. The recovery
+of the faculties of the white captive. His story.
+The identity of the skeleton found on Venture Island.
+Identified with Walter. The story which was doubted
+by John. The rescued natives. The Maloses. Ta
+Babeda. The tribe to the north. Distributing the gifts.
+The delight of the Chief. Telling him about the wonders
+of Wonder Island. The invitation to the Chief.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">IX.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><span class="smcap">The Remarkable Cave Explorations</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_113">Page 113</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Umbolos, to the north. The supposed cannibals.
+Determine to visit them. Preparing for the expedition.
+Chief Ta Babeda cautions John against the cannibal
+Chief Rumisses. John requests permission to take the
+Korinos with him. He consents provided John will enter
+the cave and take them. The trip to the cave. The
+Chief accompanies John to the cave. Superstitions about
+the caves. Why no one but the Korinos dare enter the
+caves. The hill near the ocean. The cove near the entrance
+of the cave. The flashlights. Lighting the caverns.
+Evidences of habitations. The escape of the
+Korinos. Following the trail. The outlet to the south.
+Tracked to the north. Uraso and Muro follow the fugitives.
+Their flight to the cannibal tribe. John and the
+boys return to explore the cave. A new series of caverns.
+A succession of four chambers. A large round
+chamber at the end of the lead. A mound in the center
+of the chamber. Removing the material in the mound.
+Discovery of the copper box. Peculiar character of the
+box.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">X.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><span class="smcap">The Tribe to the North</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_125">Page 125</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The copper box taken to the ship. News from Uraso and
+Muro. Explaining mesmerism and hypnotism. Concentration.
+The effect on susceptible minds. The Korinos
+safe with the cannibal tribe. John advises Stut to sail,
+north for twenty miles, and await their coming. The
+march. The cinnamon tree. Cinnamon suet. Minerals.
+Sulphates. Copper ores. Omens. All peoples believe in
+signs and omens. The shelter for the night. How signals
+were made. Sighting the cannibal village. Earthenware
+cooking utensils. Meet the first natives. The
+dreaded Chief. A curious figure. The hunchback. A
+smile on his face. The American greeting. The surprise.
+A white man. Finding the Korinos. The welcome
+to his village. The Chief told about their ship.
+On the island fifty years. Telling John about the
+strange things which have floated ashore from wrecked
+ships. The Korinos assured of safety.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><span class="smcap">The Hunchback Chief</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_138">Page 138</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Chief's house. The relics from the sea. The hunchback
+Chief's story. His trip as a whaler. Ill treatment.
+Runs away. Ships to China. His rudimentary education.
+Shipwrecked on the return from China. Rescued
+by native cannibals. Regard him with veneration.
+Misinterprets their motives. In desperation. Asserts
+himself. Becomes Chief of the tribe. Stops cannibal
+practices. His great influence over the people. The
+<i>Pioneer</i> arrives. Ephraim Wilmar, the hunchback. His
+surprise at the many changes during fifty years. His
+amazement at the telephone, the cable lines, the phonograph.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><span class="smcap">The Chief's Family</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_148">Page 148</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Ephraim's wife. The family. The gifts to Ephraim's
+family. Delight at the cooking utensils. John tells
+Ephraim about the treasures on the islands. Hidden
+treasures. Learning the secrets of early humanity.
+Archeology. The trip to the cave. The long journey.
+The cave which had the entrances sealed by Ephraim.
+The peculiar kinds of masonry. Entering the cave. Dogs
+with the party. Mysterious death of the dogs. The
+alarm of the natives. Carbonic gas. Its nature, and
+how tested. Methods for removing it. The Humphrey
+Davy lamp. The principle on which it is made. Designed
+to indicate the presence of deadly gases. Explosive
+mixtures. How a primitive safety lamp was made.
+Re&euml;ntering the cave. A large chamber. The cross-shaped
+cave. A parchment. The object of John's search.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><span class="smcap">The Chart and the Caves</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_164">Page 164</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The map accompanying the parchment. One of the
+Treasure caves. Remarkable carvings, and hieroglyphics.
+The quarrel of the buccaneers. The story of the
+Spaniard who wrote the chart. The expeditions searching
+for the treasure. Death of all who participated.
+Great archeological wealth. No material treasures found.
+How Ephraim's story affected the boys. John explains
+why the cannibals feared him. Due to their superstitions.
+Demented people regarded by some as saints. Genius and
+insanity. Further explorations of the island. The proposed
+trip to Wonder Island. Ephraim invited. He and
+his family accept. Telling Ephraim about Hutoton.
+The curious tales that were told them about the convict
+colony. The wonderful character of the people at Hutoton.
+The <i>Pioneer</i> sails. The first time on the deck of a
+vessel for fifty-two years. Ephraim and the library. His
+conversation with the head of the convict colony. The
+identity of the paralyzed man not established.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XIV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><span class="smcap">Rescue Island</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_175">Page 175</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The visitors at Hutoton received with rejoicing. John
+invites the leader to accompany them to Wonder Island.
+Retlaw, the captive, rescued, brought ashore. Caramo
+thought he recognized him. Sailing of the <i>Pioneer</i> for
+Wonder Island. Calling at the Malolo village. Ta Babeda
+agrees to accompany them to Wonder Island.
+Naming the island Rescue. The latitude and longitude
+noted. Introducing Ta Babeda to the cannibal Chief
+Ephraim. He explains how the Korinos misrepresented
+him and his people. The new world to Babeda when he
+stepped on board the <i>Pioneer</i>. The trip to Wonder
+Island. The mysteries on board the ship to the Chief.
+His inquisitive nature. How he characterized electricity.
+Ephraim's concern for his children. Approaching Enterprise
+River. The steamship <i>Wonder</i> in sight. The greeting.
+Going up the river. The excitement in Unity.
+The crowded dock. Sutoto and his bride. The flag on
+the <i>Wonder</i>. The curiosity of Beralsea at the sight of the
+Banners.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><span class="smcap">The Return to Wonder Island</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_187">Page 187</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Sutoto and the great wide world. Their trip to Valparaiso.
+Cinda, and the latest fashions. Blakely, the man
+of business. The boys tell him of the wonderful islands.
+His eagerness. He tells them of the great enterprises,
+and of the prospective new ship. The growth of Unity.
+The tribesmen coming in. Introducing Blakely to the
+Chiefs. They marvel at his energy. The Professor. John
+tells him about the copper box. The new hotel. The
+wonderful work in Unity. Agricultural pursuits. What
+they shipped to the north. The plans for surveying the
+islands. How the lands were apportioned. Building
+homes on the island. Energy of the natives. Emigration
+pouring in. Farm implements. Coffee tree planting.
+Raising cocoa. The schools. The Korinos as
+teachers. Explaining the trade problems to the Chief.
+Ephraim's desire to have his children remain and attend
+school. The Chief also permits his children to remain.
+Information that the paralyzed man is getting well.
+What paralysis is. The triangle. The visit of the boys
+to Sutoto's home. The new automobile. The surprise
+for the boys.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><span class="smcap">The Savages at Unity</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_199">Page 199</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Their new machines. Blakely's treat for the boys.
+The Professor's car. John in his runabout. The automobile
+procession. The Chief and the automobile. The cottage
+for the Chief's family. The boys and the Professor
+review their work. The great pleasure in their enterprises.
+George and Harry selected to manage affairs on
+Venture and Rescue Islands. The copper box. The skull
+in the package. The Professor announces the return of
+the reason of the paralytic. The word "triangle" announced
+by the paralytic. The remarkable coincidence.
+Opening the copper box. The triangle on the Walter letter.
+The skull within the copper box. The cryptic signs
+in the box. The counterpart of the skull they had found.
+The identical inscription. The agitation of the paralytic
+at the sight. He mentions the name of Walter. Retlaw
+enters and starts at the sight of the skulls. Tries to
+escape on seeing the paralytic. The latter announces his
+name as Clifford. Harry rightly judges that <i>Retlaw</i> is
+<i>Walter</i> reversed. Ephraim recognizes Clifford. Walter
+arrested.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><span class="smcap">Unraveling the Mysteries</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_214">Page 214</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Speculations concerning Walter. Sutoto informed. The
+mystery of their missing boat. Clifford's story. The
+paper with the markings on the skull identified by Ta
+Babeda. The secret in possession of Walter. The boys'
+suggestion as to proper names for the natives. Surnames,
+and how originated. The method adopted by the
+Romans. The Greek names. English surnames. Clifford's
+condition improving. Trying to identify the skeleton
+found on Venture Island. Clifford recognizes
+Ephraim. Walter's letter. The three islands. The triangle.
+The three southern stars. The southern cross.
+The three crosses. Thirty leagues. The charts of the
+islands.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Lettered Skull</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_224">Page 224</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Clifford awakes. The escape of Walter and his recapture.
+Clifford continues his story. His effort to find the
+treasure island. His meeting with Walter. Capture by
+the savages. The <i>Juan Ferde</i>. Blakely and Clifford.
+His knowledge of the skull. The finding of the boys'
+boat. Sailing down the river. Loss of the boat. Finding
+his companions. Sailing to Venture Island. His
+illness. Meeting with Walter on Rescue Island. His belief
+that Walter had hidden the chart. Walter brought
+in. Clifford apologizes to Walter. The Sign of the Plus
+and V. The chambers in the cave. What the inscriptions
+meant. Surprise when Walter learns of the finding
+of the copper box. Explains the meaning of the
+charts. Why there were three skulls. The mysterious
+letter. The remarkable happenings explained.</p></td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h3>
+<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Illustrations">
+<col style="width:75%;" />
+<col style="width:25%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The scout from the rear now came in with a leap</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-003">Frontispiece</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+  <td class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&#39;Stop!&#39; cried John, &#39;It will be death for any one to touch him&#39;</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-060">59</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&#39;It is copper,&#39; said John</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-142">138</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The old man pointed to the rocky wall</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-160">154</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+  <td class="pr">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 1. The Marimba.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-037">36</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-043">42</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-046">45</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 4. Silencer: Convolute Blades.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-055">54</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-078">75</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-079">76</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 7. The Mistletoe.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-093">90</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 8. The Jacchus.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-097">95</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-122">119</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 10. Cinnamon.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-132">129</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-152">146</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 12. Types of Masonry.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-159">154</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-166">159</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig. 14. How John made the Lamp.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-167">160</a></td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p  class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_15" id="p_15" href="#p_15">p. 15</a></span></p>
+<h2>TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS</h2>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2>
+
+<h3>THE PECULIAR SIGNALS</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>"Do</span> you remember, Harry, after discovering the
+treasure and the skeletons of the pirates in the cave
+near the Cataract, that we heard the doleful sound
+of some bird while going down the hill?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; that cry was something like it. Do you recall
+the name of the bird, George?"</p>
+
+<p>"It was the Alma Perdita."</p>
+
+<p>"I remember, now; it means the 'Cry of the Lost
+Soul.'"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but I don't think that came from a bird.
+It is more like an animal of some kind. Don't you
+hear a sound that seems to be answering it?"</p>
+
+<p>"It does seem so; I think John would know what
+animal it is; but it is too late to speak to him about
+it to-night, George."</p>
+
+<p>As Harry ceased speaking, the boys heard a noise,
+and George arose holding up his hand as a warning.
+"I think I see something, so we ought to call John."</p>
+
+<p>The boys quietly moved forward, and noted two
+figures moving about a short distance beyond. The
+boys crawled over to the place where John was sleep<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_16" id="p_16" href="#p_16">p. 16</a></span>ing,
+and found that the place he occupied, as well as
+that of Uraso's vacant.</p>
+
+<p>"That must be John and Uraso over there," remarked
+Harry in a whisper.</p>
+
+<p>They were confirmed in this on approaching the
+moving figures, and saw that both were armed, and
+also that they were watching another moving figure
+beyond.</p>
+
+<p>"Is that a bird or an animal?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"An animal," replied John, in an undertone.</p>
+
+<p>"That was my opinion from the first," remarked
+George, who turned to Harry with a sort of 'I told
+you so,' expression.</p>
+
+<p>"But it is a two-legged animal," responded John.</p>
+
+<p>"How long have you been up?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"More than an hour," said Uraso. "Muro is now
+coming back, and we shall know something more definite."</p>
+
+<p>"Then that is Muro?" asked George, in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; he has been stalking the ones making that
+noise, and was the one who called our attention to
+it."</p>
+
+<p>Muro disappeared, and the peculiar cries were repeated,
+then, most startlingly, a sound, similar in
+character, appeared to come from a point very close
+to where they were now crouching.</p>
+
+<p>John turned to Uraso in astonishment. The latter
+did not seem at all perturbed, but after the second
+cry Uraso imitated the sound, and John smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"Muro has the exact tone now," said John.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Uraso, "and the cry I gave was an
+answer, which Uraso understands."</p>
+
+<p>In a few minutes Muro appeared, but he was not<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_17" id="p_17" href="#p_17">p. 17</a></span>
+smiling. His face was grave, as he said: "We have
+come upon the terrible Konotos. I feared that when
+I heard the first cry several hours ago."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you been near them?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"Near enough to know that there are quite a number,
+and what is more, they are now engaged in their
+regular feast, and if they have any captives, this is
+the time that they will be sacrificed," said Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you think this is the time for that?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Because it was now nearing the <i>dark of the moon</i>,
+as you call it, and that time is chosen because the
+Great Spirit, out of anger, is hiding the light."</p>
+
+<p>The boys now understood that this was a rite practiced
+by some of the tribes on Wonder Island, during
+that season of the Moon's phase.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you talk with them in that strange language?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"No; but I tried to find out the key to the language
+they used."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that their regular language?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no! That is simply the special language
+which they use on certain occasions," answered
+Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"The savages here, as everywhere, have a sort of
+code language, or a species of wireless telegraphy,
+used by them only when in the presence of enemies,"
+commented John.</p>
+
+<p>"Harry and I thought it might be the Alma Perdita,
+that we heard at the cave near Cataract."</p>
+
+<p>"No; but it shows the ingenuity of the savages,
+when I explain that their most favored method is to
+assume the cry of some bird or animal, and in so<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_18" id="p_18" href="#p_18">p. 18</a></span>
+doing make it difficult for the enemy to distinguish
+the assumed from the real."</p>
+
+<p>"But on Wonder Island we had several methods
+of talking to each other," remarked Uraso. "For
+instance, we would perfectly imitate the cries of a
+number of birds, and also of certain animals, and of
+the wood insects. Thus, a nightingale would mean
+<i>watchfulness</i>; the chirrup of a cricket would be the
+signal that the enemy was not dangerous, or that
+there were not many of them; the cry of the Lost
+Soul bird would indicate that there was great danger,
+and so on with the birds and animals that make
+noises."</p>
+
+<p>"But I have discovered another thing," remarked
+Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"And what is that?" said John.</p>
+
+<p>"The natives here are cannibals."</p>
+
+<p>"That merely confirms my knowledge of the matter,"
+said John.</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at John in amazement. How did
+John know there were cannibals on the island?</p>
+
+<p>"When did you learn that?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yesterday," was his reply.</p>
+
+<p>"What did you find that makes you believe that?"</p>
+
+<p>"I discovered a bone which was once part of a
+human body."</p>
+
+<p>"But how would that be any indication that the
+people here are cannibals?"</p>
+
+<p>"When you see a bone that has on it the unmistakable
+markings of human teeth, it is pretty safe to
+infer that the animal which scratched the bone was
+a cannibal."</p>
+
+<p>From the report of Muro it was evident that there<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_19" id="p_19" href="#p_19">p. 19</a></span>
+was a large number of people on the island, and, if
+Muro's observations were correct, they now had some
+captives, or, at least, were preparing to celebrate a
+feast in which human beings were to be the victims.</p>
+
+<p>"That satisfies me of one thing," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"And what is that?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, that there must be other tribes on the island,"
+he answered.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you infer that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, where would they get the victims?"</p>
+
+<p>"From their own people," answered John.</p>
+
+<p>"What! eat their own people?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"That is not at all strange. Many people are
+known to sacrifice their own, and among the most
+degraded, they are known to kill and eat their own."</p>
+
+<p>"That is the first time I have heard of such a
+thing."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you remember that the Bible tells about
+Abraham about to offer up his own son as a sacrifice?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but not to eat him."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course not; but it is not an uncommon thing
+for tribes in Africa to sell their own children for this
+purpose. One of the greatest sacrificial rites of the
+ancient Mexicans, was to offer up the most handsome
+youth each year, as a propitiation to the gods."</p>
+
+<p>"So they do not always depend on their enemies to
+furnish the feast?"</p>
+
+<p>"By no means. Many of the tribes have a superstition
+that if they eat a brave enemy it will impart to
+them his spirit of valor, and the fact that they are
+to have sacrifices here does not mean that there are
+various tribes on the island; but that is something we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_20" id="p_20" href="#p_20">p. 20</a></span>
+shall have to investigate. It is my opinion that we
+shall find other tribes, but that, I am inclined to
+think, depends upon the size of the island."</p>
+
+<hr class='sorta' />
+
+<p>The preceding volume, "Adventures Among
+Strange Islands," states the conditions under which
+the two boys, Harry and George, found themselves
+on a strange island, in the southern Pacific. Accompanying
+them were John L. Varney, and about
+sixty natives from Wonder Island, together with the
+two Chiefs Uraso and Muro.</p>
+
+<p>Nearly three years previously the boys, George
+Mayfield and Harry Crandall, who were members
+of the crew of a school-ship, the <i>Investigator</i> sailed
+from New York, and while on board, met a professor,
+who, when the ship was blown up at sea, became their
+companion in the life boat in which they sought
+refuge. Together they finally were stranded upon
+an unknown island, less than a hundred miles from
+the island which was the scene of the adventures with
+which we are now concerned.</p>
+
+<p>On this island they discovered five or six savage
+tribes, from some of which they rescued seven of
+their former boy companions. Here also they met
+Mr. Varney, who had escaped from the savages.
+The Professor succeeded in reconciling all the warring
+tribes, and the natives were now engaged in
+agriculture, and in various other pursuits, and the
+boys had the great pleasure and satisfaction of being
+able to build their own vessel and return home. The
+trip to the Wonderful island, with which this volume
+deals, was for a double purpose, as will presently be
+shown.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_21" id="p_21" href="#p_21">p. 21</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John, as Mr. Varney was familiarly known to them,
+was not only a well educated man, but a great adventurer,
+and had traveled all over the world in pursuit
+of scientific knowledge. He was particularly interested
+in the history of the men who first went to
+the western world, and scattered civilization to the
+benighted countries.</p>
+
+<p>Like many men of his character, he did not consider
+the question of money. He tried to acquire
+knowledge and information for the love of the quest,
+and in order to be of service to his fellow man, so
+it was purely by accident that he became a member
+of a crew that sailed for the southern seas at the
+same time that the boys left New York on their trip.</p>
+
+<p>While his companions undertook the mission solely
+for the sake of the money which might be acquired,
+John engaged thinking it might offer the means of
+laying bare many of the early legends and vague historical
+accounts with which that region of the South
+Seas abounds, and he knew that if any records were
+in existence, they could be preserved only in such
+secure places as caverns, which the Spanish buccaneers
+invariably selected as the safest places to conceal
+their treasures.</p>
+
+<p>While the boys, together with the Professor and
+John, had found a vast amount of treasure, as stated
+in the first six volumes containing the history of
+Wonder Island, they found not a single scrap of historical
+value, excepting a few traces, which have been
+referred to, and certain inscriptions which all pointed
+to the same depositary, somewhere in the South Seas.</p>
+
+<p>The last inscription was found by John, shortly
+before they left Wonder Island, and which, though<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_22" id="p_22" href="#p_22">p. 22</a></span>
+its full meaning was wrapt in mystery, pointed, as
+did the others, to another island than the one on
+which it was found. What made the matter still
+more interesting, was the knowledge that some one,
+by the name of Walters, either had prepared the inscription,
+or had some knowledge of what it meant.</p>
+
+<p>This man was not known to any of the party, and
+what made it the more remarkable was the information,
+lately obtained, that while Walters, apparently,
+knew one of the companions who accompanied John
+on his wrecked vessel, that man did not know Walters,
+at least not by that name.</p>
+
+<p>These circumstances, together with numerous
+other incidents, which the boys could not understand,
+or unravel, made such an impression on them, that
+they were determined to devote their energies to ferret
+out the inexplicable things, and the earnestness
+of John was a great incentive in the undertaking.</p>
+
+<p>Up to this time the boys did not know the real motive
+in the mind of John. To them this quest on his
+part was to find out where the Treasure islands were
+for the material value that might be obtained.</p>
+
+<p>His long silence about the real design had been
+purposely concealed by him, as he felt that merely to
+delve into the hidden recesses of the islands would
+not be understood by them in its real sense, because
+as boys they could not appreciate that real knowledge
+always must be disassociated from the idea of
+material or commercial gain.</p>
+
+<p>It was with a great deal of anxiety that the boys
+waited for the morning sun. They had but a comparatively
+small force to deal with the situation.
+True, they were equipped with fire-arms, and they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_23" id="p_23" href="#p_23">p. 23</a></span>
+knew that the <i>Pioneer</i>, their vessel, would return
+within a week, still, within that time the large number
+of natives might be able to surround them, and
+unless they could get some word to the ship, and by
+that means enable their friends to send reinforcements,
+they would be starved out.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the camp was astir there was a consultation.
+John had fully matured a plan in his mind,
+but it was always a pleasure, as it had been with the
+Professor, to present any complications to the boys,
+so that they could take a hand in the developments
+which might follow.</p>
+
+<p>"Harry and I have been considering the matter,"
+said George. "We think it would be well to leave
+this place, and go back to the landing and wait for the
+<i>Pioneer</i>. We will then be ready, with reinforcements
+to meet them with more than an even chance."</p>
+
+<p>"But," remarked John; "are you willing to go
+back, and permit the devils here to destroy the captives
+they may have, or, to prevent them from sacrificing
+their own people?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys had not thought of this. "I know the
+feast days, during which these events will take place,
+will occur within the next four days," added Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"If that is so," said Harry, "I am willing to do
+my share in keeping them from it. What do you
+suggest?"</p>
+
+<p>"We must try to get into communication with
+them, and if we fail then I am in favor of taking some
+stringent measures to divert them from their purpose,"
+answered John.</p>
+
+<p>"Then you may be assured we are with you to the
+end," said George.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_24" id="p_24" href="#p_24">p. 24</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"After talking with Uraso and Muro, we have
+agreed on a plan that may be successful, and it will
+at any rate, for the time, prevent them from carrying
+out their festival scheme." As John said this Muro
+appeared, and stated that he had discovered the arrival
+of at least a hundred natives on the hill beyond
+the second ravine, and that he saw smoke on the third
+hill beyond that, and was of the opinion that the village
+must not be far away.</p>
+
+<p>This intelligence added interest to the situation.
+As nearly as could be estimated they were at least
+fifteen miles from the landing place selected when the
+<i>Pioneer</i> sailed.</p>
+
+<p>"Unless I am very much mistaken the ridge on
+which we now are is the backbone of the island, and I
+also believe that it is narrow and we should be able
+to find the sea much nearer by going east from this
+place," remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>"But if we do that it will be necessary for some one
+to go to the place selected for the landing of the
+<i>Pioneer</i>, and tell them of our plans, and what we
+have learned," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"That is what I have in mind. But before doing
+that we must investigate this portion of the island
+more carefully. My plan is as follows: Along this
+ridge, further to the east, is a sheltered spot, or a
+place where the rocks form a sort of cove, and which
+can be easily defended. If the natives have not
+reached that quarter it will make an ideal retreat for
+us, and where we can defend ourselves for an indefinite
+time."</p>
+
+<p>"But why should we take up time to find a place<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_25" id="p_25" href="#p_25">p. 25</a></span>
+like that if you intend to take steps toward meeting
+the natives?"</p>
+
+<p>"It will be used to fall back upon."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, then you intend to take measures against
+them at once?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not for the first day, at least. As soon as we are
+established there we will investigate the region to the
+east, and if we find the shore line closer on the eastern
+shore, we can then send a runner with a message
+to the landing place, giving them the information."</p>
+
+<p>The boys now understood. It was evident that it
+would have been bad policy to retreat in face of the
+enemy, if such he should prove to be. Something
+must be done to divert the natives for the time being.
+This would give them time to communicate with their
+vessel.</p>
+
+<p>"There is one thing that must be remembered.
+The savages know of our presence here. They are
+now on the alert, and we are being watched with the
+greatest vigilance. If they think there is an opportunity
+for fresh victims it will stimulate them to the
+greatest exertions."</p>
+
+<p>"I agree with you in that view," said Uraso, as
+John finished speaking.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p  class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_26" id="p_26" href="#p_26">p. 26</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2>
+
+<h3>THE SAVAGES ON THE HILL</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class="smcap">After</span> a hurried breakfast the party marched
+along the southern crest of the hill, keeping as much
+out of view of the watchers on the northern side as
+possible. The course adopted was one well calculated
+to deceive the natives, for while the main bulk
+of the party silently left the camping place, a half
+dozen of their companions were left behind, and they
+were particular to remain exposed at intervals, so
+that the departure of the main party would not be
+discovered.</p>
+
+<p>To those left behind, John said: "Remain here until
+you hear firing. In that event you will know that
+we have met them, and that fact will be sufficient notice
+that your duty here is at an end. Uraso has
+begged the privilege of being with you, and you know
+that is an assurance of your safety in any event."</p>
+
+<p>The place suggested by John was not over two
+miles distant. Muro went ahead with one of the
+most reliable men of his tribe, and at intervals this
+runner was sent back with the information that the
+course was clear.</p>
+
+<p>Everything pointed to the success of the scheme,
+until they were within sight of the place, when the
+runner came back hurriedly with the information
+that Muro had seen the first of the natives, and he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_27" id="p_27" href="#p_27">p. 27</a></span>
+felt certain that they were at the place selected for
+their fort.</p>
+
+<p>The party halted. The runner returned, and John
+sent back a messenger to Uraso, advising him to come
+forward at once. Within fifteen minutes the messenger
+returned with the startling information that
+the natives were between them and Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>This was, indeed, surprising. Either they were
+experts at stalking enemies, or they had been fortunate
+enough to bring up a force in such a position as
+to make Uraso's escape a most hazardous one.</p>
+
+<p>"We must make the best of the situation," said
+John. "Let us prepare to receive them, if they are
+determined to attack us."</p>
+
+<p>"But what shall we do about Uraso?" asked
+Harry, in some consternation.</p>
+
+<p>"I think Uraso knows how to take care of the
+situation. He is shrewd enough to outwit them, and
+if there is any danger from that quarter, he will let
+us know."</p>
+
+<p>"But how can he let us know if his messenger cannot
+get through?"</p>
+
+<p>John smiled, as he looked at George, and responded:
+"You have evidently forgotten that Uraso
+has the best signaling instrument in the world, the
+gun."</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly; I had forgotten that. But what shall
+we do if&mdash;" His voice was cut short by a shot from
+the direction of Uraso's position.</p>
+
+<p>"There it is," said Harry. "Two more shots!"</p>
+
+<p>The scout from the rear now came in on a leap.
+"They are coming this way," he hurriedly informed
+John.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_28" id="p_28" href="#p_28">p. 28</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Who are coming?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"The natives."</p>
+
+<p>"Lie down!" he commanded. "No one must fire
+until I give the command. Oto, go to Muro at once,
+and tell him to come back immediately."</p>
+
+<p>In the distance to the west could be seen little
+squads of natives coming directly toward them. In
+the different groups were fully fifteen men, all armed
+with spears and bows and arrows.</p>
+
+<p>"Uraso is driving them this way; I am sure of
+that," remarked John, as he watched their maneuvers.</p>
+
+<p>"What makes you think so?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"They are simply retreating, thinking, in all probability
+that they have met our entire band. They do
+not know we are here."</p>
+
+<p>"Brave Uraso! I hope he will not get into danger,"
+said George. "There they are now; see them
+on the ridge to&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>A shot from the direction of Muro now awoke them
+to action. The moment that sound reached the oncoming
+savages, they halted, and huddled together,
+evidently in confusion at the meaning of the new
+alarm.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah! they are puzzled!" Then, after a pause,
+he continued: "I hope Muro is not in trouble! I
+do not understand why his messenger has not returned."</p>
+
+<p>Within ten minutes of the report of the gun which
+has just been referred to, the messenger sent by
+John, came in and stated that it was impossible for
+him to reach Muro, as the hill directly to the east
+was alive with warriors.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_29" id="p_29" href="#p_29">p. 29</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It was now Muro's turn to get the sympathy of the
+boys, and both of them turned to John, who still
+seemed unperturbed.</p>
+
+<p>"We will march directly to the east," he announced.
+"Every man must hold his gun ready for
+instant firing. Move forward quietly, as you have
+been doing. We must go to the assistance of Muro.
+Uraso will take care of the rear."</p>
+
+<p>They glided along the crest, directly behind John,
+and as they passed over the hill, it was evident that
+the natives were out in force.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder whether they have captured Muro?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"No; he is all right. You may depend on it that
+he will not be taken without a warning shot is given."</p>
+
+<p>"But we heard a shot."</p>
+
+<p>"True; but that was the messenger."</p>
+
+<p>From the manner in which the natives in their
+front were scurrying to and fro, it was apparent to
+John's practiced mind, they had no idea of the approach
+of John and his party. It was plain that they
+knew of Muro, or, at least of some one beyond the second
+hill, where John inferred Muro must have gone,
+because all their energies appeared to be directed toward
+that point.</p>
+
+<p>"I am afraid they are after Muro, but I am sure
+if he finds himself in danger he will fire a shot to
+warn us. In such a situation we must attract their
+attention. I will detail the first squad to accompany
+me. All those remaining will conceal themselves,
+and under no circumstances show yourselves, or let
+your presence be known, unless you are attacked.
+We will go to the point beyond the two large trees,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_30" id="p_30" href="#p_30">p. 30</a></span>
+and make the demonstration there, thus drawing
+them away from Muro."</p>
+
+<p>John with the six men designated hurried over the
+intervening ground, just as two shots, undoubtedly
+from Muro, broke the quiet, and placed the watchers
+on the alert. In less than ten minutes the boys heard
+a volley to the right, and almost instantly the opposite
+slope was alive with natives running to and fro
+in all directions, and the most peculiar cries were
+heard, while in the distance there was a singular
+rhythmic sound as though drums were being beaten,
+in regular time.</p>
+
+<p>It sounded very weird and fascinating. The
+drums, if such they were, had different keys, and
+their companions did not appear to be able to give
+any information about them.</p>
+
+<p>While thus waiting for John to appear, the watchers
+were surprised to see the force which was between
+Uraso and themselves, rushing alongside the hill, and
+directly toward their place of concealment. Here
+was a problem, not contemplated by John, and the
+boys consulted the men with them.</p>
+
+<p>Harry said: "I will do what has always been our
+custom, that is first show ourselves, and indicate
+that we do not wish to be enemies, and try to gain
+their confidence."</p>
+
+<p>"I think some of the men should try to talk to
+them. It is possible that they may be acquainted
+with their language. You remember the one we captured
+could understand what Muro said," suggested
+George.</p>
+
+<p>It should be stated that after they landed on the
+island, four days previously, they had made a short<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_31" id="p_31" href="#p_31">p. 31</a></span>
+excursion into the interior, where they were attacked
+by a tribe, of which one of the men was captured,
+after being wounded, and then taken by the Professor
+on board the <i>Pioneer</i>, and carried to Wonder Island.</p>
+
+<p>The savages came forward apparently without
+knowing of the existence of our party, and when
+within two hundred feet Harry, and Tarra, one of the
+most intelligent of the islanders, stepped forward,
+and waved their hands.</p>
+
+<p>The natives stopped in astonishment. Tarra
+spoke to them, but they were mute. Then Tarra
+turned to Harry, and rubbed his nose, and made a
+sign of friendship. After some hesitation the leader,
+who was, from all appearance a chief, answered, that
+they demanded the delivery to them of the wounded
+man. After this was interpreted Harry assured him
+that the man would be restored safe and sound, as
+soon as he was cured.</p>
+
+<p>At this information the Chief told Tarra that he
+lied, and that he had been taken for the purpose of
+being sacrificed. He was assured that such was not
+the case, as they did not believe in sacrificing human
+beings.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief then demanded that they leave the island
+at once, or they would kill all of them. Tarra
+laughed at this announcement, and his demeanor was
+such as to astound the natives. "You do not know
+what you say," said Tarra. "The white people who
+are with us have fire guns, which kill when they
+speak," and he held up one of them, and the boys
+were amused to see how quickly they began to waver
+and look about for shelter.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_32" id="p_32" href="#p_32">p. 32</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"We have not come here to injure you," said
+Tarra. "We want to be friends."</p>
+
+<p>This appeal did not affect the Chief, but seeing his
+men disappear he silently withdrew to the north.
+They had scarcely gone before Uraso and his men
+appeared in the tall grass beyond, and were most
+heartily welcomed by the boys.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso laughed as he related their experience. He
+said that the band came up, after John and the party
+left, and in order to make as big a showing as possible
+he and his companions hid in the grass, being
+separated from each other twenty feet or more, thus
+making a line over a hundred feet in length.</p>
+
+<p>The savages did not know that the entire line was
+occupied only by seven men. To all appearances the
+waving of the grass at the different points along the
+line, indicated to them the presence of a large force.
+As a result they started for the east, instead of going
+to the south, as Uraso had calculated they would do,
+and which indeed they would have done had they not
+heard the peculiar savage-made signals of the party
+which was hunting Muro.</p>
+
+<p>The movement of the band in that direction drove
+them directly toward the watchers who had been left
+behind by John, and for them to meet a second party,
+immediately after they left Uraso, must have been
+a most astonishing thing to them.</p>
+
+<p>But the savages were still more confounded, when,
+after leaving the boys, they learned from the signals
+that a third party (the one with John), was still further
+to the east.</p>
+
+<p>The first evidence the boys had, that the last party
+had reached the main band of savages, was the re<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_33" id="p_33" href="#p_33">p. 33</a></span>currence
+of the same peculiar sounds that were heard
+during the night.</p>
+
+<p>"They are telling them that we are all over the
+island. They are worried about the situation," said
+Uraso. "John purposely took the men forward in
+order to create the impression that our people might
+be found everywhere."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you hear the shots that Muro fired?" asked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; they were on all sides of him, undoubtedly,
+but I am satisfied he is all right now."</p>
+
+<p>"What makes you think so?"</p>
+
+<p>"For the reason that the natives are retreating,
+and dare not attack him. The last signs were those
+indicating danger. They were entirely different
+from those sent out last night."</p>
+
+<p>The peculiar drum beats ceased. Only occasionally
+could the plaintive signal cry be heard, and after
+waiting for more than half hour, the boys were delighted
+to see John and Muro appear on the distant
+hill, accompanied by the men who were detailed with
+him.</p>
+
+<p>Muro's story was an interesting one. He went directly
+east for a distance of nearly two miles, passing
+between two different parties, who were, of
+course, unaware of his presence. He sent the messenger
+back when he met the first natives, and when
+this messenger was on his way back he found the
+savages before him, and they made a rush which
+he stopped by the shot which John and the boys
+heard.</p>
+
+<p>After he had passed the second lot of natives he
+ascended the second hill, and beheld, far in the east,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_34" id="p_34" href="#p_34">p. 34</a></span>
+the open sea. This, he knew, was a matter of prime
+importance to them, as he felt assured it could not be
+more than five miles distant.</p>
+
+<p>While investigating the shore line, in order to select
+some particular marking point, by means of
+which they might be able to direct the <i>Pioneer</i>, he
+was surrounded by the natives. Not that they knew
+he was at that particular place, but, as he was now
+near the rocky headland which he was seeking, it
+occurred to him that they might be going on the same
+mission, and before he could extricate himself a small
+band intercepted him.</p>
+
+<p>He told them that they were friends and not enemies,
+and tried to win them over by promises of
+reward. For some reason or other they declined to
+treat with him, and he then had to resort to the rifle
+to impress them with the invisible power which he
+possessed.</p>
+
+<p>This was done by the two shots which the boys
+heard. They were of course awed by the explosion,
+and by the effect of the shots, and since it did not
+seem to bring about the desired results, he coolly
+marched away, and told them that they dared not
+follow him.</p>
+
+<p>His bravery undoubtedly proved his salvation, for
+they were too much astounded to move at his audacity.
+He did not go far, because he knew that his
+safety lay in keeping himself concealed, since he felt
+assured that it would not be long before John would
+resort to some device to attract their attention.</p>
+
+<p>His calculations were justified, for within a quarter
+of an hour he heard the volley which John ordered,
+and in an in creditable short space of time the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_35" id="p_35" href="#p_35">p. 35</a></span>
+woods were cleared of the watching natives, who, undoubtedly,
+were on the alert to capture him.</p>
+
+<p>"The boys went with me to the foot of the hill,"
+said John. "I knew Muro would fire three shots if
+he were in danger. When we were half way up the
+hill, we saw the natives stealthily moving around
+the hill, as though trying to encircle the position
+among the rocks. It was enough to indicate to me
+that Muro was the one they were stalking.</p>
+
+<p>"We did not shoot at the natives, but intended it
+merely as a warning. It was sufficient, for they made
+for cover at once, and within ten minutes we heard
+Muro's signal, and found him safe."</p>
+
+<p>"But isn't that fine about the sea?" said Harry
+with enthusiasm.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and that means we must now send a message
+to the landing place. Muro, did you see enough
+of the shore line to enable you to describe it?" asked
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"I was not near enough to tell exactly, but I believe
+it is directly east of our landing place, but,
+of course, on the opposite side of the island," was
+his response.</p>
+
+<p>"That will be near enough. Our work is on this
+side of the island. As soon as we have quieted down
+a little you will hear some news," said John as he
+glanced at the boys significantly.</p>
+
+<p>The runner was directed to proceed to the landing
+place, and to remain there during the night. He was
+then to return the first thing in the morning, and
+would find the party camped at the rocky height beyond.</p>
+
+<p>Without waiting for further explanations, and de<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_36" id="p_36" href="#p_36">p. 36</a></span>tails
+of experiences, they started for the place where
+they might find some shelter from the numerous foes,
+and at which place they might be able to formulate
+a plan to get into communication with the natives.</p>
+
+<p>It was late in the afternoon when they gained the
+rocky heights, and saw the wild nature of the surroundings.</p>
+
+<p>"How did you know this place was here?" asked
+Harry.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 366px;">
+<a name="illus-037" id="illus-037"></a>
+<a href="#p_37">
+<img src="images/illus-037-fig1.png" width="366" height="199"
+alt="Fig. 1. The Marimba." title="Fig. 1. The Marimba." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 1. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Marimba</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"I was here day before yesterday, and it was from
+this place we started when we heard your first guns
+in the battle you had with the natives," was John's
+answer.</p>
+
+<p>"But how does it happen that you did not see the
+ocean?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, are you able to see the ocean anywhere
+from this point?" he was asked.</p>
+
+<p>The question was a natural one, for when Muro
+came over the last hill to the south the sea was visible,
+but the rocky point was to the north, and thus out of
+range.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_37" id="p_37" href="#p_37">p. 37</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Did you hear the singular drum-like sounds this
+afternoon?"</p>
+
+<p>"They were drums," answered John, "and most
+peculiar ones, too. I have not seen the ones used
+by the natives here, but they have the same resonant
+sounds made by certain African tribes, and also by
+some South American savages."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it like?" was Harry's next question.</p>
+
+<p>"They are made of flat pieces of wood, very thin,
+laid over open-topped gourds. The gourds are, of
+course, dried, and the dryer they are, the more resonant
+the sound."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, that is something like the Xylophone."</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly so. That instrument is of savage origin.
+Instead of gourds some tribes use calabashes, which
+grow to enormous size, and they are highly prized
+owing to the quality of the sound they produce when
+used in this way."</p>
+
+<p>"But the ones we heard had different tones."</p>
+
+<p>"They use wooden strips of different lengths, exactly
+like the Xylophone. They are called Marimbas,
+balafongs and sansas, by the various tribes."</p>
+
+<p>While George, Harry and Uraso, were scouting to
+the north they unexpectedly came around the corner
+of a hill, from which they could see a beautiful
+valley running to the north, and directly opposite, on
+a little plateau, was a type of mountain deer, standing
+like a sentinel near the precipitous edge, while below
+were dozens feeding.</p>
+
+<p>The boys dared not shoot at them, but they remembered
+the place, and made up their minds that as soon
+as they had made friends of the natives they would
+have a hunt in this section.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_38" id="p_38" href="#p_38">p. 38</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2>
+
+<h3>CAPTURE OF THE VILLAGE</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class="smcap">The</span> most trying time for all adventurers and explorers,
+is after night has set in. During the daytime
+there is always plenty to take up one's attention
+and energies, but as the sun goes down the world
+seems to contract into a very small space, and when
+enemies are near the burden of waiting is a doubly
+trying one.</p>
+
+<p>The boys had spent many such nights. Whenever
+John or the Professor were about these hours were
+always enjoyed, because like all healthy boys, they
+were ever on the alert to ask questions which happened
+to be suggested by the experiences of the day.</p>
+
+<p>Now, it is a singular thing, that there is no selfishness
+in education. True education is charitable.
+Those who crave it with the most eagerness, are always
+the foremost in wishing to impart it to others.
+The honest learner does not resent the listening ear
+of his fellow pupils.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso and Muro, the two chiefs, who were the
+first to conceive the advantages of education at the
+hands of John and the Professor, were always on
+the alert at the evening meetings, whenever their
+duties permitted it, and hundreds of the natives of
+Wonder Island craved the privilege of hearing the
+conversations which took place on all sorts of topics.</p>
+
+<p>In Unity, the capital of Wonder Island, schools had<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_39" id="p_39" href="#p_39">p. 39</a></span>
+been established and were flourishing, and all the children
+were pupils, so that within another generation
+there would be a tremendous change for the better
+among those people.</p>
+
+<p>There was nothing more enjoyable to the boys than
+to see the intense interest manifested by the common
+natives, when night came on, and they expected one
+of the treats which they knew would be in store for
+them.</p>
+
+<p>On these occasions George and Harry were usually
+the questioners, but many times they saw that some
+of the men seemed to desire additional information,
+and by degrees the boys encouraged them to put the
+questions, and to seek inquiries.</p>
+
+<p>This had a very stimulating effect. John was delighted
+at the spirit thus developed, and he gave it a
+still broader range by refusing sometimes to answer
+the questions, and thus inviting answers from the
+men themselves.</p>
+
+<p>Thus discussion developed. It taught them to begin
+to think for themselves. If men know that the
+ready answer is always at hand, it prevents the mind
+from expanding. The evenings, therefore, were seasons
+of enjoyment, alike to the men as well as to the
+boys.</p>
+
+<p>After they had reached the cove in the rocks, and
+all the dispositions had been made for the night, John
+warned the men that while the natives were no doubt,
+in consternation, the utmost care must be observed to
+prevent any surprises.</p>
+
+<p>The moon had not yet arisen, but there was a beautiful
+clear sky. The great Southern Cross hung in
+the heavens like a giant lantern. On one side, and on<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_40" id="p_40" href="#p_40">p. 40</a></span>
+line with each other, shone the two brightest stars in
+the heavens, the first being the Dog Star Sirius, and
+the next in order, Canopus, the one white, and the
+other a yellowish white.</p>
+
+<p>Then, on the other side of the Great Cross, sparkled
+Antares, the brilliant red star, of the first magnitude,
+while Spica, another star made up a most remarkable
+combination of heavenly orbs.</p>
+
+<p>George had always been impressed with the appearance
+and the arrangement of the stars, and he
+was struck by the intense interest which all savages
+manifested in astronomy.</p>
+
+<p>"Your observations are correct," said John, when
+the discussion began. "Almost all of the savage
+rites, their feasts and religious ceremonials, have
+something to do with the appearances and the movements
+of the heavenly bodies."</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose the grouping of the stars, when they
+named these groups of the planets after animals, and
+the like, was done by the ancients, and really meant
+something in a religious way," ventured Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"It is difficult really to determine the origin of
+what is called the Zodiac. From the evidence attainable
+it was known to the Babylonians, over 2300 years
+before the Christian era. They divided the heavens
+into twelve parts, each cluster of stars representing
+some fanciful animal or being, such as the Lion, or
+the Bear, or the Dragon."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't it funny that the tribes here, as well as some
+on Wonder Island have an idea that the dark moon is
+caused by the Great Spirit trying to hide it in anger?"
+asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"It is singular when it is considered that the same<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_41" id="p_41" href="#p_41">p. 41</a></span>
+superstition is found in many, many tribes, on different
+continents, and it induces the belief that this idea
+had one common origin, and that the people all
+sprang from one source, or, that the different peoples
+worked out the ideas independently of each other."</p>
+
+<p>This statement caused considerable discussion, the
+natives being of the opinion that the idea was worked
+out by the different peoples and could not have been
+spread broadcast by one set of people.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you think it could not have come from
+one race?" asked George, as Uraso urged.</p>
+
+<p>"Because," he answered, "how did the people in
+olden times cross the big ocean? Even now, people
+like my own, dare not venture on the sea, for any
+distance from shore."</p>
+
+<p>"But," said John, "the surface of the earth was
+not originally like it is now. In many places over the
+earth, new lands have appeared,&mdash;that is, they come
+up out of the sea, and other lands have disappeared.
+We have records of islands, and parts of continents,
+hundreds of times larger than Wonder Island, which
+have disappeared in a single day. One of those, near
+Japan, sank, and engulfed over 200,000 people."</p>
+
+<p>"You surprise me," said Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"Furthermore, there is pretty conclusive evidence
+that the continents of Europe and America, were
+once joined, or that there was an immense continent,
+called Atlantis between the eastern and western hemispheres."</p>
+
+<p>"I read something on that subject some time ago,
+in which the writer denied that such a thing was
+possible," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_42" id="p_42" href="#p_42">p. 42</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 360px;">
+<a id="illus-043" name="illus-043"></a>
+<a href="#p_43">
+<img src="images/illus-043-fig2.png" width="360" height="572"
+alt="Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau" title="Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 2. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Atlantean</span> <span class="u">Plateau</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"I am aware of that, but there are some things
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_43" id="p_43" href="#p_43">p. 43</a></span>
+which are difficult to explain, unless the two hemispheres
+were once united, or, at any rate, were close
+enough together to permit travel from one part to the
+other."</p>
+
+<p>"What evidence is there on that point?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, in the first place, the root of the languages
+in Central America, and in Mexico, are the same as in
+the corresponding latitude in Europe and Africa.
+Then the Pyramids of Mexico are built on the same
+plan, and located, astronomically, the same as those
+in Egypt."</p>
+
+<p>"But could not the ancients have crossed the seas,
+and in that way given the same knowledge to both sections?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is absolutely no evidence that the ancients
+had vessels capable of traversing 2000 miles of
+ocean."</p>
+
+<p>"But the book I read said that the Western Hemisphere
+merely broke away from the main body of the
+land, and that is why the people here knew all that
+those in Europe had learned."</p>
+
+<p>"That is very plausible, and for the purpose of giving
+you a fair understanding of the matter, I make
+a sketch, showing (<a href="#illus-043">Fig. 2</a>), the Atlantean theory, in
+which the western shores of Europe and Africa, and
+the eastern shores of North and South America are
+outlined, and between them, in dotted lines, is Atlantis,
+the only part of that vast continent now being
+visible being the Azore Islands, at the northern extremity."</p>
+
+<p>"But what evidence is there that such a continent
+existed? Is it only a theory?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is supported by some evidence, much of which,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_44" id="p_44" href="#p_44">p. 44</a></span>
+like the account which the Egyptian priests gave to
+Solon, would take too long to state; but some years
+ago, while Darwin was engaged in making the deep
+sea soundings in the ship <i>Challenger</i>, it was found
+that the bed of the Atlantic showed a raised plateau,
+where the legendary Atlantis was claimed to be."</p>
+
+<p>"But might it not be possible that the other theory
+could be correct, also,&mdash;that is, that North America
+merely broke away, and in breaking away, left Atlantis
+as an island?"</p>
+
+<p>"I do not see how it can be reconciled. In the first
+sketch (<a href="#illus-043">Fig. 2</a>), note the shape of the continent of
+Atlantis. Now, in the next sketch (<a href="#illus-046">Fig. 3</a>), I have
+brought the two continents close up to each other.
+The outlines appear similar, and it would be difficult
+to make them fit together, if Atlantis should be placed
+there, or left in that space, after the breaking apart."</p>
+
+<p>The discussion was closed for the night and arrangements
+made for sleep and sentry duty.</p>
+
+<p>Frequently during the night the beating of the
+singular drums was heard. After the entertainment
+of the evening both Muro and Uraso undertook some
+scouting on their own account. The boys were awake
+early, and then learned of their expeditions.</p>
+
+<p>Three miles north of the rocky point the main village
+was located. They had crept forward cautiously
+until close enough to learn that there must be
+fully five hundred inhabitants. But what was more
+surprising still, was the evidence they obtained that
+the tribes believed in the Hoodoos and the witch doctors.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_45" id="p_45" href="#p_45">p. 45</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 357px;">
+<a id="illus-046" name="illus-046"></a>
+<a href="#p_44">
+<img src="images/illus-046-fig3.png" width="357" height="559"
+alt="Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres" title="Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 3. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Severed</span> <span class="u">Hemispheres</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The boys were jubilant at the information, and
+John was full of smiles as he imparted the
+informa<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_46" id="p_46" href="#p_46">p. 46</a></span>tion.
+The difficulty was to get into communication
+with the natives, as their efforts of the preceding day
+did not offer much encouragement in that direction.</p>
+
+<p>The fact that the people on the island observed peculiar
+rites was evidence to John that they must be
+steeped in the superstitions that are a necessary part
+of the craft of the witch doctors, and to the boys,
+as well as to Uraso and Muro, the opportunity for
+John to match his intelligence with the crafty Krishnos,
+was awaited with interest.</p>
+
+<p>It was shown on Wonder Island, that while the
+people had the most implicit confidence in their medicine
+men, they were the first to cause their overthrow
+when it was shown that they maintained their superiority
+through deceit.</p>
+
+<p>Before nine o'clock the drums began to beat.
+They were plainly heard, as there was a slight breeze
+from that direction. John selected fifteen of the
+warriors, and accompanied by the boys, and Muro
+and Uraso, started for the village.</p>
+
+<p>"You are to remain here until you get word from
+us. If you should hear heavy firing it will be the signal
+for you to come on without delay. In such a case
+approach cautiously, and rush them, so as to reach us.
+We do not want to cause the loss of a single life
+among them, except as a last resort to save our own.
+Otherwise you are not to leave the cove. One must
+be sent to the height beyond, to keep a watch for the
+<i>Pioneer</i>.</p>
+
+<p>"If the vessel is sighted send a runner to the shore,
+and try to get into communication with it, so they
+may know where we are.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_47" id="p_47" href="#p_47">p. 47</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"As soon as Tarra returns, send him forward to us
+without delay. He should be back before noon to-day."
+John was thus precise to deliver the instructions,
+because he did not know what their reception
+was likely to be at the village.</p>
+
+<p>As stated, his prime object was to prevent the sacrifice
+of captives, if such there should be, or to put
+off the rites which he knew would take place that day
+and the next.</p>
+
+<p>They marched down the hill, taking all precautions
+on the way, but they met no opposition. Beyond
+them was a well wooded plain, and at intervals they
+could see, in the distance, detached huts, and in many
+places evidences of crude cultivation of the soil.</p>
+
+<p>The huts were unoccupied, but it was evident from
+their appearance that they had been used up to that
+very day.</p>
+
+<p>"I cannot understand why no people are living
+here," remarked George.</p>
+
+<p>"They have gone to the village to attend the sacred
+rites," responded Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>They were now less than a mile from the village,
+which could be seen in the distance through the trees.
+Something unusual was taking place to their left, and
+more than a mile away. Uraso agreed to go in that
+direction, and gain the slight elevation, which might
+afford him an opportunity to discover the cause of the
+excitement.</p>
+
+<p>There was considerable shouting, and then the
+beating of the drums, which they had not heard since
+the early morning. Uraso was gone not to exceed
+a half hour.</p>
+
+<p>"They are having something unusual in that quar<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_48" id="p_48" href="#p_48">p. 48</a></span>ter.
+A number of natives have just come in, and a
+hundred, or more, from the village met the visitors.
+I cannot account for the demonstration," observed
+one of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"It is quite likely," suggested John, "that
+some other tribe has come in to attend the ceremonies."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not think so, because the visitors belong to
+the same people who live in the village."</p>
+
+<p>John was determined to go on, and they proceeded,
+reaching the outlying portion of the village, just as
+the visitors, and those from the village were entering
+it from the other angle.</p>
+
+<p>"They have a prisoner there," said Muro. "I am
+sure that man in the first group is being conducted
+to the village."</p>
+
+<p>"Unquestionably, Muro is correct. It is plain
+that a party of the villagers have captured the man,
+and the excitement we heard was caused by that
+fact." And John began to speculate on the probability
+of the island containing more than the one
+tribe.</p>
+
+<p>"That man is a native, I am sure," was Uraso's
+observation.</p>
+
+<p>"That looks like Tarra," said George, in excitement.</p>
+
+<p>This announcement had an electrical effect on
+those present. If such should prove to be the case,
+what likelihood was there that he had delivered the
+message at the landing? Was he captured going,
+or coming.</p>
+
+<p>"It looks to me as though he was captured this
+morning," observed Harry, "because if he had been<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_49" id="p_49" href="#p_49">p. 49</a></span>
+taken last night, on his way over, they would not
+wait until to-day to bring him in."</p>
+
+<p>This looked like a reasonable supposition; but
+they must first make sure that it was Tarra.</p>
+
+<p>"Forward march!" said John.</p>
+
+<p>But before they had time to go far the whole town
+seemed to be alive. From every part of the village
+men were running, and forming in the open space
+next the first row of huts.</p>
+
+<p>It was a most curious proceeding that the boys
+now witnessed. In the center of the warriors was a
+large man, with a curious garb. On each side of
+him were noticed men with dissimilar clothing, but
+bedecked with every sort of device, the peculiarities
+of which could not be distinguished, owing to the
+distance.</p>
+
+<p>"That large man in the middle, is the Chief, and
+those about him are the witch doctors. The Chief
+has brought the witch doctors so as to terrify and destroy
+us," and John laughed as he remembered some
+of the wiles of that class on Wonder Island.</p>
+
+<p>To the beating of the drums, the Chief marched
+forward, his men following, and closing in on his
+sides to afford him protection. John motioned
+Uraso and Muro to step forward, and they advanced
+twenty feet beyond the warriors, and awaited the
+Chief.</p>
+
+<p>The latter stopped when within hailing distance,
+and John held up a hand. Uraso then addressed the
+Chief, telling him that they came as friends, and
+not as enemies, and desired to be present at the ceremonies
+about to take place.</p>
+
+<p>He also recited that they came from a neighboring<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_50" id="p_50" href="#p_50">p. 50</a></span>
+island, where they had a wonderful village, where all
+the people were happy, and they now wanted to show,
+their friendship by offering presents.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was silent, and then said: "Why did
+you kill my people?"</p>
+
+<p>"We only defended ourselves. Your warriors
+were the ones who attacked us. We could have
+killed all of your warriors if we had been enemies."</p>
+
+<p>"You speak lies," answered the Chief. "Why
+did you take my warrior?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because he was wounded and we are making him
+well, and will then return him to you so he can tell
+you that what we say is true."</p>
+
+<p>"You are again speaking lies," he retorted. Notwithstanding
+the manner in which Uraso had steeled
+himself, he was visibly affected by the blunt manner
+in which the savage accused him, but he was judicious
+enough not to appear disturbed.</p>
+
+<p>"Ask him," said John, "what he wants us to do
+to prove that we are friends, and not enemies."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief, at this question, drew himself up
+proudly, and answered: "You are on my dominion,
+and you have no right to ask any favor from me.
+You must deliver yourself up as prisoners, and we
+shall then deal with you as we see fit."</p>
+
+<p>"In what way will you deal with us? Have we
+committed a wrong? Do you intend to punish us?"</p>
+
+<p>"You had no right to come here. Every one who
+does so without my permission, must die."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you expect us to surrender so you may kill
+us?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Then our Chief tells you that he has a right to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_51" id="p_51" href="#p_51">p. 51</a></span>
+come here, and that you have no right to prevent it,
+and that if you try to kill us we will have the Great
+Spirit visit you the same as he visited your warriors
+the other day," said Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was astounded at the audacity of the
+visitors. He could not understand the presumption
+of Uraso, and the defiant attitude of the little group
+behind him.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I command the Korinos to destroy you!"
+he shouted.</p>
+
+<p>Muro turned to the boys, and smiled as he said:
+"Do you know what he means? He calls them Korinos.
+On Wonder Island they are Krishnos. That
+seems pretty close to the same thing."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso held up a hand, as he said: "I have a
+Korino here (pointing to John), and he will destroy
+your Korinos."</p>
+
+<p>The witch doctors then ranged themselves in front
+of the Chief, and the latter said: "They will sacrifice
+your friend who came to us to-day."</p>
+
+<p>To the astonishment of all, Tarra was led forward,
+and ordered to kneel down. Then a great
+burly man, clothed in the garb so common to the
+sorceress among savage tribes, followed him with a
+huge knotted club.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell him that if he raises the club I will order the
+Korino to die."</p>
+
+<p>This was imparted, but it made no difference to
+the executioner. He stepped forward, and slowly
+raised the club, but before it had reached its highest
+point, a revolver in the hands of John spoke, and
+the savage dropped the club, and slowly sank to the
+earth.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_52" id="p_52" href="#p_52">p. 52</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It would be impossible to describe the consternation
+that showed itself at this catastrophe.</p>
+
+<p>"Come here, Tarra," cried John.</p>
+
+<p>Tarra leaped to his feet, and with a few bounds
+was at Uraso's side, while Harry jumped forward
+and cut the thongs that bound his hands.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was bewildered, no less than those
+around him. No effort was made to prevent Tarra
+from escaping. The other Korinos did not even go
+forward to the relief of their slain comrade. He lay
+there motionless.</p>
+
+<p>"I am sorry," said John. "I must have made a
+miscalculation, but I am afraid he is dead."</p>
+
+<p>Then one of the Korinos moved toward the fallen
+man. "Stop!" cried John. "It will be death for
+any one to touch him now!"</p>
+
+<p>Uraso hurriedly informed the Chief of this new
+piece of information, which, in reality, caused more
+terror than the shot itself. What species of sorcery
+was this that they dared not even touch the victim
+who disobeyed the white Korino?</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_53" id="p_53" href="#p_53">p. 53</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2>
+
+<h3>RESCUING A WHITE CAPTIVE</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>"Did</span> you deliver the message at the landing
+place?" asked George, after Tarra was freed.</p>
+
+<p>"No; they captured me late last night. I tried for
+hours to get through, but they were within a mile of
+the landing," answered Tarra.</p>
+
+<p>"But where have you been all this time?"</p>
+
+<p>"They took me north to another village."</p>
+
+<p>But more interesting things were now happening.
+The witch doctor who was about to go to his fallen
+companion, hesitated. He turned to the Chief.
+The latter merely stretched out his hand, and with
+an impatient gesture appeared to order him on.</p>
+
+<p>"I warn you!" said Uraso. "It will be death to
+touch him."</p>
+
+<p>If there is one thing, more than another, that is
+liable to add terror to a low order of human beings,
+it is noise. It may be said that the most intelligent
+are not entirely devoid of the feeling of fear at inexplainable
+noises.</p>
+
+<p>As an example, take the sensations produced by
+thunder and lightning, one which affects the ear, and
+the other the eye. During a thunderstorm, the feeling
+of fear becomes acute only when the roar is
+heard.</p>
+
+<p>In this case we know what it is that produces the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_54" id="p_54" href="#p_54">p. 54</a></span>
+reverberations; but even under those circumstances
+many people are seriously affected by it. A terrific
+explosion, of which we do not know the cause, is
+often the source of great terror.</p>
+
+<p>This is particularly true with all savage people.
+The drums referred to, evidence this particular
+feeling of awe, and the louder and more violent, the
+more intense is it to the untutored mind. It is with
+this idea in their minds that they exercise the bad
+spirits by driving them away by making great noises,
+a practice true of most savage tribes.</p>
+
+<p>When John returned to Wonder Island from the
+United States he had taken with him several of the
+well-known Silencers, which, when attached to the
+muzzle of a gun, will so deaden the sound that no explosion
+is heard.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 361px;">
+<a id="illus-055" name="illus-055"></a>
+<a href="#p_54">
+<img src="images/illus-055-fig4.png" width="361" height="111"
+alt="Fig. 4. Silencer: Convolute Blades" title="Fig. 4. Silencer: Convolute Blades" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 4. <span class="u">Silencer</span>: <span class="u">Convolute</span> <span class="u">Blades</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>For general use, John knew that the unmuffled
+gun would be far more effective than those equipped
+with the new invention. Smokeless powder was also
+used in the guns which John and his company carried.
+The absence of smoke thus centers the mind
+of the native on the sound alone, and he sees the
+effect on the victim.</p>
+
+<p>To the savage the sound and the effect of the shot
+produce the sensation that there is something more
+than human in the discharge. It is hard for them<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_55" id="p_55" href="#p_55">p. 55</a></span>
+to form an idea of the connection between the report
+and the mission of the bullet. It is some monster
+which speaks in a loud voice.</p>
+
+<p>But it was more than that to the islanders when
+they saw the witch doctor fall. There was a white
+Korino who spoke with a voice of thunder. They
+were not aware that he held something in his hand
+like a weapon, and the noise and the result of that
+noise stunned them.</p>
+
+<p>John also carried a revolver with one of the
+silencers. When the Korino turned to the Chief,
+and the latter, determined not to be swayed by the
+power of the white man, there was but one thing for
+him to do. He must obey. He knew that if he
+shrunk from the task it would be a confession that
+his power was gone.</p>
+
+<p>The man approached the prostrate form. "Stop!"
+again cried Uraso. "The white Korino will not
+again speak, but if he touches the body you will
+die!"</p>
+
+<p>He stood there for a moment, irresolute, and then
+slowly stooped down, and with hesitation at every
+motion, finally touched the figure. In the meantime
+John had leveled the revolver with the silencer, and
+as the man again rose to an erect position, and
+glanced at John defiantly, he quickly threw up his
+hands and fell forward across his former companion
+with a shot through his arm, as it was not John's
+intention to kill him if it could by any possibility be
+avoided.</p>
+
+<p>The white Korino had not spoken, as Uraso predicted,
+but the results were the same. The savages
+who were lined up on both sides of the Chief, began<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_56" id="p_56" href="#p_56">p. 56</a></span>
+to waver. They were moving to the rear. The
+Korinos around the Chief, finally broke and fled,
+and when the people saw this evidence of fear on the
+part of their Wise Men, they could not be restrained.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief followed them hurriedly. "Now,
+quickly, boys, fire two rounds. No; not at the natives,
+but up in the air."</p>
+
+<p>The boys could not understand what John could
+mean by such an order, but they did not have an
+opportunity to ask the reason for it.</p>
+
+<p>After the volleys John turned to Muro and Uraso,
+and remarked: "As soon as the men come up you
+and Muro must contrive in some way to find out the
+direction that the Korinos have taken."</p>
+
+<p>They now saw the object of the volleys. It would
+bring up those of their party who had remained at
+the rocky cove. The watch for the Korinos was
+equally plain. The experience on Wonder Island
+showed that the witch doctors inhabited the caves.</p>
+
+<p>In the excitement they had entirely forgotten this
+part of their enterprise. They thought of the treasure.
+John had the treasure of the records in his
+mind. The hills all about; the limestone formations
+of the elevations were ample assurance to his mind
+that some caverns would be found; and while they
+might, eventually, be able to locate the entrances, it
+would be better to find out where they were by watching
+and charting the direction they took on their way
+to the dark places where they hoped to rest in fancied
+security.</p>
+
+<p>Within fifteen minutes their rear guard came into
+sight, rushing over the hills, all expectant to find an
+enemy in their front. Great was their surprise to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_57" id="p_57" href="#p_57">p. 57</a></span>
+see the village beyond, and John and his party bending
+over the two bodies, one of them moving and the
+other inert. Apparently, he and his force were unconcerned,
+although many savages were in the village,
+and in plain sight.</p>
+
+<p>An examination of the fallen men made John
+happy, because he feared that his aim had been untrue.
+Both had been severely wounded, and when
+an hour afterwards both men were able to move,
+thanks to the knowledge and care of John, they were
+carried into the village.</p>
+
+<p>Before this was done, however, John ordered the
+force to march boldly into the village. On the approach
+of the party the Chief and his followers, together
+with the women and children, hurriedly fled
+to the north.</p>
+
+<p>Among the huts were found a dozen or more sick
+and injured men and women, and a number of old
+people who were unable to be carried away. John
+went to each, and after carefully examining them,
+administered medicine.</p>
+
+<p>In one place they found two warriors, who had
+been wounded in the battle four days previously.
+These were given special attention, the villagers
+meanwhile looking on the proceeding with a feeling
+of awe, and wonder. They could not comprehend
+the care and treatment which was being given them.</p>
+
+<p>John's companions were most eager to render aid,
+and spoke to the patients freely, telling them that
+they were friends, and not enemies. During this investigation
+into every corner of the village, George
+and Harry were the most active. They found many
+amusing things, but the care of the sick and the in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_58" id="p_58" href="#p_58">p. 58</a></span>firm
+was the first duty, and they had many willing
+helpers.</p>
+
+<p>While thus engaged they reached a long, low
+thatched enclosure, so entirely different from the
+huts scattered about. There was no visible opening.
+They walked around the enclosure with more
+and more curiosity. Some of their companions from
+Wonder Island then drew near.</p>
+
+<p>"We have found it!" cried one of them.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the place where they keep the captives."</p>
+
+<p>"But how can we get into it?" asked George, then
+adding, "Get one of the hatchets, quickly."</p>
+
+<p>Several men ran back and opened the packages
+containing their equipment, and others followed to
+see the prisoners. Uraso was one of the first to
+come up, and he was soon followed by John, all in
+excitement over the news. George was the first one
+to get a hatchet. He soon chopped a way through,
+and Uraso was the first to crawl into the enclosure,
+followed by George.</p>
+
+<p>The latter staggered back, as he saw the scene
+before him. The enclosure was fully fifteen feet
+high, and occupied a space, probably, twenty feet
+each way. It was constructed of a species of bamboo,
+exceedingly hard, two rows of these paling being
+driven into the ground close together, so that it was
+impossible to see through the stockade at any point.</p>
+
+<p>Within there was absolutely nothing but the bare
+ground, and a mass of indescribable filth, as may
+be imagined. Here, lying on the earth, were five
+men, with little or no clothing, covered with dirt
+and vermin. Two of them were in fairly good con<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_59" id="p_59" href="#p_59">p. 59</a></span>dition,
+an evidence that they had not long been prisoners.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 379px;">
+<a id="illus-060" name="illus-060"></a>
+<a href="#p_52">
+<img src="images/illus-060.png" width="379" height="569"
+alt="&#39;Stop!&#39; cried John, &#39;It will be death for any one to touch him&#39;"
+title="&#39;Stop!&#39; cried John, &#39;It will be death for any one to touch him&#39;" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption">&quot;<i>&#39;Stop!&#39; cried John, &#39;It will be death for any one to touch him&#39;</i>&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_52">See p. 52</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>The other three were emaciated, and what surprised
+the boys most was the long, matted and
+tangled beard of one of the three. The moment John
+saw that form he turned to the boys and fairly
+shrieked: "This is a white man. Cut down that
+fence, so the men can be taken out, and the moment
+they are removed set fire to this place."</p>
+
+<p>The boys could not understand John's vehement
+expression.</p>
+
+<p>"Shall we burn the village?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no! Burn only this enclosure, and don't let
+a vestige of it remain."</p>
+
+<p>His orders were quickly carried out. Meanwhile,
+not a quarter of a mile away, were the Chief and the
+owners of the village, who, upon seeing the smoke and
+the flames, appeared to be frantic. No doubt they
+regarded it as a sign that the village was doomed,
+but they were soon reassured by the time the stockade
+was finally consumed, and the few watchers reported
+to the Chief that nothing but the prison had been destroyed.</p>
+
+<p>"We have destroyed the Bastille," remarked John,
+"and must now take care of the prisoners." They
+found that it was indeed a white man who had been
+rescued. He was frightfully emaciated, and too
+weak to talk.</p>
+
+<p>This was also the condition of the two natives.
+The other two were soon restored, after receiving
+nourishment, and were ready to tell their story.
+They had been taken two weeks previously in a battle
+with the tribe to the north.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_60" id="p_60" href="#p_60">p. 60</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Through these men they learned that there were
+only two tribes on the island, and that this was by
+far the largest, in point of numbers. There had
+been continual war between the two people, and the
+only thing which saved his tribe from extermination
+was the fact that they lived in the mountain regions,
+and were thus protected.</p>
+
+<p>This information was very welcome to John and
+the boys. The mountains seemed to have a fascination
+for them,&mdash;and then, the caves, how could they
+forget them now?</p>
+
+<p>For three hours the Chief and his people waited
+in the distance. John did not pay any attention to
+them, apparently. Shortly thereafter two of his
+men came in, dragging one of the former patients.</p>
+
+<p>"We saw him trying to steal away," said one of
+the men.</p>
+
+<p>"Was he going toward his people?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Then let him go, by all means, and tell him that
+we would be glad to have the Chief and his people
+return."</p>
+
+<p>The poor fellow was astonished to learn that he
+was free. He was as much surprised at this as at
+the care which they had bestowed to cure him. He
+passed through the village, looking about him with
+furtive glances, but, at the command of John, no one
+paid any attention to him.</p>
+
+<p>When he reached the Chief there was a long consultation,
+and it was evident that a momentous
+change was taking place. The Chief could be seen
+constantly glancing toward the village, and soon the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_61" id="p_61" href="#p_61">p. 61</a></span>
+self-imposed messenger returned and approached
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"The Chief is willing to see you, and will come to
+you, if you wish it." This was imparted to John,
+and the latter responded:</p>
+
+<p>"I will go with you."</p>
+
+<p>He called the two chiefs Muro and Uraso, and the
+boys, and told them he would go with the messenger
+to the Chief, alone, and that they should have no
+fear for him.</p>
+
+<p>Accompanied by the messenger, John walked
+boldly to the Chief, and going up, pressed his nose
+against him, in token of eternal friendship, and then
+motioned him to go back to the village.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was astounded, first, at the bravery of
+John in thus coming to him, and in then vowing eternal
+friendship.</p>
+
+<p>There is something very peculiar in the characteristics
+of savages which forbids them from violating
+a peace pledge, or a treaty of friendship when entered
+into with the rites that they acknowledge. The
+most formal of these rites, is that of rubbing noses
+together.</p>
+
+<p>How the custom originated, is not known. It is
+something like the kiss, in so far as it is a visible
+token of either love, friendship, or esteem. It is
+seldom that the savage violates the pledge which is
+thus given. John knew this, and felt assured the
+great Chief would respect it.</p>
+
+<p>When the latter came into the village, the first
+sight that met his eyes, was the demolished stockade.
+He looked at it for a moment, in silence. Then some<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_62" id="p_62" href="#p_62">p. 62</a></span>
+of the old men came forward, and began to tell him
+the wondrous tales of kindness.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief went to his own home, and when he saw
+that everything was untouched, and that none of the
+people was harmed, he could not understand the actions
+of the White Chief, and so expressed his astonishment
+to Uraso and Muro. When he was told
+that the latter were Chiefs of two tribes on Wonder
+Island, he was still more surprised.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you not fight each other?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso smiled, as he answered: "Why should
+we fight? There is no pleasure in killing, or in causing
+suffering. We used to think about those things
+as you do."</p>
+
+<p>"What made you think otherwise?"</p>
+
+<p>"The White Chief told us it was wrong, and we
+have found that his words were true."</p>
+
+<p>"Where is this place where your tribe may be
+found?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is on the other side of the sea, over there,"
+answered Uraso, pointing to the west.</p>
+
+<p>"Will it take long to get there?"</p>
+
+<p>"It takes only one sun, and the White Chief would
+be so happy to take you there and show you the great
+village, and to see the people and the Chiefs who
+live together in happiness, and to learn from the
+people themselves how they enjoy their homes, and
+make the many curious things that the White Chief
+has brought over for you."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief looked about him, and finally said: "I
+want to see the White Chief."</p>
+
+<p>John had purposely refrained from going to the
+Chief's home, but Uraso accompanied him at John's<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_63" id="p_63" href="#p_63">p. 63</a></span>
+request, because he was the more diplomatic, and
+wielded a stronger influence than Muro, owing to his
+remarkable personality.</p>
+
+<p>John was glad of the opportunity, and the boys,
+as usual, were also present. The Chief's eyes followed
+the two boys, as they entered. He smiled at
+them, as John came up and greeted him.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso told John what they had talked about, and
+that the Chief was interested in his story of Wonder
+Island.</p>
+
+<p>"Our Great Chief will welcome you to Wonder Island,"
+said John.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief looked at John for a moment, and then
+his eyes wandered to Uraso, as he answered: "Is
+there still a greater Chief? Is there a man more
+powerful than this Chief?"</p>
+
+<p>Uraso laughed, as did John. "Tell him," said
+John, "that our Chief is powerful, because he is
+wise."</p>
+
+<p>He did not seem to understand this, and asked for
+more information. Uraso told him that the white
+man did not regard the strong man as the greatest,
+but that the wisest man was always the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>Here was certainly a new philosophy. "But," he
+inquired, "then how can he rule his people, if he is
+not strong?"</p>
+
+<p>"The people willingly submit to his will because
+they know what he says is best for them."</p>
+
+<p>"But does not the Chief sometimes tell them lies,
+and does he not often deceive them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but when they do so then the people choose
+another Chief in his place."</p>
+
+<p>"And after they have killed the first Chief, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_64" id="p_64" href="#p_64">p. 64</a></span>
+have taken another, and he lies, do they also kill
+him?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; they do not kill the Chiefs, but they only put
+others in their places."</p>
+
+<p>"Then they are not wise Chiefs?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; they are wise only when they do what is
+right."</p>
+
+<p>"Do what is right! What do you mean by that?
+How can the Chief do anything but right?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think," asked Uraso, "that the Chief has
+a right to lie or deceive?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, he can do that, but not his people. It is
+wrong for them to do so."</p>
+
+<p>"But the white man believes that it is just as
+wrong for the Chief to lie and to deceive, as for the
+people to do so."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was silent for a long time, and John
+purposely permitted him to reflect on the new dispensation.
+While thus musing on the new theory, a
+woman carrying a child appeared at the door. John
+saw her, and, stepping out, took the child from her
+arms. She permitted it, and when the Chief appeared
+she fell down and explained that the White
+Chief had been very kind to her.</p>
+
+<p>John took some medicine from a small vial, and
+administered it, the Chief meanwhile looking on in
+astonishment. Here was a great White Chief, looking
+out for the comfort of one of the poorest of his
+people.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso knew his thoughts. This woman was the
+poorest and the lowest in the tribe, and John, without
+stopping to make any inquiries as to her condition,
+or position in life, had aided her and her old mother.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_65" id="p_65" href="#p_65">p. 65</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Evidently the new doctrine was something so extraordinary,
+that it was worth investigating. Uraso
+saw the embarrassment in the mind of the Chief, and
+after speaking a few words, withdrew.</p>
+
+<p>As they left the Chief's quarters the boys roamed
+through the village. The stories of the sufferers
+which John had aided, the scrupulous care with
+which the men guarded the homes of the villagers
+while they were absent, had a most telling effect.</p>
+
+<p>The warriors from Wonder Island mingled with
+the villagers. It was singular that there was not
+an expression of hatred. They fraternized, and related
+stories of Wonder Island, and the people told
+them about their own island.</p>
+
+<p>The boys met many of their own ages, and to them
+they showed the revolvers, and the marine glasses,
+and then astounded them by exhibiting the watches
+which they carried.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p  class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_66" id="p_66" href="#p_66">p. 66</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2>
+
+<h3>RETURN OF THE NATIVES</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>Several</span> of the packages left at the landing place,
+contained numerous trinkets, and articles of personal
+adornment, such as the natives adored. Brightly-colored
+fabrics, made at the factory on Wonder Island
+were also among the many articles, which had
+been intended to be used as presents.</p>
+
+<p>John was gratified to learn, an hour or two after
+the Chief returned, that the latter had given orders
+to the villagers to prepare a feast for the visitors.</p>
+
+<p>"But where are the Korinos?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>True, they had disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>"Let us see John about that," responded Harry.</p>
+
+<p>They had some time in finding him, but later on
+learned that he was attending to the wounded, and
+caring for the late prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>"It would not be wise to speak to the Chief about
+that now," responded John. "The leaven is working
+well in his mind. Besides, I fear that he will
+wreak vengeance on them, and we must prevent him
+from killing them."</p>
+
+<p>As the boys were leaving John they saw fifty of the
+warriors leave the Chief's home, marching out of the
+village to the east. Muro entered the hut where
+John was staying, and announced that the Chief
+wished to see him.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_67" id="p_67" href="#p_67">p. 67</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John continued with his work, after informing
+Muro that he would soon visit the Chief. The boys
+later saw John and Muro on their way to the "Palace,"
+as Harry called the royal residence, and begged
+John's permission to accompany them.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief received them with special marks of attention,
+and John thanked him for the invitation.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the day which the Wise Men have appointed
+for the sacrifices, and the people are preparing
+the feast, in accordance with our custom. It
+is my wish that you shall be my guests, and take part
+in our ceremonies," remarked the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>Muro, in behalf of John, thanked him for the invitation,
+and assured him that they would gladly
+join in the rites. Then, he continued: "I wish to
+inform you that we left at the seashore, on the other
+side of the island, some gifts which I am desirous
+of presenting to you. If you will order some of your
+men to accompany my guides they will bring them
+back."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief's eyes lighted up with pleasure. Immediately,
+a detail of men were designated, and a
+half dozen of John's warriors, under the leadership
+of Muro, were requested to proceed to the landing.</p>
+
+<p>The people saw the company depart with the greatest
+wonder and curiosity. Muro was instructed to
+leave a message at the landing, and return with the
+packages as soon as possible. They reached the
+landing place within two hours, and were rejoiced
+to see the <i>Pioneer</i> anchored not far from the shore.</p>
+
+<p>Stut was recognized at once, but Sutoto had remained
+at Wonder Island. The packages were taken
+to the <i>Pioneer</i>, and Muro informed Stut that they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_68" id="p_68" href="#p_68">p. 68</a></span>
+would sail around the island and land near the village.
+The men from the village were awe stricken
+at the sight of the vessel, and it was difficult to get
+their consent to embarking but were soon persuaded,
+when presented with some of the gifts, which Muro
+knew would be acceptable.</p>
+
+<hr class='sorta' />
+
+<p>An hour after the last interview in the Chief's
+home, the boys saw the warriors, who had formerly
+left the Chief's home, marching down the street of
+the village, and guarding the Korinos who had
+formed part of the Chief's escort earlier in the day.</p>
+
+<p>They were quite different now in demeanor, and
+the boys thought they looked crestfallen. They were
+ushered into the Chief's presence without any ceremony.</p>
+
+<p>They stood there like criminals, and felt that their
+doom was sealed. "I have sent for you," he said,
+"because this is the day you have selected for the
+ceremonies. Where are the prisoners to be sacrificed?"</p>
+
+<p>They were silent. The Chief continued: "You
+have told us that the Great Spirit asks for the sacrifices
+each year when the sun is leaving us, and
+when the moon is hiding behind the vail. Bring the
+captives so they may be offered up."</p>
+
+<p>Instantly the Korinos brightened up, and muttered
+a few words. The Chief gave an order, and they
+were marched out of the building. Out of curiosity,
+the boys followed. Their steps were directed to the
+stockade where the prisoners had been confined.</p>
+
+<p>To their dismay they saw only the ashes, and were
+staggered at the sight. They stood there with won<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_69" id="p_69" href="#p_69">p. 69</a></span>dering
+eyes. The boys could see that this was a condition
+wholly unexpected by them, and it must be
+said that there was pity in the hearts of Harry and
+George, as the leader gave the order for them to return
+to the "Palace."</p>
+
+<p>As they entered John and the Chief were engaged
+in an animated conversation, and when the latter
+saw the Korinos, he stood up and asked for the victims.</p>
+
+<p>"They are not there!" was the only response.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief, not affecting to believe, told them that
+they were lying to him. They fell to their knees,
+but were mute.</p>
+
+<p>"But the Great Spirit must not be deceived.
+Great evil will fall upon us if he is not appeased.
+If you cannot find the victims I will do so."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief's voice was terrible in its anger. Outside
+of their dark homes the Korinos were subject
+to the Chief's will. Within the caves they knew no
+fear. The boys looked at Uraso and John. A slight
+smile could be seen on Uraso's face, as he returned
+the gaze of the boys; but John's face was immobile,
+and did not in the least appear to portray any concern.</p>
+
+<p>"It is my order that you shall be the victims, and
+must be offered up as the sacrifices to prevent the
+anger of the Great Spirit."</p>
+
+<p>This doom was pronounced in a voice so full of
+anger that its significance was instantly divined by
+the boys, although they could not understand all of
+the words which he uttered.</p>
+
+<p>They were instantly seized and bound, and being
+now in a helpless condition, were carried out of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_70" id="p_70" href="#p_70">p. 70</a></span>
+building, and, with the most brutal force conveyed
+by the guard to a hut not far from the Palace, and
+literally thrust into the small opening which formed
+the entrance.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you suppose they will kill them?" asked
+Harry, as he moved to the side of Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>"I think the Chief means what he says," and
+Uraso gave a little smile that somewhat assured
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"No; I don't think John will let the Chief kill
+them," responded George.</p>
+
+<p>After the removal of the Korinos John asked
+whether it would be possible to defer the ceremonies
+until the following day, for the reason that he desired
+to distribute the gifts which the men were
+bringing from the landing.</p>
+
+<p>"If the White Chief so desires it shall be done."</p>
+
+<p>John manifested his pleasure at the consent thus
+obtained.</p>
+
+<p>George and Harry now wandered into every part
+of the village. For the first time they noticed that
+it was located at the western edge of a beautiful
+grove, thickly wooded, with tall trees.</p>
+
+<p>Through this they walked, and before they
+emerged were delighted at the sight of the great
+ocean beyond. "I wonder if John knows we are so
+near?"</p>
+
+<p>They ran to the beach, delighted to have an opportunity
+for a bath, but were surprised to see many
+along the shore with small bags.</p>
+
+<p>"They are searching for something," remarked
+Harry. "I wonder what it can be?"</p>
+
+<p>"Possibly clams. Don't you remember the first<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_71" id="p_71" href="#p_71">p. 71</a></span>
+week when we lived on clams, after we reached Wonder
+Island? What delightful days we had; and how
+afraid we were of every noise, and used to start up at
+every new sound."</p>
+
+<p>"And wasn't it a joy to make the new things, and
+see every day bring new wonders to us after we
+moved to the Cataract?"</p>
+
+<p>"I have a love for that old home. We were so
+happy there. I know I am not happier now when
+we own all the treasures of the caves, than when we
+were building the water wheel, and the little shop,
+and tending the yaks," answered George, as he gazed
+across the sea, and thought of the glorious times and
+of their wonderful adventures.</p>
+
+<p>When they saw the streams of people coming from
+the shore they recalled that the people were preparing
+for the feast. It was remarkable that clams
+were an article of food with these people when those
+on the island they had just left, despised all fish
+and sea food.</p>
+
+<p>They wandered along the beach, fully a mile south
+of the village, and quite out of reach of the people,
+and were soon in the mild surf. After a half hour
+of this enjoyment they dressed, and ascended a slight
+elevation from which could be seen the character of
+the land along the sea.</p>
+
+<p>To the north and south of their position the land
+was much higher, the northern portion having the
+appearance of very high hills, if not mountains.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think John was thinking about the caves
+when the guards brought in the Korinos?" remarked
+George, as they were descending the ridge.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought of it," answered Harry. "But I<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_72" id="p_72" href="#p_72">p. 72</a></span>
+learned from Muro that he knew where they made
+their homes!"</p>
+
+<p>"Then he must have watched them, as John suggested!"</p>
+
+<p>"No; one of the men told him just before he left."</p>
+
+<p>"What did he say?"</p>
+
+<p>"That they should follow the trail to the north of
+the grove until they reached the sea."</p>
+
+<p>"Then Muro must know that the sea is near?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think he does."</p>
+
+<p>During the descent from the hill the ocean was
+visible directly to the east. Both, at the same instant,
+caught sight of a sail. They gasped in surprise,
+as they gazed at the unusual spectacle.</p>
+
+<p>"I would like to know who that can be," queried
+Harry. "Let us tell John and then get something
+so we can signal it."</p>
+
+<p>They rushed down the hill, and ran hurriedly
+through the streets of the village, to the surprise
+of the inhabitants. First going to the Chief's house,
+without finding him, they went to the improvised
+hospital where the wounded Korinos were being
+cared for.</p>
+
+<p>There John was found, together with Uraso and
+the Chief. "We have seen a sail," shouted George.
+"We want something to use as a signal." John
+bounded up, and Uraso rushed out and soon fished
+out a white cloth, and ran down through the grove
+after the boys.</p>
+
+<p>Three hundred feet to the right was a slight elevation,
+which the boys had noticed, and as it was devoid
+of trees offered the most available place for the
+signal flag. They scurried around for some pole<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_73" id="p_73" href="#p_73">p. 73</a></span>
+which would answer, and to this the white cloth was
+quickly attached.</p>
+
+<p>John was the last to reach the signaling point.
+He was laughing immoderately, as he noticed the
+frantic signaling. "Where are your field glasses,
+George?"</p>
+
+<p>"They are in the village. I forgot about them."</p>
+
+<p>"If you had used them you would not be surprised
+at the visitor."</p>
+
+<p>The boys stopped signaling for a moment, and
+then looked at the ship.</p>
+
+<p>"It isn't possible that is the <i>Pioneer</i>?"</p>
+
+<p>"Look again, for yourself; don't you know your
+own work?"</p>
+
+<p>The ship had seen the signal, and now turned.
+Then they recognized the grand little vessel, that
+was almost a part of themselves, for they had worked
+many months to complete her, and had tried to put
+good luck and best wishes into every plank and spar
+and sail.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief, too, was coming. The whole village
+joined to welcome the ship, for when Uraso told the
+Chief that their own ship was coming, he could not
+resist the temptation to witness the arrival.</p>
+
+<p>Was it possible that Muro reached the landing
+place before the ship left? John thought so, but the
+boys doubted it. Muro left before noon, and it was
+now past five in the evening.</p>
+
+<p>As the vessel neared the shore the people lined up
+and the boys crowded close to the shore. They were
+the first to recognize Muro, to their great delight.
+He waved his hand to them, and Stut was by his
+side.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_74" id="p_74" href="#p_74">p. 74</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Good old Stut!" shouted George. "Where is
+Sutoto?"</p>
+
+<p>"In Wonder Island!" was the response.</p>
+
+<p>They were disappointed at this, but there was too
+much for them to think about, as the anchor was being
+swung, and as soon as it dropped, a boat was lowered
+from each side, and the men began to descend
+from the short ladder, while the village people
+watched the proceeding with silent wonderment.</p>
+
+<p>Muro was the first to touch the shore, and then
+came the villagers who were on the mission with
+Muro. They were the heroes to their friends. They
+knew their duty to their Chief, however, and the latter
+had a most animated conversation with them, and
+particularly so after he had noticed the array of
+trinkets which Muro had bestowed on them.</p>
+
+<p>While this was going on the boats returned and
+bundles and packages were brought out of the ship
+and deposited in the boats. After they had been
+taken from the boats, John said: "With your permission
+I will take these things to your house."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief assented, and on his orders the men in
+the village gathered up the assortment of gifts and
+the procession filed along the path to the village.</p>
+
+<p>The feast that evening reminded them of the welcome/
+which the Chief Beralsea extended to them the
+second night after their arrival at Venture Island.
+Besides the clams referred to there was an abundance
+of fish, several varieties, besides game and
+meats, and the only thing which they seemed to lack,
+or which was rather meager in quantity, was fruit.</p>
+
+<p>Like all natives of these islands, they were experts
+at spitting the meats. The most delicious was a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_75" id="p_75" href="#p_75">p. 75</a></span>
+species of ground hog, that the boys frequently
+caught on Wonder Island. The boys had watched
+the method of roasting these animals.</p>
+
+<p>A strong green tapering stick, about four feet
+long was selected, and the bark was peeled off, so as
+to give it a smooth surface. The small end of this
+was sharpened, and driven through the animal, from
+end to end, so that it was held firmly on the stick,
+midway between its ends.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 366px;">
+<a id="illus-078" name="illus-078"></a>
+<a href="#p_75">
+<img src="images/illus-078-fig5.png" width="366" height="209"
+alt="Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast" title="Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 5. <span class="u">Spitting</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Roast</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Two forked posts were then driven into the
+ground, about three feet apart, and the stick laid
+in the forks. A fire of wood, previously built between
+the posts was permitted to accumulate a quantity
+of coal, and when a hot fire was thus generated,
+one of the natives would continuously rotate the stick,
+so that the heat affected all sides evenly, and the
+result would be the most tempting roast imaginable.
+This is a practice common with savages all over the
+world, varying only in the details of the preparations.</p>
+
+<p>All the vegetables were roasted, in hot coals. In<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_76" id="p_76" href="#p_76">p. 76</a></span>
+this respect their custom was different from the practice
+followed in Venture Island, for there they knew
+how to make stews. Here they knew nothing about
+pottery, but like all islanders in the South Seas, the
+wrecks would, occasionally cast cooking utensils, like
+pots, or pans, ashore, and these highly-prized articles
+were sure to be taken by the Chiefs, or by the Krishnos
+themselves, where they could get them by stealth.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 366px;">
+<a id="illus-079" name="illus-079"></a>
+<a href="#p_77">
+<img src="images/illus-079-fig6.png" width="366" height="225"
+alt="Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla" title="Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 6. <span class="u">Arialad</span> <span class="u">Fruit</span>. <span class="u">Sarsaparilla</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Unlike the natives of Wonder Island, they had potatoes,
+the wild variety which the boys found the second
+day after they were cast ashore. The Taro root,
+that vegetable which grows in the greatest abundance
+in every section south of the Equator, to the lower
+border of the south temperate zone, was the chief
+dish, and was also roasted in like manner.</p>
+
+<p>What surprised them most was a drink that
+pleased John, who at once recognized its origin.
+They called it Arialad, and George declared it was a
+fine quality of Sarsaparilla.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_77" id="p_77" href="#p_77">p. 77</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"You are correct," said John. "Its real botanical
+name is Arialace. It belongs to the same family
+as spikenard and ginseng. Very few natives know
+of its value. It is both a medicine and a refreshing
+drink."</p>
+
+<p>"If it grows in abundance here it would be a good
+thing to gather for export," observed Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"A boat load of the roots would be worth a fortune,"
+rejoined John.</p>
+
+<p>There was the utmost good fellowship among all
+present. In accordance with the custom among most
+of these people the women did not partake of the
+food in the presence of the men. They acted as the
+servants in serving the food, but the men prepared
+the meal, a sort of well-balanced family arrangement,
+as George observed.</p>
+
+<p>"But who washes the dishes?" asked Harry with a
+laugh, in which all joined.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p  class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_78" id="p_78" href="#p_78">p. 78</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2>
+
+<h3>THE SAVAGE CEREMONIALS</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>The</span> next day was the one appointed for the ceremonies.
+The boys were expectant, because during
+all their experiences in the islands, this was the first
+time they had an opportunity to witness one of these
+spectacles.</p>
+
+<p>It was noticed that no preparations were made for
+a morning meal by the natives. All were specially
+garbed for the occasion, if the colored decorations
+counted for anything in the way of additional clothing.</p>
+
+<p>They were adept in the art of weaving cloth,
+which was made in small sections, and sewn together,
+similar to the practice in most of these primitive
+countries. They were not altogether devoid of
+knowledge pertaining to dyes, the most frequent being
+blue, which John soon ascertained came from
+some copper deposits.</p>
+
+<p>The Madder plant was the most common on the
+island, and this afforded a red color, the most lasting
+of all dyes, and the most generally in use throughout
+the civilized world, until the aniline dyes took
+its place.</p>
+
+<p>For black they resorted to the common method
+of using carbon which is the stock material in our
+own country. This was produced by them from<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_79" id="p_79" href="#p_79">p. 79</a></span>
+burnt wood, and not from any of the coal products.</p>
+
+<p>Their faces were painted a hideous red and blue,
+principally in the nature of great zig-zag stripes, and
+the exposed parts, of the bodies were of diverse figures,
+some of them really artistic. The preparation
+of these personal decorations consumed the greater
+portion of the night, as the boys afterwards learned.</p>
+
+<p>When they emerged from their hut in the morning,
+and saw the grotesque figures all about the village,
+they could hardly repress a smile; but as every one
+was smiling and happy, they did not have to make
+any pretentions, but smiled and laughed as the men
+and women circled about, because they couldn't help
+themselves.</p>
+
+<p>The women were not so gaudily attired as the men.
+Their decorations were expended on clothing, as it
+was not considered good form to decorate their
+bodies.</p>
+
+<p>All the men carried spears, and many of them were
+wicked-looking instruments. What surprised them
+was the fact that all the spear-points were now covered
+over, or bound up by colored material, forming
+a sort of sphere, to which three colored streamers
+were attached, one white, one red and the other blue.</p>
+
+<p>"My, but they are patriotic!" remarked George, as
+he saw the design and the streamers.</p>
+
+<p>John smiled, as he observed them. "But do you
+notice that the point of the spear is covered?"</p>
+
+<p>"I was about to ask the meaning of that," said
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the day of feasting and of sacrifices.
+The covered point indicates that there is peace; and
+that no one can commit an injury. I imagine the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_80" id="p_80" href="#p_80">p. 80</a></span>
+points will be uncovered quickly enough the moment
+they are ready for the sacrifices."</p>
+
+<p>"I am more interested in the fact that they use the
+American colors. I wish we had one of the flags
+here. That idea has just struck me as being the
+proper thing." And George danced about at the
+scheme.</p>
+
+<p>Harry was just as much affected now. "Why not
+consult Uraso and Muro, and bring over the big flag
+from the ship?"</p>
+
+<p>John laughed at the idea. "A brilliant idea. The
+flag will be a big attraction, but I warn you that if
+you get it I shall have to insist that you must head
+the procession with it."</p>
+
+<p>"Are we going to have a procession?"</p>
+
+<p>"I believe that is the first thing on the list."</p>
+
+<p>"But where is the procession going? Is it the
+custom to march along the principal streets and out
+along the boulevards?"</p>
+
+<p>This idea was so laughable to Harry and Uraso
+and Muro, that they had a fit of laughter. The two Chiefs
+were just like boys, and entered in to the spirit
+of the undertaking with a vim that pleased the boys.</p>
+
+<p>They fairly flew to the landing, and manned the
+boat. "We have come for the flag," announced
+George, as Stut was looking on the excitable boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not take both of them?" responded Stut.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly," answered Harry. "I had forgotten
+about the other. And while we are about it, why not
+have the band come along?"</p>
+
+<p>This was answered by a shout. One of the new
+acquirements of the natives of Wonder Island, was
+music, and when the boys returned from the States<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_81" id="p_81" href="#p_81">p. 81</a></span>
+they brought along several fine sets of band instruments,
+one set of which was always on the vessel, and
+was used for evening concerts.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is Mano?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Mano was the leader of the ship's band, but he was
+not to be found.</p>
+
+<p>"John sent for Mano an hour ago, and he is now
+in the village."</p>
+
+<p>"Then send for him at once. Tell him he must
+be here as soon as John is through with him," said
+George.</p>
+
+<p>While the flags were being wrapped up one of the
+small boats came from the shore, and Mano stepped
+out.</p>
+
+<p>Harry ran up and said: "Get the boys and the
+instruments ready. You must play for us to-day
+during the ceremonies."</p>
+
+<p>Mano smiled as he answered: "John told me
+about it last night, and I went over merely to find
+out what music I should take."</p>
+
+<p>"So John tried to steal a march on us?" remarked
+Harry. "How soon will you be ready?"</p>
+
+<p>"We are all ready now. I was told at the Chief's
+house that the procession would start in a half hour."</p>
+
+<p>When the flags were brought out it was Mano's
+time to stare. "I think," he said, "that will surprise
+John, but the idea is a proper one."</p>
+
+<p>The band comprised nine musicians and the
+two drummers. The moment they landed the band
+formed four abreast, and directly behind were the
+two boys with the Stars and Stripes. To the tune
+of "Columbia, the Gem of the Ocean," they marched
+straight to the home of the Chief.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_82" id="p_82" href="#p_82">p. 82</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The crashing music, and the magnificent flags
+brought pandemonium to that savage village. Nothing
+like it had ever been known before. Long before
+the band reached the Palace all the inhabitants of the
+town had rushed down, and at Uraso's and Muro's
+suggestion the people followed behind, and thus made
+a procession which was the most unique that it was
+possible to describe.</p>
+
+<p>"That scheme will make a success of the ceremonies,"
+remarked George, almost too full for utterance.
+"Why the thing wouldn't be a success without
+the flags and the music."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder how the thing will fit in when it comes
+to the sacrifices this afternoon? I imagine the
+Korinos ought to feel like dying when they are to
+have such an unusual funeral procession?" Harry
+said this with a bit of irony, as he turned to George
+and grinned at the idea.</p>
+
+<p>John knew what was coming, but the Chief didn't.
+He and John came out together, when they heard the
+music. The boys, behind the band could not see the
+great sights that were taking place in the rear, but
+John stood there beside the big Chief, and was simply
+convulsed with laughter.</p>
+
+<p>The natives were not walking. They were dancing,
+and the Chief, at first astounded at the music,
+and at the waving flags, soon joined John in laughter
+as they witnessed this remarkable scene.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso had taken part in numerous celebrations at
+Unity, and knew what disposition to make of the people
+when they arrived. The band marched past, and
+John raised his hand in the form of a salutation,
+and the Chief noticing this imitated him.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_83" id="p_83" href="#p_83">p. 83</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"The old fellow is learning rapidly how to do the
+correct thing," suggested Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; John will have him in a swallow-tail coat
+before night."</p>
+
+<p>The band marched past, and then turned around
+and came back, and as fast as the people came up
+Uraso and Muro directed them where to stand, so
+that when the band stopped they formed a large
+semi-circle facing the Chief and John.</p>
+
+<p>The boys walked forward so they stood with the
+flags midway between the band and the Chief. The
+latter motioned for the band to continue. John understood,
+and a new tune was struck up. The Chief
+was fascinated. When that tune was concluded, the
+Chief wanted another, quite forgetting the importance
+of the ceremonial rites.</p>
+
+<p>While the last tune was being played the boys saw
+a tall man, with a huge spear, and a face most hideously
+painted. His body had characteristic stripes,
+entirely unlike those of the other people. Behind
+him marched the Korinos, without a sign or mark on
+them different from the costumes worn by them on
+the preceding day.</p>
+
+<p>As they filed along behind the leader, the boys
+noticed that the first one carried a thong-like rope:
+the second a knife; the third a sort of vessel, and the
+fourth a pair of short sticks.</p>
+
+<p>The people paid no attention to them, while the
+band was playing, but when it ceased, it was evident
+that they shrunk back from these dreaded men.</p>
+
+<p>John beckoned Uraso and Muro to come forward,
+and the Chief welcomed them. "As chiefs of your
+tribes you should be here with us. The White Chief<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_84" id="p_84" href="#p_84">p. 84</a></span>
+tells me that in his country the band and the flag always
+go first, and I have asked him to tell us how we
+should march to the forest."</p>
+
+<p>John then told those present how the procession
+should form. The band was marched to the front,
+and George, who had the small flag, was placed directly
+behind the band. Then the Chief, with Uraso
+and Muro on either side, and directly behind them
+Harry took position with the large flag.</p>
+
+<p>After the flag the Korinos, without their tall
+leader, however, were placed in line. John then motioned
+to the people to take their places following the
+Korinos, and the moment the column was thus formed
+the band struck up a lively marching tune, and John
+accompanied by the tall fantastic leader, went ahead
+of the band.</p>
+
+<p>The leader knew, of course, where the procession
+must go, and he thus wisely made the arrangement
+for the occasion. The procession wended its way directly
+to the north, along a well-beaten path, and
+after ascending a hill, turned to the left, and entered
+a sort of grove.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were delighted to notice the magnificent
+Magnolia trees in full bloom, the flowers of which
+surpassed anything they had ever seen, and the perfume
+was almost overpowering in its intensity.</p>
+
+<p>To the boys this peculiar procession had something
+mysterious about it. Neither John, nor the two
+Chiefs had any idea of its significance. John directed
+a questioning look toward the articles which
+the Korinos carried.</p>
+
+<p>When the crest of the hill was reached they made
+one complete circle, and the head of the column<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_85" id="p_85" href="#p_85">p. 85</a></span>
+stopped before the most magnificent magnolia tree
+in the grove. The leader marched along the line
+and the people soon formed themselves into a circle
+with the tree in the center.</p>
+
+<p>All chatter had stopped. While ascending the hill,
+and up to this time, there was a never ending clatter
+of voices; but now all were quiet, and gazed to the
+top of the tree. The tall leader, at the nod of the
+Chief came forward and approached the tree, and
+with the long spear struck it three times, and then
+turned to the Korinos, who had now followed him.</p>
+
+<p>Then, he turned again, and struck the tree three
+times more, and this was repeated the third time.
+After stepping back he raised the spear, and held it
+over the head of the Korino who carried the rope.
+The latter stepped to the tree and with a dextrous
+throw sent a coil of rope over the first limb and
+caught the other end of it.</p>
+
+<p>The spear was then laid over the head of the man
+with the knife, and he sprang forward grasping the
+rope, and when the spear was poised on high, he
+gracefully crept hand over hand up the rope.</p>
+
+<p>The instant the man's hand seized the rope the
+people fell to the ground and covered their faces.
+The boys did not want to lose this part of the ceremony,
+you may be sure, but they tried to observe
+the rites.</p>
+
+<p>A side glance was sufficient to assure them that the
+Chief did not kneel, nor did either John, Uraso or
+Muro; but they were privileged characters, so the
+boys went through the ceremony by peering through
+their fingers, and at the same time trying to find out
+whether there were not others trying to do the same.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_86" id="p_86" href="#p_86">p. 86</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The man went up and up, and soon emerged from
+the last spare branches at the top, until his face was
+near the great white flower which grew on the tip.</p>
+
+<p>"I think that is the flower all the people were looking
+at," said George in a whisper.</p>
+
+<p>The man raised the knife, and with one slash
+severed the stem. Then, raising himself up to his
+full height, so his body could be plainly seen, he
+waved the flower about his head three times, and the
+leader at the base of the tree again struck the trunk
+three times.</p>
+
+<p>Immediately the people arose and placed their
+hands before them exactly like a bather on a perch
+about to dive, and with the palms of the hands thus
+placed against each other, the arms were raised to a
+vertical position, and lowered three times.</p>
+
+<p>With hands still in their lowered position, and eyes
+cast on the ground, the Korino in the tree slowly descended,
+and the one who threw the rope quickly detached
+it from the tree.</p>
+
+<p>The spear was then placed over the head of the
+man with the sticks. He crossed his legs and sat
+down, and with an exceedingly rapid motion, soon
+caused smoke to arise, and then a tiny flame appeared.</p>
+
+<p>"Why didn't they tell us about it, and we could
+have let them use some of our matches," said George
+dryly, as Harry made a great show of indignation
+at the irrelevant remark.</p>
+
+<p>A fire was quickly kindled, and the man with the
+bowl knelt down, after fixing two stones on opposite
+sides of the fire. From a small receptacle he
+took a powder, and dropped it into the bowl, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_87" id="p_87" href="#p_87">p. 87</a></span>
+after holding the flower aloft, the man who took it
+from the tree, dropped it into the smoking bowl.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly the people resumed their natural poses,
+and began to dance. The Chief spoke a word to
+Uraso, and the band struck up a lively tune. Then,
+to the ringing blare of the band, and the shrieks
+and shouts of the people the dance began. It was
+one continuous whirl, and many of them became
+frenzied.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief himself participated in this part of the
+ceremony, and swung himself around and around in
+a giddy whirl. During all this time each fellow was
+for himself. They did not have partners as in the
+civilized dances.</p>
+
+<p>The tangoing was an individual effort, and each
+enjoyed it in his own way, but they all kept step to
+the music, showing the savage characteristic of being
+able to observe rhythmic effects.</p>
+
+<p>The boys caught the spirit of the occasion, and
+joined in the wild swirl. Uraso and Muro were at it,
+and the sole spectator was John, who said that he felt
+too old to learn the new steps.</p>
+
+<p>When the band stopped the people rested, but there
+was no disposition to break up the merry party, and
+when the music again struck up the whole scene was
+acted over again. It was noon before the grand ball
+ceased.</p>
+
+<p>Then, at a sign from the Chief the procession reformed,
+and went back over the trail, the people
+dancing all the way, and, apparently, without exhibiting
+any signs of weariness, although it must be stated
+that the band was nearing collapse, when the people
+dispersed.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p  class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_88" id="p_88" href="#p_88">p. 88</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2>
+
+<h3>SIGNIFICANCE OF NATIVE RITES</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>As</span> heretofore stated, there had been no morning
+meal, and the dancing must have been a trying task,
+under those conditions.</p>
+
+<p>"It would have been much better if we had something
+to eat before this part of the ceremony. I am
+so hungry I could eat anything," remarked George,
+as they neared the village.</p>
+
+<p>"The natives do not think so. That is part of the
+ceremony. It must be carried out before a meal is
+taken," answered John, "or it will not have the
+proper effect."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso overheard the remark, and he added:
+"The Chief said they had never known such a scene
+as took place to-day, and that it was not a part of
+the regular ceremony to have the dancing at that
+time, but that the wonderful music seemed to win
+every one."</p>
+
+<p>"I heard him say it was the first time in years
+that he had danced. How he enjoyed it," remarked
+Muro. "I admit that it was the best dance I had
+since the boys got back. That was a big time at
+Unity when you returned."</p>
+
+<p>"I think," said Harry, "that was the queerest performance
+I ever heard of. What a foolish thing to
+cut a flower from the top of a tree, and go through<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_89" id="p_89" href="#p_89">p. 89</a></span>
+all that ceremony, using Old Fantastic with his flourishing
+spear to conduct the ridiculous rites."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think it is any more foolish than many
+things which civilized people do?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>Harry mused a while, and then continued: "Probably
+not, when I think of it, but with us the ceremonies
+really mean something; at least, it seems
+to me that they are intended to."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and that is generally so with the native rites.
+Sometimes the origin is rather obscure, but everything
+of this character comes from something in the
+past, of which it is symbolic. Spencer, in his work
+on 'Evolutions of Ceremonial Forms of Government,'
+recites a curious instance of this, where he
+shows that the habit of stroking the mustache is a
+survival of scalping."</p>
+
+<p>The boys laughed. "That must be pretty well
+far-fetched," responded George.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think so?" answered John. "He reasons
+it in this way. It was, formerly the custom, among
+most savage tribes, to take the hair of victims, to be
+used as personal adornment, or to indicate the valor
+of the warrior. Among some tribes in the Philippines
+and also in the interior of Africa, the custom
+is to take the head of an enemy."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean the Head hunters?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; you have probably heard a great deal about
+them since we acquired the Philippines. When men
+began to get a little higher in the scale of civilization,
+the victor required some token of submission from
+the conquered, so the latter plucked a wisp of hair
+from his head and presented it to indicate defeat.
+During the seventeenth century it was the rule of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_90" id="p_90" href="#p_90">p. 90</a></span>
+Spanish Court that all inferiors, in addressing superiors,
+must stroke the mustache, and this came
+from the old idea of the hair token."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you suppose that the taking of the flower has
+any particular significance?"</p>
+
+<p>"Most assuredly! There must be a flower before
+there can be fruit. This is the beginning of the season
+or the beginning of the year, to these people,
+and the largest-flower, at the top of the greatest
+tree is the one taken while it is at full bloom, and
+incinerated."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 367px;">
+<a id="illus-093" name="illus-093" />
+<a href="#p_91">
+<img src="images/illus-093-fig7.png" width="367" height="262"
+alt="Fig. 7. The Mistletoe" title="Fig. 7. The Mistletoe" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 7. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mistletoe</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Is that what they did in that bowl-shaped vessel?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and I imagine they will use the ashes in some
+part of their rites."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you ever know of other tribes that do anything
+like that?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_91" id="p_91" href="#p_91">p. 91</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes; very many; in fact most savage tribes have
+some sort of rites which they scrupulously follow
+out as a religious duty. Ancient history records
+many such practices in detail. Thus, the Druids,
+a peculiar class, or order of priests, which existed
+among the Celtic races, attributed a sacred or mystic
+character to plants, and venerated the oak tree."</p>
+
+<p>"I have read that they offered up human sacrifices,"
+said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I was coming to that. But do you know
+that they regarded the mistletoe as an antidote
+for all poisons and a cure for all diseases?
+At certain seasons in the year it would be
+gathered, and with the greatest ceremonies one of
+the priests would ascend the tree on which it was
+found, and cut it off with a golden knife."</p>
+
+<p>"But is the mistletoe found on the Oak?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but it grows more frequently on the Apple
+tree. The seeds are distributed by birds, and owing
+to the fact that it is found so infrequently on the
+oak, the Druids considered it peculiarly sacred on
+that account."</p>
+
+<hr class='sorta' />
+
+<p>The delicious odor of the roasted food, which met
+the people on their return, was a compensation for
+the lack of the morning breakfast. The Chief had
+invited John, Uraso, Muro, the two boys, and Stut,
+to accompany him to his home.</p>
+
+<p>There in the open court, if it might so be called,
+were the viands in the greatest profusion. They
+were surprised to see that at each place was a couch,
+and before every visitor was laid a bountiful supply
+of food. In all their wanderings George and Harry<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_92" id="p_92" href="#p_92">p. 92</a></span>
+never ate with a greater relish than on the present
+occasion.</p>
+
+<p>The meal the previous day, was not at all comparable
+to this. It would have vied with many a
+meal set before our civilized gastronomies. The
+table implements, it is true, were not found in profusion,
+but the wooden forks, or prongs were good
+substitutes for the more refined articles, and for
+plates hollowed bark sections were found serviceable.</p>
+
+<p>The Sarsaparilla drink was the most favored
+liquid. "I wish we had some ice for it," suggested
+Harry. "It will be a good thing to bring over some
+ice for the Chief. I think he would enjoy it."</p>
+
+<p>"By the way, Harry, did you see what they did
+with the Korinos?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"Shut them up in that dark hole back of the
+house."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if they have given them anything to
+eat?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no!" said Muro. "They are to be sacrificed
+this afternoon, and it wouldn't do to feed them."</p>
+
+<p>"Poor fellows!" remarked George, as he gazed
+vacantly before him, lost in contemplation.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, they have been found out, and will now be
+dealt with in accordance with their law."</p>
+
+<p>"Was that tall fellow one of them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; he is the principal chief of the Korinos. Do
+you know they tried to escape last night?" exclaimed
+Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>"Is that so? Where could they go in safety on
+this island?"</p>
+
+<p>"To their caves, of course," remarked Harry.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_93" id="p_93" href="#p_93">p. 93</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," added Uraso, "the Chief has no authority
+under ground."</p>
+
+<p>The people gorged; so did the Chief. The meal
+was a course dinner, at least so far as the time it
+took to get through with all the dishes, and the boys
+smiled as they saw the Chief slowly sink down, and
+pass off into oblivion.</p>
+
+<p>John sat there, gazing on him, and slowly nodding
+his head at the spectacle. He did not evince disgust,
+and when George spoke to him about this peculiar
+savage trait, he remarked: "Is he any worse than
+many people in our own country, who do the same
+thing? This is not gluttony with the savage; he
+knows no better. This is one of the great enjoyments
+of life which the savage knows. Teach him
+something better and he will respond."</p>
+
+<p>"When you stop to think of it," replied George,
+"I really don't see why it is such an awful thing to
+eat until you are stuffed to sleepiness?"</p>
+
+<p>"The real argument against it is on sanitary
+grounds," suggested John. "We regard gluttony
+as bad because it is a selfish exhibition of taste and
+habits, and in this I quite agree; but among savages
+the custom of regularity in habits is not one of their
+understood laws. I have known North American
+Indians who could each devour from six to eight
+pounds of beef, and drink two quarts of coffee at one
+sitting. But those men would not eat another meal
+for three days."</p>
+
+<p>During the meal hour there was a continual round
+of merriment, and every one was enjoying himself
+to the fullest extent. But now the hum of voices
+ended. The boys were surprised.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_94" id="p_94" href="#p_94">p. 94</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"They are taking their noon-day siestas," said
+John, laughing.</p>
+
+<p>The boys arose and passed out. It was true, indeed.
+The men, and women too, were taking naps
+everywhere, the grotesque figures lying where they
+had eaten their food.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 361px;">
+<a id="illus-097" name="illus-097" />
+<a href="#p_95">
+<img src="images/illus-097-fig8.png" width="361" height="263"
+alt="Fig. 8. The Jacchus" title="Fig. 8. The Jacchus" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 8. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Jacchus</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>They made a tour. No one appeared to take any
+notice of them, as they passed through the open
+places between the huts, because all of the food was
+eaten in the open, and not within the huts. The village
+looked like one immense picnic ground.</p>
+
+<p>As they were returning toward the Chief's house
+they caught sight of the hut in which the Korinos
+were confined. To their astonishment two of them
+were crawling out the enclosure, and the leader was
+particularly noticeable, peering from the side of the
+hut.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_95" id="p_95" href="#p_95">p. 95</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Shall we give the alarm?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"No, no! See John; he will know what to do."</p>
+
+<p>As they passed the hut the guards lay in blissful
+sleep, and seeing this the boys rushed in and excitedly
+told John of the jail delivery and the advisability
+of giving the alarm.</p>
+
+<p>He held up his hand, in caution, as he smiled at
+the announcement. "Do you want the poor fellows
+to be sacrificed?"</p>
+
+<p>"By no means."</p>
+
+<p>"Then let them go. Possibly the Chief may find
+some way to get them back."</p>
+
+<p>Two hours later the village took on another aspect.
+It was now about five o'clock in the afternoon, but
+in the meantime boy-like they had investigated every
+part of the surrounding scenery, being particularly
+interested in the monkeys which were seen in the
+trees everywhere.</p>
+
+<p>The most amusing to the boys was a small animal
+that had a "beard all around his face," as George
+expressed it. It was small, hardly exceeding a foot
+in height, a sort of olive-gray color, and a round tail
+twice the length of the body.</p>
+
+<p>"I think I know what you have reference to," suggested
+John, when appealed to. "It is the Jacchus,
+and is related to the Marmozets and the Tamarins.
+They are very active, like squirrels, and live on nuts,
+seeds, roots and fruit."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief awakened as the boys entered, and
+within the next half hour was ready for the continuance
+of the festival.</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to know what the next thing is on
+the programme? This is a little inconvenient, not<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_96" id="p_96" href="#p_96">p. 96</a></span>
+knowing just what is going to take place," was
+George's observation.</p>
+
+<p>"John will know if any one does, but I suppose he
+is too busy now with his Royal Highness," answered
+Harry with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>But the boys were not kept long in suspense. The
+natives understood, as it appeared, for they were
+soon congregated around the Palace, and now for
+the first time the boys noticed a large, imposing-looking
+native, who carried an immense knotted club.
+To satisfy the reader's curiosity, it may be well to
+describe him. He wore a loin cloth, made of the
+skins of the small animals which were found all over
+the island, and, to all appearances, at least a half
+dozen different kinds of pelts were used to make up
+the garment, the ends, or corners of which hung down
+in points to form a fringe.</p>
+
+<p>At his ankles were two huge bands, made of cloth,
+and plentifully decorated with spangles of shells,
+and rows of nuts, strung on cords, like beads.
+Around his neck and trailing down the back was a
+collar of interwoven leaves, very artistically arranged,
+if judged from the viewpoint of savage decorations.</p>
+
+<p>The head dress was unique, being made up of a
+band of coarsely-woven cloth, literally covered with
+large fish scales, and a pyramidal structure was fastened
+to this band, and extended up beyond the crown
+for a foot, or more. At its apex was a mass of
+streamers, which fluttered around as the breeze
+floated by.</p>
+
+<p>The weapon was fully five feet long, the head of
+the club, for such it was, terminated in a gnarled<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_97" id="p_97" href="#p_97">p. 97</a></span>
+knot, bristling with small points. This the boys recognized
+to be somewhat similar to the wicked thing
+that was carried by the Korino when he sought to
+slay Tarra.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was also differently attired. He was
+literally covered with clothing, the different parts
+being dyed with various colors without any regard
+to harmony, or design. Like all the others he wore
+no foot covering, but had bare feet.</p>
+
+<p>The crown was also a cloth band, but this was
+surrounded by vertically-arranged thorns, huge
+things that showed their bristling points, and wound,
+or rather braided around them, were garlands of human
+hair, of different hues.</p>
+
+<p>The Royal wand was an immense black staff, fully
+two inches thick, and six feet long, one end of which
+was pointed, the other end terminating within a large
+calabash. This wand he held with the pointed end
+upward.</p>
+
+<p>When he appeared at the doorway the people fell
+down on their faces, and after a few words all arose,
+and the man with the club turned toward the hut
+where the Korinos were confined. Four of the
+largest warriors accompanied him, while the people
+looked on in expectancy.</p>
+
+<p>"The fun will now begin," whispered Harry, and
+it surely did. The club bearer returned with a troubled
+look, and addressed the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>The people soon learned of what had taken place,
+and the commotion was evident. They speedily lost
+all semblance of order, and began to run to and fro.
+The scowl on the face of the Chief was terrible, nor
+did he in the least attempt to conceal his anger.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_98" id="p_98" href="#p_98">p. 98</a></span></p>
+
+<p>With a vehemence that caused the crowd to shiver,
+he gave a command, and in a moment three men were
+brought forward, almost in a state of collapse with
+terror written in their countenances. They were the
+unfortunate guards, as the boys quickly saw.</p>
+
+<p>They were unable to answer the indictment of the
+Chief, because the escape had been as much of a
+surprise to them as to the Chief. Uraso and Muro
+were quick to recognize the situation, and they informed
+John of the progress of the conversation.</p>
+
+<p>The negligent guards had been condemned to take
+the places of the Korinos, as sacrifices. The rites
+demanded some victims, and the boys now saw that
+the escape of the Korinos would not avoid the carrying
+out of the bloody rites.</p>
+
+<p>The new, victims-to-be were firmly bound, and
+placed in the center of the crowd, and, strangely
+enough, it was now noticed that the people expressed
+the same degree of hatred to the poor unfortunates
+that they had manifested toward the Korinos an hour
+before.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was now at the head of the procession,
+which, instead of going to the north, passed alongside
+the slight elevation that led north of the grove,
+and toward the high elevation which the boys had
+noticed the day before.</p>
+
+<p>The march was but a short one, and when the
+upper level was reached the boys were astounded to
+see that beyond, and next to the hill, on the north,
+was an open space, the floor of which was of solid
+rock. This space covered nearly an acre, and near
+the center was a flat rocky table, fully ten feet in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_99" id="p_99" href="#p_99">p. 99</a></span>
+diameter and about four feet high, with a huge boulder
+in the center of the table.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief and the victims marched directly to the
+stone table, the executioner tramping with a measured
+tread immediately ahead of the victims. The
+people did not go near the rocky shelf, but circled
+about at a respectful distance.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p  class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_100" id="p_100" href="#p_100">p. 100</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2>
+
+<h3>HYPNOTISM ON SAVAGES</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>All</span> those with the Chief's party, approached the
+table, upon which the executioner mounted the rock,
+and stood there, as though inviting the admiration
+of the crowd.</p>
+
+<p>John spoke a few words to Uraso, and the latter
+addressed the Chief as follows: "The White Chief
+says that to offer these men as a sacrifice will be
+against the wishes of the Great Spirit, if they are
+destroyed by the weapon which is now in the hands
+of the one on the rock."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief quickly turned. "What would the
+White Chief have me do? I cannot free these culprits,
+because it is the law that they shall die in
+place of those who are appointed to be the victims."</p>
+
+<p>"The White Chief does not ask for their lives,
+but only that the manner of their death shall be
+changed."</p>
+
+<p>"That shall be done. What is the White Chief's
+wish?"</p>
+
+<p>"He will be the executioner."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief threw his arms around Uraso's neck,
+in raptures of joy, and turning to the man on the
+table, ordered him to descend. John quietly conferred
+with Uraso, and the latter mounted the table,
+and the prisoners were led up until they faced him.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_101" id="p_101" href="#p_101">p. 101</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Uraso, addressing them, said: "You have been
+condemned by your Chief to die because you have
+deceived his people and brought sorrow on all. The
+Great White Chief has seen the misery you have
+caused by allowing the Korinos to escape, and you
+must now take their places as the victims to appease
+the Great Spirit.</p>
+
+<p>"The White Chief has asked to be permitted to
+offer you up as sacrifices to his God, as well, and
+the White Man's death is a terrible one. When you
+die it will not cause you to go out of the world forgetting
+all that you may suffer, but you will always
+know and suffer through all time, and you will never
+know a day that is free from misery.</p>
+
+<p>"Your dying will be like a thousand deaths, and
+your living hours will be like fire that always burns
+and never consumes."</p>
+
+<p>Thus Uraso went on, and as he spoke the poor
+victims' eyes grew greater and greater, and the terror
+more pronounced. He ceased for a moment and
+John slowly walked to the table, and mounting it,
+said quietly to Uraso: "Tell them that when I raise
+my hands over my head the ends of their living
+death will begin."</p>
+
+<p>When this was imparted, the agony on their faces
+was pitiful to see. John advanced, and spread out
+his palms toward them, and quickly drew his hands
+toward him, and this was repeated three times.</p>
+
+<p>It is a curious thing that most savages believe
+in the mysticism of some particular number. In
+Africa some tribes, if they hear an animal cry four
+times, will brave any danger, as it is a sign that the
+bird has knowledge of safety to his person.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_102" id="p_102" href="#p_102">p. 102</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Others watch with great care the repetition of an
+insect's call, and particularly the number of times
+an unusual noise occurs, and the belief is somewhat
+analogous to the views which white people have
+about the cricket. Milton, Byron, Southey, and
+Dickens have written stories about them, so it is
+not to be wondered at that the poor benighted savages
+should have some belief about such things.</p>
+
+<p>After the rites at the tree in the forest, it was
+evident that three was the cryptic, or mysterious
+number, and John used it on this occasion, for in
+all the peculiar signs that he had previously employed,
+three was the number that impressed itself
+on the minds of the people, and it doubtless had its
+effect on the condemned.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly John moved from side to side, and he now
+saw the intense expression, as their eyes followed
+his every motion. His motions grew less and less
+rapid; he moved toward them, and then suddenly
+retreated, and through all these evolutions the three
+men's faces became more and more tense, and finally
+the muscles of their faces relaxed, their eyes stared
+with a blank expression, and the motions of John almost
+ceased.</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked about them. They, too, had a
+spell woven about them which they could not understand.
+It was the most remarkable feeling they had
+ever experienced. The multitude did not stir a
+limb. The Chief was rigid, his face colorless, lips
+parted, and eyes fixed at what he saw before him.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, John sprang forward, and raised both
+arms high above his head, and instantly the three
+men fell back and lay rigid, full length on the rock.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_103" id="p_103" href="#p_103">p. 103</a></span>
+John turned, but while there were forms before him,
+there was no sound. Hundreds of eyes gazed, but
+they stared mutely.</p>
+
+<p>"I feel awfully funny," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know what John has been doing?" asked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"I know; he has hypnotized the men!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and everybody else!"</p>
+
+<p>When John turned, he waved his hand, the audience
+relaxed its tension, and witnessed the death (?)
+of the three men, an act performed by the White
+Chief without having touched them. The Chief
+slowly walked forward, and Uraso led him to the
+platform, while John pointed to the mute victims.</p>
+
+<p>John motioned to Uraso to raise the first man by
+lifting his feet while he grasped the shoulders, and
+when the body was lifted up it was perfectly rigid.
+The same exhibition was performed with the two
+others. That they were dead, was apparent to the
+Chief and the people.</p>
+
+<p>The people surged to and fro. John was a Korino
+now, in the eyes of the people. When the people
+pressed forward John spoke to Uraso, and he turned
+to the people.</p>
+
+<p>"The White Chief says that there will be no more
+sacrifices, because the Great Spirit wills it otherwise.
+The Korinos must be brought from the
+caves&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Uraso could get no further. The people were
+aroused. Their voices could be heard uttering
+threats against the witch doctors.</p>
+
+<p>John saw that they were determined to wreak
+vengeance upon them, but he counseled them to be<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_104" id="p_104" href="#p_104">p. 104</a></span>
+wise and obey their Chief, and that the Korinos
+would acknowledge their own error.</p>
+
+<p>The wives and children of the three guards were
+present, as they were compelled to be, and, as may
+well be imagined, their grief was terrible to behold.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso again spoke to the people, and said: "The
+White Chief intends to show that the Great Spirit
+does not wish sacrifices, and will give back the guards
+to their families."</p>
+
+<p>When he ceased speaking John stooped forward,
+and waved his hands three times, the motion being
+formed by throwing his hands forward, palms downward,
+and then slowly raising them up, and with an
+upward and an outward swing, bringing them down
+again.</p>
+
+<p>Then he advanced forward a few feet and held out
+his arms horizontally, with the palms uppermost,
+and speaking a few words, the arms were impressively
+raised. As he did so the three men slightly
+turned, and then almost simultaneously raised themselves
+to a sitting posture, and glanced about wildly.</p>
+
+<p>The consternation on the part of the natives at
+this sight was beyond all description. They were
+awe stricken, and dumbfounded. Not the slightest
+sound could be heard, as the men arose to their
+feet.</p>
+
+<p>The only ones who were joyously affected were
+the wives of the men who, at the words of Uraso,
+sprang forward and were about to ascend the rock,
+but at the command of John they leaped from the
+table, and the children gathered about them.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief did not utter a word of protest. He
+remained there utterly speechless. When John<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_105" id="p_105" href="#p_105">p. 105</a></span>
+asked him what was the next thing to be done to carry
+out the rites, he remained standing for some time
+without answering.</p>
+
+<p>When he had gathered together his faculties he
+turned to the people and said: "The Great White
+Chief has shown his power, and proven to us that
+our Korinos have lied to us. They must be destroyed.
+Let the people return to the village, and
+proceed with the feast. We shall be guided by the
+White Chief."</p>
+
+<p>This was, indeed, the effect that John wished to
+produce, but he did not also anticipate that the Chief
+would insist upon the destruction of the Korinos.</p>
+
+<p>The feast that afternoon was a repetition on a
+larger scale, of the feast of the day before. Indeed,
+this was now the third day of feasting.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know whether I can eat any more for a
+few days," said Harry, as they neared the village,
+and saw the preparations going on.</p>
+
+<p>George laughed, as he responded: "We shall
+have to go through with this thing, whatever the
+cost. Have you forgotten that they believe in <i>three</i>
+for everything? Didn't John make three passes to
+kill them; and three more to bring them to life again?
+We have had two feasts, and must now have one
+more. I don't know what the result will be if I eat
+half as much even, as I did yesterday."</p>
+
+<p>John laughed heartily, as he added: "That is
+correct, too, about the feasts. Notice from this time
+on that about everything they do will be measured
+by threes."</p>
+
+<p>As the boys afterwards remarked, they never
+knew how they got through the feast that day, but<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_106" id="p_106" href="#p_106">p. 106</a></span>
+they tried to imitate John in partaking of the good
+things in moderation.</p>
+
+<p>It was late in the night when the natives ceased
+the dancing, which was the signal for the end of the
+festival, although in many respects it was entirely
+different from the previous ceremonies, as Uraso
+and Muro learned in talking with the natives.</p>
+
+<p>The next day was ushered in with a rainstorm, the
+first that was experienced on the island, and there
+was no opportunity to make any excursions. It had
+been John's intention to settle the fate of the Korinos,
+as he felt that this was a matter that should
+have his attention before they left on the further
+explorations of the island.</p>
+
+<p>Since it was impossible to venture out far from
+the village, John spent the most of the day attending
+to the wounded and the sick, although they had
+not been neglected in the meantime, not even during
+the ceremonies of the past three days.</p>
+
+<p>The first visit was made to the quarters of the
+white man who was found in the stockade when they
+took possession of the village. It was evident from
+the greeting that he and John had had several conversations
+previous to this visit, but of this the latter
+did not advise the boys.</p>
+
+<p>When they came into the room he was sitting up,
+and he greeted John and the boys. He could speak,
+but it was with a weak voice, and the boys ranged
+themselves on one side while John seated himself
+on the other.</p>
+
+<p>"You told me yesterday," began John, "that when
+you were shipwrecked you were cast ashore on another
+island. How many companions had you?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_107" id="p_107" href="#p_107">p. 107</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Three," he answered. "One of them was a large
+man, with brown hair and piercing eyes, who was
+formerly an officer in the navy, and was at that
+time engaged in an exploring capacity, and on his
+way to Australia."</p>
+
+<p>"Did he walk with a limp?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>The old man, as well as the boys, looked at John
+in surprise. He quickly answered: "Yes; did you
+know him?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," he replied; "but we found him less than a
+month ago."</p>
+
+<p>The old man leaned forward in his eagerness.
+"Where is he?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"He is dead," answered John, gravely.</p>
+
+<p>"Dead!" he exclaimed. "Dead! and do you know
+his name?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, but we found his remains, together with the
+boat to which he had been tied, on the shore of an
+island south of this."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it is true, after all!" he muttered.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you know about it?" asked John, who was
+the interested one now.</p>
+
+<p>"No, this is sad news to me. His name was Clifford,&mdash;Ralph
+S. Clifford, and when he and Walter
+undertook,&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>The boys were all impatience now, as George cried
+out: "Walter! did you know Walter?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; he was my companion for a time. He and
+I were making explorations on the island on which
+we were wrecked, and when the two undertook to go
+on a search, to ascertain what the island was like, I
+was too ill to go with them. Walter returned, and
+told me of meeting with a band of savages on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_108" id="p_108" href="#p_108">p. 108</a></span>
+western side of the mountain, and of the capture of
+Clifford by the natives."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you know a man by the name of Wright?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, I never heard of any one by that name in
+this section of the globe."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know what became of Walter?"</p>
+
+<p>"I was about to say, that we went north along the
+shore, and camped near the beach, and there found
+a boat, rather crudely made, with which we proposed
+sailing around the island. Before we could
+complete our arrangements, Walter disappeared."</p>
+
+<p>"Did he take the boat with him?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; the boat and all his effects were still with
+me. I was still very ill, and I concluded to remain
+there until my strength returned, but four days
+afterwards, when I was able to move about, I found
+that the boat had disappeared."</p>
+
+<p>The strain of the conversation appeared to affect
+him, and the three visitors stated they would call
+on him later for further information.</p>
+
+<p>When the boys returned to their huts, with John,
+the latter was quiet and very much reserved. The
+boys were so much interested in the story of the
+old man, that they could not wait until they were
+seated before they began to question him.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think of his story?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John did not answer promptly, as was his habit.
+Instead, he reflected for some time, and at last said
+slowly: "The story may be true. Clifford was, in
+my opinion, tied to the boat and set adrift, and his
+death was due to that, unquestionably."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think this man had anything to do with
+it?" asked George.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_109" id="p_109" href="#p_109">p. 109</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"So far, I have no direct reason for thinking so,
+but there are several very curious things about the
+story."</p>
+
+<p>"What in particular do you have in mind?"</p>
+
+<p>"He said the boat was found on the seashore, and
+that Walter left without taking it with him, but that
+when he recovered the boat was gone."</p>
+
+<p>"Is it an unreasonable story?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is not at all improbable. The tide might
+have washed it away, but, if it was our boat, and
+it was provided with the peculiar rope and the
+strange oars, that were found in it when it was recovered
+by you, it would be interesting to know
+whether he or Walter put them there."</p>
+
+<p>"Why is that so interesting to know?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because the rope found in that boat, is the same
+as the rope we took from Clifford's body, which
+you discovered on Venture Island."</p>
+
+<p>"If we could only find Walter now it would solve
+that mystery," said Harry. "I don't like to think
+that this man was instrumental in the Clifford tragedy."</p>
+
+<p>"Nor do I," responded John. "It is evident there
+is some connection between that boat and the skeleton,
+and that our boat played a part in it." This
+ended the conversation on this point.</p>
+
+<p>It will be remembered that two of the men rescued
+from the prison stockade, were natives of another
+tribe, who had been captured some weeks before.
+Upon inquiry John found that they had disappeared
+the day before.</p>
+
+<p>The two others, in a very emaciated condition,
+were still under John's care, and rapidly improving.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_110" id="p_110" href="#p_110">p. 110</a></span>
+No attempts had been made to question them, and
+as it was the intention of the boys to commence the
+trip to the north, as soon as John had settled the
+matter with the Korinos, they were anxious to get
+some information from them concerning their tribe.</p>
+
+<p>Accompanying Uraso, and through him, they first
+learned that the people they were now living with
+were called Malosos, and that the Chief was named
+Ta Babeda, which meant the <i>strong man</i>. He was
+not so large as Beralsea, the Chief of Venture
+Island, but his muscles were more active, thus the
+boys could see that he rightly acquired the sceptre
+of chief ruler, as did Beralsea, because of the
+strength he possessed, and there was no one on the
+island to question his king-ship.</p>
+
+<p>While rambling about the boys and Uraso were
+informed that John wished to see them at the Chief's
+house, and they went over without delay. Entering
+the house, they were surprised to see that the
+different packages containing the presents had been
+opened, and were about to be distributed.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief and his household were first provided
+for. The articles consisted of coats, and different
+articles of wear for the Chief, together with a watch,
+a revolver, and a camera.</p>
+
+<p>"This will give both of you boys an opportunity
+to give the Chief some lessons in these instruments,"
+said John.</p>
+
+<p>The articles for the women were received with
+screams of delight that pleased the Chief beyond
+measure. Bits of lace, the like of which had never
+been seen on the island, cotton fabric, beads, articles
+of ornamentation, and finally full-fledged dresses,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_111" id="p_111" href="#p_111">p. 111</a></span>
+were only parts of the gifts which went to the women
+and children.</p>
+
+<p>"With your permission," said John, to the Chief,
+"I will offer gifts to your people, and you may state
+that during the afternoon the articles will be arranged
+in packages so that all will receive presents
+of like value."</p>
+
+<p>The boys, as well as Uraso and Muro, were busy
+making up the gifts for distribution. During the
+remaining portion of the day they were busily engaged
+in this work, which brought the greatest joy
+and happiness to the natives.</p>
+
+<p>It may well be imagined that Uraso and Muro were
+not slow in imparting the news of Wonder Island
+to the natives. John had a long conference with the
+Chief on the same subject.</p>
+
+<p>"But how can we get these articles?" he asked,
+as John told him how they made the wonderful
+things.</p>
+
+<p>"You can make them here," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>"But we cannot make them if we do not have the
+tools."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you can buy them," responded John.</p>
+
+<p>"But what have we that you want?" he asked, as
+he eagerly scanned John's face.</p>
+
+<p>"Your land is full of things that the people in
+Wonder Island want, and the whole world will buy
+them of you."</p>
+
+<p>"Will you tell me what they want and how we
+shall get them ready for you?"</p>
+
+<p>"It will give us pleasure to send our people over
+who can tell you what spices, and nuts, and coffee,
+and other things which you have in abundance, can<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_112" id="p_112" href="#p_112">p. 112</a></span>
+be prepared, and what they are worth, and it will
+be the means of giving the people work, and peace
+and contentment."</p>
+
+<p>"But if we do not have any more fighting with
+our enemy there will be no need of a strong Chief,"
+he remarked, thinking of his new relation to the
+scheme as outlined.</p>
+
+<p>"There will be a much greater need of a strong
+man like you, who can mete out equal justice to the
+people," remarked John.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p  class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_113" id="p_113" href="#p_113">p. 113</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2>
+
+<h3>THE REMARKABLE CAVE EXPLORATIONS</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>But</span> the time was now at hand, when it became
+necessary for the exploring expedition to the north.
+The rescued prisoners stated that their people, while
+not so numerous, were very warlike, and by degrees,
+John learned that they were the cannibals of whom
+they had heard.</p>
+
+<p>The tribe was known as the Umbolos, and the
+Chief was a frightful man, unlike any other in the
+tribe, or, at any rate, from the description, he was
+not formed like them. He was known as Rumisses,
+which in their tongue meant <i>thunder</i>.</p>
+
+<p>It was remarkable that Uraso and Muro understood
+most of the words of the language used by the
+natives here and also on Venture Island. On Wonder
+Island, there were only two tongues, or dialects,
+and the people on this island, as well as on
+Venture Island, spoke the dialect belonging to the
+Illyas, Kurabus and the Tuolos, the tribes that were
+the fiercest and the most difficult to subdue.</p>
+
+<p>It was hoped that the escape of the two Umbolos,
+and the return to their people would be sufficient to
+give them the entree to that part of the country,
+but after the questionings of John on this point, it
+was very doubtful whether this would impress itself
+on their minds.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_114" id="p_114" href="#p_114">p. 114</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The natives had been accustomed for so long a
+period to regard every other people as an enemy,
+and consequently absolutely removed from any possibility
+of friendship, that it was questionable
+whether the messengers could persuade the Chief to
+receive them.</p>
+
+<p>Arrangements for the departure were decided
+upon, and they planned to start early in the morning.
+John visited the Chief, and suggested that he
+should consider it a favor if the Chief would permit
+him to take the Korinos with him.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief opened his eyes in astonishment.
+"Why do you wish to be burdened with men who
+will live by deceiving?" he inquired.</p>
+
+<p>"But they have lived to the best of their knowledge.
+They do not know any better. They believe
+what they have been taught, and think it is a duty to
+carry out and practice their rites. They do not wish
+to deceive you."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief pondered for a long time, and then replied:
+"What will you do with them?"</p>
+
+<p>"I want to teach them the white man's ways, and
+tell them to come back and teach your children the
+things which we believe are right and for the good
+of the people."</p>
+
+<p>The lessons which John imparted were sources of
+wonder and amazement to the ruler, who, five days
+before, thought he was the only one appointed to
+make and to execute laws.</p>
+
+<p>When he finally gave his consent, he said: "You
+must take it upon yourself to get the Korinos, because
+they will not come out of their caves."</p>
+
+<p>"But how can they find food there? If you pre<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_115" id="p_115" href="#p_115">p. 115</a></span>vent
+them from getting food they will be compelled
+to come out or starve."</p>
+
+<p>"They will starve before they will permit themselves
+to be taken."</p>
+
+<p>"Then," answered John, "why do you not order
+your warriors to enter the cave and take them by
+force?"</p>
+
+<p>"But who dares to go in?"</p>
+
+<p>"I dare to go in, but you must order me to do so,"
+answered John.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief jumped up in an instant. "And will
+you go?" he asked in the greatest delight.</p>
+
+<p>"By all means. You must go with me to the cave,
+and there command me to enter and bring them
+forth."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief's eyes danced with delight, and he could
+hardly await the hour for starting on the mission.</p>
+
+<p>The boys and the two companion chiefs, were in
+their glory upon hearing of the decision to get the
+Korinos. Before leaving the Chief John questioned
+him very closely on the location of the cave, and
+whether there were not other caves on the island to
+the north.</p>
+
+<p>"I have heard that there is another one to the
+north, that was used in olden times by the Korinos
+who lived when my father was Chief. I also know
+that far to the north where the false and treacherous
+Umbolos live, are great caves which no man may
+enter."</p>
+
+<p>"Do they have Korinos in the Umbolo tribe?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; they do not believe in a Great Spirit."</p>
+
+<p>"Then, if they have no Korinos, why do they not
+dare to enter the caverns?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_116" id="p_116" href="#p_116">p. 116</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Because they have been told that it is death to
+go into the dark."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know why they think so?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because, a long time ago, the only man who ever
+returned from the dark caves, brought out the bones
+of men who had died there."</p>
+
+<p>"But it did not kill that man who brought them
+out?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; he died. And now no one dares enter those
+places."</p>
+
+<p>It may be imagined how this intelligence stirred
+up the boys. It was impossible to keep them from
+talking about it. To John it was like a magic wand;
+it seemed to wave before his eyes and to talk to him.
+What if they had really found the great cave on
+which John's heart was so keenly bent?</p>
+
+<p>But the Korinos must be freed. That afternoon,
+just before starting, the boys were surprised to see
+the band coming up the street. How they laughed,
+as they scented John's little ruse. It would, indeed,
+be a treat to bring the Korinos out of their dark resorts
+to some good old marching tune.</p>
+
+<p>The band struck up a familiar air, and to its lively
+tones the procession, with the three Chiefs and John
+at the head, marched across the open, and up the
+hill past the grove, on its way to the cave on the
+eastern slope of the high hill which rose from the
+shore of the ocean.</p>
+
+<p>There was jest and laughter, the Chief enjoying
+the treat that would be the greatest pleasure of his
+life, namely, the bringing of the Korinos out of the
+cave.</p>
+
+<p>After ascending the great hill, so that they over<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_117" id="p_117" href="#p_117">p. 117</a></span>looked
+the ocean, the Chief informed John that the
+entrance was a third of the way down the hill, and
+the narrow path was followed which led around to
+the north, shutting out the sight of the sea.</p>
+
+<p>After a few hundred feet, the path led to a cleft
+portion of the rocks, where the light of the sun
+was completely hidden. The walls of the rocks, at
+the entrance of the cleft portion, were fully fifty
+feet high, and were at least twenty feet apart, but
+as they went on the walls drew nearer together and
+the path ascended a slight incline.</p>
+
+<p>A sharp turn was reached, and they found themselves
+in a little cove, to the left of which was a dark
+entrance, toward which the Chief nodded, as he
+shrank back.</p>
+
+<p>John motioned to the Chief, and the latter sternly
+commanded John to bring forth the Korinos. John
+said a few words to Uraso and Muro, and also invited
+the boys to accompany them.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose you are all armed?" said John.</p>
+
+<p>The boys and the chiefs had come well prepared,
+so this point was taken care of.</p>
+
+<p>"But where are the lights?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"I have them," said John, "but we shall not use
+them now, for reasons which will be explained later."
+Together they entered the cave, the darkness of
+which was appalling. After going in fully a hundred
+and fifty feet, John stopped and said: "It
+would have been a sign of weakness to go in with
+a light. When we have gone far enough to be free
+from the mouth of the cave, we can use our flash
+lights. For the present we shall move on to ascertain
+whether the Korinos are provided with lights,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_118" id="p_118" href="#p_118">p. 118</a></span>
+which will show where they are, and we may thus be
+guided to them."</p>
+
+<p>The distance traveled must have been fully a thousand
+feet, when John again spoke: "I shall now
+throw the light directly ahead, and you must keep
+your eyes open to detect anything moving."</p>
+
+<p>The light flashed, and was then moved slowly to
+the left, until it reached a cove at the extreme eastern
+side, where there was an evident assemblage of
+articles, not a hundred feet in advance of them, but
+there was not a sign of living beings within the scope
+of the light beams.</p>
+
+<p>The company moved over to the spot indicated. A
+moment's examination satisfied them that it was
+really the abode of the Korinos, but they had disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>The debris, the half eaten portions of food, some
+still warm, were sufficient to indicate that they had
+fled, but where? Uraso, Muro and John, all three,
+flashed their lights, and, after examining the walls
+critically, Muro was the first to find the opening
+from the chamber in which they were standing.</p>
+
+<p>The outlet from the chamber was to the north,
+and toward it the explorers ran hurriedly, and
+passed along the contracted path, which soon turned
+to the left. After following its many windings, and
+scrambling over the broken and rocky floor, they saw
+ahead a streak of daylight, which gladdened the
+hearts of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah! they have gone," exclaimed John, as he
+emerged, and glanced across the ravine, and along
+the walls which extended up from the shore of a
+little stream below. "They have gone to the north,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_119" id="p_119" href="#p_119">p. 119</a></span>
+and have, probably, tried to seek safety in the other
+cave."</p>
+
+<p>"How are we going to get back?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think there will be any trouble in that?"
+asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall have to go clear over the mountain for
+that, I'm afraid."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 362px;">
+<a id="illus-122" name="illus-122" />
+<a href="#p_118">
+<img src="images/illus-122-fig9.png" width="362" height="322"
+alt="Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island" title="Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 9. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Cave</span> <span class="u">on</span> <span class="u">Rescue</span> <span class="u">Island</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"We are not far from the entrance," said John,
+"and if we intend to catch up with the Korinos, we
+must not delay for a moment."</p>
+
+<p>The party made a hurried trip around the hill, and
+the Chief was surprised to learn that there was another
+entrance, or an outlet to the cave on the north<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_120" id="p_120" href="#p_120">p. 120</a></span>ern
+side. None of his warriors was aware of this,
+however.</p>
+
+<p>John was now in a quandary. He was exceedingly
+anxious to secure the Korinos, but at the same time
+there was some things in the appearance of the cave
+that he wished to investigate. This was confided to
+Uraso and Muro, and the latter suggested that he
+and Uraso would undertake to follow the fleeing
+men, and return to the village, while John and the
+boys made the desired investigation.</p>
+
+<p>This was readily assented to, and they at once
+made their way across the hill, while John informed
+the Chief of the action which they had decided to
+take. One of the principal men of the village, in
+whom the Chief had confidence, and who knew the
+location of the upper caves, accompanied Uraso and
+Muro.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief, and those with him returned to the
+village, while John remained behind under the pretense
+that he wished to stay at the cave entrance
+until they returned from the pursuit after the Korinos.</p>
+
+<p>The boys first secured the flash lights which the
+two chiefs had brought, and when all had departed
+the boys and John entered the cave and marched
+directly to the location of their interior home.</p>
+
+<p>Every part of the habitation was well investigated.
+Almost every kind of tool and implement
+was found here in profusion, but singularly, none
+of them appeared to be used. Several flint lock
+guns, all rusted, and with decayed stocks, were
+among the articles discovered, but the Korinos had
+not used them.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_121" id="p_121" href="#p_121">p. 121</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The inevitable copper vessels, entirely unlike those
+of modern manufacture, were the first things to
+claim the attention of the boys, as they recalled similar
+articles found in the caves thitherto investigated
+by them.</p>
+
+<p>"This begins to look as though we are to have
+the same experience we had at the cave at the Cataract,"
+said George. "These vessels, no doubt,
+were brought here by the buccaneers, and I'll be
+surprised if we don't find a few more of their belongings
+somewhere in this place."</p>
+
+<p>After all the recesses in this vicinity had been
+investigated they scanned the side walls to the right,
+carefully going into the little recesses which were
+found all along the jagged sides.</p>
+
+<p>A hundred feet south of the living part of the
+cave they came, unexpectedly upon a large extension,
+not noticed before in their pursuit of the Korinos.
+The chamber extended in a southerly direction,
+and narrowed at the extreme opposite end.</p>
+
+<p>"This has the appearance of leading to another
+outlet, which would take us to the southern side of
+the hill. It would be remarkable, indeed, if such
+should be the case," said John, as he eagerly pressed
+forward, until they had passed four chambers.</p>
+
+<p>The walls were coming closer and closer, until
+there was now barely room for them to pass through,
+but they went in unhesitatingly, John in the lead.
+The passage was not straight, so that the light did
+not aid much in looking ahead, but suddenly the
+flash threw a beam ahead, which showed that they
+were at the entrance of a chamber.</p>
+
+<p>John stopped and directed the search light to all<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_122" id="p_122" href="#p_122">p. 122</a></span>
+parts of the cavern. It appeared to be nearly round,
+with a perfectly smooth floor. It was unoccupied,
+but in the exact center of the chamber was a raised
+object, like a mound.</p>
+
+<p>Throughout the entire cave could be found the
+calcareous deposit so common in caves formed in
+limestone rocks, and the stalactite hangings on the
+ceilings and walls, and the stalagmites on the floors
+made the scene a weird one.</p>
+
+<p>John glanced upwardly to view the ceiling, above
+the mound, and said: "That does not seem to be
+a natural formation. Let us examine it first."</p>
+
+<p>With the small pick which John always carried,
+and by means of which he was always careful to
+examine rocks and geological formations, while on
+these tours, the top parts of the stalagmites were
+chipped off. This was an exceedingly simple matter,
+since they are generally soft.</p>
+
+<p>After the top layer was removed, the part beneath
+readily yielded, but before they had an opportunity
+to dig into it very deeply the pick struck
+something which gave forth a metallic sound. John
+stopped as though paralyzed.</p>
+
+<p>The pick was again driven in. Again the plain
+contact with some hard substance. The digging was
+now feverish, and when the broken parts were
+cleared away, a small metallic box, about twelve
+inches square across the top, and about ten inches
+deep, was exposed to view.</p>
+
+<p>The dent made by the pick was clearly visible, and
+the fresh mark showed that the metal was red.</p>
+
+<p>"It is copper!" said John.</p>
+
+<p>Every part of the material around the box was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_123" id="p_123" href="#p_123">p. 123</a></span>
+removed, and this enabled them to remove it from
+its resting place. John grasped it and securing a
+good hold, finally raised it.</p>
+
+<p>"No, it is not any heavier than I thought it would
+he," he remarked as he lay it down.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you expect to find this?" asked George in
+amazement.</p>
+
+<p>"No; this is a surprise to me as it is to you."</p>
+
+<p>"Then why did you make that remark?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because I believe that this box contains treasure
+of untold value. I should have been surprised if
+it weighed very much."</p>
+
+<p>"Could it not have contained treasure if it had
+been heavy?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John laughed, a peculiar exultant chuckle, as he
+responded: "Not the kind of treasure I have had
+in contemplation."</p>
+
+<p>The box was turned over and over. There was
+not the sign of any lid, or crack which showed the
+cover or means of opening it. "We must take this
+out and open it at our leisure," remarked John, "but
+before doing so it would be well to examine the
+other outlets to this chamber, if it has any."</p>
+
+<p>The chamber was found, on measurement, to be
+thirty feet in diameter, and the vaulted ceiling fully
+thirty feet high, singularly uniform in the domed
+formation, and not rough or jagged like the ceiling
+of the other chamber which they had just left.</p>
+
+<p>The walls were absolutely solid on all sides, the
+only entrance being by way of the narrow little passageway
+through which they had come. Harry
+picked up the box, and swung it up to his shoulder,
+and, John leading the way, they filed out and passed<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_124" id="p_124" href="#p_124">p. 124</a></span>
+through the chamber, quickly making their way to
+the opening through which they first entered the
+cave.</p>
+
+<p>Within an hour they were back in the village, and
+found Muro there awaiting their arrival. "We
+have found their trail, and they have not gone to
+the upper cave. They are heading straight for the
+tribe in the northern end of the island."</p>
+
+<p>"I am surprised at that," said John. "We must
+consult the Chief about this," and without another
+word, he hurriedly went over to the Chief, who was
+as much astounded as John could be at the peculiar
+significance of their actions.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p  class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_125" id="p_125" href="#p_125">p. 125</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2>
+
+<h3>THE TRIBE TO THE NORTH</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>Instead</span> of conveying the copper box to the village
+it was carried to the landing place and taken
+to the vessel, where it could be examined later, when
+they had more time. It was now of more importance
+to keep in touch with Muro and Uraso, the
+former of whom had gone to the north as soon as
+he had given the report mentioned in the last chapter.</p>
+
+<p>On the return to the village they discussed the
+affairs of the previous day, which John had abstained
+from mentioning.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it that really makes the people act that
+way when they are hypnotized!" asked George. "I
+have heard it said that there isn't any truth in mesmerism."</p>
+
+<p>"Mesmerism is the old term used to designate certain
+phenomena, which, originally, was supposed to
+be a force that emanated from the mesmerist. It
+is now known that hypnotism may be regarded as
+artificial catalepsy."</p>
+
+<p>"But what is catalepsy?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is an affection produced by hysteria, during
+which the patient's body becomes rigid. It is
+claimed by some that somnambulism is one phase of
+the hypnotic condition."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_126" id="p_126" href="#p_126">p. 126</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"But in what way do your motions act on the one
+who is being hypnotized?"</p>
+
+<p>"The motions have nothing whatever to do with
+producing the condition. That is for effect, merely.
+Those who are able to bring about a mesmeric condition,
+try to concentrate the mind on some particular
+thing, and by making gentle motions, or
+passes, this is more forcibly impressed on them."</p>
+
+<p>"What was the object of Uraso telling them that
+the White Man's death was a terrible one, and trying
+to frighten them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Merely to make them concentrate their minds on
+one thing alone. Terror, or great fear, is one of
+the things which tends to a cataleptic condition.
+Great excitement, and sometimes excessive joy, have
+been known to do the same thing."</p>
+
+<p>"Then the object is merely to bring the mind under
+the control of the operator?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; what was originally considered as a power
+flowing from the hypnotist, is nothing more than his
+mental action or control which prevents the subject
+from exercising his own volition."</p>
+
+<p>A few hours after they returned to the village
+Uraso and Muro returned, with the information that
+the Korinos were now within the territory of the
+tribe to the north, and they wisely concluded it would
+not be good policy to pursue them further, and their
+prudence was commended by John.</p>
+
+<p>The natives were supremely happy in displaying
+their gifts, and the Chief, while much annoyed at
+the escape of the Korinos, was content to be relieved
+of their presence, when, after numerous conversa<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_127" id="p_127" href="#p_127">p. 127</a></span>tions
+with John, he realized that they were of no use
+to him and his people.</p>
+
+<p>John announced that he intended to visit the tribe
+to the north, and purposed starting the following
+day. The Chief advised him to take with him all
+the warriors in the village, because he felt sure they
+would have a hostile reception.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems to me," replied John, "that would be
+the wrong thing to do. I do not wish him to think
+that my mission is a warlike one, and a large force
+will be in the nature of an invasion of his territory."</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps you are right; but we have found him
+a difficult Chief to deal with. He is not like a man.
+He cannot stand up straight, as we do, and he kills
+and eats all who fall into his hands."</p>
+
+<p>This information was regarded by John as one of
+the imagination, purely, so it did not weigh heavily on
+his mind. What seemed to impress him most was
+the fate of the poor fellows who had voluntarily
+sought the protection of the cannibal Chief.</p>
+
+<p>"I would like to have your opinion as to the course
+which the Chief will take when the Korinos fall into
+his hands?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief mused for a while, and then said:
+"They have no Korinos and do not believe in them,
+but they may tell the Chief that we tried to offer
+them as sacrifices, and he may use them with his
+people to stir up feelings of revenge against us."</p>
+
+<p>"But," replied John, "the captives you took, and
+who have escaped may tell him of our treatment of
+them and this may work in our favor."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not think so," he replied. "We have had<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_128" id="p_128" href="#p_128">p. 128</a></span>
+many instances where they have refused to make
+friends with us, and for that reason we always had
+war."</p>
+
+<p>"But have you not often sacrificed their people
+when you have taken them in your wars?"</p>
+
+<p>"We have always done so."</p>
+
+<p>"Have any of your captives ever returned to
+them?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"And have they always killed and eaten your people
+when they captured them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and none has ever returned to us. The
+Korinos would not let us keep the captives, but said
+that the Great Spirit told them they must be sacrificed."</p>
+
+<p>The foregoing information was sufficient to convince
+John of one thing, namely, that it was really
+the spirit of the Korinos which kept up the tribal
+warfare, at least so far as one end of the conflict was
+concerned.</p>
+
+<p>In spite of all the arguments advanced by the
+Chief, John was determined to make the trip with
+his own people, and thus avoid any feeling on the
+part of the tribe, against their present friend.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning John called Stut, and advised him
+to wait until the following day, when he should pull
+up anchor and proceed to the north for a distance
+not exceeding twenty miles, and then, seeking a safe
+anchorage, to await news from him.</p>
+
+<p>With forty of his own trusted men, together with
+Uraso and Muro, they set out on the march to the
+north, cheered by the people of the village, who
+came out to witness their departure. The old man<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_129" id="p_129" href="#p_129">p. 129</a></span>
+who had been rescued, was still too weak to accompany
+them, so he was taken to the vessel, where he
+could receive the best of care and attention.</p>
+
+<p>In order not to be out of touch with the sea, John
+decided to follow the hills along the eastern side of
+the island, and this course was selected because the
+people to which they were going, unlike those at the
+southern portion of the island, lived in the mountainous
+region, as heretofore stated, and the probability
+of meeting them would be much better than if
+they had followed the level plateau.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 346px;">
+<a id="illus-132" name="illus-132" />
+<a href="#p_130">
+<img src="images/illus-132-fig10.png" width="346" height="211"
+alt="Fig. 10. Cinnamon" title="Fig. 10. Cinnamon" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 10. <span class="u">Cinnamon</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>In the march the boys, as well as John, were ever
+on the alert to discover the possibilities of the island,
+so far as the natural products were concerned.</p>
+
+<p>"Something smells awfully sweet around here,"
+said George, as they were tramping along a beautifully-wooded
+crest.</p>
+
+<p>"I think it must come from the trees that have the
+beautiful pale blue flowers. Wait until I get a
+branch."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_130" id="p_130" href="#p_130">p. 130</a></span></p>
+
+<p>One of the men was quick to carry out Harry's
+wish. John was immensely pleased at the interest
+which the boys exhibited. "What does it smell like?"
+he inquired.</p>
+
+<p>"Something like cloves and cinnamon, both," answered
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"Peel off the bark and taste it."</p>
+
+<p>"It is just like cinnamon."</p>
+
+<p>"That is correct. It is the real cinnamon tree.
+It is the cassia of the Bible, one of the spices so frequently
+referred to in Scripture. The bark only is
+used, but the species which have fruit, are gathered
+and oil expressed from them, which is called <i>cinnamon
+suet</i>."</p>
+
+<p>Advancing, the surface became more rugged.
+They had to cross numerous gullies, and broken portions,
+and frequently jagged rocks would show themselves.
+Evidently when the island was raised up
+from the sea the rocks were forced through, and the
+climate in time disintegrated them, and formed a soil.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think we shall find any minerals here?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"If we are to judge from our experiences on Wonder
+Island, where there is almost exactly the same
+formation, we may reasonably expect to find copper
+and also iron here."</p>
+
+<p>"While Harry and I were over at the bluff with
+Uraso, we saw something like green drippings, from
+the walls."</p>
+
+<p>"That is, undoubtedly, copper,&mdash;that is the sulphate
+form, in which it is usually found."</p>
+
+<p>"I was amused at Laleo (the native guide), who
+told Uraso this morning that our mission would be<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_131" id="p_131" href="#p_131">p. 131</a></span>
+successful, and when he was asked why, answered,
+that the first thing they saw was three black birds.
+How superstitious these people are."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think they are any more so than civilized
+people?" answered John. "It is curious how the
+number three runs through all their ideas. In certain
+parts of England they have a great many omens,
+and one of them is that if the traveler, starting on a
+journey, meets three magpies, it means success; if
+two appears, it is a sign of marriage; and four unexpected
+good news."</p>
+
+<p>"I recall that it is considered lucky for sun to
+shine on a bride," added Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"The other part of that couplet is 'rain on a
+corpse,'" remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>"I never knew it was lucky for the corpse to be
+rained on," responded Harry, in a questioning tone.</p>
+
+<p>John laughed immoderately, as he answered:
+"Well, it might not be lucky for the corpse. But
+there are numerous lucky and unlucky signs that no
+one can account for, prevalent in our own country,
+such as putting on stockings wrong side out, and
+finding a horseshoe."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course, they are both fortunate signs," said
+George, smiling at the thought.</p>
+
+<p>"In Scotland, among those who are the most matter
+of fact people in the world, signs are very common.
+It is a bad omen with them to stumble over a
+threshold, or to step over green or red, or to sneeze
+while making up a bed."</p>
+
+<p>"After all, we are not so much ahead of the savages,
+are we?" mused George.</p>
+
+<p>During the march that day there was nothing<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_132" id="p_132" href="#p_132">p. 132</a></span>
+specially worthy of note. The animals they met
+were few and small, and it did not appear that there
+were any which merited mentioning, so the boys
+gave up the idea of meeting any adventure in that
+line.</p>
+
+<p>Shortly after four in the afternoon they began
+to seek out some good camping place. Laleo informed
+Uraso that they had now passed into the territory
+claimed by the northern tribe, and the desirability
+of caution was necessary.</p>
+
+<p>A rocky shelter, only a short distance above a running
+brook below, was found suitable, and there the
+halt was made for the night. Early in the morning
+they were awakened by Muro, with the welcome intelligence
+that the <i>Pioneer</i> was sighted several miles
+to the north, where she lay at anchor.</p>
+
+<p>At the suggestion of John the boys went to the
+headland, a mile to the east, and there hoisted a signal
+flag, which was observed by the vessel, and the
+return signal given, this being indicated by four
+circular sweeps of the flag.</p>
+
+<p>Waving the flag twice to the right, and twice to
+the left indicated that they were to remain there until
+further advised.</p>
+
+<p>After a good breakfast the march was resumed,
+leading further to the west to avoid the rugged hills
+near the sea. Either Uraso or Muro was constantly
+in the lead, always accompanied by one of the men
+who, in case of necessity, might be sent back to furnish
+John the reports of his observations.</p>
+
+<p>Before noon the messenger came in with the welcome
+information that the first of the natives had
+been noticed, not far to the north. Muro, who was in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_133" id="p_133" href="#p_133">p. 133</a></span>
+the lead, awaited the arrival of John and the boys.</p>
+
+<p>Together they went forward, the men remaining
+in the camp. A few men could thus move through
+the brush with less likelihood of observation, than a
+large number, which was the principal reason for
+this mode of procedure.</p>
+
+<p>After another mile of cautious movement, a runner
+was sent back with the order to bring all of them
+forward. Away in the distance the village was
+sighted, George's field glasses now being brought
+into play. The huts could be seen plainly along
+the mountain side, and scattered about in profusion
+amid a plentiful supply of trees.</p>
+
+<p>In some respects, viewed from a distance, the
+scene did not look at all primitive, and were it not
+for the crude character of the houses it might have
+been taken for a typical modern town or village.</p>
+
+<p>Only one hut had been passed, thus far. It was
+not at all crudely built, and while it had been left to
+decay, it showed that the owner had some ideas of
+comfort, and an eye to convenience, as it was located
+by the side of a spring. On one side of the cottage
+was a weed-grown garden, and some fine specimens
+of taro as well as wild potatoes were in evidence.</p>
+
+<p>Earthenware cooking utensils were discovered,
+which added to the interest of the place, but no other
+furniture was found to show how the people lived.
+It might have been deserted for a year or more.</p>
+
+<p>Ascending the second small hill, they were startled
+to find themselves face to face with a half dozen
+of the natives, who were frightfully alarmed at the
+appearance of the visitors, for they set up a shout
+and ran like deer toward the village.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_134" id="p_134" href="#p_134">p. 134</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John kept on at the head of his force, and while
+the commotion in the village, not a half mile distant,
+was plainly visible, he did not halt, until he saw a
+curious crowd surrounding a short individual, who
+stood apart from those around him.</p>
+
+<p>"That is the Chief," said Laleo. "It is said he
+is a terrible man, and unlike all others," thus repeating
+what the Chief had told John.</p>
+
+<p>As he made no attempt to come forward or indicate
+what his wishes were, John directed the men
+to follow him, fifty feet in his rear, and he went
+on until within two hundred feet of the motley crowd,
+the people in the meantime making no sign of resistance,
+nor did they object to the advance.</p>
+
+<p>When John stopped, the curious figure, who was
+designated as the Chief, moved forward toward John
+without a bit of hesitation, and the boys were simply
+dumbfounded at his singular appearance, and at the
+gait he assumed.</p>
+
+<p>A word picture of him would not be amiss. He
+was a hunchback, with an extraordinary lump on his
+back, the arms much too long for his body, and
+crooked, distorted legs. The head, however, was
+massive, and covered with a heavy beard, which
+seemed to grow close up to the eyes, giving him a
+fierce appearance, because his head was covered with
+a thick coating of long gray, or sandy hair, that
+swung around the darker beard, as he shambled
+along.</p>
+
+<p>As he neared John his bright and staring eyes
+were the first thing noticed. When he came across
+the intervening space, his face was stern, and un<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_135" id="p_135" href="#p_135">p. 135</a></span>forbidding,
+but as he neared John it relaxed, and
+he began to smile.</p>
+
+<p>John stepped forward, and extended his hand. "I
+am glad to meet you," said John.</p>
+
+<p>The man looked at John for a moment, and then
+tried to mumble something, that the boys could not
+understand. After a few attempts he fairly shrieked
+out: "How are you?"</p>
+
+<p>This was certainly a startling thing, because the
+voice and the intonation were perfect. John opened
+his jacket and brought out a miniature American
+flag, which was unrolled, and the moment the strange
+being caught sight of it he seized it and pressing it to
+his lips, kissed it fervently.</p>
+
+<p>"I am an American," he finally struggled to utter.
+"I am a white man, and you are the first white man
+I have seen for fifty years. You are welcome to our
+home and village."</p>
+
+<p>The boys could not credit their senses. How did
+this poor specimen of the white race become the
+powerful Chief of a tribe of savage cannibals?</p>
+
+<p>John looked at him for a moment in astonishment,
+as he asked: "How long have you been Chief of the
+people here?"</p>
+
+<p>"About forty-five years. They are good people
+too."</p>
+
+<p>"We heard you were cannibals," remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment he scowled, and then his face brightened
+up. "Yes; I know my neighbors to the south
+have always believed that to be so, but they have
+heard such tales from their witch doctors, such as we
+used to have, but it is not true."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_136" id="p_136" href="#p_136">p. 136</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"You mean the Korinos?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, those who left you two days ago, and have
+come to me for protection," and he smiled as he said
+this.</p>
+
+<p>"I tried to get them, but they eluded us," added
+John, by way of information.</p>
+
+<p>"You must pardon me, but it is still a little difficult
+for me to form sentences. It is so long since I
+have talked to any one in my native tongue. But
+I am impolite. Bring your people into the village,
+and let us entertain you. I do so want to hear about
+the great world and what it is now like."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief turned to his people and told them that
+the White Chief was from his own tribe, and that he
+came from a far-away country, on a visit to him, and
+that they must treat the people as his own.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing more was needed to make them welcome.
+George suggested to John that Stut on the <i>Pioneer</i>
+should be notified, but before they had time to carry
+out the order a number of the villagers came rushing
+through the village and sought out the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>The latter turned to John and said: "My people
+tell me that there is a large ship here."</p>
+
+<p>"It is the vessel we came in," answered John,
+"and we were about to send a messenger to tell them
+to anchor near the village."</p>
+
+<p>"I am so happy to know this," said the Chief. "I
+want to see the ship, because it is the first time that
+any one has stopped at our shores. Some years ago
+we found some strange things that floated ashore
+from a wrecked vessel, and I want to show them to
+you, because I cannot understand what some of the
+things could be used for."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_137" id="p_137" href="#p_137">p. 137</a></span></p>
+
+<p>They were led through the principal street of the
+town. It was clean and well kept; the huts were far
+better than those in the village they had left, and the
+natives were, apparently, happy and contented.</p>
+
+<p>As they marched along George was the first to notice
+a tall individual, who, with several others, were
+edging away from the visitors.</p>
+
+<p>"There they are!" he cried out. John turned to
+inquire, when Harry commenced laughing, as he
+added: "Here are the Korinos, John!"</p>
+
+<p>The latter looked in the direction indicated, and
+laughed when he saw their discomfiture. The Chief
+was hurriedly informed of the situation, and he
+laughed heartily, as he ordered one of his men to
+bring in the fugitives.</p>
+
+<p>They were ushered in, and Uraso told them that
+they were friends and not enemies, and that the
+White Chief tried to secure them so that their own
+Chief would not harm them. It was a great relief,
+unquestionably, and their actions showed it. John
+then told them, that he wanted to have a talk with
+them, and that he would assure them of their safety.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_138" id="p_138" href="#p_138">p. 138</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2>
+
+<h3>THE HUNCHBACK CHIEF</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>The</span> White Chief's house was built on a plan
+which was a vast improvement over anything found
+on the two islands. True, it was nothing but an assemblage
+of rooms, which surrounded an open court.
+The furnishings were crude, but it was evident that
+all the articles were such as had been taken from
+the wreckages on the shore.</p>
+
+<p>Goods not native made, were noticed, and even a
+photograph, on a tin plate, like the old style daguerreotypes,
+was observed by Harry. Three chairs, one
+with a broken rocker, formed part of the furnishings
+in the court. In one corner was a mass of articles,
+the case of a ship's chronometer, the horn of a phonograph,
+some tin tubes of different lengths, and other
+odds and ends, which could not be recognized.</p>
+
+<p>"I am anxious to hear your story," said John.
+"If you have no objection we should be glad to have
+you relate it."</p>
+
+<p>"It will give me pleasure to tell of my experiences,
+although it may not interest you; but before doing
+so you must partake of food, because I know what
+it means to travel through our country. Besides I
+have ordered it prepared, and it is now ready."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 385px;">
+<a id="illus-142" name="illus-142" />
+<a href="#p_122">
+<img src="images/illus-142.gif" width="385" height="572"
+alt="&quot;&#39;It is copper,&#39; said John&quot;"
+title="&quot;&#39;It is copper,&#39; said John&quot;" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption">&quot;<i>&#39;It is copper,&#39; said John</i>&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_122">See p. 122</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>"These two men I have with me," said John,
+pointing to Uraso and Muro, "are Chiefs of two<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_139" id="p_139" href="#p_139">p. 139</a></span>
+powerful tribes, who live on a neighboring island,
+and they are real friends I found there when these
+two boys and I were shipwrecked there several years
+ago."</p>
+
+<p>"I am, indeed, glad to welcome them. I see that
+they have adopted the white man's clothing."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and their people who are wonderfully interesting
+are engaged in farming, and manufacturing."</p>
+
+<p>Then John told him briefly the history of their
+experiences, and how the people on Wonder Island
+were working out their salvation.</p>
+
+<p>John's tale impressed him most forcefully. "You
+have made good use of your talents. Unfortunately,
+for me, and for the natives here, I was not able
+wholly to bring out the people from their low condition,
+as you will be able to understand more fully
+when the story is told." He said this sorrowfully,
+and with apparent regret.</p>
+
+<p>After the meal, he continued his narrative: "I
+was a poor boy, a native of the State of Massachusetts,
+and was bound to a whaler as a helper, when
+less than fifteen years of age. It was a hard life,
+as you may know. I had no education, and I learned
+the life of misery and sorrow when I should have
+been at school.</p>
+
+<p>"But during that and the second year I became
+hardened, and my unfortunate physical condition
+made me the butt of my companions, and one day,
+in a fit of resentment, I struck down one of my
+tormentors, while in the harbor of Bedford, after
+which I escaped and made my way to Boston.</p>
+
+<p>"There, the next day, I found employment on an<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_140" id="p_140" href="#p_140">p. 140</a></span>
+outgoing ship, that was in the China service, and two
+days later, I was gratified to learn that it would sail
+that night. I had a much easier berth, and now I
+found that among those men I was considered better
+than a mere brute, and I became acquainted with
+a young man who taught me to read.</p>
+
+<p>"This was such a delight to me that I could hardly
+wait until my daily duties were over, before the
+books were brought out, and by the time we put into
+Shanghai, I could read and write, as well as perform
+many examples in arithmetic.</p>
+
+<p>"I knew nothing of geography, or of any other of
+the necessary parts of education. Our outward trip
+was unexciting, but on the first return trip, we met
+one of the dangerous monsoons, and the ship was
+wrecked. One of my shipmates was the sole occupant
+of a spar, and he aided me in my attempt to
+grasp it, and together we floated about the great sea
+for several days, without a thing to eat or to drink,
+until I lost consciousness, and knew no more until I
+opened my eyes, and saw the vilest looking savages
+standing about me.</p>
+
+<p>"When I saw them they appeared like a horrid
+dream. I had read in one of the books about the
+terrible visions that men dream of, and when they
+tried to make me eat something, I began to feel that
+it was a reality.</p>
+
+<p>"But the men were naked, and I saw the bones
+of human beings about me, and everything had the
+appearance of a feast. I soon saw that they were
+cannibals, and as I had heard of their practices their
+faces grew more and more repulsive to me.</p>
+
+<p>"I recovered slowly, and now began the terror in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_141" id="p_141" href="#p_141">p. 141</a></span>
+my mind. Each day I expected would be my last.
+But day after day passed by, and I soon began to
+become reconciled to my fate. An incident soon
+changed the entire aspect of affairs for me. I had
+been treated with the utmost deference. I was furnished
+with an abundance of food, but I had previously
+learned that it was the custom of those people
+to fatten their victims, and this was not welcome
+knowledge.</p>
+
+<p>"I became desperate. One day, while they were
+bringing me the finest roasts, I rebelled, and taking a
+club, scattered the food, swinging the club at them
+and shouting defiance, because human nature began
+to rebel, and I could not stand the suspense any
+longer.</p>
+
+<p>"To my surprise they scattered, and fell on their
+faces. Among them was the head man, whom I had
+always regarded as the Chief. Finally he came up
+timidly, and fell on his knees before me. I was so
+astounded that I did not know what to do. I went to
+the Chief and raised him up, because I was in a
+quandary, and could not understand them.</p>
+
+<p>"This seemed to reassure him, and he told me to
+follow him. I had been here long enough to understand
+most of their jargon. I was surprised when
+he led me to his own hut, and brought out his daughter,
+who knelt before me. Then I began to understand.
+I was no longer the expected victim, but the
+prospective son-in-law. This was better than anticipating
+death daily.</p>
+
+<p>"I accepted the situation. The daughter became
+my wife. It was she who welcomed you when we
+came in. When her father died I became Chief, but<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_142" id="p_142" href="#p_142">p. 142</a></span>
+long before his death, I controlled the people, as I
+knew so much more, and had superior wisdom,
+judged by their standard, that they obeyed me in
+everything.</p>
+
+<p>"But much as I abhorred, and tried to prevent it,
+as I did on many occasions, they practiced their rites,
+and had their Korinos, the real offenders, who taught
+them the necessity of sacrifices.</p>
+
+<p>"But when I became Chief, I sternly refused to
+permit them to kill their captives, and cannibalism
+was practiced only by stealth. I succeeded in stamping
+out the practice only by putting the Korinos to
+death, and in shutting up their caves."</p>
+
+<p>The boys, as well as John were riveted to their
+seats during this entire recital, until he referred to
+the caves, when they relaxed, and indicated their
+pleasure and anxiety. That meant still further
+quests in that direction.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief noticed their movement, and continued:
+"I am tiring you, but permit me to add only a few
+things. I have endeavored to better the condition
+of these people, and have succeeded. To the south
+of us was a powerful tribe. My first care was to
+make ourselves secure against them.</p>
+
+<p>"Like my people they, too, were cannibals. They
+were ruled over by a Chief who was cruel, and whenever
+any of their people escaped I took them in and
+cared for them, and there are now many of those
+living with us who could not be induced to go back.
+For more than forty years no one has been killed
+and eaten by my people."</p>
+
+<p>"Your work here is certainly most commendable.
+There is nothing which needs apology. Under the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_143" id="p_143" href="#p_143">p. 143</a></span>
+circumstances you have done all that was possible,
+and to the best of your ability. No one can do
+more," was John's timely observation.</p>
+
+<p>"I thank you for the compliment. I owe everything
+to the few books which my comrade taught me
+to read. When I left the United States my heart was
+bitter toward all mankind. I could not see why I
+should have been treated in such a harsh manner
+among civilized people, but when I landed here and
+saw how much worse the conditions were, I began
+to reflect. It would have been an easy and a natural
+thing for me to be brutal to others, as they had been
+to me."</p>
+
+<p>"You have shown a noble spirit, and I shall try
+to help you in caring for your people. Our ship is
+here, and we have some things for you, as soon as
+they can be unloaded," rejoined John.</p>
+
+<p>During the afternoon communication was established
+with the <i>Pioneer</i>, and the natives were willing
+helpers in bringing up the packages, but it was too
+late to distribute them. Before leaving John said:
+"You have not told us your name."</p>
+
+<p>"I was christened Ephraim Wilmar."</p>
+
+<p>John seized him by the hands, as he said: "And
+was your father's name William?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Ephraim, as his great eyes grew still
+bigger. "Did you know him?"</p>
+
+<p>"I knew him well; he died about thirty years ago.
+He was my father's friend."</p>
+
+<p>This information established a bond of friendship
+between the two.</p>
+
+<p>"I have forgotten to take note of time, and I may
+be out a year or two in my reckoning," continued<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_144" id="p_144" href="#p_144">p. 144</a></span>
+Ephraim, "but according to the best information I
+have this must be the year 1911."</p>
+
+<p>"You are short one year; it is now 1912."</p>
+
+<p>"Then let me see! We sailed from China in
+January, 1860; and during that same month the ship
+went down. From that time to the present I have
+no idea of what has taken place."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you know nothing of the four years' war
+between the North and the South?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; I remember there was some trouble about
+the slaves, or something of that sort before we left
+China."</p>
+
+<p>"But there are no more slaves in the United
+States."</p>
+
+<p>"You surprise me! Then they were freed by the
+war?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and Cuba is also free, and is now a republic,
+and the Hawaiian Islands belong to the United
+States, as also do the Philippines."</p>
+
+<p>"That does not seem possible. Why, if I remember
+correctly Cuba and the Philippines belonged to
+Spain. When did the United States purchase
+them?"</p>
+
+<p>"We had a war with Spain, and we took the Spanish
+possessions, as well as Porto Rico. Manila was
+captured three days after war was declared."</p>
+
+<p>"Three days after war was declared! How could
+our fleet, which must have been half the way around
+the world, get the news that war had been declared
+in that time?"</p>
+
+<p>"The commander of our fleet at Hongkong, was
+notified by telegraph."</p>
+
+<p>"How could that be done without a telegraph line?<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_145" id="p_145" href="#p_145">p. 145</a></span>
+Over what part of the earth are the lines now running?"</p>
+
+<p>"Everywhere; but there are many running under
+the sea and are called <i>cable lines</i>."</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim looked at John for a moment, as though
+he doubted the meaning of the words just uttered,
+and then slowly inquired: "That must be a remarkable
+thing. I do not see how it would be possible to
+string wires under the sea."</p>
+
+<p>"They are encased in water tight coverings, and
+some of the lines are four thousand miles long. But
+nowadays we do not need wires for telegraphing."</p>
+
+<p>The deformed figure arose, and appeared to be
+agitated, as he said: "Do you mean to say that
+messages can be sent without wires?"</p>
+
+<p>"Stations for that purpose are now in operation
+all over the world."</p>
+
+<p>"That is as improbable to me as though you should
+tell me that it would be possible to talk over a wire,"
+he answered.</p>
+
+<p>"But we do talk over wires, and it is possible to
+talk over distances hundreds of miles apart, without
+wires even."</p>
+
+<p>He glanced at those about him, and shook his head.
+He appeared to hesitate about asking any more questions,
+and after shambling back and forth a dozen
+times, or more, he stopped at the pile of debris, and
+picked up a thick disk-like piece of metal, to one side
+of which was a short broken tube attached.</p>
+
+<p>"I have examined this many, many times. Perhaps
+you can tell me what it is?" and he handed it
+to John.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the disk of a phonograph."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_146" id="p_146" href="#p_146">p. 146</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"An instrument which will reproduce the human
+voice, or any noise, or the sound of music."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not understand what you mean. If I talk
+to it will it talk back to me?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; it is so arranged that one form of the instrument
+receives the sound of your voice, and impresses
+it on material in the form of a cylinder, or a
+disk, and if this cylinder or disk is put into another
+instrument, this little apparatus, which I hold in my
+hand will speak the same words you uttered."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 301px;">
+<a id="illus-152" name="illus-152" />
+<a href="#p_145">
+<img src="images/illus-152-fig11.png" width="301" height="180"
+alt="Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk" title="Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 11. <span class="u">Phonograph</span> <span class="u">Disk</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Then electricity must be a wonderful thing, to be
+able to be used by men to talk to each other all over
+the world, and even to preserve what they say."</p>
+
+<p>"But the phonograph is not an electrical apparatus.
+The disk, here, with the little stylus, or pointer
+on it, vibrates and gives forth the sound."</p>
+
+<p>"All this is most marvelous, and I would like to see
+some of those wonderful things," he exclaimed.</p>
+
+<p>"If you will come to the ship we will show you
+many of the things that electricity does, as we have
+a phonograph there, and we have a search light that<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_147" id="p_147" href="#p_147">p. 147</a></span>
+operates by electricity, and which enables us to see
+many miles," added Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I must see your ship, and I am ready to accompany
+you any time, and I want my people to see
+those things, as well."</p>
+
+<p>"But there are many other things that we now do
+with electricity. All street railways are now operated
+by it; many boats are run by that power; cooking
+is done by it, and its uses extend into almost
+everything that man touches," remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>"If this one branch of knowledge has improved so
+wonderfully within a space of fifty years, the progress
+in other directions must be very wonderful,
+indeed," he responded. "But you have told me so
+much, and I hardly know how I can grasp its meaning.
+I suppose things here in this part of the world
+must appear very crude to you?"</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_148" id="p_148" href="#p_148">p. 148</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE CHIEF'S FAMILY</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>Ephraim's</span> wife was not crude and uncouth, like
+most of the native women. It was evident from the
+care which she observed in the domestic arrangements,
+that Ephraim had a hand in shaping her
+course.</p>
+
+<p>The food was served with considerable care, and,
+in some degree with the formality observed in civilized
+homes. John was a careful observer of customs,
+and he was surprised to note that all the natives
+patterned after the habits established by their
+Chief.</p>
+
+<p>"I tried," said Ephraim, in answer to John's
+questions, "to better their condition, and to teach
+them how to prepare and eat their food, and we
+made vessels of pottery, which you will notice are
+found everywhere. They understood the art of
+weaving, in a very primitive way, which I also tried
+to improve. Only on three occasions did we take
+any toll from the sea, when the wreckage came
+ashore.</p>
+
+<p>"Of the articles which were thus recovered, I
+took only a fair share, and the others were impartially
+distributed to the people."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you ever have any trouble with the natives,
+or did they ever dispute your authority?" asked
+John.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_149" id="p_149" href="#p_149">p. 149</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Only once, many years ago. A man claiming to
+be the son of the Chief, gathered together a number
+of adherents, but my people rose against them, and
+killed the leaders, which I very much regretted.
+When I remonstrated with them for the severity of
+their course, they justified it by saying that I had
+been kind to them, and had made them better, and
+it was the very thing that taught me to feel that
+human beings, although savages, understand kind
+treatment. It made me a convert in my feelings
+against some of the white men who had treated me
+with such severity."</p>
+
+<p>During the day, after the packages had been removed
+from the ship the articles were taken from the
+packages and arranged in Ephraim's home. Articles
+of clothing were distributed to the Chief's family,
+and what pleased him more than anything else,
+were the cooking utensils, all of the newest ware,
+and in great variety, some of which were curiosities
+to him.</p>
+
+<p>He had four children, the eldest a young man about
+thirty years of age, who had a family of three children;
+the next, a strong, active native, about twenty-five;
+a medium-sized young woman, almost white, of
+about twenty, and the youngest a lad of seventeen,
+who was quickly attracted to the boys.</p>
+
+<p>These, together with their mother, undertook the
+task of distributing the gifts to the people. Articles
+of adornment were, of course, the most enticing to
+the natives, and John had anticipated this feeling
+in the selection of the gifts.</p>
+
+<p>After the feast of the good things, John broached
+the subject next to his heart, and that was to explore<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_150" id="p_150" href="#p_150">p. 150</a></span>
+the island, and particularly the caves. In referring
+to the matter he said:</p>
+
+<p>"I recognize that whatever treasure we may find
+in them belongs to you, and you are entitled to
+them."</p>
+
+<p>"But they are of no use to us," he responded. "I
+am not wise in the ways of the world, but I am sure
+that great wealth, in the way of gold and silver,
+would not make my people happy. I agree with you
+that employment, and trying to teach people to help
+and care for each other, is much more likely to make
+them happy, and besides, the treasures which you
+refer to could not be used by them to any advantage."</p>
+
+<p>"You have spoken wisely," answered John,
+"nevertheless, we have no need of the riches which
+we may find. My search is for a different sort of
+wealth."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not understand what could be of more advantage,
+or repay you better than gold and silver."</p>
+
+<p>"It is believed that many of these places contain
+the records of people who have lived here thousands
+of years ago. All over the world hidden treasures
+of that kind have been found, some of them which
+go to show that men lived on the earth hundreds
+of thousands of years."</p>
+
+<p>"You are much wiser than I am, and understand
+the reason for making such a search, but I do not see
+why that would be of any use to know those things."</p>
+
+<p>"A great man once said, 'Know thyself,' and another
+remarked, that the 'proper study of mankind
+is man.' To ascertain the origin of humanity, how
+man lived and acted, what were his motives and desires,
+his beliefs and his aspirations, and to know<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_151" id="p_151" href="#p_151">p. 151</a></span>
+how he has improved, are interesting questions to
+me."</p>
+
+<p>He mused at this statement for a long time, and
+then quietly said: "That may be so; it may make
+us greater and better men, and it may be gratifying
+to have that knowledge, but I have now arrived at
+that time of life where things appear differently from
+the way I used to look at them. Every year I begin
+to think less of myself, and more of those about me.</p>
+
+<p>"When my children grew up about me they were
+the only ones I cared for. They were the only things
+in the world that interested me. When my grandchildren
+came they were new inspirations to me,
+and my views toward others changed, and made me
+feel better inclined."</p>
+
+<p>"That shows, does it not, that as we grow older,
+and as the world increases in age, everything improves,
+our minds, the advancements in the arts,
+in the sciences, in inventions, and generally in the
+improvement of the human race? It is a part of the
+whole education which man in his improved condition
+is trying to instill, and it is human knowledge,
+and the desire to learn everything, that gives a stimulus
+to us."</p>
+
+<p>There was no more welcome intelligence than the
+news that on the following day they would visit the
+first cave in the northern hills, and that Ephraim
+would accompany them. The people in the village
+were delighted at the news that the ancient caves of
+the Korinos would be opened.</p>
+
+<p>The trip took on the nature of a pleasure expedition.
+Even the family of the Chief were insistent on
+going along, and the boys quickly became the friends<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_152" id="p_152" href="#p_152">p. 152</a></span>
+of Camma, the youngest son of Ephraim, and insisted
+that he should go back with them to Wonder Island
+on a visit when they returned.</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim assented to this most heartily. They
+showed Camma the workings of the revolver, and
+presented him with one of them. Then, when they
+went to the ship, he was presented with a camera,
+and an outfit for developing.</p>
+
+<p>When the boys brought back a small hand sewing
+machine, and gave it to Mene, young Camma's sister,
+the joy in that family was beyond all bounds. Ephraim
+stood before the little machine, as though paralyzed.
+It acted like a human being, only more perfectly,
+as its work showed.</p>
+
+<p>But now for the caves. Sufficient food was taken
+along to make the trip a comfortable one. The village
+in which Ephraim lived was nearly a half day's
+journey from the original site of the town that was
+occupied by the old Chief. He had founded the new
+site, near the sea, because of the exposed condition
+of the old village, and also on account of the unsanitary
+condition of the surroundings.</p>
+
+<p>The caves were near the old town, and it required
+nearly five hours to make the trip, but it was enjoyable,
+every step of the way. The three boys engaged
+in hunting, on the way, because the new toy
+in Camma's hands had to be put to use. Ephraim
+put no restraint on the jolly pranks of the boys.
+John was careful to tell him that Harry and George
+were not wild or reckless, and that Camma would find
+them healthy comrades.</p>
+
+<p>Shortly after noon, they were told that the first
+of the caves would be found in the hill toward the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_153" id="p_153" href="#p_153">p. 153</a></span>
+right, and that the work of opening the principal
+one would not be undertaken until after luncheon.</p>
+
+<p>You may be sure that the boys made a hurried
+meal, and without waiting for the workers to come
+up, they grasped their weapons, and were soon half
+way up the hill, their guide, an old man, who knew
+the location of the caves, being with them, to show
+the way.</p>
+
+<p>The old man pointed to the rocky wall, and indicated
+where the opening was. Ephraim had closed
+it effectually, for they saw the evidence of the wall
+before them, where its comparatively smooth surface
+showed the difference between the natural wall
+and the rough rocks elsewhere.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is the other cave?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"It is on the other side," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>"And is that also closed?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; just as you see this."</p>
+
+<p>When the workers came up John directed them
+how to commence at the top, and take out a rock at a
+time. He smiled as he saw how well the work had
+been done, and Ephraim was gratified at the praise
+bestowed.</p>
+
+<p>"You certainly made a first class job of ashlar
+work," remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" asked Ephraim, in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"It is just this kind of masonry where the courses
+are irregular, and built up from the rock just as it
+came from the quarry."</p>
+
+<p>"I was not aware that there were different kinds
+of masonry. I thought that masonry was merely the
+placing together of stones so they would bind each
+other, and that is the way I had them do it."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_154" id="p_154" href="#p_154">p. 154</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Masonry is one of the oldest of the arts. It is
+really the foundation stone of architecture. The
+work you have done here happens to be of rock that
+has a rather smooth outline, that is, the stone broke
+off smooth, in the upper layers, but the large pieces
+near the bottom represent what is called rubble
+work."</p>
+
+<p>"This is very interesting to know," remarked
+Ephraim.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 355px;">
+<a id="illus-159" name="illus-159" />
+<a href="#p_153">
+<img src="images/illus-159-fig12.png" width="355" height="355"
+alt="Fig. 12. Types of Masonry" title="Fig. 12. Types of Masonry" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 12. <span class="u">Types</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Masonry</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 380px;">
+<a id="illus-160" name="illus-160" />
+<a href="#p_153">
+<img src="images/illus-160.png" width="380" height="573"
+ alt="The old man pointed to the rocky wall" title="The old man pointed to the rocky wall" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption">&quot;<i>The old man pointed to the rocky wall</i>&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_153">See p. 153</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>"I might add," continued John, "that when the
+courses are not regular it is called <i>broken</i> ashlar;
+when stones of less than one foot in breadth are used<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_155" id="p_155" href="#p_155">p. 155</a></span>
+it is called <i>small</i> ashlar; if the wall is backed by
+rubble, or inferior work it is called <i>bastard</i> ashlar.
+Then every kind of surface has a particular name,
+like the <i>random-tooled</i>, where the tool marks are
+shown in all directions; <i>rusticated</i> when only the
+joined edges are trimmed up; <i>prison-rustic</i> when it
+is pitted with deep holes; <i>herring-bone</i> when it
+is tooled in rows of opposite directions to each other;
+and <i>nigged</i> when finished up with a pointed hammer."</p>
+
+<p>Within an hour the stones were removed and put
+aside, and then Ephraim was treated to another surprise
+when he was made acquainted with the little
+electric flash lights which John exhibited. With
+these they entered the cave.</p>
+
+<p>All savage tribes have some sort of animals, as
+pets, and dogs are the most frequent. This was the
+case among these people. The dogs were with the
+party, and, as usual, ahead of the procession. Two
+of them went ahead on a scouting expedition, while
+John and the boys, with their flash lights followed.</p>
+
+<p>After they had gone, probably two hundred feet,
+there was a slight descent apparent in the floor of the
+cave, and ahead were the two dogs stretched out, lifeless.</p>
+
+<p>George ran ahead, as he noticed them, and John
+shouted out: "Do not touch them!"</p>
+
+<p>He stopped, and looked back, and then slowly
+walked up to the animals. John requested the party
+to halt, and he went forward, and put his foot on one
+of the dogs. "We must go back," he said.</p>
+
+<p>"Are they dead?" asked Harry, as he came forward.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_156" id="p_156" href="#p_156">p. 156</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Why not take them out and see what the trouble
+is?" inquired Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"No need for that," responded John. "I know
+what the trouble is."</p>
+
+<p>"Is there any danger in the cave?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim and the natives were now alarmed. It
+will be remembered that the universal belief among
+the natives is, that to go into these caves unbidden,
+means death. True, John had shown the fallacy of
+this on several occasions, but here was positive evidence
+that death had visited the dogs, and this might
+be the fate of those who attempted to go on.</p>
+
+<p>But the most alarming thing was the fact that John
+himself was the one who said there was danger, and
+that they must return. He did not venture to make
+an explanation until they were out of the cave.</p>
+
+<p>"There is carbonic acid in the cave, and as it is a
+deadly poison we cannot go in until it is removed."</p>
+
+<p>"That seems singular," responded George. "I
+went in as far as the dogs, and it didn't affect
+me."</p>
+
+<p>"But you did not reach down to touch the dog."</p>
+
+<p>"I saw you touch the dog, and it didn't seem to
+affect you."</p>
+
+<p>"I touched it with my feet and not with my hands."</p>
+
+<p>"I cannot see what difference that makes."</p>
+
+<p>"If you had touched the dog with your hands it
+would have brought your face down near the floor of
+the cave, and the gas is at the bottom of the cave
+only."</p>
+
+<p>"Why should it be there and not all over?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because it is much heavier than the air we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_157" id="p_157" href="#p_157">p. 157</a></span>
+breathe, and remains at the bottom, just like water.
+If you recall, this part is lower than the corridor
+through which we came, so that it could not run out.
+I have always observed that in all the other caves
+the floors within were higher than the entrance, and
+in such cases there is no liability of getting poisonous
+gases."</p>
+
+<p>"But how are we to make the investigation, under
+the circumstances?"</p>
+
+<p>"We must remove the gas."</p>
+
+<p>"How can that be done?"</p>
+
+<p>"Several ways are open; one would be to tap
+the floor and drain the gas out, which would be difficult
+to do with our resources. Another plan would
+be to force in a lot of air, so as to render the gas inert,
+or we might put in enough air to make it burn, and
+consume it."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, will it burn?"</p>
+
+<p>"Most assuredly; all it needs is enough air; but
+I am afraid this plan will not be a very safe one for
+us. If the floor of the cave is not at any place more
+than four feet below the entrance, we can go about
+safely, but in such case we must move about with the
+utmost caution, so as not to get too much of the
+gas in the system."</p>
+
+<p>"I am afraid it will be a difficult thing to go in unless
+we know absolutely where the low places are, or
+unless we survey the bottom of the cave," said
+George, brightening up at the idea.</p>
+
+<p>"What would happen if we threw a light into the
+bottom where the gas is?"</p>
+
+<p>"It would be extinguished instantly," remarked
+John.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_158" id="p_158" href="#p_158">p. 158</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That gives me an idea," asserted George.
+"Why not take a lamp, and carry it ahead of us,
+about three feet from the ground, and whenever that
+goes out, it will show there is gas there?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is a good observation; but I am afraid it
+would be very dangerous to do that."</p>
+
+<p>"Dangerous? I thought you said that the carbonic
+gas would put out the light?"</p>
+
+<p>"So it will; but if three parts of air should be
+added to one part of the gas it will make an explosive
+mixture,&mdash;that is, a mixture which will burn,
+as there has been enough oxygen added to support
+combustion."</p>
+
+<p>"In what way could enough air mix with the gas
+to make it burn?"</p>
+
+<p>"By stirring it; the movement of the body might
+make an admixture just above the surface of the
+gas, which would burn, and that might mean a catastrophe
+for us."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we are certainly stopped at this cave."</p>
+
+<p>"Not by any means," rejoined John, and he saw
+the boys' faces smiling again. "We must make a
+safety lamp."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean a lamp that will not explode the
+gas, although it has enough oxygen to 'support combustion,'
+as you say?"</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly. Have you ever heard of the Humphrey
+Davy lamp? Well, that was invented to meet
+the very condition found here."</p>
+
+<p>"Tell us about it."</p>
+
+<p>"In 1816 Davy discovered that a flame would not
+pass through a fine wire gauze, while conducting
+some experiments. It occurred to him that use<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_159" id="p_159" href="#p_159">p. 159</a></span>
+could be made of this discovery by surrounding the
+flame of a lamp with gauze, and the well-known lamp
+was built on that principle."</p>
+
+<p>"What I am curious to know is, that if it will not
+burn the gas, will it go out if it gets down in the
+gas?"</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 365px;">
+<a id="illus-166" name="illus-166" />
+<a href="#p_158">
+<img src="images/illus-166-fig13.png" width="365" height="297"
+alt="Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps" title="Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 13. <span class="u">Types</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Safety</span> <span class="u">Lamps</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Yes; because enough air, or oxygen must go
+through the mesh to support combustion of the flame
+itself. If it does not get enough it is smothered."</p>
+
+<p>"Then why not make a lamp of that kind?"</p>
+
+<p>"But where can we get enough gauze to make a
+cylinder big enough to go around a lamp?"</p>
+
+<p>John laughed at the serious predicament, which
+expressed itself in the faces of the boys. "That is
+true," he said; "but if we can get a small piece of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_160" id="p_160" href="#p_160">p. 160</a></span>
+tin, we can punch it full of fine holes, and probably
+make that answer."</p>
+
+<p>"We haven't anything in the way of tin large
+enough to go around a lamp, but here is a round piece,
+about three inches in diameter."</p>
+
+<p>"That will answer; punch that as full of holes as
+possible, and be sure they are very small."</p>
+
+<p>"What shall we use for a lamp?"</p>
+
+<p>John was already looking around, and soon spied
+a tree in the distance that looked like a small pine,
+and beneath that he found some cones, a dozen of
+which were picked up.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 365px;">
+<a id="illus-167" name="illus-167" />
+<a href="#p_161">
+<img src="images/illus-167-fig14.png" width="365" height="233"
+alt="Fig 14. How John made the Lamp" title="Fig 14. How John made the Lamp" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig 14. <span class="u">How</span> <span class="u">John</span> <span class="u">made</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Lamp</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"That is a pine tree, isn't it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; these cones will burn for some time."</p>
+
+<p>"But they will not make much of a light."</p>
+
+<p>"No; but we are not after a light, but they will
+do for testing purposes."</p>
+
+<p>The accompanying sketches show how it was made.
+A plate was used for a base, on which the burning<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_161" id="p_161" href="#p_161">p. 161</a></span>
+cone was placed. A half dozen twigs were then provided,
+and these were bent U-shaped, after being
+secured together at their middle portions, and the
+lower ends held by a cord, and this was then inverted,
+and a piece of thin cotton goods, of a single thickness,
+only was wound around the little frame, leaving an
+opening at the top, which was covered by the perforated
+tin disk.</p>
+
+<p>"There, now we have an article which provides
+for the admission of air, through the cotton goods,
+and the product of combustion can escape through
+the perforated opening at the top."</p>
+
+<p>The boys danced around with joy, when the cone
+was ignited, and a bale, which was simply a string,
+attached, so it could be carried conveniently.</p>
+
+<p>This time they went on, far beyond the place where
+the poor dogs lay. Occasionally John would lower
+the device, and when it descended too far, the knot
+would begin to smoke, and this was explained by the
+statement that as it went into the carbon gas, less and
+less air was supplied, which caused the flame to die
+down.</p>
+
+<p>The cave was similar to the others, being white
+from the lime deposits, but in all their wanderings
+they had never seen anything to compare with the
+beautiful hangings noted in the interior, particularly
+in the chambers, which they passed, one after the
+other, four of which were especially admired.</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim was intensely interested. He never had
+taken the trouble to visit any of these caverns, and
+was not disposed to take much stock in the many tales
+that had been related about the weird interiors.</p>
+
+<p>"I can now understand," he said, "why the natives<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_162" id="p_162" href="#p_162">p. 162</a></span>
+possessed such a fear of them. I have faced many
+perilous conditions, during my life here, but I confess
+if I had any faith in the superstitions about these
+places, they would have paralyzed me, now that I
+have seen their ghostly appearance."</p>
+
+<p>They suddenly emerged into a spacious chamber,
+so large that their voices seemed to reverberate.
+The flash lights were directed to all sides and to the
+immense vaulted and icicle-covered ceiling. John
+stood the lamp on the ground. It was free from the
+dangerous gas. The floor was fairly level, but it was
+covered with the broken hangings from the ceiling.</p>
+
+<p>"I see an outlet, directly opposite the one we came
+by," exclaimed George.</p>
+
+<p>The party hastened across the intervening space.
+They were traveling along the greatest length of the
+chamber. Midway between the two openings were
+two other side openings, and John stopped and exclaimed:
+"It is true! We have found it!"</p>
+
+<p>The boys had never seen John so agitated before.
+They pressed around and requested an explanation,
+but he fumbled in his pocket, and soon drew forth a
+carefully wrapped piece of brown paper.</p>
+
+<p>"This is parchment. It contains the sketch of the
+cave that has been the object of my search. I believe
+we are the only white people who have ever been
+privileged to enter it since the chart was made three
+centuries ago."</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim, as well as the boys, glanced about them.
+What was there to excite him? Other caves had the
+same sort of formation, the chambers and the openings:
+and while they wondered John drew a compass<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_163" id="p_163" href="#p_163">p. 163</a></span>
+from his pocket, and after holding it for a while,
+continued:</p>
+
+<p>"This chamber runs north and south as you see.
+We entered on the south side. It had two other outlets,
+one to the east, the other to the west."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it is the cross-shaped cave!" almost shouted
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered John, as he fixed his eyes on the
+boys. "In the year 1620, a Spanish navigator found
+a cave, of which this is a description, and within it
+were found the remains of hundreds of people."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_164" id="p_164" href="#p_164">p. 164</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE CHART AND THE CAVES</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>John</span> pored over the map, without going any
+further. Evidently something was passing in his
+mind, for occasionally his eyes left the paper and he
+looked about, as though undecided.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know any more about what they found?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; there are many incomplete portions belonging
+to the history, but it may be summed up by the
+statement, that they also found an immense amount
+of treasure, much of it in the form of solid gold.
+The adventurers were wild with joy at the discovery,
+and took steps to remove it.</p>
+
+<p>"Before proceeding far they found carvings and
+inscriptions, the latter of which were unintelligible
+to them, but they were very curious, judging from
+the few sketches which were made. But like many
+men of their class they began to quarrel over the
+treasure, and fought each other to the death."</p>
+
+<p>"That was just like the fellows who lived in the
+cave at the Cataract," suggested Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"No doubt that was over the treasure, too, there,
+as well as here. Four of the men escaped, only to
+be chased by savages, and after finally reaching their
+vessel were almost wrecked because they did not have
+enough properly to man the ship.</p>
+
+<p>"After reaching civilization, they engaged a num<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_165" id="p_165" href="#p_165">p. 165</a></span>ber
+of men, and returned. Some went in, among
+them two of the original discoverers. They did not
+return for some days, and another party went in,
+but they did not return.</p>
+
+<p>"Only one of the four remained, and when their
+companions did not return, the others took fright
+and returned to the vessel. Juan Guiterez was the
+name of the sole survivor of the first expedition.
+The adventurers who accompanied him declared that
+he and his company had lured them to the strange
+isle, in order to destroy them, and on the return to
+the first Spanish port, he was cast into prison, and
+remained a prisoner for nearly twenty years.</p>
+
+<p>"This chart, or what remains of it, or from which
+this copy was made was written by him while in
+prison, but the singular thing is, that while he was
+explicit in many things, he did not leave a clue as
+to the location of the island. Many of the things on
+it, as you see, are very faint."</p>
+
+<p>The boys now examined the chart for the first time.
+Harry started back in surprise, as he pointed to the
+chart, and looked up at John. "Why, there are the
+same marks we found on the skull at Wonder
+Island!" he exclaimed in great excitement.</p>
+
+<p>"Quite true! and do you now wonder why I have
+been so much interested to find the location? Chance
+has thrown this opportunity our way. It is true we
+might be mistaken, but the description fits."</p>
+
+<p>It would require pages to tell about what they
+found in the recesses of the cavern. Hundreds and
+hundreds of skeletons were discovered, and the most
+curious tablets and carvings in hieroglyphics were
+scattered in the adjoining chamber.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_166" id="p_166" href="#p_166">p. 166</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Peculiarly-formed tools, implements of warfare,
+also of metal, small slabs of uniform size, and with
+characters on both sides, which might have been the
+historical books of the singular people who lived here
+ages ago, were in profusion not only in the large
+chamber, but in the most unexpected places.</p>
+
+<p>To John it was a vast storehouse of archeological
+wealth. To the boys it was much more. There were
+still some things that John did not explain, and which
+they wanted to know.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you believe that the different parties went in
+and never came back again?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"I have no doubt but the account was true."</p>
+
+<p>"What became of them?"</p>
+
+<p>"They probably met the fate that almost overtook
+us when we first went in," was the answer.</p>
+
+<p>The parchment was correct in the main details, as
+to the records within the cave, but there were no
+treasure, nor could any trace be found of them. They
+spent several days in the search, but to no avail.
+The boys were not much disappointed, it may be said,
+but they were gratified to know that John had accomplished
+the one desire of his life, and they knew,
+also, that it would be a source of great joy to the
+Professor.</p>
+
+<p>It was found that the cave entrance at the opposite
+side of the hill was the northern outlet to the
+same set of caverns, and Ephraim did not know of
+any others that existed in the northern part, so that
+they did not feel it to be desirable to take up more
+time in this direction.</p>
+
+<p>They had now found two isles, besides their own
+loved island, and when they assembled that evening<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_167" id="p_167" href="#p_167">p. 167</a></span>
+in the cabin of the <i>Pioneer</i>, they had a most earnest
+conversation as to the results of their latest enterprise.</p>
+
+<p>"We have sought the treasures of the islands, and
+what have we accomplished?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"What have we accomplished? I have been thinking
+that to find the natives here, and to be able to
+help them, is a pretty big thing in itself," answered
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"That is true," he responded, "and the same thing
+might be said, also, about the wonderful products
+of the islands; they are certainly worth coming here
+for. I wonder what Blakely would say if he knew
+of all there is here, and the knack shown by the natives
+to handle the things?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am in sympathy with your views," said John.
+"Treasures, like gold and silver, are worth seeking
+for, but when you find that the earth is inviting people
+to till it, and there are people who, through ignorance,
+do not know how the earth can be utilized, it
+is a great privilege to be able to help them, and
+the recollection of what you have done will be the
+greatest treasure not only to you but to the poor
+people that have been benefited."</p>
+
+<p>"I think Ephraim's story is a wonderful one,"
+said George, "but he could not go far. His education
+was limited, but see what he has done with the
+little he knew."</p>
+
+<p>"It was curious, however, that the cannibals had
+fear for him. I cannot understand that," rejoined
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Savages are children only. They have the capacities
+of full grown men, but have never had the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_168" id="p_168" href="#p_168">p. 168</a></span>
+opportunities. Their superstitions lead them into
+singular forms of reasonings. With them the deformed
+are objects of curiosity, and generally, of
+reverence. Those mentally deficient are regarded as
+possessing a superior spirit."</p>
+
+<p>"I remember that the Professor told us so on one
+occasion, but it seems to be singular that they should
+get that view. How do you account for it?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is a trait, or, I may say, a belief which is
+not at, all uncommon among civilized people.
+Throughout Europe many men, who lived years ago,
+are reverenced as Saints, and, who, from the accounts
+given of them, were demented. Why, it is even
+claimed that there is but one step from the abnormally
+gifted to the insane person."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that really so regarded among learned men?"</p>
+
+<p>"It has been the subject of many remarkable books
+which have been written to show that genius and insanity
+are closely allied. Take, for instance, the
+case of Blind Tom, an ignorant negro, who, although
+he could not read, nor did he know a single note of
+music, was able, nevertheless, to play the most marvelous
+music, and repeat, at a single hearing, an entire
+musical score."</p>
+
+<p>"But such talents, as that, I have heard, is only in
+some particular direction. He was not able to do
+anything else," suggested George.</p>
+
+<p>"Quite true. But it is so with what is called genius.
+I once knew a learned minister, a leading professor
+in one of the colleges, who was absolutely devoid
+of any other phase of education, except theology.
+He could not master the first rudiments of mathematics,
+and knew no more of astronomy than a ten<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_169" id="p_169" href="#p_169">p. 169</a></span>
+year old boy, but he was supreme in his particular
+branch of knowledge."</p>
+
+<p>But the great question with John and the boys
+was the future. Two islands had been discovered.
+Some of the mysteries of the past three years had
+been solved, but others still remained; in fact, those
+which interested them the most, were still shrouded
+in a veil through which there was only the slightest
+glimpse.</p>
+
+<p>John felt that their first duty would be thoroughly
+to explore the island to the north and west of the
+village, and thus enable them to make a complete
+report when they returned to Wonder Island, and
+this course was finally decided upon.</p>
+
+<p>The spirit of John had now entered Ephraim. He
+had fully agreed to accompany them in the <i>Pioneer</i>,
+and learn of their great work on that island. He
+said that it was his duty to his children and to the
+natives who had stood by him so nobly, to provide
+for their future welfare.</p>
+
+<p>He was most active in arousing the people to an
+understanding of the mission of John and the boys.
+Within a day, all preparations were made for the
+journey through the island, and Ephraim was with
+them in order to learn all that might be necessary,
+so that when he returned he could advise the people.</p>
+
+<p>For more than a week they tramped through the
+attractive portions of the land, and then the day was
+set for departure.</p>
+
+<p>"I have been thinking of making a trip to your
+friends in the South," said John, as they were dining
+at Ephraim's home, the day before the date of sailing.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_170" id="p_170" href="#p_170">p. 170</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That would please me more than anything else,"
+replied Ephraim. "It occurs to me that is the first
+step toward peace and prosperity on the island."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we shall sail to their village, and from that
+place go to Venture Island, where we had our first
+adventures, stopping, on the way at Hutoton, where
+they have a criminal colony."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" inquired Ephraim. "A criminal
+colony?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said John. "On the large island to the
+south, which we discovered before we came here we
+found a singular condition of things. Near the
+southern end of the island we came into contact with
+a tribe ruled over by a Chief, named Beralsea, a powerful
+man; in fact, there is no law there except the
+will of the Chief."</p>
+
+<p>The boys were now laughing immoderately, and
+Ephraim was moved to smiles at their mirth. "It
+must have been very amusing, I have no doubt," he
+said.</p>
+
+<p>"We were thinking of the jolly time we had when
+Sutoto married the Chief's daughter," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall tell you all about it on our way there,"
+added Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I was about to say," continued John, as he also
+smiled at the reminiscence, that his views on theft
+were most peculiar. He did not regard it as a crime
+if the people stole from each other. But if they attempted
+to steal from him, or tried to deceive him,
+it was such a great crime, that the unfortunates were
+banished to a place called Hutoton, which, as he
+stated, meant the Place of Death.</p>
+
+<p>"We were informed that it was a terrible place,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_171" id="p_171" href="#p_171">p. 171</a></span>
+and when a man was sentenced it also meant a like
+sentence to all of his family, and that no one was
+ever known to return from that horrible prison
+home."</p>
+
+<p>"I have heard, but only vaguely, that there was
+such a place, but had no idea that it was so near
+to us. But did you verify the character of the
+place?"</p>
+
+<p>"We went there, and instead of finding a barren
+and uninviting spot, and misery and want, we saw
+a lovely village, and people so much more advanced
+than those in the village ruled over by the Chief, that
+we were amazed.</p>
+
+<p>"The ruler there treated us handsomely, and had
+even taken care in the most kindly manner, of a white
+man who had escaped the rigors of the sea some
+years before, and who was demented, or incapable,
+through paralysis, of recognizing those around him."</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim started as John said this. "A white
+man, did you say? How old was he? Where is he
+now?"</p>
+
+<p>"We sent him to Wonder Island where the Professor
+has taken care of him, no doubt," Harry interjected.</p>
+
+<p>"You appear agitated. Have I recalled anything
+that might give a clue to his identity?" queried John.</p>
+
+<p>"No; it could not be possible! It was merely a
+passing fancy. Strange, how things sometimes will
+affect you. No, I do not know that I can add anything
+to your knowledge concerning him." The subject
+was not again alluded to during that day.</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim and his family were taken aboard the
+<i>Pioneer</i>. Everything was marvelous to them. The<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_172" id="p_172" href="#p_172">p. 172</a></span>
+cabin with its complete furnishings, the musical instruments,
+the phonograph, the piano player, which
+acted like a wizard, because it gave out the sweet musical
+tones, as though it were a living thing, and then
+a moving picture screen, which was the last thing the
+boys installed before they left New York, made up
+a series of entertainments for the family that had no
+end of marvels for them.</p>
+
+<p>"To think of it; for fifty-two years this is the first
+time I have paced the decks of a vessel. It is the
+happiest day of my life." And Ephraim could
+scarcely keep the tears from coming. Happiness
+shows itself in that way with the strongest, not with
+the weakest. The strong man can stand the miseries
+and the sufferings much better and with a
+braver front than the weak; but excessive joy will
+break him down so that he manifests it more easily.</p>
+
+<p>John saw his emotion and sympathized with him.
+Taking him by the arm he led him to the cabin forward,
+and as they entered the cozy library, he pointed
+to the books. This was the end of Ephraim for that
+day.</p>
+
+<p>Without leaving the room he moved from case to
+case and scanned shelf after shelf, and when John,
+on one occasion came in, he heard him mutter: "Is
+there another place like this on earth?"</p>
+
+<p>Late that evening the <i>Pioneer</i> took down part of
+its sail as they approached land in the distance.</p>
+
+<p>"We are nearing Hutoton," shouted George.</p>
+
+<p>Stut ordered the whistle to blow, and before the
+landing was reached the shore was lined with the
+people. They soon recognized the visitors, and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_173" id="p_173" href="#p_173">p. 173</a></span>
+boats were prepared before the anchor finally
+dropped.</p>
+
+<p>The entire crew of the <i>Pioneer</i> went ashore, and
+Ephraim was curious to see the head man, and have
+a conversation about the manner in which the colony
+was conducted.</p>
+
+<p>The boys could not understand the change of plans.
+Why did they not stop at the southern part of the
+island, and visit the Malosos, who were supposed to
+be Ephraim's enemies?</p>
+
+<p>It was learned that John and Ephraim, after the
+vessel started, concluded it would be wiser to visit
+Hutoton first and get all the information possible
+from them concerning the time, condition, and circumstances
+of the casting ashore of the white man
+found there when John and his party made their
+visit.</p>
+
+<p>In explanation of their action, it may be well, also,
+to state that they still had on board of the <i>Pioneer</i>,
+the white man they had rescued or taken from the
+stockade in the Malosos village, and that there were
+certain things in his tale that seemed improbable to
+John.</p>
+
+<p>The visit to Hutoton might be able to clear up the
+mystery, and possibly establish the identity of the
+paralyzed man, and in that event it would, not be
+necessary to go directly to the Malosos village but
+await their return from Venture Island before visiting
+the village.</p>
+
+<p>While the old man was being taken from the vessel,
+George went to John and inquired: "Did he
+ever tell you his name?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_174" id="p_174" href="#p_174">p. 174</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes; he says it is Henry D. Retlaw."</p>
+
+<p>All noticed that he stole furtive glances about him
+as he was being conveyed to the village.</p>
+
+<p>"Were you ever here before?" asked John, as they
+neared the house of the magistrate.</p>
+
+<p>He shook his head vigorously, and answered
+"No!" with a vehemence that startled John.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_175" id="p_175" href="#p_175">p. 175</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2>
+
+<h3>RESCUE ISLAND</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>Orders</span> had gone out to prepare to receive the visitors
+in true Hutoton style, but, in truth, the people
+did not need any urging. The remembrance of the
+last visit, when the gifts were so judiciously distributed,
+was sufficient to assure a generous welcome.</p>
+
+<p>It was out of the question to leave that night, and
+John felt it to be a duty to cultivate their acquaintance,
+and confer with the chief magistrate about
+starting the people at work gathering the native
+products.</p>
+
+<p>John announced that within a month it was proposed
+to establish regular sailings between that port
+and Wonder Island, which would enable them to get
+supplies and ship their products each week. This
+intelligence was then imparted to the people, who
+received it with the greatest enthusiasm.</p>
+
+<p>"One of the objects of the present visit is to take
+you with us to Wonder Island," said John, addressing
+the leader, "so that you may learn what we are
+doing, and come back prepared to instruct your people."</p>
+
+<p>When this information was conveyed to him, he
+cast down his eyes, and said sorrowfully: "But I
+am a convict, like the others, and I have been con<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_176" id="p_176" href="#p_176">p. 176</a></span>demned
+to stay here. If I leave this place I disobey
+the law of the Chief."</p>
+
+<p>John smiled as he replied: "I have provided for
+all that. You will meet your Chief Beralsea in
+Unity, the Capital of Wonder Island. Hutoton is
+no longer the terrible place that the Chief pictured
+to us. He told me that your assistance was necessary
+to him and to the people in the colony."</p>
+
+<p>This information was received in gratitude, and
+his consent was thus readily obtained.</p>
+
+<p>After a night of feasting, preparations were made
+for the departure. Retlaw was brought to the place
+where the paralyzed man was discovered, and the
+leader Caramo accompanied them.</p>
+
+<p>The moment Caramo saw him he turned to John
+and said: "I have seen that face before. I am sure
+he accompanied another man when on one occasion
+a boat load came ashore a long way to the south of
+us."</p>
+
+<p>"How long ago was that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not more than three suns ago."</p>
+
+<p>It must be understood that <i>three</i> suns meant with
+these people, three years by our reckoning. When
+Retlaw was examined he denied that he had ever
+been on the island before, and, of course, there was
+no way to discredit his statements. After all, Caramo
+might be mistaken in identifying him, as they
+were some distance apart at the time the island was
+supposed to have been visited by Retlaw.</p>
+
+<p>At noon of the following day the <i>Pioneer</i> weighed
+anchor, and set sail for the southern port of the
+northern island, there to visit Chief Ta Babeda, of
+the Malolos.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_177" id="p_177" href="#p_177">p. 177</a></span></p>
+
+<p>While they were skimming the shore south of the
+village, George said: "There is one thing we have
+neglected. We have had so much to do lately that
+we haven't found time for it, but there is an opportunity
+now."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"We have no name for the island to which we are
+now going. We might consult Ephraim. It would
+be hardly fair to impose any sort of name on his
+country," suggested George, with a good humored
+laugh.</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim was delighted at the idea. "We must
+have a name, assuredly, but it never occurred to me
+before. The natives called it Rescudada; at any
+rate that is as near as I can recall the pronunciation
+of the word."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, that is almost like Rescue."</p>
+
+<p>"Why wouldn't that be a good name?" asked Ephraim.
+"There has been considerable rescue work
+here, and it is going on all the time."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the name for it!" exclaimed Harry, enthusiastically.</p>
+
+<p>"Suppose we notify General John and Skipper
+Stut that the Geographical Society has just named
+the island 'Rescue'?"</p>
+
+<p>This important function was attended to and a
+note made in the log that the island discovered in
+south latitude 41&deg; 37' 10", and west longitude 138&deg; 2' 56",
+by the steamship <i>Pioneer</i>, was formally named
+<i>Rescue</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Long before the village was reached the great fog
+horn of the <i>Pioneer</i> commenced to give the signal.
+The villagers knew what it meant, and the old Chief<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_178" id="p_178" href="#p_178">p. 178</a></span>
+himself was at the landing place to welcome the visitors.</p>
+
+<p>The boats were manned by the sailors, and the
+boys, together with John, Ephraim, and Caramo,
+were in the first boat. When Ta Babeda gazed at
+Ephraim, he was astounded. John had not informed
+him of the name of his visitor, but he continued
+to gaze at him in amazement.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that the old Chief was impressed
+with his appearance, so unlike anything he had ever
+before known in the form of a human being. When
+they arrived at the Chief's house, John awaited the
+proper time before making the introductions, and
+finally said:</p>
+
+<p>"It gives me pleasure to introduce to you, the
+greatest enemy you have. This is Rumisses, the
+Cannibal Chief of the Umbolos."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was startled beyond measure. True,
+he knew that John and his party had come into contact
+with his arch enemy, but this was certainly a
+thrilling way to bring them together.</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim walked forward and seized the Chief by
+the hand, and then pressed his nose against him.
+This was, of course, symbolic of friendship.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief unhesitatingly accepted the token, but
+he could not remove his eyes. Here was the man,
+so unlike all others, and the impression of superiority,
+undoubtedly, was also in his mind, but Ephraim
+quickly relieved him of his reflections, as he
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"Because I am so unlike you, is not due to any
+particular knowledge, or favor from the Great Spirit.
+I am a white man, like the Great Chief here, and was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_179" id="p_179" href="#p_179">p. 179</a></span>
+unfortunate to be cast among the natives in the north,
+and I have tried for many years to prevent the practicing
+of the sacrifices, and have succeeded."</p>
+
+<p>"But we were told that all the people you captured
+from us were sacrificed."</p>
+
+<p>"It is not true. They are all living with us in
+perfect happiness and contentment."</p>
+
+<p>"Then why is it that we have been so much deceived?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because the Korinos have not told you the truth.
+They did this because they knew no better."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; the White Chief has told us that they have
+deceived us, and I believe him. But I learn that my
+Korinos have gone to you for protection!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and I have shielded them, and they are now
+on board of the vessel in the harbor."</p>
+
+<p>This information brought back all the native resentment
+of the old Chief. "Then he has brought
+them back to me!" he exclaimed in great earnestness.</p>
+
+<p>"I believe he intends to do so, but it will not be
+until they go to Wonder Island, that marvelous
+place."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I am content."</p>
+
+<p>John heard the conversation, and soon turned it
+into another direction, when he informed the Chief
+that the Chief of Venture Island as well as the leader
+of the criminal colony, were to accompany them to
+Wonder Island, and that the company would be incomplete
+without him and his family.</p>
+
+<p>He looked at his visitors for some time, doubting
+in his mind the propriety of such a course, but the
+entreaties of Ephraim, and the urging of Muro and
+Uraso, were sufficient to decide the question, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_180" id="p_180" href="#p_180">p. 180</a></span>
+the only matter that now weighed on his mind was
+to determine who should accompany him in this wonderful
+voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Ta Babeda had never summoned up sufficient courage,
+while the ship was formerly in port, to board
+the vessel. His examination of the <i>Pioneer</i> was
+made from the shore. Now he would step into a
+new world.</p>
+
+<p>He little knew what wonders would be exhibited to
+him. The ship's band was the greatest thing he
+had ever known, and he never tired of its music.
+But when he saw the curious piano, the music box
+that acted as though it had life, and the other evidences
+of civilized arts, that were found in the cabin,
+he was content to make the best of it.</p>
+
+<p>Like all natives, as we have already stated, he
+was immoderately fond of eating, and the kitchen
+arrangements, where food was cooked without any
+fuel, interested him beyond everything else. He
+would sit at the entrance of the kitchen for minutes
+at a time.</p>
+
+<p>The push buttons, the snap switches for the electric
+lights and for the cooking apparatus, were some
+things which he could not understand. The little
+innocent wires meant nothing to him, nor could the
+boys, or even John, explain the phenomenon to him
+so he could understand it.</p>
+
+<p>The boys puzzled over this, as he was insistent
+upon an explanation. What finally happened, the
+very thing the boys tried to avoid in every way, came
+when he touched the two wires, and formed a short
+circuit through his hand.</p>
+
+<p>He emitted one yell, and bounded out through the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_181" id="p_181" href="#p_181">p. 181</a></span>
+door, and it was some time before he could be induced
+to make further investigations. His expressions
+were very humorous, particularly when he insisted
+that the wires were mad, and didn't like him,
+and that they tried to pull his arms out of his shoulders.</p>
+
+<p>Harry then took two of the wires and brought them
+together, and then pulled them apart. Each time
+this was done, a spark would flash. The object was
+to show that two wires were necessary to produce a
+circuit or a current.</p>
+
+<p>Eventually an inspiration seemed to strike him,
+as he exclaimed: "They are married! Yes, I see!"</p>
+
+<p>The boys laughed as they told John of the circumstance,
+and how utterly impossible it was to
+produce a current until a circuit was established.</p>
+
+<p>John threw himself back and roared at the recital
+of the story, as told by the boys. "I think his description
+is a pretty good one. Perhaps he was
+thinking of the family circle?" and John continued
+to laugh as the boys tried to grasp the full meaning
+of his little joke.</p>
+
+<p>But Ta Babeda was an apt pupil. He was far
+more acute than Beralsea, and there scarcely was an
+hour but he had one of the boys at his side trying to
+fathom some of the mysteries in the new world.
+This was in the nature of a picnic for the boys, who
+enjoyed his curious questions and his equally unexpected
+comments.</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim, too, was generally present, as well as
+Camma, his eldest son, the latter evincing remarkable
+knowledge for one who had never known of the
+wizardry that resides in wood and stones and iron.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_182" id="p_182" href="#p_182">p. 182</a></span></p>
+
+<p>To Ephraim this opportunity to open the wide
+world to his children must have been a heaven of
+delight, and he reveled in every hour and even regretted
+that nature demanded sleep. It seemed to
+be better awake and seeing and feeling. Two weeks
+prior to this he had merely existed; now he was a
+man again, and living.</p>
+
+<p>It was, indeed, a merry party on board of the
+noble ship. When the Chief, and those about him
+were told that the vessel was the creation of George
+and Harry, it was another occasion to marvel
+over.</p>
+
+<p>"Your boys can do the same thing, and make
+other things just as wonderful," said John, as they
+were commending and petting the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think so!" asked Ta Babeda, in great
+earnestness, and for the first time showing any curiosity
+or indicating any desire to give his children
+any advantages.</p>
+
+<p>John saw that the leaven was working, as he replied:
+"That is why I have been so anxious to have
+you and your children visit our city. Your wife
+and daughters will find as many surprising things to
+interest them as the boys will discover."</p>
+
+<p>The run from Rescue to Wonder Island, would
+occupy, ordinarily, about ten hours, of a complete
+day, and for that reason the start was made early
+in the morning. Unity was about eight miles from
+the sea, on a large stream, and it was desirable to
+make the run through the river by daylight.</p>
+
+<p>But shortly before noon a wind sprang up from
+the west, and it increased in intensity, so that shortly
+after the noon hour they were compelled to make a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_183" id="p_183" href="#p_183">p. 183</a></span>
+long tack to the south. This meant a night on board
+ship, and a stormy one at that.</p>
+
+<p>The wide, wide sea, without the sign of any land
+in sight was, indeed, a fascinating thing to the natives,
+and how they admired the native sailors with
+whom they readily fraternized. They watched
+every movement, the taking down of the sails, the
+changing of the angles of the great sheets, as they
+turned in their course, the handling of the tiller,
+and all the paraphernalia of sailing, for the <i>Pioneer</i>
+depended principally on her sailing capacity, and
+not on the small engine with which she was equipped.</p>
+
+<p>The boys explained to Camma, that upon their return
+to the island a much larger engine would be
+installed, so that they need not depend upon the
+sails thereafter, but would be able then to sail directly
+through the wind, instead of being blown back
+and forth, as was now the case.</p>
+
+<p>The wind did not abate until the morning was
+breaking, and then there was a welcome change in
+the direction that the storm was taking. Many of
+the natives were ill, and John had the satisfaction
+of administering the new and lately-discovered remedy,
+namely, Atropine.</p>
+
+<p>Shortly after ten o'clock the eastern end of Wonder
+Island was sighted. The great mountain range
+was visible, and the identical headland, where the
+skull with the inscription was found, could be discerned
+through the mild haze.</p>
+
+<p>There was immense curiosity on board the ship as
+it skirted along the shore. The Tuolo landing place
+was sighted, but they continued past it. Two hours
+afterward they could plainly see the dock which had<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_184" id="p_184" href="#p_184">p. 184</a></span>
+been built for the use of Uraso's people, and an hour
+later Muro was just as much interested to point out
+to Ephraim and Ta Babeda the landing station of
+his tribe.</p>
+
+<p>Immediately after luncheon, George, who was always
+on the alert, ran through the vessel, with his
+field glass in hand, and announced that the <i>Wonder</i>,
+the large steamship, which made trips to Chili, was
+coming up in the distance, and heading, as they were,
+for the mouth of Enterprise River, which flowed past
+the city.</p>
+
+<p>All were intensely excited at the announcement,
+and rushed forward to get a glimpse of the great
+ship. As she came up the streamers began to fly
+from every spar and mast, and Harry ran up to Stut,
+and asked why the <i>Pioneer</i> did not have them out.</p>
+
+<p>"But they are ready and will be flown as soon as
+we get nearer." As he said this the first ones were
+unfurled. Then the <i>Wonder</i> blew three long blasts
+which the <i>Pioneer</i> answered.</p>
+
+<p>"They are going to let us go in first," said John.
+Such was, indeed, the case, for the <i>Wonder</i> slowed
+down, and the <i>Pioneer</i> entered the mouth of the
+river, for the last eight miles of the eventful cruise.</p>
+
+<p>Two miles from the town both vessels began to
+blow signals with the fog horns, and long before the
+wharf was reached the people began to flock from
+all sides.</p>
+
+<p>One little incident pleased the boys beyond all
+measure. On the bridge, and furiously waving his
+arms, and swinging an American flag was Sutoto,
+with his bride by his side.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_185" id="p_185" href="#p_185">p. 185</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"So Sutoto has been on a wedding trip to Chili?"
+remarked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Such was the case, as they afterwards learned.
+Both boys were busy explaining the sights and the
+locations of the different buildings to Beralsea and
+Ephraim, and the latter was much affected as he
+saw the flag floating from the tall staff in the principal
+square of the city.</p>
+
+<p>Beralsea had seen Sutoto wave the flag from the
+bridge of the <i>Wonder</i>, and when he saw the same
+sort of emblem on the staff, he inquired of Ephraim
+the meaning of the curious thing. It was then explained
+to him that it was the magic combination
+of colors which their great tribe believed in, and
+which was always raised above them wherever they
+were, as a symbol that they were protected by it.</p>
+
+<p>"But how can that protect the people? Is there
+something in it like the unseen lightning, which we
+have on the ship?"</p>
+
+<p>"Unseen lightning, is a pretty good name, coming
+from a savage," remarked Harry in an undertone.</p>
+
+<p>"No; not in that way," answered Ephraim, "but
+whenever people see it, wherever they may be, they
+know that the tribe is great enough to give protection
+to any one who may try to injure any member
+of our tribe."</p>
+
+<p>"The White Chief has told me that there are
+many islands and countries, and that the world is
+round, and is peopled by many different tribes. Do
+the people everywhere know that 'flag,' as you call
+it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; in every part of the world."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_186" id="p_186" href="#p_186">p. 186</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Who are those two men standing there alone?"
+asked Ta Babeda.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know," responded Ephraim. "This is
+the first time I have been here. The boys will
+know."</p>
+
+<p>"That," answered George, "is the Professor,&mdash;that
+is, the man with a white beard and hair. The
+large man by his side is Beralsea, the Chief of the
+tribe on Venture Island."</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim looked at Ta Babeda for a moment, with
+an amused smile, and then remarked: "He is almost
+as large as you are."</p>
+
+<p>The <i>Wonder</i> was the first to get her cables to the
+dock, and as she swung against the wharf, and the
+gang plank was fixed in place, the first ones to spring
+ashore were Sutoto and Cinda, the latter of whom
+rushed to her father's outstretched arms, and then
+to her mother and the other members of the family.</p>
+
+<p>The boys did not know how or where to extend
+the first greetings. There was Sutoto and Lolo, and
+the dear old Professor, who considerately kept in the
+background, but the boys insisted on giving him the
+first greeting.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_187" id="p_187" href="#p_187">p. 187</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2>
+
+<h3>THE RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>"That</span> was an awfully sly thing to do, as soon as
+our backs were turned," said George, as Sutoto and
+Cinda were finally free from the vigorous greetings.</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" asked Cinda.</p>
+
+<p>"To run away without giving us notice!"</p>
+
+<p>"But we have seen the great wide world, and it is
+wonderful, and I can never tell the people here how
+grand it is."</p>
+
+<p>And then the boys looked at Cinda, and when they
+saw the latest fashions displayed, the prettiest gown,
+the neatest slippers, and the stunning hat they took
+off their caps, and made a neat bow in recognition
+of that feminine touch of character which so readily
+adapts the sex for acquiring the latest fashions
+wherever they may be.</p>
+
+<p>Every one was wild with excitement. "There is
+Blakely!" shouted Harry. "Hurrah! old boy! We
+have the place for you to visit, as soon as possible.
+The finest island you ever saw, and the people all
+ready for business."</p>
+
+<p>"My hands are full now; we must have another
+ship. Look at the <i>Wonder</i>; she is so full of goods
+that we are more than eight hours behind time. But
+I am arranging for another steamer."</p>
+
+<p>"Too bad that we are finding more islands than<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_188" id="p_188" href="#p_188">p. 188</a></span>
+you can handle," responded George; "I suppose we
+shall have to find another manager?"</p>
+
+<p>"Or several assistants," said Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>"What are all these men here for?" asked Harry.
+"Why the whole island must have come to town."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, we have had to send for all the spare men
+from the different tribes. Fifty of the Tuolos just
+came in this morning, and thirty of the Illyas arrived
+yesterday, with their families. The <i>Wonder</i>
+must be unloaded, and start back again before six
+this evening. But what did you find that looks as
+good as Venture Island?"</p>
+
+<p>"Rescue Island; a dandy place, and much bigger
+than Venture Island. And what do you think? We
+found a chief there who is a white man," remarked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"A white man? Where is he from?"</p>
+
+<p>"Massachusetts; and he is humpbacked, but as
+bright as can be."</p>
+
+<p>"I saw him, did I not? He was on the <i>Pioneer</i>?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; there he is with Ta Babeda."</p>
+
+<p>"Ta what?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's the Chief's name who owned the other
+tribe on Rescue Island. Isn't he an immense fellow?
+But he is a brick; I can tell you. Come over
+and I'll introduce you," and Harry pulled Blakely
+over while the latter resisted, as the men were constantly
+besieging Blakely for orders.</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind the work now. Get acquainted with
+the <i>big</i> men first," and the Professor laughed as he
+saw the boys forcibly tug at Blakely and haul him
+over to the group.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_189" id="p_189" href="#p_189">p. 189</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"This is one of the big men we have on the island,"
+said Harry to Ta Babeda, and the latter looked at
+Blakely for a moment, and began to smile, for while
+Blakely was chunky he was not at all large, if the
+Chief might be taken as a standard.</p>
+
+<p>He took Ta Babeda's hand, and welcomed him
+most heartily, and then turned to Ephraim, and also
+extended a greeting.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the man who does all the business," said
+Harry, "and he is going to make you a visit." At
+this point they were interrupted.</p>
+
+<p>"Shall we store all the pineapples aft," said a man
+hurriedly.</p>
+
+<p>"No; put them amidship," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>"We have no crates for the vegetables," said another.</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind, put them in the large boxes, and they
+can be crated on the way."</p>
+
+<p>"Some more men have just come; what shall we
+put them at?" was the report of another, and so
+from one to the other, Blakely was ever ready with
+a prompt answer.</p>
+
+<p>The Chiefs and Ephraim watched and wondered
+at Blakely and his constant readiness to entertain
+them, meanwhile giving orders to hundreds of the
+workers who were crowding about. It was an object
+lesson of what business meant, and the boys felt
+proud and happy to see the great ability which he
+displayed.</p>
+
+<p>But what a happy day it was for the Professor.
+He and John were in close conference, after the
+formal introductions were over. "There is some<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_190" id="p_190" href="#p_190">p. 190</a></span>thing
+brewing," said George as he nudged Harry,
+and cast a glance toward the place where they stood
+in earnest conversation.</p>
+
+<p>"I do believe John is telling him about the copper
+box; and by the way, he has never spoken about
+that since we took it out of the cave. That is just
+what he is doing; see, he is indicating the size of it."</p>
+
+<p>Harry laughed, as he answered: "I am satisfied
+they will not do anything rash, without consulting
+us," and George laughed at Harry's view of the
+case.</p>
+
+<p>They had been absent from the island a little over
+a month. During their absence the new hotel was
+completed and was now in running order. This became
+the headquarters for the visitors. While it
+was only two stories in height, it contained nearly
+a hundred rooms, and the utmost effort was made to
+make all of them comfortable.</p>
+
+<p>The boys had their own rooms, and could not be
+induced to give them up. John and the Professor
+also maintained their old rooms, which were most
+comfortable, and attached to the Professor's apartments
+was a large room where the people came daily
+to see him and consult about their many wants.</p>
+
+<p>He never failed to see them. It mattered not who
+called, it was unvarying custom to greet all alike.
+The affection for him in the minds of the people grew
+stronger day by day.</p>
+
+<p>There were now five of the Chiefs on Wonder
+Island permanent residents in Unity. A great
+change had come over the feelings of the people
+with respect to the ownership of land. When the
+town was laid out, and the people began to flock to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_191" id="p_191" href="#p_191">p. 191</a></span>
+the place, attracted by its many advantages, it began
+to look for a time as though the different Chiefs
+soon would find themselves without subjects.</p>
+
+<p>In addition to this the Professor recognized that
+too many of the people were expecting to be put to
+work in the city, and this would cause agriculture to
+be abandoned, whereas it was obvious that they must
+depend upon the soil for sustenance.</p>
+
+<p>John and the Professor therefore developed a
+plan which would be the means of keeping the people
+in their own sections, or, at least, encourage them
+to till the ground.</p>
+
+<p>The Chiefs in Wonder Island owned the soil.
+Their people reserved to themselves the right to hunt
+and to gather the fruits and nuts necessary to sustain
+life. But they had no right whatever, independently
+of the Chiefs.</p>
+
+<p>The first step, therefore, was to gain the consent
+of these rulers to a division of the land, so that all
+their people might have farms. Uraso and Muro
+were the first to agree to the plan, and it was quickly
+followed by all except the Tuolos and the Illyas.</p>
+
+<p>The Chiefs themselves, under this plan, were to
+receive one quarter of the acreage, and of the residue,
+one-third was to be turned into what was called
+a state fund, to be used for schools and for administrative
+purposes, while the balance was to be given
+to the people, who were to select their own land.</p>
+
+<p>For the purpose of enabling proper deeds to be
+made, it was necessary to make a survey of the
+islands, and this had been completed six months
+previously, so that many of the people who now understood
+that the lands selected belonged to them,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_192" id="p_192" href="#p_192">p. 192</a></span>
+and could not be taken from them without their consent,
+were only too happy to consent to remain on
+their own land.</p>
+
+<p>But here another problem presented itself. It was
+desirable that the people should build homes on these
+farms, and Blakely and John evolved the plan to
+provide certain quantities of lumber, at a low price,
+to be paid for from the products of the land. This
+had a most stimulating effect, and applications were
+coming in from every quarter. As a result small saw
+mills were put up in the territorial limits of each of
+the tribes, so that it was an easy matter for the people
+to get the lumber near home.</p>
+
+<p>But that which taxed the energies of Blakely most,
+was to provide the farming implements and the seed
+and instruction necessary to start them on the way.
+As it was impossible to provide all the tools and
+implements required for this purpose, Blakely had
+recourse to the States, and by inserting a few advertisements
+in the agricultural papers throughout
+our country, it was not long before the implements
+were forthcoming, all of which were paid for from
+the reserve fund which had been provided.</p>
+
+<p>And now another thing of the utmost importance
+happened. It was noised about from Maine to California
+that there was an immense opportunity to
+make money in the now well-known Wonder Island.
+Every return trip of the <i>Wonder</i> from the nearest
+South American port, brought Americans, with funds
+to invest in plantations and in setting out coffee
+trees and banana groves.</p>
+
+<p>Many Americans came from the great ranches of
+South America, particularly Brazil, which furnishes<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_193" id="p_193" href="#p_193">p. 193</a></span>
+full three-fourths of all the coffee of commerce.
+These men went through the islands and began the
+barter for the lands.</p>
+
+<p>At first this was encouraged, but it was soon, discovered
+that the shrewd, and, more frequently than
+otherwise, the unscrupulous traders were cheating
+the unsophisticated people, so that the Professor had
+to take a firm hand, and declare that no transfers
+would be made until the sales had been investigated.</p>
+
+<p>This made the prices of lands go up by leaps and
+bounds, and the Professor told the people that they
+should not sell their holdings, as it would be much
+better for them to own and till the farms than to sell
+them and then work for the owners.</p>
+
+<p>All this tended to make the people appreciate that
+they really owned something&mdash;that they had wealth
+and power within their grasp. Then began, or
+rather was carried out more systematically, the
+founding of schools, and by many means the parents
+themselves were induced to attend the schools.</p>
+
+<p>All were taught English. With the large funds
+that the state had obtained in selling a portion of
+the state lands, the Professor sent for teachers from
+the United States, and these came prepared to take
+up the work all over the island.</p>
+
+<p>The most interested workers were the Korinos, as
+they were called on Rescue Island, and Krishnos on
+Wonder Island. The Professor's first work, after
+the conquest of the savages, was to educate those
+people for teaching, and in this they were found to be
+very efficient workers.</p>
+
+<p>The Korinos brought from Rescue were placed
+under the tuition of the Krishnos, and it was sur<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_194" id="p_194" href="#p_194">p. 194</a></span>prising
+to see how happily they regarded their lot,
+and what progress they made after they understood
+what was required.</p>
+
+<p>Although we have not a full account of all the
+products shipped from Wonder Island during the
+first six months, it might be stated that during the
+last thirty days, the shipments from the port of
+Unity, comprised 60,000 pounds of coffee, eighteen
+tons of bananas, and six hundred quintals of spices,
+besides over four hundred tons of fibres, of which
+jute formed one-half.</p>
+
+<p>It is estimated that within another year, when
+many of the large plantations should be ready to
+yield their products, that amount would be increased
+to such an extent that several additional ships would
+be necessary to carry the tonnage.</p>
+
+<p>The foregoing is particularly instanced to show
+what John could point out to the Chiefs who were
+now their guests, and to impress upon them the
+necessity and value of adopting such a land system
+as they had established.</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim readily understood and approved of the
+plan, but it was not so easy for Ta Babeda, and
+Beralsea. At the quiet suggestion of John the opportunity
+was made whereby they were constantly
+thrown into contact with the resident chiefs. Within
+a week they accepted the suggestions and a half
+dozen surveyors were commissioned to go to the
+islands and take up the work of surveying the lands,
+and making records, which were to be put into such
+form that the Chiefs would understand them.</p>
+
+<p>One day Ephraim, in conversation with John said:
+"I want my boys to remain with you until they re<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_195" id="p_195" href="#p_195">p. 195</a></span>ceive
+their education. I see that the opportunities
+for work are unlimited, and I would also like to send
+over a number of young men for the same purpose."</p>
+
+<p>"Your decision pleases us immensely," said John,
+"and I have been wondering why your daughter
+would not also like to remain for a time, as there is
+much she can learn that will be of great help to you."</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim was silent for a while, while he looked
+at John, and he finally answered: "That means
+my wife will remain here also. But that has my
+hearty consent. It will be for their good, and for
+the good of my people."</p>
+
+<p>It was not long before Ta Babeda heard of Ephraim's
+decision, and he adapted the same course to
+the delight of his children. As for Beralsea, his
+favorite daughter was already the wife of the Chief
+Sutoto, of the Berees, and it was certain that she
+would remain in Unity, so that there was no difficulty
+in getting his consent to sending his children
+and others who would carry on the work of education.</p>
+
+<p>But the boys had not, in the meantime, forgotten
+their factory. The old water wheel was still there.
+Money could not purchase it, and they would not
+permit its removal. It was the same old crude
+wheel built nearly three years before at the Cataract,
+at the other end of the island, not more than two
+miles from the rocky shore where the sea gave them
+up.</p>
+
+<p>After the return there had been so much to see
+and to learn, about the new developments, and the
+visitors required so much attention that the boys
+quite forgot the copper box, and to inquire about<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_196" id="p_196" href="#p_196">p. 196</a></span>
+the condition of the paralyzed man who was found
+at Hutoton.</p>
+
+<p>"The Professor has just told me," remarked
+John, "that the old man is improving, and hopes that
+within another month he will be able to talk."</p>
+
+<p>"Has he any idea of what his name is?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not in the least. He keeps mumbling something
+about <i>the triangle</i>, or something of that kind, but
+that is, of course, unintelligible."</p>
+
+<p>"I understand Retlaw is improving, also?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; we have thought of bringing the two men
+together, as soon as the paralytic is so improved that
+he can talk."</p>
+
+<p>"I have often wondered what kind of a disease
+paralysis is?" inquired Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Paralysis is not a disease of itself. It is merely
+a sign of some disorder of the nervous system. It
+may be shown by complete disability on one side of
+the body, or in some particular portion, and only
+certain sets of nerves may be affected."</p>
+
+<p>"But what seems so singular is, that he is not
+only unable to speak but he cannot move about."</p>
+
+<p>"The form of paralysis, which affects the memory,
+is called <i>dementia paralytica</i>, and attacks the
+brain, while some portion of the body also may be
+affected."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't it curable?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is little hope for a permanent cure. If
+the attack should come on suddenly it is the most
+dangerous. Where it seems to approach gradually,
+there is more likelihood of being able to check it."</p>
+
+<p>"In what way is there an improvement in the old
+man?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_197" id="p_197" href="#p_197">p. 197</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"So far as the bodily ailment is concerned he is
+gaining. When he was brought back he was unable
+to utter a single word, nor could he move himself
+in any way, except with one arm, and that only to
+a small degree. Now he is able to shuffle along,
+across the room, and sometimes tries to say something,
+which is not distinct. The only thing which
+thus far seems intelligible is the word <i>triangle</i>, as I
+have stated."</p>
+
+<p>"Harry spoke about the copper box this morning.
+Have you opened it yet?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no! I wouldn't think of doing it unless you
+were present. The Professor and I have had several
+talks about it, but we have all been so busy that
+the matter has been deferred from time to time. I
+hope we shall be able to get at it to-night."</p>
+
+<p>While thus engaged in conversation the Professor
+appeared, smiling and happy. The boys greeted
+him affectionately, as was their custom always.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you want to make a visit with me?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; where?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"We will go out on B Street first," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>Together they passed the large school house, and
+crossed the open square, and entered the most beautiful
+of all the streets, the one laid out with rows
+of trees along the curbs, and flower beds along the
+middle portion of the driveway.</p>
+
+<p>"Can you guess where we are going?" asked the
+Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you see the newly-painted house to the
+right?"</p>
+
+<p>"Is that where Sutoto lives?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_198" id="p_198" href="#p_198">p. 198</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes; there is Cinda. Isn't she happy, though?"</p>
+
+<p>They went in and were accorded a happy welcome.
+Her father, the Chief, Beralsea, and her mother,
+Minda, were there, but Sutoto was absent.</p>
+
+<p>"And where is the bridegroom?" asked the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"He is in the yard somewhere. I will call him."
+And she tripped out the steps, merry as a lark.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto came in, and the boys simply shouted at
+his appearance. He was covered with dirt and
+grease, and made no great effort to conceal the fact.</p>
+
+<p>"And what have you been up to?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Come out and I will show you."</p>
+
+<p>In the little "garage," if it might be so termed,
+was an auto, one which Sutoto had purchased and
+brought back with him on his wedding trip. "I was
+going to send for you," he said, addressing Harry,
+"because I have been having trouble with the carbureter."</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_199" id="p_199" href="#p_199">p. 199</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2>
+
+<h3>THE SAVAGES AT UNITY</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>The</span> boys were simply wild with delight, and
+George commenced to laugh immoderately, after
+viewing the brightly-polished machine.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter? Anything wrong? Is it
+upside down?" asked Sutoto.</p>
+
+<p>"No; I was just thinking how funny it seems that
+one of the wild savages of the island should be the
+first to import an automobile."</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto didn't in the least mind this allusion to his
+former condition, but the boys were the only ones
+who dared to jest with him in this manner. He
+joined in the laugh, but quickly replied:</p>
+
+<p>"But I am not the only one favored in this way."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?"</p>
+
+<p>"I know some other people who are indulging in
+pleasure cars also."</p>
+
+<p>"Who is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, Blakely has one, a fine little car he calls a
+'runabout.'"</p>
+
+<p>"He never said anything about it. Then he
+brought one over for John, and another for the Professor,
+but you must keep quiet; they are not to know
+anything about it."</p>
+
+<p>"Then there are two more machines down there
+that have queer names on them, because the fellows<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_200" id="p_200" href="#p_200">p. 200</a></span>
+themselves are peculiar, and are awfully civilized,"
+said Sutoto, with a faint attempt at a smile.</p>
+
+<p>Harry laid down the wrench and turned to Sutoto.
+"What are the names?" he asked, for the first time
+interested.</p>
+
+<p>"On one it says 'Mayfield,' and 'Crandall' on the
+other." And Sutoto said this without cracking a
+smile, or indicating that he really knew who the
+names applied to.</p>
+
+<p>Probably, no one on the island, at least among the
+natives, really knew the boys by any other designation
+than George and Harry. The surnames were
+of no use. Sutoto was simply "Sutoto," and no
+more, and so with Uraso and Muro.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor and the old Chief heard the hilarity,
+and were soon out of the house, and although the
+boys and Sutoto tried to push the machine behind
+the garage, they were too late for the Professor's
+quick eye.</p>
+
+<p>He laughed when he saw the commotion. "It is all
+right; if I were not so old, I would get one myself."</p>
+
+<p>"That's just the time you need it," said Harry.
+"By the way," he continued, "I will bring it around
+to your place this afternoon."</p>
+
+<p>"Bring what?" asked the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Your car; of course." And Sutoto and the boys
+laughed at the Professor's discomfiture.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought there was some job about to be put
+up on me. I wondered why Blakely tried to keep
+me out of the warehouse yesterday."</p>
+
+<p>But while this merry scene was taking place, five
+new machines were coming along B Street, with<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_201" id="p_201" href="#p_201">p. 201</a></span>
+Blakely in the first one, and a competent chauffeur in
+each of the others.</p>
+
+<p>"The first is yours, Harry, and the next one, with
+the red body is yours, George," said Blakely. "I
+thought we should surprise you."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, there is John, too!" exclaimed Sutoto.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; he is in his car; he was greatly surprised.
+But the Professor's car is a neat one; don't you
+think so?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys had no ears for any one or for anything.
+Each was a forty-horse power roadster, while the
+Professor's car had a five-passenger body, was handsomely
+upholstered, and equipped with particularly
+easy-riding springs. John's machine was equally
+well built, and after the boys had made a full examination
+of their own treasures, they investigated the
+other cars, and marveled at their beauty and appearance
+of comfort.</p>
+
+<p>The procession of the machines naturally attracted
+the people who came from all directions to witness
+the wonder wagons which ran by themselves. They
+crowded around, and listened to every comment.
+The old Chief was the one most excited at the strange
+things.</p>
+
+<p>Neither Sutoto nor Cinda had informed them of
+the autos, because it was intended to have quite a
+surprise party, and it was afterwards learned that
+Blakely and Sutoto had planned to give all of them a
+surprise. The fact that the Professor and the boys,
+having gone to Sutoto that morning, were absent
+from their homes, precipitated to disclosure, so that
+John was found and together they went to Sutoto's
+house.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_202" id="p_202" href="#p_202">p. 202</a></span></p>
+
+<p>You may be sure that it did not take the boys long
+to learn the mysteries of the machines, and they
+were with Sutoto, until he got the hang of the motor,
+and could spin along as fast as any of them.</p>
+
+<p>The old Chief was finally induced to get into the
+Professor's machine, and the latter instructed the
+driver to proceed slowly. Minda, who was with
+them, was the braver of the two, by far. The speed
+was about six miles an hour, at which the Chief marveled.</p>
+
+<p>Then, gradually, the driver speeded up, until they
+were making a comfortable speed of fifteen miles
+an hour. As confidence increased the pleasure grew
+stronger, and before they returned on the first trip
+he was as determined as could be to have one for his
+own use.</p>
+
+<p>Blakely took note of his wish, and said: "I shall
+see to it that on the return trip one of the machines
+will be shipped to you, but it will be two weeks before
+the <i>Wonder</i> comes in."</p>
+
+<p>From that day on Sutoto had his hands full entertaining
+the Chief, but the boys relieved him of
+much of this, by taking him from place to place,
+where he saw the work going on in all parts of the
+beautiful country, and witnessed the planting of the
+groves, the gathering of the crops, and the way in
+which the produce was handled at the wharf.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto's home was a beautiful structure of five
+rooms, all nicely furnished, the gift of the Professor.
+The boys enjoyed the visits there. Sutoto was
+always a boy to them, and Cinda a happy bride,&mdash;and
+a woman of whom any one might be proud.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_203" id="p_203" href="#p_203">p. 203</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When Beralsea, her father, decided that his children
+must remain and attend the schools there, the
+adjoining cottage was prepared for them, and Minda
+consented to stay, but Beralsea, who had now partaken
+of the commercial instincts, under the tutelage
+of Blakely, was determined to return at once and
+revolutionize the condition of affairs in Venture
+Island.</p>
+
+<p>That day he and Ta Babeda had a long conversation,
+and together they visited John and Ephraim,
+and then called in Blakely. The boys were present,
+of course, and it then turned out that they had agreed
+upon a plan to start the agricultural work in the two
+islands conjointly, and the only question which remained
+was to take care of the management of the
+work.</p>
+
+<p>Both of the Chiefs declared that they did not possess
+the qualifications to direct the work, and Ephraim
+pleaded age as the reason why it would be impossible
+to undertake the burdens.</p>
+
+<p>"I have an idea," he said, "that the best solution
+would be to make George and Harry the managers
+for the islands. I have been with the boys for some
+time, and see what they are capable of, and every
+one would be glad to work under them."</p>
+
+<p>The boys were, of course, somewhat confused at
+the encomium, and the Professor came to their rescue.
+"These are my boys," he said. "I have
+known them ever since they came to the island.
+They have been with me under every condition of
+service. We have had hours and days of pleasure,
+and of trials, such as few have undergone, and al<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_204" id="p_204" href="#p_204">p. 204</a></span>ways,
+whatever the circumstances, they have been
+manly, and never gave up, although sometimes things
+seemed hopeless.</p>
+
+<p>"You have seen how, through their ingenuity, they
+have built the water wheel, the mills and the factories.
+Fortune has been kind to them; they do not
+need the money that may come to them, as they have
+found riches here, far greater than you know, but
+they have loved the work, for the pleasure it has
+brought them, and it is for them to decide."</p>
+
+<p>"Harry and I have talked about these things many
+times," answered George. "When we first came to
+the island, we had nothing. For our own preservation
+we set about to better our condition, began to
+build the things necessary to maintain life, and to
+protect ourselves.</p>
+
+<p>"What at first was a necessity, later became a
+pleasure, because we could see, day after day, how
+we built the shop and the machinery out of the crude
+things; it would be hard to leave that work now."</p>
+
+<p>Harry approvingly nodded his head, as he responded:
+"I consider it a pleasure to do anything
+which would help the people here. George and I feel
+that it would be wrong to leave them, so long as we
+can be of service to them.</p>
+
+<p>"The money we have will not make us happy; that
+I know, unless we can use it to do some good. And
+it is so with our time, also. I am as willing to give
+that as money, because we have been amply rewarded
+and now our duty is to the people here."</p>
+
+<p>As a result of the conference it was agreed that
+George and Harry should take up the management of
+the affairs on Venture and Rescue Islands, they to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_205" id="p_205" href="#p_205">p. 205</a></span>
+decide which should be the particular sphere of each.</p>
+
+<p>The Chiefs were immensely pleased at this arrangement,
+and the first steps were taken to put their
+plans into execution.</p>
+
+<p>John advised them that they should decide which
+island each would take, and then each should cultivate
+the acquaintance of the young men that the
+Chiefs should select, so that the administrative functions
+could be instilled into them, and that they might
+be taught the business qualifications necessary.</p>
+
+<p>George laughingly remarked that as the Chief
+Beralsea had so accommodatingly captured him,
+when they first arrived on the island, he thought that
+their intimate acquaintance, which was so long prior
+to Harry's should decide the matter in his favor, by
+taking Venture Island.</p>
+
+<p>"That suits me all right. I have one advantage
+over you on Rescue Island; and that is the caves.
+You haven't even an excuse for a cave."</p>
+
+<p>"But I have Hutoton, that terrible place where the
+criminals live," retorted George, with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"And that reminds me; what about the copper
+box?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys wended their way to the Professor, and
+were delighted to find John there. "Before we go
+we want to have the copper box opened," remarked
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I have just brought it around, in the machine,"
+said John, as he noticed the boys peering at it
+through the window.</p>
+
+<p>"What is that in the package lying on the box?"</p>
+
+<p>"Can't you guess?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_206" id="p_206" href="#p_206">p. 206</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Have you forgotten the skull with the inscription
+on it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean the skull we found on the headland
+at the eastern end of the island?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, what is that for? Do you think it has anything
+to do with the box?"</p>
+
+<p>"Probably not; but I was curious to examine it
+further in view of the similarity of the chart and the
+inscription."</p>
+
+<p>The boys could not possibly understand what was
+meant by such a reference. While they were talking
+the Professor entered the room, and remarked,
+"I have just come from the old fellow, and his reason
+is returning under the treatment, and he is also
+better physically."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean the paralytic?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but there is one thing which is singular,
+and that is the constant muttering of the word <i>triangle</i>.
+This morning I could plainly distinguish
+several other words, such as 'of' and 'three,' and
+'very well,' and parts of other words, showing that
+in time, if his improvement continues, we may get
+more information."</p>
+
+<p>"I have an idea," hurriedly shouted George as he
+broke for the door. "Wait for me," he said, as he
+turned around and cast a glance back into the room.
+"I will be back at once," were the last words they
+heard.</p>
+
+<p>John laughed at George's precipitous flight. "I
+suppose he has just thought of something that bears
+on the case. In the meantime, and while George is<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_207" id="p_207" href="#p_207">p. 207</a></span>
+away, you, Harry, might get a hammer and a cold
+chisel. We may have to cut the top off."</p>
+
+<p>Harry rushed out and taking John's machine was
+quickly at the shop, where he secured a hammer and
+several cold chisels capable of cutting the copper.</p>
+
+<p>When he returned George was there, and was unfolding
+the paper scrap which they found below the
+skull. "Probably, this will explain the triangle,"
+said George, as he pointed to the V-shaped mark.
+"The upper part of it is very likely worn away, so
+that we cannot see it."</p>
+
+<p>John smiled at the suggestion as he took the paper
+and carefully examined it. "Your view may be correct,"
+he responded.</p>
+
+<p>"That looks like a suggestion of a line," said
+Harry, pointing to a faint scratch near the upper
+margin.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor's messenger came in hurriedly, and
+announced that the paralytic had sent for him. "I
+will return by the time the box is opened," said the
+Professor, as he hurriedly went out of the door.</p>
+
+<p>"Now for the box," said Harry. The slitting
+chisel was applied, and he dextrously cut along the
+top, under the directions of John.</p>
+
+<p>"Direct the chisel downwardly, to see if there is
+any seam to be found along the side," directed John.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; here is the place where the top was put on,"
+shouted Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, it has been soldered," said George.
+"Well, that means business."</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that the soldering was effectively
+done, because the solder had run entirely through the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_208" id="p_208" href="#p_208">p. 208</a></span>
+seam, and it was really sweated on. The copper
+used was about an eighth of an inch thick, and the
+soft and ductile character showed that it was pure
+metal.</p>
+
+<p>"Be very careful as you get around so as not to
+disturb the contents, by the falling of the lid," said
+John.</p>
+
+<p>It still adhered at various places, and this was
+carefully cut away by one of the thin chisels, and the
+lid finally raised at one corner, sufficiently to disclose
+a portion of the contents, which appeared to be round
+and white, and resting near the center of the space.</p>
+
+<p>All caught a glimpse of it, and involuntarily
+started back in surprise. It was a skull, the counterpart
+of the one lying on the table which contained
+the inscription.</p>
+
+<p>"Open it wide," said John in a peculiar voice, and
+as he did so the Professor rushed in and announced
+that the paralytic had recovered speech, and he had
+ordered him to be brought in.</p>
+
+<p>While the Professor was saying this, John was
+slowly raising the lid, and by a quick motion tore it
+away, and the Professor was actually taken aback
+at the sight before him. He gazed for a moment,
+and then muttered: "And the same inscription
+too!"</p>
+
+<p>All looked toward it in amazement, and while puzzling
+over its meaning, the paralytic was helped in
+by two attendants. He came forward, saw the two
+skulls, and before either could prevent it he collapsed
+and fell to the floor, apparently lifeless.</p>
+
+<p>He was gathered up and placed on a couch, and
+restoratives applied by the Professor. He lay thus<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_209" id="p_209" href="#p_209">p. 209</a></span>
+in a stupor for more than a half hour, but soon returning
+consciousness began to manifest itself, and
+when he opened his eyes, and glanced about, his lips
+began to move. Here the Professor held up a warning
+hand, which he seemed to heed, for he immediately
+closed his eyes, and was soon asleep, as his
+breathing became regular, and the pulse began to act
+normally.</p>
+
+<p>"There must be no more agitation now," said the
+Professor. "We can take the box to the adjoining
+room." This was done, and John carefully lifted
+the skull from its resting place, bringing with it a
+mass of other material, which looked like brown or
+discolored parchment.</p>
+
+<p>The skulls were placed side by side. They were
+singularly alike, the inscription of the one found on
+the headland, was on the left side, and the like figures
+of the one taken from the box were on the right
+side.</p>
+
+<p>"That is a singular thing," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"So it is," answered John, "but it doubtless has
+a meaning," he continued.</p>
+
+<p>Beneath the box, and attached to the wrappings,
+was a mass of material which John eagerly seized,
+and began to unwrap, while the Professor interestedly
+looked on. There was not the first sign of any
+treasure in the box, and when the several folds of the
+parchment were unrolled, the boys could see the
+hieroglyphics that the Professor and John so eagerly
+scanned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, yes, I knew you would come back," said the
+man in the adjoining room, and John dropped the
+parchment and followed the Professor into the room,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_210" id="p_210" href="#p_210">p. 210</a></span>
+where they saw the old man sitting on the couch and
+staring about with an inquiring countenance.</p>
+
+<p>"What is your name?" said the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>He did not answer at first but looked at John and
+the Professor in amazement.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you ask?" he then muttered, without
+changing his countenance. "I have told you over
+and over," he continued.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know where you are?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly. You may ask Walter about that."</p>
+
+<p>"Walter? Do you know Walter?" asked George,
+almost involuntarily.</p>
+
+<p>He smiled and nodded his head. "He is here. I
+saw him yesterday. I wish he would explain."
+Then he dropped back on the couch and remained
+motionless.</p>
+
+<p>The effort to arouse him was useless, and the Professor
+advised patience. There was something so
+peculiar about the whole situation that it fascinated
+the boys. What did this man know about Walter?
+Possibly, through him the great mystery, that commenced
+with the note in the seat of their boat, would
+be explained.</p>
+
+<p>After they came back to the island, Retlaw rapidly
+recovered, and was frequently found wandering
+around the town. On several occasions he called on
+the Professor. To the surprise of all he appeared
+at this time, surprised to find John and the boys
+present, and appeared to be terribly startled on seeing
+the two skulls.</p>
+
+<p>The moment he saw the paralytic, he became agitated,
+and started for the door. John barred the
+way, and said: "Do you know that man?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_211" id="p_211" href="#p_211">p. 211</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In a hesitating voice, he answered: "Yes; I know
+him well. Where did you find him?" and notwithstanding
+he saw the quiet figure he drew back with
+an expression of fear and hesitancy.</p>
+
+<p>George slyly drew forth the Walter note, referred
+to in the previous volume, "Adventures on Strange
+Islands," and handed it to John. The latter seized
+it and said: "Did you ever see this?"</p>
+
+<p>He grasped the paper, and answered: "Where
+did you get this? Did he have it?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied the Professor; "we found it in a
+recess at the end of a seat in our boat,&mdash;the one we
+made on this island, three years ago."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know how it could have gotten there.
+It was written to Clifford,&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"John B. Clifford?" asked Harry in excitement.</p>
+
+<p>Retlaw turned, when he heard Harry. "Yes,"
+was the hesitating answer.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know Walter?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>He did not reply, but glanced at all of them, and
+while doing so Harry came forward, and said:
+"Isn't your name Walter?"</p>
+
+<p>The man started back and held up his hand:
+"What makes you think so?" he asked in alarm.</p>
+
+<p>"Because <i>Retlaw</i> reversed, spells Walter," answered
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>It was time for the Professor to show surprise
+at the acuteness of Harry's conclusions. John took
+the cue at once. "Why are you trying to deceive
+us?"</p>
+
+<p>He dropped his eyes, and was silent, and then he
+slowly turned to the quiet man.</p>
+
+<p>John noticed the movement. "Who was the man<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_212" id="p_212" href="#p_212">p. 212</a></span>
+tied to the vessel and wrecked on the island to the
+south of us?"</p>
+
+<p>This question by John produced an added agitation
+in the deportment of the man. He was visibly
+affected by the question, but there was no reply.</p>
+
+<p>"As you do not feel disposed to answer our questions
+we must detain or keep you in custody until
+Clifford recovers," said John, and motioning to the
+boys, they gathered around him, and called in the
+attendants and ordered the men to take charge of
+him.</p>
+
+<p>As they were about to pass out the door, Ephraim
+ascended the steps and was about to pass into the
+open door. He caught sight of the curious group,
+and when his eye alighted on the figure on the couch,
+he drew back for a moment, while his gaze remained
+fixed.</p>
+
+<p>Then he calmly moved forward, slowly shaking
+his head from side to side, and muttered: "That
+looks like Clifford, my companion on the ship, and
+the one who aided me to gain a foothold on the spar.
+How did he come here?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is the man we found at Hutoton," said
+John. "But do you know this man?" he asked,
+pointing to Walter.</p>
+
+<p>Ephraim turned, and scrutinized his face. "No, I
+have never seen him, to my knowledge."</p>
+
+<p>Walter moved back with a sigh of relief, while
+John and the Professor looked at each other with
+puzzled expressions.</p>
+
+<p>"Then the man we found tied to the boat was not
+Clifford!" exclaimed George.</p>
+
+<p>John looked at Walter, and he saw him grow pale.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_213" id="p_213" href="#p_213">p. 213</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Who was the man," he asked, in a threatening tone,
+as he approached Walter. The latter hesitated.
+"We are determined to ferret out this matter, and
+it will be to your advantage to tell us the whole
+story, for we shall find it out sooner or later."</p>
+
+<p>"I must have time to think," he answered, as he
+put his hands to his head, and turned to Clifford.</p>
+
+<p>"You may have until to-morrow, but in the meantime,
+we shall see to it that you are kept within
+our sight," responded John, as he motioned to the
+men to take him away.</p>
+
+<p>As he left the door Harry said: "Why do you
+suppose he wanted time?"</p>
+
+<p>John looked at Clifford for a moment, and answered:
+"Evidently, he had hopes that Clifford
+would not survive."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_214" id="p_214" href="#p_214">p. 214</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2>
+
+<h3>UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>At</span> the suggestion of the Professor, Clifford was
+left in quiet, while John and the boys deferred their
+further attempts to explore the mysterious occurrences
+that were looming up.</p>
+
+<p>They canvassed every phase of the situation, in the
+hope that some explanation might be offered.
+What could have been the relations of Walter and
+Clifford, and who was the man that met his death
+in the boat at Venture Island?</p>
+
+<p>Why had the sight of the copper box and the skulls
+so agitated Walter? The latter, apparently, knew
+of the missive, which was, evidently, written by him,
+but why did he not give an outright answer concerning
+it when John asked him point blank?</p>
+
+<p>It did not take the boys long to inform Sutoto of
+the development and the mystery concerning the
+two men. The old Chief, Beralsea, was taken over
+to see Walter, in order to identify him if possible,
+and then Harry suggested that Ta Babeda might
+know something of his early history, as Walter was
+found a prisoner at his village when John and the
+boys arrived there.</p>
+
+<p>Beralsea had never seen nor heard of him, and
+Ta Babeda gave the following account of his capture:
+"About three years previously several men,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_215" id="p_215" href="#p_215">p. 215</a></span>
+of whom Walter was one, arrived at the island, on a
+small boat, something like the one carried by the
+<i>Pioneer</i>, and which was used at the landing."</p>
+
+<p>(It should be stated that one of the boats, and
+probably, the one referred to, was the identical lifeboat,
+No. 3, which the boys had fitted up for use on
+the <i>Pioneer</i>.)</p>
+
+<p>"This boat was kept by them at the inlet directly
+east of the cave where the Korinos were lodged. I
+did not know anything of this for some time, but the
+Korinos learned of the presence of the men, and my
+warriors were set to watch the men. A few days
+afterwards, another boat, much smaller, appeared
+with two men, but from all appearances they were a
+different party, and after they had a conference, it
+appeared as though there was trouble between the
+different parties."</p>
+
+<p>"We were about to close in on them, when at the
+height of their quarrel, but they caught sight of us,
+and joined in resisting the attack against us. With
+the guns they had we were no match for them, so we
+had to retire to the village.</p>
+
+<p>"The next morning we learned that they had gone,
+and on searching the shore found something with
+marks on, it, that had no meaning to us so it was destroyed."</p>
+
+<p>"Was it something like this?" asked Harry, handing
+him a sketch.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief studied it for a few moments, and answered:
+"It seems to me it was like that. The
+marks were something like these," and he pointed to
+the crosses.</p>
+
+<p>Harry had made the identical marking which were<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_216" id="p_216" href="#p_216">p. 216</a></span>
+on the two skulls, which, it will be remembered,
+showed the characters + V, and below these three
+X X X, followed by a star.</p>
+
+<p>"I suspected as much," said John. "They were,
+quite possibly, on the same quest. But where did
+they get the information?" And he turned to the
+Professor for a possible explanation.</p>
+
+<p>The latter was now thoroughly interested. "Unless
+Walter chooses to tell, the matter may not be
+solved, unless Clifford recovers, and even though
+he should regain his physical powers, the mind may
+have relapsed into its late condition."</p>
+
+<p>By agreement John and the boys remained at the
+Professor's home that night, awaiting symptoms of
+the patient's disease, and during the night they recounted
+over and over again the adventures they
+had undergone, and the experiences with the natives.</p>
+
+<p>They conversed about the new enterprise into
+which they were to embark, and the Professor congratulated
+them on the decision to remain and enter
+the commercial, or business field. "After all," he
+said, "there is nothing which so broadens a man as
+to have an occupation, and give to that business the
+energies of his mind."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course, there are many things that the natives
+must learn, but they are so willing to work,
+that it is a pleasure to show them," said Harry.
+"The best men we have had in the shops were the
+common natives, but there is one thing that has always
+been troublesome, and that is to give them
+different names."</p>
+
+<p>"That is just what I had in mind for some time,"
+added George. "It didn't make much difference<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_217" id="p_217" href="#p_217">p. 217</a></span>
+where there were only a few,&mdash;a hundred or so, but
+now, when we have three hundred or more it is rather
+confusing to have a dozen or more <i>Lolos</i>, and as
+many more <i>Walbes</i>, and names like that."</p>
+
+<p>"It might be a good idea to suggest that each
+one have a sort of surname, so that there will be no
+difficulty of that kind hereafter," suggested John.</p>
+
+<p>"A family name would be the proper thing,"
+added the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"For my part, I don't see how people can get
+along without it," remarked George.</p>
+
+<p>"But it has not always been the custom to have
+surnames, or family names," suggested the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"But the Romans did," exclaimed George.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, they had three names: the first was the prenomen,
+which was a distinctive mark of the individual;
+then the nomen, or the name of the clan; and
+third, the cognomen, which was the family name.
+The first name was usually written with a capital
+letter only, like M. Thus, M. Tullius Cicero."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is the first time it ever occurred to
+me that the Romans parted their names in the middle,"
+said George, as he smiled at the allusion.</p>
+
+<p>"The ancient Greeks, with the exception of a few
+of the leading families in Athens and Sparta, had
+only a single name. Among the German and Celtic
+nations each individual had only one name, and that
+was also true of the ancient Hebrews; the names
+Abraham, David, Aaron and the others were used
+singly, and this was also the case in Egypt,
+Syria and Persia, and throughout all of Western
+Asia."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_218" id="p_218" href="#p_218">p. 218</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"But it has never been so in England, has it?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"During the entire period that England was under
+the dominion of the Saxons, the single name was
+prevalent. But that was changed later when feudalism
+was established and the different lords began
+to gather their vassals, and to register them."</p>
+
+<p>"But what is the principle on which the names are
+built?"</p>
+
+<p>"In various ways; at first they distinguished
+father and son by adding the word <i>son</i> to the
+father's name. If he was of German descent <i>sohn</i>
+would be added; if of Danish origin, the word <i>sen</i>,
+so that the son's name in either case would be William<i>son</i>,
+or Ander<i>sohn</i>, or Thorwald<i>sen</i>, or a given
+name with the designation <i>son</i> added."</p>
+
+<p>"But how about the many other names, and those
+coming after the second generation?"</p>
+
+<p>"They had to be named after the locality, like
+John <i>Brook</i>, or David <i>Hill</i>, or something of that
+kind, even to an occupation, like the <i>Smiths</i>, or the
+<i>Fishers</i>, as well as qualifications, such as <i>Wise</i> and
+<i>Good</i> were adopted as surnames."</p>
+
+<p>Every hour Clifford's condition was noted, and
+before morning his pulse began to beat with greater
+regularity, and all felt that it would be well to take
+a nap, to prepare for what they knew must be an
+interesting, if not exciting chapter, to round out
+their adventures, and to lay bare the few mysteries
+which yet remained to be solved.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto came to the Professor's house quite early,
+with news from Blakely that Walter had disappeared.
+He had learned of the imprisonment and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_219" id="p_219" href="#p_219">p. 219</a></span>
+that Walter was placed in the regular lock-up, where
+a few recalcitrants were confined.</p>
+
+<p>How he escaped was not known. True, not much
+of a guard was maintained, and the natives had no
+idea that the prisoner was of more than ordinary importance.</p>
+
+<p>John was very much disappointed, but he felt that
+he alone was to blame, because in the anxiety for
+Clifford he had entirely overlooked the precaution
+necessary. He went down to the jail, with the boys,
+and learned from the inmates that when the man
+was brought in he appeared to be unconcerned, and
+immediately selected his sleeping quarters, and that
+was the last they knew of him.</p>
+
+<p>As the boys were going to their own rooms, a messenger
+came from the Professor that Clifford was
+awake, and appeared to be rational, and was now
+partaking of food. After breakfast they hurried
+over to the Professor, and found John there smiling.</p>
+
+<p>"I have had a little talk with him."</p>
+
+<p>"What does he say?"</p>
+
+<p>"I have not yet questioned him."</p>
+
+<p>Clifford looked at the boys curiously. "Are you
+the boys that Mr. Varney spoke about?"</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose we are," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"His story interested me very much. I learn that
+you have a regular manufacturing town here, and
+that you built all these things without any outside
+help, before you communicated with the outside
+world."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and we had a glorious time doing it, too,
+but we owe everything to the Professor and John."</p>
+
+<p>"That is really commendable to hear you say so.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_220" id="p_220" href="#p_220">p. 220</a></span>
+But you said, Mr. Varney, that Walter told you Clifford
+limped, and it was on account of this peculiarity
+you were led to believe that the dead man on
+Venture Island was Clifford?"</p>
+
+<p>"One of the three men with Walter, was lame."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it must have been one of his party that was
+murdered?"</p>
+
+<p>"But Walter was explicit to tell us that one of
+your legs was shorter than the other. I early
+learned that such was not the case, and that is what
+confused me in identifying you. But there is also
+another thing which I could not understand."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Ephraim Wilmar."</p>
+
+<p>"Stop! stop!" almost shouted Clifford. "You
+said <i>Ephraim Wilmar</i>. Do you know him?"</p>
+
+<p>"Know him? He is here on the island."</p>
+
+<p>"When did he come? Where is he?"</p>
+
+<p>"He lives on an island north of the place we
+found you, and is Chief of a tribe there."</p>
+
+<p>"Chief of a tribe!" he exclaimed. "An island to
+the north,&mdash;the <i>triangle</i>,"&mdash;and the boys rose from
+their seats in the excitement.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is Walter's letter?&mdash;Quick," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>George fumbled in his pockets with eagerness.
+"Is that the triangle?" eagerly questioned Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, yes; there it is again. The three islands,
+and the arrow."</p>
+
+<p>"But what does the star mean,&mdash;the star that follows,
+as you see?"</p>
+
+<p>"That,&mdash;that is to show the position of the three
+islands."</p>
+
+<p>"Position of the three islands? What islands?<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_221" id="p_221" href="#p_221">p. 221</a></span>
+and how does it tell the positions?" George was
+fairly frantic now.</p>
+
+<p>"There must be three islands, and one of them
+was the one I was on when you found me, and one is
+here, because Mr. Varney told me about this one,
+and then there is another, which you said was to
+the north of,&mdash;of&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Hutoton," said John.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; Hutoton. But the positions! Yes; you
+will understand! One point is the Southern Cross,
+near the South polar Circle, the second point is the
+fixed star Antares, and the third is the fixed star
+Spica, which, together form a perfect triangle, one
+limb of which passes through a cluster of stars
+called the Compasses."</p>
+
+<p>"But what has that to do with the locations of the
+three islands?"</p>
+
+<p>"They are situated, with relation to each other,
+exactly the same as the three stars are placed in the
+heavens."</p>
+
+<p>"What was the object of the three crosses before
+the star?"</p>
+
+<p>"The three represented thirty."</p>
+
+<p>"Thirty what?"</p>
+
+<p>"Leagues."</p>
+
+<p>"And the arrow?"</p>
+
+<p>"The direction from Spica."</p>
+
+<p>"Why from Spica?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because that star is the one which represents the
+island on which this particular chart happens to be
+found."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean that a similar chart will be found
+on each island?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_222" id="p_222" href="#p_222">p. 222</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No; on only two of them."</p>
+
+<p>The boys were astounded at this information.
+John and the Professor remained quiet while the
+boys thus questioned Clifford.</p>
+
+<p>John interrupted to inquire why there were only
+two charts.</p>
+
+<p>"The record is found on the third."</p>
+
+<p>"So Wonder and Venture Islands are the only
+ones which have the inscriptions on the skulls?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Clifford sat up with such a sudden start that the
+boys were alarmed. He leaned forward, and hurriedly
+asked the following questions: "You say,
+'Inscriptions on the skulls?' How do you know?
+and why do you say that they are on Wonder and
+Venture Islands?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because we have two of them."</p>
+
+<p>He dropped back on the pillow, and reflected for
+some time, and then slowly said: "But there must
+be three. One of them is still with the records."</p>
+
+<p>"No; we have the one with the records."</p>
+
+<p>A smile illuminated his features, the tension was
+relaxed, and he dropped back, and pressed his hands
+over his forehead, as he muttered: "I am so glad,
+so glad, so glad," and his voice died down, and he
+remained quiet, as though in sleep.</p>
+
+<p>The questioners sat there in silence, and watched
+him as he slept. The Professor motioned them to
+withdraw, and they passed into the adjoining room.</p>
+
+<p>"It is clear to me now," remarked John. "The
+knowledge of the record was known to others, and
+I was not aware that any one besides ourselves<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_223" id="p_223" href="#p_223">p. 223</a></span>
+really had figured out the secret," remarked John,
+as he turned to the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I came pretty close to it," exclaimed
+Harry. "I told you that the three X's meant thirty
+leagues."</p>
+
+<p>"So you did," said John. "Prior to the finding
+of the skull I did not know of the full inscription.
+Its significance did not come to me until we reached
+Venture Island."</p>
+
+<p>"I remember now! I told George that I saw the
+chart you had made."</p>
+
+<p>John smiled. "It would have deceived you, however."</p>
+
+<p>"Why?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Because, if you remember it the third island was
+to the south of Venture, and not to the north as we
+really found it."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_224" id="p_224" href="#p_224">p. 224</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE STORY OF THE LETTERED SKULL</h3>
+
+
+<p><span class='smcap'>It</span> was late that afternoon when Clifford awoke,
+and plainly much, refreshed, and improved physically.
+When he saw the Professor he said: "I
+have not told you all, but I want the boys here for
+that purpose, because I know it will interest them."</p>
+
+<p>When the boys arrived they awaited the coming of
+John, who informed them that Uraso had received
+word of the capture of Walter, but that he would not
+arrive until noon.</p>
+
+<p>Clifford greeted them effusively, and it was evident
+that he had recovered his spirits, and was well
+on the road to recovery. After some general talk
+on uninteresting topics, he began his story:</p>
+
+<p>"I was on the vessel with Ephraim when we ran
+into the monsoon which wrecked the vessel. After
+days of suffering I became unconscious, and when
+the spar finally reached the shore, I was aroused
+sufficiently to save myself, and after wandering
+around for some time, came up to a tribe of natives,
+who took good care of me.</p>
+
+<p>"I had no means of determining the latitude or
+longitude, because I was then only about twenty
+years of age, and had shipped on the vessel at
+Shanghai, because I was anxious to return home. I
+remained with the people about three years, and
+they were called Osagas."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_225" id="p_225" href="#p_225">p. 225</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Why, this town is built in the Osagas' territory,"
+said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"That may be so, but it is enough for the present
+to know that it was somewhere on this island that I
+reached the shore, and that about three years thereafter
+I was fortunate enough to catch sight of a sailing
+vessel, and on her I reached San Francisco.</p>
+
+<p>"In course of time I built up a profitable shipping
+business, and owned several vessels engaged in the
+coast and Alaska trade. Like all shipping men on
+the western coast, I learned of the many accounts,
+most of them fables, concerning the treasures on the
+islands in the South Seas, but they never had any
+effect on me until about three years ago, I had a
+hand in furnishing the outfit for a vessel which departed
+on such a mission, that sailed some time in
+December or January, of that year."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know the name of the vessel?" asked
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; the <i>Juan Ferde</i>. Why do you ask?"</p>
+
+<p>"I sailed in that vessel with Blakely, one of the
+owners."</p>
+
+<p>"Blakely? Blakely, did you say? Why he is the
+man who purchased all the provisions from me."</p>
+
+<p>"He is here on the island, and now has charge of
+all the business matters connected with our venture."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is remarkable, indeed; but I must proceed.
+Four months after the <i>Juan Ferde</i> sailed, I
+came into contact with a peculiar character, who had
+been all over the southern part of the universe, and
+he finally interested me sufficiently to look over some
+peculiar documents which he had, bearing on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_226" id="p_226" href="#p_226">p. 226</a></span>
+subject of the lost treasures, and from the information
+which he gave, it occurred to me that the location
+could not be far from the island where I was
+cast ashore.</p>
+
+<p>"With a good business, and entirely free from all
+family entanglements, I made up my mind that I
+would accompany him, and finance the undertaking.
+What induced me more than anything else, was the
+fact that the stories he told corresponded so nearly
+with the information which Blakely gave me, although
+the latter did not go into many details, that
+I looked on the venture in the nature of a lark. Besides
+I wanted to meet my old friends on the island,
+and possibly induce them to gather the products
+of the island for me.</p>
+
+<p>"We sailed about five months after the <i>Juan
+Ferde</i> left, and had a quick run to the island where
+it was supposed I had been left years before. It
+seems that at the time I landed there the tribe was
+at war, and we had a terrible time to get away from
+the people, who, of course, did not remember me,
+even though the tribe was the same, but of this I had
+no absolute knowledge at the time.</p>
+
+<p>"Two months after reaching the island, we sailed
+to the south, in order to explore the second island,
+noted on the chart, and it was then that the returning
+monsoon, which usually blows in the opposite
+direction from the one of six months before, wrecked
+the vessel, and the next day one of my companions
+and myself, who were so far as I then knew, the only
+survivors, reached the southern shore of an island,
+where we saw high mountains, so unlike those in the
+island where I was shipwrecked years before."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_227" id="p_227" href="#p_227">p. 227</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"While I think of it," remarked John, "how did
+you know about the second island, to which you refer?"</p>
+
+<p>"I learned this from Walter."</p>
+
+<p>"Then did you know anything about the skull on
+the headland, and the note which Walter left?"</p>
+
+<p>"I knew about the skull, but never heard of the
+note to which you refer. The discovery of the skull
+was an accident, and I attached no importance to it
+at the time. From the southern portion of the island
+we journeyed along the eastern coast, to the
+north, skirting a large forest on the way."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other, significantly, but
+he did not notice this.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we reached a large river, and to our surprise,
+found a boat, evidently of native manufacture,
+and with this floated down the stream to the sea."</p>
+
+<p>"But where did you get the rope that we found in
+the boat?" asked George, eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>He turned, and answered: "How did you know
+we put any rope on the boat?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because that was the boat we made, and we
+found it afterwards, with the strange rope and
+oars."</p>
+
+<p>"Strange oars. I know nothing about them. We
+used the oars found in the boat."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you get the boat near a large falls?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"And on the north side of the river?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but after we reached the sea, it was too
+rough, and the wind was blowing too heavily from
+the north to make it safe to navigate in that direction,
+so we went south, probably ten miles, and drew<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_228" id="p_228" href="#p_228">p. 228</a></span>
+ashore. The next morning when I awoke the boat
+and my companion were missing."</p>
+
+<p>"Who was your companion?"</p>
+
+<p>"Walter."</p>
+
+<p>John looked indignant, and expressed his opinion
+very forcibly, but Clifford held up his hand, restrainingly.
+"Do not be too harsh. I have no ill will
+toward him. I did not know what to do, nor which
+way to turn, but went to the west, and before night,
+came, unexpectedly, on the remains of a fire, which
+led me to believe that I would find friends in the inhabitants.</p>
+
+<p>"I went on and on, and caught up with the band,
+and was then horrified to find that they were having
+a feast, and sacrificing human beings. I saw Walter
+among the captives, but I could not contrive to let
+him know of my presence, and left the place as hurriedly
+as I could.</p>
+
+<p>"After a month of struggling I reached the southern
+part of the island, and there, to my joy, found
+three of my companions on a life boat, belonging to
+a vessel called the <i>Investigator</i>, and together we
+made a course southeast, and there found the location
+of the second skull."</p>
+
+<p>"But you knew nothing of that at the time, did
+you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I did not know what the marks on the skull were
+for, but the finding of the second one was sufficient
+to revive in me the hope that, after all, the treasure
+might be found. One of the men, who was the intimate
+of Walter, figured out the course to be taken,
+and we reached the island to the north the second
+day.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_229" id="p_229" href="#p_229">p. 229</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"There, to our surprise, we found Walter, and he
+charged one of the men with me, with trying to secure
+the treasure, but I finally patched up the matter,
+and we agreed to work in concert. Then, when
+the next day, we found that Walter had lost the
+chart, we felt that it was a trick on his part to deceive
+us, and we separated. At that time I did not
+believe he told us the truth.</p>
+
+<p>"Two days afterwards we passed a party of natives,
+who were not aware of our presence, and then
+we saw that Walter, and the man with him, had been
+captured, and later believed that they had been
+killed. We searched the island, to find the cave, but
+were unsuccessful and thinking that an error might
+have been made, we concluded to sail for the island
+to the south.</p>
+
+<p>"We found a tribe of natives when we landed, and
+owing to the exposure and the trials we had gone
+through I was taken ill, and grew worse and worse,
+and from that time on to the time I recovered two
+days ago, I had not the slightest idea of what
+passed."</p>
+
+<p>"When I spoke against Walter a few moments
+ago," said John, "you said he was not to blame.
+What did you mean by that?"</p>
+
+<p>"During my wanderings, I found parts of the
+chart, which, I assumed, had been lost by John, and,
+probably, destroyed by the natives. The part I recovered
+was of no value to me, but it entirely
+changed my opinion of Walter."</p>
+
+<p>But Clifford's story left something to be told. It
+did not explain why Walter tried to avoid meeting
+Clifford; or why he was so startled upon seeing the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_230" id="p_230" href="#p_230">p. 230</a></span>
+two skulls, or the reason for avoiding the reference
+to the letter to which his name was signed.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were so intensely interested in his story
+that they did not notice the entrance of Blakely, who
+had brought Walter back, but when Clifford saw
+Blakely there was immediate recognition.</p>
+
+<p>Clifford held out his hand to Walter, as he said:
+"I did wrong in doubting you. I understand from
+the statement made by Ta Babeda, that they found
+the chart the next day, after we met them, and that,
+of course, clears you."</p>
+
+<p>"But I would like to know," said Harry, "what
+the other part of the inscription on the skulls
+means?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you refer to the sign of plus and the V?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"When you went into the cave, where you found
+the copper box, how many chambers did you pass
+before coming to the large room?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am not sure," he answered, "but I think four."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and the case was found in the fifth chamber.
+The Plus sign indicated the cross-shaped cave,
+did it not?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and there are several other things which
+interest me," remarked George, gazing at John, as
+he continued: "Why should the inscriptions have
+been marked on the skulls?"</p>
+
+<p>John slowly shook his head, as he looked at Clifford.
+The latter gazed vacantly into space, as
+though reflecting, and finally said: "I do not
+know."</p>
+
+<p>It will be remembered that when Walter entered
+the Professor's room, where Clifford was lying, he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_231" id="p_231" href="#p_231">p. 231</a></span>
+appeared to be startled at the sight of the skulls.
+The copper box which held one of them was in the
+adjoining room.</p>
+
+<p>During the foregoing conversation Walter was
+mute, nor did he appear interested in the question
+propounded by George.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems most curious to me that the skull taken
+from the copper box has the inscription on the right
+side, whereas the other one has them on the left
+side," observed Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John and George saw the immediate change in
+Walter's face while Harry was speaking. His agitation
+was now plain to all, and the perspiration began
+to appear on his forehead.</p>
+
+<p>John leaned forward as he said: "Do you
+know?"</p>
+
+<p>Walter started at the vehemence of the question,
+and threw back his head, as he answered: "Did
+you find the copper box?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," responded John, with a look of triumph.</p>
+
+<p>Walter's features relaxed, and he seemed to sink
+down, as he gazed about him with a final look of despair.</p>
+
+<p>"Then the quest is ended!" he muttered.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean? Explain!" demanded
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"When I began the search for the treasure of the
+caves, I was the owner of the original document written
+by Juan Guiterez before he died in the Spanish
+prison. Three attempts had been made to find the
+island, which contained the secret, and that secret
+was in the copper box which told of the places and
+the locations of the other caves. In each case the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_232" id="p_232" href="#p_232">p. 232</a></span>
+quest failed, and all perished. The peculiar significance
+arises from the fact that the only directions
+were given on a human skull by Guiterez himself,
+who declared that two of the skulls would have the
+inscriptions on the left side, while the one with the
+cryptic signs on the right side would be accompanied
+by the descriptions of the locations of all the Caves
+on the different islands."</p>
+
+<p>"But why should there be three skulls?" asked
+George, in great eagerness.</p>
+
+<p>"There were three attempts, each resulting in
+death. The skull is emblematic of death."</p>
+
+<p>"Will you tell us why you tried to avoid Clifford,
+and were startled at the sight of the skulls?" asked
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"If, as you say, you have found the copper box, I
+have no further reason to remain silent. I found
+one of the skulls,&mdash;the others I could not find, one
+of which I knew must be in the treasure cave. If I
+had known you found the one in the cave I should
+not have tried to get away, as I hoped, finally, to
+find the cave. Since coming here I learned that you
+had found the third island; I knew of only two, and
+supposed that the two skulls were from those two,
+namely, Wonder and Venture Islands."</p>
+
+<p>"But who placed the skulls there?" queried
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah! No one knows that. The Spaniard Guiterez
+offers no explanation. All the so-called
+<i>treasure charts</i> have been made from the accounts
+which he gave, of the vast amount of gold and silver
+which is hidden in these natural caches. The place
+where the copper box was deposited is the grand<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_233" id="p_233" href="#p_233">p. 233</a></span>
+mausoleum. Only those who know the secret could
+ever reach the vault. All others would perish."</p>
+
+<p>"The carbonic gas!" exclaimed George.</p>
+
+<p>Walter turned to George, as he said this, but did
+not comprehend what he meant. It was now evident
+that Walter had tried to conceal his identity, and
+thereby hide the secret which would enable him
+alone to find the vast wealth.</p>
+
+<p>"So the letter which we found concealed in the
+seat of our boat, was written by one of your companions?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"This clears up the mysterious things which we
+have tried to fathom for over two years," said John.
+"The meaning of the letters is now clear."</p>
+
+<p>"From the time we landed on the island," rejoined
+the Professor, "we found evidences of white
+people that we could not follow up, and it is now
+plain that they were in search for the treasure, so
+we can now comprehend what the notes meant."</p>
+
+<p>There is but little more to add to the chapter pertaining
+to the experiences of the boys on the islands.
+Perhaps, at some time in the future, their work on
+the new islands will be told. What John and the
+boys found in the Copper box, the historical sketches
+and the locations of the treasure islands which were
+pointed out on the parchments found in the compartment
+below the skull, were amazing revelations of
+the days of piratical adventures, when the southern
+half of the world was one vast carnival of crime, in
+which gold was the only booty and to obtain which
+the means were always considered to be justified
+by the end.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_234" id="p_234" href="#p_234">p. 234</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Our young friends, during their experiences in
+southern waters, did their part in bringing to the uneducated
+savages the blessings of civilization and
+the great boon of peace. To themselves they
+brought a store of hard-earned knowledge and a
+memory of things well done that will last them to
+the end of their days.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><br /><br />THE END</p>
+
+<hr class='major' />
+
+<h2>THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS</h2>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">By ELBERT FISHER</p>
+<p class="titleblock"><i>12mo, Cloth.     Many Illustrations.     60c. per Volume</i></p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: 1.5em">This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who
+make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They
+meet with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their
+adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive
+matter relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries
+through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports
+of boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The
+books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each chapter,
+there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the author, and four
+striking halftones.</p>
+
+<p><b>1. From New York to the Golden Gate</b>, takes in many of the principal
+points between New York and California, and contains a highly
+entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a little
+useful information.</p>
+
+<p><b>2. From San Francisco to Japan</b>, relates the experiences of the two
+boys at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to
+Hawaii, Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent
+at sea, and a large amount of interesting information appears throughout
+the text.</p>
+
+<p><b>3. From Tokio to Bombay</b>. This book covers their interesting
+experiences in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong
+and finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a
+field seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the
+great Hyderabad region of South India.</p>
+
+<p><b>4. From India to the War Zone</b>, describes their trip toward the
+Persian Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the
+supposed site of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves
+with a caravan through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing
+the Holy Land, where they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean
+port of Joppa, and their experiences thereafter within the war
+zone are fully described.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="major" />
+
+<h2>THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS</h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Carpentry for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner
+all subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care
+and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work;
+the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures,
+and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two
+hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and
+includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the
+art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published
+for boys.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Electricity for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
+principles in each phase of the science, and practically
+applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the
+knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various
+phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within
+the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and
+is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Practical Mechanics for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of
+practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure
+and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized
+to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work
+is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building
+explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of
+cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in
+explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+<br />
+<i>Price 60 cents per volume</i>
+<br />
+</p>
+
+
+<table  style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;"
+width="380" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Morton" border="1">
+<tr><td>
+
+<h2>The Ethel Morton Books</h2>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">By MABELL S. C. SMITH</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">This series strikes a new note in the publication of books
+for girls. Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing
+experiences of our young friends are combined with a
+fund of information relating their accomplishment of things
+every girl wishes to know.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with
+many of the entertaining features of handcraft, elements
+of cooking, also of swimming, boating and similar pastimes.
+This information is so imparted as to hold the interest
+throughout. Many of the subjects treated are illustrated
+by halftones and line engravings throughout the
+text.</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1.5em;"><span class="smcap">LIST OF TITLES</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Chautauqua</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton and the Christmas Ship</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Holidays</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Rose House</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Enterprise</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Sweet Brier Lodge</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;"><i>Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid</i><br /></p>
+
+</td></tr></table>
+
+
+<table style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;"
+ width="380" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Mountain Boys" border="1">
+<tr><td>
+<h2><span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mountain</span> <span class="u">Boys</span> <span class="u">Series</span></h2>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">1. Phil Bradley's Mountain Boys</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">2. Phil Bradley at the Wheel</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">3. Phil Bradley's Shooting Box</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">4. Phil Bradley's Snow-Shoe Trail</span></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">These books describe with interesting
+detail the experiences of a party of boys
+among the mountain pines.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">They teach the young reader how to
+protect himself against the elements, what
+to do and what to avoid, and above all to
+become self-reliant and manly.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>12mo. * * * Cloth.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 1em;"><i>40 cents per volume; postpaid</i><br /><br /></p>
+
+</td></tr></table>
+
+
+<h2><span class="smcap">The Hickory Ridge Boy Scouts</span></h2>
+
+<h3>A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS</h3>
+<h4>By Capt. Alan Douglas, Scout-master</h4>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities to use
+their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad
+from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp
+life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should read.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Made Good</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+This tale presents many stirring situations in which some of the boys are called
+upon to exercise all their ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with
+healthful excitement.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the credit
+of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one after the other.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Fast Nine; or, a Challenge From Fairfield</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of the
+final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof, form a
+stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent years.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest undertaking.
+Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured rivalry of the
+different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing situations.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of apparent
+failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and surprise their most
+ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain Douglas has written.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Under Canvas; or, The Hunt for the Cartaret Ghost</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+It was hard to disbelieve the evidence of their eyes but the boys by the
+exercise of common-sense solved a mystery which had long puzzled older heads.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Storm-bound; or, a Vacation Among the Snow Drifts</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+The boys start out on the wrong track, but their scout training comes to the
+rescue and their experience proves beneficial to all concerned.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge Boy
+Scout Series, all illustrated:&mdash;</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+Wild Animals of the United States&mdash;Tracking&mdash;Trees and Wild Flowers of the
+United States&mdash;Reptiles of the United States&mdash;Fishes of the United States&mdash;Insects
+of the United States and Birds of the United States.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Cloth Binding  Cover Illustrations in Four Colors  40c. per volume</i></p>
+
+
+<table style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;"
+width="380" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Campfire" border="1">
+<tr><td>
+
+<h2>The Campfire and Trail Series</h2>
+
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td>
+<p>1. <span class="smcap">In Camp on the Big Sunflower</span>.<br />
+<br />
+2. <span class="smcap">The Rivals of the Trail</span>.<br />
+<br />
+3. <span class="smcap">The Strange Cabin on Catamount Island</span>.<br />
+<br />
+4. <span class="smcap">Lost in the Great Dismal Swamp</span>.<br />
+<br />
+5. <span class="smcap">With Trapper Jim in the North Woods</span>.<br />
+<br />
+6. <span class="smcap">Caught in a Forest Fire</span>.<br />
+<br />
+7. <span class="smcap">Chums of the Campfire</span>.<br />
+<br />
+8. <span class="smcap">Afloat on the Flood</span>.<br />
+</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1.5em;">By LAWRENCE J. LESLIE.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: .6em; line-height:1.6em;">A series of wholesome stories for boys told
+in an interesting way and appealing to their
+love of the open.</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;"><i>Each, 12mo.     Cloth.     40 cents per volume</i><br /></p>
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h2>Christy Mathewson's Book</h2>
+
+
+<table border="0" width="60%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="baseball">
+<tr><td>
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 161px;">
+<img src="images/illus-248.png" width="161" height="250" alt="&quot;WON IN THE NINTH&quot;" title="&quot;WON IN THE NINTH&quot;" />
+</div>
+<p style="margin-right:15%;margin-left:15%; line-height: 1.6em;">
+<i>A Ripping Good
+Baseball Story
+by One Who
+Knows the Game</i></p>
+
+<p style="line-height: 1.6em;">This book has attained a
+larger sale than any baseball
+story ever published.</p>
+
+<p style="line-height: 1.6em;">The narrative deals with the
+students of a large university
+and their baseball team, the members of which
+have names which enable the reader to recognize them
+as some of the foremost baseball stars of the day before
+their entrance into the major leagues.</p>
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td>
+<p style="line-height: 1.6em; clear: both;">One gains a very clear idea of "inside baseball"
+stripped of wearisome technicalities. The book is profusely
+illustrated throughout and contains also a number
+of plates showing the manner in which Mathewson
+throws his deceptive curves, together with brief description
+of each.</p>
+</td></tr></table>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<i>Cloth bound 5&frac12; x 7&#8541;      Price 60c. per volume</i>
+</p>
+
+<hr class="major" />
+<h2>Mrs. Meade's Books for Girls</h2>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;"><i>Primrose Edition</i></p>
+
+
+<p class="center" style="font-size: 70%">Printed on fine quality book paper. Separate cover designs in colors.</p>
+
+<table width="400" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" border="0" summary="Meade">
+<tr><td>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">Daddy's Girl.</p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">A Girl from America.</p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">Sue, a Little Heroine.</p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">The School Queens.</p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">Wild Kitty.</p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">A Sweet Girl Graduate.</p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">A World of Girls.</p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">Polly&mdash;A New-Fashioned Girl.</p>
+</td></tr></table>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;"><i>Each, 12mo.    Cloth.     40 cents per volume</i></p>
+
+<p class="center" style="font-size: 130%">Mrs. Meade's girls' books never</p>
+<p class="center" style="font-size: 130%; margin-bottom: 1em;">lose their popularity.</p>
+
+<hr class="major" />
+
+
+<h2><span class="u">ECONOMICAL</span> <span class="u">COOKING</span></h2>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;"><i>Primrose Edition</i></p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-size: 125%;"><i>Planned for Two or More Persons</i></p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px;font-size: 80%; margin-bottom: 1em;">By</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock">MISS WINIFRED S. GIBBS</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-size: 70%;">Dietitian and Teacher of Cooking of the New York</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-size: 70%;margin-bottom: 1em;">Association for Improving the Condition of the Poor</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-bottom: 1em;"><i>Printed on Fine Quality Book Paper. Cover Design in Colors</i></p>
+
+<p class="noindent"><span class="smcap">Many</span> Cook Books have been published, from time
+to time, to meet various requirements, or to elucidate
+certain theories, but very few have been written to
+meet the needs of the large proportion of our population
+who are acutely affected by the constantly increasing
+cost of food products. Notwithstanding that by its
+valuable suggestions this book helps to reduce the expense
+of supplying the table, the recipes are so planned that
+the economies effected thereby are not offset by any
+lessening in the attractiveness, variety or palatability of
+the dishes.</p>
+<p>
+Of equal importance are the sections of this work
+which deal with food values, the treatment of infants and
+invalids and the proper service of various dishes.</p>
+<p>
+The recipes are planned for two persons, but may
+readily be adapted for a larger number. The book is
+replete with illustrations and tables of food compositions&mdash;the
+latter taken from the latest Government statistics.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Cloth Binding  Illustrated  40c. per volume, postpaid</i></p>
+
+
+<hr class="major" />
+<h2>CUT-OUT AND PAINT BOOKS</h2>
+
+<table style="clear: both" border="0" width="80%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="cut-out books">
+<col style="width:40%;" />
+<col style="width:60%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr>
+  <td align="left"><div class="figleft" style="width: 163px;">
+<img src="images/illus-251.png" width="163" height="198"
+ alt="SCISSORS BOOK Dolls of All Nations" title="SCISSORS BOOK Dolls of All Nations" />
+</div></td>
+  <td align="left"><p style="line-height: 1.5em; margin-left: 0%;">
+An original line of art studies printed in full rich colors on high
+grade paper. This series introduces many novel features of interest, and
+as the subject matters have been selected with unusual care, the books
+make a strong appeal not only to the little ones but even to those of
+riper years.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr style="font-size: 120%;">
+  <td align="left" style="margin-left: 10%;"><b>Post Cards</b> </td>
+  <td class="pr"> <i>Painting Book</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr style="font-size: 120%;">
+  <td align="left" style="margin-left: 10%;"><b>Dolls of all Nations</b> </td>
+  <td class="pr"> <i>Scissors Book</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr style="font-size: 120%;">
+  <td align="left" style="margin-left: 10%;"><b>Our Army</b> </td>
+  <td class="pr"> <i>Scissors Book</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr style="font-size: 120%;">
+  <td align="left" style="margin-left: 10%;"><b>Children's Pets</b> </td>
+  <td class="pr"> <i>Puzzle Book</i></td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+<p class="center"><i>Size 8&frac14; x 10&frac14; inches</i></p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-bottom: 3em;"><b>Price 15c. per copy</b></p>
+
+<p class="center" style="word-spacing: 0.4em;">
+THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY<br />
+147 FOURTH AVENUE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;NEW YORK
+</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES OF THE ISLAND***</p>
+<p>******* This file should be named 21810-h.txt or 21810-h.zip *******</p>
+<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br />
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/8/1/21810</a></p>
+<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.</p>
+
+<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.</p>
+
+
+
+<pre>
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>.
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a>
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a>
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a>
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/21810-h/images/cover-spine.jpg b/21810-h/images/cover-spine.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41b35cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/cover-spine.jpg
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-003.png b/21810-h/images/illus-003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81654f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-003.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-037-fig1.png b/21810-h/images/illus-037-fig1.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a672d21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-037-fig1.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-043-fig2.png b/21810-h/images/illus-043-fig2.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1895976
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-043-fig2.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-046-fig3.png b/21810-h/images/illus-046-fig3.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e346584
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-046-fig3.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-055-fig4.png b/21810-h/images/illus-055-fig4.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d7c471
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-055-fig4.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-060.png b/21810-h/images/illus-060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3bb235
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-060.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-078-fig5.png b/21810-h/images/illus-078-fig5.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d346b4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-078-fig5.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-079-fig6.png b/21810-h/images/illus-079-fig6.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8f5e9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-079-fig6.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-093-fig7.png b/21810-h/images/illus-093-fig7.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b6c9350
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-093-fig7.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-097-fig8.png b/21810-h/images/illus-097-fig8.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15649d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-097-fig8.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-122-fig9.png b/21810-h/images/illus-122-fig9.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9504c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-122-fig9.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-132-fig10.png b/21810-h/images/illus-132-fig10.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7927a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-132-fig10.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-142.gif b/21810-h/images/illus-142.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21ded4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-142.gif
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-152-fig11.png b/21810-h/images/illus-152-fig11.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e38223b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-152-fig11.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-159-fig12.png b/21810-h/images/illus-159-fig12.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5bea24c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-159-fig12.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-160.png b/21810-h/images/illus-160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3bad99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-160.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-166-fig13.png b/21810-h/images/illus-166-fig13.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21fba8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-166-fig13.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-167-fig14.png b/21810-h/images/illus-167-fig14.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..637defd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-167-fig14.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-248.png b/21810-h/images/illus-248.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4fae9df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-248.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-251.png b/21810-h/images/illus-251.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72793a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-251.png
diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-nybc.png b/21810-h/images/illus-nybc.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a9077e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-h/images/illus-nybc.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/c001.jpg b/21810-page-images/c001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8eda039
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/c001.jpg
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f001.png b/21810-page-images/f001.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a876ec6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f001.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f002.png b/21810-page-images/f002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85fe43d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f002.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f003.png b/21810-page-images/f003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81654f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f003.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f004.png b/21810-page-images/f004.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a4d3ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f004.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f005.png b/21810-page-images/f005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10bed69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f005.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f006.png b/21810-page-images/f006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce41184
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f006.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f007.png b/21810-page-images/f007.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..864175c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f007.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f008.png b/21810-page-images/f008.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af0fd95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f008.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f009.png b/21810-page-images/f009.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba842d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f009.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f010.png b/21810-page-images/f010.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..296325f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f010.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f011.png b/21810-page-images/f011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a94fe24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f011.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f012.png b/21810-page-images/f012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b797159
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f012.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f013.png b/21810-page-images/f013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cec68e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f013.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/f014.png b/21810-page-images/f014.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..601c686
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/f014.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p015.png b/21810-page-images/p015.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06e428e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p015.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p016.png b/21810-page-images/p016.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40dc8b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p016.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p017.png b/21810-page-images/p017.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40f31fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p017.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p018.png b/21810-page-images/p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e98386f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p018.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p019.png b/21810-page-images/p019.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..854c19b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p019.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p020.png b/21810-page-images/p020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f612d16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p020.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p021.png b/21810-page-images/p021.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d89417
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p021.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p022.png b/21810-page-images/p022.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..078ca6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p022.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p023.png b/21810-page-images/p023.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed253ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p023.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p024.png b/21810-page-images/p024.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0e4364
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p024.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p025.png b/21810-page-images/p025.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0622277
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p025.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p026.png b/21810-page-images/p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bd846f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p026.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p027.png b/21810-page-images/p027.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0eb26b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p027.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p028.png b/21810-page-images/p028.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ae879b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p028.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p029.png b/21810-page-images/p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..16cb17e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p029.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p030.png b/21810-page-images/p030.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7bd1b00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p030.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p031.png b/21810-page-images/p031.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d02025
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p031.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p032.png b/21810-page-images/p032.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8bcaa9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p032.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p033.png b/21810-page-images/p033.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6fab38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p033.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p034.png b/21810-page-images/p034.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b050a58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p034.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p035.png b/21810-page-images/p035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aec9e85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p035.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p036.png b/21810-page-images/p036.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0eb8f4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p036.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p037.png b/21810-page-images/p037.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bac148a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p037.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p038.png b/21810-page-images/p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a3dfbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p038.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p039.png b/21810-page-images/p039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..461bc77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p039.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p040.png b/21810-page-images/p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52033e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p040.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p041.png b/21810-page-images/p041.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9052165
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p041.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p042.png b/21810-page-images/p042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08e9f80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p042.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p043.png b/21810-page-images/p043.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20de863
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p043.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p044.png b/21810-page-images/p044.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9af2ed7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p044.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p045.png b/21810-page-images/p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b98d168
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p045.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p046.png b/21810-page-images/p046.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d25353
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p046.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p047.png b/21810-page-images/p047.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5bee3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p047.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p048.png b/21810-page-images/p048.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb38da9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p048.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p049.png b/21810-page-images/p049.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0cb3f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p049.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p050.png b/21810-page-images/p050.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..067a210
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p050.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p051.png b/21810-page-images/p051.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91db5ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p051.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p052.png b/21810-page-images/p052.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8892fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p052.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p053.png b/21810-page-images/p053.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c898fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p053.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p054.png b/21810-page-images/p054.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a47370
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p054.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p055.png b/21810-page-images/p055.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e8044b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p055.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p056.png b/21810-page-images/p056.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0105288
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p056.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p057.png b/21810-page-images/p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1de20d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p057.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p058-insert.png b/21810-page-images/p058-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3bb235
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p058-insert.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p058.png b/21810-page-images/p058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd30185
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p058.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p059.png b/21810-page-images/p059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..096e3a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p059.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p060.png b/21810-page-images/p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..87c8376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p060.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p061.png b/21810-page-images/p061.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8541cd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p061.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p062.png b/21810-page-images/p062.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ea5b43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p062.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p063.png b/21810-page-images/p063.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..140e8ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p063.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p064.png b/21810-page-images/p064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a997f5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p064.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p065.png b/21810-page-images/p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d59a49c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p065.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p066.png b/21810-page-images/p066.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4edac3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p066.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p067.png b/21810-page-images/p067.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a806ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p067.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p068.png b/21810-page-images/p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..17fd3a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p068.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p069.png b/21810-page-images/p069.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71ecec2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p069.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p070.png b/21810-page-images/p070.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da38a7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p070.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p071.png b/21810-page-images/p071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..930dad4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p071.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p072.png b/21810-page-images/p072.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1251b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p072.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p073.png b/21810-page-images/p073.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d88bb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p073.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p074.png b/21810-page-images/p074.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..551e90e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p074.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p075.png b/21810-page-images/p075.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a8a13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p075.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p076.png b/21810-page-images/p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5520b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p076.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p077.png b/21810-page-images/p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..24cc664
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p077.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p078.png b/21810-page-images/p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d927438
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p078.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p079.png b/21810-page-images/p079.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b183a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p079.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p080.png b/21810-page-images/p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ceb251
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p080.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p081.png b/21810-page-images/p081.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd2b52b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p081.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p082.png b/21810-page-images/p082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a887bd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p082.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p083.png b/21810-page-images/p083.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a2ed5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p083.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p084.png b/21810-page-images/p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7bad9c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p084.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p085.png b/21810-page-images/p085.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e9d6a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p085.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p086.png b/21810-page-images/p086.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2637d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p086.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p087.png b/21810-page-images/p087.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb9fe48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p087.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p088.png b/21810-page-images/p088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73ec639
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p088.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p089.png b/21810-page-images/p089.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5791d08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p089.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p090.png b/21810-page-images/p090.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d6082a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p090.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p091.png b/21810-page-images/p091.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7d708c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p091.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p092.png b/21810-page-images/p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5750d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p092.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p093.png b/21810-page-images/p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50203b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p093.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p094.png b/21810-page-images/p094.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4fbb526
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p094.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p095.png b/21810-page-images/p095.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9edc8bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p095.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p096.png b/21810-page-images/p096.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..367d6d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p096.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p097.png b/21810-page-images/p097.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c863f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p097.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p098.png b/21810-page-images/p098.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28f6a85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p098.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p099.png b/21810-page-images/p099.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a09cab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p099.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p100.png b/21810-page-images/p100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d07090
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p100.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p101.png b/21810-page-images/p101.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12c2eb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p101.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p102.png b/21810-page-images/p102.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f2f205
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p102.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p103.png b/21810-page-images/p103.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cfa775
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p103.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p104.png b/21810-page-images/p104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a88e52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p104.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p105.png b/21810-page-images/p105.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..318d4d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p105.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p106.png b/21810-page-images/p106.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3e8ad0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p106.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p107.png b/21810-page-images/p107.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..989a905
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p107.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p108.png b/21810-page-images/p108.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..531c392
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p108.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p109.png b/21810-page-images/p109.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..270848f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p109.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p110.png b/21810-page-images/p110.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60b93c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p110.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p111.png b/21810-page-images/p111.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2618b41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p111.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p112.png b/21810-page-images/p112.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82c4249
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p112.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p113.png b/21810-page-images/p113.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2052085
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p113.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p114.png b/21810-page-images/p114.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f25af4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p114.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p115.png b/21810-page-images/p115.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a96af0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p115.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p116.png b/21810-page-images/p116.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7734cf0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p116.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p117.png b/21810-page-images/p117.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d232045
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p117.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p118.png b/21810-page-images/p118.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d48549
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p118.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p119.png b/21810-page-images/p119.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99240ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p119.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p120.png b/21810-page-images/p120.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e232bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p120.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p121.png b/21810-page-images/p121.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8261fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p121.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p122.png b/21810-page-images/p122.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb85681
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p122.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p123.png b/21810-page-images/p123.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2278026
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p123.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p124.png b/21810-page-images/p124.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa88d5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p124.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p125.png b/21810-page-images/p125.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9a6f41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p125.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p126.png b/21810-page-images/p126.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c07912e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p126.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p127.png b/21810-page-images/p127.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e269e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p127.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p128.png b/21810-page-images/p128.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d494e2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p128.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p129.png b/21810-page-images/p129.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..833248f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p129.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p130.png b/21810-page-images/p130.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29aff3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p130.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p131.png b/21810-page-images/p131.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4211c44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p131.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p132.png b/21810-page-images/p132.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31a9884
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p132.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p133.png b/21810-page-images/p133.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5332770
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p133.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p134.png b/21810-page-images/p134.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00c15ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p134.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p135.png b/21810-page-images/p135.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aedc170
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p135.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p136.png b/21810-page-images/p136.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7eeb4a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p136.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p137.png b/21810-page-images/p137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8cb62af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p137.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p138-insert.png b/21810-page-images/p138-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..116cc89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p138-insert.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p138.png b/21810-page-images/p138.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6dfcb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p138.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p139.png b/21810-page-images/p139.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f8c455
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p139.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p140.png b/21810-page-images/p140.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f27729d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p140.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p141.png b/21810-page-images/p141.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..407dbfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p141.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p142.png b/21810-page-images/p142.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a10a83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p142.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p143.png b/21810-page-images/p143.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d346e31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p143.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p144.png b/21810-page-images/p144.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21631f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p144.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p145.png b/21810-page-images/p145.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7ef393
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p145.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p146.png b/21810-page-images/p146.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d191c0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p146.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p147.png b/21810-page-images/p147.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9319d61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p147.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p148.png b/21810-page-images/p148.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..001aa2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p148.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p149.png b/21810-page-images/p149.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bd7ee1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p149.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p150.png b/21810-page-images/p150.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..037317f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p150.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p151.png b/21810-page-images/p151.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb2802a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p151.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p152.png b/21810-page-images/p152.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53ddef6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p152.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p153.png b/21810-page-images/p153.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a43d7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p153.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p154-insert.png b/21810-page-images/p154-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3bad99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p154-insert.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p154.png b/21810-page-images/p154.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca7beb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p154.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p155.png b/21810-page-images/p155.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9fe3f5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p155.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p156.png b/21810-page-images/p156.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e68f5a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p156.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p157.png b/21810-page-images/p157.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05889b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p157.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p158.png b/21810-page-images/p158.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6be183
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p158.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p159.png b/21810-page-images/p159.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8d4bb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p159.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p160.png b/21810-page-images/p160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb4653b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p160.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p161.png b/21810-page-images/p161.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f0b1c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p161.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p162.png b/21810-page-images/p162.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d654ce3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p162.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p163.png b/21810-page-images/p163.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a3119b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p163.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p164.png b/21810-page-images/p164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e97ecfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p164.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p165.png b/21810-page-images/p165.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ce2c7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p165.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p166.png b/21810-page-images/p166.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7548667
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p166.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p167.png b/21810-page-images/p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b21501b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p167.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p168.png b/21810-page-images/p168.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d9d96fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p168.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p169.png b/21810-page-images/p169.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9da0621
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p169.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p170.png b/21810-page-images/p170.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f2c05f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p170.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p171.png b/21810-page-images/p171.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c19380d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p171.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p172.png b/21810-page-images/p172.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..830e6fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p172.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p173.png b/21810-page-images/p173.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca25f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p173.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p174.png b/21810-page-images/p174.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b575b0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p174.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p175.png b/21810-page-images/p175.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a9893a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p175.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p176.png b/21810-page-images/p176.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b25a471
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p176.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p177.png b/21810-page-images/p177.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93b1bcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p177.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p178.png b/21810-page-images/p178.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..085feda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p178.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p179.png b/21810-page-images/p179.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9b13b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p179.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p180.png b/21810-page-images/p180.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed83ef6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p180.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p181.png b/21810-page-images/p181.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b274816
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p181.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p182.png b/21810-page-images/p182.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae16419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p182.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p183.png b/21810-page-images/p183.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36e25bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p183.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p184.png b/21810-page-images/p184.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c760e83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p184.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p185.png b/21810-page-images/p185.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..793a37e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p185.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p186.png b/21810-page-images/p186.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cd6216
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p186.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p187.png b/21810-page-images/p187.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4c2547
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p187.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p188.png b/21810-page-images/p188.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aec57ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p188.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p189.png b/21810-page-images/p189.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e68a5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p189.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p190.png b/21810-page-images/p190.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60298a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p190.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p191.png b/21810-page-images/p191.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8fc4b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p191.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p192.png b/21810-page-images/p192.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51e26ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p192.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p193.png b/21810-page-images/p193.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3afa603
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p193.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p194.png b/21810-page-images/p194.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f55354
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p194.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p195.png b/21810-page-images/p195.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f139ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p195.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p196.png b/21810-page-images/p196.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f653a80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p196.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p197.png b/21810-page-images/p197.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c358309
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p197.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p198.png b/21810-page-images/p198.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f6a21a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p198.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p199.png b/21810-page-images/p199.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6205ba9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p199.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p200.png b/21810-page-images/p200.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..87719f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p200.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p201.png b/21810-page-images/p201.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a93bd7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p201.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p202.png b/21810-page-images/p202.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..607c299
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p202.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p203.png b/21810-page-images/p203.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d9bc451
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p203.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p204.png b/21810-page-images/p204.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca53243
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p204.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p205.png b/21810-page-images/p205.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7782acb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p205.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p206.png b/21810-page-images/p206.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37ab880
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p206.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p207.png b/21810-page-images/p207.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53924e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p207.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p208.png b/21810-page-images/p208.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e68ef32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p208.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p209.png b/21810-page-images/p209.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb1e054
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p209.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p210.png b/21810-page-images/p210.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4221090
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p210.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p211.png b/21810-page-images/p211.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3d923f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p211.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p212.png b/21810-page-images/p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a7a092
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p212.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p213.png b/21810-page-images/p213.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d1be00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p213.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p214.png b/21810-page-images/p214.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f24d412
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p214.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p215.png b/21810-page-images/p215.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1915c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p215.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p216.png b/21810-page-images/p216.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3fdf29e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p216.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p217.png b/21810-page-images/p217.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..740df61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p217.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p218.png b/21810-page-images/p218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba6878e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p218.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p219.png b/21810-page-images/p219.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08e9671
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p219.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p220.png b/21810-page-images/p220.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0e4a36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p220.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p221.png b/21810-page-images/p221.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..557b049
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p221.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p222.png b/21810-page-images/p222.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e14be42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p222.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p223.png b/21810-page-images/p223.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..871690e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p223.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p224.png b/21810-page-images/p224.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..376d769
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p224.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p225.png b/21810-page-images/p225.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d9fc24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p225.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p226.png b/21810-page-images/p226.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d809dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p226.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p227.png b/21810-page-images/p227.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f422012
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p227.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p228.png b/21810-page-images/p228.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..887720d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p228.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p229.png b/21810-page-images/p229.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54c5102
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p229.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p230.png b/21810-page-images/p230.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ffdeb5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p230.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p231.png b/21810-page-images/p231.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23ae054
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p231.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p232.png b/21810-page-images/p232.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b79d6ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p232.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p233.png b/21810-page-images/p233.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e20752
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p233.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p234.png b/21810-page-images/p234.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc9766b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p234.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p235.png b/21810-page-images/p235.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c8aca7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p235.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p236.png b/21810-page-images/p236.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..def425d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p236.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p237.png b/21810-page-images/p237.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6434143
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p237.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p238.png b/21810-page-images/p238.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b30ed83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p238.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p239.png b/21810-page-images/p239.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21fd239
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p239.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p240.png b/21810-page-images/p240.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f995aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p240.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p241.png b/21810-page-images/p241.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..250bcf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p241.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p242.png b/21810-page-images/p242.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b28cae8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p242.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p243.png b/21810-page-images/p243.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..11b0a76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p243.png
diff --git a/21810-page-images/p244.png b/21810-page-images/p244.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1d5db3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810-page-images/p244.png
diff --git a/21810.txt b/21810.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac8bbde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7982 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the
+Island, by Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the Island
+
+
+Author: Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+
+Release Date: June 11, 2007  [eBook #21810]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES
+OF THE ISLAND***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Joe Longo and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+      file which includes the original illustrations.
+      See 21810-h.htm or 21810-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810/21810-h/21810-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810/21810-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating the remarkable
+experiences of two boys and a man, who are cast upon an island in the
+South Seas with absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the
+exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning clothing, tools
+and weapons and not only do they train nature's forces to work for them
+but they subdue and finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The
+books contain two thousand items of interest that every boy ought to
+know.
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Castaways
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+               Exploring the Island
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Mysteries of the Caverns
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Tribesmen
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+              The Capture and Pursuit
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Conquest of the Savages
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+          Adventures on Strange Islands
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+             Treasures of the Islands
+
+        _Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations.
+             60 cents per vol., postpaid._
+
+                    PUBLISHED BY
+             THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+          147 FOURTH AVENUE    NEW YORK
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS
+
+[Illustration: "_The scout from the rear now came in with a leap_"
+[See p. 27]]
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+Illustrated
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+The New York Book Company
+New York
+Copyright, 1915, by
+The New York Book Company
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+CHAPTER
+
+I. THE PECULIAR SIGNALS                         Page 15
+
+     The doleful sound. The Alma Perdita. "Cry of the Lost
+     Soul." John, Uraso and Muro listening to the signals of
+     the enemies. The night watch. Stalking. The answering
+     cry. The Konotos. Sacrificial feasts. The dark of the
+     moon. Its significance. The language of birds and
+     animals. Their meaning. Discovery of cannibals. The
+     telltale bone. Evidence of more than one tribe. Strange
+     customs. Sacrifices of ancient times. Mexican rites.
+     Superstitions. Previous history of the boys. Varney,
+     Uraso and Muro. The Professor. The wreck and adventures.
+     John's search for records, and inscriptions. Mysterious
+     happenings. Waiting for morning. The plan outlined. The
+     days of the sacrifices. Determine to prevent the killing
+     of captives. Discovery of the natives in vicinity.
+     Investigating the hills.
+
+II. THE SAVAGES ON THE HILL                     Page 26
+
+     John's instructions. John and Muro scouting. The natives
+     intercepting Uraso. Preparing to resist the attack. The
+     signaling instrument. A shot. A hurried report from the
+     scout. Sending a messenger to Muro. The puzzled natives.
+     Muro attacked. Marching east. Muro in danger. Making a
+     demonstration. The weird drums. The ambush. The approach
+     of the natives. The attempt to be friendly. The Chief's
+     refusal. The appearance of Uraso. Uraso's ruse. The
+     savages confounded. Muro surrounded. His escape. The
+     savages retreating. Muro's story. Muro's efforts to make
+     friends of the natives. Driving them from the woods. The
+     sea of the east. The runner to the landing. The peculiar
+     drums. The Marimba. The mountain deer.
+
+III. CAPTURE OF THE VILLAGE                     Page 38
+
+     The trying time at night. No selfishness in education.
+     The evening talks. Astronomy and early humanity. Savage
+     rites determined and carried out by the signs of the
+     stars. The Zodiac. Its origin. The universal
+     superstitions. A common origin. The continents. The
+     theory of a mid-Atlantean continent. The theory of the
+     joined continents. Language as a criterion of the unity
+     of the races. The pyramids. The tales of the Egyptian
+     priests. The deep sea soundings by the ship _Challenger_.
+     The beating of the weird drums in the night. Evidence of
+     the natives' belief in witch doctors. The plan of advance
+     outlined by John. The boys, accompanied by John and
+     portion of the force advancing. Nearing the village.
+     Hearing the shouting and the drums. Causes of the
+     demonstrations. A captive. At the edge of the village. A
+     curious proceeding. A huge Chief. The witch doctors.
+     Their fantastic garb. The Chief's defiance. Demands
+     return of the captured Chief. Asks John to surrender.
+     Commands the Korinos to destroy captive. They bring
+     forward Tarra, their own messenger. The warning. The
+     shot.
+
+IV. RESCUING A WHITE CAPTIVE                    Page 53
+
+     Tarra freed. When captured. The fallen witch doctor. The
+     surprise. The warning from Uraso. Exorcising the bad
+     spirits. The influence of noise on savage minds. The gun
+     silencers. The savages insist on aiding their fallen
+     witch doctor. The shot with the silencer. The awe
+     produced. John the white Korino. The terror among the
+     natives. The Chief retreats. Entering the village. The
+     Chief and people flee. The reserves come up. The sick and
+     wounded in the village. A prison stockade. Rescuing
+     prisoners. Their terrible plight. A white captive. The
+     stockade burned. Learning about the tribes on the island.
+     The messenger to the Chief. The latter's message. John's
+     bold march to see the Chief. Astounded at John's bravery.
+     John's peace pact with the Chief. The return to the
+     village. The Chief assured of the friendship of John and
+     his people. Learning about the other tribe. One sun to
+     the north. The Chief told why the white Chief was so
+     powerful. Wisdom. John's practical example to the Chief.
+
+V. RETURN OF THE NATIVES                        Page 66
+
+     Trinkets. Adornments for the natives. Gifts. The day
+     appointed for the sacrifices. John and party invited by
+     the Chief. John sends for the gifts. The _Pioneer_ at the
+     landing. Sails to the native village. The Korinos called
+     before the Chief. He demands that they produce the
+     captives for sacrifice. The Korinos learn of the
+     destruction of the stockade, and the release of the
+     captives. The Chief condemns the Korinos to take their
+     places. John secures delay. At the beach. The natives
+     gathering clams for the feast. The Korinos and their
+     caves. A sail. The boys spread the news. The signal. The
+     natives wonder at the sight of the vessel. The _Pioneer_.
+     The feast that night. Spitting meat. The natives'
+     customs. Vegetables. The drink. Arialad. The value of the
+     root. Ginseng.
+
+VI. THE SAVAGE CEREMONIALS                      Page 78
+
+     The day for the ceremonies. The native cloth weaving.
+     Dyeing. Black and red. The grotesque figures. The spears.
+     The colored streamers. The covered points. The flag idea.
+     A brilliant scheme by the boys. The band for the
+     ceremonies. A procession. The ship's band. The leader.
+     The enthusiasm in the village. The dancing natives.
+     Arranging the order of the procession. The tall man and
+     huge spear. The Korinos. The band and the flag at the
+     procession. The leader. The magnolia trees. The march to
+     the forest. The great tree on the hill. The ceremony.
+     Striking the tree. The flower at the top. How it was
+     brought down. The rite of the flower. Incineration. The
+     powder. The dance. Return of the procession.
+
+VII. SIGNIFICANCE OF NATIVE RITES               Page 88
+
+     Fasting before the feast. Great success of the ceremony.
+     The significance of the flower rites. Ancient origin of
+     rites. Explaining customs which followed the practice of
+     scalping. Head hunters. The hair token. The flower before
+     the fruit. The Druids. The ceremonia of the mistletoe.
+     The antidote. The oak as a sacred tree. The great feast
+     after the ceremony. Table implements. The Korinos. Where
+     they were imprisoned. Prepared for the sacrifice. Their
+     attempted escape. Gluttony. Habits of savages in this
+     respect. The siesta. The boys discover the escape of the
+     Korinos. The Marmozets. The tall native with the knotted
+     club. His remarkable garb. The Chief's crown. The
+     club-bearer reports the escape of the Korinos. The
+     Chief's anger. Arrests the guards. Condemns them to
+     suffer instead of the Korinos. The procession to the
+     place of sacrifice. The sacrificial altar.
+
+VIII. HYPNOTISM ON SAVAGES                      Page 100
+
+     John's suggestion to the Chief. Asks that he be made the
+     executioner. Uraso's address to the culprits. Their
+     terror. Mysticism. Hypnotic influences. Mesmerism.
+     Constant repetitions. Mystic numbers. The spell on all
+     the natives. The effect of the mesmeric influence on the
+     Chief. The rigid subjects. John the peerless Korino. The
+     threats against the witch doctors. Bringing the victims
+     to life. Amazement of the people. The Chief's address to
+     his people. The return to the village. The feast. The
+     mystic third. The dance at the end of the festival. To
+     settle the fate of the Korinos. The recovery of the
+     faculties of the white captive. His story. The identity
+     of the skeleton found on Venture Island. Identified with
+     Walter. The story which was doubted by John. The rescued
+     natives. The Maloses. Ta Babeda. The tribe to the north.
+     Distributing the gifts. The delight of the Chief. Telling
+     him about the wonders of Wonder Island. The invitation to
+     the Chief.
+
+IX. THE REMARKABLE CAVE EXPLORATIONS            Page 113
+
+     The Umbolos, to the north. The supposed cannibals.
+     Determine to visit them. Preparing for the expedition.
+     Chief Ta Babeda cautions John against the cannibal Chief
+     Rumisses. John requests permission to take the Korinos
+     with him. He consents provided John will enter the cave
+     and take them. The trip to the cave. The Chief
+     accompanies John to the cave. Superstitions about the
+     caves. Why no one but the Korinos dare enter the caves.
+     The hill near the ocean. The cove near the entrance of
+     the cave. The flashlights. Lighting the caverns.
+     Evidences of habitations. The escape of the Korinos.
+     Following the trail. The outlet to the south. Tracked to
+     the north. Uraso and Muro follow the fugitives. Their
+     flight to the cannibal tribe. John and the boys return to
+     explore the cave. A new series of caverns. A succession
+     of four chambers. A large round chamber at the end of the
+     lead. A mound in the center of the chamber. Removing the
+     material in the mound. Discovery of the copper box.
+     Peculiar character of the box.
+
+X. THE TRIBE TO THE NORTH                       Page 125
+
+     The copper box taken to the ship. News from Uraso and
+     Muro. Explaining mesmerism and hypnotism. Concentration.
+     The effect on susceptible minds. The Korinos safe with
+     the cannibal tribe. John advises Stut to sail, north for
+     twenty miles, and await their coming. The march. The
+     cinnamon tree. Cinnamon suet. Minerals. Sulphates. Copper
+     ores. Omens. All peoples believe in signs and omens. The
+     shelter for the night. How signals were made. Sighting
+     the cannibal village. Earthenware cooking utensils. Meet
+     the first natives. The dreaded Chief. A curious figure.
+     The hunchback. A smile on his face. The American
+     greeting. The surprise. A white man. Finding the Korinos.
+     The welcome to his village. The Chief told about their
+     ship. On the island fifty years. Telling John about the
+     strange things which have floated ashore from wrecked
+     ships. The Korinos assured of safety.
+
+XI. THE HUNCHBACK CHIEF                         Page 138
+
+     The Chief's house. The relics from the sea. The hunchback
+     Chief's story. His trip as a whaler. Ill treatment. Runs
+     away. Ships to China. His rudimentary education.
+     Shipwrecked on the return from China. Rescued by native
+     cannibals. Regard him with veneration. Misinterprets
+     their motives. In desperation. Asserts himself. Becomes
+     Chief of the tribe. Stops cannibal practices. His great
+     influence over the people. The _Pioneer_ arrives. Ephraim
+     Wilmar, the hunchback. His surprise at the many changes
+     during fifty years. His amazement at the telephone, the
+     cable lines, the phonograph.
+
+XII. THE CHIEF'S FAMILY                         Page 148
+
+     Ephraim's wife. The family. The gifts to Ephraim's
+     family. Delight at the cooking utensils. John tells
+     Ephraim about the treasures on the islands. Hidden
+     treasures. Learning the secrets of early humanity.
+     Archeology. The trip to the cave. The long journey. The
+     cave which had the entrances sealed by Ephraim. The
+     peculiar kinds of masonry. Entering the cave. Dogs with
+     the party. Mysterious death of the dogs. The alarm of the
+     natives. Carbonic gas. Its nature, and how tested.
+     Methods for removing it. The Humphrey Davy lamp. The
+     principle on which it is made. Designed to indicate the
+     presence of deadly gases. Explosive mixtures. How a
+     primitive safety lamp was made. Reentering the cave. A
+     large chamber. The cross-shaped cave. A parchment. The
+     object of John's search.
+
+XIII. THE CHART AND THE CAVES                   Page 164
+
+     The map accompanying the parchment. One of the Treasure
+     caves. Remarkable carvings, and hieroglyphics. The
+     quarrel of the buccaneers. The story of the Spaniard who
+     wrote the chart. The expeditions searching for the
+     treasure. Death of all who participated. Great
+     archeological wealth. No material treasures found. How
+     Ephraim's story affected the boys. John explains why the
+     cannibals feared him. Due to their superstitions.
+     Demented people regarded by some as saints. Genius and
+     insanity. Further explorations of the island. The
+     proposed trip to Wonder Island. Ephraim invited. He and
+     his family accept. Telling Ephraim about Hutoton. The
+     curious tales that were told them about the convict
+     colony. The wonderful character of the people at Hutoton.
+     The _Pioneer_ sails. The first time on the deck of a
+     vessel for fifty-two years. Ephraim and the library. His
+     conversation with the head of the convict colony. The
+     identity of the paralyzed man not established.
+
+XIV. RESCUE ISLAND                              Page 175
+
+     The visitors at Hutoton received with rejoicing. John
+     invites the leader to accompany them to Wonder Island.
+     Retlaw, the captive, rescued, brought ashore. Caramo
+     thought he recognized him. Sailing of the _Pioneer_ for
+     Wonder Island. Calling at the Malolo village. Ta Babeda
+     agrees to accompany them to Wonder Island. Naming the
+     island Rescue. The latitude and longitude noted.
+     Introducing Ta Babeda to the cannibal Chief Ephraim. He
+     explains how the Korinos misrepresented him and his
+     people. The new world to Babeda when he stepped on board
+     the _Pioneer_. The trip to Wonder Island. The mysteries
+     on board the ship to the Chief. His inquisitive nature.
+     How he characterized electricity. Ephraim's concern for
+     his children. Approaching Enterprise River. The steamship
+     _Wonder_ in sight. The greeting. Going up the river. The
+     excitement in Unity. The crowded dock. Sutoto and his
+     bride. The flag on the _Wonder_. The curiosity of
+     Beralsea at the sight of the Banners.
+
+XV. THE RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND                 Page 187
+
+     Sutoto and the great wide world. Their trip to
+     Valparaiso. Cinda, and the latest fashions. Blakely, the
+     man of business. The boys tell him of the wonderful
+     islands. His eagerness. He tells them of the great
+     enterprises, and of the prospective new ship. The growth
+     of Unity. The tribesmen coming in. Introducing Blakely to
+     the Chiefs. They marvel at his energy. The Professor.
+     John tells him about the copper box. The new hotel. The
+     wonderful work in Unity. Agricultural pursuits. What they
+     shipped to the north. The plans for surveying the
+     islands. How the lands were apportioned. Building homes
+     on the island. Energy of the natives. Emigration pouring
+     in. Farm implements. Coffee tree planting. Raising cocoa.
+     The schools. The Korinos as teachers. Explaining the
+     trade problems to the Chief. Ephraim's desire to have his
+     children remain and attend school. The Chief also permits
+     his children to remain. Information that the paralyzed
+     man is getting well. What paralysis is. The triangle. The
+     visit of the boys to Sutoto's home. The new automobile.
+     The surprise for the boys.
+
+XVI. THE SAVAGES AT UNITY                       Page 199
+
+     Their new machines. Blakely's treat for the boys. The
+     Professor's car. John in his runabout. The automobile
+     procession. The Chief and the automobile. The cottage for
+     the Chief's family. The boys and the Professor review
+     their work. The great pleasure in their enterprises.
+     George and Harry selected to manage affairs on Venture
+     and Rescue Islands. The copper box. The skull in the
+     package. The Professor announces the return of the reason
+     of the paralytic. The word "triangle" announced by the
+     paralytic. The remarkable coincidence. Opening the copper
+     box. The triangle on the Walter letter. The skull within
+     the copper box. The cryptic signs in the box. The
+     counterpart of the skull they had found. The identical
+     inscription. The agitation of the paralytic at the sight.
+     He mentions the name of Walter. Retlaw enters and starts
+     at the sight of the skulls. Tries to escape on seeing the
+     paralytic. The latter announces his name as Clifford.
+     Harry rightly judges that _Retlaw_ is _Walter_ reversed.
+     Ephraim recognizes Clifford. Walter arrested.
+
+XVII. UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES                  Page 214
+
+     Speculations concerning Walter. Sutoto informed. The
+     mystery of their missing boat. Clifford's story. The
+     paper with the markings on the skull identified by Ta
+     Babeda. The secret in possession of Walter. The boys'
+     suggestion as to proper names for the natives. Surnames,
+     and how originated. The method adopted by the Romans. The
+     Greek names. English surnames. Clifford's condition
+     improving. Trying to identify the skeleton found on
+     Venture Island. Clifford recognizes Ephraim. Walter's
+     letter. The three islands. The triangle. The three
+     southern stars. The southern cross. The three crosses.
+     Thirty leagues. The charts of the islands.
+
+XVIII. THE STORY OF THE LETTERED SKULL          Page 224
+
+     Clifford awakes. The escape of Walter and his recapture.
+     Clifford continues his story. His effort to find the
+     treasure island. His meeting with Walter. Capture by the
+     savages. The _Juan Ferde_. Blakely and Clifford. His
+     knowledge of the skull. The finding of the boys' boat.
+     Sailing down the river. Loss of the boat. Finding his
+     companions. Sailing to Venture Island. His illness.
+     Meeting with Walter on Rescue Island. His belief that
+     Walter had hidden the chart. Walter brought in. Clifford
+     apologizes to Walter. The Sign of the Plus and V. The
+     chambers in the cave. What the inscriptions meant.
+     Surprise when Walter learns of the finding of the copper
+     box. Explains the meaning of the charts. Why there were
+     three skulls. The mysterious letter. The remarkable
+     happenings explained.
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+  The scout from the rear now came in with a leap        Frontispiece
+                                                                 PAGE
+  'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to touch him'  59
+  'It is copper,' said John                                       138
+  The old man pointed to the rocky wall                           154
+
+  Fig.  1. The Marimba.                                            36
+  Fig.  2. The Atlantean Plateau.                                  42
+  Fig.  3. The Severed Hemispheres.                                45
+  Fig.  4. Silencer: Convolute Blades.                             54
+  Fig.  5. Spitting the Roast.                                     75
+  Fig.  6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla.                            76
+  Fig.  7. The Mistletoe.                                          90
+  Fig.  8. The Jacchus.                                            95
+  Fig.  9. The Cave on Rescue Island.                             119
+  Fig. 10. Cinnamon.                                              129
+  Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk.                                       146
+  Fig. 12. Types of Masonry.                                      154
+  Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps.                                 159
+  Fig. 14. How John made the Lamp.                                160
+
+
+
+
+TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+THE PECULIAR SIGNALS
+
+
+"Do you remember, Harry, after discovering the treasure and the
+skeletons of the pirates in the cave near the Cataract, that we heard
+the doleful sound of some bird while going down the hill?"
+
+"Yes; that cry was something like it. Do you recall the name of the
+bird, George?"
+
+"It was the Alma Perdita."
+
+"I remember, now; it means the 'Cry of the Lost Soul.'"
+
+"Yes; but I don't think that came from a bird. It is more like an animal
+of some kind. Don't you hear a sound that seems to be answering it?"
+
+"It does seem so; I think John would know what animal it is; but it is
+too late to speak to him about it to-night, George."
+
+As Harry ceased speaking, the boys heard a noise, and George arose
+holding up his hand as a warning. "I think I see something, so we ought
+to call John."
+
+The boys quietly moved forward, and noted two figures moving about a
+short distance beyond. The boys crawled over to the place where John was
+sleeping, and found that the place he occupied, as well as that of
+Uraso's vacant.
+
+"That must be John and Uraso over there," remarked Harry in a whisper.
+
+They were confirmed in this on approaching the moving figures, and saw
+that both were armed, and also that they were watching another moving
+figure beyond.
+
+"Is that a bird or an animal?" asked George.
+
+"An animal," replied John, in an undertone.
+
+"That was my opinion from the first," remarked George, who turned to
+Harry with a sort of 'I told you so,' expression.
+
+"But it is a two-legged animal," responded John.
+
+"How long have you been up?" asked Harry.
+
+"More than an hour," said Uraso. "Muro is now coming back, and we shall
+know something more definite."
+
+"Then that is Muro?" asked George, in surprise.
+
+"Yes; he has been stalking the ones making that noise, and was the one
+who called our attention to it."
+
+Muro disappeared, and the peculiar cries were repeated, then, most
+startlingly, a sound, similar in character, appeared to come from a
+point very close to where they were now crouching.
+
+John turned to Uraso in astonishment. The latter did not seem at all
+perturbed, but after the second cry Uraso imitated the sound, and John
+smiled.
+
+"Muro has the exact tone now," said John.
+
+"Yes," replied Uraso, "and the cry I gave was an answer, which Uraso
+understands."
+
+In a few minutes Muro appeared, but he was not smiling. His face was
+grave, as he said: "We have come upon the terrible Konotos. I feared
+that when I heard the first cry several hours ago."
+
+"Have you been near them?" asked John.
+
+"Near enough to know that there are quite a number, and what is more,
+they are now engaged in their regular feast, and if they have any
+captives, this is the time that they will be sacrificed," said Muro.
+
+"Why do you think this is the time for that?" asked Harry.
+
+"Because it was now nearing the _dark of the moon_, as you call it, and
+that time is chosen because the Great Spirit, out of anger, is hiding
+the light."
+
+The boys now understood that this was a rite practiced by some of the
+tribes on Wonder Island, during that season of the Moon's phase.
+
+"Did you talk with them in that strange language?" asked Harry.
+
+"No; but I tried to find out the key to the language they used."
+
+"Is that their regular language?"
+
+"Oh, no! That is simply the special language which they use on certain
+occasions," answered Muro.
+
+"The savages here, as everywhere, have a sort of code language, or a
+species of wireless telegraphy, used by them only when in the presence
+of enemies," commented John.
+
+"Harry and I thought it might be the Alma Perdita, that we heard at the
+cave near Cataract."
+
+"No; but it shows the ingenuity of the savages, when I explain that
+their most favored method is to assume the cry of some bird or animal,
+and in so doing make it difficult for the enemy to distinguish the
+assumed from the real."
+
+"But on Wonder Island we had several methods of talking to each other,"
+remarked Uraso. "For instance, we would perfectly imitate the cries of a
+number of birds, and also of certain animals, and of the wood insects.
+Thus, a nightingale would mean _watchfulness_; the chirrup of a cricket
+would be the signal that the enemy was not dangerous, or that there were
+not many of them; the cry of the Lost Soul bird would indicate that
+there was great danger, and so on with the birds and animals that make
+noises."
+
+"But I have discovered another thing," remarked Muro.
+
+"And what is that?" said John.
+
+"The natives here are cannibals."
+
+"That merely confirms my knowledge of the matter," said John.
+
+The boys looked at John in amazement. How did John know there were
+cannibals on the island?
+
+"When did you learn that?" asked Harry.
+
+"Yesterday," was his reply.
+
+"What did you find that makes you believe that?"
+
+"I discovered a bone which was once part of a human body."
+
+"But how would that be any indication that the people here are
+cannibals?"
+
+"When you see a bone that has on it the unmistakable markings of human
+teeth, it is pretty safe to infer that the animal which scratched the
+bone was a cannibal."
+
+From the report of Muro it was evident that there was a large number of
+people on the island, and, if Muro's observations were correct, they now
+had some captives, or, at least, were preparing to celebrate a feast in
+which human beings were to be the victims.
+
+"That satisfies me of one thing," said Harry.
+
+"And what is that?" asked John.
+
+"Why, that there must be other tribes on the island," he answered.
+
+"Why do you infer that?"
+
+"Well, where would they get the victims?"
+
+"From their own people," answered John.
+
+"What! eat their own people?" asked George.
+
+"That is not at all strange. Many people are known to sacrifice their
+own, and among the most degraded, they are known to kill and eat their
+own."
+
+"That is the first time I have heard of such a thing."
+
+"Don't you remember that the Bible tells about Abraham about to offer up
+his own son as a sacrifice?"
+
+"Yes; but not to eat him."
+
+"Of course not; but it is not an uncommon thing for tribes in Africa to
+sell their own children for this purpose. One of the greatest
+sacrificial rites of the ancient Mexicans, was to offer up the most
+handsome youth each year, as a propitiation to the gods."
+
+"So they do not always depend on their enemies to furnish the feast?"
+
+"By no means. Many of the tribes have a superstition that if they eat a
+brave enemy it will impart to them his spirit of valor, and the fact
+that they are to have sacrifices here does not mean that there are
+various tribes on the island; but that is something we shall have to
+investigate. It is my opinion that we shall find other tribes, but that,
+I am inclined to think, depends upon the size of the island."
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The preceding volume, "Adventures Among Strange Islands," states the
+conditions under which the two boys, Harry and George, found themselves
+on a strange island, in the southern Pacific. Accompanying them were
+John L. Varney, and about sixty natives from Wonder Island, together
+with the two Chiefs Uraso and Muro.
+
+Nearly three years previously the boys, George Mayfield and Harry
+Crandall, who were members of the crew of a school-ship, the
+_Investigator_ sailed from New York, and while on board, met a
+professor, who, when the ship was blown up at sea, became their
+companion in the life boat in which they sought refuge. Together they
+finally were stranded upon an unknown island, less than a hundred miles
+from the island which was the scene of the adventures with which we are
+now concerned.
+
+On this island they discovered five or six savage tribes, from some of
+which they rescued seven of their former boy companions. Here also they
+met Mr. Varney, who had escaped from the savages. The Professor
+succeeded in reconciling all the warring tribes, and the natives were
+now engaged in agriculture, and in various other pursuits, and the boys
+had the great pleasure and satisfaction of being able to build their own
+vessel and return home. The trip to the Wonderful island, with which
+this volume deals, was for a double purpose, as will presently be
+shown.
+
+John, as Mr. Varney was familiarly known to them, was not only a well
+educated man, but a great adventurer, and had traveled all over the
+world in pursuit of scientific knowledge. He was particularly interested
+in the history of the men who first went to the western world, and
+scattered civilization to the benighted countries.
+
+Like many men of his character, he did not consider the question of
+money. He tried to acquire knowledge and information for the love of the
+quest, and in order to be of service to his fellow man, so it was purely
+by accident that he became a member of a crew that sailed for the
+southern seas at the same time that the boys left New York on their
+trip.
+
+While his companions undertook the mission solely for the sake of the
+money which might be acquired, John engaged thinking it might offer the
+means of laying bare many of the early legends and vague historical
+accounts with which that region of the South Seas abounds, and he knew
+that if any records were in existence, they could be preserved only in
+such secure places as caverns, which the Spanish buccaneers invariably
+selected as the safest places to conceal their treasures.
+
+While the boys, together with the Professor and John, had found a vast
+amount of treasure, as stated in the first six volumes containing the
+history of Wonder Island, they found not a single scrap of historical
+value, excepting a few traces, which have been referred to, and certain
+inscriptions which all pointed to the same depositary, somewhere in the
+South Seas.
+
+The last inscription was found by John, shortly before they left Wonder
+Island, and which, though its full meaning was wrapt in mystery,
+pointed, as did the others, to another island than the one on which it
+was found. What made the matter still more interesting, was the
+knowledge that some one, by the name of Walters, either had prepared the
+inscription, or had some knowledge of what it meant.
+
+This man was not known to any of the party, and what made it the more
+remarkable was the information, lately obtained, that while Walters,
+apparently, knew one of the companions who accompanied John on his
+wrecked vessel, that man did not know Walters, at least not by that
+name.
+
+These circumstances, together with numerous other incidents, which the
+boys could not understand, or unravel, made such an impression on them,
+that they were determined to devote their energies to ferret out the
+inexplicable things, and the earnestness of John was a great incentive
+in the undertaking.
+
+Up to this time the boys did not know the real motive in the mind of
+John. To them this quest on his part was to find out where the Treasure
+islands were for the material value that might be obtained.
+
+His long silence about the real design had been purposely concealed by
+him, as he felt that merely to delve into the hidden recesses of the
+islands would not be understood by them in its real sense, because as
+boys they could not appreciate that real knowledge always must be
+disassociated from the idea of material or commercial gain.
+
+It was with a great deal of anxiety that the boys waited for the morning
+sun. They had but a comparatively small force to deal with the
+situation. True, they were equipped with fire-arms, and they knew that
+the _Pioneer_, their vessel, would return within a week, still, within
+that time the large number of natives might be able to surround them,
+and unless they could get some word to the ship, and by that means
+enable their friends to send reinforcements, they would be starved out.
+
+As soon as the camp was astir there was a consultation. John had fully
+matured a plan in his mind, but it was always a pleasure, as it had been
+with the Professor, to present any complications to the boys, so that
+they could take a hand in the developments which might follow.
+
+"Harry and I have been considering the matter," said George. "We think
+it would be well to leave this place, and go back to the landing and
+wait for the _Pioneer_. We will then be ready, with reinforcements to
+meet them with more than an even chance."
+
+"But," remarked John; "are you willing to go back, and permit the devils
+here to destroy the captives they may have, or, to prevent them from
+sacrificing their own people?"
+
+The boys had not thought of this. "I know the feast days, during which
+these events will take place, will occur within the next four days,"
+added Muro.
+
+"If that is so," said Harry, "I am willing to do my share in keeping
+them from it. What do you suggest?"
+
+"We must try to get into communication with them, and if we fail then I
+am in favor of taking some stringent measures to divert them from their
+purpose," answered John.
+
+"Then you may be assured we are with you to the end," said George.
+
+"After talking with Uraso and Muro, we have agreed on a plan that may be
+successful, and it will at any rate, for the time, prevent them from
+carrying out their festival scheme." As John said this Muro appeared,
+and stated that he had discovered the arrival of at least a hundred
+natives on the hill beyond the second ravine, and that he saw smoke on
+the third hill beyond that, and was of the opinion that the village must
+not be far away.
+
+This intelligence added interest to the situation. As nearly as could be
+estimated they were at least fifteen miles from the landing place
+selected when the _Pioneer_ sailed.
+
+"Unless I am very much mistaken the ridge on which we now are is the
+backbone of the island, and I also believe that it is narrow and we
+should be able to find the sea much nearer by going east from this
+place," remarked John.
+
+"But if we do that it will be necessary for some one to go to the place
+selected for the landing of the _Pioneer_, and tell them of our plans,
+and what we have learned," said Harry.
+
+"That is what I have in mind. But before doing that we must investigate
+this portion of the island more carefully. My plan is as follows: Along
+this ridge, further to the east, is a sheltered spot, or a place where
+the rocks form a sort of cove, and which can be easily defended. If the
+natives have not reached that quarter it will make an ideal retreat for
+us, and where we can defend ourselves for an indefinite time."
+
+"But why should we take up time to find a place like that if you intend
+to take steps toward meeting the natives?"
+
+"It will be used to fall back upon."
+
+"Oh, then you intend to take measures against them at once?"
+
+"Not for the first day, at least. As soon as we are established there we
+will investigate the region to the east, and if we find the shore line
+closer on the eastern shore, we can then send a runner with a message to
+the landing place, giving them the information."
+
+The boys now understood. It was evident that it would have been bad
+policy to retreat in face of the enemy, if such he should prove to be.
+Something must be done to divert the natives for the time being. This
+would give them time to communicate with their vessel.
+
+"There is one thing that must be remembered. The savages know of our
+presence here. They are now on the alert, and we are being watched with
+the greatest vigilance. If they think there is an opportunity for fresh
+victims it will stimulate them to the greatest exertions."
+
+"I agree with you in that view," said Uraso, as John finished speaking.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+THE SAVAGES ON THE HILL
+
+
+After a hurried breakfast the party marched along the southern crest of
+the hill, keeping as much out of view of the watchers on the northern
+side as possible. The course adopted was one well calculated to deceive
+the natives, for while the main bulk of the party silently left the
+camping place, a half dozen of their companions were left behind, and
+they were particular to remain exposed at intervals, so that the
+departure of the main party would not be discovered.
+
+To those left behind, John said: "Remain here until you hear firing. In
+that event you will know that we have met them, and that fact will be
+sufficient notice that your duty here is at an end. Uraso has begged the
+privilege of being with you, and you know that is an assurance of your
+safety in any event."
+
+The place suggested by John was not over two miles distant. Muro went
+ahead with one of the most reliable men of his tribe, and at intervals
+this runner was sent back with the information that the course was
+clear.
+
+Everything pointed to the success of the scheme, until they were within
+sight of the place, when the runner came back hurriedly with the
+information that Muro had seen the first of the natives, and he felt
+certain that they were at the place selected for their fort.
+
+The party halted. The runner returned, and John sent back a messenger to
+Uraso, advising him to come forward at once. Within fifteen minutes the
+messenger returned with the startling information that the natives were
+between them and Uraso.
+
+This was, indeed, surprising. Either they were experts at stalking
+enemies, or they had been fortunate enough to bring up a force in such a
+position as to make Uraso's escape a most hazardous one.
+
+"We must make the best of the situation," said John. "Let us prepare to
+receive them, if they are determined to attack us."
+
+"But what shall we do about Uraso?" asked Harry, in some consternation.
+
+"I think Uraso knows how to take care of the situation. He is shrewd
+enough to outwit them, and if there is any danger from that quarter, he
+will let us know."
+
+"But how can he let us know if his messenger cannot get through?"
+
+John smiled, as he looked at George, and responded: "You have evidently
+forgotten that Uraso has the best signaling instrument in the world, the
+gun."
+
+"Certainly; I had forgotten that. But what shall we do if--" His voice
+was cut short by a shot from the direction of Uraso's position.
+
+"There it is," said Harry. "Two more shots!"
+
+The scout from the rear now came in on a leap. "They are coming this
+way," he hurriedly informed John.
+
+"Who are coming?" asked John.
+
+"The natives."
+
+"Lie down!" he commanded. "No one must fire until I give the command.
+Oto, go to Muro at once, and tell him to come back immediately."
+
+In the distance to the west could be seen little squads of natives
+coming directly toward them. In the different groups were fully fifteen
+men, all armed with spears and bows and arrows.
+
+"Uraso is driving them this way; I am sure of that," remarked John, as
+he watched their maneuvers.
+
+"What makes you think so?" asked George.
+
+"They are simply retreating, thinking, in all probability that they have
+met our entire band. They do not know we are here."
+
+"Brave Uraso! I hope he will not get into danger," said George. "There
+they are now; see them on the ridge to--"
+
+A shot from the direction of Muro now awoke them to action. The moment
+that sound reached the oncoming savages, they halted, and huddled
+together, evidently in confusion at the meaning of the new alarm.
+
+"Ah! they are puzzled!" Then, after a pause, he continued: "I hope Muro
+is not in trouble! I do not understand why his messenger has not
+returned."
+
+Within ten minutes of the report of the gun which has just been referred
+to, the messenger sent by John, came in and stated that it was
+impossible for him to reach Muro, as the hill directly to the east was
+alive with warriors.
+
+It was now Muro's turn to get the sympathy of the boys, and both of them
+turned to John, who still seemed unperturbed.
+
+"We will march directly to the east," he announced. "Every man must hold
+his gun ready for instant firing. Move forward quietly, as you have been
+doing. We must go to the assistance of Muro. Uraso will take care of the
+rear."
+
+They glided along the crest, directly behind John, and as they passed
+over the hill, it was evident that the natives were out in force.
+
+"I wonder whether they have captured Muro?" asked Harry.
+
+"No; he is all right. You may depend on it that he will not be taken
+without a warning shot is given."
+
+"But we heard a shot."
+
+"True; but that was the messenger."
+
+From the manner in which the natives in their front were scurrying to
+and fro, it was apparent to John's practiced mind, they had no idea of
+the approach of John and his party. It was plain that they knew of Muro,
+or, at least of some one beyond the second hill, where John inferred
+Muro must have gone, because all their energies appeared to be directed
+toward that point.
+
+"I am afraid they are after Muro, but I am sure if he finds himself in
+danger he will fire a shot to warn us. In such a situation we must
+attract their attention. I will detail the first squad to accompany me.
+All those remaining will conceal themselves, and under no circumstances
+show yourselves, or let your presence be known, unless you are attacked.
+We will go to the point beyond the two large trees, and make the
+demonstration there, thus drawing them away from Muro."
+
+John with the six men designated hurried over the intervening ground,
+just as two shots, undoubtedly from Muro, broke the quiet, and placed
+the watchers on the alert. In less than ten minutes the boys heard a
+volley to the right, and almost instantly the opposite slope was alive
+with natives running to and fro in all directions, and the most peculiar
+cries were heard, while in the distance there was a singular rhythmic
+sound as though drums were being beaten, in regular time.
+
+It sounded very weird and fascinating. The drums, if such they were, had
+different keys, and their companions did not appear to be able to give
+any information about them.
+
+While thus waiting for John to appear, the watchers were surprised to
+see the force which was between Uraso and themselves, rushing alongside
+the hill, and directly toward their place of concealment. Here was a
+problem, not contemplated by John, and the boys consulted the men with
+them.
+
+Harry said: "I will do what has always been our custom, that is first
+show ourselves, and indicate that we do not wish to be enemies, and try
+to gain their confidence."
+
+"I think some of the men should try to talk to them. It is possible that
+they may be acquainted with their language. You remember the one we
+captured could understand what Muro said," suggested George.
+
+It should be stated that after they landed on the island, four days
+previously, they had made a short excursion into the interior, where
+they were attacked by a tribe, of which one of the men was captured,
+after being wounded, and then taken by the Professor on board the
+_Pioneer_, and carried to Wonder Island.
+
+The savages came forward apparently without knowing of the existence of
+our party, and when within two hundred feet Harry, and Tarra, one of the
+most intelligent of the islanders, stepped forward, and waved their
+hands.
+
+The natives stopped in astonishment. Tarra spoke to them, but they were
+mute. Then Tarra turned to Harry, and rubbed his nose, and made a sign
+of friendship. After some hesitation the leader, who was, from all
+appearance a chief, answered, that they demanded the delivery to them of
+the wounded man. After this was interpreted Harry assured him that the
+man would be restored safe and sound, as soon as he was cured.
+
+At this information the Chief told Tarra that he lied, and that he had
+been taken for the purpose of being sacrificed. He was assured that such
+was not the case, as they did not believe in sacrificing human beings.
+
+The Chief then demanded that they leave the island at once, or they
+would kill all of them. Tarra laughed at this announcement, and his
+demeanor was such as to astound the natives. "You do not know what you
+say," said Tarra. "The white people who are with us have fire guns,
+which kill when they speak," and he held up one of them, and the boys
+were amused to see how quickly they began to waver and look about for
+shelter.
+
+"We have not come here to injure you," said Tarra. "We want to be
+friends."
+
+This appeal did not affect the Chief, but seeing his men disappear he
+silently withdrew to the north. They had scarcely gone before Uraso and
+his men appeared in the tall grass beyond, and were most heartily
+welcomed by the boys.
+
+Uraso laughed as he related their experience. He said that the band came
+up, after John and the party left, and in order to make as big a showing
+as possible he and his companions hid in the grass, being separated from
+each other twenty feet or more, thus making a line over a hundred feet
+in length.
+
+The savages did not know that the entire line was occupied only by seven
+men. To all appearances the waving of the grass at the different points
+along the line, indicated to them the presence of a large force. As a
+result they started for the east, instead of going to the south, as
+Uraso had calculated they would do, and which indeed they would have
+done had they not heard the peculiar savage-made signals of the party
+which was hunting Muro.
+
+The movement of the band in that direction drove them directly toward
+the watchers who had been left behind by John, and for them to meet a
+second party, immediately after they left Uraso, must have been a most
+astonishing thing to them.
+
+But the savages were still more confounded, when, after leaving the
+boys, they learned from the signals that a third party (the one with
+John), was still further to the east.
+
+The first evidence the boys had, that the last party had reached the
+main band of savages, was the recurrence of the same peculiar sounds
+that were heard during the night.
+
+"They are telling them that we are all over the island. They are worried
+about the situation," said Uraso. "John purposely took the men forward
+in order to create the impression that our people might be found
+everywhere."
+
+"Did you hear the shots that Muro fired?" asked George.
+
+"Yes; they were on all sides of him, undoubtedly, but I am satisfied he
+is all right now."
+
+"What makes you think so?"
+
+"For the reason that the natives are retreating, and dare not attack
+him. The last signs were those indicating danger. They were entirely
+different from those sent out last night."
+
+The peculiar drum beats ceased. Only occasionally could the plaintive
+signal cry be heard, and after waiting for more than half hour, the boys
+were delighted to see John and Muro appear on the distant hill,
+accompanied by the men who were detailed with him.
+
+Muro's story was an interesting one. He went directly east for a
+distance of nearly two miles, passing between two different parties, who
+were, of course, unaware of his presence. He sent the messenger back
+when he met the first natives, and when this messenger was on his way
+back he found the savages before him, and they made a rush which he
+stopped by the shot which John and the boys heard.
+
+After he had passed the second lot of natives he ascended the second
+hill, and beheld, far in the east, the open sea. This, he knew, was a
+matter of prime importance to them, as he felt assured it could not be
+more than five miles distant.
+
+While investigating the shore line, in order to select some particular
+marking point, by means of which they might be able to direct the
+_Pioneer_, he was surrounded by the natives. Not that they knew he was
+at that particular place, but, as he was now near the rocky headland
+which he was seeking, it occurred to him that they might be going on the
+same mission, and before he could extricate himself a small band
+intercepted him.
+
+He told them that they were friends and not enemies, and tried to win
+them over by promises of reward. For some reason or other they declined
+to treat with him, and he then had to resort to the rifle to impress
+them with the invisible power which he possessed.
+
+This was done by the two shots which the boys heard. They were of course
+awed by the explosion, and by the effect of the shots, and since it did
+not seem to bring about the desired results, he coolly marched away, and
+told them that they dared not follow him.
+
+His bravery undoubtedly proved his salvation, for they were too much
+astounded to move at his audacity. He did not go far, because he knew
+that his safety lay in keeping himself concealed, since he felt assured
+that it would not be long before John would resort to some device to
+attract their attention.
+
+His calculations were justified, for within a quarter of an hour he
+heard the volley which John ordered, and in an in creditable short space
+of time the woods were cleared of the watching natives, who,
+undoubtedly, were on the alert to capture him.
+
+"The boys went with me to the foot of the hill," said John. "I knew Muro
+would fire three shots if he were in danger. When we were half way up
+the hill, we saw the natives stealthily moving around the hill, as
+though trying to encircle the position among the rocks. It was enough to
+indicate to me that Muro was the one they were stalking.
+
+"We did not shoot at the natives, but intended it merely as a warning.
+It was sufficient, for they made for cover at once, and within ten
+minutes we heard Muro's signal, and found him safe."
+
+"But isn't that fine about the sea?" said Harry with enthusiasm.
+
+"Yes; and that means we must now send a message to the landing place.
+Muro, did you see enough of the shore line to enable you to describe
+it?" asked John.
+
+"I was not near enough to tell exactly, but I believe it is directly
+east of our landing place, but, of course, on the opposite side of the
+island," was his response.
+
+"That will be near enough. Our work is on this side of the island. As
+soon as we have quieted down a little you will hear some news," said
+John as he glanced at the boys significantly.
+
+The runner was directed to proceed to the landing place, and to remain
+there during the night. He was then to return the first thing in the
+morning, and would find the party camped at the rocky height beyond.
+
+Without waiting for further explanations, and details of experiences,
+they started for the place where they might find some shelter from the
+numerous foes, and at which place they might be able to formulate a plan
+to get into communication with the natives.
+
+It was late in the afternoon when they gained the rocky heights, and saw
+the wild nature of the surroundings.
+
+"How did you know this place was here?" asked Harry.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 1. The Marimba._]
+
+"I was here day before yesterday, and it was from this place we started
+when we heard your first guns in the battle you had with the natives,"
+was John's answer.
+
+"But how does it happen that you did not see the ocean?"
+
+"Well, are you able to see the ocean anywhere from this point?" he was
+asked.
+
+The question was a natural one, for when Muro came over the last hill to
+the south the sea was visible, but the rocky point was to the north, and
+thus out of range.
+
+"Did you hear the singular drum-like sounds this afternoon?"
+
+"They were drums," answered John, "and most peculiar ones, too. I have
+not seen the ones used by the natives here, but they have the same
+resonant sounds made by certain African tribes, and also by some South
+American savages."
+
+"What is it like?" was Harry's next question.
+
+"They are made of flat pieces of wood, very thin, laid over open-topped
+gourds. The gourds are, of course, dried, and the dryer they are, the
+more resonant the sound."
+
+"Why, that is something like the Xylophone."
+
+"Exactly so. That instrument is of savage origin. Instead of gourds some
+tribes use calabashes, which grow to enormous size, and they are highly
+prized owing to the quality of the sound they produce when used in this
+way."
+
+"But the ones we heard had different tones."
+
+"They use wooden strips of different lengths, exactly like the
+Xylophone. They are called Marimbas, balafongs and sansas, by the
+various tribes."
+
+While George, Harry and Uraso, were scouting to the north they
+unexpectedly came around the corner of a hill, from which they could see
+a beautiful valley running to the north, and directly opposite, on a
+little plateau, was a type of mountain deer, standing like a sentinel
+near the precipitous edge, while below were dozens feeding.
+
+The boys dared not shoot at them, but they remembered the place, and
+made up their minds that as soon as they had made friends of the natives
+they would have a hunt in this section.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+CAPTURE OF THE VILLAGE
+
+
+The most trying time for all adventurers and explorers, is after night
+has set in. During the daytime there is always plenty to take up one's
+attention and energies, but as the sun goes down the world seems to
+contract into a very small space, and when enemies are near the burden
+of waiting is a doubly trying one.
+
+The boys had spent many such nights. Whenever John or the Professor were
+about these hours were always enjoyed, because like all healthy boys,
+they were ever on the alert to ask questions which happened to be
+suggested by the experiences of the day.
+
+Now, it is a singular thing, that there is no selfishness in education.
+True education is charitable. Those who crave it with the most
+eagerness, are always the foremost in wishing to impart it to others.
+The honest learner does not resent the listening ear of his fellow
+pupils.
+
+Uraso and Muro, the two chiefs, who were the first to conceive the
+advantages of education at the hands of John and the Professor, were
+always on the alert at the evening meetings, whenever their duties
+permitted it, and hundreds of the natives of Wonder Island craved the
+privilege of hearing the conversations which took place on all sorts of
+topics.
+
+In Unity, the capital of Wonder Island, schools had been established
+and were flourishing, and all the children were pupils, so that within
+another generation there would be a tremendous change for the better
+among those people.
+
+There was nothing more enjoyable to the boys than to see the intense
+interest manifested by the common natives, when night came on, and they
+expected one of the treats which they knew would be in store for them.
+
+On these occasions George and Harry were usually the questioners, but
+many times they saw that some of the men seemed to desire additional
+information, and by degrees the boys encouraged them to put the
+questions, and to seek inquiries.
+
+This had a very stimulating effect. John was delighted at the spirit
+thus developed, and he gave it a still broader range by refusing
+sometimes to answer the questions, and thus inviting answers from the
+men themselves.
+
+Thus discussion developed. It taught them to begin to think for
+themselves. If men know that the ready answer is always at hand, it
+prevents the mind from expanding. The evenings, therefore, were seasons
+of enjoyment, alike to the men as well as to the boys.
+
+After they had reached the cove in the rocks, and all the dispositions
+had been made for the night, John warned the men that while the natives
+were no doubt, in consternation, the utmost care must be observed to
+prevent any surprises.
+
+The moon had not yet arisen, but there was a beautiful clear sky. The
+great Southern Cross hung in the heavens like a giant lantern. On one
+side, and on line with each other, shone the two brightest stars in the
+heavens, the first being the Dog Star Sirius, and the next in order,
+Canopus, the one white, and the other a yellowish white.
+
+Then, on the other side of the Great Cross, sparkled Antares, the
+brilliant red star, of the first magnitude, while Spica, another star
+made up a most remarkable combination of heavenly orbs.
+
+George had always been impressed with the appearance and the arrangement
+of the stars, and he was struck by the intense interest which all
+savages manifested in astronomy.
+
+"Your observations are correct," said John, when the discussion began.
+"Almost all of the savage rites, their feasts and religious ceremonials,
+have something to do with the appearances and the movements of the
+heavenly bodies."
+
+"I suppose the grouping of the stars, when they named these groups of
+the planets after animals, and the like, was done by the ancients, and
+really meant something in a religious way," ventured Harry.
+
+"It is difficult really to determine the origin of what is called the
+Zodiac. From the evidence attainable it was known to the Babylonians,
+over 2300 years before the Christian era. They divided the heavens into
+twelve parts, each cluster of stars representing some fanciful animal or
+being, such as the Lion, or the Bear, or the Dragon."
+
+"Isn't it funny that the tribes here, as well as some on Wonder Island
+have an idea that the dark moon is caused by the Great Spirit trying to
+hide it in anger?" asked George.
+
+"It is singular when it is considered that the same superstition is
+found in many, many tribes, on different continents, and it induces the
+belief that this idea had one common origin, and that the people all
+sprang from one source, or, that the different peoples worked out the
+ideas independently of each other."
+
+This statement caused considerable discussion, the natives being of the
+opinion that the idea was worked out by the different peoples and could
+not have been spread broadcast by one set of people.
+
+"Why do you think it could not have come from one race?" asked George,
+as Uraso urged.
+
+"Because," he answered, "how did the people in olden times cross the big
+ocean? Even now, people like my own, dare not venture on the sea, for
+any distance from shore."
+
+"But," said John, "the surface of the earth was not originally like it
+is now. In many places over the earth, new lands have appeared,--that
+is, they come up out of the sea, and other lands have disappeared. We
+have records of islands, and parts of continents, hundreds of times
+larger than Wonder Island, which have disappeared in a single day. One
+of those, near Japan, sank, and engulfed over 200,000 people."
+
+"You surprise me," said Muro.
+
+"Furthermore, there is pretty conclusive evidence that the continents of
+Europe and America, were once joined, or that there was an immense
+continent, called Atlantis between the eastern and western hemispheres."
+
+"I read something on that subject some time ago, in which the writer
+denied that such a thing was possible," said Harry.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau._]
+
+"I am aware of that, but there are some things which are difficult to
+explain, unless the two hemispheres were once united, or, at any rate,
+were close enough together to permit travel from one part to the other."
+
+"What evidence is there on that point?"
+
+"Well, in the first place, the root of the languages in Central America,
+and in Mexico, are the same as in the corresponding latitude in Europe
+and Africa. Then the Pyramids of Mexico are built on the same plan, and
+located, astronomically, the same as those in Egypt."
+
+"But could not the ancients have crossed the seas, and in that way given
+the same knowledge to both sections?"
+
+"There is absolutely no evidence that the ancients had vessels capable
+of traversing 2000 miles of ocean."
+
+"But the book I read said that the Western Hemisphere merely broke away
+from the main body of the land, and that is why the people here knew all
+that those in Europe had learned."
+
+"That is very plausible, and for the purpose of giving you a fair
+understanding of the matter, I make a sketch, showing (Fig. 2), the
+Atlantean theory, in which the western shores of Europe and Africa, and
+the eastern shores of North and South America are outlined, and between
+them, in dotted lines, is Atlantis, the only part of that vast continent
+now being visible being the Azore Islands, at the northern extremity."
+
+"But what evidence is there that such a continent existed? Is it only a
+theory?"
+
+"It is supported by some evidence, much of which, like the account
+which the Egyptian priests gave to Solon, would take too long to state;
+but some years ago, while Darwin was engaged in making the deep sea
+soundings in the ship _Challenger_, it was found that the bed of the
+Atlantic showed a raised plateau, where the legendary Atlantis was
+claimed to be."
+
+"But might it not be possible that the other theory could be correct,
+also,--that is, that North America merely broke away, and in breaking
+away, left Atlantis as an island?"
+
+"I do not see how it can be reconciled. In the first sketch (Fig. 2),
+note the shape of the continent of Atlantis. Now, in the next sketch
+(Fig. 3), I have brought the two continents close up to each other. The
+outlines appear similar, and it would be difficult to make them fit
+together, if Atlantis should be placed there, or left in that space,
+after the breaking apart."
+
+The discussion was closed for the night and arrangements made for sleep
+and sentry duty.
+
+Frequently during the night the beating of the singular drums was heard.
+After the entertainment of the evening both Muro and Uraso undertook
+some scouting on their own account. The boys were awake early, and then
+learned of their expeditions.
+
+Three miles north of the rocky point the main village was located. They
+had crept forward cautiously until close enough to learn that there must
+be fully five hundred inhabitants. But what was more surprising still,
+was the evidence they obtained that the tribes believed in the Hoodoos
+and the witch doctors.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres._]
+
+The boys were jubilant at the information, and John was full of smiles
+as he imparted the information. The difficulty was to get into
+communication with the natives, as their efforts of the preceding day
+did not offer much encouragement in that direction.
+
+The fact that the people on the island observed peculiar rites was
+evidence to John that they must be steeped in the superstitions that are
+a necessary part of the craft of the witch doctors, and to the boys, as
+well as to Uraso and Muro, the opportunity for John to match his
+intelligence with the crafty Krishnos, was awaited with interest.
+
+It was shown on Wonder Island, that while the people had the most
+implicit confidence in their medicine men, they were the first to cause
+their overthrow when it was shown that they maintained their superiority
+through deceit.
+
+Before nine o'clock the drums began to beat. They were plainly heard, as
+there was a slight breeze from that direction. John selected fifteen of
+the warriors, and accompanied by the boys, and Muro and Uraso, started
+for the village.
+
+"You are to remain here until you get word from us. If you should hear
+heavy firing it will be the signal for you to come on without delay. In
+such a case approach cautiously, and rush them, so as to reach us. We do
+not want to cause the loss of a single life among them, except as a last
+resort to save our own. Otherwise you are not to leave the cove. One
+must be sent to the height beyond, to keep a watch for the _Pioneer_.
+
+"If the vessel is sighted send a runner to the shore, and try to get
+into communication with it, so they may know where we are.
+
+"As soon as Tarra returns, send him forward to us without delay. He
+should be back before noon to-day." John was thus precise to deliver the
+instructions, because he did not know what their reception was likely to
+be at the village.
+
+As stated, his prime object was to prevent the sacrifice of captives, if
+such there should be, or to put off the rites which he knew would take
+place that day and the next.
+
+They marched down the hill, taking all precautions on the way, but they
+met no opposition. Beyond them was a well wooded plain, and at intervals
+they could see, in the distance, detached huts, and in many places
+evidences of crude cultivation of the soil.
+
+The huts were unoccupied, but it was evident from their appearance that
+they had been used up to that very day.
+
+"I cannot understand why no people are living here," remarked George.
+
+"They have gone to the village to attend the sacred rites," responded
+Uraso.
+
+They were now less than a mile from the village, which could be seen in
+the distance through the trees. Something unusual was taking place to
+their left, and more than a mile away. Uraso agreed to go in that
+direction, and gain the slight elevation, which might afford him an
+opportunity to discover the cause of the excitement.
+
+There was considerable shouting, and then the beating of the drums,
+which they had not heard since the early morning. Uraso was gone not to
+exceed a half hour.
+
+"They are having something unusual in that quarter. A number of natives
+have just come in, and a hundred, or more, from the village met the
+visitors. I cannot account for the demonstration," observed one of the
+boys.
+
+"It is quite likely," suggested John, "that some other tribe has come in
+to attend the ceremonies."
+
+"I do not think so, because the visitors belong to the same people who
+live in the village."
+
+John was determined to go on, and they proceeded, reaching the outlying
+portion of the village, just as the visitors, and those from the village
+were entering it from the other angle.
+
+"They have a prisoner there," said Muro. "I am sure that man in the
+first group is being conducted to the village."
+
+"Unquestionably, Muro is correct. It is plain that a party of the
+villagers have captured the man, and the excitement we heard was caused
+by that fact." And John began to speculate on the probability of the
+island containing more than the one tribe.
+
+"That man is a native, I am sure," was Uraso's observation.
+
+"That looks like Tarra," said George, in excitement.
+
+This announcement had an electrical effect on those present. If such
+should prove to be the case, what likelihood was there that he had
+delivered the message at the landing? Was he captured going, or coming.
+
+"It looks to me as though he was captured this morning," observed Harry,
+"because if he had been taken last night, on his way over, they would
+not wait until to-day to bring him in."
+
+This looked like a reasonable supposition; but they must first make sure
+that it was Tarra.
+
+"Forward march!" said John.
+
+But before they had time to go far the whole town seemed to be alive.
+From every part of the village men were running, and forming in the open
+space next the first row of huts.
+
+It was a most curious proceeding that the boys now witnessed. In the
+center of the warriors was a large man, with a curious garb. On each
+side of him were noticed men with dissimilar clothing, but bedecked with
+every sort of device, the peculiarities of which could not be
+distinguished, owing to the distance.
+
+"That large man in the middle, is the Chief, and those about him are the
+witch doctors. The Chief has brought the witch doctors so as to terrify
+and destroy us," and John laughed as he remembered some of the wiles of
+that class on Wonder Island.
+
+To the beating of the drums, the Chief marched forward, his men
+following, and closing in on his sides to afford him protection. John
+motioned Uraso and Muro to step forward, and they advanced twenty feet
+beyond the warriors, and awaited the Chief.
+
+The latter stopped when within hailing distance, and John held up a
+hand. Uraso then addressed the Chief, telling him that they came as
+friends, and not as enemies, and desired to be present at the ceremonies
+about to take place.
+
+He also recited that they came from a neighboring island, where they
+had a wonderful village, where all the people were happy, and they now
+wanted to show, their friendship by offering presents.
+
+The Chief was silent, and then said: "Why did you kill my people?"
+
+"We only defended ourselves. Your warriors were the ones who attacked
+us. We could have killed all of your warriors if we had been enemies."
+
+"You speak lies," answered the Chief. "Why did you take my warrior?"
+
+"Because he was wounded and we are making him well, and will then return
+him to you so he can tell you that what we say is true."
+
+"You are again speaking lies," he retorted. Notwithstanding the manner
+in which Uraso had steeled himself, he was visibly affected by the blunt
+manner in which the savage accused him, but he was judicious enough not
+to appear disturbed.
+
+"Ask him," said John, "what he wants us to do to prove that we are
+friends, and not enemies."
+
+The Chief, at this question, drew himself up proudly, and answered: "You
+are on my dominion, and you have no right to ask any favor from me. You
+must deliver yourself up as prisoners, and we shall then deal with you
+as we see fit."
+
+"In what way will you deal with us? Have we committed a wrong? Do you
+intend to punish us?"
+
+"You had no right to come here. Every one who does so without my
+permission, must die."
+
+"Then you expect us to surrender so you may kill us?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then our Chief tells you that he has a right to come here, and that
+you have no right to prevent it, and that if you try to kill us we will
+have the Great Spirit visit you the same as he visited your warriors the
+other day," said Uraso.
+
+The Chief was astounded at the audacity of the visitors. He could not
+understand the presumption of Uraso, and the defiant attitude of the
+little group behind him.
+
+"Then I command the Korinos to destroy you!" he shouted.
+
+Muro turned to the boys, and smiled as he said: "Do you know what he
+means? He calls them Korinos. On Wonder Island they are Krishnos. That
+seems pretty close to the same thing."
+
+Uraso held up a hand, as he said: "I have a Korino here (pointing to
+John), and he will destroy your Korinos."
+
+The witch doctors then ranged themselves in front of the Chief, and the
+latter said: "They will sacrifice your friend who came to us to-day."
+
+To the astonishment of all, Tarra was led forward, and ordered to kneel
+down. Then a great burly man, clothed in the garb so common to the
+sorceress among savage tribes, followed him with a huge knotted club.
+
+"Tell him that if he raises the club I will order the Korino to die."
+
+This was imparted, but it made no difference to the executioner. He
+stepped forward, and slowly raised the club, but before it had reached
+its highest point, a revolver in the hands of John spoke, and the savage
+dropped the club, and slowly sank to the earth.
+
+It would be impossible to describe the consternation that showed itself
+at this catastrophe.
+
+"Come here, Tarra," cried John.
+
+Tarra leaped to his feet, and with a few bounds was at Uraso's side,
+while Harry jumped forward and cut the thongs that bound his hands.
+
+The Chief was bewildered, no less than those around him. No effort was
+made to prevent Tarra from escaping. The other Korinos did not even go
+forward to the relief of their slain comrade. He lay there motionless.
+
+"I am sorry," said John. "I must have made a miscalculation, but I am
+afraid he is dead."
+
+Then one of the Korinos moved toward the fallen man. "Stop!" cried John.
+"It will be death for any one to touch him now!"
+
+Uraso hurriedly informed the Chief of this new piece of information,
+which, in reality, caused more terror than the shot itself. What species
+of sorcery was this that they dared not even touch the victim who
+disobeyed the white Korino?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+RESCUING A WHITE CAPTIVE
+
+
+"Did you deliver the message at the landing place?" asked George, after
+Tarra was freed.
+
+"No; they captured me late last night. I tried for hours to get through,
+but they were within a mile of the landing," answered Tarra.
+
+"But where have you been all this time?"
+
+"They took me north to another village."
+
+But more interesting things were now happening. The witch doctor who was
+about to go to his fallen companion, hesitated. He turned to the Chief.
+The latter merely stretched out his hand, and with an impatient gesture
+appeared to order him on.
+
+"I warn you!" said Uraso. "It will be death to touch him."
+
+If there is one thing, more than another, that is liable to add terror
+to a low order of human beings, it is noise. It may be said that the
+most intelligent are not entirely devoid of the feeling of fear at
+inexplainable noises.
+
+As an example, take the sensations produced by thunder and lightning,
+one which affects the ear, and the other the eye. During a thunderstorm,
+the feeling of fear becomes acute only when the roar is heard.
+
+In this case we know what it is that produces the reverberations; but
+even under those circumstances many people are seriously affected by it.
+A terrific explosion, of which we do not know the cause, is often the
+source of great terror.
+
+This is particularly true with all savage people. The drums referred to,
+evidence this particular feeling of awe, and the louder and more
+violent, the more intense is it to the untutored mind. It is with this
+idea in their minds that they exercise the bad spirits by driving them
+away by making great noises, a practice true of most savage tribes.
+
+When John returned to Wonder Island from the United States he had taken
+with him several of the well-known Silencers, which, when attached to
+the muzzle of a gun, will so deaden the sound that no explosion is
+heard.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 4. Silencer. Convolute Blades._]
+
+For general use, John knew that the unmuffled gun would be far more
+effective than those equipped with the new invention. Smokeless powder
+was also used in the guns which John and his company carried. The
+absence of smoke thus centers the mind of the native on the sound alone,
+and he sees the effect on the victim.
+
+To the savage the sound and the effect of the shot produce the sensation
+that there is something more than human in the discharge. It is hard for
+them to form an idea of the connection between the report and the
+mission of the bullet. It is some monster which speaks in a loud voice.
+
+But it was more than that to the islanders when they saw the witch
+doctor fall. There was a white Korino who spoke with a voice of thunder.
+They were not aware that he held something in his hand like a weapon,
+and the noise and the result of that noise stunned them.
+
+John also carried a revolver with one of the silencers. When the Korino
+turned to the Chief, and the latter, determined not to be swayed by the
+power of the white man, there was but one thing for him to do. He must
+obey. He knew that if he shrunk from the task it would be a confession
+that his power was gone.
+
+The man approached the prostrate form. "Stop!" again cried Uraso. "The
+white Korino will not again speak, but if he touches the body you will
+die!"
+
+He stood there for a moment, irresolute, and then slowly stooped down,
+and with hesitation at every motion, finally touched the figure. In the
+meantime John had leveled the revolver with the silencer, and as the man
+again rose to an erect position, and glanced at John defiantly, he
+quickly threw up his hands and fell forward across his former companion
+with a shot through his arm, as it was not John's intention to kill him
+if it could by any possibility be avoided.
+
+The white Korino had not spoken, as Uraso predicted, but the results
+were the same. The savages who were lined up on both sides of the Chief,
+began to waver. They were moving to the rear. The Korinos around the
+Chief, finally broke and fled, and when the people saw this evidence of
+fear on the part of their Wise Men, they could not be restrained.
+
+The Chief followed them hurriedly. "Now, quickly, boys, fire two rounds.
+No; not at the natives, but up in the air."
+
+The boys could not understand what John could mean by such an order, but
+they did not have an opportunity to ask the reason for it.
+
+After the volleys John turned to Muro and Uraso, and remarked: "As soon
+as the men come up you and Muro must contrive in some way to find out
+the direction that the Korinos have taken."
+
+They now saw the object of the volleys. It would bring up those of their
+party who had remained at the rocky cove. The watch for the Korinos was
+equally plain. The experience on Wonder Island showed that the witch
+doctors inhabited the caves.
+
+In the excitement they had entirely forgotten this part of their
+enterprise. They thought of the treasure. John had the treasure of the
+records in his mind. The hills all about; the limestone formations of
+the elevations were ample assurance to his mind that some caverns would
+be found; and while they might, eventually, be able to locate the
+entrances, it would be better to find out where they were by watching
+and charting the direction they took on their way to the dark places
+where they hoped to rest in fancied security.
+
+Within fifteen minutes their rear guard came into sight, rushing over
+the hills, all expectant to find an enemy in their front. Great was
+their surprise to see the village beyond, and John and his party
+bending over the two bodies, one of them moving and the other inert.
+Apparently, he and his force were unconcerned, although many savages
+were in the village, and in plain sight.
+
+An examination of the fallen men made John happy, because he feared that
+his aim had been untrue. Both had been severely wounded, and when an
+hour afterwards both men were able to move, thanks to the knowledge and
+care of John, they were carried into the village.
+
+Before this was done, however, John ordered the force to march boldly
+into the village. On the approach of the party the Chief and his
+followers, together with the women and children, hurriedly fled to the
+north.
+
+Among the huts were found a dozen or more sick and injured men and
+women, and a number of old people who were unable to be carried away.
+John went to each, and after carefully examining them, administered
+medicine.
+
+In one place they found two warriors, who had been wounded in the battle
+four days previously. These were given special attention, the villagers
+meanwhile looking on the proceeding with a feeling of awe, and wonder.
+They could not comprehend the care and treatment which was being given
+them.
+
+John's companions were most eager to render aid, and spoke to the
+patients freely, telling them that they were friends, and not enemies.
+During this investigation into every corner of the village, George and
+Harry were the most active. They found many amusing things, but the care
+of the sick and the infirm was the first duty, and they had many
+willing helpers.
+
+While thus engaged they reached a long, low thatched enclosure, so
+entirely different from the huts scattered about. There was no visible
+opening. They walked around the enclosure with more and more curiosity.
+Some of their companions from Wonder Island then drew near.
+
+"We have found it!" cried one of them.
+
+"What is it?" asked Harry.
+
+"This is the place where they keep the captives."
+
+"But how can we get into it?" asked George, then adding, "Get one of the
+hatchets, quickly."
+
+Several men ran back and opened the packages containing their equipment,
+and others followed to see the prisoners. Uraso was one of the first to
+come up, and he was soon followed by John, all in excitement over the
+news. George was the first one to get a hatchet. He soon chopped a way
+through, and Uraso was the first to crawl into the enclosure, followed
+by George.
+
+The latter staggered back, as he saw the scene before him. The enclosure
+was fully fifteen feet high, and occupied a space, probably, twenty feet
+each way. It was constructed of a species of bamboo, exceedingly hard,
+two rows of these paling being driven into the ground close together, so
+that it was impossible to see through the stockade at any point.
+
+Within there was absolutely nothing but the bare ground, and a mass of
+indescribable filth, as may be imagined. Here, lying on the earth, were
+five men, with little or no clothing, covered with dirt and vermin. Two
+of them were in fairly good condition, an evidence that they had not
+long been prisoners.
+
+[Illustration: "_'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to
+touch him'_" [See p. 52]]
+
+The other three were emaciated, and what surprised the boys most was the
+long, matted and tangled beard of one of the three. The moment John saw
+that form he turned to the boys and fairly shrieked: "This is a white
+man. Cut down that fence, so the men can be taken out, and the moment
+they are removed set fire to this place."
+
+The boys could not understand John's vehement expression.
+
+"Shall we burn the village?" asked Harry.
+
+"Oh, no! Burn only this enclosure, and don't let a vestige of it
+remain."
+
+His orders were quickly carried out. Meanwhile, not a quarter of a mile
+away, were the Chief and the owners of the village, who, upon seeing the
+smoke and the flames, appeared to be frantic. No doubt they regarded it
+as a sign that the village was doomed, but they were soon reassured by
+the time the stockade was finally consumed, and the few watchers
+reported to the Chief that nothing but the prison had been destroyed.
+
+"We have destroyed the Bastille," remarked John, "and must now take care
+of the prisoners." They found that it was indeed a white man who had
+been rescued. He was frightfully emaciated, and too weak to talk.
+
+This was also the condition of the two natives. The other two were soon
+restored, after receiving nourishment, and were ready to tell their
+story. They had been taken two weeks previously in a battle with the
+tribe to the north.
+
+Through these men they learned that there were only two tribes on the
+island, and that this was by far the largest, in point of numbers. There
+had been continual war between the two people, and the only thing which
+saved his tribe from extermination was the fact that they lived in the
+mountain regions, and were thus protected.
+
+This information was very welcome to John and the boys. The mountains
+seemed to have a fascination for them,--and then, the caves, how could
+they forget them now?
+
+For three hours the Chief and his people waited in the distance. John
+did not pay any attention to them, apparently. Shortly thereafter two of
+his men came in, dragging one of the former patients.
+
+"We saw him trying to steal away," said one of the men.
+
+"Was he going toward his people?" asked John.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then let him go, by all means, and tell him that we would be glad to
+have the Chief and his people return."
+
+The poor fellow was astonished to learn that he was free. He was as much
+surprised at this as at the care which they had bestowed to cure him. He
+passed through the village, looking about him with furtive glances, but,
+at the command of John, no one paid any attention to him.
+
+When he reached the Chief there was a long consultation, and it was
+evident that a momentous change was taking place. The Chief could be
+seen constantly glancing toward the village, and soon the self-imposed
+messenger returned and approached John.
+
+"The Chief is willing to see you, and will come to you, if you wish it."
+This was imparted to John, and the latter responded:
+
+"I will go with you."
+
+He called the two chiefs Muro and Uraso, and the boys, and told them he
+would go with the messenger to the Chief, alone, and that they should
+have no fear for him.
+
+Accompanied by the messenger, John walked boldly to the Chief, and going
+up, pressed his nose against him, in token of eternal friendship, and
+then motioned him to go back to the village.
+
+The Chief was astounded, first, at the bravery of John in thus coming to
+him, and in then vowing eternal friendship.
+
+There is something very peculiar in the characteristics of savages which
+forbids them from violating a peace pledge, or a treaty of friendship
+when entered into with the rites that they acknowledge. The most formal
+of these rites, is that of rubbing noses together.
+
+How the custom originated, is not known. It is something like the kiss,
+in so far as it is a visible token of either love, friendship, or
+esteem. It is seldom that the savage violates the pledge which is thus
+given. John knew this, and felt assured the great Chief would respect
+it.
+
+When the latter came into the village, the first sight that met his
+eyes, was the demolished stockade. He looked at it for a moment, in
+silence. Then some of the old men came forward, and began to tell him
+the wondrous tales of kindness.
+
+The Chief went to his own home, and when he saw that everything was
+untouched, and that none of the people was harmed, he could not
+understand the actions of the White Chief, and so expressed his
+astonishment to Uraso and Muro. When he was told that the latter were
+Chiefs of two tribes on Wonder Island, he was still more surprised.
+
+"Do you not fight each other?" he asked.
+
+Uraso smiled, as he answered: "Why should we fight? There is no pleasure
+in killing, or in causing suffering. We used to think about those things
+as you do."
+
+"What made you think otherwise?"
+
+"The White Chief told us it was wrong, and we have found that his words
+were true."
+
+"Where is this place where your tribe may be found?"
+
+"It is on the other side of the sea, over there," answered Uraso,
+pointing to the west.
+
+"Will it take long to get there?"
+
+"It takes only one sun, and the White Chief would be so happy to take
+you there and show you the great village, and to see the people and the
+Chiefs who live together in happiness, and to learn from the people
+themselves how they enjoy their homes, and make the many curious things
+that the White Chief has brought over for you."
+
+The Chief looked about him, and finally said: "I want to see the White
+Chief."
+
+John had purposely refrained from going to the Chief's home, but Uraso
+accompanied him at John's request, because he was the more diplomatic,
+and wielded a stronger influence than Muro, owing to his remarkable
+personality.
+
+John was glad of the opportunity, and the boys, as usual, were also
+present. The Chief's eyes followed the two boys, as they entered. He
+smiled at them, as John came up and greeted him.
+
+Uraso told John what they had talked about, and that the Chief was
+interested in his story of Wonder Island.
+
+"Our Great Chief will welcome you to Wonder Island," said John.
+
+The Chief looked at John for a moment, and then his eyes wandered to
+Uraso, as he answered: "Is there still a greater Chief? Is there a man
+more powerful than this Chief?"
+
+Uraso laughed, as did John. "Tell him," said John, "that our Chief is
+powerful, because he is wise."
+
+He did not seem to understand this, and asked for more information.
+Uraso told him that the white man did not regard the strong man as the
+greatest, but that the wisest man was always the Chief.
+
+Here was certainly a new philosophy. "But," he inquired, "then how can
+he rule his people, if he is not strong?"
+
+"The people willingly submit to his will because they know what he says
+is best for them."
+
+"But does not the Chief sometimes tell them lies, and does he not often
+deceive them?"
+
+"Yes; but when they do so then the people choose another Chief in his
+place."
+
+"And after they have killed the first Chief, and have taken another,
+and he lies, do they also kill him?"
+
+"No; they do not kill the Chiefs, but they only put others in their
+places."
+
+"Then they are not wise Chiefs?"
+
+"No; they are wise only when they do what is right."
+
+"Do what is right! What do you mean by that? How can the Chief do
+anything but right?"
+
+"Do you think," asked Uraso, "that the Chief has a right to lie or
+deceive?"
+
+"Yes, he can do that, but not his people. It is wrong for them to do
+so."
+
+"But the white man believes that it is just as wrong for the Chief to
+lie and to deceive, as for the people to do so."
+
+The Chief was silent for a long time, and John purposely permitted him
+to reflect on the new dispensation. While thus musing on the new theory,
+a woman carrying a child appeared at the door. John saw her, and,
+stepping out, took the child from her arms. She permitted it, and when
+the Chief appeared she fell down and explained that the White Chief had
+been very kind to her.
+
+John took some medicine from a small vial, and administered it, the
+Chief meanwhile looking on in astonishment. Here was a great White
+Chief, looking out for the comfort of one of the poorest of his people.
+
+Uraso knew his thoughts. This woman was the poorest and the lowest in
+the tribe, and John, without stopping to make any inquiries as to her
+condition, or position in life, had aided her and her old mother.
+
+Evidently the new doctrine was something so extraordinary, that it was
+worth investigating. Uraso saw the embarrassment in the mind of the
+Chief, and after speaking a few words, withdrew.
+
+As they left the Chief's quarters the boys roamed through the village.
+The stories of the sufferers which John had aided, the scrupulous care
+with which the men guarded the homes of the villagers while they were
+absent, had a most telling effect.
+
+The warriors from Wonder Island mingled with the villagers. It was
+singular that there was not an expression of hatred. They fraternized,
+and related stories of Wonder Island, and the people told them about
+their own island.
+
+The boys met many of their own ages, and to them they showed the
+revolvers, and the marine glasses, and then astounded them by exhibiting
+the watches which they carried.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+RETURN OF THE NATIVES
+
+
+Several of the packages left at the landing place, contained numerous
+trinkets, and articles of personal adornment, such as the natives
+adored. Brightly-colored fabrics, made at the factory on Wonder Island
+were also among the many articles, which had been intended to be used as
+presents.
+
+John was gratified to learn, an hour or two after the Chief returned,
+that the latter had given orders to the villagers to prepare a feast for
+the visitors.
+
+"But where are the Korinos?" asked George.
+
+True, they had disappeared.
+
+"Let us see John about that," responded Harry.
+
+They had some time in finding him, but later on learned that he was
+attending to the wounded, and caring for the late prisoners.
+
+"It would not be wise to speak to the Chief about that now," responded
+John. "The leaven is working well in his mind. Besides, I fear that he
+will wreak vengeance on them, and we must prevent him from killing
+them."
+
+As the boys were leaving John they saw fifty of the warriors leave the
+Chief's home, marching out of the village to the east. Muro entered the
+hut where John was staying, and announced that the Chief wished to see
+him.
+
+John continued with his work, after informing Muro that he would soon
+visit the Chief. The boys later saw John and Muro on their way to the
+"Palace," as Harry called the royal residence, and begged John's
+permission to accompany them.
+
+The Chief received them with special marks of attention, and John
+thanked him for the invitation.
+
+"This is the day which the Wise Men have appointed for the sacrifices,
+and the people are preparing the feast, in accordance with our custom.
+It is my wish that you shall be my guests, and take part in our
+ceremonies," remarked the Chief.
+
+Muro, in behalf of John, thanked him for the invitation, and assured him
+that they would gladly join in the rites. Then, he continued: "I wish to
+inform you that we left at the seashore, on the other side of the
+island, some gifts which I am desirous of presenting to you. If you will
+order some of your men to accompany my guides they will bring them
+back."
+
+The Chief's eyes lighted up with pleasure. Immediately, a detail of men
+were designated, and a half dozen of John's warriors, under the
+leadership of Muro, were requested to proceed to the landing.
+
+The people saw the company depart with the greatest wonder and
+curiosity. Muro was instructed to leave a message at the landing, and
+return with the packages as soon as possible. They reached the landing
+place within two hours, and were rejoiced to see the _Pioneer_ anchored
+not far from the shore.
+
+Stut was recognized at once, but Sutoto had remained at Wonder Island.
+The packages were taken to the _Pioneer_, and Muro informed Stut that
+they would sail around the island and land near the village. The men
+from the village were awe stricken at the sight of the vessel, and it
+was difficult to get their consent to embarking but were soon persuaded,
+when presented with some of the gifts, which Muro knew would be
+acceptable.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+An hour after the last interview in the Chief's home, the boys saw the
+warriors, who had formerly left the Chief's home, marching down the
+street of the village, and guarding the Korinos who had formed part of
+the Chief's escort earlier in the day.
+
+They were quite different now in demeanor, and the boys thought they
+looked crestfallen. They were ushered into the Chief's presence without
+any ceremony.
+
+They stood there like criminals, and felt that their doom was sealed. "I
+have sent for you," he said, "because this is the day you have selected
+for the ceremonies. Where are the prisoners to be sacrificed?"
+
+They were silent. The Chief continued: "You have told us that the Great
+Spirit asks for the sacrifices each year when the sun is leaving us, and
+when the moon is hiding behind the vail. Bring the captives so they may
+be offered up."
+
+Instantly the Korinos brightened up, and muttered a few words. The Chief
+gave an order, and they were marched out of the building. Out of
+curiosity, the boys followed. Their steps were directed to the stockade
+where the prisoners had been confined.
+
+To their dismay they saw only the ashes, and were staggered at the
+sight. They stood there with wondering eyes. The boys could see that
+this was a condition wholly unexpected by them, and it must be said that
+there was pity in the hearts of Harry and George, as the leader gave the
+order for them to return to the "Palace."
+
+As they entered John and the Chief were engaged in an animated
+conversation, and when the latter saw the Korinos, he stood up and asked
+for the victims.
+
+"They are not there!" was the only response.
+
+The Chief, not affecting to believe, told them that they were lying to
+him. They fell to their knees, but were mute.
+
+"But the Great Spirit must not be deceived. Great evil will fall upon us
+if he is not appeased. If you cannot find the victims I will do so."
+
+The Chief's voice was terrible in its anger. Outside of their dark homes
+the Korinos were subject to the Chief's will. Within the caves they knew
+no fear. The boys looked at Uraso and John. A slight smile could be seen
+on Uraso's face, as he returned the gaze of the boys; but John's face
+was immobile, and did not in the least appear to portray any concern.
+
+"It is my order that you shall be the victims, and must be offered up as
+the sacrifices to prevent the anger of the Great Spirit."
+
+This doom was pronounced in a voice so full of anger that its
+significance was instantly divined by the boys, although they could not
+understand all of the words which he uttered.
+
+They were instantly seized and bound, and being now in a helpless
+condition, were carried out of the building, and, with the most brutal
+force conveyed by the guard to a hut not far from the Palace, and
+literally thrust into the small opening which formed the entrance.
+
+"Do you suppose they will kill them?" asked Harry, as he moved to the
+side of Uraso.
+
+"I think the Chief means what he says," and Uraso gave a little smile
+that somewhat assured them.
+
+"No; I don't think John will let the Chief kill them," responded George.
+
+After the removal of the Korinos John asked whether it would be possible
+to defer the ceremonies until the following day, for the reason that he
+desired to distribute the gifts which the men were bringing from the
+landing.
+
+"If the White Chief so desires it shall be done."
+
+John manifested his pleasure at the consent thus obtained.
+
+George and Harry now wandered into every part of the village. For the
+first time they noticed that it was located at the western edge of a
+beautiful grove, thickly wooded, with tall trees.
+
+Through this they walked, and before they emerged were delighted at the
+sight of the great ocean beyond. "I wonder if John knows we are so
+near?"
+
+They ran to the beach, delighted to have an opportunity for a bath, but
+were surprised to see many along the shore with small bags.
+
+"They are searching for something," remarked Harry. "I wonder what it
+can be?"
+
+"Possibly clams. Don't you remember the first week when we lived on
+clams, after we reached Wonder Island? What delightful days we had; and
+how afraid we were of every noise, and used to start up at every new
+sound."
+
+"And wasn't it a joy to make the new things, and see every day bring new
+wonders to us after we moved to the Cataract?"
+
+"I have a love for that old home. We were so happy there. I know I am
+not happier now when we own all the treasures of the caves, than when we
+were building the water wheel, and the little shop, and tending the
+yaks," answered George, as he gazed across the sea, and thought of the
+glorious times and of their wonderful adventures.
+
+When they saw the streams of people coming from the shore they recalled
+that the people were preparing for the feast. It was remarkable that
+clams were an article of food with these people when those on the island
+they had just left, despised all fish and sea food.
+
+They wandered along the beach, fully a mile south of the village, and
+quite out of reach of the people, and were soon in the mild surf. After
+a half hour of this enjoyment they dressed, and ascended a slight
+elevation from which could be seen the character of the land along the
+sea.
+
+To the north and south of their position the land was much higher, the
+northern portion having the appearance of very high hills, if not
+mountains.
+
+"Do you think John was thinking about the caves when the guards brought
+in the Korinos?" remarked George, as they were descending the ridge.
+
+"I thought of it," answered Harry. "But I learned from Muro that he
+knew where they made their homes!"
+
+"Then he must have watched them, as John suggested!"
+
+"No; one of the men told him just before he left."
+
+"What did he say?"
+
+"That they should follow the trail to the north of the grove until they
+reached the sea."
+
+"Then Muro must know that the sea is near?"
+
+"I think he does."
+
+During the descent from the hill the ocean was visible directly to the
+east. Both, at the same instant, caught sight of a sail. They gasped in
+surprise, as they gazed at the unusual spectacle.
+
+"I would like to know who that can be," queried Harry. "Let us tell John
+and then get something so we can signal it."
+
+They rushed down the hill, and ran hurriedly through the streets of the
+village, to the surprise of the inhabitants. First going to the Chief's
+house, without finding him, they went to the improvised hospital where
+the wounded Korinos were being cared for.
+
+There John was found, together with Uraso and the Chief. "We have seen a
+sail," shouted George. "We want something to use as a signal." John
+bounded up, and Uraso rushed out and soon fished out a white cloth, and
+ran down through the grove after the boys.
+
+Three hundred feet to the right was a slight elevation, which the boys
+had noticed, and as it was devoid of trees offered the most available
+place for the signal flag. They scurried around for some pole which
+would answer, and to this the white cloth was quickly attached.
+
+John was the last to reach the signaling point. He was laughing
+immoderately, as he noticed the frantic signaling. "Where are your field
+glasses, George?"
+
+"They are in the village. I forgot about them."
+
+"If you had used them you would not be surprised at the visitor."
+
+The boys stopped signaling for a moment, and then looked at the ship.
+
+"It isn't possible that is the _Pioneer_?"
+
+"Look again, for yourself; don't you know your own work?"
+
+The ship had seen the signal, and now turned. Then they recognized the
+grand little vessel, that was almost a part of themselves, for they had
+worked many months to complete her, and had tried to put good luck and
+best wishes into every plank and spar and sail.
+
+The Chief, too, was coming. The whole village joined to welcome the
+ship, for when Uraso told the Chief that their own ship was coming, he
+could not resist the temptation to witness the arrival.
+
+Was it possible that Muro reached the landing place before the ship
+left? John thought so, but the boys doubted it. Muro left before noon,
+and it was now past five in the evening.
+
+As the vessel neared the shore the people lined up and the boys crowded
+close to the shore. They were the first to recognize Muro, to their
+great delight. He waved his hand to them, and Stut was by his side.
+
+"Good old Stut!" shouted George. "Where is Sutoto?"
+
+"In Wonder Island!" was the response.
+
+They were disappointed at this, but there was too much for them to think
+about, as the anchor was being swung, and as soon as it dropped, a boat
+was lowered from each side, and the men began to descend from the short
+ladder, while the village people watched the proceeding with silent
+wonderment.
+
+Muro was the first to touch the shore, and then came the villagers who
+were on the mission with Muro. They were the heroes to their friends.
+They knew their duty to their Chief, however, and the latter had a most
+animated conversation with them, and particularly so after he had
+noticed the array of trinkets which Muro had bestowed on them.
+
+While this was going on the boats returned and bundles and packages were
+brought out of the ship and deposited in the boats. After they had been
+taken from the boats, John said: "With your permission I will take these
+things to your house."
+
+The Chief assented, and on his orders the men in the village gathered up
+the assortment of gifts and the procession filed along the path to the
+village.
+
+The feast that evening reminded them of the welcome which the Chief
+Beralsea extended to them the second night after their arrival at
+Venture Island. Besides the clams referred to there was an abundance of
+fish, several varieties, besides game and meats, and the only thing
+which they seemed to lack, or which was rather meager in quantity, was
+fruit.
+
+Like all natives of these islands, they were experts at spitting the
+meats. The most delicious was a species of ground hog, that the boys
+frequently caught on Wonder Island. The boys had watched the method of
+roasting these animals.
+
+A strong green tapering stick, about four feet long was selected, and
+the bark was peeled off, so as to give it a smooth surface. The small
+end of this was sharpened, and driven through the animal, from end to
+end, so that it was held firmly on the stick, midway between its ends.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast._]
+
+Two forked posts were then driven into the ground, about three feet
+apart, and the stick laid in the forks. A fire of wood, previously built
+between the posts was permitted to accumulate a quantity of coal, and
+when a hot fire was thus generated, one of the natives would
+continuously rotate the stick, so that the heat affected all sides
+evenly, and the result would be the most tempting roast imaginable. This
+is a practice common with savages all over the world, varying only in
+the details of the preparations.
+
+All the vegetables were roasted, in hot coals. In this respect their
+custom was different from the practice followed in Venture Island, for
+there they knew how to make stews. Here they knew nothing about pottery,
+but like all islanders in the South Seas, the wrecks would, occasionally
+cast cooking utensils, like pots, or pans, ashore, and these
+highly-prized articles were sure to be taken by the Chiefs, or by the
+Krishnos themselves, where they could get them by stealth.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla._]
+
+Unlike the natives of Wonder Island, they had potatoes, the wild variety
+which the boys found the second day after they were cast ashore. The
+Taro root, that vegetable which grows in the greatest abundance in every
+section south of the Equator, to the lower border of the south temperate
+zone, was the chief dish, and was also roasted in like manner.
+
+What surprised them most was a drink that pleased John, who at once
+recognized its origin. They called it Arialad, and George declared it
+was a fine quality of Sarsaparilla.
+
+"You are correct," said John. "Its real botanical name is Arialace. It
+belongs to the same family as spikenard and ginseng. Very few natives
+know of its value. It is both a medicine and a refreshing drink."
+
+"If it grows in abundance here it would be a good thing to gather for
+export," observed Harry.
+
+"A boat load of the roots would be worth a fortune," rejoined John.
+
+There was the utmost good fellowship among all present. In accordance
+with the custom among most of these people the women did not partake of
+the food in the presence of the men. They acted as the servants in
+serving the food, but the men prepared the meal, a sort of well-balanced
+family arrangement, as George observed.
+
+"But who washes the dishes?" asked Harry with a laugh, in which all
+joined.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+THE SAVAGE CEREMONIALS
+
+
+The next day was the one appointed for the ceremonies. The boys were
+expectant, because during all their experiences in the islands, this was
+the first time they had an opportunity to witness one of these
+spectacles.
+
+It was noticed that no preparations were made for a morning meal by the
+natives. All were specially garbed for the occasion, if the colored
+decorations counted for anything in the way of additional clothing.
+
+They were adept in the art of weaving cloth, which was made in small
+sections, and sewn together, similar to the practice in most of these
+primitive countries. They were not altogether devoid of knowledge
+pertaining to dyes, the most frequent being blue, which John soon
+ascertained came from some copper deposits.
+
+The Madder plant was the most common on the island, and this afforded a
+red color, the most lasting of all dyes, and the most generally in use
+throughout the civilized world, until the aniline dyes took its place.
+
+For black they resorted to the common method of using carbon which is
+the stock material in our own country. This was produced by them from
+burnt wood, and not from any of the coal products.
+
+Their faces were painted a hideous red and blue, principally in the
+nature of great zig-zag stripes, and the exposed parts, of the bodies
+were of diverse figures, some of them really artistic. The preparation
+of these personal decorations consumed the greater portion of the night,
+as the boys afterwards learned.
+
+When they emerged from their hut in the morning, and saw the grotesque
+figures all about the village, they could hardly repress a smile; but as
+every one was smiling and happy, they did not have to make any
+pretentions, but smiled and laughed as the men and women circled about,
+because they couldn't help themselves.
+
+The women were not so gaudily attired as the men. Their decorations were
+expended on clothing, as it was not considered good form to decorate
+their bodies.
+
+All the men carried spears, and many of them were wicked-looking
+instruments. What surprised them was the fact that all the spear-points
+were now covered over, or bound up by colored material, forming a sort
+of sphere, to which three colored streamers were attached, one white,
+one red and the other blue.
+
+"My, but they are patriotic!" remarked George, as he saw the design and
+the streamers.
+
+John smiled, as he observed them. "But do you notice that the point of
+the spear is covered?"
+
+"I was about to ask the meaning of that," said Harry.
+
+"This is the day of feasting and of sacrifices. The covered point
+indicates that there is peace; and that no one can commit an injury. I
+imagine the points will be uncovered quickly enough the moment they are
+ready for the sacrifices."
+
+"I am more interested in the fact that they use the American colors. I
+wish we had one of the flags here. That idea has just struck me as being
+the proper thing." And George danced about at the scheme.
+
+Harry was just as much affected now. "Why not consult Uraso and Muro,
+and bring over the big flag from the ship?"
+
+John laughed at the idea. "A brilliant idea. The flag will be a big
+attraction, but I warn you that if you get it I shall have to insist
+that you must head the procession with it."
+
+"Are we going to have a procession?"
+
+"I believe that is the first thing on the list."
+
+"But where is the procession going? Is it the custom to march along the
+principal streets and out along the boulevards?"
+
+This idea was so laughable to Harry and Uraso and Muro, that they had a
+fit of laughter. The two Chiefs were just like boys, and entered in to
+the spirit of the undertaking with a vim that pleased the boys.
+
+They fairly flew to the landing, and manned the boat. "We have come for
+the flag," announced George, as Stut was looking on the excitable boys.
+
+"Why not take both of them?" responded Stut.
+
+"Certainly," answered Harry. "I had forgotten about the other. And while
+we are about it, why not have the band come along?"
+
+This was answered by a shout. One of the new acquirements of the natives
+of Wonder Island, was music, and when the boys returned from the States
+they brought along several fine sets of band instruments, one set of
+which was always on the vessel, and was used for evening concerts.
+
+"Where is Mano?" asked Harry.
+
+Mano was the leader of the ship's band, but he was not to be found.
+
+"John sent for Mano an hour ago, and he is now in the village."
+
+"Then send for him at once. Tell him he must be here as soon as John is
+through with him," said George.
+
+While the flags were being wrapped up one of the small boats came from
+the shore, and Mano stepped out.
+
+Harry ran up and said: "Get the boys and the instruments ready. You must
+play for us to-day during the ceremonies."
+
+Mano smiled as he answered: "John told me about it last night, and I
+went over merely to find out what music I should take."
+
+"So John tried to steal a march on us?" remarked Harry. "How soon will
+you be ready?"
+
+"We are all ready now. I was told at the Chief's house that the
+procession would start in a half hour."
+
+When the flags were brought out it was Mano's time to stare. "I think,"
+he said, "that will surprise John, but the idea is a proper one."
+
+The band comprised nine musicians and the two drummers. The moment they
+landed the band formed four abreast, and directly behind were the two
+boys with the Stars and Stripes. To the tune of "Columbia, the Gem of
+the Ocean," they marched straight to the home of the Chief.
+
+The crashing music, and the magnificent flags brought pandemonium to
+that savage village. Nothing like it had ever been known before. Long
+before the band reached the Palace all the inhabitants of the town had
+rushed down, and at Uraso's and Muro's suggestion the people followed
+behind, and thus made a procession which was the most unique that it was
+possible to describe.
+
+"That scheme will make a success of the ceremonies," remarked George,
+almost too full for utterance. "Why the thing wouldn't be a success
+without the flags and the music."
+
+"I wonder how the thing will fit in when it comes to the sacrifices this
+afternoon? I imagine the Korinos ought to feel like dying when they are
+to have such an unusual funeral procession?" Harry said this with a bit
+of irony, as he turned to George and grinned at the idea.
+
+John knew what was coming, but the Chief didn't. He and John came out
+together, when they heard the music. The boys, behind the band could not
+see the great sights that were taking place in the rear, but John stood
+there beside the big Chief, and was simply convulsed with laughter.
+
+The natives were not walking. They were dancing, and the Chief, at first
+astounded at the music, and at the waving flags, soon joined John in
+laughter as they witnessed this remarkable scene.
+
+Uraso had taken part in numerous celebrations at Unity, and knew what
+disposition to make of the people when they arrived. The band marched
+past, and John raised his hand in the form of a salutation, and the
+Chief noticing this imitated him.
+
+"The old fellow is learning rapidly how to do the correct thing,"
+suggested Harry.
+
+"Yes; John will have him in a swallow-tail coat before night."
+
+The band marched past, and then turned around and came back, and as fast
+as the people came up Uraso and Muro directed them where to stand, so
+that when the band stopped they formed a large semi-circle facing the
+Chief and John.
+
+The boys walked forward so they stood with the flags midway between the
+band and the Chief. The latter motioned for the band to continue. John
+understood, and a new tune was struck up. The Chief was fascinated. When
+that tune was concluded, the Chief wanted another, quite forgetting the
+importance of the ceremonial rites.
+
+While the last tune was being played the boys saw a tall man, with a
+huge spear, and a face most hideously painted. His body had
+characteristic stripes, entirely unlike those of the other people.
+Behind him marched the Korinos, without a sign or mark on them different
+from the costumes worn by them on the preceding day.
+
+As they filed along behind the leader, the boys noticed that the first
+one carried a thong-like rope: the second a knife; the third a sort of
+vessel, and the fourth a pair of short sticks.
+
+The people paid no attention to them, while the band was playing, but
+when it ceased, it was evident that they shrunk back from these dreaded
+men.
+
+John beckoned Uraso and Muro to come forward, and the Chief welcomed
+them. "As chiefs of your tribes you should be here with us. The White
+Chief tells me that in his country the band and the flag always go
+first, and I have asked him to tell us how we should march to the
+forest."
+
+John then told those present how the procession should form. The band
+was marched to the front, and George, who had the small flag, was placed
+directly behind the band. Then the Chief, with Uraso and Muro on either
+side, and directly behind them Harry took position with the large flag.
+
+After the flag the Korinos, without their tall leader, however, were
+placed in line. John then motioned to the people to take their places
+following the Korinos, and the moment the column was thus formed the
+band struck up a lively marching tune, and John accompanied by the tall
+fantastic leader, went ahead of the band.
+
+The leader knew, of course, where the procession must go, and he thus
+wisely made the arrangement for the occasion. The procession wended its
+way directly to the north, along a well-beaten path, and after ascending
+a hill, turned to the left, and entered a sort of grove.
+
+The boys were delighted to notice the magnificent Magnolia trees in full
+bloom, the flowers of which surpassed anything they had ever seen, and
+the perfume was almost overpowering in its intensity.
+
+To the boys this peculiar procession had something mysterious about it.
+Neither John, nor the two Chiefs had any idea of its significance. John
+directed a questioning look toward the articles which the Korinos
+carried.
+
+When the crest of the hill was reached they made one complete circle,
+and the head of the column stopped before the most magnificent magnolia
+tree in the grove. The leader marched along the line and the people soon
+formed themselves into a circle with the tree in the center.
+
+All chatter had stopped. While ascending the hill, and up to this time,
+there was a never ending clatter of voices; but now all were quiet, and
+gazed to the top of the tree. The tall leader, at the nod of the Chief
+came forward and approached the tree, and with the long spear struck it
+three times, and then turned to the Korinos, who had now followed him.
+
+Then, he turned again, and struck the tree three times more, and this
+was repeated the third time. After stepping back he raised the spear,
+and held it over the head of the Korino who carried the rope. The latter
+stepped to the tree and with a dextrous throw sent a coil of rope over
+the first limb and caught the other end of it.
+
+The spear was then laid over the head of the man with the knife, and he
+sprang forward grasping the rope, and when the spear was poised on high,
+he gracefully crept hand over hand up the rope.
+
+The instant the man's hand seized the rope the people fell to the ground
+and covered their faces. The boys did not want to lose this part of the
+ceremony, you may be sure, but they tried to observe the rites.
+
+A side glance was sufficient to assure them that the Chief did not
+kneel, nor did either John, Uraso or Muro; but they were privileged
+characters, so the boys went through the ceremony by peering through
+their fingers, and at the same time trying to find out whether there
+were not others trying to do the same.
+
+The man went up and up, and soon emerged from the last spare branches at
+the top, until his face was near the great white flower which grew on
+the tip.
+
+"I think that is the flower all the people were looking at," said George
+in a whisper.
+
+The man raised the knife, and with one slash severed the stem. Then,
+raising himself up to his full height, so his body could be plainly
+seen, he waved the flower about his head three times, and the leader at
+the base of the tree again struck the trunk three times.
+
+Immediately the people arose and placed their hands before them exactly
+like a bather on a perch about to dive, and with the palms of the hands
+thus placed against each other, the arms were raised to a vertical
+position, and lowered three times.
+
+With hands still in their lowered position, and eyes cast on the ground,
+the Korino in the tree slowly descended, and the one who threw the rope
+quickly detached it from the tree.
+
+The spear was then placed over the head of the man with the sticks. He
+crossed his legs and sat down, and with an exceedingly rapid motion,
+soon caused smoke to arise, and then a tiny flame appeared.
+
+"Why didn't they tell us about it, and we could have let them use some
+of our matches," said George dryly, as Harry made a great show of
+indignation at the irrelevant remark.
+
+A fire was quickly kindled, and the man with the bowl knelt down, after
+fixing two stones on opposite sides of the fire. From a small receptacle
+he took a powder, and dropped it into the bowl, and after holding the
+flower aloft, the man who took it from the tree, dropped it into the
+smoking bowl.
+
+Instantly the people resumed their natural poses, and began to dance.
+The Chief spoke a word to Uraso, and the band struck up a lively tune.
+Then, to the ringing blare of the band, and the shrieks and shouts of
+the people the dance began. It was one continuous whirl, and many of
+them became frenzied.
+
+The Chief himself participated in this part of the ceremony, and swung
+himself around and around in a giddy whirl. During all this time each
+fellow was for himself. They did not have partners as in the civilized
+dances.
+
+The tangoing was an individual effort, and each enjoyed it in his own
+way, but they all kept step to the music, showing the savage
+characteristic of being able to observe rhythmic effects.
+
+The boys caught the spirit of the occasion, and joined in the wild
+swirl. Uraso and Muro were at it, and the sole spectator was John, who
+said that he felt too old to learn the new steps.
+
+When the band stopped the people rested, but there was no disposition to
+break up the merry party, and when the music again struck up the whole
+scene was acted over again. It was noon before the grand ball ceased.
+
+Then, at a sign from the Chief the procession reformed, and went back
+over the trail, the people dancing all the way, and, apparently, without
+exhibiting any signs of weariness, although it must be stated that the
+band was nearing collapse, when the people dispersed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+SIGNIFICANCE OF NATIVE RITES
+
+
+As heretofore stated, there had been no morning meal, and the dancing
+must have been a trying task, under those conditions.
+
+"It would have been much better if we had something to eat before this
+part of the ceremony. I am so hungry I could eat anything," remarked
+George, as they neared the village.
+
+"The natives do not think so. That is part of the ceremony. It must be
+carried out before a meal is taken," answered John, "or it will not have
+the proper effect."
+
+Uraso overheard the remark, and he added: "The Chief said they had never
+known such a scene as took place to-day, and that it was not a part of
+the regular ceremony to have the dancing at that time, but that the
+wonderful music seemed to win every one."
+
+"I heard him say it was the first time in years that he had danced. How
+he enjoyed it," remarked Muro. "I admit that it was the best dance I had
+since the boys got back. That was a big time at Unity when you
+returned."
+
+"I think," said Harry, "that was the queerest performance I ever heard
+of. What a foolish thing to cut a flower from the top of a tree, and go
+through all that ceremony, using Old Fantastic with his flourishing
+spear to conduct the ridiculous rites."
+
+"Do you think it is any more foolish than many things which civilized
+people do?" asked John.
+
+Harry mused a while, and then continued: "Probably not, when I think of
+it, but with us the ceremonies really mean something; at least, it seems
+to me that they are intended to."
+
+"Yes, and that is generally so with the native rites. Sometimes the
+origin is rather obscure, but everything of this character comes from
+something in the past, of which it is symbolic. Spencer, in his work on
+'Evolutions of Ceremonial Forms of Government,' recites a curious
+instance of this, where he shows that the habit of stroking the mustache
+is a survival of scalping."
+
+The boys laughed. "That must be pretty well far-fetched," responded
+George.
+
+"Do you think so?" answered John. "He reasons it in this way. It was,
+formerly the custom, among most savage tribes, to take the hair of
+victims, to be used as personal adornment, or to indicate the valor of
+the warrior. Among some tribes in the Philippines and also in the
+interior of Africa, the custom is to take the head of an enemy."
+
+"Do you mean the Head hunters?"
+
+"Yes; you have probably heard a great deal about them since we acquired
+the Philippines. When men began to get a little higher in the scale of
+civilization, the victor required some token of submission from the
+conquered, so the latter plucked a wisp of hair from his head and
+presented it to indicate defeat. During the seventeenth century it was
+the rule of the Spanish Court that all inferiors, in addressing
+superiors, must stroke the mustache, and this came from the old idea of
+the hair token."
+
+"Do you suppose that the taking of the flower has any particular
+significance?"
+
+"Most assuredly! There must be a flower before there can be fruit. This
+is the beginning of the season or the beginning of the year, to these
+people, and the largest-flower, at the top of the greatest tree is the
+one taken while it is at full bloom, and incinerated."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 7. The Mistletoe._]
+
+"Is that what they did in that bowl-shaped vessel?"
+
+"Yes, and I imagine they will use the ashes in some part of their
+rites."
+
+"Did you ever know of other tribes that do anything like that?"
+
+"Yes; very many; in fact most savage tribes have some sort of rites
+which they scrupulously follow out as a religious duty. Ancient history
+records many such practices in detail. Thus, the Druids, a peculiar
+class, or order of priests, which existed among the Celtic races,
+attributed a sacred or mystic character to plants, and venerated the oak
+tree."
+
+"I have read that they offered up human sacrifices," said Harry.
+
+"Yes; I was coming to that. But do you know that they regarded the
+mistletoe as an antidote for all poisons and a cure for all diseases? At
+certain seasons in the year it would be gathered, and with the greatest
+ceremonies one of the priests would ascend the tree on which it was
+found, and cut it off with a golden knife."
+
+"But is the mistletoe found on the Oak?"
+
+"Yes; but it grows more frequently on the Apple tree. The seeds are
+distributed by birds, and owing to the fact that it is found so
+infrequently on the oak, the Druids considered it peculiarly sacred on
+that account."
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The delicious odor of the roasted food, which met the people on their
+return, was a compensation for the lack of the morning breakfast. The
+Chief had invited John, Uraso, Muro, the two boys, and Stut, to
+accompany him to his home.
+
+There in the open court, if it might so be called, were the viands in
+the greatest profusion. They were surprised to see that at each place
+was a couch, and before every visitor was laid a bountiful supply of
+food. In all their wanderings George and Harry never ate with a greater
+relish than on the present occasion.
+
+The meal the previous day, was not at all comparable to this. It would
+have vied with many a meal set before our civilized gastronomies. The
+table implements, it is true, were not found in profusion, but the
+wooden forks, or prongs were good substitutes for the more refined
+articles, and for plates hollowed bark sections were found serviceable.
+
+The Sarsaparilla drink was the most favored liquid. "I wish we had some
+ice for it," suggested Harry. "It will be a good thing to bring over
+some ice for the Chief. I think he would enjoy it."
+
+"By the way, Harry, did you see what they did with the Korinos?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Shut them up in that dark hole back of the house."
+
+"I wonder if they have given them anything to eat?"
+
+"Oh, no!" said Muro. "They are to be sacrificed this afternoon, and it
+wouldn't do to feed them."
+
+"Poor fellows!" remarked George, as he gazed vacantly before him, lost
+in contemplation.
+
+"Well, they have been found out, and will now be dealt with in
+accordance with their law."
+
+"Was that tall fellow one of them?"
+
+"Yes; he is the principal chief of the Korinos. Do you know they tried
+to escape last night?" exclaimed Uraso.
+
+"Is that so? Where could they go in safety on this island?"
+
+"To their caves, of course," remarked Harry.
+
+"Yes," added Uraso, "the Chief has no authority under ground."
+
+The people gorged; so did the Chief. The meal was a course dinner, at
+least so far as the time it took to get through with all the dishes, and
+the boys smiled as they saw the Chief slowly sink down, and pass off
+into oblivion.
+
+John sat there, gazing on him, and slowly nodding his head at the
+spectacle. He did not evince disgust, and when George spoke to him about
+this peculiar savage trait, he remarked: "Is he any worse than many
+people in our own country, who do the same thing? This is not gluttony
+with the savage; he knows no better. This is one of the great enjoyments
+of life which the savage knows. Teach him something better and he will
+respond."
+
+"When you stop to think of it," replied George, "I really don't see why
+it is such an awful thing to eat until you are stuffed to sleepiness?"
+
+"The real argument against it is on sanitary grounds," suggested John.
+"We regard gluttony as bad because it is a selfish exhibition of taste
+and habits, and in this I quite agree; but among savages the custom of
+regularity in habits is not one of their understood laws. I have known
+North American Indians who could each devour from six to eight pounds of
+beef, and drink two quarts of coffee at one sitting. But those men would
+not eat another meal for three days."
+
+During the meal hour there was a continual round of merriment, and every
+one was enjoying himself to the fullest extent. But now the hum of
+voices ended. The boys were surprised.
+
+"They are taking their noon-day siestas," said John, laughing.
+
+The boys arose and passed out. It was true, indeed. The men, and women
+too, were taking naps everywhere, the grotesque figures lying where they
+had eaten their food.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 8. The Jacchus._]
+
+They made a tour. No one appeared to take any notice of them, as they
+passed through the open places between the huts, because all of the food
+was eaten in the open, and not within the huts. The village looked like
+one immense picnic ground.
+
+As they were returning toward the Chief's house they caught sight of the
+hut in which the Korinos were confined. To their astonishment two of
+them were crawling out the enclosure, and the leader was particularly
+noticeable, peering from the side of the hut.
+
+"Shall we give the alarm?" asked Harry.
+
+"No, no! See John; he will know what to do."
+
+As they passed the hut the guards lay in blissful sleep, and seeing this
+the boys rushed in and excitedly told John of the jail delivery and the
+advisability of giving the alarm.
+
+He held up his hand, in caution, as he smiled at the announcement. "Do
+you want the poor fellows to be sacrificed?"
+
+"By no means."
+
+"Then let them go. Possibly the Chief may find some way to get them
+back."
+
+Two hours later the village took on another aspect. It was now about
+five o'clock in the afternoon, but in the meantime boy-like they had
+investigated every part of the surrounding scenery, being particularly
+interested in the monkeys which were seen in the trees everywhere.
+
+The most amusing to the boys was a small animal that had a "beard all
+around his face," as George expressed it. It was small, hardly exceeding
+a foot in height, a sort of olive-gray color, and a round tail twice the
+length of the body.
+
+"I think I know what you have reference to," suggested John, when
+appealed to. "It is the Jacchus, and is related to the Marmozets and the
+Tamarins. They are very active, like squirrels, and live on nuts, seeds,
+roots and fruit."
+
+The Chief awakened as the boys entered, and within the next half hour
+was ready for the continuance of the festival.
+
+"I should like to know what the next thing is on the programme? This is
+a little inconvenient, not knowing just what is going to take place,"
+was George's observation.
+
+"John will know if any one does, but I suppose he is too busy now with
+his Royal Highness," answered Harry with a laugh.
+
+But the boys were not kept long in suspense. The natives understood, as
+it appeared, for they were soon congregated around the Palace, and now
+for the first time the boys noticed a large, imposing-looking native,
+who carried an immense knotted club. To satisfy the reader's curiosity,
+it may be well to describe him. He wore a loin cloth, made of the skins
+of the small animals which were found all over the island, and, to all
+appearances, at least a half dozen different kinds of pelts were used to
+make up the garment, the ends, or corners of which hung down in points
+to form a fringe.
+
+At his ankles were two huge bands, made of cloth, and plentifully
+decorated with spangles of shells, and rows of nuts, strung on cords,
+like beads. Around his neck and trailing down the back was a collar of
+interwoven leaves, very artistically arranged, if judged from the
+viewpoint of savage decorations.
+
+The head dress was unique, being made up of a band of coarsely-woven
+cloth, literally covered with large fish scales, and a pyramidal
+structure was fastened to this band, and extended up beyond the crown
+for a foot, or more. At its apex was a mass of streamers, which
+fluttered around as the breeze floated by.
+
+The weapon was fully five feet long, the head of the club, for such it
+was, terminated in a gnarled knot, bristling with small points. This
+the boys recognized to be somewhat similar to the wicked thing that was
+carried by the Korino when he sought to slay Tarra.
+
+The Chief was also differently attired. He was literally covered with
+clothing, the different parts being dyed with various colors without any
+regard to harmony, or design. Like all the others he wore no foot
+covering, but had bare feet.
+
+The crown was also a cloth band, but this was surrounded by
+vertically-arranged thorns, huge things that showed their bristling
+points, and wound, or rather braided around them, were garlands of human
+hair, of different hues.
+
+The Royal wand was an immense black staff, fully two inches thick, and
+six feet long, one end of which was pointed, the other end terminating
+within a large calabash. This wand he held with the pointed end upward.
+
+When he appeared at the doorway the people fell down on their faces, and
+after a few words all arose, and the man with the club turned toward the
+hut where the Korinos were confined. Four of the largest warriors
+accompanied him, while the people looked on in expectancy.
+
+"The fun will now begin," whispered Harry, and it surely did. The club
+bearer returned with a troubled look, and addressed the Chief.
+
+The people soon learned of what had taken place, and the commotion was
+evident. They speedily lost all semblance of order, and began to run to
+and fro. The scowl on the face of the Chief was terrible, nor did he in
+the least attempt to conceal his anger.
+
+With a vehemence that caused the crowd to shiver, he gave a command, and
+in a moment three men were brought forward, almost in a state of
+collapse with terror written in their countenances. They were the
+unfortunate guards, as the boys quickly saw.
+
+They were unable to answer the indictment of the Chief, because the
+escape had been as much of a surprise to them as to the Chief. Uraso and
+Muro were quick to recognize the situation, and they informed John of
+the progress of the conversation.
+
+The negligent guards had been condemned to take the places of the
+Korinos, as sacrifices. The rites demanded some victims, and the boys
+now saw that the escape of the Korinos would not avoid the carrying out
+of the bloody rites.
+
+The new, victims-to-be were firmly bound, and placed in the center of
+the crowd, and, strangely enough, it was now noticed that the people
+expressed the same degree of hatred to the poor unfortunates that they
+had manifested toward the Korinos an hour before.
+
+The Chief was now at the head of the procession, which, instead of going
+to the north, passed alongside the slight elevation that led north of
+the grove, and toward the high elevation which the boys had noticed the
+day before.
+
+The march was but a short one, and when the upper level was reached the
+boys were astounded to see that beyond, and next to the hill, on the
+north, was an open space, the floor of which was of solid rock. This
+space covered nearly an acre, and near the center was a flat rocky
+table, fully ten feet in diameter and about four feet high, with a huge
+boulder in the center of the table.
+
+The Chief and the victims marched directly to the stone table, the
+executioner tramping with a measured tread immediately ahead of the
+victims. The people did not go near the rocky shelf, but circled about
+at a respectful distance.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+HYPNOTISM ON SAVAGES
+
+
+All those with the Chief's party, approached the table, upon which the
+executioner mounted the rock, and stood there, as though inviting the
+admiration of the crowd.
+
+John spoke a few words to Uraso, and the latter addressed the Chief as
+follows: "The White Chief says that to offer these men as a sacrifice
+will be against the wishes of the Great Spirit, if they are destroyed by
+the weapon which is now in the hands of the one on the rock."
+
+The Chief quickly turned. "What would the White Chief have me do? I
+cannot free these culprits, because it is the law that they shall die in
+place of those who are appointed to be the victims."
+
+"The White Chief does not ask for their lives, but only that the manner
+of their death shall be changed."
+
+"That shall be done. What is the White Chief's wish?"
+
+"He will be the executioner."
+
+The Chief threw his arms around Uraso's neck, in raptures of joy, and
+turning to the man on the table, ordered him to descend. John quietly
+conferred with Uraso, and the latter mounted the table, and the
+prisoners were led up until they faced him.
+
+Uraso, addressing them, said: "You have been condemned by your Chief to
+die because you have deceived his people and brought sorrow on all. The
+Great White Chief has seen the misery you have caused by allowing the
+Korinos to escape, and you must now take their places as the victims to
+appease the Great Spirit.
+
+"The White Chief has asked to be permitted to offer you up as sacrifices
+to his God, as well, and the White Man's death is a terrible one. When
+you die it will not cause you to go out of the world forgetting all that
+you may suffer, but you will always know and suffer through all time,
+and you will never know a day that is free from misery.
+
+"Your dying will be like a thousand deaths, and your living hours will
+be like fire that always burns and never consumes."
+
+Thus Uraso went on, and as he spoke the poor victims' eyes grew greater
+and greater, and the terror more pronounced. He ceased for a moment and
+John slowly walked to the table, and mounting it, said quietly to Uraso:
+"Tell them that when I raise my hands over my head the ends of their
+living death will begin."
+
+When this was imparted, the agony on their faces was pitiful to see.
+John advanced, and spread out his palms toward them, and quickly drew
+his hands toward him, and this was repeated three times.
+
+It is a curious thing that most savages believe in the mysticism of some
+particular number. In Africa some tribes, if they hear an animal cry
+four times, will brave any danger, as it is a sign that the bird has
+knowledge of safety to his person.
+
+Others watch with great care the repetition of an insect's call, and
+particularly the number of times an unusual noise occurs, and the belief
+is somewhat analogous to the views which white people have about the
+cricket. Milton, Byron, Southey, and Dickens have written stories about
+them, so it is not to be wondered at that the poor benighted savages
+should have some belief about such things.
+
+After the rites at the tree in the forest, it was evident that three was
+the cryptic, or mysterious number, and John used it on this occasion,
+for in all the peculiar signs that he had previously employed, three was
+the number that impressed itself on the minds of the people, and it
+doubtless had its effect on the condemned.
+
+Slowly John moved from side to side, and he now saw the intense
+expression, as their eyes followed his every motion. His motions grew
+less and less rapid; he moved toward them, and then suddenly retreated,
+and through all these evolutions the three men's faces became more and
+more tense, and finally the muscles of their faces relaxed, their eyes
+stared with a blank expression, and the motions of John almost ceased.
+
+The boys looked about them. They, too, had a spell woven about them
+which they could not understand. It was the most remarkable feeling they
+had ever experienced. The multitude did not stir a limb. The Chief was
+rigid, his face colorless, lips parted, and eyes fixed at what he saw
+before him.
+
+Suddenly, John sprang forward, and raised both arms high above his head,
+and instantly the three men fell back and lay rigid, full length on the
+rock. John turned, but while there were forms before him, there was no
+sound. Hundreds of eyes gazed, but they stared mutely.
+
+"I feel awfully funny," said Harry.
+
+"Do you know what John has been doing?" asked George.
+
+"I know; he has hypnotized the men!"
+
+"Yes; and everybody else!"
+
+When John turned, he waved his hand, the audience relaxed its tension,
+and witnessed the death (?) of the three men, an act performed by the
+White Chief without having touched them. The Chief slowly walked
+forward, and Uraso led him to the platform, while John pointed to the
+mute victims.
+
+John motioned to Uraso to raise the first man by lifting his feet while
+he grasped the shoulders, and when the body was lifted up it was
+perfectly rigid. The same exhibition was performed with the two others.
+That they were dead, was apparent to the Chief and the people.
+
+The people surged to and fro. John was a Korino now, in the eyes of the
+people. When the people pressed forward John spoke to Uraso, and he
+turned to the people.
+
+"The White Chief says that there will be no more sacrifices, because the
+Great Spirit wills it otherwise. The Korinos must be brought from the
+caves--"
+
+Uraso could get no further. The people were aroused. Their voices could
+be heard uttering threats against the witch doctors.
+
+John saw that they were determined to wreak vengeance upon them, but he
+counseled them to be wise and obey their Chief, and that the Korinos
+would acknowledge their own error.
+
+The wives and children of the three guards were present, as they were
+compelled to be, and, as may well be imagined, their grief was terrible
+to behold.
+
+Uraso again spoke to the people, and said: "The White Chief intends to
+show that the Great Spirit does not wish sacrifices, and will give back
+the guards to their families."
+
+When he ceased speaking John stooped forward, and waved his hands three
+times, the motion being formed by throwing his hands forward, palms
+downward, and then slowly raising them up, and with an upward and an
+outward swing, bringing them down again.
+
+Then he advanced forward a few feet and held out his arms horizontally,
+with the palms uppermost, and speaking a few words, the arms were
+impressively raised. As he did so the three men slightly turned, and
+then almost simultaneously raised themselves to a sitting posture, and
+glanced about wildly.
+
+The consternation on the part of the natives at this sight was beyond
+all description. They were awe stricken, and dumbfounded. Not the
+slightest sound could be heard, as the men arose to their feet.
+
+The only ones who were joyously affected were the wives of the men who,
+at the words of Uraso, sprang forward and were about to ascend the rock,
+but at the command of John they leaped from the table, and the children
+gathered about them.
+
+The Chief did not utter a word of protest. He remained there utterly
+speechless. When John asked him what was the next thing to be done to
+carry out the rites, he remained standing for some time without
+answering.
+
+When he had gathered together his faculties he turned to the people and
+said: "The Great White Chief has shown his power, and proven to us that
+our Korinos have lied to us. They must be destroyed. Let the people
+return to the village, and proceed with the feast. We shall be guided by
+the White Chief."
+
+This was, indeed, the effect that John wished to produce, but he did not
+also anticipate that the Chief would insist upon the destruction of the
+Korinos.
+
+The feast that afternoon was a repetition on a larger scale, of the
+feast of the day before. Indeed, this was now the third day of feasting.
+
+"I don't know whether I can eat any more for a few days," said Harry, as
+they neared the village, and saw the preparations going on.
+
+George laughed, as he responded: "We shall have to go through with this
+thing, whatever the cost. Have you forgotten that they believe in
+_three_ for everything? Didn't John make three passes to kill them; and
+three more to bring them to life again? We have had two feasts, and must
+now have one more. I don't know what the result will be if I eat half as
+much even, as I did yesterday."
+
+John laughed heartily, as he added: "That is correct, too, about the
+feasts. Notice from this time on that about everything they do will be
+measured by threes."
+
+As the boys afterwards remarked, they never knew how they got through
+the feast that day, but they tried to imitate John in partaking of the
+good things in moderation.
+
+It was late in the night when the natives ceased the dancing, which was
+the signal for the end of the festival, although in many respects it was
+entirely different from the previous ceremonies, as Uraso and Muro
+learned in talking with the natives.
+
+The next day was ushered in with a rainstorm, the first that was
+experienced on the island, and there was no opportunity to make any
+excursions. It had been John's intention to settle the fate of the
+Korinos, as he felt that this was a matter that should have his
+attention before they left on the further explorations of the island.
+
+Since it was impossible to venture out far from the village, John spent
+the most of the day attending to the wounded and the sick, although they
+had not been neglected in the meantime, not even during the ceremonies
+of the past three days.
+
+The first visit was made to the quarters of the white man who was found
+in the stockade when they took possession of the village. It was evident
+from the greeting that he and John had had several conversations
+previous to this visit, but of this the latter did not advise the boys.
+
+When they came into the room he was sitting up, and he greeted John and
+the boys. He could speak, but it was with a weak voice, and the boys
+ranged themselves on one side while John seated himself on the other.
+
+"You told me yesterday," began John, "that when you were shipwrecked you
+were cast ashore on another island. How many companions had you?"
+
+"Three," he answered. "One of them was a large man, with brown hair and
+piercing eyes, who was formerly an officer in the navy, and was at that
+time engaged in an exploring capacity, and on his way to Australia."
+
+"Did he walk with a limp?" asked John.
+
+The old man, as well as the boys, looked at John in surprise. He quickly
+answered: "Yes; did you know him?"
+
+"No," he replied; "but we found him less than a month ago."
+
+The old man leaned forward in his eagerness. "Where is he?" he asked.
+
+"He is dead," answered John, gravely.
+
+"Dead!" he exclaimed. "Dead! and do you know his name?"
+
+"No, but we found his remains, together with the boat to which he had
+been tied, on the shore of an island south of this."
+
+"Then it is true, after all!" he muttered.
+
+"Did you know about it?" asked John, who was the interested one now.
+
+"No, this is sad news to me. His name was Clifford,--Ralph S. Clifford,
+and when he and Walter undertook,--"
+
+The boys were all impatience now, as George cried out: "Walter! did you
+know Walter?"
+
+"Yes; he was my companion for a time. He and I were making explorations
+on the island on which we were wrecked, and when the two undertook to go
+on a search, to ascertain what the island was like, I was too ill to go
+with them. Walter returned, and told me of meeting with a band of
+savages on the western side of the mountain, and of the capture of
+Clifford by the natives."
+
+"Did you know a man by the name of Wright?"
+
+"No, I never heard of any one by that name in this section of the
+globe."
+
+"Do you know what became of Walter?"
+
+"I was about to say, that we went north along the shore, and camped near
+the beach, and there found a boat, rather crudely made, with which we
+proposed sailing around the island. Before we could complete our
+arrangements, Walter disappeared."
+
+"Did he take the boat with him?"
+
+"No; the boat and all his effects were still with me. I was still very
+ill, and I concluded to remain there until my strength returned, but
+four days afterwards, when I was able to move about, I found that the
+boat had disappeared."
+
+The strain of the conversation appeared to affect him, and the three
+visitors stated they would call on him later for further information.
+
+When the boys returned to their huts, with John, the latter was quiet
+and very much reserved. The boys were so much interested in the story of
+the old man, that they could not wait until they were seated before they
+began to question him.
+
+"What do you think of his story?" asked Harry.
+
+John did not answer promptly, as was his habit. Instead, he reflected
+for some time, and at last said slowly: "The story may be true. Clifford
+was, in my opinion, tied to the boat and set adrift, and his death was
+due to that, unquestionably."
+
+"Do you think this man had anything to do with it?" asked George.
+
+"So far, I have no direct reason for thinking so, but there are several
+very curious things about the story."
+
+"What in particular do you have in mind?"
+
+"He said the boat was found on the seashore, and that Walter left
+without taking it with him, but that when he recovered the boat was
+gone."
+
+"Is it an unreasonable story?"
+
+"That is not at all improbable. The tide might have washed it away, but,
+if it was our boat, and it was provided with the peculiar rope and the
+strange oars, that were found in it when it was recovered by you, it
+would be interesting to know whether he or Walter put them there."
+
+"Why is that so interesting to know?"
+
+"Because the rope found in that boat, is the same as the rope we took
+from Clifford's body, which you discovered on Venture Island."
+
+"If we could only find Walter now it would solve that mystery," said
+Harry. "I don't like to think that this man was instrumental in the
+Clifford tragedy."
+
+"Nor do I," responded John. "It is evident there is some connection
+between that boat and the skeleton, and that our boat played a part in
+it." This ended the conversation on this point.
+
+It will be remembered that two of the men rescued from the prison
+stockade, were natives of another tribe, who had been captured some
+weeks before. Upon inquiry John found that they had disappeared the day
+before.
+
+The two others, in a very emaciated condition, were still under John's
+care, and rapidly improving. No attempts had been made to question
+them, and as it was the intention of the boys to commence the trip to
+the north, as soon as John had settled the matter with the Korinos, they
+were anxious to get some information from them concerning their tribe.
+
+Accompanying Uraso, and through him, they first learned that the people
+they were now living with were called Malosos, and that the Chief was
+named Ta Babeda, which meant the _strong man_. He was not so large as
+Beralsea, the Chief of Venture Island, but his muscles were more active,
+thus the boys could see that he rightly acquired the sceptre of chief
+ruler, as did Beralsea, because of the strength he possessed, and there
+was no one on the island to question his king-ship.
+
+While rambling about the boys and Uraso were informed that John wished
+to see them at the Chief's house, and they went over without delay.
+Entering the house, they were surprised to see that the different
+packages containing the presents had been opened, and were about to be
+distributed.
+
+The Chief and his household were first provided for. The articles
+consisted of coats, and different articles of wear for the Chief,
+together with a watch, a revolver, and a camera.
+
+"This will give both of you boys an opportunity to give the Chief some
+lessons in these instruments," said John.
+
+The articles for the women were received with screams of delight that
+pleased the Chief beyond measure. Bits of lace, the like of which had
+never been seen on the island, cotton fabric, beads, articles of
+ornamentation, and finally full-fledged dresses, were only parts of the
+gifts which went to the women and children.
+
+"With your permission," said John, to the Chief, "I will offer gifts to
+your people, and you may state that during the afternoon the articles
+will be arranged in packages so that all will receive presents of like
+value."
+
+The boys, as well as Uraso and Muro, were busy making up the gifts for
+distribution. During the remaining portion of the day they were busily
+engaged in this work, which brought the greatest joy and happiness to
+the natives.
+
+It may well be imagined that Uraso and Muro were not slow in imparting
+the news of Wonder Island to the natives. John had a long conference
+with the Chief on the same subject.
+
+"But how can we get these articles?" he asked, as John told him how they
+made the wonderful things.
+
+"You can make them here," he answered.
+
+"But we cannot make them if we do not have the tools."
+
+"Then you can buy them," responded John.
+
+"But what have we that you want?" he asked, as he eagerly scanned John's
+face.
+
+"Your land is full of things that the people in Wonder Island want, and
+the whole world will buy them of you."
+
+"Will you tell me what they want and how we shall get them ready for
+you?"
+
+"It will give us pleasure to send our people over who can tell you what
+spices, and nuts, and coffee, and other things which you have in
+abundance, can be prepared, and what they are worth, and it will be the
+means of giving the people work, and peace and contentment."
+
+"But if we do not have any more fighting with our enemy there will be no
+need of a strong Chief," he remarked, thinking of his new relation to
+the scheme as outlined.
+
+"There will be a much greater need of a strong man like you, who can
+mete out equal justice to the people," remarked John.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE REMARKABLE CAVE EXPLORATIONS
+
+
+But the time was now at hand, when it became necessary for the exploring
+expedition to the north. The rescued prisoners stated that their people,
+while not so numerous, were very warlike, and by degrees, John learned
+that they were the cannibals of whom they had heard.
+
+The tribe was known as the Umbolos, and the Chief was a frightful man,
+unlike any other in the tribe, or, at any rate, from the description, he
+was not formed like them. He was known as Rumisses, which in their
+tongue meant _thunder_.
+
+It was remarkable that Uraso and Muro understood most of the words of
+the language used by the natives here and also on Venture Island. On
+Wonder Island, there were only two tongues, or dialects, and the people
+on this island, as well as on Venture Island, spoke the dialect
+belonging to the Illyas, Kurabus and the Tuolos, the tribes that were
+the fiercest and the most difficult to subdue.
+
+It was hoped that the escape of the two Umbolos, and the return to their
+people would be sufficient to give them the entree to that part of the
+country, but after the questionings of John on this point, it was very
+doubtful whether this would impress itself on their minds.
+
+The natives had been accustomed for so long a period to regard every
+other people as an enemy, and consequently absolutely removed from any
+possibility of friendship, that it was questionable whether the
+messengers could persuade the Chief to receive them.
+
+Arrangements for the departure were decided upon, and they planned to
+start early in the morning. John visited the Chief, and suggested that
+he should consider it a favor if the Chief would permit him to take the
+Korinos with him.
+
+The Chief opened his eyes in astonishment. "Why do you wish to be
+burdened with men who will live by deceiving?" he inquired.
+
+"But they have lived to the best of their knowledge. They do not know
+any better. They believe what they have been taught, and think it is a
+duty to carry out and practice their rites. They do not wish to deceive
+you."
+
+The Chief pondered for a long time, and then replied: "What will you do
+with them?"
+
+"I want to teach them the white man's ways, and tell them to come back
+and teach your children the things which we believe are right and for
+the good of the people."
+
+The lessons which John imparted were sources of wonder and amazement to
+the ruler, who, five days before, thought he was the only one appointed
+to make and to execute laws.
+
+When he finally gave his consent, he said: "You must take it upon
+yourself to get the Korinos, because they will not come out of their
+caves."
+
+"But how can they find food there? If you prevent them from getting
+food they will be compelled to come out or starve."
+
+"They will starve before they will permit themselves to be taken."
+
+"Then," answered John, "why do you not order your warriors to enter the
+cave and take them by force?"
+
+"But who dares to go in?"
+
+"I dare to go in, but you must order me to do so," answered John.
+
+The Chief jumped up in an instant. "And will you go?" he asked in the
+greatest delight.
+
+"By all means. You must go with me to the cave, and there command me to
+enter and bring them forth."
+
+The Chief's eyes danced with delight, and he could hardly await the hour
+for starting on the mission.
+
+The boys and the two companion chiefs, were in their glory upon hearing
+of the decision to get the Korinos. Before leaving the Chief John
+questioned him very closely on the location of the cave, and whether
+there were not other caves on the island to the north.
+
+"I have heard that there is another one to the north, that was used in
+olden times by the Korinos who lived when my father was Chief. I also
+know that far to the north where the false and treacherous Umbolos live,
+are great caves which no man may enter."
+
+"Do they have Korinos in the Umbolo tribe?"
+
+"No; they do not believe in a Great Spirit."
+
+"Then, if they have no Korinos, why do they not dare to enter the
+caverns?"
+
+"Because they have been told that it is death to go into the dark."
+
+"Do you know why they think so?"
+
+"Because, a long time ago, the only man who ever returned from the dark
+caves, brought out the bones of men who had died there."
+
+"But it did not kill that man who brought them out?"
+
+"Yes; he died. And now no one dares enter those places."
+
+It may be imagined how this intelligence stirred up the boys. It was
+impossible to keep them from talking about it. To John it was like a
+magic wand; it seemed to wave before his eyes and to talk to him. What
+if they had really found the great cave on which John's heart was so
+keenly bent?
+
+But the Korinos must be freed. That afternoon, just before starting, the
+boys were surprised to see the band coming up the street. How they
+laughed, as they scented John's little ruse. It would, indeed, be a
+treat to bring the Korinos out of their dark resorts to some good old
+marching tune.
+
+The band struck up a familiar air, and to its lively tones the
+procession, with the three Chiefs and John at the head, marched across
+the open, and up the hill past the grove, on its way to the cave on the
+eastern slope of the high hill which rose from the shore of the ocean.
+
+There was jest and laughter, the Chief enjoying the treat that would be
+the greatest pleasure of his life, namely, the bringing of the Korinos
+out of the cave.
+
+After ascending the great hill, so that they overlooked the ocean, the
+Chief informed John that the entrance was a third of the way down the
+hill, and the narrow path was followed which led around to the north,
+shutting out the sight of the sea.
+
+After a few hundred feet, the path led to a cleft portion of the rocks,
+where the light of the sun was completely hidden. The walls of the
+rocks, at the entrance of the cleft portion, were fully fifty feet high,
+and were at least twenty feet apart, but as they went on the walls drew
+nearer together and the path ascended a slight incline.
+
+A sharp turn was reached, and they found themselves in a little cove, to
+the left of which was a dark entrance, toward which the Chief nodded, as
+he shrank back.
+
+John motioned to the Chief, and the latter sternly commanded John to
+bring forth the Korinos. John said a few words to Uraso and Muro, and
+also invited the boys to accompany them.
+
+"I suppose you are all armed?" said John.
+
+The boys and the chiefs had come well prepared, so this point was taken
+care of.
+
+"But where are the lights?" asked George.
+
+"I have them," said John, "but we shall not use them now, for reasons
+which will be explained later." Together they entered the cave, the
+darkness of which was appalling. After going in fully a hundred and
+fifty feet, John stopped and said: "It would have been a sign of
+weakness to go in with a light. When we have gone far enough to be free
+from the mouth of the cave, we can use our flash lights. For the present
+we shall move on to ascertain whether the Korinos are provided with
+lights, which will show where they are, and we may thus be guided to
+them."
+
+The distance traveled must have been fully a thousand feet, when John
+again spoke: "I shall now throw the light directly ahead, and you must
+keep your eyes open to detect anything moving."
+
+The light flashed, and was then moved slowly to the left, until it
+reached a cove at the extreme eastern side, where there was an evident
+assemblage of articles, not a hundred feet in advance of them, but there
+was not a sign of living beings within the scope of the light beams.
+
+The company moved over to the spot indicated. A moment's examination
+satisfied them that it was really the abode of the Korinos, but they had
+disappeared.
+
+The debris, the half eaten portions of food, some still warm, were
+sufficient to indicate that they had fled, but where? Uraso, Muro and
+John, all three, flashed their lights, and, after examining the walls
+critically, Muro was the first to find the opening from the chamber in
+which they were standing.
+
+The outlet from the chamber was to the north, and toward it the
+explorers ran hurriedly, and passed along the contracted path, which
+soon turned to the left. After following its many windings, and
+scrambling over the broken and rocky floor, they saw ahead a streak of
+daylight, which gladdened the hearts of the boys.
+
+"Ah! they have gone," exclaimed John, as he emerged, and glanced across
+the ravine, and along the walls which extended up from the shore of a
+little stream below. "They have gone to the north, and have, probably,
+tried to seek safety in the other cave."
+
+"How are we going to get back?" asked George.
+
+"Do you think there will be any trouble in that?" asked John.
+
+"We shall have to go clear over the mountain for that, I'm afraid."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island._]
+
+"We are not far from the entrance," said John, "and if we intend to
+catch up with the Korinos, we must not delay for a moment."
+
+The party made a hurried trip around the hill, and the Chief was
+surprised to learn that there was another entrance, or an outlet to the
+cave on the northern side. None of his warriors was aware of this,
+however.
+
+John was now in a quandary. He was exceedingly anxious to secure the
+Korinos, but at the same time there was some things in the appearance of
+the cave that he wished to investigate. This was confided to Uraso and
+Muro, and the latter suggested that he and Uraso would undertake to
+follow the fleeing men, and return to the village, while John and the
+boys made the desired investigation.
+
+This was readily assented to, and they at once made their way across the
+hill, while John informed the Chief of the action which they had decided
+to take. One of the principal men of the village, in whom the Chief had
+confidence, and who knew the location of the upper caves, accompanied
+Uraso and Muro.
+
+The Chief, and those with him returned to the village, while John
+remained behind under the pretense that he wished to stay at the cave
+entrance until they returned from the pursuit after the Korinos.
+
+The boys first secured the flash lights which the two chiefs had
+brought, and when all had departed the boys and John entered the cave
+and marched directly to the location of their interior home.
+
+Every part of the habitation was well investigated. Almost every kind of
+tool and implement was found here in profusion, but singularly, none of
+them appeared to be used. Several flint lock guns, all rusted, and with
+decayed stocks, were among the articles discovered, but the Korinos had
+not used them.
+
+The inevitable copper vessels, entirely unlike those of modern
+manufacture, were the first things to claim the attention of the boys,
+as they recalled similar articles found in the caves thitherto
+investigated by them.
+
+"This begins to look as though we are to have the same experience we had
+at the cave at the Cataract," said George. "These vessels, no doubt,
+were brought here by the buccaneers, and I'll be surprised if we don't
+find a few more of their belongings somewhere in this place."
+
+After all the recesses in this vicinity had been investigated they
+scanned the side walls to the right, carefully going into the little
+recesses which were found all along the jagged sides.
+
+A hundred feet south of the living part of the cave they came,
+unexpectedly upon a large extension, not noticed before in their pursuit
+of the Korinos. The chamber extended in a southerly direction, and
+narrowed at the extreme opposite end.
+
+"This has the appearance of leading to another outlet, which would take
+us to the southern side of the hill. It would be remarkable, indeed, if
+such should be the case," said John, as he eagerly pressed forward,
+until they had passed four chambers.
+
+The walls were coming closer and closer, until there was now barely room
+for them to pass through, but they went in unhesitatingly, John in the
+lead. The passage was not straight, so that the light did not aid much
+in looking ahead, but suddenly the flash threw a beam ahead, which
+showed that they were at the entrance of a chamber.
+
+John stopped and directed the search light to all parts of the cavern.
+It appeared to be nearly round, with a perfectly smooth floor. It was
+unoccupied, but in the exact center of the chamber was a raised object,
+like a mound.
+
+Throughout the entire cave could be found the calcareous deposit so
+common in caves formed in limestone rocks, and the stalactite hangings
+on the ceilings and walls, and the stalagmites on the floors made the
+scene a weird one.
+
+John glanced upwardly to view the ceiling, above the mound, and said:
+"That does not seem to be a natural formation. Let us examine it first."
+
+With the small pick which John always carried, and by means of which he
+was always careful to examine rocks and geological formations, while on
+these tours, the top parts of the stalagmites were chipped off. This was
+an exceedingly simple matter, since they are generally soft.
+
+After the top layer was removed, the part beneath readily yielded, but
+before they had an opportunity to dig into it very deeply the pick
+struck something which gave forth a metallic sound. John stopped as
+though paralyzed.
+
+The pick was again driven in. Again the plain contact with some hard
+substance. The digging was now feverish, and when the broken parts were
+cleared away, a small metallic box, about twelve inches square across
+the top, and about ten inches deep, was exposed to view.
+
+The dent made by the pick was clearly visible, and the fresh mark showed
+that the metal was red.
+
+"It is copper!" said John.
+
+Every part of the material around the box was removed, and this enabled
+them to remove it from its resting place. John grasped it and securing a
+good hold, finally raised it.
+
+"No, it is not any heavier than I thought it would he," he remarked as
+he lay it down.
+
+"Did you expect to find this?" asked George in amazement.
+
+"No; this is a surprise to me as it is to you."
+
+"Then why did you make that remark?"
+
+"Because I believe that this box contains treasure of untold value. I
+should have been surprised if it weighed very much."
+
+"Could it not have contained treasure if it had been heavy?" asked
+Harry.
+
+John laughed, a peculiar exultant chuckle, as he responded: "Not the
+kind of treasure I have had in contemplation."
+
+The box was turned over and over. There was not the sign of any lid, or
+crack which showed the cover or means of opening it. "We must take this
+out and open it at our leisure," remarked John, "but before doing so it
+would be well to examine the other outlets to this chamber, if it has
+any."
+
+The chamber was found, on measurement, to be thirty feet in diameter,
+and the vaulted ceiling fully thirty feet high, singularly uniform in
+the domed formation, and not rough or jagged like the ceiling of the
+other chamber which they had just left.
+
+The walls were absolutely solid on all sides, the only entrance being by
+way of the narrow little passageway through which they had come. Harry
+picked up the box, and swung it up to his shoulder, and, John leading
+the way, they filed out and passed through the chamber, quickly making
+their way to the opening through which they first entered the cave.
+
+Within an hour they were back in the village, and found Muro there
+awaiting their arrival. "We have found their trail, and they have not
+gone to the upper cave. They are heading straight for the tribe in the
+northern end of the island."
+
+"I am surprised at that," said John. "We must consult the Chief about
+this," and without another word, he hurriedly went over to the Chief,
+who was as much astounded as John could be at the peculiar significance
+of their actions.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+THE TRIBE TO THE NORTH
+
+
+Instead of conveying the copper box to the village it was carried to the
+landing place and taken to the vessel, where it could be examined later,
+when they had more time. It was now of more importance to keep in touch
+with Muro and Uraso, the former of whom had gone to the north as soon as
+he had given the report mentioned in the last chapter.
+
+On the return to the village they discussed the affairs of the previous
+day, which John had abstained from mentioning.
+
+"What is it that really makes the people act that way when they are
+hypnotized!" asked George. "I have heard it said that there isn't any
+truth in mesmerism."
+
+"Mesmerism is the old term used to designate certain phenomena, which,
+originally, was supposed to be a force that emanated from the mesmerist.
+It is now known that hypnotism may be regarded as artificial catalepsy."
+
+"But what is catalepsy?"
+
+"It is an affection produced by hysteria, during which the patient's
+body becomes rigid. It is claimed by some that somnambulism is one phase
+of the hypnotic condition."
+
+"But in what way do your motions act on the one who is being
+hypnotized?"
+
+"The motions have nothing whatever to do with producing the condition.
+That is for effect, merely. Those who are able to bring about a mesmeric
+condition, try to concentrate the mind on some particular thing, and by
+making gentle motions, or passes, this is more forcibly impressed on
+them."
+
+"What was the object of Uraso telling them that the White Man's death
+was a terrible one, and trying to frighten them?"
+
+"Merely to make them concentrate their minds on one thing alone. Terror,
+or great fear, is one of the things which tends to a cataleptic
+condition. Great excitement, and sometimes excessive joy, have been
+known to do the same thing."
+
+"Then the object is merely to bring the mind under the control of the
+operator?"
+
+"Yes; what was originally considered as a power flowing from the
+hypnotist, is nothing more than his mental action or control which
+prevents the subject from exercising his own volition."
+
+A few hours after they returned to the village Uraso and Muro returned,
+with the information that the Korinos were now within the territory of
+the tribe to the north, and they wisely concluded it would not be good
+policy to pursue them further, and their prudence was commended by John.
+
+The natives were supremely happy in displaying their gifts, and the
+Chief, while much annoyed at the escape of the Korinos, was content to
+be relieved of their presence, when, after numerous conversations with
+John, he realized that they were of no use to him and his people.
+
+John announced that he intended to visit the tribe to the north, and
+purposed starting the following day. The Chief advised him to take with
+him all the warriors in the village, because he felt sure they would
+have a hostile reception.
+
+"It seems to me," replied John, "that would be the wrong thing to do. I
+do not wish him to think that my mission is a warlike one, and a large
+force will be in the nature of an invasion of his territory."
+
+"Perhaps you are right; but we have found him a difficult Chief to deal
+with. He is not like a man. He cannot stand up straight, as we do, and
+he kills and eats all who fall into his hands."
+
+This information was regarded by John as one of the imagination, purely,
+so it did not weigh heavily on his mind. What seemed to impress him most
+was the fate of the poor fellows who had voluntarily sought the
+protection of the cannibal Chief.
+
+"I would like to have your opinion as to the course which the Chief will
+take when the Korinos fall into his hands?" asked John.
+
+The Chief mused for a while, and then said: "They have no Korinos and do
+not believe in them, but they may tell the Chief that we tried to offer
+them as sacrifices, and he may use them with his people to stir up
+feelings of revenge against us."
+
+"But," replied John, "the captives you took, and who have escaped may
+tell him of our treatment of them and this may work in our favor."
+
+"I do not think so," he replied. "We have had many instances where they
+have refused to make friends with us, and for that reason we always had
+war."
+
+"But have you not often sacrificed their people when you have taken them
+in your wars?"
+
+"We have always done so."
+
+"Have any of your captives ever returned to them?"
+
+"No."
+
+"And have they always killed and eaten your people when they captured
+them?"
+
+"Yes; and none has ever returned to us. The Korinos would not let us
+keep the captives, but said that the Great Spirit told them they must be
+sacrificed."
+
+The foregoing information was sufficient to convince John of one thing,
+namely, that it was really the spirit of the Korinos which kept up the
+tribal warfare, at least so far as one end of the conflict was
+concerned.
+
+In spite of all the arguments advanced by the Chief, John was determined
+to make the trip with his own people, and thus avoid any feeling on the
+part of the tribe, against their present friend.
+
+In the morning John called Stut, and advised him to wait until the
+following day, when he should pull up anchor and proceed to the north
+for a distance not exceeding twenty miles, and then, seeking a safe
+anchorage, to await news from him.
+
+With forty of his own trusted men, together with Uraso and Muro, they
+set out on the march to the north, cheered by the people of the village,
+who came out to witness their departure. The old man who had been
+rescued, was still too weak to accompany them, so he was taken to the
+vessel, where he could receive the best of care and attention.
+
+In order not to be out of touch with the sea, John decided to follow the
+hills along the eastern side of the island, and this course was selected
+because the people to which they were going, unlike those at the
+southern portion of the island, lived in the mountainous region, as
+heretofore stated, and the probability of meeting them would be much
+better than if they had followed the level plateau.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 10. Cinnamon._]
+
+In the march the boys, as well as John, were ever on the alert to
+discover the possibilities of the island, so far as the natural products
+were concerned.
+
+"Something smells awfully sweet around here," said George, as they were
+tramping along a beautifully-wooded crest.
+
+"I think it must come from the trees that have the beautiful pale blue
+flowers. Wait until I get a branch."
+
+One of the men was quick to carry out Harry's wish. John was immensely
+pleased at the interest which the boys exhibited. "What does it smell
+like?" he inquired.
+
+"Something like cloves and cinnamon, both," answered George.
+
+"Peel off the bark and taste it."
+
+"It is just like cinnamon."
+
+"That is correct. It is the real cinnamon tree. It is the cassia of the
+Bible, one of the spices so frequently referred to in Scripture. The
+bark only is used, but the species which have fruit, are gathered and
+oil expressed from them, which is called _cinnamon suet_."
+
+Advancing, the surface became more rugged. They had to cross numerous
+gullies, and broken portions, and frequently jagged rocks would show
+themselves. Evidently when the island was raised up from the sea the
+rocks were forced through, and the climate in time disintegrated them,
+and formed a soil.
+
+"Do you think we shall find any minerals here?" asked Harry.
+
+"If we are to judge from our experiences on Wonder Island, where there
+is almost exactly the same formation, we may reasonably expect to find
+copper and also iron here."
+
+"While Harry and I were over at the bluff with Uraso, we saw something
+like green drippings, from the walls."
+
+"That is, undoubtedly, copper,--that is the sulphate form, in which it
+is usually found."
+
+"I was amused at Laleo (the native guide), who told Uraso this morning
+that our mission would be successful, and when he was asked why,
+answered, that the first thing they saw was three black birds. How
+superstitious these people are."
+
+"Do you think they are any more so than civilized people?" answered
+John. "It is curious how the number three runs through all their ideas.
+In certain parts of England they have a great many omens, and one of
+them is that if the traveler, starting on a journey, meets three
+magpies, it means success; if two appears, it is a sign of marriage; and
+four unexpected good news."
+
+"I recall that it is considered lucky for sun to shine on a bride,"
+added Harry.
+
+"The other part of that couplet is 'rain on a corpse,'" remarked John.
+
+"I never knew it was lucky for the corpse to be rained on," responded
+Harry, in a questioning tone.
+
+John laughed immoderately, as he answered: "Well, it might not be lucky
+for the corpse. But there are numerous lucky and unlucky signs that no
+one can account for, prevalent in our own country, such as putting on
+stockings wrong side out, and finding a horseshoe."
+
+"Of course, they are both fortunate signs," said George, smiling at the
+thought.
+
+"In Scotland, among those who are the most matter of fact people in the
+world, signs are very common. It is a bad omen with them to stumble over
+a threshold, or to step over green or red, or to sneeze while making up
+a bed."
+
+"After all, we are not so much ahead of the savages, are we?" mused
+George.
+
+During the march that day there was nothing specially worthy of note.
+The animals they met were few and small, and it did not appear that
+there were any which merited mentioning, so the boys gave up the idea of
+meeting any adventure in that line.
+
+Shortly after four in the afternoon they began to seek out some good
+camping place. Laleo informed Uraso that they had now passed into the
+territory claimed by the northern tribe, and the desirability of caution
+was necessary.
+
+A rocky shelter, only a short distance above a running brook below, was
+found suitable, and there the halt was made for the night. Early in the
+morning they were awakened by Muro, with the welcome intelligence that
+the _Pioneer_ was sighted several miles to the north, where she lay at
+anchor.
+
+At the suggestion of John the boys went to the headland, a mile to the
+east, and there hoisted a signal flag, which was observed by the vessel,
+and the return signal given, this being indicated by four circular
+sweeps of the flag.
+
+Waving the flag twice to the right, and twice to the left indicated that
+they were to remain there until further advised.
+
+After a good breakfast the march was resumed, leading further to the
+west to avoid the rugged hills near the sea. Either Uraso or Muro was
+constantly in the lead, always accompanied by one of the men who, in
+case of necessity, might be sent back to furnish John the reports of his
+observations.
+
+Before noon the messenger came in with the welcome information that the
+first of the natives had been noticed, not far to the north. Muro, who
+was in the lead, awaited the arrival of John and the boys.
+
+Together they went forward, the men remaining in the camp. A few men
+could thus move through the brush with less likelihood of observation,
+than a large number, which was the principal reason for this mode of
+procedure.
+
+After another mile of cautious movement, a runner was sent back with the
+order to bring all of them forward. Away in the distance the village was
+sighted, George's field glasses now being brought into play. The huts
+could be seen plainly along the mountain side, and scattered about in
+profusion amid a plentiful supply of trees.
+
+In some respects, viewed from a distance, the scene did not look at all
+primitive, and were it not for the crude character of the houses it
+might have been taken for a typical modern town or village.
+
+Only one hut had been passed, thus far. It was not at all crudely built,
+and while it had been left to decay, it showed that the owner had some
+ideas of comfort, and an eye to convenience, as it was located by the
+side of a spring. On one side of the cottage was a weed-grown garden,
+and some fine specimens of taro as well as wild potatoes were in
+evidence.
+
+Earthenware cooking utensils were discovered, which added to the
+interest of the place, but no other furniture was found to show how the
+people lived. It might have been deserted for a year or more.
+
+Ascending the second small hill, they were startled to find themselves
+face to face with a half dozen of the natives, who were frightfully
+alarmed at the appearance of the visitors, for they set up a shout and
+ran like deer toward the village.
+
+John kept on at the head of his force, and while the commotion in the
+village, not a half mile distant, was plainly visible, he did not halt,
+until he saw a curious crowd surrounding a short individual, who stood
+apart from those around him.
+
+"That is the Chief," said Laleo. "It is said he is a terrible man, and
+unlike all others," thus repeating what the Chief had told John.
+
+As he made no attempt to come forward or indicate what his wishes were,
+John directed the men to follow him, fifty feet in his rear, and he went
+on until within two hundred feet of the motley crowd, the people in the
+meantime making no sign of resistance, nor did they object to the
+advance.
+
+When John stopped, the curious figure, who was designated as the Chief,
+moved forward toward John without a bit of hesitation, and the boys were
+simply dumbfounded at his singular appearance, and at the gait he
+assumed.
+
+A word picture of him would not be amiss. He was a hunchback, with an
+extraordinary lump on his back, the arms much too long for his body, and
+crooked, distorted legs. The head, however, was massive, and covered
+with a heavy beard, which seemed to grow close up to the eyes, giving
+him a fierce appearance, because his head was covered with a thick
+coating of long gray, or sandy hair, that swung around the darker beard,
+as he shambled along.
+
+As he neared John his bright and staring eyes were the first thing
+noticed. When he came across the intervening space, his face was stern,
+and unforbidding, but as he neared John it relaxed, and he began to
+smile.
+
+John stepped forward, and extended his hand. "I am glad to meet you,"
+said John.
+
+The man looked at John for a moment, and then tried to mumble something,
+that the boys could not understand. After a few attempts he fairly
+shrieked out: "How are you?"
+
+This was certainly a startling thing, because the voice and the
+intonation were perfect. John opened his jacket and brought out a
+miniature American flag, which was unrolled, and the moment the strange
+being caught sight of it he seized it and pressing it to his lips,
+kissed it fervently.
+
+"I am an American," he finally struggled to utter. "I am a white man,
+and you are the first white man I have seen for fifty years. You are
+welcome to our home and village."
+
+The boys could not credit their senses. How did this poor specimen of
+the white race become the powerful Chief of a tribe of savage cannibals?
+
+John looked at him for a moment in astonishment, as he asked: "How long
+have you been Chief of the people here?"
+
+"About forty-five years. They are good people too."
+
+"We heard you were cannibals," remarked John.
+
+For a moment he scowled, and then his face brightened up. "Yes; I know
+my neighbors to the south have always believed that to be so, but they
+have heard such tales from their witch doctors, such as we used to have,
+but it is not true."
+
+"You mean the Korinos?"
+
+"Yes, those who left you two days ago, and have come to me for
+protection," and he smiled as he said this.
+
+"I tried to get them, but they eluded us," added John, by way of
+information.
+
+"You must pardon me, but it is still a little difficult for me to form
+sentences. It is so long since I have talked to any one in my native
+tongue. But I am impolite. Bring your people into the village, and let
+us entertain you. I do so want to hear about the great world and what it
+is now like."
+
+The Chief turned to his people and told them that the White Chief was
+from his own tribe, and that he came from a far-away country, on a visit
+to him, and that they must treat the people as his own.
+
+Nothing more was needed to make them welcome. George suggested to John
+that Stut on the _Pioneer_ should be notified, but before they had time
+to carry out the order a number of the villagers came rushing through
+the village and sought out the Chief.
+
+The latter turned to John and said: "My people tell me that there is a
+large ship here."
+
+"It is the vessel we came in," answered John, "and we were about to send
+a messenger to tell them to anchor near the village."
+
+"I am so happy to know this," said the Chief. "I want to see the ship,
+because it is the first time that any one has stopped at our shores.
+Some years ago we found some strange things that floated ashore from a
+wrecked vessel, and I want to show them to you, because I cannot
+understand what some of the things could be used for."
+
+They were led through the principal street of the town. It was clean and
+well kept; the huts were far better than those in the village they had
+left, and the natives were, apparently, happy and contented.
+
+As they marched along George was the first to notice a tall individual,
+who, with several others, were edging away from the visitors.
+
+"There they are!" he cried out. John turned to inquire, when Harry
+commenced laughing, as he added: "Here are the Korinos, John!"
+
+The latter looked in the direction indicated, and laughed when he saw
+their discomfiture. The Chief was hurriedly informed of the situation,
+and he laughed heartily, as he ordered one of his men to bring in the
+fugitives.
+
+They were ushered in, and Uraso told them that they were friends and not
+enemies, and that the White Chief tried to secure them so that their own
+Chief would not harm them. It was a great relief, unquestionably, and
+their actions showed it. John then told them, that he wanted to have a
+talk with them, and that he would assure them of their safety.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+THE HUNCHBACK CHIEF
+
+
+The White Chief's house was built on a plan which was a vast improvement
+over anything found on the two islands. True, it was nothing but an
+assemblage of rooms, which surrounded an open court. The furnishings
+were crude, but it was evident that all the articles were such as had
+been taken from the wreckages on the shore.
+
+Goods not native made, were noticed, and even a photograph, on a tin
+plate, like the old style daguerreotypes, was observed by Harry. Three
+chairs, one with a broken rocker, formed part of the furnishings in the
+court. In one corner was a mass of articles, the case of a ship's
+chronometer, the horn of a phonograph, some tin tubes of different
+lengths, and other odds and ends, which could not be recognized.
+
+"I am anxious to hear your story," said John. "If you have no objection
+we should be glad to have you relate it."
+
+"It will give me pleasure to tell of my experiences, although it may not
+interest you; but before doing so you must partake of food, because I
+know what it means to travel through our country. Besides I have ordered
+it prepared, and it is now ready."
+
+[Illustration: "_'It is copper,' said John_" [See p. 122]]
+
+"These two men I have with me," said John, pointing to Uraso and Muro,
+"are Chiefs of two powerful tribes, who live on a neighboring island,
+and they are real friends I found there when these two boys and I were
+shipwrecked there several years ago."
+
+"I am, indeed, glad to welcome them. I see that they have adopted the
+white man's clothing."
+
+"Yes; and their people who are wonderfully interesting are engaged in
+farming, and manufacturing."
+
+Then John told him briefly the history of their experiences, and how the
+people on Wonder Island were working out their salvation.
+
+John's tale impressed him most forcefully. "You have made good use of
+your talents. Unfortunately, for me, and for the natives here, I was not
+able wholly to bring out the people from their low condition, as you
+will be able to understand more fully when the story is told." He said
+this sorrowfully, and with apparent regret.
+
+After the meal, he continued his narrative: "I was a poor boy, a native
+of the State of Massachusetts, and was bound to a whaler as a helper,
+when less than fifteen years of age. It was a hard life, as you may
+know. I had no education, and I learned the life of misery and sorrow
+when I should have been at school.
+
+"But during that and the second year I became hardened, and my
+unfortunate physical condition made me the butt of my companions, and
+one day, in a fit of resentment, I struck down one of my tormentors,
+while in the harbor of Bedford, after which I escaped and made my way to
+Boston.
+
+"There, the next day, I found employment on an outgoing ship, that was
+in the China service, and two days later, I was gratified to learn that
+it would sail that night. I had a much easier berth, and now I found
+that among those men I was considered better than a mere brute, and I
+became acquainted with a young man who taught me to read.
+
+"This was such a delight to me that I could hardly wait until my daily
+duties were over, before the books were brought out, and by the time we
+put into Shanghai, I could read and write, as well as perform many
+examples in arithmetic.
+
+"I knew nothing of geography, or of any other of the necessary parts of
+education. Our outward trip was unexciting, but on the first return
+trip, we met one of the dangerous monsoons, and the ship was wrecked.
+One of my shipmates was the sole occupant of a spar, and he aided me in
+my attempt to grasp it, and together we floated about the great sea for
+several days, without a thing to eat or to drink, until I lost
+consciousness, and knew no more until I opened my eyes, and saw the
+vilest looking savages standing about me.
+
+"When I saw them they appeared like a horrid dream. I had read in one of
+the books about the terrible visions that men dream of, and when they
+tried to make me eat something, I began to feel that it was a reality.
+
+"But the men were naked, and I saw the bones of human beings about me,
+and everything had the appearance of a feast. I soon saw that they were
+cannibals, and as I had heard of their practices their faces grew more
+and more repulsive to me.
+
+"I recovered slowly, and now began the terror in my mind. Each day I
+expected would be my last. But day after day passed by, and I soon began
+to become reconciled to my fate. An incident soon changed the entire
+aspect of affairs for me. I had been treated with the utmost deference.
+I was furnished with an abundance of food, but I had previously learned
+that it was the custom of those people to fatten their victims, and this
+was not welcome knowledge.
+
+"I became desperate. One day, while they were bringing me the finest
+roasts, I rebelled, and taking a club, scattered the food, swinging the
+club at them and shouting defiance, because human nature began to rebel,
+and I could not stand the suspense any longer.
+
+"To my surprise they scattered, and fell on their faces. Among them was
+the head man, whom I had always regarded as the Chief. Finally he came
+up timidly, and fell on his knees before me. I was so astounded that I
+did not know what to do. I went to the Chief and raised him up, because
+I was in a quandary, and could not understand them.
+
+"This seemed to reassure him, and he told me to follow him. I had been
+here long enough to understand most of their jargon. I was surprised
+when he led me to his own hut, and brought out his daughter, who knelt
+before me. Then I began to understand. I was no longer the expected
+victim, but the prospective son-in-law. This was better than
+anticipating death daily.
+
+"I accepted the situation. The daughter became my wife. It was she who
+welcomed you when we came in. When her father died I became Chief, but
+long before his death, I controlled the people, as I knew so much more,
+and had superior wisdom, judged by their standard, that they obeyed me
+in everything.
+
+"But much as I abhorred, and tried to prevent it, as I did on many
+occasions, they practiced their rites, and had their Korinos, the real
+offenders, who taught them the necessity of sacrifices.
+
+"But when I became Chief, I sternly refused to permit them to kill their
+captives, and cannibalism was practiced only by stealth. I succeeded in
+stamping out the practice only by putting the Korinos to death, and in
+shutting up their caves."
+
+The boys, as well as John were riveted to their seats during this entire
+recital, until he referred to the caves, when they relaxed, and
+indicated their pleasure and anxiety. That meant still further quests in
+that direction.
+
+The Chief noticed their movement, and continued: "I am tiring you, but
+permit me to add only a few things. I have endeavored to better the
+condition of these people, and have succeeded. To the south of us was a
+powerful tribe. My first care was to make ourselves secure against them.
+
+"Like my people they, too, were cannibals. They were ruled over by a
+Chief who was cruel, and whenever any of their people escaped I took
+them in and cared for them, and there are now many of those living with
+us who could not be induced to go back. For more than forty years no one
+has been killed and eaten by my people."
+
+"Your work here is certainly most commendable. There is nothing which
+needs apology. Under the circumstances you have done all that was
+possible, and to the best of your ability. No one can do more," was
+John's timely observation.
+
+"I thank you for the compliment. I owe everything to the few books which
+my comrade taught me to read. When I left the United States my heart was
+bitter toward all mankind. I could not see why I should have been
+treated in such a harsh manner among civilized people, but when I landed
+here and saw how much worse the conditions were, I began to reflect. It
+would have been an easy and a natural thing for me to be brutal to
+others, as they had been to me."
+
+"You have shown a noble spirit, and I shall try to help you in caring
+for your people. Our ship is here, and we have some things for you, as
+soon as they can be unloaded," rejoined John.
+
+During the afternoon communication was established with the _Pioneer_,
+and the natives were willing helpers in bringing up the packages, but it
+was too late to distribute them. Before leaving John said: "You have not
+told us your name."
+
+"I was christened Ephraim Wilmar."
+
+John seized him by the hands, as he said: "And was your father's name
+William?"
+
+"Yes," said Ephraim, as his great eyes grew still bigger. "Did you know
+him?"
+
+"I knew him well; he died about thirty years ago. He was my father's
+friend."
+
+This information established a bond of friendship between the two.
+
+"I have forgotten to take note of time, and I may be out a year or two
+in my reckoning," continued Ephraim, "but according to the best
+information I have this must be the year 1911."
+
+"You are short one year; it is now 1912."
+
+"Then let me see! We sailed from China in January, 1860; and during that
+same month the ship went down. From that time to the present I have no
+idea of what has taken place."
+
+"Then you know nothing of the four years' war between the North and the
+South?"
+
+"No; I remember there was some trouble about the slaves, or something of
+that sort before we left China."
+
+"But there are no more slaves in the United States."
+
+"You surprise me! Then they were freed by the war?"
+
+"Yes; and Cuba is also free, and is now a republic, and the Hawaiian
+Islands belong to the United States, as also do the Philippines."
+
+"That does not seem possible. Why, if I remember correctly Cuba and the
+Philippines belonged to Spain. When did the United States purchase
+them?"
+
+"We had a war with Spain, and we took the Spanish possessions, as well
+as Porto Rico. Manila was captured three days after war was declared."
+
+"Three days after war was declared! How could our fleet, which must have
+been half the way around the world, get the news that war had been
+declared in that time?"
+
+"The commander of our fleet at Hongkong, was notified by telegraph."
+
+"How could that be done without a telegraph line? Over what part of the
+earth are the lines now running?"
+
+"Everywhere; but there are many running under the sea and are called
+_cable lines_."
+
+Ephraim looked at John for a moment, as though he doubted the meaning of
+the words just uttered, and then slowly inquired: "That must be a
+remarkable thing. I do not see how it would be possible to string wires
+under the sea."
+
+"They are encased in water tight coverings, and some of the lines are
+four thousand miles long. But nowadays we do not need wires for
+telegraphing."
+
+The deformed figure arose, and appeared to be agitated, as he said: "Do
+you mean to say that messages can be sent without wires?"
+
+"Stations for that purpose are now in operation all over the world."
+
+"That is as improbable to me as though you should tell me that it would
+be possible to talk over a wire," he answered.
+
+"But we do talk over wires, and it is possible to talk over distances
+hundreds of miles apart, without wires even."
+
+He glanced at those about him, and shook his head. He appeared to
+hesitate about asking any more questions, and after shambling back and
+forth a dozen times, or more, he stopped at the pile of debris, and
+picked up a thick disk-like piece of metal, to one side of which was a
+short broken tube attached.
+
+"I have examined this many, many times. Perhaps you can tell me what it
+is?" and he handed it to John.
+
+"This is the disk of a phonograph."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"An instrument which will reproduce the human voice, or any noise, or
+the sound of music."
+
+"I do not understand what you mean. If I talk to it will it talk back to
+me?"
+
+"No; it is so arranged that one form of the instrument receives the
+sound of your voice, and impresses it on material in the form of a
+cylinder, or a disk, and if this cylinder or disk is put into another
+instrument, this little apparatus, which I hold in my hand will speak
+the same words you uttered."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk._]
+
+"Then electricity must be a wonderful thing, to be able to be used by
+men to talk to each other all over the world, and even to preserve what
+they say."
+
+"But the phonograph is not an electrical apparatus. The disk, here, with
+the little stylus, or pointer on it, vibrates and gives forth the
+sound."
+
+"All this is most marvelous, and I would like to see some of those
+wonderful things," he exclaimed.
+
+"If you will come to the ship we will show you many of the things that
+electricity does, as we have a phonograph there, and we have a search
+light that operates by electricity, and which enables us to see many
+miles," added Harry.
+
+"Yes; I must see your ship, and I am ready to accompany you any time,
+and I want my people to see those things, as well."
+
+"But there are many other things that we now do with electricity. All
+street railways are now operated by it; many boats are run by that
+power; cooking is done by it, and its uses extend into almost everything
+that man touches," remarked John.
+
+"If this one branch of knowledge has improved so wonderfully within a
+space of fifty years, the progress in other directions must be very
+wonderful, indeed," he responded. "But you have told me so much, and I
+hardly know how I can grasp its meaning. I suppose things here in this
+part of the world must appear very crude to you?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE CHIEF'S FAMILY
+
+
+Ephraim's wife was not crude and uncouth, like most of the native women.
+It was evident from the care which she observed in the domestic
+arrangements, that Ephraim had a hand in shaping her course.
+
+The food was served with considerable care, and, in some degree with the
+formality observed in civilized homes. John was a careful observer of
+customs, and he was surprised to note that all the natives patterned
+after the habits established by their Chief.
+
+"I tried," said Ephraim, in answer to John's questions, "to better their
+condition, and to teach them how to prepare and eat their food, and we
+made vessels of pottery, which you will notice are found everywhere.
+They understood the art of weaving, in a very primitive way, which I
+also tried to improve. Only on three occasions did we take any toll from
+the sea, when the wreckage came ashore.
+
+"Of the articles which were thus recovered, I took only a fair share,
+and the others were impartially distributed to the people."
+
+"Did you ever have any trouble with the natives, or did they ever
+dispute your authority?" asked John.
+
+"Only once, many years ago. A man claiming to be the son of the Chief,
+gathered together a number of adherents, but my people rose against
+them, and killed the leaders, which I very much regretted. When I
+remonstrated with them for the severity of their course, they justified
+it by saying that I had been kind to them, and had made them better, and
+it was the very thing that taught me to feel that human beings, although
+savages, understand kind treatment. It made me a convert in my feelings
+against some of the white men who had treated me with such severity."
+
+During the day, after the packages had been removed from the ship the
+articles were taken from the packages and arranged in Ephraim's home.
+Articles of clothing were distributed to the Chief's family, and what
+pleased him more than anything else, were the cooking utensils, all of
+the newest ware, and in great variety, some of which were curiosities to
+him.
+
+He had four children, the eldest a young man about thirty years of age,
+who had a family of three children; the next, a strong, active native,
+about twenty-five; a medium-sized young woman, almost white, of about
+twenty, and the youngest a lad of seventeen, who was quickly attracted
+to the boys.
+
+These, together with their mother, undertook the task of distributing
+the gifts to the people. Articles of adornment were, of course, the most
+enticing to the natives, and John had anticipated this feeling in the
+selection of the gifts.
+
+After the feast of the good things, John broached the subject next to
+his heart, and that was to explore the island, and particularly the
+caves. In referring to the matter he said:
+
+"I recognize that whatever treasure we may find in them belongs to you,
+and you are entitled to them."
+
+"But they are of no use to us," he responded. "I am not wise in the ways
+of the world, but I am sure that great wealth, in the way of gold and
+silver, would not make my people happy. I agree with you that
+employment, and trying to teach people to help and care for each other,
+is much more likely to make them happy, and besides, the treasures which
+you refer to could not be used by them to any advantage."
+
+"You have spoken wisely," answered John, "nevertheless, we have no need
+of the riches which we may find. My search is for a different sort of
+wealth."
+
+"I do not understand what could be of more advantage, or repay you
+better than gold and silver."
+
+"It is believed that many of these places contain the records of people
+who have lived here thousands of years ago. All over the world hidden
+treasures of that kind have been found, some of them which go to show
+that men lived on the earth hundreds of thousands of years."
+
+"You are much wiser than I am, and understand the reason for making such
+a search, but I do not see why that would be of any use to know those
+things."
+
+"A great man once said, 'Know thyself,' and another remarked, that the
+'proper study of mankind is man.' To ascertain the origin of humanity,
+how man lived and acted, what were his motives and desires, his beliefs
+and his aspirations, and to know how he has improved, are interesting
+questions to me."
+
+He mused at this statement for a long time, and then quietly said: "That
+may be so; it may make us greater and better men, and it may be
+gratifying to have that knowledge, but I have now arrived at that time
+of life where things appear differently from the way I used to look at
+them. Every year I begin to think less of myself, and more of those
+about me.
+
+"When my children grew up about me they were the only ones I cared for.
+They were the only things in the world that interested me. When my
+grandchildren came they were new inspirations to me, and my views toward
+others changed, and made me feel better inclined."
+
+"That shows, does it not, that as we grow older, and as the world
+increases in age, everything improves, our minds, the advancements in
+the arts, in the sciences, in inventions, and generally in the
+improvement of the human race? It is a part of the whole education which
+man in his improved condition is trying to instill, and it is human
+knowledge, and the desire to learn everything, that gives a stimulus to
+us."
+
+There was no more welcome intelligence than the news that on the
+following day they would visit the first cave in the northern hills, and
+that Ephraim would accompany them. The people in the village were
+delighted at the news that the ancient caves of the Korinos would be
+opened.
+
+The trip took on the nature of a pleasure expedition. Even the family of
+the Chief were insistent on going along, and the boys quickly became the
+friends of Camma, the youngest son of Ephraim, and insisted that he
+should go back with them to Wonder Island on a visit when they returned.
+
+Ephraim assented to this most heartily. They showed Camma the workings
+of the revolver, and presented him with one of them. Then, when they
+went to the ship, he was presented with a camera, and an outfit for
+developing.
+
+When the boys brought back a small hand sewing machine, and gave it to
+Mene, young Camma's sister, the joy in that family was beyond all
+bounds. Ephraim stood before the little machine, as though paralyzed. It
+acted like a human being, only more perfectly, as its work showed.
+
+But now for the caves. Sufficient food was taken along to make the trip
+a comfortable one. The village in which Ephraim lived was nearly a half
+day's journey from the original site of the town that was occupied by
+the old Chief. He had founded the new site, near the sea, because of the
+exposed condition of the old village, and also on account of the
+unsanitary condition of the surroundings.
+
+The caves were near the old town, and it required nearly five hours to
+make the trip, but it was enjoyable, every step of the way. The three
+boys engaged in hunting, on the way, because the new toy in Camma's
+hands had to be put to use. Ephraim put no restraint on the jolly pranks
+of the boys. John was careful to tell him that Harry and George were not
+wild or reckless, and that Camma would find them healthy comrades.
+
+Shortly after noon, they were told that the first of the caves would be
+found in the hill toward the right, and that the work of opening the
+principal one would not be undertaken until after luncheon.
+
+You may be sure that the boys made a hurried meal, and without waiting
+for the workers to come up, they grasped their weapons, and were soon
+half way up the hill, their guide, an old man, who knew the location of
+the caves, being with them, to show the way.
+
+The old man pointed to the rocky wall, and indicated where the opening
+was. Ephraim had closed it effectually, for they saw the evidence of the
+wall before them, where its comparatively smooth surface showed the
+difference between the natural wall and the rough rocks elsewhere.
+
+"Where is the other cave?" asked George.
+
+"It is on the other side," he answered.
+
+"And is that also closed?"
+
+"Yes; just as you see this."
+
+When the workers came up John directed them how to commence at the top,
+and take out a rock at a time. He smiled as he saw how well the work had
+been done, and Ephraim was gratified at the praise bestowed.
+
+"You certainly made a first class job of ashlar work," remarked John.
+
+"What is that?" asked Ephraim, in surprise.
+
+"It is just this kind of masonry where the courses are irregular, and
+built up from the rock just as it came from the quarry."
+
+"I was not aware that there were different kinds of masonry. I thought
+that masonry was merely the placing together of stones so they would
+bind each other, and that is the way I had them do it."
+
+"Masonry is one of the oldest of the arts. It is really the foundation
+stone of architecture. The work you have done here happens to be of rock
+that has a rather smooth outline, that is, the stone broke off smooth,
+in the upper layers, but the large pieces near the bottom represent what
+is called rubble work."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 12. Types of Masonry._]
+
+"This is very interesting to know," remarked Ephraim.
+
+[Illustration: "_The old man pointed to the rocky wall_" [See p. 152]]
+
+"I might add," continued John, "that when the courses are not regular it
+is called _broken_ ashlar; when stones of less than one foot in breadth
+are used it is called _small_ ashlar; if the wall is backed by
+rubble, or inferior work it is called _bastard_ ashlar. Then every kind
+of surface has a particular name, like the _random-tooled_, where the
+tool marks are shown in all directions; _rusticated_ when only the
+joined edges are trimmed up; _prison-rustic_ when it is pitted with deep
+holes; _herring-bone_ when it is tooled in rows of opposite directions
+to each other; and _nigged_ when finished up with a pointed hammer."
+
+Within an hour the stones were removed and put aside, and then Ephraim
+was treated to another surprise when he was made acquainted with the
+little electric flash lights which John exhibited. With these they
+entered the cave.
+
+All savage tribes have some sort of animals, as pets, and dogs are the
+most frequent. This was the case among these people. The dogs were with
+the party, and, as usual, ahead of the procession. Two of them went
+ahead on a scouting expedition, while John and the boys, with their
+flash lights followed.
+
+After they had gone, probably two hundred feet, there was a slight
+descent apparent in the floor of the cave, and ahead were the two dogs
+stretched out, lifeless.
+
+George ran ahead, as he noticed them, and John shouted out: "Do not
+touch them!"
+
+He stopped, and looked back, and then slowly walked up to the animals.
+John requested the party to halt, and he went forward, and put his foot
+on one of the dogs. "We must go back," he said.
+
+"Are they dead?" asked Harry, as he came forward.
+
+"Why not take them out and see what the trouble is?" inquired Harry.
+
+"No need for that," responded John. "I know what the trouble is."
+
+"Is there any danger in the cave?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+Ephraim and the natives were now alarmed. It will be remembered that the
+universal belief among the natives is, that to go into these caves
+unbidden, means death. True, John had shown the fallacy of this on
+several occasions, but here was positive evidence that death had visited
+the dogs, and this might be the fate of those who attempted to go on.
+
+But the most alarming thing was the fact that John himself was the one
+who said there was danger, and that they must return. He did not venture
+to make an explanation until they were out of the cave.
+
+"There is carbonic acid in the cave, and as it is a deadly poison we
+cannot go in until it is removed."
+
+"That seems singular," responded George. "I went in as far as the dogs,
+and it didn't affect me."
+
+"But you did not reach down to touch the dog."
+
+"I saw you touch the dog, and it didn't seem to affect you."
+
+"I touched it with my feet and not with my hands."
+
+"I cannot see what difference that makes."
+
+"If you had touched the dog with your hands it would have brought your
+face down near the floor of the cave, and the gas is at the bottom of
+the cave only."
+
+"Why should it be there and not all over?"
+
+"Because it is much heavier than the air we breathe, and remains at the
+bottom, just like water. If you recall, this part is lower than the
+corridor through which we came, so that it could not run out. I have
+always observed that in all the other caves the floors within were
+higher than the entrance, and in such cases there is no liability of
+getting poisonous gases."
+
+"But how are we to make the investigation, under the circumstances?"
+
+"We must remove the gas."
+
+"How can that be done?"
+
+"Several ways are open; one would be to tap the floor and drain the gas
+out, which would be difficult to do with our resources. Another plan
+would be to force in a lot of air, so as to render the gas inert, or we
+might put in enough air to make it burn, and consume it."
+
+"Why, will it burn?"
+
+"Most assuredly; all it needs is enough air; but I am afraid this plan
+will not be a very safe one for us. If the floor of the cave is not at
+any place more than four feet below the entrance, we can go about
+safely, but in such case we must move about with the utmost caution, so
+as not to get too much of the gas in the system."
+
+"I am afraid it will be a difficult thing to go in unless we know
+absolutely where the low places are, or unless we survey the bottom of
+the cave," said George, brightening up at the idea.
+
+"What would happen if we threw a light into the bottom where the gas
+is?"
+
+"It would be extinguished instantly," remarked John.
+
+"That gives me an idea," asserted George. "Why not take a lamp, and
+carry it ahead of us, about three feet from the ground, and whenever
+that goes out, it will show there is gas there?"
+
+"That is a good observation; but I am afraid it would be very dangerous
+to do that."
+
+"Dangerous? I thought you said that the carbonic gas would put out the
+light?"
+
+"So it will; but if three parts of air should be added to one part of
+the gas it will make an explosive mixture,--that is, a mixture which
+will burn, as there has been enough oxygen added to support combustion."
+
+"In what way could enough air mix with the gas to make it burn?"
+
+"By stirring it; the movement of the body might make an admixture just
+above the surface of the gas, which would burn, and that might mean a
+catastrophe for us."
+
+"Then we are certainly stopped at this cave."
+
+"Not by any means," rejoined John, and he saw the boys' faces smiling
+again. "We must make a safety lamp."
+
+"Do you mean a lamp that will not explode the gas, although it has
+enough oxygen to 'support combustion,' as you say?"
+
+"Exactly. Have you ever heard of the Humphrey Davy lamp? Well, that was
+invented to meet the very condition found here."
+
+"Tell us about it."
+
+"In 1816 Davy discovered that a flame would not pass through a fine wire
+gauze, while conducting some experiments. It occurred to him that use
+could be made of this discovery by surrounding the flame of a lamp with
+gauze, and the well-known lamp was built on that principle."
+
+"What I am curious to know is, that if it will not burn the gas, will it
+go out if it gets down in the gas?"
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps._]
+
+"Yes; because enough air, or oxygen must go through the mesh to support
+combustion of the flame itself. If it does not get enough it is
+smothered."
+
+"Then why not make a lamp of that kind?"
+
+"But where can we get enough gauze to make a cylinder big enough to go
+around a lamp?"
+
+John laughed at the serious predicament, which expressed itself in the
+faces of the boys. "That is true," he said; "but if we can get a small
+piece of tin, we can punch it full of fine holes, and probably make
+that answer."
+
+"We haven't anything in the way of tin large enough to go around a lamp,
+but here is a round piece, about three inches in diameter."
+
+"That will answer; punch that as full of holes as possible, and be sure
+they are very small."
+
+"What shall we use for a lamp?"
+
+John was already looking around, and soon spied a tree in the distance
+that looked like a small pine, and beneath that he found some cones, a
+dozen of which were picked up.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig 14. How John made the Lamp._
+ _A. Perforated Disk_
+ _B. Frame of Sticks_
+ _C. Cloth Covering_
+ _D. Base Plate._]
+
+"That is a pine tree, isn't it?"
+
+"Yes; these cones will burn for some time."
+
+"But they will not make much of a light."
+
+"No; but we are not after a light, but they will do for testing
+purposes."
+
+The accompanying sketches show how it was made. A plate was used for a
+base, on which the burning cone was placed. A half dozen twigs were
+then provided, and these were bent U-shaped, after being secured
+together at their middle portions, and the lower ends held by a cord,
+and this was then inverted, and a piece of thin cotton goods, of a
+single thickness, only was wound around the little frame, leaving an
+opening at the top, which was covered by the perforated tin disk.
+
+"There, now we have an article which provides for the admission of air,
+through the cotton goods, and the product of combustion can escape
+through the perforated opening at the top."
+
+The boys danced around with joy, when the cone was ignited, and a bale,
+which was simply a string, attached, so it could be carried
+conveniently.
+
+This time they went on, far beyond the place where the poor dogs lay.
+Occasionally John would lower the device, and when it descended too far,
+the knot would begin to smoke, and this was explained by the statement
+that as it went into the carbon gas, less and less air was supplied,
+which caused the flame to die down.
+
+The cave was similar to the others, being white from the lime deposits,
+but in all their wanderings they had never seen anything to compare with
+the beautiful hangings noted in the interior, particularly in the
+chambers, which they passed, one after the other, four of which were
+especially admired.
+
+Ephraim was intensely interested. He never had taken the trouble to
+visit any of these caverns, and was not disposed to take much stock in
+the many tales that had been related about the weird interiors.
+
+"I can now understand," he said, "why the natives possessed such a fear
+of them. I have faced many perilous conditions, during my life here, but
+I confess if I had any faith in the superstitions about these places,
+they would have paralyzed me, now that I have seen their ghostly
+appearance."
+
+They suddenly emerged into a spacious chamber, so large that their
+voices seemed to reverberate. The flash lights were directed to all
+sides and to the immense vaulted and icicle-covered ceiling. John stood
+the lamp on the ground. It was free from the dangerous gas. The floor
+was fairly level, but it was covered with the broken hangings from the
+ceiling.
+
+"I see an outlet, directly opposite the one we came by," exclaimed
+George.
+
+The party hastened across the intervening space. They were traveling
+along the greatest length of the chamber. Midway between the two
+openings were two other side openings, and John stopped and exclaimed:
+"It is true! We have found it!"
+
+The boys had never seen John so agitated before. They pressed around and
+requested an explanation, but he fumbled in his pocket, and soon drew
+forth a carefully wrapped piece of brown paper.
+
+"This is parchment. It contains the sketch of the cave that has been the
+object of my search. I believe we are the only white people who have
+ever been privileged to enter it since the chart was made three
+centuries ago."
+
+Ephraim, as well as the boys, glanced about them. What was there to
+excite him? Other caves had the same sort of formation, the chambers and
+the openings: and while they wondered John drew a compass from his
+pocket, and after holding it for a while, continued:
+
+"This chamber runs north and south as you see. We entered on the south
+side. It had two other outlets, one to the east, the other to the west."
+
+"Then it is the cross-shaped cave!" almost shouted George.
+
+"Yes," answered John, as he fixed his eyes on the boys. "In the year
+1620, a Spanish navigator found a cave, of which this is a description,
+and within it were found the remains of hundreds of people."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE CHART AND THE CAVES
+
+
+John pored over the map, without going any further. Evidently something
+was passing in his mind, for occasionally his eyes left the paper and he
+looked about, as though undecided.
+
+"Do you know any more about what they found?"
+
+"Yes; there are many incomplete portions belonging to the history, but
+it may be summed up by the statement, that they also found an immense
+amount of treasure, much of it in the form of solid gold. The
+adventurers were wild with joy at the discovery, and took steps to
+remove it.
+
+"Before proceeding far they found carvings and inscriptions, the latter
+of which were unintelligible to them, but they were very curious,
+judging from the few sketches which were made. But like many men of
+their class they began to quarrel over the treasure, and fought each
+other to the death."
+
+"That was just like the fellows who lived in the cave at the Cataract,"
+suggested Harry.
+
+"No doubt that was over the treasure, too, there, as well as here. Four
+of the men escaped, only to be chased by savages, and after finally
+reaching their vessel were almost wrecked because they did not have
+enough properly to man the ship.
+
+"After reaching civilization, they engaged a number of men, and
+returned. Some went in, among them two of the original discoverers. They
+did not return for some days, and another party went in, but they did
+not return.
+
+"Only one of the four remained, and when their companions did not
+return, the others took fright and returned to the vessel. Juan Guiterez
+was the name of the sole survivor of the first expedition. The
+adventurers who accompanied him declared that he and his company had
+lured them to the strange isle, in order to destroy them, and on the
+return to the first Spanish port, he was cast into prison, and remained
+a prisoner for nearly twenty years.
+
+"This chart, or what remains of it, or from which this copy was made was
+written by him while in prison, but the singular thing is, that while he
+was explicit in many things, he did not leave a clue as to the location
+of the island. Many of the things on it, as you see, are very faint."
+
+The boys now examined the chart for the first time. Harry started back
+in surprise, as he pointed to the chart, and looked up at John. "Why,
+there are the same marks we found on the skull at Wonder Island!" he
+exclaimed in great excitement.
+
+"Quite true! and do you now wonder why I have been so much interested to
+find the location? Chance has thrown this opportunity our way. It is
+true we might be mistaken, but the description fits."
+
+It would require pages to tell about what they found in the recesses of
+the cavern. Hundreds and hundreds of skeletons were discovered, and the
+most curious tablets and carvings in hieroglyphics were scattered in the
+adjoining chamber.
+
+Peculiarly-formed tools, implements of warfare, also of metal, small
+slabs of uniform size, and with characters on both sides, which might
+have been the historical books of the singular people who lived here
+ages ago, were in profusion not only in the large chamber, but in the
+most unexpected places.
+
+To John it was a vast storehouse of archeological wealth. To the boys it
+was much more. There were still some things that John did not explain,
+and which they wanted to know.
+
+"Do you believe that the different parties went in and never came back
+again?" asked George.
+
+"I have no doubt but the account was true."
+
+"What became of them?"
+
+"They probably met the fate that almost overtook us when we first went
+in," was the answer.
+
+The parchment was correct in the main details, as to the records within
+the cave, but there were no treasure, nor could any trace be found of
+them. They spent several days in the search, but to no avail. The boys
+were not much disappointed, it may be said, but they were gratified to
+know that John had accomplished the one desire of his life, and they
+knew, also, that it would be a source of great joy to the Professor.
+
+It was found that the cave entrance at the opposite side of the hill was
+the northern outlet to the same set of caverns, and Ephraim did not know
+of any others that existed in the northern part, so that they did not
+feel it to be desirable to take up more time in this direction.
+
+They had now found two isles, besides their own loved island, and when
+they assembled that evening in the cabin of the _Pioneer_, they had a
+most earnest conversation as to the results of their latest enterprise.
+
+"We have sought the treasures of the islands, and what have we
+accomplished?" asked George.
+
+"What have we accomplished? I have been thinking that to find the
+natives here, and to be able to help them, is a pretty big thing in
+itself," answered Harry.
+
+"That is true," he responded, "and the same thing might be said, also,
+about the wonderful products of the islands; they are certainly worth
+coming here for. I wonder what Blakely would say if he knew of all there
+is here, and the knack shown by the natives to handle the things?"
+
+"I am in sympathy with your views," said John. "Treasures, like gold and
+silver, are worth seeking for, but when you find that the earth is
+inviting people to till it, and there are people who, through ignorance,
+do not know how the earth can be utilized, it is a great privilege to be
+able to help them, and the recollection of what you have done will be
+the greatest treasure not only to you but to the poor people that have
+been benefited."
+
+"I think Ephraim's story is a wonderful one," said George, "but he could
+not go far. His education was limited, but see what he has done with the
+little he knew."
+
+"It was curious, however, that the cannibals had fear for him. I cannot
+understand that," rejoined Harry.
+
+"Savages are children only. They have the capacities of full grown men,
+but have never had the opportunities. Their superstitions lead them
+into singular forms of reasonings. With them the deformed are objects of
+curiosity, and generally, of reverence. Those mentally deficient are
+regarded as possessing a superior spirit."
+
+"I remember that the Professor told us so on one occasion, but it seems
+to be singular that they should get that view. How do you account for
+it?"
+
+"That is a trait, or, I may say, a belief which is not at, all uncommon
+among civilized people. Throughout Europe many men, who lived years ago,
+are reverenced as Saints, and, who, from the accounts given of them,
+were demented. Why, it is even claimed that there is but one step from
+the abnormally gifted to the insane person."
+
+"Is that really so regarded among learned men?"
+
+"It has been the subject of many remarkable books which have been
+written to show that genius and insanity are closely allied. Take, for
+instance, the case of Blind Tom, an ignorant negro, who, although he
+could not read, nor did he know a single note of music, was able,
+nevertheless, to play the most marvelous music, and repeat, at a single
+hearing, an entire musical score."
+
+"But such talents, as that, I have heard, is only in some particular
+direction. He was not able to do anything else," suggested George.
+
+"Quite true. But it is so with what is called genius. I once knew a
+learned minister, a leading professor in one of the colleges, who was
+absolutely devoid of any other phase of education, except theology. He
+could not master the first rudiments of mathematics, and knew no more of
+astronomy than a ten year old boy, but he was supreme in his particular
+branch of knowledge."
+
+But the great question with John and the boys was the future. Two
+islands had been discovered. Some of the mysteries of the past three
+years had been solved, but others still remained; in fact, those which
+interested them the most, were still shrouded in a veil through which
+there was only the slightest glimpse.
+
+John felt that their first duty would be thoroughly to explore the
+island to the north and west of the village, and thus enable them to
+make a complete report when they returned to Wonder Island, and this
+course was finally decided upon.
+
+The spirit of John had now entered Ephraim. He had fully agreed to
+accompany them in the _Pioneer_, and learn of their great work on that
+island. He said that it was his duty to his children and to the natives
+who had stood by him so nobly, to provide for their future welfare.
+
+He was most active in arousing the people to an understanding of the
+mission of John and the boys. Within a day, all preparations were made
+for the journey through the island, and Ephraim was with them in order
+to learn all that might be necessary, so that when he returned he could
+advise the people.
+
+For more than a week they tramped through the attractive portions of the
+land, and then the day was set for departure.
+
+"I have been thinking of making a trip to your friends in the South,"
+said John, as they were dining at Ephraim's home, the day before the
+date of sailing.
+
+"That would please me more than anything else," replied Ephraim. "It
+occurs to me that is the first step toward peace and prosperity on the
+island."
+
+"Then we shall sail to their village, and from that place go to Venture
+Island, where we had our first adventures, stopping, on the way at
+Hutoton, where they have a criminal colony."
+
+"What is that?" inquired Ephraim. "A criminal colony?"
+
+"Yes," said John. "On the large island to the south, which we discovered
+before we came here we found a singular condition of things. Near the
+southern end of the island we came into contact with a tribe ruled over
+by a Chief, named Beralsea, a powerful man; in fact, there is no law
+there except the will of the Chief."
+
+The boys were now laughing immoderately, and Ephraim was moved to smiles
+at their mirth. "It must have been very amusing, I have no doubt," he
+said.
+
+"We were thinking of the jolly time we had when Sutoto married the
+Chief's daughter," said George.
+
+"We shall tell you all about it on our way there," added Harry.
+
+"I was about to say," continued John, as he also smiled at the
+reminiscence, that his views on theft were most peculiar. He did not
+regard it as a crime if the people stole from each other. But if they
+attempted to steal from him, or tried to deceive him, it was such a
+great crime, that the unfortunates were banished to a place called
+Hutoton, which, as he stated, meant the Place of Death.
+
+"We were informed that it was a terrible place, and when a man was
+sentenced it also meant a like sentence to all of his family, and that
+no one was ever known to return from that horrible prison home."
+
+"I have heard, but only vaguely, that there was such a place, but had no
+idea that it was so near to us. But did you verify the character of the
+place?"
+
+"We went there, and instead of finding a barren and uninviting spot, and
+misery and want, we saw a lovely village, and people so much more
+advanced than those in the village ruled over by the Chief, that we were
+amazed.
+
+"The ruler there treated us handsomely, and had even taken care in the
+most kindly manner, of a white man who had escaped the rigors of the sea
+some years before, and who was demented, or incapable, through
+paralysis, of recognizing those around him."
+
+Ephraim started as John said this. "A white man, did you say? How old
+was he? Where is he now?"
+
+"We sent him to Wonder Island where the Professor has taken care of him,
+no doubt," Harry interjected.
+
+"You appear agitated. Have I recalled anything that might give a clue to
+his identity?" queried John.
+
+"No; it could not be possible! It was merely a passing fancy. Strange,
+how things sometimes will affect you. No, I do not know that I can add
+anything to your knowledge concerning him." The subject was not again
+alluded to during that day.
+
+Ephraim and his family were taken aboard the _Pioneer_. Everything was
+marvelous to them. The cabin with its complete furnishings, the musical
+instruments, the phonograph, the piano player, which acted like a
+wizard, because it gave out the sweet musical tones, as though it were a
+living thing, and then a moving picture screen, which was the last thing
+the boys installed before they left New York, made up a series of
+entertainments for the family that had no end of marvels for them.
+
+"To think of it; for fifty-two years this is the first time I have paced
+the decks of a vessel. It is the happiest day of my life." And Ephraim
+could scarcely keep the tears from coming. Happiness shows itself in
+that way with the strongest, not with the weakest. The strong man can
+stand the miseries and the sufferings much better and with a braver
+front than the weak; but excessive joy will break him down so that he
+manifests it more easily.
+
+John saw his emotion and sympathized with him. Taking him by the arm he
+led him to the cabin forward, and as they entered the cozy library, he
+pointed to the books. This was the end of Ephraim for that day.
+
+Without leaving the room he moved from case to case and scanned shelf
+after shelf, and when John, on one occasion came in, he heard him
+mutter: "Is there another place like this on earth?"
+
+Late that evening the _Pioneer_ took down part of its sail as they
+approached land in the distance.
+
+"We are nearing Hutoton," shouted George.
+
+Stut ordered the whistle to blow, and before the landing was reached the
+shore was lined with the people. They soon recognized the visitors, and
+the boats were prepared before the anchor finally dropped.
+
+The entire crew of the _Pioneer_ went ashore, and Ephraim was curious to
+see the head man, and have a conversation about the manner in which the
+colony was conducted.
+
+The boys could not understand the change of plans. Why did they not stop
+at the southern part of the island, and visit the Malosos, who were
+supposed to be Ephraim's enemies?
+
+It was learned that John and Ephraim, after the vessel started,
+concluded it would be wiser to visit Hutoton first and get all the
+information possible from them concerning the time, condition, and
+circumstances of the casting ashore of the white man found there when
+John and his party made their visit.
+
+In explanation of their action, it may be well, also, to state that they
+still had on board of the _Pioneer_, the white man they had rescued or
+taken from the stockade in the Malosos village, and that there were
+certain things in his tale that seemed improbable to John.
+
+The visit to Hutoton might be able to clear up the mystery, and possibly
+establish the identity of the paralyzed man, and in that event it would,
+not be necessary to go directly to the Malosos village but await their
+return from Venture Island before visiting the village.
+
+While the old man was being taken from the vessel, George went to John
+and inquired: "Did he ever tell you his name?"
+
+"Oh, yes; he says it is Henry D. Retlaw."
+
+All noticed that he stole furtive glances about him as he was being
+conveyed to the village.
+
+"Were you ever here before?" asked John, as they neared the house of the
+magistrate.
+
+He shook his head vigorously, and answered "No!" with a vehemence that
+startled John.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+RESCUE ISLAND
+
+
+Orders had gone out to prepare to receive the visitors in true Hutoton
+style, but, in truth, the people did not need any urging. The
+remembrance of the last visit, when the gifts were so judiciously
+distributed, was sufficient to assure a generous welcome.
+
+It was out of the question to leave that night, and John felt it to be a
+duty to cultivate their acquaintance, and confer with the chief
+magistrate about starting the people at work gathering the native
+products.
+
+John announced that within a month it was proposed to establish regular
+sailings between that port and Wonder Island, which would enable them to
+get supplies and ship their products each week. This intelligence was
+then imparted to the people, who received it with the greatest
+enthusiasm.
+
+"One of the objects of the present visit is to take you with us to
+Wonder Island," said John, addressing the leader, "so that you may learn
+what we are doing, and come back prepared to instruct your people."
+
+When this information was conveyed to him, he cast down his eyes, and
+said sorrowfully: "But I am a convict, like the others, and I have been
+condemned to stay here. If I leave this place I disobey the law of the
+Chief."
+
+John smiled as he replied: "I have provided for all that. You will meet
+your Chief Beralsea in Unity, the Capital of Wonder Island. Hutoton is
+no longer the terrible place that the Chief pictured to us. He told me
+that your assistance was necessary to him and to the people in the
+colony."
+
+This information was received in gratitude, and his consent was thus
+readily obtained.
+
+After a night of feasting, preparations were made for the departure.
+Retlaw was brought to the place where the paralyzed man was discovered,
+and the leader Caramo accompanied them.
+
+The moment Caramo saw him he turned to John and said: "I have seen that
+face before. I am sure he accompanied another man when on one occasion a
+boat load came ashore a long way to the south of us."
+
+"How long ago was that?"
+
+"Not more than three suns ago."
+
+It must be understood that _three_ suns meant with these people, three
+years by our reckoning. When Retlaw was examined he denied that he had
+ever been on the island before, and, of course, there was no way to
+discredit his statements. After all, Caramo might be mistaken in
+identifying him, as they were some distance apart at the time the island
+was supposed to have been visited by Retlaw.
+
+At noon of the following day the _Pioneer_ weighed anchor, and set sail
+for the southern port of the northern island, there to visit Chief Ta
+Babeda, of the Malolos.
+
+While they were skimming the shore south of the village, George said:
+"There is one thing we have neglected. We have had so much to do lately
+that we haven't found time for it, but there is an opportunity now."
+
+"What is that?" asked Harry.
+
+"We have no name for the island to which we are now going. We might
+consult Ephraim. It would be hardly fair to impose any sort of name on
+his country," suggested George, with a good humored laugh.
+
+Ephraim was delighted at the idea. "We must have a name, assuredly, but
+it never occurred to me before. The natives called it Rescudada; at any
+rate that is as near as I can recall the pronunciation of the word."
+
+"Why, that is almost like Rescue."
+
+"Why wouldn't that be a good name?" asked Ephraim. "There has been
+considerable rescue work here, and it is going on all the time."
+
+"That's the name for it!" exclaimed Harry, enthusiastically.
+
+"Suppose we notify General John and Skipper Stut that the Geographical
+Society has just named the island 'Rescue'?"
+
+This important function was attended to and a note made in the log that
+the island discovered in south latitude 41 deg. 37' 10", and west longitude
+138 deg. 2' 56", by the steamship _Pioneer_, was formally named _Rescue_.
+
+Long before the village was reached the great fog horn of the _Pioneer_
+commenced to give the signal. The villagers knew what it meant, and the
+old Chief himself was at the landing place to welcome the visitors.
+
+The boats were manned by the sailors, and the boys, together with John,
+Ephraim, and Caramo, were in the first boat. When Ta Babeda gazed at
+Ephraim, he was astounded. John had not informed him of the name of his
+visitor, but he continued to gaze at him in amazement.
+
+It was evident that the old Chief was impressed with his appearance, so
+unlike anything he had ever before known in the form of a human being.
+When they arrived at the Chief's house, John awaited the proper time
+before making the introductions, and finally said:
+
+"It gives me pleasure to introduce to you, the greatest enemy you have.
+This is Rumisses, the Cannibal Chief of the Umbolos."
+
+The Chief was startled beyond measure. True, he knew that John and his
+party had come into contact with his arch enemy, but this was certainly
+a thrilling way to bring them together.
+
+Ephraim walked forward and seized the Chief by the hand, and then
+pressed his nose against him. This was, of course, symbolic of
+friendship.
+
+The Chief unhesitatingly accepted the token, but he could not remove his
+eyes. Here was the man, so unlike all others, and the impression of
+superiority, undoubtedly, was also in his mind, but Ephraim quickly
+relieved him of his reflections, as he said:
+
+"Because I am so unlike you, is not due to any particular knowledge, or
+favor from the Great Spirit. I am a white man, like the Great Chief
+here, and was unfortunate to be cast among the natives in the north,
+and I have tried for many years to prevent the practicing of the
+sacrifices, and have succeeded."
+
+"But we were told that all the people you captured from us were
+sacrificed."
+
+"It is not true. They are all living with us in perfect happiness and
+contentment."
+
+"Then why is it that we have been so much deceived?"
+
+"Because the Korinos have not told you the truth. They did this because
+they knew no better."
+
+"Yes; the White Chief has told us that they have deceived us, and I
+believe him. But I learn that my Korinos have gone to you for
+protection!"
+
+"Yes; and I have shielded them, and they are now on board of the vessel
+in the harbor."
+
+This information brought back all the native resentment of the old
+Chief. "Then he has brought them back to me!" he exclaimed in great
+earnestness.
+
+"I believe he intends to do so, but it will not be until they go to
+Wonder Island, that marvelous place."
+
+"Then I am content."
+
+John heard the conversation, and soon turned it into another direction,
+when he informed the Chief that the Chief of Venture Island as well as
+the leader of the criminal colony, were to accompany them to Wonder
+Island, and that the company would be incomplete without him and his
+family.
+
+He looked at his visitors for some time, doubting in his mind the
+propriety of such a course, but the entreaties of Ephraim, and the
+urging of Muro and Uraso, were sufficient to decide the question, and
+the only matter that now weighed on his mind was to determine who should
+accompany him in this wonderful voyage.
+
+Ta Babeda had never summoned up sufficient courage, while the ship was
+formerly in port, to board the vessel. His examination of the _Pioneer_
+was made from the shore. Now he would step into a new world.
+
+He little knew what wonders would be exhibited to him. The ship's band
+was the greatest thing he had ever known, and he never tired of its
+music. But when he saw the curious piano, the music box that acted as
+though it had life, and the other evidences of civilized arts, that were
+found in the cabin, he was content to make the best of it.
+
+Like all natives, as we have already stated, he was immoderately fond of
+eating, and the kitchen arrangements, where food was cooked without any
+fuel, interested him beyond everything else. He would sit at the
+entrance of the kitchen for minutes at a time.
+
+The push buttons, the snap switches for the electric lights and for the
+cooking apparatus, were some things which he could not understand. The
+little innocent wires meant nothing to him, nor could the boys, or even
+John, explain the phenomenon to him so he could understand it.
+
+The boys puzzled over this, as he was insistent upon an explanation.
+What finally happened, the very thing the boys tried to avoid in every
+way, came when he touched the two wires, and formed a short circuit
+through his hand.
+
+He emitted one yell, and bounded out through the door, and it was some
+time before he could be induced to make further investigations. His
+expressions were very humorous, particularly when he insisted that the
+wires were mad, and didn't like him, and that they tried to pull his
+arms out of his shoulders.
+
+Harry then took two of the wires and brought them together, and then
+pulled them apart. Each time this was done, a spark would flash. The
+object was to show that two wires were necessary to produce a circuit or
+a current.
+
+Eventually an inspiration seemed to strike him, as he exclaimed: "They
+are married! Yes, I see!"
+
+The boys laughed as they told John of the circumstance, and how utterly
+impossible it was to produce a current until a circuit was established.
+
+John threw himself back and roared at the recital of the story, as told
+by the boys. "I think his description is a pretty good one. Perhaps he
+was thinking of the family circle?" and John continued to laugh as the
+boys tried to grasp the full meaning of his little joke.
+
+But Ta Babeda was an apt pupil. He was far more acute than Beralsea, and
+there scarcely was an hour but he had one of the boys at his side trying
+to fathom some of the mysteries in the new world. This was in the nature
+of a picnic for the boys, who enjoyed his curious questions and his
+equally unexpected comments.
+
+Ephraim, too, was generally present, as well as Camma, his eldest son,
+the latter evincing remarkable knowledge for one who had never known of
+the wizardry that resides in wood and stones and iron.
+
+To Ephraim this opportunity to open the wide world to his children must
+have been a heaven of delight, and he reveled in every hour and even
+regretted that nature demanded sleep. It seemed to be better awake and
+seeing and feeling. Two weeks prior to this he had merely existed; now
+he was a man again, and living.
+
+It was, indeed, a merry party on board of the noble ship. When the
+Chief, and those about him were told that the vessel was the creation of
+George and Harry, it was another occasion to marvel over.
+
+"Your boys can do the same thing, and make other things just as
+wonderful," said John, as they were commending and petting the boys.
+
+"Do you think so!" asked Ta Babeda, in great earnestness, and for the
+first time showing any curiosity or indicating any desire to give his
+children any advantages.
+
+John saw that the leaven was working, as he replied: "That is why I have
+been so anxious to have you and your children visit our city. Your wife
+and daughters will find as many surprising things to interest them as
+the boys will discover."
+
+The run from Rescue to Wonder Island, would occupy, ordinarily, about
+ten hours, of a complete day, and for that reason the start was made
+early in the morning. Unity was about eight miles from the sea, on a
+large stream, and it was desirable to make the run through the river by
+daylight.
+
+But shortly before noon a wind sprang up from the west, and it increased
+in intensity, so that shortly after the noon hour they were compelled to
+make a long tack to the south. This meant a night on board ship, and a
+stormy one at that.
+
+The wide, wide sea, without the sign of any land in sight was, indeed, a
+fascinating thing to the natives, and how they admired the native
+sailors with whom they readily fraternized. They watched every movement,
+the taking down of the sails, the changing of the angles of the great
+sheets, as they turned in their course, the handling of the tiller, and
+all the paraphernalia of sailing, for the _Pioneer_ depended principally
+on her sailing capacity, and not on the small engine with which she was
+equipped.
+
+The boys explained to Camma, that upon their return to the island a much
+larger engine would be installed, so that they need not depend upon the
+sails thereafter, but would be able then to sail directly through the
+wind, instead of being blown back and forth, as was now the case.
+
+The wind did not abate until the morning was breaking, and then there
+was a welcome change in the direction that the storm was taking. Many of
+the natives were ill, and John had the satisfaction of administering the
+new and lately-discovered remedy, namely, Atropine.
+
+Shortly after ten o'clock the eastern end of Wonder Island was sighted.
+The great mountain range was visible, and the identical headland, where
+the skull with the inscription was found, could be discerned through the
+mild haze.
+
+There was immense curiosity on board the ship as it skirted along the
+shore. The Tuolo landing place was sighted, but they continued past it.
+Two hours afterward they could plainly see the dock which had been
+built for the use of Uraso's people, and an hour later Muro was just as
+much interested to point out to Ephraim and Ta Babeda the landing
+station of his tribe.
+
+Immediately after luncheon, George, who was always on the alert, ran
+through the vessel, with his field glass in hand, and announced that the
+_Wonder_, the large steamship, which made trips to Chili, was coming up
+in the distance, and heading, as they were, for the mouth of Enterprise
+River, which flowed past the city.
+
+All were intensely excited at the announcement, and rushed forward to
+get a glimpse of the great ship. As she came up the streamers began to
+fly from every spar and mast, and Harry ran up to Stut, and asked why
+the _Pioneer_ did not have them out.
+
+"But they are ready and will be flown as soon as we get nearer." As he
+said this the first ones were unfurled. Then the _Wonder_ blew three
+long blasts which the _Pioneer_ answered.
+
+"They are going to let us go in first," said John. Such was, indeed, the
+case, for the _Wonder_ slowed down, and the _Pioneer_ entered the mouth
+of the river, for the last eight miles of the eventful cruise.
+
+Two miles from the town both vessels began to blow signals with the fog
+horns, and long before the wharf was reached the people began to flock
+from all sides.
+
+One little incident pleased the boys beyond all measure. On the bridge,
+and furiously waving his arms, and swinging an American flag was Sutoto,
+with his bride by his side.
+
+"So Sutoto has been on a wedding trip to Chili?" remarked Harry.
+
+Such was the case, as they afterwards learned. Both boys were busy
+explaining the sights and the locations of the different buildings to
+Beralsea and Ephraim, and the latter was much affected as he saw the
+flag floating from the tall staff in the principal square of the city.
+
+Beralsea had seen Sutoto wave the flag from the bridge of the _Wonder_,
+and when he saw the same sort of emblem on the staff, he inquired of
+Ephraim the meaning of the curious thing. It was then explained to him
+that it was the magic combination of colors which their great tribe
+believed in, and which was always raised above them wherever they were,
+as a symbol that they were protected by it.
+
+"But how can that protect the people? Is there something in it like the
+unseen lightning, which we have on the ship?"
+
+"Unseen lightning, is a pretty good name, coming from a savage,"
+remarked Harry in an undertone.
+
+"No; not in that way," answered Ephraim, "but whenever people see it,
+wherever they may be, they know that the tribe is great enough to give
+protection to any one who may try to injure any member of our tribe."
+
+"The White Chief has told me that there are many islands and countries,
+and that the world is round, and is peopled by many different tribes. Do
+the people everywhere know that 'flag,' as you call it?"
+
+"Yes; in every part of the world."
+
+"Who are those two men standing there alone?" asked Ta Babeda.
+
+"I do not know," responded Ephraim. "This is the first time I have been
+here. The boys will know."
+
+"That," answered George, "is the Professor,--that is, the man with a
+white beard and hair. The large man by his side is Beralsea, the Chief
+of the tribe on Venture Island."
+
+Ephraim looked at Ta Babeda for a moment, with an amused smile, and then
+remarked: "He is almost as large as you are."
+
+The _Wonder_ was the first to get her cables to the dock, and as she
+swung against the wharf, and the gang plank was fixed in place, the
+first ones to spring ashore were Sutoto and Cinda, the latter of whom
+rushed to her father's outstretched arms, and then to her mother and the
+other members of the family.
+
+The boys did not know how or where to extend the first greetings. There
+was Sutoto and Lolo, and the dear old Professor, who considerately kept
+in the background, but the boys insisted on giving him the first
+greeting.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+THE RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND
+
+
+"That was an awfully sly thing to do, as soon as our backs were turned,"
+said George, as Sutoto and Cinda were finally free from the vigorous
+greetings.
+
+"What is that?" asked Cinda.
+
+"To run away without giving us notice!"
+
+"But we have seen the great wide world, and it is wonderful, and I can
+never tell the people here how grand it is."
+
+And then the boys looked at Cinda, and when they saw the latest fashions
+displayed, the prettiest gown, the neatest slippers, and the stunning
+hat they took off their caps, and made a neat bow in recognition of that
+feminine touch of character which so readily adapts the sex for
+acquiring the latest fashions wherever they may be.
+
+Every one was wild with excitement. "There is Blakely!" shouted Harry.
+"Hurrah! old boy! We have the place for you to visit, as soon as
+possible. The finest island you ever saw, and the people all ready for
+business."
+
+"My hands are full now; we must have another ship. Look at the _Wonder_;
+she is so full of goods that we are more than eight hours behind time.
+But I am arranging for another steamer."
+
+"Too bad that we are finding more islands than you can handle,"
+responded George; "I suppose we shall have to find another manager?"
+
+"Or several assistants," said Blakely.
+
+"What are all these men here for?" asked Harry. "Why the whole island
+must have come to town."
+
+"Well, we have had to send for all the spare men from the different
+tribes. Fifty of the Tuolos just came in this morning, and thirty of the
+Illyas arrived yesterday, with their families. The _Wonder_ must be
+unloaded, and start back again before six this evening. But what did you
+find that looks as good as Venture Island?"
+
+"Rescue Island; a dandy place, and much bigger than Venture Island. And
+what do you think? We found a chief there who is a white man," remarked
+George.
+
+"A white man? Where is he from?"
+
+"Massachusetts; and he is humpbacked, but as bright as can be."
+
+"I saw him, did I not? He was on the _Pioneer_?"
+
+"Yes; there he is with Ta Babeda."
+
+"Ta what?"
+
+"That's the Chief's name who owned the other tribe on Rescue Island.
+Isn't he an immense fellow? But he is a brick; I can tell you. Come over
+and I'll introduce you," and Harry pulled Blakely over while the latter
+resisted, as the men were constantly besieging Blakely for orders.
+
+"Never mind the work now. Get acquainted with the _big_ men first," and
+the Professor laughed as he saw the boys forcibly tug at Blakely and
+haul him over to the group.
+
+"This is one of the big men we have on the island," said Harry to Ta
+Babeda, and the latter looked at Blakely for a moment, and began to
+smile, for while Blakely was chunky he was not at all large, if the
+Chief might be taken as a standard.
+
+He took Ta Babeda's hand, and welcomed him most heartily, and then
+turned to Ephraim, and also extended a greeting.
+
+"This is the man who does all the business," said Harry, "and he is
+going to make you a visit." At this point they were interrupted.
+
+"Shall we store all the pineapples aft," said a man hurriedly.
+
+"No; put them amidship," he answered.
+
+"We have no crates for the vegetables," said another.
+
+"Never mind, put them in the large boxes, and they can be crated on the
+way."
+
+"Some more men have just come; what shall we put them at?" was the
+report of another, and so from one to the other, Blakely was ever ready
+with a prompt answer.
+
+The Chiefs and Ephraim watched and wondered at Blakely and his constant
+readiness to entertain them, meanwhile giving orders to hundreds of the
+workers who were crowding about. It was an object lesson of what
+business meant, and the boys felt proud and happy to see the great
+ability which he displayed.
+
+But what a happy day it was for the Professor. He and John were in close
+conference, after the formal introductions were over. "There is
+something brewing," said George as he nudged Harry, and cast a glance
+toward the place where they stood in earnest conversation.
+
+"I do believe John is telling him about the copper box; and by the way,
+he has never spoken about that since we took it out of the cave. That is
+just what he is doing; see, he is indicating the size of it."
+
+Harry laughed, as he answered: "I am satisfied they will not do anything
+rash, without consulting us," and George laughed at Harry's view of the
+case.
+
+They had been absent from the island a little over a month. During their
+absence the new hotel was completed and was now in running order. This
+became the headquarters for the visitors. While it was only two stories
+in height, it contained nearly a hundred rooms, and the utmost effort
+was made to make all of them comfortable.
+
+The boys had their own rooms, and could not be induced to give them up.
+John and the Professor also maintained their old rooms, which were most
+comfortable, and attached to the Professor's apartments was a large room
+where the people came daily to see him and consult about their many
+wants.
+
+He never failed to see them. It mattered not who called, it was
+unvarying custom to greet all alike. The affection for him in the minds
+of the people grew stronger day by day.
+
+There were now five of the Chiefs on Wonder Island permanent residents
+in Unity. A great change had come over the feelings of the people with
+respect to the ownership of land. When the town was laid out, and the
+people began to flock to the place, attracted by its many advantages,
+it began to look for a time as though the different Chiefs soon would
+find themselves without subjects.
+
+In addition to this the Professor recognized that too many of the people
+were expecting to be put to work in the city, and this would cause
+agriculture to be abandoned, whereas it was obvious that they must
+depend upon the soil for sustenance.
+
+John and the Professor therefore developed a plan which would be the
+means of keeping the people in their own sections, or, at least,
+encourage them to till the ground.
+
+The Chiefs in Wonder Island owned the soil. Their people reserved to
+themselves the right to hunt and to gather the fruits and nuts necessary
+to sustain life. But they had no right whatever, independently of the
+Chiefs.
+
+The first step, therefore, was to gain the consent of these rulers to a
+division of the land, so that all their people might have farms. Uraso
+and Muro were the first to agree to the plan, and it was quickly
+followed by all except the Tuolos and the Illyas.
+
+The Chiefs themselves, under this plan, were to receive one quarter of
+the acreage, and of the residue, one-third was to be turned into what
+was called a state fund, to be used for schools and for administrative
+purposes, while the balance was to be given to the people, who were to
+select their own land.
+
+For the purpose of enabling proper deeds to be made, it was necessary to
+make a survey of the islands, and this had been completed six months
+previously, so that many of the people who now understood that the lands
+selected belonged to them, and could not be taken from them without
+their consent, were only too happy to consent to remain on their own
+land.
+
+But here another problem presented itself. It was desirable that the
+people should build homes on these farms, and Blakely and John evolved
+the plan to provide certain quantities of lumber, at a low price, to be
+paid for from the products of the land. This had a most stimulating
+effect, and applications were coming in from every quarter. As a result
+small saw mills were put up in the territorial limits of each of the
+tribes, so that it was an easy matter for the people to get the lumber
+near home.
+
+But that which taxed the energies of Blakely most, was to provide the
+farming implements and the seed and instruction necessary to start them
+on the way. As it was impossible to provide all the tools and implements
+required for this purpose, Blakely had recourse to the States, and by
+inserting a few advertisements in the agricultural papers throughout our
+country, it was not long before the implements were forthcoming, all of
+which were paid for from the reserve fund which had been provided.
+
+And now another thing of the utmost importance happened. It was noised
+about from Maine to California that there was an immense opportunity to
+make money in the now well-known Wonder Island. Every return trip of the
+_Wonder_ from the nearest South American port, brought Americans, with
+funds to invest in plantations and in setting out coffee trees and
+banana groves.
+
+Many Americans came from the great ranches of South America,
+particularly Brazil, which furnishes full three-fourths of all the
+coffee of commerce. These men went through the islands and began the
+barter for the lands.
+
+At first this was encouraged, but it was soon, discovered that the
+shrewd, and, more frequently than otherwise, the unscrupulous traders
+were cheating the unsophisticated people, so that the Professor had to
+take a firm hand, and declare that no transfers would be made until the
+sales had been investigated.
+
+This made the prices of lands go up by leaps and bounds, and the
+Professor told the people that they should not sell their holdings, as
+it would be much better for them to own and till the farms than to sell
+them and then work for the owners.
+
+All this tended to make the people appreciate that they really owned
+something--that they had wealth and power within their grasp. Then
+began, or rather was carried out more systematically, the founding of
+schools, and by many means the parents themselves were induced to attend
+the schools.
+
+All were taught English. With the large funds that the state had
+obtained in selling a portion of the state lands, the Professor sent for
+teachers from the United States, and these came prepared to take up the
+work all over the island.
+
+The most interested workers were the Korinos, as they were called on
+Rescue Island, and Krishnos on Wonder Island. The Professor's first
+work, after the conquest of the savages, was to educate those people for
+teaching, and in this they were found to be very efficient workers.
+
+The Korinos brought from Rescue were placed under the tuition of the
+Krishnos, and it was surprising to see how happily they regarded their
+lot, and what progress they made after they understood what was
+required.
+
+Although we have not a full account of all the products shipped from
+Wonder Island during the first six months, it might be stated that
+during the last thirty days, the shipments from the port of Unity,
+comprised 60,000 pounds of coffee, eighteen tons of bananas, and six
+hundred quintals of spices, besides over four hundred tons of fibres, of
+which jute formed one-half.
+
+It is estimated that within another year, when many of the large
+plantations should be ready to yield their products, that amount would
+be increased to such an extent that several additional ships would be
+necessary to carry the tonnage.
+
+The foregoing is particularly instanced to show what John could point
+out to the Chiefs who were now their guests, and to impress upon them
+the necessity and value of adopting such a land system as they had
+established.
+
+Ephraim readily understood and approved of the plan, but it was not so
+easy for Ta Babeda, and Beralsea. At the quiet suggestion of John the
+opportunity was made whereby they were constantly thrown into contact
+with the resident chiefs. Within a week they accepted the suggestions
+and a half dozen surveyors were commissioned to go to the islands and
+take up the work of surveying the lands, and making records, which were
+to be put into such form that the Chiefs would understand them.
+
+One day Ephraim, in conversation with John said: "I want my boys to
+remain with you until they receive their education. I see that the
+opportunities for work are unlimited, and I would also like to send over
+a number of young men for the same purpose."
+
+"Your decision pleases us immensely," said John, "and I have been
+wondering why your daughter would not also like to remain for a time, as
+there is much she can learn that will be of great help to you."
+
+Ephraim was silent for a while, while he looked at John, and he finally
+answered: "That means my wife will remain here also. But that has my
+hearty consent. It will be for their good, and for the good of my
+people."
+
+It was not long before Ta Babeda heard of Ephraim's decision, and he
+adapted the same course to the delight of his children. As for Beralsea,
+his favorite daughter was already the wife of the Chief Sutoto, of the
+Berees, and it was certain that she would remain in Unity, so that there
+was no difficulty in getting his consent to sending his children and
+others who would carry on the work of education.
+
+But the boys had not, in the meantime, forgotten their factory. The old
+water wheel was still there. Money could not purchase it, and they would
+not permit its removal. It was the same old crude wheel built nearly
+three years before at the Cataract, at the other end of the island, not
+more than two miles from the rocky shore where the sea gave them up.
+
+After the return there had been so much to see and to learn, about the
+new developments, and the visitors required so much attention that the
+boys quite forgot the copper box, and to inquire about the condition of
+the paralyzed man who was found at Hutoton.
+
+"The Professor has just told me," remarked John, "that the old man is
+improving, and hopes that within another month he will be able to talk."
+
+"Has he any idea of what his name is?"
+
+"Not in the least. He keeps mumbling something about _the triangle_, or
+something of that kind, but that is, of course, unintelligible."
+
+"I understand Retlaw is improving, also?"
+
+"Yes; we have thought of bringing the two men together, as soon as the
+paralytic is so improved that he can talk."
+
+"I have often wondered what kind of a disease paralysis is?" inquired
+Harry.
+
+"Paralysis is not a disease of itself. It is merely a sign of some
+disorder of the nervous system. It may be shown by complete disability
+on one side of the body, or in some particular portion, and only certain
+sets of nerves may be affected."
+
+"But what seems so singular is, that he is not only unable to speak but
+he cannot move about."
+
+"The form of paralysis, which affects the memory, is called _dementia
+paralytica_, and attacks the brain, while some portion of the body also
+may be affected."
+
+"Isn't it curable?"
+
+"There is little hope for a permanent cure. If the attack should come on
+suddenly it is the most dangerous. Where it seems to approach gradually,
+there is more likelihood of being able to check it."
+
+"In what way is there an improvement in the old man?"
+
+"So far as the bodily ailment is concerned he is gaining. When he was
+brought back he was unable to utter a single word, nor could he move
+himself in any way, except with one arm, and that only to a small
+degree. Now he is able to shuffle along, across the room, and sometimes
+tries to say something, which is not distinct. The only thing which thus
+far seems intelligible is the word _triangle_, as I have stated."
+
+"Harry spoke about the copper box this morning. Have you opened it yet?"
+asked George.
+
+"Oh, no! I wouldn't think of doing it unless you were present. The
+Professor and I have had several talks about it, but we have all been so
+busy that the matter has been deferred from time to time. I hope we
+shall be able to get at it to-night."
+
+While thus engaged in conversation the Professor appeared, smiling and
+happy. The boys greeted him affectionately, as was their custom always.
+
+"Do you want to make a visit with me?" he asked.
+
+"Yes; where?" asked George.
+
+"We will go out on B Street first," he answered.
+
+Together they passed the large school house, and crossed the open
+square, and entered the most beautiful of all the streets, the one laid
+out with rows of trees along the curbs, and flower beds along the middle
+portion of the driveway.
+
+"Can you guess where we are going?" asked the Professor.
+
+"No."
+
+"Do you see the newly-painted house to the right?"
+
+"Is that where Sutoto lives?"
+
+"Yes; there is Cinda. Isn't she happy, though?"
+
+They went in and were accorded a happy welcome. Her father, the Chief,
+Beralsea, and her mother, Minda, were there, but Sutoto was absent.
+
+"And where is the bridegroom?" asked the Professor.
+
+"He is in the yard somewhere. I will call him." And she tripped out the
+steps, merry as a lark.
+
+Sutoto came in, and the boys simply shouted at his appearance. He was
+covered with dirt and grease, and made no great effort to conceal the
+fact.
+
+"And what have you been up to?" asked George.
+
+"Come out and I will show you."
+
+In the little "garage," if it might be so termed, was an auto, one which
+Sutoto had purchased and brought back with him on his wedding trip. "I
+was going to send for you," he said, addressing Harry, "because I have
+been having trouble with the carbureter."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+THE SAVAGES AT UNITY
+
+
+The boys were simply wild with delight, and George commenced to laugh
+immoderately, after viewing the brightly-polished machine.
+
+"What is the matter? Anything wrong? Is it upside down?" asked Sutoto.
+
+"No; I was just thinking how funny it seems that one of the wild savages
+of the island should be the first to import an automobile."
+
+Sutoto didn't in the least mind this allusion to his former condition,
+but the boys were the only ones who dared to jest with him in this
+manner. He joined in the laugh, but quickly replied:
+
+"But I am not the only one favored in this way."
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"I know some other people who are indulging in pleasure cars also."
+
+"Who is that?"
+
+"Well, Blakely has one, a fine little car he calls a 'runabout.'"
+
+"He never said anything about it. Then he brought one over for John, and
+another for the Professor, but you must keep quiet; they are not to know
+anything about it."
+
+"Then there are two more machines down there that have queer names on
+them, because the fellows themselves are peculiar, and are awfully
+civilized," said Sutoto, with a faint attempt at a smile.
+
+Harry laid down the wrench and turned to Sutoto. "What are the names?"
+he asked, for the first time interested.
+
+"On one it says 'Mayfield,' and 'Crandall' on the other." And Sutoto
+said this without cracking a smile, or indicating that he really knew
+who the names applied to.
+
+Probably, no one on the island, at least among the natives, really knew
+the boys by any other designation than George and Harry. The surnames
+were of no use. Sutoto was simply "Sutoto," and no more, and so with
+Uraso and Muro.
+
+The Professor and the old Chief heard the hilarity, and were soon out of
+the house, and although the boys and Sutoto tried to push the machine
+behind the garage, they were too late for the Professor's quick eye.
+
+He laughed when he saw the commotion. "It is all right; if I were not so
+old, I would get one myself."
+
+"That's just the time you need it," said Harry. "By the way," he
+continued, "I will bring it around to your place this afternoon."
+
+"Bring what?" asked the Professor.
+
+"Your car; of course." And Sutoto and the boys laughed at the
+Professor's discomfiture.
+
+"I thought there was some job about to be put up on me. I wondered why
+Blakely tried to keep me out of the warehouse yesterday."
+
+But while this merry scene was taking place, five new machines were
+coming along B Street, with Blakely in the first one, and a competent
+chauffeur in each of the others.
+
+"The first is yours, Harry, and the next one, with the red body is
+yours, George," said Blakely. "I thought we should surprise you."
+
+"Why, there is John, too!" exclaimed Sutoto.
+
+"Yes; he is in his car; he was greatly surprised. But the Professor's
+car is a neat one; don't you think so?"
+
+The boys had no ears for any one or for anything. Each was a forty-horse
+power roadster, while the Professor's car had a five-passenger body, was
+handsomely upholstered, and equipped with particularly easy-riding
+springs. John's machine was equally well built, and after the boys had
+made a full examination of their own treasures, they investigated the
+other cars, and marveled at their beauty and appearance of comfort.
+
+The procession of the machines naturally attracted the people who came
+from all directions to witness the wonder wagons which ran by
+themselves. They crowded around, and listened to every comment. The old
+Chief was the one most excited at the strange things.
+
+Neither Sutoto nor Cinda had informed them of the autos, because it was
+intended to have quite a surprise party, and it was afterwards learned
+that Blakely and Sutoto had planned to give all of them a surprise. The
+fact that the Professor and the boys, having gone to Sutoto that
+morning, were absent from their homes, precipitated to disclosure, so
+that John was found and together they went to Sutoto's house.
+
+You may be sure that it did not take the boys long to learn the
+mysteries of the machines, and they were with Sutoto, until he got the
+hang of the motor, and could spin along as fast as any of them.
+
+The old Chief was finally induced to get into the Professor's machine,
+and the latter instructed the driver to proceed slowly. Minda, who was
+with them, was the braver of the two, by far. The speed was about six
+miles an hour, at which the Chief marveled.
+
+Then, gradually, the driver speeded up, until they were making a
+comfortable speed of fifteen miles an hour. As confidence increased the
+pleasure grew stronger, and before they returned on the first trip he
+was as determined as could be to have one for his own use.
+
+Blakely took note of his wish, and said: "I shall see to it that on the
+return trip one of the machines will be shipped to you, but it will be
+two weeks before the _Wonder_ comes in."
+
+From that day on Sutoto had his hands full entertaining the Chief, but
+the boys relieved him of much of this, by taking him from place to
+place, where he saw the work going on in all parts of the beautiful
+country, and witnessed the planting of the groves, the gathering of the
+crops, and the way in which the produce was handled at the wharf.
+
+Sutoto's home was a beautiful structure of five rooms, all nicely
+furnished, the gift of the Professor. The boys enjoyed the visits there.
+Sutoto was always a boy to them, and Cinda a happy bride,--and a woman
+of whom any one might be proud.
+
+When Beralsea, her father, decided that his children must remain and
+attend the schools there, the adjoining cottage was prepared for them,
+and Minda consented to stay, but Beralsea, who had now partaken of the
+commercial instincts, under the tutelage of Blakely, was determined to
+return at once and revolutionize the condition of affairs in Venture
+Island.
+
+That day he and Ta Babeda had a long conversation, and together they
+visited John and Ephraim, and then called in Blakely. The boys were
+present, of course, and it then turned out that they had agreed upon a
+plan to start the agricultural work in the two islands conjointly, and
+the only question which remained was to take care of the management of
+the work.
+
+Both of the Chiefs declared that they did not possess the qualifications
+to direct the work, and Ephraim pleaded age as the reason why it would
+be impossible to undertake the burdens.
+
+"I have an idea," he said, "that the best solution would be to make
+George and Harry the managers for the islands. I have been with the boys
+for some time, and see what they are capable of, and every one would be
+glad to work under them."
+
+The boys were, of course, somewhat confused at the encomium, and the
+Professor came to their rescue. "These are my boys," he said. "I have
+known them ever since they came to the island. They have been with me
+under every condition of service. We have had hours and days of
+pleasure, and of trials, such as few have undergone, and always,
+whatever the circumstances, they have been manly, and never gave up,
+although sometimes things seemed hopeless.
+
+"You have seen how, through their ingenuity, they have built the water
+wheel, the mills and the factories. Fortune has been kind to them; they
+do not need the money that may come to them, as they have found riches
+here, far greater than you know, but they have loved the work, for the
+pleasure it has brought them, and it is for them to decide."
+
+"Harry and I have talked about these things many times," answered
+George. "When we first came to the island, we had nothing. For our own
+preservation we set about to better our condition, began to build the
+things necessary to maintain life, and to protect ourselves.
+
+"What at first was a necessity, later became a pleasure, because we
+could see, day after day, how we built the shop and the machinery out of
+the crude things; it would be hard to leave that work now."
+
+Harry approvingly nodded his head, as he responded: "I consider it a
+pleasure to do anything which would help the people here. George and I
+feel that it would be wrong to leave them, so long as we can be of
+service to them.
+
+"The money we have will not make us happy; that I know, unless we can
+use it to do some good. And it is so with our time, also. I am as
+willing to give that as money, because we have been amply rewarded and
+now our duty is to the people here."
+
+As a result of the conference it was agreed that George and Harry should
+take up the management of the affairs on Venture and Rescue Islands,
+they to decide which should be the particular sphere of each.
+
+The Chiefs were immensely pleased at this arrangement, and the first
+steps were taken to put their plans into execution.
+
+John advised them that they should decide which island each would take,
+and then each should cultivate the acquaintance of the young men that
+the Chiefs should select, so that the administrative functions could be
+instilled into them, and that they might be taught the business
+qualifications necessary.
+
+George laughingly remarked that as the Chief Beralsea had so
+accommodatingly captured him, when they first arrived on the island, he
+thought that their intimate acquaintance, which was so long prior to
+Harry's should decide the matter in his favor, by taking Venture Island.
+
+"That suits me all right. I have one advantage over you on Rescue
+Island; and that is the caves. You haven't even an excuse for a cave."
+
+"But I have Hutoton, that terrible place where the criminals live,"
+retorted George, with a laugh.
+
+"And that reminds me; what about the copper box?"
+
+The boys wended their way to the Professor, and were delighted to find
+John there. "Before we go we want to have the copper box opened,"
+remarked Harry.
+
+"I have just brought it around, in the machine," said John, as he
+noticed the boys peering at it through the window.
+
+"What is that in the package lying on the box?"
+
+"Can't you guess?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Have you forgotten the skull with the inscription on it?"
+
+"Do you mean the skull we found on the headland at the eastern end of
+the island?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Why, what is that for? Do you think it has anything to do with the
+box?"
+
+"Probably not; but I was curious to examine it further in view of the
+similarity of the chart and the inscription."
+
+The boys could not possibly understand what was meant by such a
+reference. While they were talking the Professor entered the room, and
+remarked, "I have just come from the old fellow, and his reason is
+returning under the treatment, and he is also better physically."
+
+"Do you mean the paralytic?"
+
+"Yes; but there is one thing which is singular, and that is the constant
+muttering of the word _triangle_. This morning I could plainly
+distinguish several other words, such as 'of' and 'three,' and 'very
+well,' and parts of other words, showing that in time, if his
+improvement continues, we may get more information."
+
+"I have an idea," hurriedly shouted George as he broke for the door.
+"Wait for me," he said, as he turned around and cast a glance back into
+the room. "I will be back at once," were the last words they heard.
+
+John laughed at George's precipitous flight. "I suppose he has just
+thought of something that bears on the case. In the meantime, and while
+George is away, you, Harry, might get a hammer and a cold chisel. We
+may have to cut the top off."
+
+Harry rushed out and taking John's machine was quickly at the shop,
+where he secured a hammer and several cold chisels capable of cutting
+the copper.
+
+When he returned George was there, and was unfolding the paper scrap
+which they found below the skull. "Probably, this will explain the
+triangle," said George, as he pointed to the V-shaped mark. "The upper
+part of it is very likely worn away, so that we cannot see it."
+
+John smiled at the suggestion as he took the paper and carefully
+examined it. "Your view may be correct," he responded.
+
+"That looks like a suggestion of a line," said Harry, pointing to a
+faint scratch near the upper margin.
+
+The Professor's messenger came in hurriedly, and announced that the
+paralytic had sent for him. "I will return by the time the box is
+opened," said the Professor, as he hurriedly went out of the door.
+
+"Now for the box," said Harry. The slitting chisel was applied, and he
+dextrously cut along the top, under the directions of John.
+
+"Direct the chisel downwardly, to see if there is any seam to be found
+along the side," directed John.
+
+"Yes; here is the place where the top was put on," shouted Harry.
+
+"Why, it has been soldered," said George. "Well, that means business."
+
+It was evident that the soldering was effectively done, because the
+solder had run entirely through the seam, and it was really sweated on.
+The copper used was about an eighth of an inch thick, and the soft and
+ductile character showed that it was pure metal.
+
+"Be very careful as you get around so as not to disturb the contents, by
+the falling of the lid," said John.
+
+It still adhered at various places, and this was carefully cut away by
+one of the thin chisels, and the lid finally raised at one corner,
+sufficiently to disclose a portion of the contents, which appeared to be
+round and white, and resting near the center of the space.
+
+All caught a glimpse of it, and involuntarily started back in surprise.
+It was a skull, the counterpart of the one lying on the table which
+contained the inscription.
+
+"Open it wide," said John in a peculiar voice, and as he did so the
+Professor rushed in and announced that the paralytic had recovered
+speech, and he had ordered him to be brought in.
+
+While the Professor was saying this, John was slowly raising the lid,
+and by a quick motion tore it away, and the Professor was actually taken
+aback at the sight before him. He gazed for a moment, and then muttered:
+"And the same inscription too!"
+
+All looked toward it in amazement, and while puzzling over its meaning,
+the paralytic was helped in by two attendants. He came forward, saw the
+two skulls, and before either could prevent it he collapsed and fell to
+the floor, apparently lifeless.
+
+He was gathered up and placed on a couch, and restoratives applied by
+the Professor. He lay thus in a stupor for more than a half hour, but
+soon returning consciousness began to manifest itself, and when he
+opened his eyes, and glanced about, his lips began to move. Here the
+Professor held up a warning hand, which he seemed to heed, for he
+immediately closed his eyes, and was soon asleep, as his breathing
+became regular, and the pulse began to act normally.
+
+"There must be no more agitation now," said the Professor. "We can take
+the box to the adjoining room." This was done, and John carefully lifted
+the skull from its resting place, bringing with it a mass of other
+material, which looked like brown or discolored parchment.
+
+The skulls were placed side by side. They were singularly alike, the
+inscription of the one found on the headland, was on the left side, and
+the like figures of the one taken from the box were on the right side.
+
+"That is a singular thing," said Harry.
+
+"So it is," answered John, "but it doubtless has a meaning," he
+continued.
+
+Beneath the box, and attached to the wrappings, was a mass of material
+which John eagerly seized, and began to unwrap, while the Professor
+interestedly looked on. There was not the first sign of any treasure in
+the box, and when the several folds of the parchment were unrolled, the
+boys could see the hieroglyphics that the Professor and John so eagerly
+scanned.
+
+"Yes, yes, I knew you would come back," said the man in the adjoining
+room, and John dropped the parchment and followed the Professor into the
+room, where they saw the old man sitting on the couch and staring about
+with an inquiring countenance.
+
+"What is your name?" said the Professor.
+
+He did not answer at first but looked at John and the Professor in
+amazement.
+
+"Why do you ask?" he then muttered, without changing his countenance. "I
+have told you over and over," he continued.
+
+"Do you know where you are?" asked John.
+
+"Certainly. You may ask Walter about that."
+
+"Walter? Do you know Walter?" asked George, almost involuntarily.
+
+He smiled and nodded his head. "He is here. I saw him yesterday. I wish
+he would explain." Then he dropped back on the couch and remained
+motionless.
+
+The effort to arouse him was useless, and the Professor advised
+patience. There was something so peculiar about the whole situation that
+it fascinated the boys. What did this man know about Walter? Possibly,
+through him the great mystery, that commenced with the note in the seat
+of their boat, would be explained.
+
+After they came back to the island, Retlaw rapidly recovered, and was
+frequently found wandering around the town. On several occasions he
+called on the Professor. To the surprise of all he appeared at this
+time, surprised to find John and the boys present, and appeared to be
+terribly startled on seeing the two skulls.
+
+The moment he saw the paralytic, he became agitated, and started for the
+door. John barred the way, and said: "Do you know that man?"
+
+In a hesitating voice, he answered: "Yes; I know him well. Where did you
+find him?" and notwithstanding he saw the quiet figure he drew back with
+an expression of fear and hesitancy.
+
+George slyly drew forth the Walter note, referred to in the previous
+volume, "Adventures on Strange Islands," and handed it to John. The
+latter seized it and said: "Did you ever see this?"
+
+He grasped the paper, and answered: "Where did you get this? Did he have
+it?"
+
+"No," replied the Professor; "we found it in a recess at the end of a
+seat in our boat,--the one we made on this island, three years ago."
+
+"I do not know how it could have gotten there. It was written to
+Clifford,--"
+
+"John B. Clifford?" asked Harry in excitement.
+
+Retlaw turned, when he heard Harry. "Yes," was the hesitating answer.
+
+"Do you know Walter?" asked John.
+
+He did not reply, but glanced at all of them, and while doing so Harry
+came forward, and said: "Isn't your name Walter?"
+
+The man started back and held up his hand: "What makes you think so?" he
+asked in alarm.
+
+"Because _Retlaw_ reversed, spells Walter," answered Harry.
+
+It was time for the Professor to show surprise at the acuteness of
+Harry's conclusions. John took the cue at once. "Why are you trying to
+deceive us?"
+
+He dropped his eyes, and was silent, and then he slowly turned to the
+quiet man.
+
+John noticed the movement. "Who was the man tied to the vessel and
+wrecked on the island to the south of us?"
+
+This question by John produced an added agitation in the deportment of
+the man. He was visibly affected by the question, but there was no
+reply.
+
+"As you do not feel disposed to answer our questions we must detain or
+keep you in custody until Clifford recovers," said John, and motioning
+to the boys, they gathered around him, and called in the attendants and
+ordered the men to take charge of him.
+
+As they were about to pass out the door, Ephraim ascended the steps and
+was about to pass into the open door. He caught sight of the curious
+group, and when his eye alighted on the figure on the couch, he drew
+back for a moment, while his gaze remained fixed.
+
+Then he calmly moved forward, slowly shaking his head from side to side,
+and muttered: "That looks like Clifford, my companion on the ship, and
+the one who aided me to gain a foothold on the spar. How did he come
+here?"
+
+"That is the man we found at Hutoton," said John. "But do you know this
+man?" he asked, pointing to Walter.
+
+Ephraim turned, and scrutinized his face. "No, I have never seen him, to
+my knowledge."
+
+Walter moved back with a sigh of relief, while John and the Professor
+looked at each other with puzzled expressions.
+
+"Then the man we found tied to the boat was not Clifford!" exclaimed
+George.
+
+John looked at Walter, and he saw him grow pale.
+
+"Who was the man," he asked, in a threatening tone, as he approached
+Walter. The latter hesitated. "We are determined to ferret out this
+matter, and it will be to your advantage to tell us the whole story, for
+we shall find it out sooner or later."
+
+"I must have time to think," he answered, as he put his hands to his
+head, and turned to Clifford.
+
+"You may have until to-morrow, but in the meantime, we shall see to it
+that you are kept within our sight," responded John, as he motioned to
+the men to take him away.
+
+As he left the door Harry said: "Why do you suppose he wanted time?"
+
+John looked at Clifford for a moment, and answered: "Evidently, he had
+hopes that Clifford would not survive."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES
+
+
+At the suggestion of the Professor, Clifford was left in quiet, while
+John and the boys deferred their further attempts to explore the
+mysterious occurrences that were looming up.
+
+They canvassed every phase of the situation, in the hope that some
+explanation might be offered. What could have been the relations of
+Walter and Clifford, and who was the man that met his death in the boat
+at Venture Island?
+
+Why had the sight of the copper box and the skulls so agitated Walter?
+The latter, apparently, knew of the missive, which was, evidently,
+written by him, but why did he not give an outright answer concerning it
+when John asked him point blank?
+
+It did not take the boys long to inform Sutoto of the development and
+the mystery concerning the two men. The old Chief, Beralsea, was taken
+over to see Walter, in order to identify him if possible, and then Harry
+suggested that Ta Babeda might know something of his early history, as
+Walter was found a prisoner at his village when John and the boys
+arrived there.
+
+Beralsea had never seen nor heard of him, and Ta Babeda gave the
+following account of his capture: "About three years previously several
+men, of whom Walter was one, arrived at the island, on a small boat,
+something like the one carried by the _Pioneer_, and which was used at
+the landing."
+
+(It should be stated that one of the boats, and probably, the one
+referred to, was the identical lifeboat, No. 3, which the boys had
+fitted up for use on the _Pioneer_.)
+
+"This boat was kept by them at the inlet directly east of the cave where
+the Korinos were lodged. I did not know anything of this for some time,
+but the Korinos learned of the presence of the men, and my warriors were
+set to watch the men. A few days afterwards, another boat, much smaller,
+appeared with two men, but from all appearances they were a different
+party, and after they had a conference, it appeared as though there was
+trouble between the different parties."
+
+"We were about to close in on them, when at the height of their quarrel,
+but they caught sight of us, and joined in resisting the attack against
+us. With the guns they had we were no match for them, so we had to
+retire to the village.
+
+"The next morning we learned that they had gone, and on searching the
+shore found something with marks on, it, that had no meaning to us so it
+was destroyed."
+
+"Was it something like this?" asked Harry, handing him a sketch.
+
+The Chief studied it for a few moments, and answered: "It seems to me it
+was like that. The marks were something like these," and he pointed to
+the crosses.
+
+Harry had made the identical marking which were on the two skulls,
+which, it will be remembered, showed the characters + V, and below these
+three X X X, followed by a star.
+
+"I suspected as much," said John. "They were, quite possibly, on the
+same quest. But where did they get the information?" And he turned to
+the Professor for a possible explanation.
+
+The latter was now thoroughly interested. "Unless Walter chooses to
+tell, the matter may not be solved, unless Clifford recovers, and even
+though he should regain his physical powers, the mind may have relapsed
+into its late condition."
+
+By agreement John and the boys remained at the Professor's home that
+night, awaiting symptoms of the patient's disease, and during the night
+they recounted over and over again the adventures they had undergone,
+and the experiences with the natives.
+
+They conversed about the new enterprise into which they were to embark,
+and the Professor congratulated them on the decision to remain and enter
+the commercial, or business field. "After all," he said, "there is
+nothing which so broadens a man as to have an occupation, and give to
+that business the energies of his mind."
+
+"Of course, there are many things that the natives must learn, but they
+are so willing to work, that it is a pleasure to show them," said Harry.
+"The best men we have had in the shops were the common natives, but
+there is one thing that has always been troublesome, and that is to give
+them different names."
+
+"That is just what I had in mind for some time," added George. "It
+didn't make much difference where there were only a few,--a hundred or
+so, but now, when we have three hundred or more it is rather confusing
+to have a dozen or more _Lolos_, and as many more _Walbes_, and names
+like that."
+
+"It might be a good idea to suggest that each one have a sort of
+surname, so that there will be no difficulty of that kind hereafter,"
+suggested John.
+
+"A family name would be the proper thing," added the Professor.
+
+"For my part, I don't see how people can get along without it," remarked
+George.
+
+"But it has not always been the custom to have surnames, or family
+names," suggested the Professor.
+
+"But the Romans did," exclaimed George.
+
+"Yes, they had three names: the first was the prenomen, which was a
+distinctive mark of the individual; then the nomen, or the name of the
+clan; and third, the cognomen, which was the family name. The first name
+was usually written with a capital letter only, like M. Thus, M. Tullius
+Cicero."
+
+"Well, that is the first time it ever occurred to me that the Romans
+parted their names in the middle," said George, as he smiled at the
+allusion.
+
+"The ancient Greeks, with the exception of a few of the leading families
+in Athens and Sparta, had only a single name. Among the German and
+Celtic nations each individual had only one name, and that was also true
+of the ancient Hebrews; the names Abraham, David, Aaron and the others
+were used singly, and this was also the case in Egypt, Syria and Persia,
+and throughout all of Western Asia."
+
+"But it has never been so in England, has it?" asked Harry.
+
+"During the entire period that England was under the dominion of the
+Saxons, the single name was prevalent. But that was changed later when
+feudalism was established and the different lords began to gather their
+vassals, and to register them."
+
+"But what is the principle on which the names are built?"
+
+"In various ways; at first they distinguished father and son by adding
+the word _son_ to the father's name. If he was of German descent _sohn_
+would be added; if of Danish origin, the word _sen_, so that the son's
+name in either case would be William_son_, or Ander_sohn_, or
+Thorwald_sen_, or a given name with the designation _son_ added."
+
+"But how about the many other names, and those coming after the second
+generation?"
+
+"They had to be named after the locality, like John _Brook_, or David
+_Hill_, or something of that kind, even to an occupation, like the
+_Smiths_, or the _Fishers_, as well as qualifications, such as _Wise_
+and _Good_ were adopted as surnames."
+
+Every hour Clifford's condition was noted, and before morning his pulse
+began to beat with greater regularity, and all felt that it would be
+well to take a nap, to prepare for what they knew must be an
+interesting, if not exciting chapter, to round out their adventures, and
+to lay bare the few mysteries which yet remained to be solved.
+
+Sutoto came to the Professor's house quite early, with news from Blakely
+that Walter had disappeared. He had learned of the imprisonment and
+that Walter was placed in the regular lock-up, where a few recalcitrants
+were confined.
+
+How he escaped was not known. True, not much of a guard was maintained,
+and the natives had no idea that the prisoner was of more than ordinary
+importance.
+
+John was very much disappointed, but he felt that he alone was to blame,
+because in the anxiety for Clifford he had entirely overlooked the
+precaution necessary. He went down to the jail, with the boys, and
+learned from the inmates that when the man was brought in he appeared to
+be unconcerned, and immediately selected his sleeping quarters, and that
+was the last they knew of him.
+
+As the boys were going to their own rooms, a messenger came from the
+Professor that Clifford was awake, and appeared to be rational, and was
+now partaking of food. After breakfast they hurried over to the
+Professor, and found John there smiling.
+
+"I have had a little talk with him."
+
+"What does he say?"
+
+"I have not yet questioned him."
+
+Clifford looked at the boys curiously. "Are you the boys that Mr. Varney
+spoke about?"
+
+"I suppose we are," said Harry.
+
+"His story interested me very much. I learn that you have a regular
+manufacturing town here, and that you built all these things without any
+outside help, before you communicated with the outside world."
+
+"Yes; and we had a glorious time doing it, too, but we owe everything to
+the Professor and John."
+
+"That is really commendable to hear you say so. But you said, Mr.
+Varney, that Walter told you Clifford limped, and it was on account of
+this peculiarity you were led to believe that the dead man on Venture
+Island was Clifford?"
+
+"One of the three men with Walter, was lame."
+
+"Then it must have been one of his party that was murdered?"
+
+"But Walter was explicit to tell us that one of your legs was shorter
+than the other. I early learned that such was not the case, and that is
+what confused me in identifying you. But there is also another thing
+which I could not understand."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"Ephraim Wilmar."
+
+"Stop! stop!" almost shouted Clifford. "You said _Ephraim Wilmar_. Do
+you know him?"
+
+"Know him? He is here on the island."
+
+"When did he come? Where is he?"
+
+"He lives on an island north of the place we found you, and is Chief of
+a tribe there."
+
+"Chief of a tribe!" he exclaimed. "An island to the north,--the
+_triangle_,"--and the boys rose from their seats in the excitement.
+
+"Where is Walter's letter?--Quick," said Harry.
+
+George fumbled in his pockets with eagerness. "Is that the triangle?"
+eagerly questioned Harry.
+
+"Yes, yes; there it is again. The three islands, and the arrow."
+
+"But what does the star mean,--the star that follows, as you see?"
+
+"That,--that is to show the position of the three islands."
+
+"Position of the three islands? What islands? and how does it tell the
+positions?" George was fairly frantic now.
+
+"There must be three islands, and one of them was the one I was on when
+you found me, and one is here, because Mr. Varney told me about this
+one, and then there is another, which you said was to the north
+of,--of--"
+
+"Hutoton," said John.
+
+"Yes; Hutoton. But the positions! Yes; you will understand! One point is
+the Southern Cross, near the South polar Circle, the second point is the
+fixed star Antares, and the third is the fixed star Spica, which,
+together form a perfect triangle, one limb of which passes through a
+cluster of stars called the Compasses."
+
+"But what has that to do with the locations of the three islands?"
+
+"They are situated, with relation to each other, exactly the same as the
+three stars are placed in the heavens."
+
+"What was the object of the three crosses before the star?"
+
+"The three represented thirty."
+
+"Thirty what?"
+
+"Leagues."
+
+"And the arrow?"
+
+"The direction from Spica."
+
+"Why from Spica?"
+
+"Because that star is the one which represents the island on which this
+particular chart happens to be found."
+
+"Do you mean that a similar chart will be found on each island?"
+
+"No; on only two of them."
+
+The boys were astounded at this information. John and the Professor
+remained quiet while the boys thus questioned Clifford.
+
+John interrupted to inquire why there were only two charts.
+
+"The record is found on the third."
+
+"So Wonder and Venture Islands are the only ones which have the
+inscriptions on the skulls?" asked Harry.
+
+Clifford sat up with such a sudden start that the boys were alarmed. He
+leaned forward, and hurriedly asked the following questions: "You say,
+'Inscriptions on the skulls?' How do you know? and why do you say that
+they are on Wonder and Venture Islands?"
+
+"Because we have two of them."
+
+He dropped back on the pillow, and reflected for some time, and then
+slowly said: "But there must be three. One of them is still with the
+records."
+
+"No; we have the one with the records."
+
+A smile illuminated his features, the tension was relaxed, and he
+dropped back, and pressed his hands over his forehead, as he muttered:
+"I am so glad, so glad, so glad," and his voice died down, and he
+remained quiet, as though in sleep.
+
+The questioners sat there in silence, and watched him as he slept. The
+Professor motioned them to withdraw, and they passed into the adjoining
+room.
+
+"It is clear to me now," remarked John. "The knowledge of the record was
+known to others, and I was not aware that any one besides ourselves
+really had figured out the secret," remarked John, as he turned to the
+Professor.
+
+"Well, I came pretty close to it," exclaimed Harry. "I told you that the
+three X's meant thirty leagues."
+
+"So you did," said John. "Prior to the finding of the skull I did not
+know of the full inscription. Its significance did not come to me until
+we reached Venture Island."
+
+"I remember now! I told George that I saw the chart you had made."
+
+John smiled. "It would have deceived you, however."
+
+"Why?" asked Harry.
+
+"Because, if you remember it the third island was to the south of
+Venture, and not to the north as we really found it."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+THE STORY OF THE LETTERED SKULL
+
+
+It was late that afternoon when Clifford awoke, and plainly much,
+refreshed, and improved physically. When he saw the Professor he said:
+"I have not told you all, but I want the boys here for that purpose,
+because I know it will interest them."
+
+When the boys arrived they awaited the coming of John, who informed them
+that Uraso had received word of the capture of Walter, but that he would
+not arrive until noon.
+
+Clifford greeted them effusively, and it was evident that he had
+recovered his spirits, and was well on the road to recovery. After some
+general talk on uninteresting topics, he began his story:
+
+"I was on the vessel with Ephraim when we ran into the monsoon which
+wrecked the vessel. After days of suffering I became unconscious, and
+when the spar finally reached the shore, I was aroused sufficiently to
+save myself, and after wandering around for some time, came up to a
+tribe of natives, who took good care of me.
+
+"I had no means of determining the latitude or longitude, because I was
+then only about twenty years of age, and had shipped on the vessel at
+Shanghai, because I was anxious to return home. I remained with the
+people about three years, and they were called Osagas."
+
+"Why, this town is built in the Osagas' territory," said Harry.
+
+"That may be so, but it is enough for the present to know that it was
+somewhere on this island that I reached the shore, and that about three
+years thereafter I was fortunate enough to catch sight of a sailing
+vessel, and on her I reached San Francisco.
+
+"In course of time I built up a profitable shipping business, and owned
+several vessels engaged in the coast and Alaska trade. Like all shipping
+men on the western coast, I learned of the many accounts, most of them
+fables, concerning the treasures on the islands in the South Seas, but
+they never had any effect on me until about three years ago, I had a
+hand in furnishing the outfit for a vessel which departed on such a
+mission, that sailed some time in December or January, of that year."
+
+"Do you know the name of the vessel?" asked John.
+
+"Yes; the _Juan Ferde_. Why do you ask?"
+
+"I sailed in that vessel with Blakely, one of the owners."
+
+"Blakely? Blakely, did you say? Why he is the man who purchased all the
+provisions from me."
+
+"He is here on the island, and now has charge of all the business
+matters connected with our venture."
+
+"Well, that is remarkable, indeed; but I must proceed. Four months after
+the _Juan Ferde_ sailed, I came into contact with a peculiar character,
+who had been all over the southern part of the universe, and he finally
+interested me sufficiently to look over some peculiar documents which he
+had, bearing on the subject of the lost treasures, and from the
+information which he gave, it occurred to me that the location could not
+be far from the island where I was cast ashore.
+
+"With a good business, and entirely free from all family entanglements,
+I made up my mind that I would accompany him, and finance the
+undertaking. What induced me more than anything else, was the fact that
+the stories he told corresponded so nearly with the information which
+Blakely gave me, although the latter did not go into many details, that
+I looked on the venture in the nature of a lark. Besides I wanted to
+meet my old friends on the island, and possibly induce them to gather
+the products of the island for me.
+
+"We sailed about five months after the _Juan Ferde_ left, and had a
+quick run to the island where it was supposed I had been left years
+before. It seems that at the time I landed there the tribe was at war,
+and we had a terrible time to get away from the people, who, of course,
+did not remember me, even though the tribe was the same, but of this I
+had no absolute knowledge at the time.
+
+"Two months after reaching the island, we sailed to the south, in order
+to explore the second island, noted on the chart, and it was then that
+the returning monsoon, which usually blows in the opposite direction
+from the one of six months before, wrecked the vessel, and the next day
+one of my companions and myself, who were so far as I then knew, the
+only survivors, reached the southern shore of an island, where we saw
+high mountains, so unlike those in the island where I was shipwrecked
+years before."
+
+"While I think of it," remarked John, "how did you know about the second
+island, to which you refer?"
+
+"I learned this from Walter."
+
+"Then did you know anything about the skull on the headland, and the
+note which Walter left?"
+
+"I knew about the skull, but never heard of the note to which you refer.
+The discovery of the skull was an accident, and I attached no importance
+to it at the time. From the southern portion of the island we journeyed
+along the eastern coast, to the north, skirting a large forest on the
+way."
+
+The boys looked at each other, significantly, but he did not notice
+this.
+
+"Then we reached a large river, and to our surprise, found a boat,
+evidently of native manufacture, and with this floated down the stream
+to the sea."
+
+"But where did you get the rope that we found in the boat?" asked
+George, eagerly.
+
+He turned, and answered: "How did you know we put any rope on the boat?"
+
+"Because that was the boat we made, and we found it afterwards, with the
+strange rope and oars."
+
+"Strange oars. I know nothing about them. We used the oars found in the
+boat."
+
+"Did you get the boat near a large falls?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"And on the north side of the river?"
+
+"Yes; but after we reached the sea, it was too rough, and the wind was
+blowing too heavily from the north to make it safe to navigate in that
+direction, so we went south, probably ten miles, and drew ashore. The
+next morning when I awoke the boat and my companion were missing."
+
+"Who was your companion?"
+
+"Walter."
+
+John looked indignant, and expressed his opinion very forcibly, but
+Clifford held up his hand, restrainingly. "Do not be too harsh. I have
+no ill will toward him. I did not know what to do, nor which way to
+turn, but went to the west, and before night, came, unexpectedly, on the
+remains of a fire, which led me to believe that I would find friends in
+the inhabitants.
+
+"I went on and on, and caught up with the band, and was then horrified
+to find that they were having a feast, and sacrificing human beings. I
+saw Walter among the captives, but I could not contrive to let him know
+of my presence, and left the place as hurriedly as I could.
+
+"After a month of struggling I reached the southern part of the island,
+and there, to my joy, found three of my companions on a life boat,
+belonging to a vessel called the _Investigator_, and together we made a
+course southeast, and there found the location of the second skull."
+
+"But you knew nothing of that at the time, did you?"
+
+"I did not know what the marks on the skull were for, but the finding of
+the second one was sufficient to revive in me the hope that, after all,
+the treasure might be found. One of the men, who was the intimate of
+Walter, figured out the course to be taken, and we reached the island to
+the north the second day.
+
+"There, to our surprise, we found Walter, and he charged one of the men
+with me, with trying to secure the treasure, but I finally patched up
+the matter, and we agreed to work in concert. Then, when the next day,
+we found that Walter had lost the chart, we felt that it was a trick on
+his part to deceive us, and we separated. At that time I did not believe
+he told us the truth.
+
+"Two days afterwards we passed a party of natives, who were not aware of
+our presence, and then we saw that Walter, and the man with him, had
+been captured, and later believed that they had been killed. We searched
+the island, to find the cave, but were unsuccessful and thinking that an
+error might have been made, we concluded to sail for the island to the
+south.
+
+"We found a tribe of natives when we landed, and owing to the exposure
+and the trials we had gone through I was taken ill, and grew worse and
+worse, and from that time on to the time I recovered two days ago, I had
+not the slightest idea of what passed."
+
+"When I spoke against Walter a few moments ago," said John, "you said he
+was not to blame. What did you mean by that?"
+
+"During my wanderings, I found parts of the chart, which, I assumed, had
+been lost by John, and, probably, destroyed by the natives. The part I
+recovered was of no value to me, but it entirely changed my opinion of
+Walter."
+
+But Clifford's story left something to be told. It did not explain why
+Walter tried to avoid meeting Clifford; or why he was so startled upon
+seeing the two skulls, or the reason for avoiding the reference to the
+letter to which his name was signed.
+
+The boys were so intensely interested in his story that they did not
+notice the entrance of Blakely, who had brought Walter back, but when
+Clifford saw Blakely there was immediate recognition.
+
+Clifford held out his hand to Walter, as he said: "I did wrong in
+doubting you. I understand from the statement made by Ta Babeda, that
+they found the chart the next day, after we met them, and that, of
+course, clears you."
+
+"But I would like to know," said Harry, "what the other part of the
+inscription on the skulls means?"
+
+"Do you refer to the sign of plus and the V?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"When you went into the cave, where you found the copper box, how many
+chambers did you pass before coming to the large room?"
+
+"I am not sure," he answered, "but I think four."
+
+"Yes; and the case was found in the fifth chamber. The Plus sign
+indicated the cross-shaped cave, did it not?"
+
+"Yes, and there are several other things which interest me," remarked
+George, gazing at John, as he continued: "Why should the inscriptions
+have been marked on the skulls?"
+
+John slowly shook his head, as he looked at Clifford. The latter gazed
+vacantly into space, as though reflecting, and finally said: "I do not
+know."
+
+It will be remembered that when Walter entered the Professor's room,
+where Clifford was lying, he appeared to be startled at the sight of
+the skulls. The copper box which held one of them was in the adjoining
+room.
+
+During the foregoing conversation Walter was mute, nor did he appear
+interested in the question propounded by George.
+
+"It seems most curious to me that the skull taken from the copper box
+has the inscription on the right side, whereas the other one has them on
+the left side," observed Harry.
+
+John and George saw the immediate change in Walter's face while Harry
+was speaking. His agitation was now plain to all, and the perspiration
+began to appear on his forehead.
+
+John leaned forward as he said: "Do you know?"
+
+Walter started at the vehemence of the question, and threw back his
+head, as he answered: "Did you find the copper box?"
+
+"Yes," responded John, with a look of triumph.
+
+Walter's features relaxed, and he seemed to sink down, as he gazed about
+him with a final look of despair.
+
+"Then the quest is ended!" he muttered.
+
+"What do you mean? Explain!" demanded John.
+
+"When I began the search for the treasure of the caves, I was the owner
+of the original document written by Juan Guiterez before he died in the
+Spanish prison. Three attempts had been made to find the island, which
+contained the secret, and that secret was in the copper box which told
+of the places and the locations of the other caves. In each case the
+quest failed, and all perished. The peculiar significance arises from
+the fact that the only directions were given on a human skull by
+Guiterez himself, who declared that two of the skulls would have the
+inscriptions on the left side, while the one with the cryptic signs on
+the right side would be accompanied by the descriptions of the locations
+of all the Caves on the different islands."
+
+"But why should there be three skulls?" asked George, in great
+eagerness.
+
+"There were three attempts, each resulting in death. The skull is
+emblematic of death."
+
+"Will you tell us why you tried to avoid Clifford, and were startled at
+the sight of the skulls?" asked John.
+
+"If, as you say, you have found the copper box, I have no further reason
+to remain silent. I found one of the skulls,--the others I could not
+find, one of which I knew must be in the treasure cave. If I had known
+you found the one in the cave I should not have tried to get away, as I
+hoped, finally, to find the cave. Since coming here I learned that you
+had found the third island; I knew of only two, and supposed that the
+two skulls were from those two, namely, Wonder and Venture Islands."
+
+"But who placed the skulls there?" queried Harry.
+
+"Ah! No one knows that. The Spaniard Guiterez offers no explanation. All
+the so-called _treasure charts_ have been made from the accounts which
+he gave, of the vast amount of gold and silver which is hidden in these
+natural caches. The place where the copper box was deposited is the
+grand mausoleum. Only those who know the secret could ever reach the
+vault. All others would perish."
+
+"The carbonic gas!" exclaimed George.
+
+Walter turned to George, as he said this, but did not comprehend what he
+meant. It was now evident that Walter had tried to conceal his identity,
+and thereby hide the secret which would enable him alone to find the
+vast wealth.
+
+"So the letter which we found concealed in the seat of our boat, was
+written by one of your companions?" asked Harry.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"This clears up the mysterious things which we have tried to fathom for
+over two years," said John. "The meaning of the letters is now clear."
+
+"From the time we landed on the island," rejoined the Professor, "we
+found evidences of white people that we could not follow up, and it is
+now plain that they were in search for the treasure, so we can now
+comprehend what the notes meant."
+
+There is but little more to add to the chapter pertaining to the
+experiences of the boys on the islands. Perhaps, at some time in the
+future, their work on the new islands will be told. What John and the
+boys found in the Copper box, the historical sketches and the locations
+of the treasure islands which were pointed out on the parchments found
+in the compartment below the skull, were amazing revelations of the days
+of piratical adventures, when the southern half of the world was one
+vast carnival of crime, in which gold was the only booty and to obtain
+which the means were always considered to be justified by the end.
+
+Our young friends, during their experiences in southern waters, did
+their part in bringing to the uneducated savages the blessings of
+civilization and the great boon of peace. To themselves they brought a
+store of hard-earned knowledge and a memory of things well done that
+will last them to the end of their days.
+
+THE END
+
+      *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS
+
+By ELBERT FISHER
+
+_12mo, Cloth.     Many Illustrations.     60c. per Volume_
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who
+make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet
+with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their
+adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter
+relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries
+through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of
+boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The
+books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each
+chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the
+author, and four striking halftones.
+
+1. FROM NEW YORK TO THE GOLDEN GATE, takes in many of the principal
+points between New York and California, and contains a highly
+entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a
+little useful information.
+
+2. FROM SAN FRANCISCO TO JAPAN, relates the experiences of the two boys
+at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to Hawaii,
+Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent at sea, and
+a large amount of interesting information appears throughout the text.
+
+3. FROM TOKIO TO BOMBAY. This book covers their interesting experiences
+in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong and
+finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a field
+seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the great
+Hyderabad region of South India.
+
+4. FROM INDIA TO THE WAR ZONE, describes their trip toward the Persian
+Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the supposed site
+of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves with a caravan
+through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing the Holy Land, where
+they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean port of Joppa,
+and their experiences thereafter within the war zone are fully
+described.
+
+
+
+
+THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
+
+BY J. S. ZERBE
+
+CARPENTRY FOR BOYS
+
+
+A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all
+subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of
+tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles
+involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the
+rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty
+illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a
+complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most
+comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS
+
+The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
+principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the
+work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been
+developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using
+technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It
+has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred
+original drawings.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS
+
+This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical
+shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of
+shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work,
+and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every
+subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a
+glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature
+that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully
+illustrated.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_12mo, cloth.     Price 60 cents per volume_
+
+
+
+
+The Ethel Morton Books
+
+By MABELL S. C. SMITH
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+This series strikes a new note in the publication of books for girls.
+Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing experiences of our
+young friends are combined with a fund of information relating their
+accomplishment of things every girl wishes to know.
+
+In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with many of the
+entertaining features of handcraft, elements of cooking, also of
+swimming, boating and similar pastimes. This information is so imparted
+as to hold the interest throughout. Many of the subjects treated are
+illustrated by halftones and line engravings throughout the text.
+
+LIST OF TITLES
+
+  ETHEL MORTON AT CHAUTAUQUA
+  ETHEL MORTON AND THE CHRISTMAS SHIP
+  ETHEL MORTON'S HOLIDAYS
+  ETHEL MORTON AT ROSE HOUSE
+  ETHEL MORTON'S ENTERPRISE
+  ETHEL MORTON AT SWEET BRIER LODGE
+
+_Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid_
+
+
+
+
+The Mountain Boys Series
+
+
+1. PHIL BRADLEY'S MOUNTAIN BOYS
+
+2. PHIL BRADLEY AT THE WHEEL
+
+3. PHIL BRADLEY'S SHOOTING BOX
+
+4. PHIL BRADLEY'S SNOW-SHOE TRAIL
+
+These books describe with interesting detail the experiences of a party
+of boys among the mountain pines.
+
+They teach the young reader how to protect himself against the elements,
+what to do and what to avoid, and above all to become self-reliant and
+manly.
+
+
+_12mo. * * * Cloth._
+
+_40 cents per volume; postpaid_
+
+
+
+
+THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUTS
+
+A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS
+
+By Capt. Alain Douglas, Scout-master
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE CAMPFIRES OF THE WOLF PATROL
+
+Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities
+to use their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer
+Chenoweth, a lad from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his
+familiarity with camp life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should
+read.
+
+WOODCRAFT; OR, HOW A PATROL LEADER MADE GOOD
+
+This tale presents many stirring situations in which the boys are called
+upon to exercise ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with
+healthful excitement.
+
+PATHFINDER; OR, THE MISSING TENDERFOOT
+
+Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the
+credit of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one
+after the other.
+
+FAST NINE; OR, A CHALLENGE FROM FAIRFIELD
+
+They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of
+the final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof,
+form a stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent
+years.
+
+GREAT HIKE; OR, THE PRIDE OF THE KHAKI TROOP
+
+After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest
+undertaking. Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured
+rivalry of the different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing
+situations.
+
+ENDURANCE TEST; OR, HOW CLEAR GRIT WON THE DAY
+
+Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of
+apparent failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and
+surprise their most ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain
+Douglas has written.
+
+UNDER CANVAS; OR, THE HUNT FOR THE CARTARET GHOST
+
+It was hard to disbelieve the evidence of their eyes but the boys by the
+exercise of common-sense solved a mystery which had long puzzled older
+heads.
+
+STORM-BOUND; OR, A VACATION AMONG THE SNOW DRIFTS
+
+The boys start out on the wrong track, but their scout training comes to
+the rescue and their experience proves beneficial to all concerned.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+BOY SCOUT NATURE LORE TO BE FOUND IN THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUT SERIES,
+ALL ILLUSTRATED:--
+
+Wild Animals of the United States--Tracking--Trees and Wild Flowers of
+the United States--Reptiles of the United States--Fishes of the United
+States--Insects of the United States and Birds of the United States.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Cloth Binding     Cover Illustrations in Four Colors     40c. Per Volume_
+
+
+
+
+The Campfire and Trail Series
+
+
+1. IN CAMP ON THE BIG SUNFLOWER.
+
+2. THE RIVALS OF THE TRAIL.
+
+3. THE STRANGE CABIN ON CATAMOUNT ISLAND.
+
+4. LOST IN THE GREAT DISMAL SWAMP.
+
+5. WITH TRAPPER JIM IN THE NORTH WOODS.
+
+6. CAUGHT IN A FOREST FIRE.
+
+7. CHUMS OF THE CAMPFIRE.
+
+8. AFLOAT ON THE FLOOD.
+
+By LAWRENCE J. LESLIE.
+
+A series of wholesome stories for boys told in an interesting way and
+appealing to their love of the open.
+
+_Each, 12mo.     Cloth.     40 cents per volume_
+
+
+
+
+Christy Mathewson's Book
+
+[Illustration: "WON IN THE NINTH"]
+
+_A Ripping Good Baseball Story by One Who Knows the Game_
+
+This book has attained a larger sale than any baseball story ever
+published.
+
+The narrative deals with the students of a large university and their
+baseball team, the members of which have names which enable the reader
+to recognize them as some of the foremost baseball stars of the day
+before their entrance into the major leagues.
+
+One gains a very clear idea of "inside baseball" stripped of wearisome
+technicalities. The book is profusely illustrated throughout and
+contains also a number of plates showing the manner in which Mathewson
+throws his deceptive curves, together with brief description of each.
+
+_Cloth bound 5-1/2 x 7-5/8      Price 60c. per volume_
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+Mrs. Meade's Books for Girls
+
+Primrose Edition
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Printed on fine quality book paper. Separate cover designs in colors.
+
+Daddy's Girl.
+A Girl from America.
+Sue, a Little Heroine.
+The School Queens.
+Wild Kitty.
+A Sweet Girl Graduate.
+A World of Girls.
+Polly--A New-Fashioned Girl.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Each, 12mo.    Cloth.     40 cents per volume_
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Mrs. Meade's girls' books never lose their popularity.
+
+
+
+
+ECONOMICAL COOKING
+
+_Primrose Edition_
+
+_Planned for Two or More Persons_
+
+By
+
+MISS WINIFRED S. GIBBS
+
+Dietitian and Teacher of Cooking of the New York Association for
+Improving the Condition of the Poor
+
+_Printed on Fine Quality Book Paper. Cover Design in Colors_
+
+Many Cook Books have been published, from time to time, to meet various
+requirements, or to elucidate certain theories, but very few have been
+written to meet the needs of the large proportion of our population who
+are acutely affected by the constantly increasing cost of food products.
+Notwithstanding that by its valuable suggestions this book helps to
+reduce the expense of supplying the table, the recipes are so planned
+that the economies effected thereby are not offset by any lessening in
+the attractiveness, variety or palatability of the dishes.
+
+Of equal importance are the sections of this work which deal with food
+values, the treatment of infants and invalids and the proper service of
+various dishes.
+
+The recipes are planned for two persons, but may readily be adapted for
+a larger number. The book is replete with illustrations and tables of
+food compositions--the latter taken from the latest Government
+statistics.
+
+_Cloth Binding Illustrated 40c. per volume, postpaid_
+
+
+
+
+CUT-OUT AND PAINT BOOKS
+
+[Illustration]
+
+An original line of art studies printed in full rich colors on high
+grade paper. This series introduces many novel features of interest, and
+as the subject matters have been selected with unusual care, the books
+make a strong appeal not only to the little ones but even to those of
+riper years.
+
+POST CARDS              _Painting Book_
+
+DOLLS OF ALL NATIONS    _Scissors Book_
+
+OUR ARMY                _Scissors Book_
+
+CHILDREN'S PETS         _Puzzle Book_
+
+
+_Size 8-1/4 x 10-1/4 inches_
+
+PRICE 15C. PER COPY
+
+
+  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE    NEW YORK
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES OF
+THE ISLAND***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 21810.txt or 21810.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/21810.zip b/21810.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82767d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21810.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ec7d0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #21810 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/21810)